As filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission on November 14, 2008

File No. 001-10994

 

 

UNITED STATES

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

WASHINGTON, DC 20549

AMENDMENT NO. 2

TO

FORM 10

GENERAL FORM FOR REGISTRATION OF SECURITIES

Pursuant to Section 12(b) or (g) of The Securities Exchange Act of 1934

Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. *

(Exact Name of Registrant as Specified in its Charter)

 

Delaware

(State or Other Jurisdiction of

Incorporation or Organization)

 

95-4191764

(IRS Employer

Identification No.)

 

 

56 Prospect Street

Hartford, CT 06102

(860) 403-7100

(Address, Including Zip Code, and Telephone Number, Including

Area Code, of Registrant’s Principal Executive Offices)

 

 

With copies to:

 

Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.

56 Prospect Street

Hartford, CT 06102

(860) 403-7100

 

Gary I. Horowitz, Esq.

Simpson Thacher & Bartlett LLP

425 Lexington Avenue

New York, New York 10017

(212) 455-2000

 

 

Securities to be registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:

 

Title of each Class to be so Registered

 

Name of Each Exchange on Which

Each Class is to be Registered

Common stock, par value $.01 per share

Preferred Share Purchase Rights

 

Securities registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act: None

 

 

 

*The registrant was formerly named Phoenix Investment Partners, Ltd.


INFORMATION INCLUDED IN INFORMATION STATEMENT

AND INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE IN FORM 10

CROSS-REFERENCE SHEET BETWEEN INFORMATION STATEMENT AND ITEMS OF FORM 10

This registration statement on Form 10 (the “Form 10”) incorporates by reference information contained in the information statement filed as Exhibit 99.1 hereto (the “information statement”). The cross-reference table below identifies where the items required by Form 10 can be found in the information statement.

 

Item No.

  

Item Caption

  

Location in Information Statement

1.    Business    “Summary;” “Risk Factors” and “Business”
2.    Financial Information    “Summary—Summary Consolidated Financial Data;” “Capitalization;” “Unaudited Pro Forma Consolidated Financial Data;” “Selected Consolidated Financial Data” and “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operation”
3.    Properties    “Business—Our Properties and Facilities”
4.    Security Ownership of Certain Beneficial Owners and Management    “Security Ownership by Certain Beneficial Owners and Management”
5.    Directors and Executive Officers    “Management”
6.    Executive Compensation    “Compensation of Executive Officers”
7.    Certain Relationships and Related Transactions    “Our Relationship With PNX After the Spin-Off”
8.    Legal Proceedings    “Business—Our Legal Proceedings”
9.    Market Price of and Dividends on the Registrant’s Common Equity and Related Stockholder Matters    “Summary;” “Risk Factors;” “The Spin-Off;” “Capitalization;” “Dividend Policy” and “Description of Our Capital Stock”
10.    Recent Sale of Unregistered Securities    None
11.    Description of Registrant’s Securities to be Registered    “Description of Our Capital Stock”
12.    Indemnification of Directors and Officers    “Indemnification and Limitation of Liability of Directors and Officers” and “Our Relationship With PNX After the Spin-Off”
13.    Financial Statements and Supplementary Data    “Summary—Summary Consolidated Financial Data;” “Unaudited Pro Forma Consolidated Financial Data;” “Selected Consolidated Financial Data;” “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and “Index to Consolidated Financial Statements” including the Consolidated Financial Statements
14.    Changes in and Disagreements with Accountants on Accounting and Financial Disclosure    None

 

1


ITEM 15. Financial Statements and Exhibits

 

(a) List of Financial Statements

The following financial statements are included in the information statement and filed as part of this registration statement on Form 10:

(1) Unaudited Pro Forma Consolidated Financial Data of Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. as of and for the nine months ended September 30, 2008 and for the year ended December 31, 2007;

(2) Consolidated Financial Statements for Virtus Investment Partners, Inc., as of December 31, 2007 and 2006 and for the years ended December 31, 2007, 2006 and 2005, including the Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm; and

(3) Unaudited Consolidated Financial Statements for Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. as of September 30, 2008 and December 31, 2007 and for the nine months ended September 30, 2008 and 2007.

 

(b) Exhibits. The following documents are filed as exhibits hereto:

 

Exhibit
Number

  

Exhibit Description

2.1*    Form of Separation and Distribution Agreement between The Phoenix Companies, Inc. and Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.
3.1*    Form of Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation of Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.
3.2*    Form of Amended and Restated Bylaws of Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.
4.1*    Specimen common stock certificate of Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.
4.2    Certificate of Designations of Series A Non-Voting Convertible Preferred Stock and Series B Voting Convertible Preferred Stock of Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. (f/k/a Virtus Holdings, Inc.)
4.3*    Rights Agreement between Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. and             , as rights agent
10.1*    Form of Transition Services Agreement between Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. and The Phoenix Companies, Inc.
10.2*    Form of Tax Separation Agreement between Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. and The Phoenix Companies, Inc.
10.3*    Form of Employee Matters Agreement between Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. and The Phoenix Companies, Inc.
10.4*    Change in Control Agreement between George R. Aylward, Jr. and Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.
10.5    Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. Omnibus Incentive and Equity Plan
10.6    Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. Excess Investment Plan
10.7    Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. Executive Severance Allowance Plan
10.8    Investment and Contribution Agreement, dated October 30, 2008, by and among Phoenix Investment Management Company, Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. (f/k/a Virtus Holdings, Inc.), Harris Bankcorp, Inc. and The Phoenix Companies, Inc.
21.1    List of Subsidiaries of Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.
99.1    Information Statement of Virtus Investment Partners, Inc., subject to completion, dated November 14, 2008

 

  * To be filed by amendment

 

2


SIGNATURE

Pursuant to the requirements of Section 12 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the registrant has duly caused this registration statement to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized.

 

VIRTUS INVESTMENT PARTNERS, INC.
By:   /s/ George R. Aylward, Jr.        

Name: George R. Aylward, Jr.

Title:   President

Dated: November 14, 2008

 

3


EXHIBIT INDEX

 

Exhibit
Number

  

Exhibit Description

2.1*    Form of Separation and Distribution Agreement between The Phoenix Companies, Inc. and Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.
3.1*    Form of Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation of Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.
3.2*    Form of Amended and Restated Bylaws of Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.
4.1*    Specimen common stock certificate of Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.
4.2    Certificate of Designations of Series A Non-Voting Convertible Preferred Stock and Series B Voting Convertible Preferred Stock of Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. (f/k/a Virtus Holdings, Inc.)
4.3*    Rights Agreement between Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. and             , as rights agent
10.1*    Form of Transition Services Agreement between Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. and The Phoenix Companies, Inc.
10.2*    Form of Tax Separation Agreement between Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. and The Phoenix Companies, Inc.
10.3*    Form of Employee Matters Agreement between Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. and The Phoenix Companies, Inc.
10.4*    Change in Control Agreement between George R. Aylward, Jr. and Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.
10.5    Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. Omnibus Incentive and Equity Plan
10.6    Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. Excess Investment Plan
10.7    Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. Executive Severance Allowance Plan
10.8    Investment and Contribution Agreement, dated October 30, 2008, by and among Phoenix Investment Management Company, Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. (f/k/a Virtus Holdings, Inc.), Harris Bankcorp, Inc. and The Phoenix Companies, Inc.
21.1    List of Subsidiaries of Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.
99.1    Information Statement of Virtus Investment Partners, Inc., subject to completion, dated November 14, 2008

 

* To be filed by amendment

Exhibit 4.2

CERTIFICATE OF DESIGNATIONS

OF

SERIES A NON-VOTING CONVERTIBLE PREFERRED STOCK AND

SERIES B VOTING CONVERTIBLE PREFERRED STOCK

OF

VIRTUS HOLDINGS, INC.

Pursuant to Section 151 of the

General Corporation Law of the State of Delaware

The undersigned DOES HEREBY CERTIFY that the following resolution was duly adopted by the Board of Directors (the “ Board ”) of Virtus Holdings, Inc., a Delaware corporation (hereinafter called the “ Corporation ”), with the designations, powers, preferences and relative, participating, optional or other special rights, and the qualifications, limitations or restrictions thereof, having been fixed by the Board pursuant to authority granted to it under Article 5 of the Corporation’s Certificate of Incorporation and in accordance with the provisions of Section 151 of the General Corporation Law of the State of Delaware:

RESOLVED: That, pursuant to authority conferred upon the Board by the Certificate of Incorporation of the Corporation, the Board hereby authorizes the issuance of 9,783 shares of Series A Non-Voting Convertible Preferred Stock, par value $0.01 per share, of the Corporation, and the issuance of 35,217 shares of Series B Voting Convertible Preferred Stock, par value $0.01 per share, of the Corporation, and hereby fixes the designations, powers, preferences and relative, participating, optional or other special rights, and the qualifications, limitations or restrictions thereof, of such shares, in addition to those set forth in the Certificate of Incorporation of the Corporation, as follows:

1. DESIGNATION . The shares of such series shall be designated (i) “Series A Non-Voting Convertible Preferred Stock” and the number of shares constituting such series shall be 9,783 (the “ Series A Preferred Stock ”) and (ii) “Series B Voting Convertible Preferred Stock” and the number of shares constituting such series shall be 35,217 (the “ Series B Preferred Stock ” and together with the Series A Preferred Stock, the “ Convertible Preferred Stock ”). The number of shares of Series A Preferred Stock and Series B Preferred Stock may be increased or decreased by resolution of the Board and (i) with respect to Series A Preferred Stock, the approval by the holders of a majority of the shares of the outstanding Series A Preferred Stock voting as a separate class and (ii) with respect to the Series B Preferred Stock, the approval by the holders of a majority of the shares of the outstanding Series B Preferred Stock voting as a separate class; provided ,   that no decrease shall reduce the number of shares of any series of Convertible Preferred Stock to a number less than the number of shares of such series then outstanding plus the number of shares reserved for issuance upon the payment of dividends pursuant to Section 4 hereof.


2. CURRENCY . All Convertible Preferred Stock shall be denominated in United States currency, and all payments and distributions thereon or with respect thereto shall be made in United States currency. All references herein to “$” or “dollars” refer to United States currency.

3. RANKING . The Convertible Preferred Stock shall, with respect to dividend rights and rights upon liquidation, winding up or dissolution, rank prior to each other class or series of shares of the Corporation that the Corporation may issue in the future the terms of which do not expressly provide that such class or series ranks equally with, or senior to, the Convertible Preferred Stock, with respect to dividend rights and/or rights upon liquidation, winding up or dissolution, including, without limitation, the common stock of the Corporation, par value $0.01 per share (the “ Common Stock ”) (such junior stock being referred to hereinafter collectively as “ Junior Stock ”).

The Convertible Preferred Stock shall, with respect to dividend rights and rights upon liquidation, winding up or dissolution, rank equally with each other class or series of shares of the Corporation that the Corporation may issue in the future the terms of which expressly provide that such class or series shall rank equally with the Convertible Preferred Stock with respect to dividend rights and rights upon liquidation, winding up or dissolution.

The Convertible Preferred Stock shall, with respect to dividend rights and rights upon liquidation, winding up or dissolution, rank junior to each other class or series of shares of the Corporation that the Corporation may issue in the future the terms of which expressly provide that such class or series shall rank senior to the Convertible Preferred Stock with respect to dividend rights and rights upon liquidation, winding up or dissolution. The Convertible Preferred Stock shall also rank junior to the Corporation’s existing and future indebtedness and other liabilities.

With respect to dividend rights and rights upon liquidation, winding up or dissolution, the Series A Preferred Stock and the Series B Preferred Stock shall rank equally.

4. DIVIDENDS .

(a) The holders of Convertible Preferred Stock shall be entitled to receive, when, as and if declared by the Board of Directors, out of funds lawfully available therefor dividends per share of Convertible Preferred Stock of an amount equal to (i) 8.0% per annum of the Stated Value (as herein defined) of each share of such Convertible Preferred Stock then in effect, before any dividends shall be declared, set apart for or paid upon the Junior Stock (the “ Regular Dividends ”) and (ii) subject to Section 7(c) and 7(e)(iv), the aggregate amount of any dividends or other distributions, whether cash, in kind or other property, paid on outstanding shares of Common Stock on a per share basis based on the number of shares of Common Stock into which such share of Convertible Preferred Stock could be converted on the applicable record date for such dividends or other distributions, assuming such shares of Common Stock were outstanding on the applicable record date for such dividend or other distributions (the “ Participating Dividends ” and together with the Regular Dividends, the “ Dividends ”). For purposes hereof, the term “ Stated Value ” shall mean $1,000.00 per share of Convertible Preferred Stock.

 

-2-


(b) Regular Dividends shall be payable quarterly in arrears on March 15, June 15, September 15 and December 15 of each year (unless any such day is not a Business Day, in which event such Regular Dividends shall be payable on the next succeeding Business Day, without accrual to the actual payment date), commencing on December 15, 2008 (each such payment date being a “ Regular Dividend Payment Date ” and the period from the Step 1 Closing Date to the first Regular Dividend Payment Date and each such quarterly period thereafter being a “ Regular Dividend Period ”). The amount of Regular Dividends payable on the Convertible Preferred Stock for any full Regular Dividend Period shall be computed on the basis of a 360-day year consisting of twelve 30-day periods. The amount of Regular Dividends payable on the Convertible Preferred Stock for any period other than a full Regular Dividend Period shall be computed on the basis of the actual number of days elapsed during the period over a 360-day year. Participating Dividends shall be payable as and when paid to the holders of shares of Common Stock (“ Participating Dividend Payment Date , together with the Regular Dividend Payment Date, the “ Dividend Payment Date ”).

(c) Regular Dividends shall be cumulative, shall accumulate on each Regular Dividend Payment Date and shall continue to accumulate daily whether or not declared and whether or not in any Regular Dividend Period there shall be funds legally available for the payment of Regular Dividends in such Regular Dividend Period, so that if in any Regular Dividend Period, Regular Dividends in whole or in part are not paid upon the Convertible Preferred Stock, unpaid Regular Dividends shall accumulate. Participating Dividends are payable on a cumulative basis once declared, whether or not there shall be funds legally available for the payment thereon.

(d) Except as otherwise provided herein, if at any time the Corporation pays less than the total amount of Dividends then accumulated with respect to the Convertible Preferred Stock, such payment shall be distributed pro rata among the holders thereof based upon the Stated Value on all shares of Convertible Preferred Stock held by each such holder. When Dividends are not paid in full upon the shares of Convertible Preferred Stock, all Dividends declared on Convertible Preferred Stock and any other Parity Securities shall be paid pro rata so that the amount of Dividends so declared on the shares of Convertible Preferred Stock and each such other class or series of Parity Securities shall in all cases bear to each other the same ratio as accumulated Dividends (for the full amount of dividends that would be payable for the most recently payable dividend period if dividends were declared in full on non-cumulative Parity Securities) on the series of Convertible Preferred Stock and such other class or series of Parity Securities bear to each other.

(e) Regular Dividends shall be paid out of lawfully available funds either in shares of Convertible Preferred Stock or in cash or through any combination of cash and shares of Convertible Preferred Stock at the option of the Corporation in its sole discretion; provided that the Corporation shall not be entitled to pay Regular Dividends on shares of Series B Preferred Stock in shares of Series A Preferred Stock. Each payment of a Regular Dividend shall be made in cash, except to the extent the Corporation elects to make any or all portion of such payment in Convertible Preferred Stock. The Corporation may make such election by giving notice to holders thereof of such election and the portions of such payment that shall be made in cash and in Convertible Preferred Stock no later than ten Trading Days prior to the Regular Dividend Payment Date for such dividend. In the event of a Regular Dividend payable

 

-3-


in shares of Convertible Preferred Stock, the number of shares of Convertible Preferred Stock to be issued in payment of such Regular Dividend with respect to each outstanding share of Convertible Preferred Stock shall be determined by dividing (i) the amount of the Regular Dividend that would have been payable with respect to such share of Convertible Preferred Stock had such Regular Dividend been paid in cash by (ii) the Stated Value per share of Convertible Preferred Stock. To the extent that any Dividend would result in the issuance of a fractional share of Convertible Preferred Stock, then the amount of such fraction multiplied by the Stated Value shall be paid in cash (unless there are no legally available funds with which to make such cash payment, in which event such cash payment shall be made as soon as possible thereafter). Any shares of Convertible Preferred Stock to be issued to holders of Convertible Preferred Stock in full or partial payment of Regular Dividends shall be issued or deemed issued on the Regular Dividend Payment Date for the relevant Regular Dividends and shall accumulate Regular Dividends from the date of issue.

(f) The Corporation shall not declare or pay any dividends on shares of Common Stock unless the holders of the Convertible Preferred Stock then outstanding shall simultaneously receive Participating Dividends on a pro rata basis as if the shares of Convertible Preferred Stock had been converted into shares of Common Stock pursuant to Section 7 immediately prior to the record date for determining the stockholders eligible to receive such dividends.

(g) Each Dividend shall be payable to the holders of record of shares of Convertible Preferred Stock as they appear on the stock records of the Corporation at the close of business on such record dates (each, a “ Dividend Payment Record Date ”), which (i) with respect to Participating Dividends, shall be the same day as the record date for the payment of dividends or distributions to the holders of shares of Common Stock, and (ii) with respect to Regular Dividends, shall be not more than 30 days nor less than 10 days preceding the applicable Regular Dividend Payment Date.

(h) From and after the time, if any, that the Corporation shall have failed to pay all accumulated and unpaid Regular Dividends for all prior Regular Dividend Periods and/or declared and unpaid Participating Dividends in accordance with this Section 4, no dividends shall be declared or paid or set apart for payment, or other distribution declared or made, upon any Junior Stock, nor shall any Junior Stock be redeemed, purchased or otherwise acquired for any consideration (nor shall any moneys be paid to or made available for a sinking fund for the redemption of any shares of any such Junior Stock) by the Corporation, directly or indirectly until all such Regular Dividends and/or Participating Dividends have been paid in full; provided , however , that the foregoing limitation shall not apply to:

(i) purchases, redemptions or other acquisitions of shares of Junior Stock or Parity Securities in connection with (1) any employment contract, benefit plan or other similar arrangement with or for the benefit of any one or more employees, officers, directors or consultants or (2) a dividend reinvestment or stockholder stock purchase plan or any other contractually binding requirement to buy stock existing prior to the commencement of the then-current Regular Dividend Period;

 

-4-


(ii) an exchange, redemption, reclassification or conversion of any class or series of Junior Stock or Parity Securities, or any junior stock of a Subsidiary of the Corporation, for any class or series of Junior Stock or Parity Securities;

(iii) the purchase of fractional interests in shares of Junior Stock or Parity Securities under the conversion or exchange provisions of Junior Stock, Parity Securities or the security being converted or exchanged or in connection with any combination or reclassification of Junior Stock or Parity Securities;

(iv) any declaration of a dividend in connection with any stockholders’ rights plan, or the issuance of rights, stock or other property under any stockholders’ rights plan, or the redemption or repurchase of rights pursuant to the plan; or

(v) any dividend in the form of stock, warrants, options or other rights where the dividend stock or the stock issuable upon exercise of such warrants, options or other rights is the same stock as that on which the dividend is being paid or ranks equal or junior to that stock.

(i) The Corporation shall at all times reserve and keep available, free from any preemptive rights, out of its authorized but unissued shares of Convertible Preferred Stock, the full number of shares of Convertible Preferred Stock required for the purpose of paying all Regular Dividends that may be or become payable in kind.

5. LIQUIDATION, DISSOLUTION OR WINDING UP .

(a) Upon any voluntary or involuntary liquidation, dissolution or winding up of the Corporation (each, a “ Liquidation ”), after satisfaction of all liabilities and obligations to creditors of the Corporation and before any distribution or payment shall be made to holders of any Junior Stock, each holder of Convertible Preferred Stock shall be entitled to receive, out of the assets of the Corporation or proceeds thereof (whether capital or surplus) legally available therefor, an amount per share of Convertible Preferred Stock equal to the greater of:

(i) the Stated Value per share, plus an amount equal to any Dividends accumulated but unpaid thereon (whether or not declared) through the date of Liquidation; and

(ii) the payment such holders would have received had such holders, immediately prior to such Liquidation (a) converted their shares of Convertible Preferred Stock into shares of Common Stock (at the then applicable Conversion Rate) immediately prior to such Liquidation and (b) received all declared accumulated but unpaid Dividends through the date of Liquidation in shares of Common Stock immediately prior to such Liquidation (the greater of (i) and (ii) is referred to herein as the “ Liquidation Preference ”). Holders of Convertible Preferred Stock will not be entitled to any other amounts from the Corporation after they have received the full amounts provided for in this Section 5(a) and will have no right or claim to any of the Corporation’s remaining assets.

 

-5-


(b) If in connection with any distribution described in Section 5(a) above the assets of the Corporation or proceeds thereof are not sufficient to pay in full the Liquidation Preference payable on the Convertible Preferred Stock and the corresponding amounts payable on the Parity Securities, such assets, or the proceeds thereof, shall be paid pro rata in accordance with the full respective amounts which would be payable on such shares if all amounts payable thereon were paid in full.

(c) For purposes of this Section 5, the merger or consolidation of the Corporation with or into any other corporation or other entity, or the sale, conveyance, lease or other disposition of all or substantially all of the assets of the Corporation, shall not constitute a liquidation, dissolution or winding up of the Corporation.

6. VOTING RIGHTS .

(a) Except as provided by law, the holders of shares of Series A Preferred Stock shall have (i) no voting rights other than as set forth in Section 1 and Section 6(d) and (ii) be entitled to notice of all stockholders’ meetings (or pursuant to any action by written consent) in accordance with the Restated Certificate of Incorporation and Bylaws of the Corporation as if the holders of Series A Preferred Stock were holders of Common Stock. In the event of a vote of holders of Series A Preferred Stock, such holders shall be entitled to vote a number of votes equal to the number of shares of Common Stock into which each such share of Series A Preferred Stock is then convertible at the time of the related record date.

(b) The holders of the shares of Series B Preferred Stock shall be entitled to (i) vote with the holders of the Common Stock on all matters submitted for a vote of holders of Common Stock other than the election of directors (as to which the holders of Series B Preferred Stock shall have rights voting separately as a class as set out in Sections 6(b)-(d)), (ii) a number of votes equal to the number of shares of Common Stock into which each such share of Series B Preferred Stock is then convertible at the time of the related record date and (iii) notice of all stockholders’ meetings (or pursuant to any action by written consent) in accordance with the Corporation’s Certificate of Incorporation and Bylaws as if the holders of Series B Preferred Stock were holders of Common Stock. Except as provided by law, by the provisions of Sections 6(b)-(d), holders of Series B Preferred Stock shall vote together with the holders of Common Stock as a single class.

(c) For as long as at least 66 2/3% of the aggregate shares of Series B Preferred Stock issued on the Step 2 Closing Date remain outstanding: (i) the holders of a majority of the then outstanding shares of Series B Preferred Stock shall have the exclusive right, voting separately as a class, to appoint and elect one director (herein referred to as the “ Series B Director ”) to the Board, which Series B Director shall be duly appointed in accordance with the Corporation’s Bylaws and Certificate of Incorporation and the General Corporation Law of the State of Delaware; (ii) the Series B Director so elected shall serve until his or her successor is elected and qualified or his or her earlier resignation or removal; (iii) any vacancy in the position of the Series B Director may be filled only by the holders of a majority of the then outstanding shares of Series B Preferred Stock and not by the holders of any other class or series of capital stock; and (iv) the Series B Director may, during his or her term of office, be removed at any time, with or without cause, by and only by the holders of a majority of the then outstanding

 

-6-


shares of Series B Preferred Stock, at a special meeting called for such purpose or by written consent of such holders, and any vacancy created by such removal may also be filled by such holders at such meeting or by such consent.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, at such time as less than 66 2/3% of the aggregate shares of Series B Preferred Stock remains outstanding, then, automatically and immediately, without any further action on the part of the Corporation or the Board, the Series B Director shall be removed from the Board and the number of directors constituting the Board shall be automatically decreased by one, and thereafter, the holders of the Series B Preferred Stock shall not be entitled to nominate the Series B Director or any substitute nominee under this Section 6. The Corporation and the Board shall take any and all actions within their respective power to ensure compliance with the terms of this Section 6.

(d) The Corporation shall not and shall not permit any direct or indirect subsidiary of the Corporation to, without first obtaining the written consent or affirmative vote at a meeting called for that purpose by holders of at least 66 2/3% of the then outstanding shares of Series A Preferred Stock or Series B Preferred Stock, as applicable:

(i) amend, alter or modify any of the rights, preferences, privileges or powers of, or the restrictions provided for the benefit of, the holders of equity securities of the Corporation so as to affect the holders of such series of Convertible Preferred Stock adversely;

(ii) amend, alter or repeal any provision of the Corporation’s Bylaws or Certificate of Incorporation in a manner that is adverse to the holders of the Convertible Preferred Stock; provided that, subject to the other provisions of this Section 6(c), the creation, authorization or issuance of any Junior Stock or Parity Securities shall not by itself be deemed to have any such adverse effect; or

(iii) create, authorize or issue any Senior Securities or Parity Securities.

(e) In addition to the rights provided in Section 6(d), so long as at least 66 2/3% of the aggregate shares of Series B Preferred Stock issued on the Step 2 Closing Date remain outstanding, the Corporation shall not and shall not permit any direct or indirect subsidiary of the Corporation to, without first obtaining the written consent or affirmative vote at a meeting called for that purpose by holders of at least 66 2/3% of the then outstanding shares of Series B Preferred Stock:

(i) during the three years following the Step 2 Closing Date, consolidate with, convert into, or merge with and into, acquire or enter into any other business combination with any other entity or sell, assign, transfer, lease or convey all or substantially all of the properties and assets of the Corporation (including within the “Corporation,” for this purpose, its subsidiaries) to any person or entity, or any similar transaction or pledge of assets (other than any bona fide financing arrangement entered in the ordinary course of business and which is on prevailing market terms and conditions) in which securities of the Corporation or assets representing more than 50% of the Corporation’s consolidated net revenue in the fiscal year most recently ended would be acquired or pledged, directly

 

-7-


or indirectly, by or to a person or Group that does not control the Corporation immediately prior to the execution or consummation of any agreement in respect of such transaction;

(ii) issue any shares of capital stock of the Corporation (including preferred stock, options, warrants or rights to acquire, or securities convertible into or exchangeable for, shares of capital stock), except (A) issuances to holders of shares of Convertible Preferred Stock pursuant to the Investment Agreement and this Certificate, (B) issuances to employees or directors of the Corporation pursuant to any employee or director incentive or benefit plans or arrangements of the Corporation, (C) issuances that constitute consideration for mergers, consolidations, acquisitions or business combinations by the Corporation (without limiting the applicability of any approval that may be required under Section 6(d)(i)) and (D) issuances of capital stock at a net price per share to the Corporation not less than the then Current Market Price per share for the Common Stock at the time of issuance in any transaction in which no person or Group acquires 25% or more of the Common Stock Outstanding;

(iii) (A) institute (or permit any of its subsidiaries to institute) a voluntary case or proceeding in respect of the Corporation or any of its subsidiaries under the federal bankruptcy code or any other similar federal, state or foreign law or any other case or proceeding to be adjudicated bankrupt or insolvent or (B) adopt a plan or agreement of complete or partial liquidation or dissolution, or otherwise voluntarily liquidate, dissolve or wind-up the Corporation;

(iv) purchase, redeem or otherwise acquire or retire for value any shares of Common Stock or other Junior Stock (other than payments to purchase Junior Stock from employees or directors of the Corporation pursuant to any employee or director incentive or benefit plans or arrangements of the Corporation), or pay to or make available for a sinking fund for the purchase, redemption or acquisition of any shares of Common Stock or other Junior Stock;

(v) make any changes to the number of directors comprising the entire Board (except as may be required by the Investment Agreement); and

(vi) except as agreed to by Harris, use the name “Harris” and the names of its Affiliates and any of their related brand names.

(f) Notwithstanding anything contained herein to the contrary, at any time that any person or Group holds directly or indirectly shares of Convertible Preferred Stock representing in the aggregate in excess of 24.9% of the total voting power of the Common Stock Outstanding, such number of shares as represents such excess voting power shall become non-voting for all purposes hereunder, except as may be required by the General Corporation Law of the State of Delaware, and shall, without limitation, not have any right to vote or consent under this Section 6 and shall not be considered “outstanding” for purposes of any vote or consent (such period, the “ Voting Limitation Period ”); provided , that the Voting Limitation Period shall terminate (i) if at any time Harris Beneficially Owns securities of the Corporation representing in excess of 33 1/3% of the Common Stock Outstanding but clause (iii) below is not applicable,

 

-8-


provided , however , that the exception set forth in this clause (i) shall not apply (A) if Harris’s Beneficial Ownership of securities representing such excess voting power shall not have resulted in and shall not constitute an “assignment” (within the meaning of the Investment Advisers Act) of the investment advisory contracts to which the Company or any subsidiary that is a registered investment adviser under the Investment Advisers Act is a party (an “ Assignment ”) or (B) in the event that the Corporation or any such subsidiary shall have received Fund Board Approval and, if required, Fund Shareholder Approval in respect of any such assignment; (ii) if at any time a Person or Group other than Harris and its Affiliates acquires Beneficial Ownership in excess of 24.9% of the Common Stock Outstanding or in excess of 24.9% of the total voting power of the Common Stock Outstanding or (iii) if at any time Harris Beneficially Owns securities of the Corporation representing in excess of 50% of the Common Stock Outstanding.

7. CONVERSION .

(a) Conversion by the Holders . Subject to the provisions of this Section 7, each holder of shares of Convertible Preferred Stock shall have the right, at any time and from time to time prior to redemption or repurchase, at such holder’s option, to convert any or all of such holder’s shares of Convertible Preferred Stock into the number of shares of Common Stock equal to the Conversion Rate, plus cash in lieu of fractional shares, out of funds legally available therefor, plus declared and unpaid Dividends (other than previously declared Dividends payable to holders of record as of a prior Dividend Payment Record Date). If on the Optional Conversion Date (as defined below), all or any portion of the accumulated and unpaid Dividends payable on such date has not been declared, the Conversion Rate shall be adjusted so that the holder receives an additional number of shares of Common Stock equal to the amount of accumulated and unpaid Dividends that have not been declared (the “ Additional Conversion Amount ”) divided by the average of the Closing Prices of the Common Stock during the 20 consecutive Trading Day period ending on the third Trading Day immediately preceding the Optional Conversion Date. If the Convertible Preferred Stock has been called for redemption, a holder will be entitled to convert the Convertible Preferred Stock until the close of business on the second Business Day immediately preceding the date of redemption.

(b) Mandatory Conversion by the Holders . Upon the delivery to the Corporation of a written consent or consents by holders of a majority in Liquidation Preference of the then outstanding shares of Convertible Preferred Stock approving a mandatory conversion of the Convertible Preferred Stock, all of the shares of the Convertible Preferred Stock then outstanding shall be automatically converted into shares of Common Stock at the Conversion Rate then in effect, plus cash in lieu of fractional shares, out of funds legally available therefor, plus declared and unpaid Dividends (other than previously declared Dividends payable to holders of record as of a prior Dividend Payment Record Date). If on the Mandatory Conversion Date (as defined below), all or any portion of the accumulated and unpaid Dividends payable on such date has not been declared, the Conversion Rate shall be adjusted so that the holder receives an additional number of shares of Common Stock equal to the Additional Conversion Amount divided by the average of the Closing Prices of the Common Stock during the 20 consecutive Trading Day period ending on the third Trading Day immediately preceding the Mandatory Conversion Date.

 

-9-


At any time during the Voting Limitation Period, no holder of Convertible Preferred Stock will be entitled to receive shares of Common Stock upon conversion pursuant to this Section 7 to the extent (but only to the extent) that such receipt would cause such converting holder to become, directly or indirectly, a Beneficial Owner of more than 24.9% of the Common Stock Outstanding and such receipt would result in an Assignment. Any purported delivery of shares of Common Stock upon a purported conversion of Convertible Preferred Stock during the Voting Limitation Period shall be void and have no effect to the extent (but only to the extent) that such delivery would result in the converting holder becoming the Beneficial Owner of more than 24.9% of the Common Stock Outstanding and such delivery would result in an Assignment. If any delivery of shares of Common Stock during the Voting Limitation Period owed to a holder upon conversion of Convertible Preferred Stock is not made, in whole or in part, as a result of this limitation, the Corporation’s obligation to make such delivery shall not be extinguished, and the Corporation shall deliver such shares as promptly as practicable (i) after any such converting holder gives notice to the Corporation that such delivery would not result in it being the beneficial owner of more than 24.9% of the shares of Common Stock Outstanding during the Voting Limitation Period or (ii) after the termination of the Voting Limitation Period. On any Optional Conversion Date or Mandatory Conversion Date during the Voting Limitation Period, the shares of Convertible Preferred Stock converted shall cease to be outstanding for all purposes other than for purposes of the right to receive the shares of Common Stock not delivered at the time of conversion in accordance with this Section 7(b).

(c) Mandatory Conversion by the Corporation; Holder Election . If, for twenty (20) Trading Days in any thirty (30) consecutive Trading Day period the aggregate Closing Price of the Common Stock exceeds 175% of the then applicable Conversion Price, the Corporation may elect to cause each share of the Preferred Stock held by a holder of Convertible Preferred Stock to be converted into shares of Common Stock at the Conversion Rate then in effect, plus cash in lieu of fractional shares, out of funds legally available therefor, plus declared and unpaid Dividends (other than previously declared Regular Dividends payable to holders of record as of a prior Dividend Payment Record Date). Notwithstanding the foregoing provisions of this Section 7(c), within 15 Business Days after receipt of a Corporation Mandatory Conversion Notice, a holder of Preferred Stock may instead elect to forfeit his or its right to receive Participating Dividends from and after the relevant Corporation Mandatory Conversion Date, other than for Participating Dividends for which a Dividend Payment Record Date has been adopted prior to such date. If a holder of the Convertible Preferred Stock does not elect to forfeit any Participating Dividends (and agrees to have his or its shares of Convertible Preferred Stock mandatorily converted to Common Stock), if on the Corporation Mandatory Conversion Date (as defined below), all or any portion of the accumulated and unpaid Dividends payable on such date has not been declared, the Conversion Rate shall be adjusted so that the holder receives an additional number of shares of Common Stock equal to the Additional Conversion Amount divided by the average of the Closing Prices of the Common Stock during the thirty (30) Trading Day period ending on the third Trading Day immediately preceding the Corporation Mandatory Conversion Date.

(d) Conversion Rate . The “Conversion Rate” means 5.1111 shares of Common Stock per share of Convertible Preferred Stock, subject to adjustment in accordance with the provisions of this Certificate of Designations. The “ Conversion Price ” at any time means the price equal to $1,000 divided by the Conversion Rate in effect at such time (initially approximately $195.65).

 

-10-


(e) Mechanics of Conversion.

(i) In order to exercise the optional conversion privilege set forth in Section 7(a) above, the holder of any shares of Convertible Preferred Stock to be converted shall surrender the certificate or certificates representing such shares at the principal office of the Corporation (or any transfer agent of the Corporation previously designated by the Corporation to the holders of Convertible Preferred Stock for this purpose) with an irrevocable and unconditional written notice of election to convert (the “ Optional Conversion Notice ”), completed and signed, specifying the number of Convertible Preferred Stock shares to be converted. Unless the shares issuable upon conversion are to be issued in the same name as the name in which such shares of Convertible Preferred Stock are registered, each share surrendered for conversion shall be accompanied by instruments of transfer, in forms reasonably satisfactory to the Corporation, duly executed by the holder thereof or such holder’s duly authorized attorney, and an amount sufficient to pay any transfer or similar tax in accordance with Section 7(g). For purposes of this section, the “ Optional Conversion Date ” shall be the date of receipt by the transfer agent (or by the Corporation if the Corporation serves as its own transfer agent) of such certificates for shares of Convertible Preferred Stock, the Optional Conversion Notice and such amounts payable.

(ii) In the event of a mandatory conversion set forth in Section 7(b), the Corporation shall deliver to the holder of any Convertible Preferred Stock written notice (the “ Convertible Preferred Conversion Notice ”) of such conversion, at least 20 Business Days and no more than 60 Business Days prior to the Mandatory Conversion Date, specifying: (A) the number of shares of Convertible Preferred Stock to be converted; (B) the Mandatory Conversion Date (as defined below); (C) the number of shares of Common Stock to be issued in respect of each share of Convertible Preferred Stock that is converted; (D) the place or places where certificates for such shares are to be surrendered for issuance of certificates representing shares of Common Stock; and (E) that Dividends on the shares to be converted will cease to accumulate on such Mandatory Conversion Date. The holder of the Convertible Preferred Stock so converted shall promptly surrender his or its certificate or certificates therefor to the principal office of the transfer agent for the Convertible Preferred Stock (or if no transfer agent be at the time appointed, then the Corporation at its principal office). For purposes of this section, the “ Mandatory Conversion Date ” shall be the date specified as the conversion date in the Corporation’s Convertible Preferred Conversion Notice.

(iii) In the event of a mandatory conversion set forth in Section 7(c), the Corporation shall deliver to the holder of any Convertible Preferred Stock written notice (the “ Corporation Mandatory Conversion Notice ”) of such conversion, at least 20 Business Days and no more than 60 Business Days prior to the Corporation Mandatory Conversion Date, providing: (A) an election for the holder of the Convertible Preferred Stock to either have its shares be converted into Common Stock in accordance with Section 7(c) or forfeit its right to receive Participating Dividends from and after the

 

-11-


relevant Corporation Mandatory Conversion Date, other than for Participating Dividends for which a Participating Dividend Payment Date has been adopted prior to such date; (B) the Corporation Mandatory Conversion Date (as defined below) if such holder is subject to the mandatory conversion; (C) the number of shares of Common Stock to be issued in respect of each share of Convertible Preferred Stock that is converted if such holder is subject to mandatory conversion; (D) the place or places where certificates for such shares are to be surrendered for issuance of certificates representing shares of Common Stock if such holder is subject to the mandatory conversion; and (E) that Dividends on the shares to be converted will cease to accumulate on such Corporation Mandatory Conversion Date if such holder is subject to such mandatory conversion. If the holder of the Convertible Preferred Stock is subject to the mandatory conversion, such holder shall promptly surrender his or its certificate or certificates therefor to the principal office of the transfer agent for the Convertible Preferred Stock (or if no transfer agent be at the time appointed, then the Corporation at its principal office). For purposes of this section, the “ Corporation Mandatory Conversion Date ” shall be the date specified as the conversion date in the Corporation Mandatory Conversion Notice.

(iv) Within two Business Days after the surrender by the holder of the certificates for shares of Convertible Preferred Stock as aforesaid, the Corporation shall issue and shall deliver to such holder, or on the holder’s written order to the holder’s transferee, a certificate or certificates for the number of full shares of Common Stock issuable upon conversion of such shares, cash in an amount corresponding to any fractional interest in a share of Common Stock as provided in Section 7(h), if applicable, and, if less than all shares of Convertible Preferred Stock represented by the certificate or certificates so surrendered are being converted, a residual certificate or certificates representing the shares of Convertible Preferred Stock not converted. In the event that a holder does not elect within 15 Business Days or receipt of the Corporation Mandatory Conversion Notice to have his or its shares of Convertible Preferred Stock converted pursuant to Section 7(c), such holder’s right to receive Participating Dividends will cease from the relevant Corporation Mandatory Conversion Date, other than for Participating Dividends for which a Dividend Payment Record Date has been adopted prior to such date .

(v) At such time on the Mandatory Conversion Date, the Optional Conversion Date or the Corporation Mandatory Conversion Date, as applicable,

(1) the person in whose name or names any certificate or certificates for shares of Common Stock shall be issuable upon such conversion shall be deemed to have become the holder of record of the shares of Common Stock represented thereby at such time; and

(2) such shares of Convertible Preferred Stock so converted shall no longer be outstanding, and all rights of a holder with respect to such shares (x) in the event of conversion pursuant to Section 7(a), covered by the Optional Conversion Notice and (y) in the event of conversion pursuant to Section 7(b) and 7(c) to the extent that the holder remains subject to the mandatory conversion in accordance with 7(c), representing all of the Convertible Preferred Stock held by such holder, shall immediately terminate except the right to receive the Common Stock and other amounts payable pursuant to this Section 7.

 

-12-


(f) All shares of Common Stock delivered upon conversion of the Convertible Preferred Stock will, upon delivery, be duly and validly authorized and issued, fully paid and non-assessable, free from all preemptive rights and free from all taxes, liens, security interests and charges (other than liens or charges created by or imposed upon the holder or taxes in respect of any transfer occurring contemporaneously therewith). The Corporation will procure, at its sole expense, the listing of the shares of Common Stock, subject to issuance or notice of issuance on the principal domestic stock exchange or inter-dealer quotation system on which the Common Stock is then listed or traded. The Corporation will use its reasonable best efforts as may be necessary to ensure that the shares of Common Stock may be issued without violation of any applicable law or regulation or of any requirement of any securities exchange or inter-dealer quotation system on which the shares of Common Stock are listed or traded.

(g) Issuances of certificates for shares of Common Stock upon conversion of the Convertible Preferred Stock shall be made without charge to any holder of shares of Convertible Preferred Stock for any issue or transfer tax (other than taxes in respect of any transfer occurring contemporaneously therewith or as a result of the holder being a non-U.S. person) or other incidental expense in respect of the issuance of such certificates, all of which taxes and expenses shall be paid by the Corporation; provided , however , that the Corporation shall not be required to pay any tax which may be payable in respect of any transfer involved in the issuance or delivery of shares of Common Stock in a name other than that of the holder of the Convertible Preferred Stock to be converted, and no such issuance or delivery shall be made unless and until the person requesting such issuance or delivery has paid to the Corporation the amount of any such tax or has established, to the satisfaction of the Corporation, that such tax has been paid.

(h) The Corporation shall not issue fractions of shares of Common Stock upon conversion of Convertible Preferred Stock or scrip in lieu thereof. If any fraction of a share of Common Stock would, except for the provisions of this Section 7(g), be issuable upon conversion of any Convertible Preferred Stock, the Corporation shall in lieu thereof pay to the person entitled thereto an amount in cash equal to the fraction multiplied by the average of Closing Prices during the five consecutive Trading Day period ending on the second Trading Day immediately preceding the Optional Conversion Date, the Mandatory Conversion Date or the Corporation Mandatory Conversion Date, as applicable (rounded to the nearest one-hundredth (1/100) of a cent.

8. REDEMPTION AT THE OPTION OF THE CORPORATION .

(a) Mandatory Redemption Event . At any time after the six-year anniversary of the Step 1 Closing Date, all (but not less than all) of the outstanding shares of Convertible Preferred Stock shall be redeemed, out of lawfully available funds therefor, at a price per share equal to the Liquidation Preference thereof plus interest thereon, from the last Dividend Payment Date to the Mandatory Redemption Date, at a rate of LIBOR plus 3 percent (3%) per annum (the “ Mandatory Redemption Price ”) in accordance with this Section 8 pursuant to written notice (the “ Mandatory Redemption Notice ”) delivered to the holders of Convertible Preferred Stock by the

 

-13-


Corporation, in its sole discretion. The Mandatory Redemption Notice delivered pursuant to this Section 8(a) shall specify a date (a “ Mandatory Redemption Date ”) as of which such redemption shall be effected. The Mandatory Redemption Date shall be a Business Day not less than 20 Business Days nor more than 30 Business Days following the date on which the related Mandatory Redemption Notice is sent by the Corporation which shall be the same day for each holder of Convertible Preferred Stock. On the Mandatory Redemption Date, the Corporation shall redeem, all (but not less than all) of the outstanding shares of the Convertible Preferred Stock.

(b) Mandatory Redemption Notice . The Mandatory Redemption Notice shall be delivered to each holder of record of Convertible Preferred Stock, as applicable, in accordance with the notice provisions set forth in Section 13 below. Each Mandatory Redemption Notice shall state:

(i) the Mandatory Redemption Date;

(ii) the Mandatory Redemption Price;

(iii) the number of shares of Convertible Preferred Stock held by the holder that the Corporation shall redeem on the Mandatory Redemption Date being all (but not less than all) shares of the Convertible Preferred Stock held by such holder;

(iv) the date upon which the holder’s right to convert such shares terminates (as determined in accordance with Section 7); and

(v) that the holder is to surrender to the Corporation, in the manner and at the place designated, its certificate or certificates (or an affidavit of loss and indemnity agreement for such certificates) representing the shares of Convertible Preferred Stock to be redeemed.

(c) Surrender of Certificates; Payment . Unless the holders of the Convertible Preferred Stock have exercised their right to convert such shares as provided in Section 7 or Section 8(e), on or before the applicable Mandatory Redemption Date, each holder of shares of Convertible Preferred Stock to be redeemed on such Redemption Date shall surrender the certificate or certificates (or deliver an affidavit of loss and indemnity agreement for such certificates) representing such shares to the Corporation, in the manner and at the place designated in the Mandatory Redemption Notice, and thereupon the Mandatory Redemption Price for such shares shall be payable to the order of the person whose name appears on such certificate or certificates as the owner thereof, and each surrendered certificate shall be canceled.

(d) Rights Subsequent to Mandatory Redemption . If the Mandatory Redemption Notice shall have been duly given, and if on the applicable Mandatory Redemption Date the Mandatory Redemption Price payable upon redemption of the shares of Convertible Preferred Stock to be redeemed on such Mandatory Redemption Date is paid or tendered for payment, then notwithstanding that the certificates evidencing any of the shares of Convertible Preferred Stock so called for redemption shall not have been surrendered, Dividends and interest with respect to such shares of Convertible Preferred Stock shall cease to accumulate after such Mandatory Redemption Date and all other rights with respect to such shares shall forthwith after

 

-14-


the Mandatory Redemption Date terminate, except only the right of the holders to receive the Mandatory Redemption Price, without interest thereon from the Mandatory Redemption Date, upon surrender of their certificate or certificates therefor.

(e) Conversion Prior to Redemption . If the Convertible Preferred Stock has been called for redemption, a holder will be entitled to convert the Convertible Preferred Stock until the close of business on the second Business Day immediately preceding the date of redemption.

9. REDEMPTION AT THE OPTION OF THE HOLDERS OF CONVERTIBLE PREFERRED STOCK.

(a) Right to Redeem . At any time and from time to time no earlier than the seven-year anniversary of the Step 1 Closing Date, shares of Convertible Preferred Stock shall be redeemed by the Corporation out of funds lawfully available therefor at a price per share equal to the Liquidation Preference plus interest from the last Dividend Payment Date to the Optional Redemption Date, at a rate of LIBOR plus 3 percent (3%) per annum (the “ Optional Redemption Price ”) after receipt by the Corporation from any holder of Convertible Preferred Stock of written notice (an “ Optional Redemption Notice ”) requesting redemption of all or any portion of the outstanding shares of Convertible Preferred Stock held by such holder. The process for effecting any such redemption shall be as follows:

(i) Within 10 days after the receipt of an Optional Redemption Notice, the Corporation shall send to each holder of Convertible Preferred Stock a notice (the “ Corporation Notice ”) which shall (A) state the number of shares of Convertible Preferred Stock that are the subject of the applicable Optional Redemption Notice, and (B) specify a date (an “ Optional Redemption Date ”) as of which a redemption pursuant to this Section 9 shall be effected and the date by which a holder may elect to join in the redemption pursuant to Section 9(a)(ii). Each Optional Redemption Date shall be a Business Day not less than 20 days nor more than 30 days following the date on which the related Corporation Notice is sent by the Corporation.

(ii) Within 15 days after receipt of the Corporation Notice, each holder of Convertible Preferred Stock may provide notice to the Corporation that such holder wishes to include all or a portion of its shares of Convertible Preferred Stock in such Optional Redemption Notice and stating the number of shares to be so included (and, thereafter such shares shall be deemed to be included in such Optional Redemption Notice).

(iii) Within 15 days after receiving the Optional Redemption Notice and at least 10 days prior to the Optional Redemption Date, the Corporation shall provide each holder of Convertible Preferred Stock with written notice (“ Closing Notice ”) that states (i) the applicable Optional Redemption Price, (ii) the applicable Optional Redemption Date, (iii) the number of shares requested to be redeemed on that Optional Redemption Date, (iv) the number of shares of Convertible Preferred Stock to be redeemed on such date, and (v) that the holder is to surrender to the Corporation, in the manner and at the place designated, its certificate or certificates (or an affidavit of loss and indemnity agreement for such certificates) representing the shares of Convertible Preferred Stock to be redeemed.

 

-15-


(iv) Subject to the limitations above in this Section 9, on the applicable Optional Redemption Date, the Corporation shall redeem out of funds lawfully available therefor that number of outstanding shares of Convertible Preferred Stock specified or deemed to be included in the Optional Redemption Notice. In the event the Corporation does not have sufficient funds legally available to redeem on such Optional Redemption Date all shares of Convertible Preferred Stock to be redeemed on such Optional Redemption Date, the Corporation shall redeem a pro rata portion of each holder’s shares out of funds legally available therefor, based on the respective amounts that would otherwise be payable in respect of the shares to be redeemed if the legally available funds were sufficient to redeem all such shares, and shall redeem the remaining shares to have been redeemed as soon as practicable after the Corporation has funds legally available therefor.

(b) Optional Redemption Notice and Other Notices . Any Optional Redemption Notice shall be delivered to the Corporation, and any Corporation Notice or Closing Notice shall be delivered to each holder of record of Convertible Preferred Stock, as applicable, in accordance with the notice provisions set forth in Section 13 below.

(c) Surrender of Certificates; Payment . On or before the applicable Optional Redemption Date, each holder of shares of Convertible Preferred Stock to be redeemed on such Optional Redemption Date shall surrender the certificate or certificates (or deliver an affidavit of loss and indemnity agreement for such certificates) representing such shares to the Corporation, in the manner and at the place designated by the Corporation in its notice pursuant to this Section 9, and thereupon the Optional Redemption Price for such shares shall be payable to the order of the person whose name appears on such certificate or certificates as the owner thereof, and each surrendered certificate shall be canceled. In the event less than all of the shares of Convertible Preferred Stock represented by a certificate are redeemed, a new certificate representing the unredeemed shares of Convertible Preferred Stock shall promptly be issued to such holder.

(d) Rights Subsequent to Optional Redemption . If the Optional Redemption Notice shall have been duly given, and if on the applicable Optional Redemption Date the Optional Redemption Price payable upon redemption of the shares of Convertible Preferred Stock to be redeemed on such Optional Redemption Date is paid or tendered for payment, then notwithstanding that the certificates evidencing any of the shares of Convertible Preferred Stock so called for redemption shall not have been surrendered, Dividends with respect to such shares of Convertible Preferred Stock shall cease to accumulate after such Optional Redemption Date and all other rights with respect to such shares shall forthwith after the Optional Redemption Date terminate, except only the right of the holders to receive the Optional Redemption Price, without interest, upon surrender of their certificate or certificates therefor.

10. ANTI-DILUTION PROVISIONS . The Conversion Rate shall be subject to adjustment from time to time in accordance with this Section 10. The term “ Common Stock Outstanding ” at any given time shall mean the number of shares of Common Stock outstanding at such time on a fully-diluted basis (including the shares of Common Stock issuable in respect of all outstanding options, warrants and securities convertible into or exercisable or exchangeable for shares of Common Stock).

 

-16-


(a) If the Corporation, at any time or from time to time while any of the Convertible Preferred Stock is outstanding, issues shares of Common Stock as a dividend or distribution to all or substantially all holders of Common Stock, or if the Corporation effects a share split, share combination or subdivision in respect of the Common Stock, then the Conversion Rate shall be adjusted based on the following formula:

 

  CR' = CR 0   X  

 OS'

  
     

 OS 0

 

  

 

where      
        CR 0    =    the Conversion Rate in effect at the Close of Business on the Trading Day immediately preceding the Ex-Dividend Date for such dividend or distribution, or the Close of Business on the Trading Day immediately preceding the effective date of such share split, combination or subdivision, as applicable;
        CR'    =    the Conversion Rate in effect immediately prior to the Open of Business on the Ex-Dividend Date for such dividend or distribution, or immediately prior to the Open of Business on the effective date of such share split, share combination or subdivision, as applicable;
        OS 0    =    the number of shares of Common Stock outstanding at the Close of Business on the Trading Day immediately preceding the Ex-Dividend Date for such dividend or distribution, or the Close of Business on the Trading Day immediately preceding the effective date of such share split, share combination or subdivision, as applicable; and
        OS'    =    the number of shares of Common Stock that would be outstanding immediately after, and solely as a result of, such dividend or distribution, or such share split, share combination or subdivision, as applicable.

If any dividend or distribution that is the subject of this Section 10(a) is declared but not so paid or made, the Conversion Rate shall be readjusted, effective as of the date the Board of Directors publicly announces its decision not to pay or make such dividend or distribution to the Conversion Rate that would then be in effect if such dividend or distribution had not been declared. For purposes of this Section 10(a), the number of shares of Common Stock outstanding at the Close of Business on the Trading Day immediately preceding the Ex-Dividend Date for such dividend or distribution shall not include shares of Common Stock held in treasury, if any. The Corporation will not pay any dividend or make any distribution on shares of Common Stock held in treasury, if any.

 

-17-


(b) If the Corporation, at any time or from time to time while any of the Convertible Preferred Stock is outstanding, issues shares of Common Stock (or right or warrants or other securities exercisable into, convertible into or exchangeable for shares of Common Stock (each, a “conversion,” and collectively, “convertible securities”), other than in a Permitted Transaction or a transaction to which Section 10(a) is applicable, to a Person other than a holder of Convertible Preferred Stock, without consideration or at a consideration per share (or having a conversion price per share) that is less than 95% of the Closing Price on the last Trading Day preceding the date of the agreement on pricing such shares (or such convertible securities), the Conversion Rate shall be adjusted based on the following formula:

 

 

CR' = CR 0

  X   OS 0  + X   
      OS 0 + Y   

 

where      
        CR 0    =    the Conversion Rate in effect the date of the agreement on pricing of such shares of Common Stock (or such convertible securities);
        CR'    =    the Conversion Rate in effect upon the date of such issuance;
        OS 0    =    the total number of shares of Common Stock Outstanding on the date of the agreement on pricing of such shares of Common Stock (or such convertible securities);
        X    =    the maximum number of shares of Common Stock issued (or issuable upon conversion); and
        Y    =    the number of shares of Common Stock which the aggregate consideration receivable by the Corporation for the total number of shares of Common Stock so issued (or issuable upon conversion) would purchase at the Closing Price on the last Trading Day preceding the date of the agreement on pricing such shares (or such convertible securities).

For purposes of the foregoing, the aggregate consideration receivable by the Corporation for the total number of shares of Common Stock so issued (or issuable upon conversion) shall be deemed to be equal to the sum of the net offering price (after deduction of any related expenses payable to third parties) of all such securities plus the minimum aggregate amount, if any, payable upon conversion of any such convertible securities into shares of Common Stock; and “Permitted Transactions” shall include any issuance of Common Stock or convertible securities (i) as consideration for or to fund the acquisition of businesses and/or related assets; (ii) in connection with employee benefit plans and compensation related arrangements approved by the Board of Directors, (iii) in connection with a broadly marketed offering and sale of Common Stock or convertible securities for cash, and (iv) as a dividend or distribution on Preferred Stock in lieu of cash.

 

-18-


(c) Successive Adjustments . Successive adjustments in the Conversion Rate shall be made, without duplication, whenever any event specified in Section 10(a) or (b) shall occur.

(d) Rounding of Calculations; Minimum Adjustments . All calculations under this Section 10 shall be made to the nearest 1/10,000 of a share. No adjustment in the Conversion Rate is required if the amount of such adjustment would be less than 1%; provided, however, that any adjustments which by reason of this Section 10(d) are not required to be made will be carried forward and given effect in any subsequent adjustment.

(e) Statement Regarding Adjustments . Whenever the Conversion Rate shall be adjusted as provided in this Section 10, the Corporation shall forthwith file, at each office designated for the conversion of Convertible Preferred Stock, a statement, signed by the President or the Chief Financial Officer of the Corporation, showing in reasonable detail the facts requiring such adjustment and the Conversion Rate that shall be in effect after such adjustment and the Corporation shall also cause a copy of such statement to be sent by mail, first class postage prepaid, to each holder of shares of Convertible Preferred Stock at the address appearing in the Corporation’s records.

(f) Notices . In the event that the Corporation shall give notice or make a public announcement to the holders of Common Stock of any action of the type described in Section 10(a) or (b) and (h), the Corporation shall, at the time of such notice or announcement, and in the case of any action which would require the fixing of a record date, at least twenty (20) days prior to such record date, give notice to each holder of shares of Convertible Preferred Stock, in the manner set forth in Section 10(e) above, which notice shall specify the record date, if any, with respect to any such action and the approximate date on which such action is to take place. Such notice shall also set forth the facts with respect thereto as shall be reasonably necessary to indicate the effect on the applicable Conversion Rate and the number, kind or class of shares or other securities or property which shall be deliverable upon conversion of the Convertible Preferred Stock.

(g) The provisions of this Section 10 shall not apply to any Common Stock issued, issuable or deemed outstanding under paragraphs 10(a) and (b): (i) to any person pursuant to any stock option, stock purchase or similar plan or arrangement for the benefit of employees of the Corporation or its subsidiaries; (ii) any equity securities issued as consideration in connection with a bona fide acquisition, merger or consolidation by the Corporation provided such acquisition, merger or consolidation has been approved by the Board; (iii) securities issued in connection with licensing, marketing or distribution arrangements or similar strategic transactions approved by the Board; (iv) on conversion of the Convertible Preferred Stock or the sale of any additional shares of Convertible Preferred Stock pursuant to the Additional Financing Right; or (v) to any issuance of additional shares of Common Stock as a Regular Dividend pursuant to Section 4 hereof.

 

-19-


(h) If any event occurs as to which, in the opinion of the Board, the provisions of this Section 10 are not strictly applicable or if strictly applicable would not fairly protect the rights of the holders of the Convertible Preferred Stock in accordance with the essential intent and principles of such provisions, then the Board shall make an adjustment in the application of such provisions, in accordance with such essential intent and principles, so as to protect such rights as aforesaid, but in no event shall any adjustment have the effect of decreasing the applicable Conversion Rate as otherwise determined pursuant to any of the provisions of this Section 10 except in the case of a combination of shares of a type contemplated in Section 10(a) hereof and then in no event to an amount smaller than the applicable Conversion Rate as adjusted pursuant to Section 10(a) hereof.

(i) Before taking any action that would cause an adjustment reducing the applicable Conversion Rate below the then par value of the shares of Common Stock issuable upon conversion of the Convertible Preferred Stock, the Corporation will take any corporate action that may, in the opinion of its counsel, be necessary in order that the Corporation may validly and legally issue fully-paid and nonassessable shares of such Common Stock at such adjusted Conversion Rate.

(j) Except as provided in this Section 10, no adjustment in respect of any Dividends or other payments or distributions made to holders of Convertible Preferred Stock of securities issuable upon the conversion of the Convertible Preferred Stock will be made during the term of the Convertible Preferred Stock or upon the conversion of the Convertible Preferred Stock.

(k) No adjustment to the Conversion Rate need be made pursuant to Section 10(a) or (b) for a transaction if the holders of the Convertible Preferred Stock are permitted to participate in the transaction without conversion (including by way of a dividend), concurrently with the holders of Common Stock, on a basis and with notice that the Board determines in good faith to be fair and appropriate in light of the basis and notice to holders of Common Stock participating in the transaction.

(l) Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, no adjustment of the Conversion Rate need be made as a result of (1) the issuance of the rights, (2) the distribution of separate certificates representing the rights, (3) the exercise or redemption of such rights in accordance with the rights agreement or (4) the termination or invalidation of the rights, in each case pursuant to any Corporation’s stockholder rights plan; provided , however , that to the extent that the Corporation has a stockholder rights plan in effect on a Optional Conversion Date, Mandatory Conversion Date or Corporation Mandatory Conversion Date (including the Corporation’s rights plan, if any, existing as of the date hereof), the holder of the Convertible Preferred Stock shall receive, in addition to the shares of Common Stock, the rights under such rights plan, unless, prior to any such Conversion Date, the rights have separated from the Common Stock, in which case the Conversion Rate will be adjusted at the time of separation as if the Corporation made a distribution to all holders of Common Stock of shares of capital stock of the Corporation or evidence of its indebtedness or its assets, subject to readjustment in the event of the expiration, termination or redemption of the rights.

 

-20-


(m) In the event the Common Stock ceases to be traded on an applicable exchange or applicable market and as a result there is no Ex-Dividend Date with respect to any issuance, dividend or distribution requiring an adjustment to the Conversion Rate pursuant to this Section 10, the Corporation shall calculate the adjustment using the record date for such issuance, dividend or distribution in lieu of the Ex-Dividend Date and the Board shall make appropriate adjustments as it determines in good faith to be fair and appropriate.

(n) In addition, subject to applicable stock exchange rules and listing standards and to the extent permitted by applicable law, the Corporation shall be entitled from time to time to increase the Conversion Rate by any amount for a period of at least 20 Business Days if the Board determines that such increase would be in the best interests in the Corporation; provided the Corporation has given to the Conversion Agent and DTC at least 15 days’ prior notice of any such increase in the Conversion Rate and the period during which it will be in effect.

(o) In addition, subject to applicable stock exchange rules and listing standards, the Corporation shall be entitled to increase the Conversion Rate, as it in its discretion shall determine to be advisable in order to avoid or diminish any income tax to holders of Common Stock resulting from any dividends or distribution of Common Stock, distributions of rights to purchase Common Stock (or securities convertible into or exchangeable for Common Stock) hereafter made by the Corporation or any other event treated as such for income tax purposes.

11. RESERVATION OF SHARES . The Corporation shall at all times when the Convertible Preferred Stock shall be outstanding reserve and keep available, free from preemptive rights, for issuance upon the conversion of Convertible Preferred Stock, such number of its authorized but unissued Common Stock as will from time to time be sufficient to permit the conversion of all outstanding Convertible Preferred Stock, including shares of Common Stock deliverable in connection with the Additional Conversion Amount. Prior to the delivery of any securities which the Corporation shall be obligated to deliver upon conversion of the Convertible Preferred Stock, the Corporation shall comply with all applicable laws and regulations which require action to be taken by the Corporation. All Common Stock delivered upon conversion of the Convertible Preferred Stock will upon delivery be duly and validly issued and fully paid and nonassessable, free of all liens and charges and not subject to any preemptive rights.

12. STATUS OF SHARES . All shares of Convertible Preferred Stock that are at any time converted pursuant to Section 7 or redeemed pursuant to Section 8 and 9 and all shares of Convertible Preferred Stock that are otherwise reacquired by the Corporation shall be prohibited from being reissued as Series A Preferred Stock or Series B Preferred Stock, as the case may be, and shall (upon compliance with any applicable provisions of the laws of the State of Delaware) have the status of authorized but unissued shares of Preferred Stock, without designation as to series, subject to reissuance by the Board as shares of any one or more other series.

13. NOTICES . Any and all notices or other communications or deliveries hereunder (including without limitation any Conversion Notice) shall be in writing and shall be

 

-21-


deemed given and effective on the earliest of (i) the date of transmission, if such notice or communication is delivered via facsimile at the facsimile number specified in this Section prior to or at 5:00 p.m. (Eastern time) on a Business Day and electronic confirmation of receipt is received by the sender, (ii) the next Business Day after the date of transmission, if such notice or communication is delivered via facsimile at the facsimile number specified in this Section on a day that is not a Business Day or later than 5:00 p.m. (Eastern time) on any Business Day, (iii) the Business Day following the date of mailing, if sent by nationally recognized overnight courier service, or (iv) upon actual receipt by the party to whom such notice is required to be given. The addresses for such communications shall be: (i) if to the Corporation, attention: Chief Executive Officer and General Counsel, or (ii) if to a holder of Convertible Preferred Stock, to the address or facsimile number appearing on the Corporation’s stockholder records or such other address or facsimile number as such holder may provide to the Corporation in accordance with this Section 13.

14. CERTAIN DEFINITIONS . As used in this Certificate of Designations, the following terms shall have the following meanings, unless the context otherwise requires:

Additional Financing Right ” has the meaning ascribed to such term in the Investment Agreement.

Affiliate ” with respect to any given person shall mean any person controlling, controlled by or under common control with the given person.

Business Day ” shall mean any day except a Saturday, Sunday or day on which banking institutions are legally authorized to close in the New York City, New York.

Capital Stock ” of any Person means any and all shares, interests, rights to purchase, warrants, options, participations or other equivalents of or interests in (however designated) equity of such Person, including any preferred stock, excluding any debt securities convertible into such equity.

Close of Business ” means 5:00 p.m., New York City time.

Closing Price ” of the Common Stock or any other securities means, as of any date of determination:

(a) the closing sale price (or if no closing sale price is reported, the last reported sale price) of shares of the Common Stock or such other securities on the New York Stock Exchange on that date; or

(b) if the Common Stock or such other securities are not traded on the New York Stock Exchange on that date, the closing sale price of shares of Common Stock or such other securities as reported in composite transactions for the principal U.S. national or regional securities exchange on which the Common Stock or such other securities are so traded on that date (or, if no closing sale price is reported, the last reported sale price of shares of the Common Stock or such other securities on the principal U.S. national or regional securities exchange on which the Common Stock or such other securities are so traded on that date); or

 

-22-


(c) if the Common Stock or such other securities are not traded on a U.S. national or regional securities exchange on that date, the last quoted bid price on that date for the Common Stock or such other securities in the over-the-counter market as reported by Pink OTC Markets Inc. or a similar organization; or

(d) if the Common Stock or such other securities are not so quoted by Pink OTC Markets Inc. or a similar organization on that date, the market price of the Common Stock or such other securities on that date as determined by a nationally recognized independent investment banking not affiliated with the Corporation retained by the Corporation for this purpose.

For the purposes of this Certificate of Designations, all references herein to the closing sale price and the last reported sale price of the Common Stock on the New York Stock Exchange shall be such closing sale price and last reported sale price as reflected on the website of the New York Stock Exchange (www.nyse.com) and as reported by Bloomberg Professional Service; provided that in the event that there is a discrepancy between the closing sale price and the last reported sale price as reflected on the website of the New York Stock Exchange and as reported by Bloomberg Professional Service, the closing sale price and the last reported sale price on the website of the New York Stock Exchange shall govern.

If during a period applicable for calculating the Closing Price of Common Stock or any other security any event occurs that requires an adjustment to the Conversion Rate, the Closing Price of the Common Stock or such other security shall be calculated for such period in a manner determined by the Corporation in good faith and in accordance with the provisions of this Certificate of Designations to appropriately reflect the impact of such event on the price of the Common Stock or such other security during such period.

Conversion Agent ” shall mean the transfer agent for the Convertible Preferred Stock, acting in its capacity as conversion agent for the Convertible Preferred Stock, and its successors and assigns or any other conversion agent appointed by the Corporation.

Current Market Price ” per share of Common Stock on any day means the average Closing Price of Common Stock during the 10 consecutive Trading Day period ending on the earlier of the day in question and the Trading Day immediately preceding the Ex-Dividend Date with respect to the issuance, dividend or distribution requiring such computation. Notwithstanding the foregoing, whenever adjustments to the Conversion Rate are called for pursuant to Section 10, such adjustments shall be made to the Current Market Price as may be necessary or appropriate to effectuate the intent of Section 10 and to avoid unjust or inequitable results as determined in good faith by the Board.

DTC ” means The Depository Trust Company, together with its successors and assigns.

Exchange Act ” shall mean the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, and the rules and regulations promulgated thereunder.

Ex-Dividend Date ” when used with respect to any issuance, dividend or distribution, means the first date on which the Common Stock trades on the relevant exchange or in the relevant market, regular way, without the right to receive such issuance, dividend or distribution.

 

-23-


Fund Board Approval ” has the meaning the ascribed to such term in the Investment Agreement.

Fund Shareholder Approval ” has the meaning the ascribed to such term in the Investment Agreement.

Group ” has the meaning ascribed to such term under the Rules under Section 13(d) of the Exchange Act.

Harris ” shall mean Harris Bankcorp, Inc.

Investment Advisers Act ” means the Investment Advisers Act of 1940, as amended, and the rules and regulations promulgated thereunder.

Investment Agreement ” shall mean the Investment and Contribution Agreement, dated as of October 30, 2008, by and among the Corporation, Phoenix Investment Management Company, Inc., Harris and, for limited purposes, The Phoenix Companies, Inc., as amended from time to time in accordance with its terms, a copy of which will be provided to any holder of Convertible Preferred Stock upon request and without cost.

LIBOR ” means the rate per annum determined by the Investor by reference to the British Bankers’ Association for three-month deposits in U.S. dollars (as set forth by any service selected by the Investor that has been nominated by the British Bankers’ Association as an authorized information vendor for the purpose of displaying such rates).

Open of Business ” means 9:00 a.m., New York City time.

Parity Securities ” shall mean each class or series of equity securities of the Corporation, whether currently issued or issued in the future, that by its terms expressly provides that it ranks equally with the Convertible Preferred Stock with respect to payment of dividends or rights upon liquidation, dissolution or winding up of the Corporation.

Person ” means a legal person, including any individual, corporation, estate, partnership, joint venture, association, joint-stock company, limited liability company or trust.

Senior Securities ” shall mean each class or series of equity securities of the Corporation, whether currently issued or issued in the future, that by its terms expressly provides that it ranks senior to the Convertible Preferred Stock with respect to payment of dividends or rights upon liquidation, dissolution or winding up of the Corporation.

Step 1 Closing Date ” has the meaning ascribed to such term in the Investment Agreement.

Step 2 Closing Date ” has the meaning ascribed to such term in the Investment Agreement.

 

-24-


Step 2 Sale ” has the meaning ascribed to such term in the Investment Agreement.

Trading Day ” means a day on which the Common Stock (i) is not suspended from trading on any national or regional securities exchange or association or over-the-counter market at the close of business and (ii) has traded at least once on the national or regional securities exchange or association or over-the-counter market that is the primary market for the trading of the Common Stock.

15. HEADINGS . The headings of the paragraphs of this Certificate are for convenience of reference only and shall not define, limit or affect any of the provisions hereof.

 

-25-


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Virtus Holdings, Inc. has caused this Certificate of Designations to be duly executed by its authorized corporate officer this 31st day of October 2008.

 

VIRTUS HOLDINGS, INC.
By  

/s/ George R. Aylward, Jr.

Name:   George R. Aylward, Jr.
Title:   President

[Signature Page to Virtus Holdings Certificate of Designations]

Exhibit 10.5

VIRTUS INVESTMENT PARTNERS, INC.

OMNIBUS INCENTIVE AND EQUITY PLAN

Effective as of                  , 2008


VIRTUS INVESTMENT PARTNERS, INC.

OMNIBUS INCENTIVE AND EQUITY PLAN

SECTION 1

PURPOSE

The purpose of the Plan is to foster and promote the long-term financial success of the Company and to materially increase shareholder value by (a) providing flexibility to the Company to implement annual and long term incentives that are consistent with the Company’s goals, (b) encouraging and providing for the acquisition of an ownership interest in the Company by Employees, and (c) enabling the Company to attract and retain the services of high quality Employees, Directors and Consultants upon whose judgment, interest and special effort the successful conduct of its operations is largely dependent.

All outstanding awards under The Phoenix Companies, Inc. 2003 Restricted Stock, Restricted Stock Unit and Long-Term Incentive Plan and The Phoenix Companies, Inc. Stock Incentive Plan attributable to the Employees, as such awards have been or may be modified or equitably adjusted in connection with the spin-off, immediately prior to the effective date of the spin-off are hereby incorporated into this Plan and shall accordingly be treated as Awards under this Plan. However, each such award shall continue to be governed solely by the terms and conditions of the instrument(s) evidencing such grant or issuance, and, except as otherwise expressly provided herein or by the Committee, no provision of this Plan shall affect or otherwise modify the rights or obligations of holders of such incorporated awards. For these awards, the name of the company will be changed to the Company and the shares or equivalents will be converted to or settled in Company shares or equivalents, or cash, as determined by the Committee.

SECTION 2

DEFINITIONS

2.1 Definitions . Whenever used herein, the following terms shall have the respective meanings set forth below:

(a) “Act” means the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended from time to time, or any successor thereto, and the applicable rulings and regulations thereunder.

 

- 2 -


(b) “Adjustment Event” means any stock dividend, stock split or share combination of, or extraordinary cash dividend on, the Common Stock or recapitalization, reorganization, merger, consolidation, split-up, spin-off, combination, exchange of shares, warrants or rights offering to purchase Common Stock at a price substantially below Fair Market Value, or other similar event affecting the Common Stock.

(c) “Annual Incentive Award” means an Award made pursuant to Section 9 with a Performance Cycle of one year or less.

(d) “Award” means any award made pursuant to the Plan, including but not limited to the award of an Annual Incentive Award, a Long-Term Incentive Award, an Option, a Stock Appreciation Right, a Restricted Stock Unit, Restricted Stock, or other award under the Plan.

(e) “Award Agreement” means the electronic or written document by which each Award is evidenced, and which may, but need not be (as determined by the Committee), executed or acknowledged by a Participant as a condition to receiving an Award or the benefits under an Award, and which sets forth the terms and provisions applicable to Awards granted under the Plan to such Participant. Award Agreements shall be subject to the terms and conditions of the Plan, whether or not explicitly provided in the particular Award Agreement.

(f) “Beneficial Owner” means any “person”, as such term is used in Section 13(d) of the Act, who, directly or indirectly, has or shares the right to vote or dispose of such securities or otherwise has “beneficial ownership” of such securities (within the meaning of Rule 13d-3 and Rule 13d-5 under the Act), including pursuant to any agreement, arrangement or understanding (whether or not in writing).

(g) “Board” or “Board of Directors” means the Board of Directors of the Company.

 

- 3 -


(h) “Cause” means:

(i) the willful failure by the Participant to perform substantially his duties as an Employee (other than due to physical or mental illness) after reasonable notice to the Participant of such failure;

(ii) the Participant’s engaging in serious misconduct that is injurious to the Company or any Subsidiary in any way, including, but not limited to, by the way of damage to their respective reputations or standings in their respective industries;

(iii) the Participant’s having been convicted of, or having entered a plea of nolo contendere to, a crime that constitutes a felony; or

(iv) the breach by the Participant of any written covenant or agreement with the Company or any Subsidiary not to disclose or misuse any information pertaining to, or misuse any property of, the Company or any Subsidiary or not to compete or interfere with the Company or any Subsidiary.

(i) “Change in Control” means the first occurrence of:

(i) any person (other than the Company or employee benefit plan sponsored by the Company) acquires “beneficial ownership” (within the meaning of Rule 13d-3 under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the “Exchange Act”)), directly or indirectly, of securities of the Company representing 25% or more of the combined voting power of the Company’s securities;

(ii) within any 24-month period, the persons who were directors of the Company at the beginning of such period (the “Incumbent Directors”) shall cease to constitute at least a majority of the Board of Directors (the “Board”) or the board of directors of any successor to the Company; provided that any director elected or nominated for election to the Board by a majority of the Incumbent Directors then still in office shall be deemed to be an Incumbent Director for purposes of this sub-clause 2.1(i)(ii);

 

- 4 -


(iii) the effective date of any merger, consolidation, share exchange, division, sale or other disposition of all or substantially all of the assets of the Company which is consummated (a “Corporate Event”), if immediately following the consummation of such Corporate Event those Persons who were stockholders of the Company immediately prior to such Corporate Event do not hold, directly or indirectly, a majority of the voting power, in substantially the same proportion as prior to such Corporate Event, of (x) in the case of a merger or consolidation, the surviving or resulting corporation or (y) in the case of a division or a sale or other disposition of assets, each surviving, resulting or acquiring corporation which, immediately following the relevant Corporate Event, holds more than 25% of the consolidated assets of the Company immediately prior to such Corporate Event;

(iv) the approval by stockholders of the Company of a plan of liquidation with respect to the Company; or

(v) the occurrence of any other event occurs which the Board declares to be a Change in Control.

(j) “Change in Control Settlement Value” shall mean, with respect to a share of Common Stock, the excess of the Change in Control Stock Value over the option price of the Option or the base price of the Stock Appreciation Right covering such share of Common Stock, provided that , (i) with respect to any Option which is an Incentive Stock Option, the Change in Control Settlement Value shall not exceed the maximum amount permitted for such Option to continue to qualify as an Incentive Stock Option and (ii) in respect of that portion, if any, of any Option or Stock Appreciation Right that had not become exercisable on or before December 31, 2004, the Change in Control Settlement Value shall not exceed the maximum amount permitted for such Option or Stock Appreciation Right to remain exempt from Section 409A.

 

- 5 -


(k) “Change in Control Stock Value” shall mean the value of a share of Common Stock determined as follows:

(i) if the Change in Control results from an event described in clause (iii) of the Change in Control definition, the highest per share price paid for shares of Common Stock of the Company in the transaction resulting in the Change in Control; or

(ii) if the Change in Control results from an event described in clause (i), (ii) (iv) or (v) of the Change in Control definition and no event described in clause (iii) of the Change in Control definition has occurred in connection with such Change in Control, the highest sale price of a share of Common Stock of the Company on any trading day during the 60 consecutive trading days immediately preceding and following the date of such Change in Control as reported on the New York Stock Exchange Composite Tape, or other national securities exchange or nationally recognized automated quotation system, on which the Common Stock is then principally traded or listed.

(l) “Code” means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended from time to time, or any successor thereto, and the applicable rulings and regulations thereunder.

(m) “Committee” means the Compensation Committee of the Board (or such other committee of the Board that the Board shall designate), which shall consist of two or more members, each of whom, serving at the pleasure of the Board, shall be a “non-employee director” within the meaning of Rule 16b-3 (or any successor rule thereto), as promulgated under the Act, and an “outside director” within the meaning of Section 162(m) of the Code and the Treasury regulations, rules and guidance promulgated thereunder. Notwithstanding the foregoing, with respect to Awards granted to non-employee Directors, the Committee shall mean the entire Board.

(n) “Common Stock” means the common stock of the Company.

(o) “Company” means Virtus Investment Partners, Inc., a Delaware corporation, and any successor thereto.

 

- 6 -


(p) “Consultant” means a person engaged to provide consulting or advisory services (other than as an Employee or a Director) to the Company or its Subsidiaries.

(q) “Director” means any individual who is a member of the Board of Directors.

(r) “Disability” has the meaning given in the Company’s long-term disability insurance policy or program as in effect from time to time; provided that a Participant shall not be treated as having incurred a Disability unless he or she qualifies for disability benefits under such policy or program.

(s) “Dividend Equivalents” means an amount equal to the cash dividends paid by the Company upon one share of Common Stock for each share of Common Stock represented by an Award to a Participant in accordance with the Plan, credited at the discretion of the Committee or as otherwise provided for by the Plan or in an Award Agreement.

(t) “Employee” means an individual who is paid on the payroll of the Company or one of its Subsidiaries (as determined by the Committee in its sole discretion); provided, however, that with respect to Incentive Stock Options, “Employee” means any person who is considered an employee of the Company or any Subsidiary for purposes of Treasury Regulation Section 1.421-1(h).

(u) “Executive Officer” means each person who is an officer of the Company or any Subsidiary and who is subject to the reporting requirements under Section 16(a) of the Act.

(v) “Fair Market Value” means, on any date: (i) the closing price reported for such day on the principal national securities exchange or nationally recognized automated quotation system on which the Common Stock is then listed for trading or in the event that there are no Common Stock transactions reported on such exchange or system on such date, Fair Market Value shall mean the closing price on the immediately preceding date on which Common Stock transactions were so reported; (ii) if the Common Stock is then principally listed in an over-the-counter market, the last sales price (or, if there is no last sales price reported, the average of the closing bid and asked prices) for the Common Stock on such date, or on the immediately preceding date on which Common Stock transactions were so reported; or (iii) if the Common Stock is not listed on such an exchange, system or market, the price as determined in good faith by the Committee.

 

- 7 -


(w) “Family Member” means as to a Participant, any (i) child, stepchild, grandchild, parent, stepparent, grandparent, spouse, mother-in-law, father-in-law, son-in-law or daughter-in-law (including adoptive relationships), of such Participant, (ii) trusts for the exclusive benefit of one or more such persons and/or the Participant and (iii) other entity owned solely by one or more such persons and/or the Participant.

(x) “Long-Term Incentive Award” means an Award made pursuant to Section 9 with a Performance Cycle of more than one year.

(y) “Net-Exercise” means a procedure based on such terms and conditions as the Committee shall establish by which the Participant will be issued a number of whole shares of Common Stock upon the exercise of an Option determined in accordance with the following formula:

N = X(A-B)/A, where

“N” = the number of shares of Common Stock to be issued to the Participant upon exercise of the Option;

“X” = the total number of shares of Common Stock with respect to which the Participant has elected to exercise the Option;

“A” = the Fair Market Value of one (1) share of Common Stock determined on the exercise date; and

“B” = the exercise price per share of Common Stock (as defined in the Participant’s Award Agreement)

(z) “Option” means the right to purchase shares of Common Stock at a stated price for a specified period of time. For purposes of the Plan, an Option may be either ( i ) an “Incentive Stock Option” with the meaning of Section 422 of the Code or ( ii ) an Option which is not an Incentive Stock Option (a “Non-Qualified Stock Option”).

(aa) “Participant” means any Employee, any non-employee Director of the Company, or Consultant designated by the Committee to receive an Award under the Plan, provided that non-employee Directors and Consultants shall not be eligible for Incentive Stock Options.

 

- 8 -


(bb) “Performance Cycle” means the period selected by the Committee during which the performance of the Company or any Subsidiary or unit thereof or any individual is measured for the purpose of determining the extent to which an Award subject to Performance Goals has been earned.

(cc) “Performance Goals” means the objectives for the Company, any Subsidiary or business unit thereof or individual that may be established by the Committee for a Performance Cycle with respect to any performance based Awards contingently awarded under the Plan. The Performance Goals for Awards that are intended to constitute “performance-based” compensation within the meaning of Section 162(m) of the Code shall be based on one or more of the following performance measures as specified by the Committee: (1) gross or net cash flow, free cash flow, cash flow return on investment (discounted or otherwise), cash operating income, net cash provided by operations, or cash flow in excess of cost of capital; (2) sales; (3) revenues; (4) earnings per share, stock price or stockholder return (on a gross or net basis), or any rating by a nationally recognized statistical rating organization; (5) net income; (6) return on assets (gross or net), return on investment, return on capital or return on equity (or any combination); (7) economic value created; (8) operating income, earnings before or after taxes, interest, depreciation, amortization or extraordinary or special items (or any combination), which may be determined on a per share basis (basic or diluted); (9) debt to capital ratio, or risk based capital ratio; (10) operating margin, gross margin or other financial margin; (11) assets under management, gross or net flows of assets under management, market capitalization, or net assets; (12) segment income; or (13) dividend payout. Performance Goals may reflect absolute entity performance or a relative comparison of entity performance to the performance of a peer group or other external measure. The targeted level or levels of performance with respect to Performance Goals may be established at such levels and in such terms as the Committee may determine, in its discretion, including absolute entity performance, as a goal relative to performance in prior periods, or a relative comparison of entity performance to the performance of one or more third parties or other companies, a peer group or special index or other group selected for

 

- 9 -


comparison, or other external measure. The Committee may specify that any Performance Goals will be calculated before or after specific or identified items such as extraordinary or nonrecurring, special income, expense or other items, before or after changes in accounting principles or standards, before or after capital charges, before or after revenues, operations, earnings or losses of discontinued operations or acquisitions, or before or after Awards under this Plan or other incentive compensation.

(dd) “Plan” means the Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. Omnibus Incentive and Equity Plan, as set forth herein and as the same may be amended from time to time.

(ee) “Restricted Period” means the period during which Restricted Stock Units or shares of Restricted Stock are subject to forfeiture or restrictions on transfer (if applicable) pursuant to Section 8 of the Plan.

(ff) “Restricted Stock” means Common Stock awarded to a Participant pursuant to the Plan which is subject to a Restricted Period in accordance with Section 8 of the Plan.

(gg) “Restricted Stock Unit” means a Participant’s right to receive pursuant to the Plan one share of Common Stock at the end of a Restricted Period in accordance with Section 8 of the Plan.

(hh) “Retirement” means termination of a Participant’s employment or service on or after the Participant attains age 55 with 10 years of credited service with the Company and its Subsidiaries. For this purpose, “credited service” means service as an employee or service as a director.

(ii) “Securities Act” means the Securities Act of 1933, as amended from time to time, or any successor thereto, and the applicable rulings and regulations thereunder.

(jj) “Stock Appreciation Right” means the right to receive a payment from the Company, in cash or Common Stock, in an amount determined under Section 7 of the Plan.

(kk) “Subsidiary” means any corporation, partnership or limited liability company in which the Company owns, directly or indirectly, 50% or more of the total combined voting power of all classes of stock of such corporation or of the capital interest or profits interest of such partnership or limited liability company.

 

- 10 -


2.2 Construction . Captions and titles contained herein are for convenience only and shall not affect the meaning or interpretation of any provision of the Plan. Except when otherwise indicated by the context, words in the masculine gender used in the Plan shall include the feminine gender, the singular shall include the plural, and the plural shall include the singular.

SECTION 3

ELIGIBILITY AND PARTICIPATION

Participants in the Plan shall be those Employees, non-employee Directors, and Consultants selected by the Committee to participate in the Plan.

SECTION 4

ADMINISTRATION

4.1 Power to Grant and Establish Terms of Awards . The Committee shall have the authority, subject to the terms of the Plan, to determine the Participants to whom Awards shall be granted, the Fair Market Value of shares of Common Stock or other property, and the terms, conditions and restrictions of any and all Awards, including but not limited to the number of shares of Common Stock to be covered by each Award, the time or times at which Awards shall be granted, and the terms and provisions of the instruments by which Awards shall be evidenced; to designate Options as Incentive Stock Options or Non-Qualified Stock Options; to determine the period of time during which restrictions on Restricted Stock or Restricted Stock Units shall remain in effect; to establish and administer any Performance Goals applicable to Awards granted hereunder, as well as to determine the terms and conditions of any Annual Incentive and Long-Term Incentive Awards; to determine the method(s) for satisfaction of any tax withholding obligation arising in connection with Awards, including by the withholding or delivery of shares of Common Stock; to determine whether an Award will be settled in shares of Common Stock, cash, or in any combination thereof; and to determine all other matters relating to Awards and the Plan. The terms and conditions of each Award shall be determined by the Committee at the time of grant, and, except as provided in the Plan or any Award Agreement, such terms and conditions shall not be subsequently

 

- 11 -


changed in a manner which would be adverse to the Participant without the consent of the Participant to whom such Award has been granted. The Committee may establish different terms and conditions for different Participants receiving Awards and for the same Participant for each Award such Participant may receive, whether or not granted at different times. The grant of any Award to any Participant shall neither entitle such Participant to, nor disqualify him from, the grant of any other Awards.

4.2 Administration . The Committee shall be responsible for the administration of the Plan. Any Award granted by the Committee may be subject to such conditions, not inconsistent with the terms of the Plan, as the Committee shall determine. The Committee, by majority action thereof, is authorized to prescribe, amend and rescind rules and regulations relating to the Plan, any Award Agreement or any other form of agreement or other document employed by the Company in the administration of the Plan or of any Award; to provide for conditions deemed necessary or advisable to protect the interests of the Company; to interpret the Plan, any Award Agreement or any other form of agreement or other document employed by the Company in the administration of the Plan or of any Award; and to make all other determinations necessary or advisable for the administration and interpretation of the Plan, any Award Agreement or any other form of agreement or other document employed by the Company in the administration of the Plan or of any Award, to carry out its provisions and purposes. Determinations, interpretations or other actions made or taken by the Committee pursuant to the provisions of the Plan, any Award Agreement or any other form of agreement or other document employed by the Company in the administration of the Plan or of any Award, shall be final, binding and conclusive for all purposes and upon all persons. The Committee is authorized to correct any defect, supply any omission or reconcile any inconsistency in the Plan or any Award Agreement and to make all other determinations and take such other actions with respect to the Plan or any Award as the Committee may deem advisable to the extent not inconsistent with the provisions of the Plan or applicable law. The Committee and each member thereof, and any person acting pursuant to authority delegated by the Committee, shall be entitled, in good faith, to rely or act upon any report or other information furnished by any Executive Officer, other officer or Employee of the Company or a Subsidiary or affiliate, the Company’s auditors, consultants, legal counsel, or any other agents assisting in the administration of the Plan. Members of the Committee, any person acting pursuant to authority delegated by the Committee, and any officer or Employee of the Company or a Subsidiary or affiliate acting at the direction or on behalf of the Committee or a delegatee, shall not be personally liable for any action or determination taken or made or omitted in good faith with respect to the Plan.

 

- 12 -


4.3 Delegation . Actions of the Committee may be taken by the vote of a majority of its members. To the extent not inconsistent with applicable law and the applicable rules and regulations of the New York Stock Exchange and any other national securities exchange or nationally recognized automated quotation system on which shares of Common Stock are then principally listed or traded, (a) the Committee may delegate any of its powers under the Plan to a subcommittee of the Committee or to one of its members, (b) the Committee may allocate among its members any of its administrative responsibilities and (c) notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained herein, the Committee may delegate the determination of Awards to Employees who are not Executive Officers to one or more officers of the Company designated by the Committee from time to time.

4.4 Restrictive Covenants and Other Conditions . The Committee may condition the grant of any Award under the Plan upon the Participant to whom such Award would be granted agreeing in writing to certain conditions in addition to the provisions regarding exercisability of, the vesting or payment of any Award (such as restrictions on the ability to transfer the underlying shares of Common Stock) or covenants in favor of the Company and/or its Subsidiaries (including, without limitation, covenants not to compete, not to solicit employees and customers that may have effect following the termination of the Participant’s employment and, whether before or after the Award has been exercised or has vested, as applicable, including, without limitation, the requirement that the Participant disgorge any profit, gain or other benefit received in respect of the Award prior to any breach of any such covenant by the Participant).

4.5 409A Compliance . The Plan is intended to be administered in a manner consistent with the requirements, where applicable, of Section 409A of the Code. Where reasonably possible and practicable, the Plan shall be administered in a manner to avoid the imposition on Participants of immediate tax recognition and additional taxes pursuant to such Section 409A. To that end, and without limiting the generality of the foregoing, unless otherwise expressly provided herein or in any Award Agreement, any amount payable or shares distributable hereunder in connection with any Award (including upon the satisfaction of any applicable performance criteria) shall be paid not later than two and one-half months (or such other time as is required to cause such amounts not to be treated as deferred

 

- 13 -


compensation under Section 409A of the Code) following the end of the taxable year of the Company or the Participant in which the Participant’s rights with respect to the corresponding Award (or portion thereof) ceased to be subject to a substantial risk of forfeiture. Notwithstanding the foregoing, neither the Company nor the Committee shall have any liability to any person in the event such Section 409A applies to any such Award in a manner that results in adverse tax consequences for the Participant or any of his beneficiaries or transferees.

SECTION 5

STOCK SUBJECT TO PLAN

5.1 Plan Award Limitation . Subject to the provisions of Section 5.2, 5.3 and 5.4, the number of shares of Common Stock available for delivery in connection with Awards under the Plan shall be (a)  [X] , plus (b) the number of shares of Common Stock underlying awards granted and outstanding under The Phoenix Companies, Inc. plans prior to the effective date of the spin-off that become Awards under this Plan; provided, however, that:

(a) the total number of shares with respect to which Incentive Stock Options may be granted shall not exceed [X] , and

(b) the total number of shares which may be issued and delivered in connection with Awards other than Options and Stock Appreciation Rights shall not exceed [X] , and

(c) the total number of shares which may be issued and delivered in connection with Awards of unrestricted shares of Common Stock pursuant to Section 10 shall not exceed [X].

The shares to be delivered under the Plan may consist, in whole or in part, of Common Stock held in treasury or authorized but unissued Common Stock, not reserved for any other purpose, or any combination thereof.

5.2 Share Counting Rules . Each share of Common Stock underlying an Award shall count as one share of Common Stock for purposes of determining the number of shares of Common Stock granted pursuant to the limits set forth in Sections 5.1 and 5.5 of the Plan. If the exercise price of an Option is paid by tender to the Company, or attestation to the

 

- 14 -


ownership, of shares of Common Stock owned by the Participant, or by means of a Net-Exercise, the number of shares available for issuance under the Plan shall be reduced by the gross number of shares for which the Option is exercised. Shares withheld or reacquired by the Company in satisfaction of tax withholding obligations pursuant to Section 13.6 shall not again be available for issuance under the Plan. With respect to Stock Appreciation Rights, the number of shares remaining for issuance under the Plan shall be determined as though the full number of shares corresponding to the portion of a Stock Appreciation Right exercised had been issued. Shares of Common Stock issued in connection with awards that are assumed, converted or substituted as a result of the Company’s acquisition of another company (including by way of merger, combination or similar transaction) will not count against the number of shares that may be issued under the Plan, but shall be available under the Plan by virtue of the Company’s assumption of the plan(s), arrangement(s) or agreement(s) of the acquired company or business.

5.3 Cancelled, Terminated, or Forfeited Awards . Any shares of Common Stock subject to an Award issued under this Plan, including those Phoenix awards assumed by the Plan as explained in Section 1, which for any reason expires, or is canceled, terminated or otherwise settled without the issuance of any consideration, whether in cash, Common Stock or other property (including, without limitation, any shares issued in connection with a Restricted Stock Award that are subsequently forfeited) shall again be available under the Plan.

5.4 Adjustment Due to Change in Capitalization . In the event of any Adjustment Event, (i) the aggregate number of shares of Common Stock available for Awards under Section 5.1(including the sub-limits identified in Section 5.1), (ii) the individual limitations on the number of shares that may be awarded to any particular Participant in any particular period under Section 5.5 and (iii) the aggregate number of shares subject to outstanding Awards and the respective prices and/or vesting and other applicable criteria applicable to outstanding Awards shall be proportionately adjusted to reflect, as deemed equitable and appropriate by the Committee, such Adjustment Event. To the extent deemed equitable and appropriate by the Committee, subject to any required action by stockholders, in any merger, consolidation, reorganization, liquidation, dissolution, or other similar transaction, any Award granted under the Plan shall pertain to the securities and other property, including cash, to which a holder of the number of shares of Common Stock covered by the Award would have been entitled to receive in connection with such event.

 

- 15 -


Any shares of stock (whether Common Stock, shares of stock into which shares of Common Stock are converted or for which shares of Common Stock are exchanged or shares of stock distributed with respect to Common Stock) or cash or other property received with respect to any Award granted under the Plan as a result of any Adjustment Event or any distribution of property shall, except as provided in Section 11 or as otherwise provided by the Committee at or after the date an Award is made by the Committee, be subject to the same terms and conditions, including restrictions on transfer, as are applicable to such shares of the original underlying Award and any stock certificate(s) representing or evidencing any shares of stock so received shall be legended in such manner as the Company deems appropriate.

5.5 Individual Award Limitations . Subject to Section 5.4:

(a) the total number of shares of Common Stock subject to Options and Stock Appreciation Rights that may be awarded to any Participant during a calendar year shall not exceed [X] shares;

(b) the total number of shares of Common Stock subject to any Restricted Stock subject to Performance Goals or Restricted Stock Units subject to Performance Goals that may be awarded to any Participant during a calendar year shall not exceed [X] shares or units as the case may be;

(c) the total amount of any Annual Incentive Award paid to any Participant during a calendar year shall not exceed $[X] ; and

(d) the total amount of any Long-Term Incentive Award paid to any Participant during a calendar year shall not exceed $[X] .

SECTION 6

STOCK OPTIONS

6.1 Grant of Options . Options may be granted to Participants at such time or times as shall be determined by the Committee; provided that, in no event shall the Committee be permitted to grant Options conditioned on the surrender or cancellation of previously granted Options. Options granted to non-employee Directors shall be in such

 

- 16 -


amounts and intervals as determined by the Board from time to time. Options granted under the Plan may be of two types: ( i ) Incentive Stock Options and ( ii ) Non-Qualified Stock Options. The date of grant of an Option under the Plan will be the date on which the Option is awarded by the Committee or, if so determined by the Committee, the date on which occurs any event the occurrence of which is an express condition precedent to the grant of the Option. Subject to Section 5.5, the Committee shall determine the number of Options, if any, to be granted to the Participant. Each Option Award shall be evidenced by an Award Agreement that shall specify the type of Option granted, the exercise price, the duration of the Option, the number of shares of Common Stock to which the Option pertains, and such other terms and conditions not inconsistent with the Plan as the Committee shall determine.

6.2 Option Price . Non-Qualified Stock Options and Incentive Stock Options granted pursuant to the Plan shall have an exercise price that is not less than the Fair Market Value on the date the Option is granted. Except in the event of an Adjustment Event, the Committee shall not have the power or authority to reduce the exercise price of any outstanding Option, whether through amendment, through the cancellation of existing grants and the issuance of new grants with lower exercise prices or by any other means. The Committee shall not have the right to re-price outstanding Options or to grant new Options under the Plan in substitution for or upon the cancellation of Options previously granted. Except in connection with a corporate transaction involving the Company (including, without limitation, any stock dividend, stock split, extraordinary cash dividend, recapitalization, reorganization, merger, consolidation, split-up, spin-off, combination, or exchange of shares), the terms of outstanding Awards may not be amended to reduce the exercise price of outstanding Options or SARs or cancel outstanding Options or SARS in exchange for cash, other awards or Options or SARs with an exercise price that is less than the exercise price of the original Options or SARs without stockholder approval.

6.3 Exercise of Options . Options awarded to a Participant under the Plan shall be exercisable at such times and shall be subject to such restrictions and conditions including the performance of a minimum period of service or the satisfaction of Performance Goals, as the Committee may impose either at or after the time of grant of such Options, subject to the Committee’s right to accelerate the exercisability of such Option in its discretion. Notwithstanding the foregoing, unless otherwise determined by the Committee at grant, Options shall become exercisable in three substantially equal installments on each of the first

 

- 17 -


three anniversaries of the date of grant. Except as may be provided in any provision approved by the Committee pursuant to this Section 6.3, after becoming exercisable each installment shall remain exercisable until expiration, termination or cancellation of the Option. An Option may be exercised from time to time, in whole or in part, up to the total number of shares of Common Stock with respect to which it is then exercisable. Notwithstanding the foregoing, no Option shall be exercisable for more than 10 years after the date on which it is granted.

6.4 Payment and Settlement . The Committee shall establish procedures governing the exercise of Options. No shares shall be delivered pursuant to any exercise of an Option unless arrangements satisfactory to the Committee have been made to assure full payment of the exercise price. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, the Committee may direct that payment of the exercise price may be made ( i ) in cash or cash equivalents, ( ii ) by exchanging shares of Common Stock (either by delivery or attestation) which have been owned by the Participant at the time of exercise (or owned for a stated period of time prior to the time of exercise as the Committee may determine), (iii) by issuing a lesser number of shares of Common Stock pursuant to a Net Exercise transaction having a Fair Market Value on the date of exercise equal to the amount, if any, by which the aggregate Fair Market Value of the shares of Common Stock as to which the Option is being exercised exceeds the aggregate exercise price for such shares, based on such terms and conditions as the Committee shall establish, (iv) by any combination of the foregoing; provided that the combined value of all cash and cash equivalents paid and the Fair Market Value of any such Common Stock so tendered to the Company, valued as of the date of such tender, is at least equal to the exercise price, ( v ) through an arrangement with a broker approved by the Company whereby payment of the exercise price is accomplished with the proceeds of the sale of Common Stock, or (vi) through such other procedures as the Committee may determine. As soon as administratively practicable after receipt of a written exercise notice and payment of the exercise price in accordance with this Section 6.4, the Company shall deliver to the Participant a certificate or certificates representing the acquired shares of Common Stock or shall deposit the acquired shares of Common Stock to the Participant’s brokerage account associated with this Plan. For the avoidance of doubt, in any case above in this Section, the number of shares remaining for issuance under the Plan shall be determined as though the full number of shares corresponding to the portion of such Option settled or net-exercised pursuant to this Section 6.4 had been issued.

 

- 18 -


6.5 Incentive Stock Options . Notwithstanding anything in the Plan to the contrary, no term of the Plan relating to Incentive Stock Options shall be interpreted, amended or altered, nor shall any discretion or authority granted under the Plan be so exercised, so as to disqualify the Plan under Section 422 of the Code, or, without the consent of any Participant affected thereby, to cause any Incentive Stock Option previously granted to fail to qualify for the Federal income tax treatment afforded under Section 421 of the Code.

6.6 Termination of Employment or Service Due to Disability or Retirement . Unless otherwise determined by the Committee at the time of grant, in the event a Participant’s employment or service with the Company or a Subsidiary terminates by reason of Disability or Retirement, any such Options granted to such Participant shall continue to become exercisable in accordance with Section 6.3 notwithstanding such Participant’s termination of employment or service and may be exercised by the Participant or the Participant’s designated beneficiary, and if none is named, in accordance with Section 13.2, at any time during the remaining term of such Option or three (3) years (or such shorter period as the Committee shall determine at the time of grant) following the Participant’s termination of employment or service, whichever period is shorter.

6.7 Termination of Employment or Service Due to Death . Unless otherwise determined by the Committee at the time of grant, in the event a Participant’s employment or service with the Company or a Subsidiary terminates by reason of death, any such Options granted to such Participant shall become immediately exercisable in full at the date of such Participant’s death and may be exercised by the Participant’s designated beneficiary, and if none is named, in accordance with Section 13.2, at any time during the remaining term of such Option or three (3) years (or such shorter period as the Committee shall determine at the time of grant) following the Participant’s death, whichever period is shorter.

6.8 Certain Divestitures, etc . In the event that a Participant’s employment or service is terminated in connection with a sale, divestiture, spin-off or other similar transaction involving a Subsidiary, division or business segment or unit, the Committee may provide at the time of grant or otherwise that all or any portion of any Options granted to such Participant which are then outstanding shall become exercisable in accordance with Section 6.3 notwithstanding such termination of employment or service and may be exercised by the Participant or the Participant’s designated beneficiary, and if none is named, in accordance with Section 13.2, at any time during the remaining term of the Option or three (3) years (or such shorter period as the Committee shall determine at or following the time of grant) following the Participant’s termination of employment or service, whichever period is shorter.

 

- 19 -


6.9 Termination of Employment or Service for Cause . Unless otherwise determined by the Committee at the time of grant, in the event a Participant’s employment or service with the Company or a Subsidiary is terminated for Cause as determined in good faith by the Company, all Options granted to such Participant which are then outstanding (whether or not exercisable prior to the date of such termination) shall be immediately forfeited.

6.10 Termination of Employment or Service for Any Other Reason . Unless otherwise determined by the Committee at or after the time of grant, in the event a Participant’s employment or service with the Company or a Subsidiary terminates for any reason other than one described in Section 6.6, 6.7, 6.8 or 6.9, any Options granted to such Participant which are exercisable at the date of such Participant’s termination of employment or service shall be exercisable at any time prior to 90 days following such Participant’s termination of employment or service or the remaining term of such Option, whichever period is shorter.

6.11 Extension of Termination Date . An Optionholder’s Award Agreement may also provide that if the exercise of the Option following the Optionholder’s termination of employment or service (other than upon the Optionholder’s death or Disability) would be prohibited at any time solely because the issuance of shares of Common Stock would violate the registration requirements under the Securities Act, then the Option shall terminate on the earlier of (i) the expiration of the term of the Option or (ii) the expiration of a period of 90 days following the Optionholder’s termination of employment or service during which the exercise of the Option would not be in violation of such registration requirements.

SECTION 7

STOCK APPRECIATION RIGHTS

7.1 Grant of Stock Appreciation Rights . Stock Appreciation Rights may be granted to any Participants, all Participants or any class of Participants at such time or times as shall be determined by the Committee. Stock Appreciation Rights may be granted in tandem with an Option, or may be granted on a freestanding basis, not related to any Option. A grant

 

- 20 -


of a Stock Appreciation Right shall be evidenced by an Award Agreement, whether as part of the agreement governing the terms of the Option, if any, to which such Stock Appreciation Rights relate or pursuant to a separate written agreement with respect to freestanding Stock Appreciation Rights, in each case containing such provisions not inconsistent with the Plan as the Committee shall approve.

7.2 Terms and Conditions of Stock Appreciation Rights . The terms and conditions (including, without limitation, the exercise period of the Stock Appreciation Right, the vesting schedule applicable thereto and the impact of any termination of service on the Participant’s rights with respect to the Stock Appreciation Right) applicable with respect to ( i ) Stock Appreciation Rights granted in tandem with an Option shall be substantially identical (to the extent possible taking into account the differences related to the character of the Stock Appreciation Right) to the terms and conditions applicable to the tandem Options and ( ii ) freestanding Stock Appreciation Rights shall be substantially identical (to the extent possible taking into account the differences related to the character of the Stock Appreciation Right) to the terms and conditions that would have been applicable under Section 6 above were the grant of the Stock Appreciation Rights a grant of an Option. In no event shall the term of a Stock Appreciation Right exceed a period of ten years from the date of grant.

7.3 Exercise of Tandem Stock Appreciation Rights . Stock Appreciation Rights which are granted in tandem with an Option may only be exercised upon the surrender of the right to exercise such Option for an equivalent number of shares and may be exercised only with respect to the shares of Common Stock for which the related Option is then exercisable.

7.4 Exercise Price . Each Stock Appreciation Right will be denominated in shares of Common Stock equivalents. The exercise price of each Stock Appreciation Right shall not be less than one hundred percent (100%) of the Fair Market Value of the Common Stock equivalents subject to the Stock Appreciation Right on the date of grant.

7.5 Payment of Stock Appreciation Right Amount . Upon exercise of a Stock Appreciation Right, the holder shall be entitled to receive payment, in cash, in shares of Common Stock or in a combination thereof, as determined by the Committee, of an amount determined by multiplying the excess, if any, of the Fair Market Value of a share of Common Stock at the date of exercise over the exercise price of the Stock Appreciation Right determined by the Committee at the time of grant, by the number of shares of Common Stock with respect to which the Stock Appreciation Rights are then being exercised.

 

- 21 -


SECTION 8

RESTRICTED STOCK AND RESTRICTED STOCK UNITS

8.1 Grant of Restricted Stock and Restricted Stock Units . Except as otherwise delegated as provided in Section 4.3, the Committee may make awards in the form of Restricted Stock or Restricted Stock Units. Any Award made hereunder in the form of Restricted Stock or Restricted Stock Units shall be subject to the terms and conditions of the Plan and to any other terms and conditions not inconsistent with the Plan (including, but not limited to, requiring the Participant to pay the Company an amount equal to the par value per share for each share of Restricted Stock awarded) as shall be prescribed by the Committee in its sole discretion. As determined by the Committee, with respect to an Award of Restricted Stock, the Company shall either ( i ) transfer or issue to each Participant to whom an Award of Restricted Stock has been made the number of shares of Restricted Stock specified by the Committee or ( ii ) hold such shares of Restricted Stock for the benefit of the Participant for the Restricted Period. In the case of an Award of Restricted Stock Units, no shares of Common Stock shall be issued at the time an Award is made, and the Company shall not be required to set aside a fund for the payment of such Award.

8.2 Restrictions on Transferability . Restricted Stock Units and shares of Restricted Stock may not be sold, assigned, transferred, pledged, hypothecated or otherwise encumbered by the Participant during the Restricted Period, except as hereinafter provided. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Committee may permit (on such terms and conditions as it shall establish) Restricted Stock Units and shares of Restricted Stock to be transferred during the Restricted Period pursuant to Section 13.1, provided that any Restricted Stock Units and shares of Restricted Stock so transferred shall remain subject to the provisions of this Section 8.

8.3 Rights as a Shareholder . Except for the restrictions set forth herein and unless otherwise determined by the Committee, the Participant shall have all the rights of a shareholder with respect to such shares of Restricted Stock, including but not limited to, the right to vote and the right to receive dividends. A Participant shall not have any right, in

 

- 22 -


respect of Restricted Stock Units awarded pursuant to the Plan, to vote on any matter submitted to the Company’s stockholders or to dispose of the shares of Common Stock underlying such Restricted Stock Units, nor shall a Participant have any beneficial ownership in respect of any shares of Common Stock underlying Restricted Stock Units, until such time as the shares of Common Stock attributable to such Restricted Stock Units have been issued (including, at the discretion of the Committee, issuance to a trust for purposes of hedging or funding Restricted Stock Unit obligations). At the discretion of the Committee, a Participant’s Restricted Stock Unit account may be credited with Dividend Equivalents during the Restricted Period.

8.4 Restricted Period . Unless the Committee shall otherwise determine at or after the date an Award of Restricted Stock or Restricted Stock Units is made to the Participant by the Committee, the Restricted Period shall commence upon the date of grant and shall lapse with respect to the shares of Restricted Stock or Restricted Stock Units in three approximately equal installments on each of the first three anniversaries of the date of grant, unless sooner terminated as otherwise provided herein. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, the Committee may provide for termination of the Restricted Period upon the achievement by the Participant of Performance Goals specified by the Committee at the date of grant. The determination of whether the Participant has achieved such Performance Goals shall be made by the Committee in its sole discretion.

8.5 Legend . Each certificate issued to a Participant in respect of shares of Restricted Stock awarded under the Plan shall be registered in the name of the Participant and shall be legended in such manner as the Company deems appropriate.

8.6 Death, Disability or Retirement . Unless the Committee shall otherwise determine at the date of grant or otherwise, if a Participant ceases to be employed or service is terminated by the Company or any Subsidiary by reason of death, Disability or Retirement, the Restricted Period will lapse as to a pro rated portion of the shares of Restricted Stock and Restricted Stock Units transferred or issued to such Participant under the Plan based on the number of days the Participant actually worked since the date the shares of Restricted Stock or Restricted Stock Units were granted (or in the case of an Award which becomes vested in installments, since the date, if any, on which the last installment of such Restricted Stock or Restricted Stock Units became vested); provided that , in the case of an Award with respect to which the restrictions will lapse, if at all, based on the attainment of Performance Goals or

 

- 23 -


targets, such vesting shall be deferred until the end of the applicable performance period and such prorated portion will be determined based on that number of shares of Restricted Stock or Restricted Stock Units, if any, that would have been earned based on the attainment or partial attainment of such Performance Goals or targets. Except as otherwise expressly determined by the Committee or provided in an Award Agreement, any shares of Restricted Stock or Restricted Stock Units as to which the Restricted Period has not lapsed at the date of a Participant’s termination of employment by reason of death, Disability or Retirement (or which do not become vested after such date under the preceding sentence) shall automatically be cancelled upon such Participant’s termination of employment.

8.7 Termination of Employment or Service . Unless the Committee shall otherwise determine at or after the date of grant, if a Participant ceases to be employed by or terminates service with the Company or any Subsidiary for any reason other than those specified in Section 8.6 at any time prior to the date when the Restricted Period lapses, all shares of Restricted Stock held by the Participant shall revert back to the Company and all Restricted Stock Units and any corresponding Dividend Equivalents credited but not yet paid to such Participant shall be forfeited upon the Participant’s termination of employment or service.

8.8 Issuance of New Certificates; Settlement of Restricted Stock Units . Upon the lapse of the Restricted Period with respect to any shares of Restricted Stock, such shares shall no longer be subject to the restrictions imposed under Section 8.2 and the Company shall issue or have issued new share certificates without the legend described in Section 8.5 in exchange for those previously issued. Upon the lapse of the Restricted Period with respect to any Restricted Stock Units, the Company shall deliver to the Participant, or the Participant’s designated beneficiary, and if none is named, in accordance with Section 13.2, one share of Common Stock for each Restricted Stock Unit as to which restrictions have lapsed and any Dividend Equivalents credited with respect to such Restricted Stock Units. The Committee may, in its sole discretion, elect to pay cash or part cash and part Common Stock in lieu of delivering only Common Stock for Restricted Stock Units. If a cash payment is made in lieu of delivering Common Stock, the amount of such cash payment for each share of Common Stock to which a Participant is entitled shall be equal to the Fair Market Value of the Common Stock on the date on which the Restricted Period lapsed with respect to the related Restricted Stock Unit.

 

- 24 -


8.9 Performance Related Awards . Notwithstanding anything else contained in the Plan to the contrary and unless the Committee shall otherwise determine at the time of grant, to the extent required to ensure that the grant of an Award of Restricted Shares or Restricted Stock Units to an Executive Officer (other than an Award which will vest solely on the basis of the passage of time) is deductible by the Company or such Subsidiary pursuant to Section 162(m) of the Code, any such Award shall become vested, if at all, upon the determination by the Committee that Performance Goals established by the Committee have been attained, in whole or in part.

SECTION 9

ANNUAL AND LONG-TERM INCENTIVE AWARDS

9.1 Annual Incentive Awards . Unless determined otherwise by the Committee at or after the date of grant, Annual Incentive Awards shall be payable in cash. If a Participant terminates employment before the end of a Performance Cycle due to death, Disability or Retirement, such Participant or the Participant’s designated beneficiary, and if none is named, in accordance with Section 13.2, shall be eligible to receive a prorated Annual Incentive Award based on the actual achievement of the Performance Goals for such Performance Cycle, in each case prorated for the portion of the Performance Cycle coming before the Participant’s termination of employment. Unless determined otherwise by the Committee at or, in the case of any Participant who is not an Executive Officer, after the date of grant, if a Participant terminates employment before payment of an Annual Incentive Award is authorized by the Committee for any reason other than death, Disability or Retirement, the Participant shall forfeit all rights to such Annual Incentive Award.

9.2 Long-Term Incentive Awards . Unless determined otherwise by the Committee at or after the date of grant, Long-Term Incentive Awards shall be payable in cash. If a Participant terminates employment before the end of a Performance Cycle due to death, Disability or Retirement, such Participant or the Participant’s designated beneficiary, and if none is named, in accordance with Section 13.2, shall be eligible to receive a prorated Long-Term Incentive Award based on the actual achievement of the Performance Goals for such Performance Cycle, in each case prorated for the portion of the Performance Cycle coming before the Participant’s termination of employment. Unless determined otherwise by the Committee at, or, in the case of a Participant who is not an Executive Officer, after the date of

 

- 25 -


grant, if a Participant terminates employment before payment of a Long-Term Incentive Award is authorized by the Committee for any reason other than death, Disability or Retirement, the Participant shall forfeit all rights to such Long-Term Incentive Award.

SECTION 10

OTHER STOCK-BASED AWARDS

The Committee may grant other types of equity-based or equity-related Awards (including the grant or offer for sale of unrestricted shares of Common Stock) in such amounts and subject to such terms and conditions as the Committee may determine. Such Awards may entail the transfer of actual shares of Common Stock to Award recipients and may include Awards designed to comply with or take advantage of the applicable local laws of jurisdictions other than the United States.

SECTION 11

CHANGE IN CONTROL

11.1 Accelerated Vesting and Payment . Subject to the provisions of Section 11.2 below, in the event of a Change in Control, each Option and Stock Appreciation Right then outstanding shall be fully exercisable regardless of the exercise schedule otherwise applicable to such Option and/or Stock Appreciation Right and the Restricted Period shall lapse as to each share of Restricted Stock and each Restricted Stock Unit then outstanding. In connection with such a Change in Control, the Committee may, in its discretion, provide that each Option and/or Stock Appreciation Right (regardless of whether any such Option or Stock Appreciation Right is then “in the money”, including if as of the date on which the Change in Control Settlement Value is determined, the Fair Market Value of the shares subject to such Option, Stock Appreciation Right or similar other stock-based Award is less than the exercise price or base price of such Option or Stock Appreciation Right) shall, upon the occurrence of such Change in Control, be canceled in exchange for a cash payment, if any is then due, by the Company of the Change in Control Settlement Value per share.

 

- 26 -


11.2 Alternative Awards . Notwithstanding Section 11.1, no cancellation, acceleration of exercisability, vesting, cash settlement or other payment shall occur with respect to any Option, Stock Appreciation Right, Restricted Stock, Restricted Stock Unit or any other stock-based Award if the Committee reasonably determines in good faith prior to the occurrence of a Change in Control that such Award shall be honored or assumed, or new rights substituted therefor (such honored, assumed or substituted award hereinafter called an “Alternative Award”), by a Participant’s employer (or the parent or an affiliate of such employer) immediately following the Change in Control; provided that any such Alternative Award must:

(i) be based on stock which is traded on an established securities market, or that the Committee reasonably believes will be so traded within 60 days after the Change of Control;

(ii) provide such Participant with rights and entitlements substantially equivalent to or better than the rights, terms and conditions applicable under such award, including, but not limited to, an identical or better exercise or vesting schedule and identical or better timing and methods of payment;

(iii) have substantially equivalent economic value to such award (determined at the time of the Change in Control in accordance with principles applicable under Section 424 of the Code); and

(iv) have terms and conditions which provide that in the event that the Participant’s employment or service is involuntarily terminated for any reason (including, but not limited to a termination due to death, Disability or not for Cause) or Constructively Terminated (as defined below), all of such Participant’s Option and/or Stock Appreciation Rights shall be deemed immediately and fully exercisable, the Restricted Period shall lapse as to each of the Participant’s outstanding Restricted Stock or Restricted Stock Unit Awards, and each such Alternative Award shall be settled for a payment per each share of stock subject to the Alternative Award in cash, in immediately transferable, publicly traded securities or in a combination thereof, in an amount equal to, in the case of an Option or Stock Appreciation Right, the excess of the Fair Market Value of such stock on the date of the Participant’s termination over the corresponding exercise or base price per share and, in the case of any Restricted Stock or Restricted Stock Unit Award, the Fair Market Value of the number of shares of Common Stock subject or related thereto.

 

- 27 -


For this purpose, a Participant’s employment or service shall be deemed to have been Constructively Terminated if, without the Participant’s written consent, the Participant terminates employment or service within 90 calendar days following either (x) a material reduction in the Participant’s base salary or a Participant’s incentive compensation opportunity, or (y) the relocation of the Participant’s principal place of employment or service to a location more than 35 miles away from the Participant’s immediately prior principal place of employment or service.

11.3 Annual Incentive and Long-Term Incentive Awards . Unless otherwise determined by the Committee, in the event of a termination of employment after or related to a Change in Control (other than for Cause and other than a voluntary resignation not constituting being Constructively Terminated), (i) any Annual or Long-Term Incentive Awards relating to Performance Cycles ending prior to the Change in Control which have been earned but not paid shall become immediately payable, (ii) any Performance Cycle for which Annual Incentive Awards are outstanding shall end, the Participant shall earn a pro rata Award equal to the product of (a) such Participant’s earned Award for the Performance Cycle in question and (b) a fraction, the numerator of which is the number of completed months that have elapsed since the beginning of such Performance Cycle to the date of such employment termination and the denominator of which is twelve, the Company shall pay all such Annual Incentive Awards, if earned, by the March 15 following the end of the Performance Cycle after the Committee has made its determination, and (iii) all then in progress Performance Cycles for Long-Term Incentive Awards that are outstanding shall end, the Participant shall earn a pro rata Award equal to the product of (a) such Participant’s earned Award for the Performance Cycle in question and (b) a fraction, the numerator of which is the number of completed months that have elapsed since the beginning of such Performance Cycle to the date of such employment termination, the denominator of which is the total number of months in such Performance Cycle, the Company shall pay all such Long-Term Incentive Awards, if earned, by the March 15 following the end of the Performance Cycle after the Committee has made its determination.

 

- 28 -


11.4 Termination of Employment or Service Prior to Change in Control . In the event that prior to the date of a Change in Control, the Participant’s termination of employment or service with the Company or any of its affiliates will be deemed to be in connection with a Change in Control (other than for Cause and other than a voluntary resignation not constituting being Constructively Terminated) and either (a) such termination is within 90 days prior to the date of a Change in Control, or (b) such termination occurs on or after the date, if any, on which the shareholders of the Company approve such Change in Control transaction, but prior to the consummation thereof. Such Participant shall be entitled to receive the applicable benefits provided under this Section 11, but only to the extent that such benefits are in excess of those previously received by the Participant as a result of the Participant’s prior termination of employment or service.

11.5 Distribution of Amounts Subject to Section 409A . Notwithstanding anything in the Plan to the contrary, if any amount that is subject to Section 409A of the Code is to be paid or distributed solely on account of a Change in Control (as opposed to being paid or distributed on account of termination of employment or within a reasonable time following the lapse of any substantial risk of forfeiture with respect to the corresponding Award), solely for purposes of determining whether such distribution or payment shall be made in connection with a Change in Control, the term Change in Control shall be deemed to be defined in the manner provided in Section 409A of the Code and the regulations thereunder. If any such distribution or payment cannot be made because an event that constitutes a Change in Control under the Plan is not a change in control as defined under Section 409A, then such distribution or payment shall be distributed or paid at the next event, occurrence or date at which such distribution or payment could be made in compliance with the requirements of Section 409A of the Code.

SECTION 12

AMENDMENT, MODIFICATION, AND TERMINATION OF PLAN

The Board may at any time terminate or suspend the Plan, and from time to time may amend or modify the Plan; provided, however, that any amendment which would (a) increase the number of shares available for issuance under the Plan, (b) lower the minimum exercise price at which an Option or stock-settled Stock Appreciation Right may be granted or (c) extend the maximum term for Options or stock-settled Stock Appreciation Rights granted

 

- 29 -


hereunder shall be subject to the approval of the Company’s shareholders. Except as otherwise provided in this Plan or in any Award Agreement, no action of the Board may, without the consent of a Participant, alter or impair his or her rights under any previously granted Award, except as expressly provided in the Plan or in the applicable Award Agreement.

SECTION 13

MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

13.1 Transferability of Awards . No Award granted under the Plan may be sold, transferred, pledged or assigned, or otherwise alienated or hypothecated, other than in accordance with Section 13.2 below, by will or by laws of descent and distribution; provided that, the Committee may permit transfers of Non-Qualified Stock Options, Stock Appreciation Rights, Restricted Stock Units or Restricted Shares to Family Members (including, without limitation, transfers affected by a domestic relations order) subject to such terms and conditions as the Committee shall determine.

13.2 Beneficiary Designation . Each Participant under the Plan may from time to time name any beneficiary or beneficiaries (who may be named contingently or successively) to whom any benefit under the Plan is to be paid or by whom any right under the Plan is to be exercised in case of his death. Each designation will revoke all prior designations by the same Participant, shall be in a form prescribed by the Committee, and will be effective only when filed by the Participant in writing with the Committee during his lifetime. In the absence of any such designation, benefits remaining unpaid or Awards outstanding at the Participant’s death shall be paid to or exercised by (a) the Participant’s surviving spouse or domestic partner, (b) if there is no surviving spouse or domestic partner, the Participant’s children (including stepchildren and adopted children) per stirpes, or (c) if there is no surviving spouse or domestic partner and/or children per stirpes, the Participant’s estate.

13.3 Committee Discretion . Notwithstanding anything else to the contrary, the Committee may permit all or any portion of any Award to be exercised following a Participant’s termination of employment for any reason on such terms and subject to such conditions as the Committee shall determine for a period up to and including, but not beyond, the expiration of the term of such Award. The Committee shall have the power to accelerate the time at which an Award may first be exercised or the time during which an Award or any part thereof will vest in accordance with the Plan, notwithstanding the provisions in the Award stating the time at which it may first be exercised or the time during which it will vest.

 

- 30 -


13.4 Interpretation . Notwithstanding anything contained in the Plan to the contrary, to the extent required to so qualify any Award intended to be qualified as other performance-based compensation within the meaning of Section 162(m)(4)(c) of the Code, the Committee shall not be entitled to exercise any discretion otherwise authorized under the Plan (such as the right to authorize payout at a level above that dictated by the achievement of the relevant Performance Goals) with respect to such Award if the ability to exercise discretion (as opposed to the exercise of such discretion) would cause such Award to fail to qualify as other performance-based compensation.

13.5 No Guarantee of Employment . Nothing in the Plan shall interfere with or limit in any way the right of the Company or any Subsidiary to terminate any Participant’s employment or service at any time, nor confer upon any Participant any right to continue in the employ or service of the Company or any Subsidiary or affiliate.

13.6 Tax Withholding . The Company or any Subsidiary shall have the power to withhold, or require a Participant to remit to the Company or such Subsidiary promptly upon notification of the amount due, an amount, which may include shares of Common Stock, sufficient to satisfy Federal, state and local, including foreign, withholding tax requirements with respect to any Award (including payments made pursuant to Section 9), and the Company may defer payment of cash or issuance or delivery of Common Stock until such requirements are satisfied. The Committee may, in its discretion, permit a Participant to elect, subject to such conditions as the Committee shall impose ( i ) to have Common Stock otherwise issuable or deliverable under the Plan withheld by the Company or ( ii ) to deliver to the Company previously acquired shares of Common Stock, in each case, having a Fair Market Value sufficient to satisfy not more than the Participant’s statutory minimum Federal, state and local tax obligations associated with the transaction.

13.7 Indemnification . Each person who is or shall have been a member of the Committee or of the Board shall be indemnified and held harmless by the Company against and from any loss, cost, liability, or expense that may be imposed upon or reasonably incurred by him in connection with or resulting from any claim, action, suit, or proceeding to which he may be made a party or in which he may be involved by reason of any action taken

 

- 31 -


or failure to act under the Plan, provided he shall give the Company an opportunity, at its own expense, to handle and defend the same before he undertakes to handle and defend it on his own behalf. The foregoing right of indemnification shall not be exclusive and shall be independent of any other rights of indemnification to which such persons may be entitled under the Company’s Articles of Incorporation or By-laws, by contract, as a matter of law, or otherwise.

13.8 No Limitation on Compensation . Nothing in the Plan shall be construed to limit the right of the Company to establish other plans or to pay compensation to its employees in cash or property, in a manner which is not expressly authorized under the Plan.

13.9 Requirements of Law . The granting of Awards and the issuance of shares of Common Stock shall be subject to all applicable laws, rules, and regulations, and to such approvals by any governmental agencies or national securities exchanges or national automated quotation systems as may be required.

13.10 Governing Law . The Plan, and all Awards made and actions taken thereunder, shall be construed in accordance with and governed by the laws of the State of Connecticut.

13.11 Impact on Benefits . Unless otherwise determined by the Committee, Awards granted under the Plan are not compensation for purposes of calculating an Employee’s rights under any employee benefit program or arrangement, including any severance arrangement.

13.12 Securities Law Compliance . Instruments evidencing Awards may contain such other provisions, not inconsistent with the Plan, as the Committee deems advisable, including a requirement that the Participant represent to the Company in writing, when an Award is granted or when he receives shares with respect to such Award (or at such other time as the Committee deems appropriate) that he is accepting such Award, or receiving or acquiring such shares (unless they are then covered by a Securities Act of 1933 registration statement), for his own account for investment only and with no present intention to transfer, sell or otherwise dispose of such shares except such disposition by a legal representative as shall be required by will or the laws of any jurisdiction in winding up the estate of the Participant. Such shares shall be transferable, or may be sold or otherwise disposed of only if the proposed transfer, sale or other disposition shall be permissible pursuant to the Plan and if, in the opinion of counsel satisfactory to the Company, such transfer, sale or other disposition at such time will be in compliance with applicable securities laws.

 

- 32 -

Exhibit 10.6

The CORPORATE plan for Retirement SM

EXECUTIVE P LAN

Adoption Agreement

IMPORTANT NOTE

This document has not been approved by the Department of Labor, the Internal Revenue Service or any other governmental entity. An Employer must determine whether the plan is subject to the Federal securities laws and the securities laws of the various states. An Employer may not rely on this document to ensure any particular tax consequences or to ensure that the Plan is “unfunded and maintained primarily for the purpose of providing deferred compensation to a select group of management or highly compensated employees” under the Employee Retirement Income Security Act with respect to the Employer’s particular situation. Fidelity Management Trust Company, its affiliates and employees cannot and do not provide legal or tax advice or opinions in connection with this document. This document does not constitute legal or tax advice or opinions and is not intended or written to be used, and it cannot be used by any taxpayer, for the purposes of avoiding penalties that may be imposed on the taxpayer. This document must be reviewed by the Employer’s attorney prior to adoption.

 

Plan Number: 44415

      ECM NQ 2007 AA

(07/2007)

      10/10/2008

© 2007 Fidelity Management & Research Company


ADOPTION AGREEMENT

ARTICLE 1

 

1.01 PLAN INFORMATION

 

  (a) Name of Plan:

This is the Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. Non-Qualified Excess Investment Plan (the “Plan”).

 

  (b) Plan Status (Check one.):

 

  (1) Adoption Agreement effective date: 11/01/2008.

 

  (2) The Adoption Agreement effective date is (Check (A) or check and complete (B)):

(A)   x     A new Plan effective date 11/01/2008 .

(B)   ¨      An amendment and restatement of the Plan. The original effective date of the Plan was:               

 

  (c) Name of Administrator, if not the Employer:

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                   

 

1.02 EMPLOYER

 

  (a) Employer Name: Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.

 

  (b) The term “Employer” includes the following Related Employer(s)

(as defined in Section 2.01(a)(25)) participating in the Plan:

Phoenix Equity Planning Corporation

Phoenix Investment Counsel, Inc.

Kayne Adnerson Rudnick Investment Management, LLC

Rutherford Financial Corporation

Phoenix/Zweig Advisors LLC

Engemann Asset Management

SCM Advisors, LLC

Duff & Phelps Investment Management Company

 

Plan Number: 44415

      ECM NQ 2007 AA

(07/2007)

      10/10/2008

Page 1

© 2007 Fidelity Management & Research Company


1.03 COVERAGE

(Check (a) and/or (b).)

 

(a)    x    The following Employees are eligible to participate in the Plan (Check (1) or (2)):   

 

(1)    x    Only those Employees designated in writing by the Employer, which writing is hereby incorporated herein.
(2)    ¨    Only those Employees in the eligible class described below:
       
       

 

(b)    ¨    The following Directors are eligible to participate in the Plan (Check (1) or (2)):

 

(1)    ¨    Only those Directors designated in writing by the Employer, which writing is hereby incorporated herein.
(2)    ¨    All Directors, effective as of the later of the date in 1.01(b) or the date the Director becomes a Director.
(Note: A designation in Section 1.03(a)(l) or Section 1.03(b)(l) or a description in Section 1.03(a)(2) must include the effective date of such participation.)

 

1.04 COMPENSATION

(If Section 1.03(a) is selected, select (a) or (b). If Section 1.03(b) is selected, complete (c))

For purposes of determining all contributions under the Plan:

 

(a)    x    Compensation shall be as defined, with respect to Employees, in the Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. 401(k) Plan maintained by the Employer:

 

(1)    x    to the extent it is in excess of the limit imposed under Code section 401(a)(17).
(2)    ¨    notwithstanding the limit imposed under Code section 401(a)(17).

 

(b)    ¨    Compensation shall be as defined in Section 2.01(a)(9) with respect to Employees (Check (1) and/or (2) below, if, and as, appropriate):

 

(1)    ¨    but excluding the following:
       
(2)    ¨    but excluding bonuses, except those bonuses listed in the table in Section1.05(a)(2).

 

Plan Number: 44415

      ECM NQ 2007 AA

(07/2007)

      10/10/2008

Page 2

© 2007 Fidelity Management & Research Company


  (c) ¨ Compensation shall be as defined in Section 2.01(a)(9)(c) with respect to Directors, but excluding the following:

                                                                                                                                                                        

 

1.05 CONTRIBUTIONS ON BEHALF OF EMPLOYEES

 

  (a) Deferral Contributions (Complete all that apply):

 

(1)  x

   Deferral Contributions. Subject to any minimum or maximum deferral amount provided below, the Employer shall make a Deferral Contribution in accordance with, and subject to, Section 4.01 on behalf of each Participant who has an executed salary reduction agreement in effect with the Employer for the applicable calendar year (or portion of the applicable calendar year).

 

Deferral Contributions

Type of Compensation

   Dollar Amount    % Amount
   Min    Max    Min    Max

Excess Earnings

         0    60

(Note: With respect to each type of Compensation, list the minimum and maximum dollar amounts or percentages as whole dollar amounts or whole number percentages.)

 

(2)  ¨

   Deferral Contributions with respect to Bonus Compensation only. The Employer requires Participants to enter into a special salary reduction agreement to make Deferral Contributions with respect to one or more Bonuses, subject to minimum and maximum deferral limitations, as provided in the table below.

 

Deferral Contributions

Type of Bonus

   Treated As    Dollar Amount    % Amount
   Performance
Based
   Non-Performance
Based
   Min    Max    Min    Max
                 
                 
                 

(Note: With respect to each type of Bonus, list the minimum and maximum dollar amounts or percentages as whole dollar amounts or whole number percentages. In the event a bonus identified as a Performance-based Bonus above does not constitute a Performance-based Bonus with respect to any Participant, such Bonus will be treated as a Non-Performance-based Bonus with respect to such Participant.)

 

Plan Number: 44415

      ECM NQ 2007 AA

(07/2007)

      10/10/2008

Page 3

© 2007 Fidelity Management & Research Company


(b)

  Matching Contributions (Choose (1) or (2) below, and (3) below, as applicable):
 

(1)

   x    The Employer shall make a Matching Contribution on behalf of each Employee Participant in an amount described below:
    

(A)

   ¨         % of the Employee Participant’s Deferral Contributions for the calendar year.
    

(B)

   ¨    The amount, if any, declared by the Employer in writing, which writing is hereby incorporated herein.
    

(C)

   x    Other:    100% of deferral contributions up to 3% of excess earnings plus 50% of deferral contributions over 3% of excess earnings but less than 5% of excess earnings.
 

(2)

   ¨    Matching Contribution Offset. For each Employee Participant who has made elective contributions (as defined in 26 CFR section 1.401(k)-6 (“QP Deferrals”)) of the maximum permitted under Code section 402(g), or the maximum permitted under the terms of the                                                   Plan (the “QP”), to the QP, the Employer shall make a Matching Contribution in an amount equal to (A) minus (B) below:
     (A)    The matching contributions (as defined in 26 CFR section 1.401(m)-l (a)(2) (“QP Match”)) that the Employee Participant would have received under the QP on the sum of the Deferral Contributions and the Participant’s QP Deferrals, determined as though—
          

•      no limits otherwise imposed by the tax law applied to such QP match; and

          

•      the Employee Participant’s Deferral Contributions had been made to the QP.

     (B)    The QP Match actually made to such Employee Participant under the QP for the applicable calendar year.
  Provided, however, that the Matching Contributions made on behalf of any Employee Participant pursuant to this Section 1.05(b)(2) shall be limited as provided in Section 4.02 hereof.
 

(3)

   ¨    Matching Contribution Limits (Check the appropriate box (es)):
     (A)    ¨    Deferral Contributions in excess of      % of the Employee Participant’s Compensation for the calendar year shall not be considered for Matching Contributions.
     (B)    ¨    Matching Contributions for each Employee Participant for each calendar year shall be limited to $              .

 

Plan Number: 44415

      ECM NQ 2007 AA

(07/2007)

      10/10/2008

Page 4

© 2007 Fidelity Management & Research Company


(c)    Employer Contributions
   (1)    ¨    Fixed Employer Contributions. The Employer shall make an Employer Contribution on behalf of each Employee Participant in an amount determined as described below:
        

 

____________________________________________________________________________________

        

 

____________________________________________________________________________________

   (2)    x    Discretionary Employer Contributions. The Employer may make Employer Contributions to the accounts of Employee Participants in any amount (which amount may be zero), as determined by the Employer in its sole discretion from time to time in a writing, which is hereby incorporated herein.

 

1.06 CONTRIBUTIONS ON BEHALF OF DIRECTORS
  

(a)    

   ¨    Director Deferral Contributions
            The Employer shall make a Deferral Contribution in accordance with, and subject to, Section 4.01 on behalf of each Director Participant who has an executed deferral agreement in effect with the Employer for the applicable calendar year (or portion of the applicable calendar year), which deferral agreement shall be subject to any minimum and/or maximum deferral amounts provided in the table below.

 

Deferral Contributions

Type of Compensation

   Dollar Amount    % Amount
     Min    Max    Min    Max
           
           
           

 

         (Note: With respect to each type of Compensation, list the minimum and maximum dollar amounts or percentages as whole dollar amounts or whole number percentages.)
(b)    Matching and Employer Contributions:
  

(1)

   ¨    Matching Contributions. The Employer shall make a Matching Contribution on behalf of each Director Participant in an amount determined as described below:
        

 

____________________________________________________________________________________

        

 

____________________________________________________________________________________

 

Plan Number: 44415

      ECM NQ 2007 AA

(07/2007)

      10/10/2008

Page 5

© 2007 Fidelity Management & Research Company


    (2)   ¨      Fixed Employer Contributions._The Employer shall make an Employer Contribution on behalf of each Director Participant in an amount determined as described below:
                                                                                                                                                                  
                                                                                                                                                                  
(3)   ¨      Discretionary Employer Contributions. The Employer may make Employer
       Contributions to the accounts of Director Participants in any amount (which amount may be zero), as determined by the Employer in its sole discretion from time to time, in a writing, which is hereby incorporated herein.

 

1.07 DISTRIBUTIONS

The form and timing of distributions from the Participant’s vested Account shall be made consistent with the elections in this Section 1.07.

(a) (1)    Distribution options to be provided to Participants

 

    (A) Specified
Date
  (B) Specified
Age
  (C) Separation
From
Service
  (D) Earlier of
Separation or

Age
  (E) Earlier of
Separation or
Specified
Date
  (F) Disability   (G) Change
in Control
  (H) Death
Deferral Contribution   ¨   Lump Sum

 

¨   Installments

  ¨   Lump Sum

 

¨   Installments

  þ   Lump Sum

 

þ   Installments

  ¨   Lump Sum

 

¨   Installments

  ¨   Lump Sum

 

¨   Installments

  ¨   Lump Sum

 

¨   Installments

  ¨   Lump Sum

 

  ¨   Lump Sum

 

¨   Installments

Matching Contributions   ¨   Lump Sum

 

¨   Installments

  ¨   Lump Sum

 

¨   Installments

  þ    Lump Sum

 

þ   Installments

  ¨   Lump Sum

 

¨   Installments

  ¨   Lump Sum

 

¨   Installments

  ¨   Lump Sum

 

¨   Installments

  ¨   Lump Sum

 

  ¨   Lump Sum

 

¨   Installments

Employer Contributions   ¨   Lump Sum

 

¨   Installments

  ¨   Lump Sum

 

¨   Installments

  þ   Lump Sum

 

þ   Installments

  ¨   Lump Sum

 

¨   Installments

  ¨   Lump Sum

 

¨   Installments

  ¨   Lump Sum

 

¨   Installments

  ¨   Lump Sum

 

  ¨   Lump Sum

 

¨   Installments

(Note: If the Employer elects (F), (G), or (H) above, the Employer must also elect (A), (B), (C), (D), or (E) above, and the Participant must also elect (A), (B), (C), (D), or (E) above. In the event the Employer elects only a single payment trigger and/or payment method above, then such single payment trigger and/or payment method shall automatically apply to the Participant. If the employer elects to provide for payment upon a specified date or age, and the employer applies a vesting schedule to amounts that may be subject to such payment trigger(s), the employer must apply a minimum deferral period, the number of

 

Plan Number: 44415

      ECM NQ 2007 AA

(07/2007)

      10/10/2008

Page 6

© 2007 Fidelity Management & Research Company


years of which must be greater than the number of years required for 100% vesting in any such amounts. If the employer elects to provide for payment upon disability and/or death, and the employer applies a vesting schedule to amounts that may be subject to such payment trigger, the employer must also elect to apply 100% vesting in any such amounts upon disability and/or death.)

 

(2)  ¨    A Participant incurs a Disability when the Participant (Check at least one if Section 1.07(a)(l)(F) or if Section 1.08(e)(3) is elected):

 

(A)    ¨    is unable to engage in any substantial gainful activity by reason of any medically determinable physical or mental impairment that can be expected to result in death or can be expected to last for a continuous period of not less than 12 months.
(B)    ¨    is, by reason of any medically determinable physical or mental impairment that can be expected to result in death or can be expected to last for a continuous period of not less than 12 months, receiving income replacement benefits for a period of not less than 3 months under an accident and health plan covering employees of the Employer.
(C)    ¨    is determined to be totally disabled by the Social Security Administration or the Railroad Retirement Board.
(D)    ¨    is determined to be disabled pursuant to the following disability insurance program:                       the definition of disability under which complies with the requirements in regulations under Code section 409A.

(Note: If more than one box above is checked, then the Participant will have a Disability if he satisfies at least one of the descriptions corresponding to one of such checked boxes.)

 

(3)  ¨    Regardless of any payment trigger and, as applicable, payment method, to which the Participant would otherwise be subject pursuant to (1) above, the first to occur of the following Plan-level payment triggers will cause payment to the Participant commencing pursuant to Section 1.07(c)(l) below in a lump sum, provided such Plan-level payment trigger occurs prior to the payment trigger to which the Participant would otherwise be subject.

Payment Trigger

 

(A)    ¨    Separation from Service prior to:
                                                                                                                        
(B)    ¨    Separation from Service
(C)    ¨    Death
(D)    ¨    Change in Control

 

Plan Number: 44415

      ECM NQ 2007 AA

(07/2007)

      10/10/2008

Page 7

© 2007 Fidelity Management & Research Company


  (b) Distribution Election Change

A Participant

(1) x shall

(2) ¨  shall not

be permitted to modify a scheduled distribution election in accordance with Section 8.01(b) hereof.

 

  (c) Commencement of Distributions

 

  (1) Each lump sum distribution and the first distribution in a series of installment payments (if applicable) shall commence as elected in (A), (B) or (C) below:

 

   (A)  x    Monthly on the 15th day of the month which day next follows the applicable triggering event described in 1.07(a).
   (B)   ¨    Quarterly on the      day of the following months                      ,                      ,                      , or                      (list one month in each calendar quarter) which day next follows the applicable triggering event described in 1.07(a).
   (C)   ¨    Annually on the      day of                      (month) which day next follows the applicable triggering event described in 1.07 (a).

(Note: Notwithstanding the above: a six-month delay shall be imposed with respect to certain distributions to Specified Employees; a Participant who chooses payment on a Specified Date will choose a month, year or quarter (as applicable) only, and payment will be made on the applicable date elected in (A), (B) or (C) above that falls within such month, year or quarter elected by the Participant.)

 

  (2) The commencement of distributions pursuant to the events elected in Section 1.07(a)(l) and Section 1.07(a)(3) shall be modified by application of the following:

 

   (A)  x    Separation from Service Event Delay – Separation from Service will be treated as not having occurred for 6 months after the date of such event
   (B)   ¨    Plan Level Delay – all distribution events (other than those based on Specified Date or Specified Age) will be treated as not having occurred for      days (insert number of days but not more than 30).

 

  (d) Installment Frequency and Duration

If installments are available under the Plan pursuant to Section 1.07(a), a Participant shall be permitted to elect that the installments will be paid (Complete 1 and 2 below):

 

Plan Number: 44415

      ECM NQ 2007 AA

(07/2007)

      10/10/2008

Page 8

© 2007 Fidelity Management & Research Company


  (1) at the following intervals:

 

   (A)  ¨    Monthly commencing on the day elected in Section 1.07(c)(l).
   (B)   ¨    Quarterly commencing on the day elected in Section l.07(c)(l) (with payments made at three-month intervals thereafter).
   (C)   x    Annually commencing on the day elected in Section 1.07(c)(l).

 

  (2) over the following term(s) (Complete either (A) or (B)):

(A)  x   Any term of whole years between 2 (minimum of 1) and 10 (maximum of 30).

(B)  ¨    Any of the whole year terms selected below.

 

¨   1

  ¨   2   ¨   3   ¨   4   ¨   5   ¨   6

¨   7

  ¨   8   ¨   9   ¨ 10   ¨ 11   ¨ 12

¨ 13

  ¨ 14   ¨ 15   ¨ 16   ¨ 17   ¨ 18

¨ 19

  ¨ 20   ¨ 21   ¨ 22   ¨ 23   ¨ 24

¨ 25

  ¨ 26   ¨ 27   ¨ 28   ¨ 29   ¨ 30

(Note: Only elect a term of one year if Section 1.07(d)(l)(A) and/or Section 1.07(d)(l)(B) is elected above.)

 

  (e) Conversion to Lump Sum

 

  x Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, if the Participant’s vested Account at the time such Account becomes payable to him hereunder does not exceed $ 25,000.00 distribution of the Participant’s vested Account shall automatically be made in the form of a single lump sum at the time prescribed in Section 1.07(c)(l).

 

  (f) Distribution Rules Applicable to Pre-effective Date Accruals

 

  ¨ Benefits accrued under the Plan (subject to Code section 409A) prior to the date in Section 1.01(b)(l) above are subject to distribution rules not described in Section 1.07(a) through (e), and such rules are described in Attachment A Re: PRE EFFECTIVE DATE ACCRUAL DISTRIBUTION RULES.

 

1.08 VESTING SCHEDULE

 

(a)    (1)    The Participant’s vested percentage in Matching Contributions elected in Section 1.05(b) shall be based upon the following schedule and unless Section 1.08(a)(2) is checked below will be based on the elapsed time method as described in Section 7.03(b).

 

Plan Number: 44415

      ECM NQ 2007 AA

(07/2007)

      10/10/2008

Page 9

© 2007 Fidelity Management & Research Company


Years of Service

 

Vesting %

0

  100

1

  100

 

 

   (2)    ¨    Vesting shall be based on the class year method as described in Section 7.03(c).
(b)    (1)    The Participant’s vested percentage in Employer Contributions elected in Section 1.05(c) shall be based upon the following schedule and unless Section 1.08(b)(2) is checked below will be based on the elapsed time method as described in Section 7.03(b).

Years of Service

  

Vesting %

0    100
1    100
  (2)    ¨    Vesting shall be based on the class year method as described in Section 7.03(c).
(c)   ¨    Years of Service shall exclude (Check one.) :
     (1)    ¨    for new plans, service prior to the Effective Date as defined in Section 1.01(b)(2)(A).
     (2)    ¨    for existing plans converting from another plan document, service prior to the original Effective Date as defined in Section 1.01(b)(2)(B).
     (Note: Do not elect to apply this Section 1.08(c) if vesting is based only on the class year method.)
(d)   ¨    Notwithstanding anything to the contrary herein, a Participant will forfeit his Matching Contributions and Employer Contributions (regardless of whether vested) upon the occurrence of the following event(s):
                                                                                                                                                                           
                                                                                                                                                                           
  (Note: Contributions with respect to Directors, which are 100% vested at all times, are subject to the rule in this subsection (d).)
(e)  

A Participant will be 100% vested in his Matching Contributions and Employer Contributions upon (Check the appropriate box(es)):

     (1)    ¨    Retirement eligibility is the date the Participant attains age      and completes      Years of Service, as defined in Section 7.03(b).

 

Plan Number: 44415

      ECM NQ 2007 AA

(07/2007)

      10/10/2008

Page 10

© 2007 Fidelity Management & Research Company


           (2)    ¨    Death.
           (3)    ¨    The date on which the Participant becomes disabled, as determined under Section 1.07(a)(2).
           (Note: Participants will automatically vest upon Change in Control if Section 1.07(a)(l)(G) is elected.)
  (f)    ¨    Years of Service in Section 1.08 (a)(l) and Section 1.08 (b)(l) shall include service with the following employers:
                                                                                                                                          
                                                                                                                                          
1.09   INVESTMENT DECISIONS
     A Participant’s Account shall be treated as invested in the Permissible Investments as directed by the Participant unless otherwise provided below:
                                                                                                                                          
                                                                                                                                          
1.10   ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS
     The Employer may elect Option below and complete the Superseding Provisions Addendum to describe overriding provisions that are not otherwise reflected in this Adoption Agreement.
     x    The Employer has completed the Superseding Provisions Addendum to reflect the provisions of the Plan that supersede provisions of this Adoption Agreement and/or the Basic Plan Document.

 

Plan Number: 44415

      ECM NQ 2007 AA

(07/2007)

      10/10/2008

Page 11

© 2007 Fidelity Management & Research Company


EXECUTION PAGE

(Fidelity’s Copy)

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Employer has caused this Adoption Agreement to be executed this      day of              , 20      .

 

Employer   

 

By   

 

Title   

 

 

Plan Number: 44415

      ECM NQ 2007 AA

(07/2007)

      10/10/2008

Page 12

© 2007 Fidelity Management & Research Company


EXECUTION PAGE

(Employer’s Copy)

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Employer has caused this Adoption Agreement to be executed this      day of              , 20      .

 

Employer   

 

By   

 

Title   

 

 

 

Plan Number: 44415

      ECM NQ 2007 AA

(07/2007)

      10/10/2008

Page 13

© 2007 Fidelity Management & Research Company


AMENDMENT EXECUTION PAGE

(Fidelity’s Copy)

Plan Name: Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. Non-Qualified Excess Investment Plan (the “Plan”)

Employer:   Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.

(Note: These execution pages are to be completed in the event the Employer modifies any prior election(s) or makes a new election(s) in this Adoption Agreement. Attach the amended page(s) of the Adoption Agreement to these execution pages.)

The following section(s) of the Plan are hereby amended effective as of the date(s) set forth below:

 

Section Amended

               Effective Date            
      
      
      
      
      
      
      
      

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Employer has caused this Amendment to be executed on the date below.

 

Employer:   

 

By:   

 

Title:   

 

Date:   

 

 

 

Plan Number: 44415

      ECM NQ 2007 AA

(07/2007)

      10/10/2008

Page 14

© 2007 Fidelity Management & Research Company


AMENDMENT EXECUTION PAGE

(Employer’s Copy)

Plan Name: Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. Non-Qualified Excess Investment Plan (the “Plan”)

Employer:   Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.

(Note: These execution pages are to be completed in the event the Employer modifies any prior election(s) or makes a new election(s) in this Adoption Agreement. Attach the amended page(s) of the Adoption Agreement to these execution pages.)

 

Section Amended

               Effective Date            
      
      
      
      
      
      
      
      

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Employer has caused this Amendment to be executed on the date below.

 

Employer:   

 

By:   

 

Title:   

 

Date:   

 

 

 

Plan Number: 44415

      ECM NQ 2007 AA

(07/2007)

      10/10/2008

Page 15

© 2007 Fidelity Management & Research Company


ATTACHMENT A

Re: PRE EFFECTIVE DATE ACCRUAL DISTRIBUTION RULES

Plan Name:    Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. Non-Qualified Excess Investment Plan (the “Plan”)

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                               

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              

                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                              

 

Plan Number: 44415

      ECM NQ 2007 AA

(07/2007)

      10/10/2008

Page 16

© 2007 Fidelity Management & Research Company


ATTACHMENT B

Re: SUPERSEDING PROVISIONS

for

Plan Name:    Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. Non-Qualified Excess Investment Plan (the “Plan”)

 

  (a)  Superseding Provision(s) – The following provisions supersede other provisions of this Adoption Agreement and/or the Basic Plan Document as described below:

 

(1) Participation by Two Inactive Mutual Fund Board Directors

As of the effective date of the Phoenix Investment Partners, Ltd. Non-Qualified Excess Investment Plan (the “Plan”), there are two directors with account balances in the Fund Board Deferred Compensation Program sponsored by The Phoenix Companies, Inc. These two directors will be reflected for recordkeeping purposes only under the Plan. These two directors will not be eligible to make deferral contributions under Section 1.05 of this Adoption Agreement and will not be eligible to receive any employer match or discretionary contributions under Section 1.06 of this Adoption Agreement. Elections with respect to the form and timing of distributions for the accounts of these two directors were made prior to the transfer of their accounts to this Plan and will continue to be effective (without any further modification) after the transfer of their accounts. The primary purpose of establishing accounts under the Plan for these two directors is to accommodate established distributions after the spin-off of Phoenix Investment Partners, Ltd.

 

(2) No Beneficiary Designation

If, upon the death of the Participant there is, in the opinion of the Administrator, no designated Beneficiary for all of part of the Participant’s Account, the Account shall be paid to the Participant’s surviving spouse or domestic partner. If there is no surviving spouse or domestic partner, the Account shall be paid to the Participant’s children (including stepchildren and adopted children) per stirpes, or, if there are no children, to the Participant’s estate. This provision shall supersede Section 7.02 of the Basic Plan Document.

 

(3) One-Time Change to Distribution Election

A Participant may make a one-time change to his or her distribution election pursuant to Section 1.07(b) of this Adoption Agreement provided that:

 

  (i) the Participant’s subsequent distribution election change must not take effect until at least 12 months after the date on which the subsequent election is made; and

 

  (ii) the payment with respect to which the Participant’s subsequent distribution election is made must be deferred for a period of not less than five years from the date such payment was initially to be paid pursuant to the Participant’s initial distribution election.

 

Plan Number: 44415

      ECM NQ 2007 AA

(07/2007)

      10/10/2008

Page 17

© 2007 Fidelity Management & Research Company


The CORPORATE plan for Retirement SM

EXECUTIVE P LAN

BASIC PLAN DOCUMENT

IMPORTANT NOTE

This document has not been approved by the Department of Labor, the Internal Revenue Service or any other governmental entity. The Employer must determine whether the plan is subject to the Federal securities laws and the securities laws of the various states. The Employer may not rely on this document to ensure any particular tax consequences or to ensure that the Plan is “unfunded and maintained primarily for the purpose of providing deferred compensation to a select group of management or highly compensated employees” under the Employee Retirement Income Security Act with respect to the Employer’s particular situation. Fidelity Management Trust Company, its affiliates and employees cannot and do not provide legal or tax advice or opinions in connection with this document. This document does not constitute legal or tax advice or opinions and is not intended or written to be used, and it cannot be used by any taxpayer, for the purposes of avoiding penalties that may be imposed on the taxpayer. This document must be reviewed by the Employer’s attorney prior to adoption.

 

(07/2007)

      ECM NQ 2007 BPD

© 2007 Fidelity Management & Research Company


CORPORATEplan for Retirement EXECUTIVE

BASIC PLAN DOCUMENT

 

ARTICLE 1

ADOPTION AGREEMENT

ARTICLE 2

DEFINITIONS

2.01 - Definitions

ARTICLE 3

PARTICIPATION

3.01 - Date of Participation

3.02 - Participation Following a Change in Status

ARTICLE 4

CONTRIBUTIONS

4.01 - Deferral Contributions

4.02 - Matching Contributions

4.03 - Employer Contributions

4.04 - Election Forms

ARTICLE 5

PARTICIPANTS’ ACCOUNTS

ARTICLE 6

INVESTMENT OF ACCOUNTS

6.01 - Manner of Investment

6.02 - Investment Decisions, Earnings and Expenses

ARTICLE 7

RIGHT TO BENEFITS

7.01 - Retirement

7.02 - Death

7.03 - Separation from Service

7.04 - Vesting after Partial Distribution

7.05 - Forfeitures

7.06 - Change in Control

7.07 - Disability

7.08 - Directors

ARTICLE 8

DISTRIBUTION OF BENEFITS

8.01 - Events Triggering and Form of Distributions

8.02 - Notice to Trustee

8.03 - Unforeseeable Emergency Withdrawals

 

(07/2007)

   i    ECM NQ 2007 BPD

© 2007 Fidelity Management & Research Company


ARTICLE 9

AMENDMENT AND TERMINATION

9.01 - Amendment by Employer

9.02 - Termination

ARTICLE 10

MISCELLANEOUS

10.01 - Communication to Participants

10.02 - Limitation of Rights

10.03 - Nonalienability of Benefits

10.04 - Facility of Payment

10.05 - Plan Records

10.06 - USERRA

10.07 - Governing Law

ARTICLE 11

PLAN ADMINISTRATION

11.01 - Powers and Responsibilities of the Administrator

11.02 - Claims and Review Procedures

 

(07/2007)

   ii    ECM NQ 2007 BPD

© 2007 Fidelity Management & Research Company


PREAMBLE

It is the intention of the Employer to establish herein an unfunded plan maintained solely for the purpose of providing deferred compensation for a select group of management or highly compensated employees as provided in ERISA. The Employer further intends that this Plan comply with Code section 409A, and the Plan is to be construed accordingly.

If the Employer has previously maintained the Plan described herein pursuant to a previously existing plan document or description, the Employer’s adoption of this Plan document is an amendment and complete restatement of, and supersedes, such previously existing document or description with respect to benefits accrued or to be paid on or after the effective date of this document (except to the extent expressly provided otherwise herein).

Article 1. Adoption Agreement .

Article 2. Definitions .

2.01. Definitions .

(a) Wherever used herein, the following terms have the meanings set forth below, unless a different meaning is clearly required by the context:

(1) “Account” means an account established on the books of the Employer for the purpose of recording amounts credited to a Participant and any income, expenses, gains, or losses attributable thereto.

(2) “Active Participant” means a Participant who is eligible to accrue benefits under a plan (other than earnings on amounts previously deferred) within the 24-month period ending on the date the Participant becomes a Participant under Section 3.01. Notwithstanding the above, however, a Participant is not an Active Participant if he has been paid all amounts deferred under the plan, provided that he was, on and before the date of the last payment, ineligible to continue or to elect to continue to participate in the plan for periods after such last payment (other than through an election of a different time and form of payment with respect to the amounts paid).

 

  (A) For purposes of Section 4.01(d), as used in the first paragraph of the definition of “Active Participant” above, “plan” means an account balance plan (or portion thereof) of the Employer or a Related Employer subject to Code section 409A pursuant to which the Participant is eligible to accrue benefits only if the Participant elects to defer compensation thereunder, and the “date the Participant becomes a Participant under Section 3.01” refers only to the date the Participant becomes a Participant with respect to Deferral Contributions.

 

  (B) For purposes of Section 8.01(a)(2), as used in the first paragraph of the definition of “Active Participant” above, “plan” means an account balance plan (or portion thereof) of the Employer or a Related Employer subject to Code section 409A pursuant to which the Participant is eligible to accrue benefits without any election by the Participant to defer compensation thereunder, and the “date the Participant becomes a Participant under Section 3.01” refers only to the date the Participant becomes a Participant with respect to Matching or Employer Contributions.

 

(07/2007)

   1    ECM NQ 2007 BPD

© 2007 Fidelity Management & Research Company


(3) “Administrator” means the Employer adopting this Plan (but excluding Related Employers) or other person designated by the Employer in Section 1.01(c).

(4) “Adoption Agreement” means Article 1, under which the Employer establishes and adopts or amends the Plan and selects certain provisions of the Plan. The provisions of the Adoption Agreement are an integral part of the Plan.

(5) “Beneficiary” means the person or persons entitled under Section 7.02 to receive benefits under the Plan upon the death of a Participant.

(6) “Bonus” means any Performance-based Bonus or any Non-performance-based Bonus as listed and identified in the table in Section 1.05(a)(2) hereof.

(7) “Change in Control” means a change in control with respect to the applicable corporation, as defined in 26 CFR section 1.409A-3(i)(5). For purposes of this definition “applicable corporation” means:

 

  (A) The corporation for which the Participant is performing services at the time of the change in control event;

 

  (B) The corporation(s) liable for payment hereunder (but only if either the accrued benefit hereunder is attributable to the performance of service by the Participant for such corporation(s) or there is a bona fide business purpose for such corporation(s) to be liable for such payment and, in either case, no significant purpose of making such corporation(s) liable for such benefit is the avoidance of Federal income tax); or

 

  (C) A corporate majority shareholder of one of the corporations described in (A) or (B) above or any corporation in a chain of corporations in which each corporation is a majority shareholder of another corporation in the chain, ending in a corporation identified in (A) or (B) above.

(8) “Code” means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended from time to time.

(9) “Compensation” means for purposes of Article 4:

 

  (A) If the Employer elects Section 1.04(a), such term as defined in such Section 1.04(a).

 

  (B) If the Employer elects Section 1.04(b), wages as defined in Code section 3401(a) and all other payments of compensation to an Employee by the Employer (in the course of the Employer’s trade or business) for which the Employer is required to furnish the Employee a written statement under Code sections 6041(d) and 6051(a)(3), excluding any items elected by the Employer in Section 1.04(b), reimbursements or other expense allowances, fringe benefits (cash and non-cash), moving expenses, deferred compensation and welfare benefits, but including amounts that are not includable in the gross income of the Employee under a salary reduction agreement by reason of the application of Code section 125, 132(f)(4), 402(e)(3), 402(h) or 403(b). Compensation shall be determined without regard to any rules under Code section 3401(a) that limit the remuneration included in wages based on the nature or location of the employment or the services performed (such as the exception for agricultural labor in Code section 3401(a)(2)).

 

(07/2007)

   2    ECM NQ 2007 BPD

© 2007 Fidelity Management & Research Company


  (C) If the Employer elects Section 1.04(c), any and all monetary remuneration paid to the Director by the Employer, including, but not limited to, meeting fees and annual retainers, and excluding items listed in Section 1.04(c).

For purposes of this Section 2.01(a)(9), Compensation shall also include amounts deferred pursuant to an election under Section 4.01.

(10) “Deferral Contribution” means a hypothetical contribution credited to a Participant’s Account as the result of the Participant’s election to reduce his Compensation in exchange for such credit, as described in Section 4.01.

(11) “Director” means a person, other than an Employee, who is elected or appointed as a member of the board of directors of the Employer, with respect to a corporation, or to an analogous position with respect to an entity that is not a corporation.

(12) “Disability” is described in Section 1.07(a)(2).

(13) “Employee” means any employee of the Employer.

(14) “Employer” means the employer named in Section 1.02(a) and any Related Employers listed in Section 1.02(b).

(15) “Employer Contribution” means a hypothetical contribution credited to a Participant’s Account under the Plan as a result of the Employer’s crediting of such amount, as described in Section 4.03.

(16) “Employment Commencement Date” means the date on which the Employee commences employment with the Employer.

(17) “ERISA” means the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as from time to time amended.

(18) “Inactive Participant” means a Participant who is not an Employee or Director.

(19) “Matching Contribution” means a hypothetical contribution credited to a Participant’s Account under the Plan as a result of the Employer’s crediting of such amount, as described in Section 4.02.

(20) “Non-performance-based Bonus” means any Bonus listed under the column entitled “non-performance based” in Section 1.05(a)(2).

(21) “Participant” means any Employee or Director who participates in the Plan in accordance with Article 3 (or formerly participated in the Plan and has an amount credited to his Account).

(22) “Performance-based Bonus” means any Bonus listed under the column entitled “performance based” in Section 1.05(a)(2), which constitutes compensation, the amount of, or entitlement to, which is contingent on the satisfaction of pre-established organizational or individual performance criteria relating to a performance period of at least 12 consecutive months and which is further defined in 26 CFR section 1.409A-1(e).

(23) “Permissible Investment” means the investments specified by the Employer as available for hypothetical investment of Accounts. The Permissible Investments under the Plan are listed in the Service Agreement, and the provisions of the Service Agreement listing the Permissible Investments are hereby incorporated herein.

 

(07/2007)

   3    ECM NQ 2007 BPD

© 2007 Fidelity Management & Research Company


(24) “Plan” means the plan established by the Employer as set forth herein as a new plan or as an amendment to an existing plan, such establishment to be evidenced by the Employer’s execution of the Adoption Agreement, together with any and all amendments hereto.

(25) “Related Employer” means any employer other than the Employer named in Section 1.02(a), if the Employer and such other employer are members of a controlled group of corporations (as defined in Code section 414(b)) or trades or businesses (whether or not incorporated) under common control (as defined in Code section 414(c)).

(26) “Separation from Service” means the date the Participant retires or otherwise has a termination of employment (or a termination of the contract pursuant to which the Participant has provided services as a Director, for a Director Participant) with the Employer and all Related Employers, as further defined in 26 CFR section 1.409A-1(h); provided, however, that

(A) For purposes of this paragraph (26), the definition of “Related Employer” shall be modified as follows:

(i) In applying Code section 1563(a)(1), (2) and (3) for purposes of determining a controlled group of corporations under Code section 414(b), the phrase “at least 50%” shall be used instead of “at least 80 percent” each place “at least 80 percent” appears in Code section 1563(a)(1), (2) and (3); and

(ii) In applying 26 CFR section 1.414(c)-2 for purposes of determining trades or business (whether or not incorporated) under common control for purposes of Code section 414(c), the phrase “at least 50%” shall be used instead of “at least 80 percent” each place “at least 80 percent” appears in 26 CFR section 1.414(c)-2.

(B) In the event a Participant provides services to the Employer or a Related Employer as an Employee and a Director,

(i) The Employee Participant’s services as a Director are not taken into account in determining whether the Participant has a Separation from Service as an Employee; and

(ii) The Director Participant’s services as an Employee are not taken into account in determining whether the Participant has a Separation from Service as a Director

provided that this Plan is not aggregated with a plan subject to Code section 409A in which the Director Participant participates as an employee of the Employer or a Related Employer or in which the Employee Participant participates as a director (or a similar position with respect to a non-corporate entity) of the Employer or a Related Employer, as applicable, pursuant to 26 CFR section 1.409A-1(c)(2)(ii).

(27) “Service Agreement” means the agreement between the Employer and Trustee regarding the arrangement between the parties for recordkeeping services with respect to the Plan.

(28) “Specified Employee,” (unless defined by the Employer in a separate writing, in which case such writing is hereby incorporated herein) means a Participant who meets the requirements in 26 CFR section 1.409A-1(i) applying the default definition components provided in such regulation (those that would apply absent elections, as described in 26 CFR section 1.409A-1(i)(8)), including an identification date of December 31. In the event that such default definition components are applicable, the Employer has elected Section 1.01(b)(2) and, immediately prior to the date in Section 1.01(b)(2), the Plan applied an identification date (the “prior date”) other than the December 31, the prior date shall continue to apply, and December 31 shall not apply, until the date that is 12 months after the date in Section 1.01(b)(2).

 

(07/2007)

   4    ECM NQ 2007 BPD

© 2007 Fidelity Management & Research Company


(29) “Trust” means the trust created by the Employer, pursuant to the Trust agreement between the Employer and the Trustee, under which assets are held, administered, and managed, subject to the claims of the Employer’s creditors in the event of the Employer’s insolvency, until paid to Participants and their Beneficiaries as specified in the Plan.

(30) “Trust Fund” means the property held in the Trust by the Trustee.

(31) “Trustee” means the individual(s) or entity appointed by the Employer under the Trust agreement.

(32) “Unforeseeable Emergency” is as defined in 26 CFR section 1.409A-3(i)(3)(i).

(33) “Year of Service” is as defined in Section 7.03(b) for purposes of the elapsed time method and in Section 7.03(c) for purposes of the class year method.

(b) Pronouns used in the Plan are in the masculine gender but include the feminine gender unless the context clearly indicates otherwise.

Article 3. Participation .

3.01. Date of Participation . An Employee or Director becomes a Participant on the date such Employee’s or Director’s participation becomes effective (as described in Section 1.03).

3.02. Participation following a Change in Status .

(a) If a Participant ceases to be an Employee or Director and thereafter resumes the same status he had as a Participant during his immediately previous participation in the Plan (as an Employee if previously a Participant as an Employee and as a Director if previously a Participant as a Director), he will again become a Participant immediately upon resumption of such status, provided, however, that if such Participant is a Director, he is an eligible Director upon resumption of such status (as defined in Section 1.03(b)), and provided, further, that if such Participant is an Employee, he is an eligible Employee upon resumption of such status (as defined in Section 1.03(a)). Deferral Contributions to such Participant’s Account thereafter, if any, shall be subject to (1) or (2) below.

(1) If the Participant resumes such status during a period for which such Participant had previously made a valid deferral election pursuant to Section 4.01, he shall immediately resume such Deferral Contributions. Deferral Contributions applicable to periods thereafter shall be made pursuant to the election and other rules described in Section 4.01.

(2) If the Participant resumes such status after the period described in the first sentence of paragraph (1) of this Section 3.02, any Deferral Contributions with respect to such Participant shall be made pursuant to the election and other rules described in Section 4.01.

(b) When an individual who is a Participant due to his status as an eligible Employee (as defined in Section 1.03(a)) continues in the employ of the Employer or Related Employer but ceases to be an eligible Employee, the individual shall not receive an allocation of Matching or Employer Contributions for the period during which he is not an eligible Employee. Such Participant shall continue to make Deferral Contributions throughout the remainder of the applicable period (as described in Section 4.01) in which such change in status occurs, if, and as, applicable.

 

(07/2007)

   5    ECM NQ 2007 BPD

© 2007 Fidelity Management & Research Company


(c) When an individual who is a Participant due to his status as an eligible Director (as defined in Section 1.03(b)) continues his directorship with the Employer or a Related Employer but ceases to be an eligible Director, the individual shall not receive an allocation of Matching or Employer Contributions for the period during which he is not an eligible Director. Such Participant shall continue to make Deferral Contributions throughout the remainder of the applicable period (as described in Section 4.01) in which such change in status occurs, if, and as, applicable.

Article 4. Contributions .

 

4. 01 Deferral Contributions . If elected by the Employer pursuant to Section 1.05(a) and/or 1.06(a), a Participant described in such applicable Section may elect to reduce his Compensation by a specified percentage or dollar amount. The Employer shall credit an amount to the Participant’s Account equal to the amount of such reduction. Except as otherwise provided in this Section 4.01, such election shall be effective to defer Compensation relating to all services performed in the calendar year beginning after the calendar year in which the Participant executes the election. Under no circumstances may a salary reduction agreement be adopted retroactively. If the Employer has elected to apply Section 1.05(a)(2), no amount will be deducted from Bonuses unless the Participant has made a separate deferral election applicable to such Bonuses. A Participant’s election to defer Compensation may be changed at any time before the last permissible date for making such election, at which time such election becomes irrevocable. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, the conditions under which a Participant may make a deferral election as provided in the applicable salary reduction agreement are hereby incorporated herein and supersede any otherwise inconsistent Plan provision.

 

  (a) Performance Based Bonus . With respect to a Performance-based Bonus, a separate election made pursuant to Section 1.05(a)(2) will be effective to defer such Bonus if made no later than 6 months before the end of the period during which the services on which such Performance-based Bonus is based are performed.

 

  (b) Fiscal Year Bonus . With respect to a Bonus relating to a period of service coextensive with one or more consecutive fiscal years of the Employer, of which no amount is paid or payable during the service period, a separate election pursuant to Section 1.05(a)(2) will be effective to defer such Bonus if made no later than the close of the Employer’s fiscal year next preceding the first fiscal year in which the Participant performs any services for which such Bonus is payable.

 

  (c) Cancellation of Salary Reduction Agreement .

(1) The Administrator may cancel a Participant’s salary reduction agreement pursuant to the provisions of 26 CFR section 1.409A-3(j)(4)(viii) in connection with the Participant’s Unforeseeable Emergency. To the extent required pursuant to the application of 26 CFR section 1.401(k)-1(d)(3) (or any successor thereto), a Participant’s salary reduction agreement shall be automatically cancelled.

(2) The Administrator may cancel a Participant’s salary reduction agreement pursuant to the provisions of 26 CFR section 1.409A-3(j)(4)(xii) in connection with the Participant’s disability. Such cancellation must occur by the later of the end of the Participant’s taxable year or the 15 th day of the third month following the date the Participant incurs a disability. For purposes of this paragraph (2), a disability is any medically determinable physical or mental impairment resulting in the Participant’s inability to perform the duties of his or her position or any substantially similar position, where such impairment can be expected to result in death or can be expected to last for a continuous period of not less than six months.

 

(07/2007)

   6    ECM NQ 2007 BPD

© 2007 Fidelity Management & Research Company


In no event may the Participant, directly or indirectly, elect such a cancellation. A cancellation pursuant to this subsection (c) shall apply only to Compensation not yet earned.

 

  (d) Initial Deferral Election . Notwithstanding the above, if the Participant is not an Active Participant, the Participant may make an election to defer Compensation within 30 days after the Participant becomes a Participant, which election shall be effective with respect to Compensation payable for services performed during the calendar year (or other deferral period described in (a) or (b) above, as applicable) and after the date of such election. For Compensation that is earned based upon a specified performance period (e.g., an annual bonus) an election pursuant to this subsection (d) will be effective to defer an amount equal to the total amount of the Compensation for the performance period multiplied by the ratio of the number of days remaining in the performance period after the election over the total number of days in the performance period.

4.02. Matching Contributions . If so provided by the Employer in Section 1.05(b) and/or 1.06(b)(1), the Employer shall credit a Matching Contribution to the Account of each Participant entitled to such Matching Contribution. The amount of the Matching Contribution shall be determined in accordance with Section 1.05(b) and/or 1.06(b)(1), as applicable, provided, however, that the Matching Contributions credited to the Account of a Participant pursuant to Section 1.05(b)(2) shall be limited pursuant to (a) and (b) below:

(a) The sum of Matching Contributions made on behalf of a Participant pursuant to Section 1.05(b)(2) for any calendar year and any other benefits the Participant accrues pursuant to another plan subject to Code section 409A as a result of such Participant’s action or inaction under a qualified plan with respect to elective deferrals and other employee pre-tax contributions subject to the contribution restrictions under Code section 401(a)(30) or 402(g) shall not result in an increase in the amounts deferred under all plans subject to Code section 409A in which the Participant participates in excess of the limit with respect to elective deferrals under Code section 402(g)(1)(A), (B) and (C) in effect for the calendar year in which such action or inaction occurs; and

(b) The Matching Contributions made on behalf of a Participant pursuant to Section 1.05(b)(2) shall never exceed 100% of the matching amounts that would be provided under the qualified employer plan identified in Section 1.05(b)(2) absent any plan-based restrictions that reflect limits on qualified plan contributions under the Code.

4.03. Employer Contributions. If so provided by the Employer in Section 1.05(c)(1) and/or 1.06(b)(2), the Employer shall make an Employer Contribution to be credited to the Account of each Participant entitled thereto in the amount provided in such Section(s). If so provided by the Employer in Section 1.05(c)(2) and/or 1.06(b)(3), the Employer may make an Employer Contribution to be credited to the Account maintained on behalf of any Participant in such an amount as the Employer, in its sole discretion, shall determine, subject to the provisions of the applicable Section.

4.04. Election Forms. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, the terms of an election form with respect to the conditions under which a Participant may make any election hereunder, as provided in such form (whether electronic or otherwise) are hereby incorporated herein and supersede any otherwise inconsistent Plan provision.

Article 5. Participants’ Accounts . The Administrator will maintain an Account for each Participant, reflecting hypothetical contributions credited to the Participant, along with hypothetical earnings, expenses, gains and losses, pursuant to the terms hereof. A hypothetical contribution shall be credited to the Account of a Participant on the date determined by the Employer and accepted by the Plan recordkeeper. The Administrator will maintain such other accounts and records as it deems appropriate to the discharge of its duties under the Plan.

 

(07/2007)

   7    ECM NQ 2007 BPD

© 2007 Fidelity Management & Research Company


Article 6. Investment of Accounts .

6.01. Manner of Investment . All amounts credited to the Accounts of Participants shall be treated as though invested and reinvested only in Permissible Investments.

6.02. Investment Decisions, Earnings and Expenses . Investments in which the Accounts of Participants shall be treated as invested and reinvested shall be directed by the Employer or by each Participant, or both, in accordance with Section 1.09. All dividends, interest, gains, and distributions of any nature that would be earned on a Permissible Investment will be credited to the Account as though reinvested in additional shares of that Permissible Investment. Expenses that would be attributable to such investments shall be charged to the Account of the Participant.

Article 7. Right to Benefits .

7.01. Retirement . If provided by the Employer in Section 1.08(e)(1), the Account of a Participant or an Inactive Participant who attains retirement eligibility prior to a Separation from Service will be 100% vested.

7.02. Death . If provided by the Employer in Section 1.08(e)(2), the Account of a Participant or former Participant who dies before the distribution of his entire Account will be 100% vested, provided that at the time of his death he is earning Years of Service.

A Participant may designate a Beneficiary or Beneficiaries, or change any prior designation of Beneficiary or Beneficiaries, by giving notice to the Administrator on a form designated by the Administrator. If more than one person is designated as the Beneficiary, their respective interests shall be as indicated on the designation form.

A copy of the death certificate or other sufficient documentation must be filed with and approved by the Administrator. If upon the death of the Participant there is, in the opinion of the Administrator, no designated Beneficiary for part or all of the Participant’s Account, such amount will be paid to his surviving spouse or, if none, to his estate (such spouse or estate shall be deemed to be the Beneficiary for purposes of the Plan). If a Beneficiary dies after benefits to such Beneficiary have commenced, but before they have been completed, and, in the opinion of the Administrator, no person has been designated to receive such remaining benefits, then such benefits shall be paid to the deceased Beneficiary’s estate.

A distribution to a Beneficiary of a Specified Employee is not considered to be a payment to a Specified Employee for purposes of Sections 1.07 and 8.01(e).

7.03. Separation from Service .

 

  (a) General. If provided by the Employer in Section 1.08, and subject to Section 1.08(e)(2), if a Participant has a Separation from Service, he will be entitled to a benefit equal to (i) the vested percentage(s) of the value of the Matching and Employer Contributions credited to his Account, as adjusted for income, expense, gain, or loss, such percentage(s) determined in accordance with the vesting schedule(s) and methodology selected by the Employer in Section 1.08, and (ii) the value of the Deferral Contributions to his Account as adjusted for income, expense, gain, or loss. The amount payable under this Section 7.03 will be distributed in accordance with Article 8.

 

(07/2007)

   8    ECM NQ 2007 BPD

© 2007 Fidelity Management & Research Company


  (b) Elapsed Time Vesting. Unless otherwise provided by the Employer in Section 1.08, vesting shall be determined based on the elapsed time method. For purposes of the elapsed time method, “Years of Service” means, with respect to any Participant or Inactive Participant, the number of whole years of his periods of service with the Employer and any Related Employers (as defined in Section 2.01(a)(26)(A)), subject to any exclusion elected by the Employer in Section 1.08(c). A Participant or Inactive Participant will receive credit for the aggregate of all time period(s) commencing with his Employment Commencement Date and ending on the date a break in service begins, unless any such years are excluded by Section 1.08(c). A Participant or Inactive Participant will also receive credit for any period of severance of less than 12 consecutive months. Fractional periods of a year will be expressed in terms of days.

A break in service is a period of severance of at least 12 consecutive months. A “period of severance” is a continuous period of time beginning on the date the Participant or Inactive Participant incurs a Separation from Service, or if earlier, the 12-month anniversary of the date on which the Participant or Inactive Participant was otherwise first absent from service.

Notwithstanding the above, the Employer shall comply with any service crediting rules to the extent required by applicable law.

 

  (c) Class Year Vesting. If provided by the Employer in Section 1.08, a Participant’s or Inactive Participant’s vested percentage in the Matching Contributions and/or Employer Contributions portion(s) of his Account shall be determined pursuant to the class year method. Pursuant to such method, amounts attributable to the applicable contribution types are assigned to “class years” established in the records of the Plan. Such class years are years (calendar or non-calendar) to which the contribution is assigned by the Administrator, as described in the Service Agreement between the Trustee and the Employer. The Participant’s or Inactive Participant’s vested percentage in amounts attributable to a particular contribution is determined from the beginning of the applicable class year to the date the Participant or Inactive Participant incurs a Separation from Service. For purposes of the class year method, a Participant or Inactive Participant is credited with a Year of Service on the first day of each such class year.

7.04. Vesting after Partial Distribution . If a distribution from a Participant’s Account has been made to him at a time when his Account is less than 100% vested, the vesting schedule in Section 1.08 will thereafter apply only to amounts in his Account attributable to Matching Contributions and Employer Contributions credited after such distribution. The balance of his Account attributable to Matching Contributions and Employer Contributions immediately after such distribution will be subject to the following for the purpose of determining his interest therein.

At any relevant time prior to a forfeiture of any portion thereof under Section 7.05, a Participant’s nonforfeitable interest in the portion of his Account described in the sentence immediately above will be equal to P(AB + (RxD))-(RxD), where P is the nonforfeitable percentage at the relevant time determined under Section 1.08; AB is the account balance of such portion at the relevant time; D is the amount of the distribution; and R is the ratio of the account balance of such portion at the relevant time to the account balance of such portion after distribution. Following a forfeiture of any portion of such portion under Section 7.05 below, any balance with respect to such portion will remain fully vested and nonforfeitable.

7.05. Forfeitures . Once payments are to commence to a Participant or Inactive Participant hereunder, the portion of such Account subject to the same payment commencement date but not yet vested, if any, (determined by his vested percentage at such payment commencement date) will be forfeited by him.

7.06. Change in Control . If the Employer has elected to apply Section 1.07(a)(3)(D), then, upon a Change in Control, notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan to the contrary, all Participant Accounts shall be 100% vested.

 

(07/2007)

   9    ECM NQ 2007 BPD

© 2007 Fidelity Management & Research Company


7.07. Disability . If the Employer has elected to apply Section 1.08(e)(3), then, upon the date a Participant incurs a Disability, as defined in Section 1.07(a)(2), notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan to the contrary, all Accounts of such Participant shall be 100% vested.

7.08. Directors . Notwithstanding any other provision of the Plan to the contrary, all Accounts of a Participant who is a Director shall be 100% vested at all times, including Accounts attributable to the Participant’s service as an Employee, if any.

Article 8. Distribution of Benefits .

8.01 Events Triggering, and Form of, Distributions .

 

  (a) Events triggering the distribution of benefits and the form of such distributions are described in Section 1.07(a), pursuant to the Employer’s election and/or the Participant’s election, as applicable.

 

  (1) With respect to the form and time of distribution of amounts attributable to a Deferral Contribution, a Participant election must be made no later than the time by which the Participant must elect to make a Deferral Contribution, as described in Section 4.01.

 

  (2) With respect to the form and time of distribution of amounts attributable to Matching or Employer Contributions, a Participant election must be made no later than the time by which a Participant would be required to make a Deferral Contribution as described in Section 4.01 with respect to the calendar year for which the Matching and/or Employer Contributions are credited. For purposes of applying Section 4.01(d) “Active Participant” shall have the meaning assigned in Section 2.01(a)(2)(B).

 

  (3) Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, an election choosing a distribution trigger and payment method pursuant to Section 1.07(a)(1) will only be effective with respect to amounts attributable to contributions credited to the Participant’s Account for the calendar year (or other deferral period described in 4.01(a) or (b)) to which such election relates. Amounts attributable to contributions credited to a Participant’s account prior to the effective date of any new election will not be affected and will be paid in accordance with the otherwise applicable election.

 

  (b) If the Employer elects to permit a distribution election change pursuant to Section 1.07(b), then any such distribution election change must satisfy (1) through (3) below:

 

  (1) Such election may not take effect until at least 12 months after the date on which such election is made.

 

  (2) In the case of an election related to a payment not on account of Disability, death or the occurrence of an Unforeseeable Emergency, the payment with respect to which such election is made must be deferred for a period of not less than five years from the date such payment would otherwise have been paid (or in the case of installment payments, five years from the date the first amount was scheduled to be paid).

 

(07/2007)

   10    ECM NQ 2007 BPD

© 2007 Fidelity Management & Research Company


  (3) Any election related to a payment at a specified time or pursuant to a fixed schedule may not be made less than 12 months prior to the date the payment is scheduled to be paid (or in the case of installment payments, 12 months prior to the date the first amount was scheduled to be paid).

With respect to any initial distribution election, a Participant shall in no event be permitted to make more than one distribution election change.

 

  (c) A Participant’s entitlement to installments will not be treated as an entitlement to a series of separate payments.

 

  (d) If the Plan does not provide for Plan-level payment triggers pursuant to Section 1.07(a)(3), and the Participant does not designate in the manner prescribed by the Administrator the method of distribution, and/or the distribution trigger (if and as required), such method of distribution shall be a lump sum at Separation from Service.

 

  (e) Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, with respect to any Specified Employee, if the applicable payment trigger is Separation from Service, then payment shall not commence before the date that is six months after the date of Separation from Service (or, if earlier, the date of death of the Specified Employee, pursuant to Section 7.02). Payments to which a Specified Employee would otherwise be entitled during the first six months following the date of Separation from Service are delayed by six months.

 

  (f) Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, the Administrator may, in its discretion, automatically pay out a Participant’s vested Account in a lump sum, provided that such payment satisfies the requirements in (1) through (3) below:

 

  (1) Such payment results in the termination and liquidation of the entirety of the Participant’s interest under the plan (as defined in 26 CFR section 1.409A-1(c)(2)), including all agreements, methods, programs, or other arrangements with respect to which deferrals of compensation are treated as having been deferred under a single nonqualified deferred compensation plan under 26 CFR section 1.409A-1(c)(2);

 

  (2) Such payment is not greater than the applicable dollar amount under Code section 402(g)(1)(B); and

 

  (3) Such exercise of Administrator discretion is evidenced in writing no later than the date of such payment.

 

  (g) Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, the Administrator may, in its discretion, delay a payment otherwise required hereunder to a date after the designated payment date due to any of the circumstances described in (1) through (4) below, provided that the Administrator treats all payments to similarly situated Participants on a reasonably consistent basis.

 

  (1) In the event the Administrator reasonably anticipates that, if the payment were made as scheduled, the Employer’s deduction with respect to such payment would not be permitted due to the application of Code section 162(m), provided the delay complies with the conditions in 26 CFR section 1.409A-2(b)(7)(i).

 

  (2) In the event the Administrator reasonably anticipates that the making of such payment will violate Federal securities laws or other applicable law, provided the delay complies with the conditions in 26 CFR section 1.409A-2(b)(7)(ii).

 

  (3) Upon such other events and conditions as the Commissioner of the Internal Revenue Service may prescribe in generally applicable guidance published in the Internal Revenue Bulletin.

 

(07/2007)

   11    ECM NQ 2007 BPD

© 2007 Fidelity Management & Research Company


  (4) Upon a change in control event, provided the delay complies with conditions in 26 CFR section 1.409A-3(i)(5)(iv).

 

  (h) Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, the Administrator may provide an election to change the time or form of a payment hereunder to satisfy the requirements of the Uniformed Services Employment and Reemployment Rights Act of 1994, as amended, 38 USC sections 4301 through 4344.

8.02. Notice to Trustee . The Administrator will provide direction to the Trustee, as provided in the Trust agreement, whenever any Participant or Beneficiary is entitled to receive benefits under the Plan. The Administrator’s notice shall indicate the form, amount and frequency of benefits that such Participant or Beneficiary shall receive.

8.03. Unforeseeable Emergency Withdrawals . Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, a Participant may apply to the Administrator to withdraw some or all of his Account if such withdrawal is made on account of an Unforeseeable Emergency as determined by the Administrator in accordance with the requirements of and subject to the limitations provided in 26 CFR section 1.409A-3(i)(3).

Article 9. Amendment and Termination .

9.01 Amendment by Employer . The Employer reserves the authority to amend the Plan in its discretion. Any such amendment notwithstanding, no Participant’s Account shall be reduced by such amendment below the amount to which the Participant would have been entitled if he had voluntarily left the employ of the Employer immediately prior to the date of the change.

9.02. Termination . The Employer has no obligation or liability whatsoever to maintain the Plan for any length of time and may terminate the Plan at any time by written notice delivered to the Trustee without any liability hereunder for any such discontinuance or termination. Such termination shall comply with 26 CFR section 1.409A-3(j)(4)(ix) and other applicable guidance.

Article 10. Miscellaneous .

10.01. Communication to Participants . The Plan will be communicated to all Participants by the Employer promptly after the Plan is adopted.

10.02. Limitation of Rights . Neither the establishment of the Plan and the Trust, nor any amendment thereof, nor the creation of any fund or account, nor the payment of any benefits, will be construed as giving to any Participant or other person any legal or equitable right against the Employer, Administrator or Trustee, except as provided herein; in no event will the terms of employment or service of any individual be modified or in any way affected hereby.

10.03. Nonalienability of Benefits . The benefits provided hereunder will not be subject to alienation, assignment, garnishment, attachment, execution or levy of any kind, either voluntarily or involuntarily, and any attempt to cause such benefits to be so subjected will not be recognized, except to such extent as may be required by law and as provided pursuant to a domestic relations order (defined in Code section 414(p)(1)(B)), as determined by the Administrator. Pursuant to a domestic relations order, payments may be accelerated to a time sooner, and pursuant to a schedule more rapid, than the time and schedule applicable in the absence of the domestic relations order, provided that such payment pursuant to such order is not made to the Participant and provided further that this provision shall not be construed to provide the Participant discretion regarding whether such payment time or schedule will be accelerated.

 

(07/2007)

   12    ECM NQ 2007 BPD

© 2007 Fidelity Management & Research Company


10.04. Facility of Payment . In the event the Administrator determines, on the basis of medical reports or other evidence satisfactory to the Administrator, that the recipient of any benefit payments under the Plan is incapable of handling his affairs by reason of minority, illness, infirmity or other incapacity, the Administrator may disburse such payments, or direct the Trustee to disburse such payments, as applicable, to a person or institution designated by a court which has jurisdiction over such recipient or a person or institution otherwise having the legal authority under State law for the care and control of such recipient. The receipt by such person or institution of any such payments shall be complete acquittance therefore, and any such payment to the extent thereof, shall discharge the liability of the Trust for the payment of benefits hereunder to such recipient.

10.05. Plan Records . The Administrator shall maintain the records of the Plan on a calendar-year basis.

10.06. USERRA . Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, the Administrator shall permit any Participant election and make any payments hereunder required by the Uniformed Services Employment and Reemployment Rights Act of 1994, as amended, 38 USC 4301-4334.

10.07. Governing Law . The Plan and the accompanying Adoption Agreement will be construed, administered and enforced according to ERISA, and to the extent not preempted thereby, the laws of the State in which the Employer has its principal place of business, without regard to the conflict of laws principles of such State.

Article 11. Plan Administration .

11.01. Powers and Responsibilities of the Administrator . The Administrator has the full power and the full responsibility to administer the Plan in all of its details, subject, however, to the applicable requirements of ERISA. The Administrator’s powers and responsibilities include, but are not limited to, the following:

(a) To make and enforce such rules and regulations as it deems necessary or proper for the efficient administration of the Plan;

(b) To interpret the Plan, its interpretation thereof in good faith to be final and conclusive on all persons claiming benefits under the Plan;

(c) To decide all questions concerning the Plan and the eligibility of any person to participate in the Plan;

(d) To administer the claims and review procedures specified in Section 11.02;

(e) To compute the amount of benefits which will be payable to any Participant, former Participant or Beneficiary in accordance with the provisions of the Plan;

(f) To determine the person or persons to whom such benefits will be paid;

(g) To authorize the payment of benefits;

(h) To appoint such agents, counsel, accountants, and consultants as may be required to assist in administering the Plan; and

(i) By written instrument, to allocate and delegate its responsibilities, including the formation of an administrative committee to administer the Plan.

 

(07/2007)

   13    ECM NQ 2007 BPD

© 2007 Fidelity Management & Research Company


11.02. Claims and Review Procedures .

(a) Claims Procedure . If any person believes he is being denied any rights or benefits under the Plan, such person may file a claim in writing with the Administrator. If any such claim is wholly or partially denied, the Administrator will notify such person of its decision in writing. Such notification will contain (i) specific reasons for the denial, (ii) specific reference to pertinent Plan provisions, (iii) a description of any additional material or information necessary for such person to perfect such claim and an explanation of why such material or information is necessary, and (iv) information as to the steps to be taken if the person wishes to submit a request for review, including a statement of the such person’s right to bring a civil action under ERISA section 502(a) following as adverse determination upon review. Such notification will be given within 90 days after the claim is received by the Administrator (or within 180 days, if special circumstances require an extension of time for processing the claim, and if written notice of such extension and circumstances is given to such person within the initial 90-day period).

If the claim concerns disability benefits under the Plan, the Plan Administrator must notify the claimant in writing within 45 days after the claim has been filed in order to deny it. If special circumstances require an extension of time to process the claim, the Plan Administrator must notify the claimant before the end of the 45-day period that the claim may take up to 30 days longer to process. If special circumstances still prevent the resolution of the claim, the Plan Administrator may then only take up to another 30 days after giving the claimant notice before the end of the original 30-day extension. If the Plan Administrator gives the claimant notice that the claimant needs to provide additional information regarding the claim, the claimant must do so within 45 days of that notice.

(b) Review Procedure . Within 60 days after the date on which a person receives a written notice of a denied claim (or, if applicable, within 60 days after the date on which such denial is considered to have occurred), such person (or his duly authorized representative) may (i) file a written request with the Administrator for a review of his denied claim and of pertinent documents and (ii) submit written issues and comments to the Administrator. This written request may include comments, documents, records, and other information relating to the claim for benefits. The claimant shall be provided, upon the claimant’s request and free of charge, reasonable access to, and copies of, all documents, records, and other information relevant to the claim for benefits. The review will take into account all comments, documents, records, and other information submitted by the claimant relating to the claim, without regard to whether such information was submitted or considered in the initial benefit determination. The Administrator will notify such person of its decision in writing. Such notification will be written in a manner calculated to be understood by such person and will contain specific reasons for the decision as well as specific references to pertinent Plan provisions. The decision on review will be made within 60 days after the request for review is received by the Administrator (or within 120 days, if special circumstances require an extension of time for processing the request, such as an election by the Administrator to hold a hearing, and if written notice of such extension and circumstances is given to such person within the initial 60-day period). The extension notice shall indicate the special circumstances requiring an extension of time and the date by which the Plan expects to render the determination on review.

If the initial claim was for disability benefits under the Plan and has been denied by the Plan Administrator, the claimant will have 180 days from the date the claimant received notice of the claim’s denial in which to appeal that decision. The review will be handled completely independently of the findings and decision made regarding the initial claim and will be processed by an individual who is not a subordinate of the individual who denied the initial claim. If the claim requires medical judgment, the individual handling the appeal will consult with a medical professional whom was not consulted regarding the initial claim and who is not a subordinate of anyone consulted regarding the initial claim and identify that medical professional to the claimant.

 

(07/2007)

   14    ECM NQ 2007 BPD

© 2007 Fidelity Management & Research Company


The Plan Administrator shall provide the claimant with written notification of a plan’s benefit determination on review. In the case of an adverse benefit determination, the notification shall set forth, in a manner calculated to be understood by the claimant – the specific reason or reasons for the adverse determinations, reference to the specific plan provisions on which the benefit determination is based, a statement that the claimant is entitled to receive, upon the claimant’s request and free of charge, reasonable access to, and copies of, all documents, records, and other information relevant to the claim for benefits.

 

(07/2007)

   15    ECM NQ 2007 BPD

© 2007 Fidelity Management & Research Company

Exhibit 10.7

VIRTUS INVESTMENT PARTNERS, INC.

EXECUTIVE SEVERANCE ALLOWANCE PLAN

Effective as of                  , 2008

 

1


ARTICLE 1 - PURPOSE; AMENDMENT AND RESTATEMENT

Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. adopts, effective as of                  , 2008, this Executive Severance Allowance Plan to provide for benefits to certain executives of Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. (“Virtus”) and other affiliates of Virtus, who meet the eligibility requirements set forth in the Plan when their employment is involuntarily terminated by the Employer.

ARTICLE 2 - DEFINITIONS

For purposes of this Plan, the following terms shall have the meanings set forth below.

 

2.01 “Affiliate” means, as to any specified person, each other person directly or indirectly controlling, controlled by or under direct or indirect common control with that specified person. For the purposes of this definition, “control”, when used with respect to any specified person means the power to direct the management and policies of such person, directly or indirectly, whether through the ownership of voting securities, or by contract or otherwise, and the terms “controlling” and “controlled” have meanings correlative to the foregoing. Notwithstanding the foregoing, any investment company registered under the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended, shall not be deemed an Affiliate of any specified person.

 

2.02 “Affiliated Employer” means any Affiliate of Virtus which has been designated to participate in the Plan by action of the Plan Administrator.

 

2.03 “Annual Incentive Award” means the compensation payable under any annual incentive plan or such other incentive compensation arrangements as the Employer may designate from time to time as approved by the Committee or the Chief Executive Officer.

 

2.04 “Base Salary” means the Executive’s annual salary, determined as of the last day of the month immediately preceding the Executive’s Separation Date. The following items shall not be included in determining Base Salary: overtime pay; distributions from a plan of deferred compensation; commissions; bonuses and incentive compensation. In determining this annual salary, however, the following items shall be included: any amount contributed by the Executive as deferred compensation to a cash or deferred arrangement maintained by the Employer pursuant to Code section 401(k); any salary reduction contributions made on behalf of the Executive to a plan maintained by the Employer under Code section 125 or Code section 132(f)(4), and any amounts deferred by the Executive under a nonqualified plan of deferred compensation.

 

2.05 “Cause” means any conduct by the Executive which is detrimental to the interests of the Employer, including but not limited to: (a) the Executive’s conviction or plea of nolo contendere to a felony or to a lesser crime involving fraud or moral turpitude; (b) an act of misconduct (including, without limitation, a violation of the Employer’s Code of Conduct or any code of ethics of any of its affiliates) on Executive’s part with regard to the Employer; (v) unsatisfactory performance; or (d) the Executive’s failure to attempt or refusal to perform legal directives of the Board or executive officers of the Employer. "Cause" is to be determined in the sole discretion of the Employer.

 

2


2.06 “COBRA” means the Consolidated Omnibus Budget Reconciliation Act of 1985, as amended, and the regulations and guidance published thereunder.

 

2.07 “Code” means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended, and the regulations and guidance published thereunder.

 

2.08 “Committee” means the Compensation Committee of Board of Directors of Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. (or, if no committee then exists, the Board of Directors).

 

2.09 “Effective Date” means                  , 2008, the date that the provisions of the Plan as contained in this document shall become effective.

 

2.10

“Employee” means any common law employee of the Employer who is actively at work at the time of termination and is a regular (versus temporary) full-time employee working at least 40 hours per week or part-time employee working at least 19  1 / 4 hours per week.

 

2.11 “Employer” means Virtus and any other Affiliated Employer that has adopted this Plan with the approval of the Plan Administrator.

 

2.12 “ERISA” means the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended, and the regulations and guidance published thereunder.

 

2.13 “Executive” means (a) an Employee of Virtus who is a Senior Vice President or above and (b) any other Employee (Vice Presidents or other key personnel) of the Employer that the Chief Executive Officer of Virtus has determined to be integral to the formulation or execution of the business strategy of the Employer, and who has been designated in writing by the Chief Executive Officer to be covered under the Plan.

 

2.14 “Plan” means the Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. Executive Severance Allowance Plan, as amended from time to time.

 

2.15 “Plan Administrator” means the Benefit Plans Committee of the Employer or the person designated as such by the Benefit Plans Committee.

 

2.16 “Plan Year” means the calendar year.

 

2.17 “Separation Date” means the last day of an Executive’s active service with the Employer.

 

2.18 “Severance Agreement and Release” means an agreement signed by the Executive in a form acceptable to the Employer containing a general release and restrictive covenants, as well as any other clauses the Employer may require.

 

2.19 “Severance Amount” means the benefit payable under the provisions of Section 3.03.

 

3


ARTICLE 3 - SEVERANCE ALLOWANCE BENEFIT

 

3.01 Qualification: An Executive whose employment is (a) involuntarily terminated by the Employer for any reason, including but not limited to: reduction in force, facility closing, reorganization, consolidation, elimination of position, or (b) terminated voluntarily or involuntarily by resignation at the request of the Employer in writing, shall be qualified for benefits under this Plan, unless the termination is due to a disqualifying event identified in Section 3.02.

 

3.02 Disqualifying Events: An Executive who might otherwise be qualified for benefits under this Plan shall be disqualified for such benefits by any one of the following events and circumstances:

(a) The Executive fails to continue in the employ of the Employer, satisfactorily performing the Executive’s assigned duties, until the date actually set for the Executive’s termination by the Employer.

(b) The Executive works for a division, sub-division, unit, subsidiary or other identifiable entity that is sold or the assets of which are transferred to an owner other than the Employer, if the Executive is offered employment by the new owner that is substantially comparable to the employment engaged in by the Executive immediately prior to the sale or transfer (whether or not the Executive accepts such offer). The Employer shall, in its discretion, determine what constitutes “substantially comparable” employment.”

(c) The Executive is terminated for Cause.

(d) The Executive’s employment is terminated by reason of retirement (as defined in the Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. 2008 Omnibus Incentive and Equity Plan ), resignation (not at the request of the Employer), death, or during or at the conclusion of a leave of absence taken or granted on account of any reason, including permanent or temporary disability.

(e) The Executive refuses to accept a transfer to an assigned job or location, provided the new position is within two pay grades or one band, as applicable of the current position held by the Executive.

(f) The Plan Administrator determines that under the facts and circumstances relating to the Executive’s termination, or because of the Executive’s conduct subsequent to termination, it would be inappropriate to commence or continue severance payments.

(g) The Executive receives or is entitled to receive from the Employer benefits under any severance plan, any severance agreement, or any agreement providing for the payment of severance benefits, including any change in control agreement between the Employer and the Executive, other than this Plan, on account of the Executive’s termination of employment by the Employer.

 

4


3.03 Severance Benefits : With respect to any Executive whose employment is terminated for a reason identified in Section 3.01, the following Severance Amount shall be payable, subject to the disqualification provisions of Section 3.02 and Section 3.09, and not any other benefit, except for outplacement services as provided in Section 3.10 and certain employee welfare benefits as provided in Section 3.11:

The Severance Amount equals a plus b, where:

 

a    =    A cash amount equal to the Executive’s annual Base Salary as of the Separation Date (for the Chief Executive Officer, 1.5 times Base Salary).
b    =    A cash amount equal to the average of the Executive’s actually earned and paid (even if one or both is $0) Annual Incentive Awards for the prior two (2) completed fiscal years (for the Chief Executive Officer, 1.5 times this average). However, for the first two years of the Plan, b = target Annual Incentive Award for the fiscal year in which the Executive’s Separation Date occurs (for the Chief Executive Officer, 1.5 times target).

And

Pro-Rata Incentive = A cash amount equal to a pro-rata portion of the Executive’s actually earned Annual Incentive Award for the fiscal year in which the Executive’s Separation Date occurs. The pro-rata portion of such Annual Incentive Award shall be determined by multiplying the amount actually earned times a fraction, the numerator of which is the number of days during the performance period applicable to such award prior to the Separation Date and the denominator of which is the number of days in the performance period applicable to such award.

 

3.04 Time and Form of Payment: Except as otherwise provided herein or in Article 5, the Executive will receive payment of the Severance Amount payable under this Plan commencing as soon as practicable after the Separation Date in either (a) an immediate lump sum payment, or (b) equal periodic installments based on the Employer’s pay schedule, such payments to be made until the expiration of the Executive’s severance period or March 15 of the year next succeeding the year in which the involuntary termination occurred, whichever occurs first. In no event will any payment be made earlier than after the execution of, and the expiration of any revocation period related to, any Severance Agreement and Release . If the Severance Agreement and Release is not executed within the required execution period, the Severance Amount and any other benefits under this Plan shall be forfeited. In no event however, shall any lump sum payment or any installment be paid later than March 15 in the year next succeeding the year in which the involuntary termination occurred. Any Pro-Rata Incentive for the fiscal year in which the Executive’s Separation Date occurs will be payable after the Pro-Rata Incentive for that fiscal year is calculated and approved by the Employer. In no event, however, shall any Pro-Rata Incentive payment be paid later than March 15 in the year next succeeding the year in which the involuntary termination occurred.

 

5


3.05 Death: If an Executive terminates employment and dies before having received the entire amount of benefits to which the Executive is entitled under this Plan, the balance of such benefits will be paid in a lump sum to (a) the Executive’s surviving spouse or domestic partner, (b) if there is no surviving spouse or domestic partner, the Executive’s children (including stepchildren and adopted children) per stirpes, or (iii) if there is no surviving spouse or domestic partner and/or children per stirpes, the Executive’s estate as soon as practicable following the Executive’s death but in no event later than March 15 in the year next succeeding the year in which the Executive’s involuntary termination occurred.

 

3.06 Reemployment by the Employer: In the event that an Executive becomes reemployed by the Employer after having received any benefit pursuant to this Plan or any predecessor or successor to this Plan, such Executive will be required to reimburse the Employer for any benefits received before the Executive’s reemployment.

 

3.07 Integration with Other Benefits: To the extent that a federal, state or local law may require the Employer to make a payment to an Executive because of that Executive’s involuntary termination, the Severance Amount payable under this Plan shall be applied towards any such payment and not paid in addition to such required payment. Nothing in this Plan shall be used to extend or modify benefits under this Plan because of payments under any state unemployment insurance laws.

 

3.08 Withholding: The Employer shall have the right to take such action as it deems necessary or appropriate to satisfy any requirement under federal, state or other law to withhold or to make deductions from any benefit payable under this Plan.

 

3.09 Pre-conditions for Receipt of Benefits: The payment of any benefit under this Plan, including but not limited to Sections 3.03, 3.10 and 3.11, is conditioned upon the Executive complying with all of the following:

(a) refraining from directly or indirectly interfering in any manner with the operations, management or administration of any Employer office, agent or employee and refraining from making any disparaging remarks concerning the Employer, its representatives, agents and employees;

(b) refraining from encouraging, soliciting or suggesting to any and all employees, agents, representatives and/or clients of the Employer that they terminate or alter their current relationship with the Employer;

(c) returning all Employer property provided or developed during the course of employment including, but not limited to: computers, software, cell phones, files, records, identification card, credit cards and Employer manuals;

(d) complying with a continuing obligation to maintain the confidentiality of proprietary information subsequent to termination of employment;

 

6


(e) executing a Severance Agreement and Release within the required execution period.

Upon the failure of the Executive to comply with any of the conditions set forth above and in this Plan, all payments hereunder shall immediately cease and the Executive shall immediately reimburse the Employer for all payments previously made hereunder.

 

3.10 Outplacement Services: An Executive entitled to payment of a Severance Amount as provided in Section 3.03 of this Plan shall be eligible to receive and the Employer shall provide outplacement services, with a firm chosen by the Employer, at a level commensurate with the Executive’s position, for a six-month period beginning on the Separation Date, but in no event ending later than December 31 of the second calendar year following the calendar year in which the involuntary termination occurred.

 

3.11 Continuation of Benefits: The Executive (and, to the extent applicable, the Executive’s dependents) shall be entitled to continue participation in all of the employee plans providing medical and dental benefits that the Executive participated in prior to the Separation Date in accordance with COBRA; provided, however, that the Executive shall continue to pay the active participant rate monthly for up to the first 12 months of the COBRA period following the Executive’s Separation Date.

ARTICLE 4 - ADMINISTRATION

 

4.01 The Plan Administrator: The Plan Administrator shall have the sole discretionary authority to interpret the Plan and all questions thereunder, including, without limitation, all questions relating to eligibility to participate in and receive benefits under the Plan. All such actions of the Plan Administrator shall be conclusive and binding on all persons.

 

4.02 Notification to Executives: The Plan Administrator shall notify an Executive when and if such Executive becomes eligible for benefits under this Plan.

 

4.03 Claims by Executives: Claims for benefits under the Plan may be filed with the Plan Administrator. Written notice of the disposition of a claim shall be furnished to the claimant within 90 days after the application is filed (or within 180 days if special circumstances require an extension of time for review). In the event the claim is wholly or partially denied, the reasons for the denial shall be specifically set forth in the notice in language reasonably calculated to be understood by the claimant, pertinent provisions of the Plan shall be cited, and, where appropriate, an explanation as to how the claimant can perfect the claim will be provided. In addition, the claimant shall be furnished with an explanation of the Plan’s claims review procedures and the time limits applicable to such procedures, including a statement that the claimant has a right to bring a civil action under ERISA section 502(a) following an adverse benefit determination on review, if the claimant has exhausted all remedies under the Plan. If notice of the denial of a claim is not furnished to an Executive in accordance with this section within a reasonable period of time, such Executive’s claim shall be deemed denied. The Executive will then be permitted to proceed to the review stage described in Section 4.04.

 

4.04

Claims Review Procedure: Any Executive, former Executive, or authorized representative or beneficiary of either, who has been denied a benefit either in whole or in

 

7


 

part by a decision of the Plan Administrator pursuant to Section 4.03 shall be entitled to request the Plan Administrator to give further consideration to his claim by filing with the Plan Administrator a written request for review. Such request, together with a written statement of the reasons why the claimant believes his claim should be allowed, shall be filed with the Plan Administrator no later than 60 days after receipt of the written notification provided for in Section 4.03. The claimant may submit written comments, documents, records and other information relating to the claim to the Plan Administrator. The claim for review shall be given a full and fair review that takes into account all comments, documents, records and other information submitted that relates to the claim, without regard to whether such information was submitted or considered in the initial benefit determination. The Plan Administrator shall provide the claimant with written or electronic notice of the decision on review within 60 days after the request for review is received by the Plan Administrator (or within 120 days if special circumstances require an extension of time for processing the claim and if notice of such extension and circumstances is provided to the claimant within the initial 60-day period). Such communication shall be written in a manner calculated to be understood by the claimant and shall include specific reasons for the decision, specific references to the pertinent Plan provisions on which the decision is based, a statement that the claimant has a right to bring a civil action under ERISA section 502(a) and that the claimant is entitled to receive, upon request and free of charge, reasonable access to and copies of, all documents, records and other information relevant to the claim for benefits. A document is relevant to the claim for benefits if it was relied upon in making the determination, was submitted, considered or generated in the course of making the determination or demonstrates that benefit determinations are made in accordance with the Plan and that Plan provisions have been applied consistently with respect to similarly situated claimants.

ARTICLE 5 - AMENDMENT AND TERMINATION

The Board of Directors of the Employer has delegated to the Benefit Plans Committee the right at any time, whether in an individual case or more generally, to amend this Plan from time to time without advance notice and to terminate this Plan at any time. No consent of any Executive is required to terminate, modify, amend or change the Plan generally or in an individual case. Any such amendment or termination of this Plan generally shall be accomplished by resolution of the Benefit Plans Committee adopted at a meeting duly called or by unanimous written consent in accordance with the Employer’s Articles of Incorporation, Bylaws, and applicable law. Any amendment or termination of this Plan on an individual basis shall be accomplished by the written action of the Plan Administrator.

ARTICLE 6 - SEVERANCE PAY PLAN LIMITATIONS UNDER ERISA

The Employer intends that this Plan constitute a “severance pay plan” under ERISA and any ambiguities in this Plan shall be construed to effect that intent. As a severance pay plan, notwithstanding any other provision of this Plan: payments hereunder shall not be contingent directly or indirectly, upon the retirement of any Executive or offset by any retirement benefit payable; the total amount of severance payments made and the value of other benefits provided under this Plan to any Executive shall not exceed twice the Executive’s annual compensation during the year immediately preceding the termination of such Executive’s service; and all payments to an Executive under this Plan shall be paid within 24 months after the termination of the Executive’s service.

 

8


ARTICLE 7 - MISCELLANEOUS

 

7.01 Right to Terminate Employment: The fact that a former Executive has failed to qualify for a benefit under this Plan shall not rescind or otherwise affect in any manner whatsoever the Executive’s termination of employment from the Employer, and such failure to qualify for a benefit shall not establish any right of any kind whatsoever (a) to a continuation or to a reinstatement of employment with the Employer or (b) to receive any payment from the Employer in lieu of such benefit.

 

7.02 Source of Benefits: All benefits paid to a terminated Executive under this Plan shall be paid from the general assets of the Employer, and the status of the claim of a person to any benefit shall be the same as the status of a claim against the Employer by any general unsecured creditor. No person shall look to, or have any claim against, any officer, director, employee or agent of the Employer in his individual capacity for the payment of any benefits under this Plan.

 

7.03 No Assignment; Binding Effect: No interest of any Executive eligible to receive benefits under this Plan shall be subject in any manner to sale, transfer, assignment, pledge, attachment, garnishment, or other alienation or encumbrance of any kind; nor may such interest or right to receive a benefit be taken, either voluntarily or involuntarily, for the satisfaction of the debts of, or other obligations or claims against, such person, including claims for alimony, support, separate maintenance and claims in bankruptcy proceedings. The provisions of this Plan shall be binding on each Executive (and on each person who claims a benefit under such person) and on the Employer, their successors and assigns.

 

7.04 Indebtedness: Indebtedness or obligations of the Executive to the Employer existing at the time of termination or arising during the one year period beginning on the Separation Date shall be set off against any benefit payable under this Plan.

 

7.05 Construction: This Plan shall be construed in accordance with the law of the State of Connecticut to the extent not preempted by federal laws. Headings and subheadings have been added only for convenience of reference and have no substantive effect whatsoever. All references to sections shall mean sections of this Plan.

 

7.06 Usage: Whenever applicable, the singular shall include the plural, the masculine shall include the feminine and vice versa when used in this Plan.

 

9

Exhibit 10.8

EXECUTION VERSION

 

 

INVESTMENT AND CONTRIBUTION AGREEMENT

BY AND AMONG

PHOENIX INVESTMENT MANAGEMENT COMPANY,

VIRTUS HOLDINGS, INC.,

HARRIS BANKCORP, INC.

AND

THE PHOENIX COMPANIES, INC.

 

 

Dated as of

October 30, 2008

 

 

 

 


Table of Contents

 

          Page
ARTICLE I DEFINITIONS    1
ARTICLE II CONTRIBUTION; SALE AND PURCHASE    10
   SECTION 2.01. Contribution and Exchange    10
   SECTION 2.02. Agreement to Sell and to Purchase; Purchase Price    11
   SECTION 2.03. Closings    11
ARTICLE III REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES OF THE COMPANY    12
   SECTION 3.01. Organization and Standing    12
   SECTION 3.02. Capital Stock    13
   SECTION 3.03. Authorization; Enforceability    13
   SECTION 3.04. No Violation; Consents    14
   SECTION 3.05. Financial Statements    14
   SECTION 3.06. Absence of Certain Changes    15
   SECTION 3.07. Assets    15
   SECTION 3.08. Intellectual Property    15
   SECTION 3.09. No Undisclosed Material Liabilities    16
   SECTION 3.10. Compliance with Laws    17
   SECTION 3.11. No Litigation    18
   SECTION 3.12. Compliance with Constituent Documents    19
   SECTION 3.13. Interim Changes    19
   SECTION 3.14. Brokers and Finders    19
   SECTION 3.15. Real Property    19
   SECTION 3.16. Contracts    19
   SECTION 3.17. Regulatory Documents    20
   SECTION 3.18. Virtus Funds    21
   SECTION 3.19. Assets Under Management; Clients    23
ARTICLE IV REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES OF THE INVESTOR    24
   SECTION 4.01. Organization; Authorization; Enforceability    24
   SECTION 4.02. Private Placement    24
   SECTION 4.03. No Violation; Consents    25
   SECTION 4.04. No Litigation    25
   SECTION 4.05. Financing    25
   SECTION 4.06. Ownership of Preferred Stock    25
   SECTION 4.07. Brokers and Finders    26
   SECTION 4.08. Tax Liability    26
   SECTION 4.09. Compliance with Laws    26

 

i


          Page

ARTICLE V REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES OF PNX AND PIMCO

   26
  

SECTION 5.01. Organization; Authorization; Enforceability

   26
  

SECTION 5.02. No Violation; Consents

   27
  

SECTION 5.03. No Litigation

   27

ARTICLE VI COVENANTS OF THE COMPANY, PNX AND PIMCO

   27
  

SECTION 6.01. Access to Information

   27
  

SECTION 6.02. Compliance with Conditions; Reasonable Best Efforts

   28
  

SECTION 6.03. Consents and Approvals

   28
  

SECTION 6.04. Filing of Certificate of Designations

   29
  

SECTION 6.05. Reservation of Shares

   29
  

SECTION 6.06. Listing of Shares

   29
  

SECTION 6.07. Governance Matters

   29
  

SECTION 6.08. Registration Rights

   30
  

SECTION 6.09. Additional Financing Right

   30
  

SECTION 6.10. Investor Put Right; Company Call Option

   31
  

SECTION 6.11. Interim Period Actions

   32
  

SECTION 6.12. Equity Awards

   33
  

SECTION 6.13. Regulatory Action

   33
  

SECTION 6.14. Tax Separation

   34
  

SECTION 6.15. Rights Agreement

   34

ARTICLE VII COVENANTS OF THE INVESTOR

   34
  

SECTION 7.01. Compliance with Conditions; Reasonable Best Efforts

   34
  

SECTION 7.02. Consents and Approvals

   34
  

SECTION 7.03. Restrictions on Transfer

   34
  

SECTION 7.04. Standstill

   35
  

SECTION 7.05. Confidentiality; Information

   37
  

SECTION 7.06. Tax Treatment

   38

ARTICLE VIII CONDITIONS PRECEDENT TO THE STEP 1 CLOSING AND STEP 2 CLOSING

   38
  

SECTION 8.01. Conditions to the Company’s Obligations in Respect of the Step 1 Closing Date

   38
  

SECTION 8.02. Conditions to the Investor’s Obligations in Respect of the Step 1 Closing Date

   39
  

SECTION 8.03. Conditions to Each Party’s Obligations in Respect of the Step 2 Closing Date

   39
  

SECTION 8.04. Conditions to the Company’s Obligations in Respect of the Step 2 Closing Date

   40
  

SECTION 8.05. Conditions to the Investor’s Obligations in Respect of the Step 2 Closing Date

   40

 

ii


          Page

ARTICLE IX MISCELLANEOUS

   41
  

SECTION 9.01. Indemnification

   41
  

SECTION 9.02. Survival

   43
  

SECTION 9.03. Legends

   43
  

SECTION 9.04. Notices

   44
  

SECTION 9.05. Termination

   46
  

SECTION 9.06. GOVERNING LAW

   46
  

SECTION 9.07. WAIVER OF JURY TRIAL

   46
  

SECTION 9.08. Entire Agreement

   47
  

SECTION 9.09. Modifications and Amendments

   47
  

SECTION 9.10. Waivers and Extensions

   47
  

SECTION 9.11. Titles and Headings; Rules of Construction

   47
  

SECTION 9.12. Exhibits and Schedules

   47
  

SECTION 9.13. Press Releases and Public Announcements

   47
  

SECTION 9.14. Assignment; No Third-Party Beneficiaries

   48
  

SECTION 9.15. Specific Performance

   48
  

SECTION 9.16. Severability

   48
  

SECTION 9.17. Counterparts

   48

 

iii


INVESTMENT AND CONTRIBUTION AGREEMENT (this “ Agreement ”), dated as of October 30, 2008, by and among PHOENIX INVESTMENT MANAGEMENT COMPANY, a Delaware corporation (“ PIMCO ”), VIRTUS HOLDINGS, INC., a Delaware corporation (the “ Company ”), HARRIS BANKCORP, INC., a Delaware corporation (the “ Investor ”), and THE PHOENIX COMPANIES, INC., a Delaware corporation (“ PNX ”).

WHEREAS , PIMCO owns all of the shares of common stock, par value $0.01, of Virtus Investment Partners, Inc., a Delaware corporation (“ Virtus ” and the common stock thereof, “ Virtus Common Stock ”);

WHEREAS , PIMCO desires to contribute (the “ Contribution ”) to the Company all of the Virtus Common Stock owned by it in exchange for all of the issued and outstanding shares of common stock, par value $0.01 per share, of the Company (“ Common Stock ”) and all of the issued and outstanding shares of Series A Non-Voting Participating Convertible Preferred Stock, par value $0.01 per share, of the Company (the “ Series A Preferred Stock ”) and Series B Voting Participating Convertible Preferred Stock, par value $0.01 per share, of the Company (the “ Series B Preferred Stock ,” and together with the Series A Preferred Stock, the “ Preferred Stock ”);

WHEREAS , immediately after the Contribution, PIMCO desires to sell to the Investor, and the Investor desires to purchase from PIMCO, subject to the terms and conditions hereof, all of the Series A Preferred Stock owned by PIMCO;

WHEREAS , PIMCO is a direct wholly-owned subsidiary of PNX;

WHEREAS , PNX and Virtus expect to enter into a Separation Agreement (as defined herein) whereby, subject to the terms and conditions thereof, PNX will, after the contribution by PIMCO of all of the outstanding shares of the Company to PNX in accordance with the Separation Agreement, including the transfer of all the assets and liabilities of the Virtus Business (as defined herein) and subject to the terms and conditions of the Separation Agreement, distribute (the “ Distribution ”) to PNX’s stockholders all the shares of Common Stock; and

WHEREAS , immediately prior to the Distribution, PIMCO desires to sell to the Investor, and the Investor desires to purchase from PIMCO, subject to the terms and conditions hereof, all of the Series B Preferred Stock owned by PIMCO;

NOW, THEREFORE , the parties hereto, intending to be legally bound, hereby agree as follows.

ARTICLE I

DEFINITIONS

(a) As used in this Agreement, the following terms shall have the following meanings:

Affiliate ” means, with respect to any Person, any other Person directly or indirectly controlling, controlled by, or under direct or indirect common control with, such Person. For the purposes of this Agreement, “control” when used with respect to any Person means the power to direct the management and policies of such Person, directly or indirectly, whether through the ownership of voting securities, by contract or otherwise; and the terms “controlling” and “controlled” have meanings correlative to the foregoing.


Applicable Law ” means (a) any United States Federal, state, local or foreign law, statute, rule, regulation, order, writ, injunction, judgment, decree or permit of any Governmental Authority and (b) any rule or listing requirement of any national stock exchange or Commission recognized trading market on which securities issued by the Company or any of the Subsidiaries are listed or quoted.

Board of Directors ” means the board of directors of the Company.

Business Day ” means any day other than a Saturday, a Sunday, or a day when banks in The City of New York, New York are authorized by Applicable Law to be closed.

Capital Stock ” means (i) with respect to any Person that is a corporation, any and all shares, interests, participations, rights or other equivalents (however designated) of corporate stock and (ii) with respect to any other Person, any and all partnership or other equity interests of such Person.

Certificate of Designations ” means the Certificate of Designations of Series A Non-Voting Convertible Preferred Stock and Series B Voting Convertible Preferred Stock of Virtus Holdings, Inc.

Client ” of a Person means any other Person to which such Person or any of its controlled Affiliates provides investment management or investment advisory services, including any sub-advisory services, relating to securities or other financial instruments, commodities, real estate or any other type of asset, pursuant to an investment advisory arrangement.

Closing Price ” of the Common Stock or any other securities means, as of any date of determination:

(a) the closing sale price (or if no closing sale price is reported, the last reported sale price) of shares of the Common Stock or such other securities on the New York Stock Exchange on that date; or

(b) if the Common Stock or such other securities are not traded on the New York Stock Exchange on that date, the closing sale price of shares of Common Stock or such other securities as reported in composite transactions for the principal U.S. national or regional securities exchange on which the Common Stock or such other securities are so traded on that date (or, if no closing sale price is reported, the last reported sale price of shares of the Common Stock or such other securities on the principal U.S. national or regional securities exchange on which the Common Stock or such other securities are so traded on that date); or

 

2


(c) if the Common Stock or such other securities are not traded on a U.S. national or regional securities exchange on that date, the last quoted bid price on that date for the Common Stock or such other securities in the over-the-counter market as reported by Pink OTC Markets Inc. or a similar organization; or

(d) if the Common Stock or such other securities are not so quoted by Pink OTC Markets Inc. or a similar organization on that date, the market price of the Common Stock or such other securities on that date as determined by a nationally recognized independent investment banking not affiliated with the Company retained by the Company for this purpose.

For the purposes of this Agreement, all references herein to the closing sale price and the last reported sale price of the Common Stock on the New York Stock Exchange shall be such closing sale price and last reported sale price as reflected on the website of the New York Stock Exchange (www.nyse.com) and as reported by Bloomberg Professional Service; provided that in the event that there is a discrepancy between the closing sale price and the last reported sale price as reflected on the website of the New York Stock Exchange and as reported by Bloomberg Professional Service, the closing sale price and the last reported sale price on the website of the New York Stock Exchange shall govern.

If during a period applicable for calculating the Closing Price of Common Stock or any other security any event occurs that requires an adjustment to the Conversion Rate (as defined in the Certificate of Designations), the Closing Price of the Common Stock or such other security shall be calculated for such period in a manner determined by the Company in good faith and in accordance with the provisions of the Certificate of Designations to appropriately reflect the impact of such event on the price of the Common Stock or such other security during such period.

Code ” means the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

Commission ” means the United States Securities and Exchange Commission.

Commodity Exchange Act ” means the Commodity Exchange Act, as from time to time amended, and the rules and regulations of the Commission promulgated thereunder.

Common Stock ” has the meaning set forth in the recitals to this Agreement and, unless the context otherwise requires, includes the associated Series C Junior Participating Preferred Stock purchase rights issuable in respect of such shares pursuant to the Rights Agreement.

Common Stock-Equivalent Security ” means securities of the Company more than 50% of the principal amount, liquidation preference or stated value of which is convertible into or exchangeable or exercisable for, shares of Common Stock. Any

 

3


offerings of units of multiple securities, one or more of which securities is Common Stock or a Common-Stock-Equivalent Security, shall not constitute an offering of Common Stock-Equivalent Securities unless more than 50% of the aggregate principal amount, liquidation preference and/or stated value of all securities comprising such unit is attributable to Common Stock or is convertible into or exchangeable or exercisable for, shares of Common Stock.

Compensation Committee of the Company ”, means the compensation committee of the Company, one of the members of which will be Investor Designate.

Competitor ” means any investment adviser registered or licensed under Applicable Law, including without limitation the Investment Advisers Act, engaged primarily in sponsoring or managing retail mutual funds in the United States and having aggregate assets under management in excess of $40 billion located anywhere in the world.

Contract ” means any contract, lease, loan agreement, mortgage, security agreement, trust indenture, note, bond, license or other agreement (whether written or oral) or instrument.

Conversion Shares ” means the shares of Common Stock issuable upon the conversion of the Series A Preferred Stock and Series B Preferred Stock in accordance with the terms of the Certificate of Designations.

Draft Form 10 ” means the amended registration statement on Form 10 filed by the Company with the Commission on September 10, 2008 in connection with the Distribution (and all exhibits and schedules thereto and documents incorporated by reference therein).

Effective Date ” means the date the Form 10 is first declared effective by the Commission and eligible to be mailed to PNX’s stockholders.

Exchange Act ” means the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as from time to time amended, and the rules and regulations of the Commission promulgated thereunder.

ERISA ” means the U.S. Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974, as amended, and the rules, regulations and class exemptions of the U.S. Department of Labor thereunder.

Form 10 ” means the registration statement on Form 10 filed by the Company with the Commission in connection with the Distribution (and all exhibits and schedules thereto and documents incorporated by reference therein), as amended through the Effective Date.

Fund Board Approval ” means the approval by the board of directors or board of trustees of each fund of the Company or its applicable Subsidiary that is registered as an investment company under the Investment Company Act of a new investment advisory contract with the Company or its applicable Subsidiary in accordance with Section 15 of the Investment Company Act.

 

4


Fund Financial Statements ” means the financial statements of each Virtus Fund for the three (3) most recently completed fiscal years and the most recent semi-annual period, if any, including a statement of net assets or statement of assets and liabilities and schedule of investments, a statement of operations and a statement of changes in net assets and, in the case of such year-end statements, together with a report by such Virtus Fund’s independent registered public accounting firm.

Fund Shareholder Approval ” means the approval by the shareholders of each fund of the Company or its applicable Subsidiary that is registered as an investment company under the Investment Company Act of a new investment advisory contract with the Company or its applicable Subsidiary in accordance with Section 15 of the Investment Company Act.

GAAP ” means United States generally accepted accounting principles, consistently applied.

Governmental Authority ” means (i) any foreign, Federal, state or local court or governmental or regulatory agency or authority, (ii) any arbitration board, tribunal or mediator and (iii) any national stock exchange or Commission recognized trading market on which securities issued by the Company or any of the Subsidiaries are listed or quoted.

Intellectual Property ” means any patent (including all reissues, divisions, continuations and extensions thereof), patent application, patent right, trademark, trademark registration, trademark application, servicemark, trade name, business name, brand name, logo, all other source indicators and all good will associated therewith and symbolized thereby, work of authorship in any media, copyright, copyright registration, design, design registration, software, firmware, trade secret, license, customer list, confidential and proprietary information, proprietary technology, know-how, invention, discovery, improvement, process or formula or any right to any of the foregoing, and all other forms of intellectual property.

Investment Advisers Act ” means the Investment Advisers Act of 1940, as amended from time to time amended, and the rules and regulations of the Commission promulgated thereunder.

Investment Company Act ” means the Investment Company Act of 1940, as from time to time amended, and the rules and regulations of the Commission promulgated thereunder.

knowledge of the Company ” means the knowledge of George Aylward, Frank Waltman, Steve Neamtz, Nancy Curtiss, Michael Angerthal, David Hanley, Patrick Bradley, Kevin Carr, Nancy Engberg and Bonnie Malley (with respect to human resources only).

 

5


LIBOR ” means the rate per annum determined by the Investor by reference to the British Bankers’ Association for three-month deposits in U.S. dollars (as set forth by any service selected by the Investor that has been nominated by the British Bankers’ Association as an authorized information vendor for the purpose of displaying such rates).

Lien ” means any mortgage, pledge, lien, security interest, claim, restriction, charge or encumbrance of any kind.

Material Adverse Effect ” means any circumstance, event, change, development or effect that, individually or in the aggregate, (1) is or would be material and adverse to the business, assets, results of operations or financial condition of the Company and the Subsidiaries, taken as a whole, or (2) would have a material adverse effect on the ability of the Company to timely perform its obligations under this Agreement; provided, however, that in determining whether a Material Adverse Effect has occurred, there shall be excluded any effect to the extent resulting from the following: (A) changes in generally accepted accounting principles or regulatory accounting principles generally applicable to banks, savings associations or their holding companies, (B) changes in laws, rules and regulations of general applicability or interpretations thereof by any Governmental Authority, (C) actions or omissions of the Company expressly required by the terms of this Agreement or taken with the prior written consent of the Investor, (D) changes in general economic, monetary or financial conditions, including changes in prevailing interest rates and credit markets, (E) changes in the market price or trading volumes of the Common Stock or the Company’s other securities (but not the underlying causes of any such changes), (F) the failure of the Company to meet any internal or public projections, forecasts, estimates or guidance for any period ending on or after June 30, 2008 (but not the underlying causes of any such failure), (G) changes in global or national political conditions, including the outbreak or escalation of war or acts of terrorism, and (H) the public disclosure of this Agreement or the Transactions; except, with respect to clauses (A), (B), (D) and (G) to the extent that the effects of such changes have a disproportionate effect on the Company and the Subsidiaries, taken as a whole, relative to other asset management businesses generally.

Permitted Liens ” means (i) mechanics’, carriers’, workmen’s, repairmen’s or other like Liens arising or incurred in the ordinary course of business, Liens arising under original purchase price conditional sales contracts and equipment leases with third parties entered into in the ordinary course of business and liens for taxes that are not due and payable or that may thereafter be paid without penalty, (ii) Liens that secure obligations that are reflected as liabilities in the Company Financial Statements or Liens the existence of which is referred to in the notes to the Company Financial Statements, (iii) imperfections of title or easements, covenants, rights-of-way and encumbrances, if any, that, individually or in the aggregate, do not materially impair, and could not reasonably be expected materially to impair, the continued use and operation of the assets to which they relate in the conduct of the Virtus Business as presently conducted, and (iv) (A) zoning, building and other similar legal restrictions, (B) Liens that have been placed by any developer, landlord or other third party on property over which the Company or any Subsidiary has easement rights or on any leased property and subordination or

 

6


similar agreements relating thereto and (C) unrecorded easements, covenants, rights-of-way and other similar restrictions, which, individually or in the aggregate, do not materially impair, and could not reasonably be expected to materially impair, the continued use and operation of the assets to which they relate in the conduct of the Virtus Business as presently conducted.

Person ” means any individual, partnership, corporation, limited liability company, joint venture, association, joint-stock company, trust, unincorporated organization, government or agency or political subdivision thereof, or other entity.

Policies and Procedures ” means the investment policies approved by the board of trustees or board of directors of a Virtus Fund or reflected in a Virtus Fund’s registration statement under the Securities Laws or any policies or procedures adopted by a Virtus Fund, whether pursuant to Rule 38a-1 under the Investment Company Act, other Applicable Law or otherwise, or by any Virtus Investment Adviser pursuant to Rule 206(4)-7 under the Investment Advisers Act, other Applicable Law or otherwise, with respect to the management of the Virtus Funds.

Regulatory Documents ” means all reports, registration statements and other documents, together with any amendments required to be made with respect thereto, that are filed, or required to be filed, by law, by contract or otherwise with any Governmental Authority.

Regulatory Issue ” means a situation or event that would trigger any of the following: (i) the Company or any of the Subsidiaries becoming ineligible pursuant to Section 9(a) or 9(b) of the Investment Company Act to serve as an investment adviser (or in any other capacity contemplated by the Investment Company Act) to a registered investment company, including any action, proceeding or investigation pending or threatened by any Governmental Authority, which would result in the ineligibility of any of the Company or the Subsidiaries to serve in such capacities; (ii) the Company or any of the Subsidiaries becoming ineligible pursuant to Section 203(e) or (f) of the Investment Advisers Act to serve as an investment adviser or as an associated person of a registered investment adviser, as applicable, or to be subject to statutory disqualification with respect to membership or participation in, or association with a member of a self-regulatory organization as defined in Section 3(a)(39) of the Exchange Act or disqualification for any other reason pursuant to such act or similar provisions under other securities and commodities laws; (iii) any regulated Subsidiary having to disclose the occurrence or existence of any event referenced in the foregoing clause (i) or (ii), including, without limitation, disclosure required in any prospectus, Forms ADV or BD or any form required for licensing and registration as a commodity trading adviser or commodity pool operator under the Commodity Exchange Act, which disclosure could reasonably be expected to have an adverse effect on the Company or the Subsidiaries; (iv) the imposition of any “affiliated transactions” restrictions under Section 17 of the Investment Company Act on the Company or any of the Subsidiaries (other than any such restrictions arising from the Investor’s ownership of any equity of the Company) that would constitute a material burden on the Company and the Subsidiaries; or (v) an “assignment” of investment advisory contracts of the Company or any of the Subsidiaries

 

7


under the Investment Company Act or the Investment Advisers Act, unless the Fund Board Approvals and Fund Shareholder Approvals have been obtained for such transaction.

Representatives ” means, collectively, with respect to any Person, such Person’s directors, partners, officers, employees, financial advisors, lenders, accountants, attorneys, agents, equity investors, controlled Affiliates and controlling persons of such Person or its controlled Affiliates.

Rights Agreement ” means the Rights Agreement of the Company, to be dated on or about the date of Distribution.

Securities Act ” means the Securities Act of 1933, as from time to time amended, and the rules and regulations of the Commission promulgated thereunder.

Securities Laws ” means the Securities Act; the Exchange Act; the Investment Company Act; the Investment Advisers Act; the Trust Indenture Act of 1939, as amended; the published rules and regulations of the Commission promulgated under any of the foregoing statutes; and the securities or “blue sky” laws of any state or territory of the United States.

Separation Agreement ” means the Separation, Plan of Reorganization and Distribution Agreement between PNX and the Company to be entered into in connection with the Distribution.

Series A Preferred Stock ” has the meaning set forth in the recitals to this Agreement. The Series A Preferred Stock has the designation, powers, preferences and rights, and qualifications, limitations and restrictions thereof set forth in the Certificate of Designations.

Series B Preferred Stock ” has the meaning set forth in the recitals to this Agreement. The Series B Preferred Stock has the designation, powers, preferences and rights, and qualifications, limitations and restrictions thereof set forth in the Certificate of Designations.

subsidiary ” means, with respect to any Person, (i) a corporation a majority of whose capital stock with voting power, under ordinary circumstances, to elect directors is at the time, directly or indirectly, owned by such Person, by a subsidiary of such Person, or by such Person and one or more subsidiaries of such Person, (ii) a partnership in which such Person or a subsidiary of such Person is, at the date of determination, a general partner of such partnership and has the power to direct the policies and management of such partnership, or (iii) any other Person (other than a corporation) in which such Person, a subsidiary of such Person or such Person and one or more subsidiaries of such Person, directly or indirectly, at the date of determination thereof, has (A) at least a majority ownership interest or (B) the power to elect or direct the election of a majority of the directors or other governing body of such Person.

 

8


Subsidiary ” means a subsidiary of the Company, including any subsidiary of Virtus that will be transferred to the Company in connection with the Contribution.

Tax Returns ” means any return, report, information statement, schedule or other document (including any related or supporting information) required to be filed with any taxing authority with respect to Taxes, including information returns, claims for refunds of Taxes and any amendments or supplements to any of the foregoing.

Taxes ” means all federal, provincial, territorial, state, municipal, local, foreign or other taxes, imposts, levies or other like assessments or charges including all income, franchise, gains, capital, real property, goods and services, transfer, value added, gross receipts, windfall profits, severance, ad valorem, personal property, production, sales, use, license, stamp, documentary stamp, mortgage recording, excise, employment, payroll, social security, unemployment, disability, estimated or withholding taxes, and all customs and import duties, together with any interest, additions, fines or penalties with respect thereto or in respect of any failure to comply with any requirement regarding Tax Returns and any interest in respect of such additions, fines or penalties.

Transactions ” means the transactions contemplated by this Agreement.

Virtus Business ” has the meaning set forth in the Separation Agreement with respect to “Spinco Business”.

Virtus Fund ” means any investment company registered under the Investment Company Act for which the Company or any Subsidiary acts as an investment adviser, sponsor or distributor.

Virtus Investment Advisor ” means each of the Subsidiaries listed on Schedule 1(a).

(b) As used in this Agreement, the following terms shall have the meanings given thereto in the Sections set forth opposite such terms:

 

Term

  

Section

Additional Financing Right    6.09(a)
Beneficial Ownership    7.04(f)
Beneficially Own    7.04(f)
BMO Group    6.13(a)
Board Representative    6.07(a)
Call Closing Date    6.10(b)
Call Option    6.10(b)
Call Price    6.10(b)
Company    Preamble
Company Financial Statements    3.05(a)
Company Intellectual Property    3.08(a)
Contribution    Recitals
De Minimis Claim    9.01(d)

 

9


Term

  

Section

DGCL    3.02(d)
Disclosing Party    7.05(b)
Distribution    Recitals
Fund Agreements    3.18(b)(i)
Fund Reports    3.18(b)(ii)
HIM    4.09
Indemnified Party    9.01(c)
Indemnifying Party    9.01(c)
Investor    Preamble
Investor Designate    6.07(a)
Losses    9.01(a)
Material Contract    3.16(a)
New Preferred Stock    6.09(a)
PIMCO    Preamble
Plan    6.12
PNX    Preamble
Preferred Stock    Recitals
Put Closing Date    6.10(a)
Put Price    6.10(a)
Put Right    6.10(a)
Qualifying Issuance    6.09(a)
Qualifying Ownership Interest    6.01
Series A Exchange    2.02(b)
Step 1 Closing    2.03(a)
Step 1 Closing Date    2.03(a)
Step 1 Sale    2.02(a)
Step 2 Closing    2.03(a)
Step 2 Closing Date    2.03(a)
Step 2 Sale    2.02(b)
Threshold Amount    9.01(d)
Transfer    7.03(a)
Virtus    Recitals
Virtus Broker Dealer Subsidiary    3.10(b)
Virtus Common Stock    Recitals
Voting Securities    7.04(f)

ARTICLE II

CONTRIBUTION; SALE AND PURCHASE

SECTION 2.01.  Contribution and Exchange . Upon the terms and subject to the conditions set forth in this Agreement, on the Step 1 Closing Date, PIMCO will contribute to the Company all of the Virtus Common Stock held by PIMCO in exchange for 770,000 shares of Common Stock, 9,783 shares of Series A Preferred Stock and 35,217 shares of Series B Preferred Stock.

 

10


SECTION 2.02.  Agreement to Sell and to Purchase; Purchase Price . (a) Upon the terms and subject to the conditions set forth in this Agreement, on the Step 1 Closing Date, PIMCO shall sell to the Investor, and the Investor shall purchase and accept from PIMCO, 9,783 shares of Series A Preferred Stock (the “ Step 1 Sale ”), for an aggregate purchase price, payable by wire transfer of immediately available funds to a bank account or bank accounts designated by PIMCO, equal to $1.00.

(b) Immediately prior to the Distribution and upon the terms and subject to the conditions set forth in this Agreement, on the Step 2 Closing Date, PIMCO shall sell to the Investor, and the Investor shall purchase and accept from PIMCO, 35,217 shares of Series B Preferred Stock (the “ Step 2 Sale ”), for an aggregate purchase price, payable by wire transfer of immediately available funds to a bank account or bank accounts designated by PIMCO, equal to $35 million. Concurrently with the Step 2 Sale, the Investor will exchange all of the Series A Preferred Stock received by it in the Step 1 Sale for an additional 9,783 shares of Series B Preferred Stock (the “ Series A Exchange ”). After giving effect to the Step 2 Sale and the Series A Exchange, the Investor will own in the aggregate 45,000 shares of Series B Preferred Stock.

SECTION 2.03.  Closings . (a) Subject to the satisfaction or waiver of the conditions set forth in this Agreement, (i) the closing of the Contribution and Step 1 Sale (the “ Step 1 Closing ”) shall occur at 9:30 a.m., New York time, on or before October 31, 2008, except as otherwise agreed by the parties, and (ii) the closing of the Step 2 Sale and Series A Exchange (the “ Step 2 Closing ”) shall occur immediately after the consummation of the Distribution, provided that, in each case, if such conditions have not been so satisfied or waived on such applicable date, the Step 1 Closing and Step 2 Closing shall occur on the first business day after the satisfaction or waiver (by the party entitled to grant such waiver) of the conditions to the Step 1 Closing and Step 2 Closing set forth in this Agreement (other than those conditions that by their nature are to be satisfied at the Step 1 Closing or Step 2 Closing, as the case may be, but subject to fulfillment or waiver of those conditions), at the offices of Simpson Thacher & Bartlett LLP located at 425 Lexington Avenue, New York, New York 10017 or such other date or location as agreed by the parties. The date of the Step 1 Closing is referred to as the “ Step 1 Closing Date .” The date of the Step 2 Closing is referred to as the “ Step 2 Closing Date .”

(b) On the Step 1 Closing Date:

 

  (i) PIMCO shall deliver to the Company all of the Virtus Common Stock held by PIMCO and the stock certificates representing the Virtus Common Stock held by PIMCO.

 

  (ii) The Company shall deliver to PIMCO duly executed stock certificates, registered in PIMCO’s name and representing 770,000 shares of Common Stock, 9,783 shares of Series A Preferred Stock and 35,217 shares of Series B Preferred Stock.

 

  (iii) The Investor shall deliver to the Company the officer’s certificate of the Investor contemplated by Section 8.01(d).

 

11


  (iv) Each of the Company, PNX and PIMCO shall deliver to the Investor the officer’s certificate of the Company, PNX and PIMCO, respectively, contemplated by Section 8.02(f).

 

  (v) PIMCO shall deliver to the Investor certificates representing 9,783 shares of Series A Preferred Stock.

On the Step 2 Closing Date:

 

  (i) The Investor shall deliver to PIMCO all of the shares of Series A Preferred Stock received by it in the Step 1 Sale.

 

  (ii) PIMCO shall deliver to the Investor certificates representing 35,217 shares of Series B Preferred Stock.

 

  (iii) The Investor shall deliver to the Company the officer’s certificate of the Investor contemplated by Section 8.04(b).

 

  (iv) Each of the Company, PNX and PIMCO shall deliver to the Investor the officer’s certificate of the Company, PNX and PIMCO, respectively, contemplated by Section 8.05(e).

ARTICLE III

REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES

OF THE COMPANY

The Company hereby represents and warrants to the Investor on the date hereof as follows:

SECTION 3.01.  Organization and Standing . (a) The Company is duly incorporated, validly existing and in good standing under the laws of the State of Delaware and has all requisite corporate power and authority to own its properties and assets and to carry on its business as it is now being conducted and as proposed to be conducted immediately following the Distribution. The Company has furnished to the Investor true and correct copies of the Company’s certificate of incorporation and by-laws as amended through the date of this Agreement and true and correct copies of the Company’s certificate of incorporation and by-laws in substantially the form as will be in effect as of the Distribution (exclusive of the certificate of designations to be filed in connection with the Rights Agreement).

(b) Each direct and indirect material Subsidiary will, at the time of the Distribution, be duly incorporated, validly existing and, where applicable, in good standing under the laws of its jurisdiction of incorporation and have all requisite power and authority to own its properties and assets and to carry on its business as it is proposed to be conducted immediately following the Distribution, and each such material Subsidiary and the Company will be qualified to transact business, and will be in good standing, in each jurisdiction and under the laws of such

 

12


jurisdiction in which the properties owned, leased or operated by it or the nature of the business conducted by it makes such qualification necessary except in all cases as would not, individually or in the aggregate, reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect. Except as set forth in Schedule 3.01, (i) all of the outstanding shares of capital stock of each such material Subsidiary are validly issued, fully paid, nonassessable and free of preemptive rights and upon consummation of the Contribution will be owned directly or indirectly by the Company and (ii) there are no subscriptions, options, warrants, rights, calls, contracts, voting trusts, proxies or other commitments, understandings, restrictions or arrangements relating to the issuance, sale, voting or transfer of any shares of capital stock of any such material Subsidiary, including any right of conversion or exchange under any outstanding security, instrument or agreement.

SECTION 3.02.  Capital Stock . (a) The authorized Capital Stock of the Company immediately following the Distribution will consist solely of (i) 5,750,000 shares of Common Stock, which may be amended based on any distribution ratio established by PNX for the Distribution, and (ii) no shares of preferred stock are issued or outstanding, prior to the issuance of the Preferred Stock as contemplated by this Agreement. Each share of Capital Stock of the Company (including without limitation the Preferred Stock) will be, as of the date or dates of their issuance, duly authorized and, when issued and delivered in accordance with this Agreement, will be duly and validly issued and fully paid and nonassessable, and the issuance thereof will not be subject to any preemptive or similar rights or made in violation of any Applicable Law. Immediately after the Distribution, the number of outstanding shares of Common Stock will be 770,000 and the number of shares of Common Stock into which all of the shares of the outstanding shares of Preferred Stock are convertible shall be 230,000.

(b) Except as set forth on Schedule 3.02, there are (i) no outstanding options, warrants, agreements, conversion rights, exchange rights, preemptive rights or other rights (whether contingent or not) to subscribe for, purchase or acquire any issued or unissued shares of Capital Stock of the Company or any Subsidiary and (ii) no restrictions upon, or Contracts or understandings of the Company or any Subsidiary with respect to, the voting or transfer of any shares of Capital Stock of the Company or any Subsidiary.

(c) Prior to the Step 1 Closing Date, the Conversion Shares will have been duly authorized and adequately reserved in contemplation of the conversion of the Series A Preferred Stock and Series B Preferred Stock and, when issued and delivered in accordance with the terms of the Certificate of Designations, will have been duly and validly issued and will be fully paid and nonassessable, and the issuance thereof will not have been subject to any preemptive or similar rights or made in violation any Applicable Law.

(d) The holders of the Series A Preferred Stock and the Series B Preferred Stock will, upon issuance thereof, have the rights set forth in the Certificate of Designations (subject to the limitations and qualifications set forth therein and under the General Corporation Law of the State of Delaware (the “ DGCL ”)).

SECTION 3.03.  Authorization; Enforceability . The Company has the power and authority to execute, deliver and perform the terms and provisions of this Agreement, and has taken all action necessary to authorize the execution, delivery and performance by it of this Agreement and to consummate the Transactions. No other corporate proceeding on the part of

 

13


the Company or its stockholders is necessary for such authorization, execution, delivery and consummation. The Company has duly executed and delivered this Agreement and, assuming the due authorization, execution and delivery by the other parties hereto, constitutes a legal, valid and binding obligation of the Company, enforceable against the Company in accordance with its terms.

SECTION 3.04.  No Violation; Consents . (a) The execution, delivery and performance by the Company of this Agreement and the consummation by the Company of the Transactions do not and will not violate, conflict with, result in a breach of or contravene in any material respect any Applicable Law. Except as set forth on Schedule 3.04, the execution, delivery and performance by the Company of this Agreement and the consummation of the Transactions will not (i)(A) violate, conflict with, result in a breach of or constitute (with or without due notice or lapse of time or both) a default (or give rise to any right of termination, cancellation or acceleration) under any Contract to which the Company or any Subsidiary is a party or by which the Company or any Subsidiary is bound or to which any of the assets of the Virtus Business will be subject immediately following the Distribution, or (B) result in the right of termination, acceleration of or creation or imposition of any Lien upon any of the properties or assets of the Virtus Business, except for any such violations, conflicts, breaches or defaults that would not, individually or in the aggregate, reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect and (ii) conflict with or violate any provision of the certificate of incorporation or bylaws or other governing documents of the Company or any Subsidiary.

(b) Except for (i) applicable filings, if any, with the Commission pursuant to the Exchange Act, including without limitations the Form 10, (ii) filings under state securities or “blue sky” laws and (iii) filing of the Certificate of Designations with the Secretary of State of the State of Delaware, no notice to, exemption or review by, consent, authorization approval or order of, or filing or registration with, any Governmental Authority or other Person is required to be obtained or made by the Company, or any Subsidiary for the execution, delivery and performance of this Agreement or the consummation of the Transactions, except where the failure to obtain such consents, authorizations or orders, or make such filings or registrations, would not, individually or in the aggregate, reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

SECTION 3.05.  Financial Statements . (a) The historical financial statements of the Company and the Subsidiaries (including any related notes or schedules) included in the Draft Form 10 (the “ Company Financial Statements ”) were prepared in accordance with GAAP applied on a consistent basis (except as may be disclosed therein). The Company Financial Statements fairly present in all material respects the combined financial position of the Company and the Subsidiaries as of the respective dates thereof and the results of operations, cash flows and changes in invested equity for the respective periods then ended (subject, in the case of the unaudited interim financial statements, to normal year-end audit adjustments on a basis comparable with past periods).

(b) The books and records of the Virtus Business have been maintained in accordance with good business practices. Except as otherwise described in the Draft Form 10, the Unaudited Pro Forma Consolidated Balance Sheet as of June 30, 2008 included in the Draft Form 10 does not reflect any material asset that is not intended to constitute a part of the Virtus

 

14


Business after giving effect to the Transactions (excluding routine dispositions of investment assets in the ordinary course of business consistent with past practice), and the Unaudited Pro Forma Consolidated Statements of Operations for the six months ended June 30, 2008 and for the year ended December 31, 2007 included in the Draft Form 10 do not reflect the results of any material operations of any Person that are not intended to constitute a part of the Virtus Business after giving effect to the Transactions. Except as otherwise described in the Draft Form 10 or in Schedule 3.05(b), such consolidated statements of operations reflect all material costs that historically have been incurred in connection with the operation of the Virtus Business.

(c) The Company and the Subsidiaries maintain in all material respects internal controls over financial reporting to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with GAAP, including policies and procedures that (i) pertain to the maintenance of records that in reasonable detail accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the Company and the Subsidiaries, (ii) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with GAAP, and that receipts and expenditures of the Company and the Subsidiaries are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the Company and the Subsidiaries and (iii) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use or disposition of the assets of the Company and the Subsidiaries that could have a material effect on the financial statements.

SECTION 3.06.  Absence of Certain Changes . Except as disclosed in the Draft Form 10, since June 30, 2008 until the date hereof, no event or events have occurred that has had or would reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

SECTION 3.07.  Assets . Except as set forth in Schedule 3.07, the Company and the Subsidiaries own and have or, immediately following the Distribution will own and have, good, valid and marketable title to, or a valid leasehold interest in, or otherwise have or, immediately following the Distribution will have, sufficient and legally enforceable rights to use without any increase in payment therefor, all of the properties and assets (real, personal or mixed, tangible or intangible) used or held for use in connection with, reasonably necessary for the conduct of, or otherwise material to the operations of the Virtus Business, free and clear of all Liens, except for Permitted Liens. This Section 3.07 does not apply to Intellectual Property (for which Section 3.08 is applicable).

SECTION 3.08.  Intellectual Property . (a) Except as set forth in Schedule 3.08 and except as would not, individually or in the aggregate, reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect, (i) the Company and each Subsidiary owns or has sufficient rights to use all the Intellectual Property used in the conduct of the Virtus Business (the “ Company Intellectual Property ”) free and clear of any Liens and the consummation of the Transactions will not conflict with, alter, impair or terminate any of such rights, (ii) to the knowledge of the Company, the registered Intellectual Property owned by the Company and any of the Subsidiaries is valid, subsisting and enforceable, (iii) to the knowledge of the Company, the use of any licensed Company Intellectual Property by the Company and the Subsidiaries, as licensee and the use of any other Company Intellectual Property the use of which by the Company or any Subsidiary is governed by a Contract with a third-party is and, will, immediately following the

 

15


Distribution be, in accordance in all material respects with the applicable license or Contract pursuant to which the entities conducting the Virtus Business acquired the right to use such Company Intellectual Property, (iv) the Company and the Subsidiaries are not infringing, misappropriating or otherwise violating the Intellectual Property rights of others and since January 1, 2005, neither the Company nor any of the Subsidiaries has received any written notification that the Virtus Business or the Company Intellectual Property has infringed upon, misapproproiated or violated the Intellectual Property rights of others, (v) to the knowledge of the Company, no Company Intellectual Property is being infringed, misappropriated or violated by others; and (vi) to the knowledge of the Company, no Company Intellectual Property is being used or enforced by the Virtus Business, the Company or any Subsidiary in a manner that would reasonably be expected to result in the abandonment, cancellation or unenforceability of any Company Intellectual Property.

(b) Except as would not, individually or in the aggregate, reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect, the Company and the Subsidiaries take reasonable steps to maintain, police, preserve and protect the Company Intellectual Property including such Intellectual Property that is confidential in nature.

(c) Except as would not, individually or in the aggregate, reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect, the computers, software, systems, databases, networks and other information technology equipment of the Company and each Subsidiary operate and perform in all material respects as required to conduct the Virtus Business and have not materially failed or malfunctioned within the past 3 years. The Company and the Subsidiaries have implemented or are implementing reasonable disaster recovery and back up technology.

(d) None of the software owned by the Company or the Subsidiaries contains or is distributed with any shareware, open source code or other software whose use or distribution is under a license that requires the Company and/or any of its Subsidiaries to do any of the following: (i) disclose or distribute such software owned by the Company and/or any of the Subsidiaries in source code form, (ii) authorize the licensee of such software to make derivative works thereof or (iii) distribute such software at no costs to the recipient.

SECTION 3.09.  No Undisclosed Material Liabilities . Except as disclosed on Schedule 3.09 or in the Draft Form 10, there are no liabilities of the Virtus Business, the Company or the Subsidiaries of any kind whatsoever, whether accrued, contingent, absolute, determined, determinable or otherwise, other than (i) liabilities disclosed, reflected or reserved against in the balance sheet of the Company and the Subsidiaries dated as of June 30, 2008 (and the notes thereto) included in the Draft Form 10 or in the “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operation” section of the Draft Form 10, (ii) liabilities incurred in the ordinary course consistent with past practice since June 30, 2008, (iii) liabilities arising under this Agreement, (iv) liabilities not required by GAAP to be recognized or disclosed on a consolidated balance sheet of the Company and its consolidated Subsidiaries or in the notes thereto, provided, in the case of clauses (ii) and (iv) above, that any such liability would not, individually or in the aggregate, reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect, and (v) liabilities to be retained by PNX.

 

16


SECTION 3.10.  Compliance with Laws . (a) The Virtus Business, the Company and the Subsidiaries have been conducted and are in compliance in all material respects with all Applicable Laws, except for instances of noncompliance that, individually or in the aggregate, have not had and would not reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

(b) Except as would not, individually or in the aggregate, reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect, (i) each Virtus Investment Advisor is duly registered as an investment adviser under the Investment Advisers Act and under the securities laws of each jurisdiction where the conduct of its business requires such registration, licensing or qualification (and has been so registered at all times when it has been required under Applicable Law to be so registered) and is in compliance with federal, state and foreign laws requiring such registration, licensing or qualification or is subject to no material liability or disability by reason of the failure to be so registered, licensed or qualified in any such jurisdiction or to be in such compliance and (ii) neither the Company nor any Subsidiary (other than the Virtus Investment Advisors), is required to be registered, licensed or qualified as an investment adviser under any Applicable Law including the laws requiring any such registration, licensing or qualification in any jurisdiction in which it or such other subsidiaries conduct business. The Company has no investment advisors (other than the Virtus Investment Advisors) whether registered under the Investment Advisers Act or not. Except as would not, individually or in the aggregate, reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect, (i) Phoenix Equity Planning Corporation (the “ Virtus Broker Dealer Subsidiary ”) is, and has been at all times during the prior six years, duly registered, licensed or qualified as a broker-dealer under the Exchange Act, and under the securities laws of each jurisdiction where the conduct of its business requires such registration, licensing or qualification, and is in compliance with federal, state and foreign laws requiring such registration, licensing or qualification or is subject to no material liability or disability by reason of the failure to be so registered, licensed or qualified in any such jurisdiction or to be in such compliance and (ii) the Virtus Broker Dealer Subsidiary is a member in good standing of the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority and each other self-regulatory organization where the conduct of its business requires such membership. Neither the Company nor any of the Subsidiaries (other than the Virtus Broker Dealer Subsidiary) is required to be registered, licensed or qualified as a broker-dealer under any Applicable Law including the laws requiring any such registration, licensing or qualification in any jurisdiction in which it or such other Subsidiaries conduct business, except where the failure to be so registered, licensed or qualified would not, individually or in the aggregate, reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

(c) Except as would not, individually or in the aggregate, reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect, each of the Company, the Subsidiaries (including the Virtus Investment Advisers) and each of its predecessors, if any, in the conduct of the Virtus Business has at all times rendered investment advisory services to all Clients, including the Virtus Funds, in compliance with all applicable requirements as to portfolio composition and portfolio management, including the terms of any and all applicable investment advisory agreements, written instructions from the Virtus Funds, including the applicable Policies and Procedures, the organizational documents of the Virtus Funds, applicable Regulatory Documents, board of director or trustee directives (if applicable) and Applicable Law. The Company or the Subsidiaries has not taken (or failed to take) any action that would be inconsistent in any material respect with any of the Virtus Funds’ prospectuses and other offering, advertising and marketing materials.

 

17


(d) None of the Virtus Investment Advisers or any “affiliated person” (as defined in the Investment Company Act) of any of them is (taking into account any applicable exemption) ineligible pursuant to Section 9(a) or 9(b) of the Investment Company Act to serve as an investment adviser (or in any other capacity contemplated in the Investment Company Act) to a Virtus Fund, and there is no proceeding pending and served or, to the knowledge of the Company, pending and not served, or threatened by any Governmental Authority, which would result in the ineligibility of any of the Virtus Investment Advisers or any “affiliated persons” of any of them to serve in any such capacities. None of the Virtus Investment Advisers and the “affiliated persons” (as defined in the Investment Advisers Act) of any of them is ineligible pursuant to Section 203 of the Investment Advisers Act to serve as a registered investment adviser or “associated person” (as defined in the Investment Advisers Act) of a registered investment adviser, and there is no proceeding pending and served or, to the knowledge of the Company, pending and not served, or threatened by any Governmental Authority, which would result in the ineligibility of any of the Virtus Investment Advisers or any “affiliated person” to serve in any such capacities. Neither the Virtus Broker Dealer Subsidiary nor its associated persons is ineligible pursuant to Section 15(b) of the Exchange Act to serve as a broker-dealer or as an “associated person” (as defined in the Exchange Act) of a registered broker-dealer, as applicable, and there is no proceeding pending and served or, to the knowledge of the Company, pending and not served, or threatened by any Governmental Authority, which would result in the ineligibility of the Virtus Broker Dealer Subsidiary or any “affiliated person” to serve in any such capacities.

(e) Schedule 3.10(e)(i) lists all examinations of the Company and the Subsidiaries (including Virtus) conducted by any Governmental Authority since January 1, 2005 and the Company has made available to the Investor complete and accurate copies of all material correspondence relating to the Virtus Business in its, the Subsidiaries’ or PIMCO’s possession, whether from or to the Governmental Authority, in connection therewith. To the knowledge of the Company, there is no unresolved material violation, criticism, or exception by any Governmental Authority with respect to any report or statement relating to any examination of the Company, the Subsidiaries or any Virtus Fund relating to the Virtus Business. Schedule 3.10(e)(ii) lists all subpoena, examination or other information or document requests from any Governmental Authority received by PIMCO (only with respect to the Virtus Business) the Company or the Subsidiaries since January 1, 2005 and their responses thereto, copies of which, omitting attachments and enclosures, have previously been provided to the Investor.

SECTION 3.11.  No Litigation . (a) Except as disclosed in the Draft Form 10 or Schedule 3.11, there are not any (x) outstanding judgments, awards, orders, decrees or written notices of any alleged violation of Applicable Law against or affecting the Company or any of the Subsidiaries or, with respect to the Virtus Business only, PNX, PIMCO or any of their Affiliates (other than the Company and the Subsidiaries) (y) proceedings pending or, to the knowledge of the Company, threatened against or affecting the Virtus Business, the Company, any of the Subsidiaries or any Virtus Fund or (z) investigations by any Governmental Authority that are, to the knowledge of the Company, pending or threatened against or affecting the Virtus Business, the Company, any of the Subsidiaries, any Virtus Fund or, with respect to the Virtus

 

18


Business only, PNX, PIMCO or any of their Affiliates (other than the Company and the Subsidiaries) that, in any case, individually or in the aggregate, would reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

SECTION 3.12.  Compliance with Constituent Documents . None of the Company or any material Subsidiary is in breach or violation of or in default in the performance or observance of any term or provision of, and no event has occurred which, with lapse of time or action by a third party, would result in a default under the respective articles or certificate of incorporation, bylaws or similar organizational instruments of such entities.

SECTION 3.13.  Interim Changes . Since June 30, 2008, except for (i) actions taken to prepare the Company to be an independent public company (e.g., the incorporation of the Company and the Subsidiaries, the retention of additional employees and the creation of a corporate infrastructure), (ii) actions taken to transfer the Virtus Business from PNX and its subsidiaries to the Company and the Subsidiaries and (iii) actions taken to pursue the business and strategy of the Company and the Subsidiaries as described in the Draft Form 10, the Virtus Business has been operated in all material respects in the ordinary course of business. Without limiting the foregoing, except to the extent consistent with the business and strategy of the Company and the Subsidiaries as described in the Draft Form 10 or as otherwise described in the Draft Form 10, since June 30, 2008, neither the Company nor, with respect to the Virtus Business, any Subsidiary has entered into any material new lines of business or terminated any existing material lines of business or agreed in writing or otherwise to do so.

SECTION 3.14.  Brokers and Finders . Neither the Company nor any Subsidiary nor any of their respective officers or directors has employed any broker or finder or incurred any liability for any financial advisory fees, brokerage fees, commissions or finder’s fees, and no broker or finder has acted directly or indirectly for the Company or any Subsidiary, in connection with this Agreement or the Transactions.

SECTION 3.15.  Real Property . Neither the Company nor any Subsidiary owns any real property or any interest therein. Except as set forth in Schedule 3.15, there exists no material default or condition, or any state of facts or event which with the passage of time or giving of notice or both would constitute a material default, in the performance of the obligations of the Company or the Subsidiaries under any material real property lease to which the Company or any Subsidiary is a party or, to the knowledge of the Company, by any other party to any of such leases. Neither the Company nor any of the Subsidiaries has received any written or oral communication from the landlord or lessor under any of such real property leases claiming that it is in breach of its obligations under such leases, except for written or oral communications claiming breaches that, individually or in the aggregate, would not reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

SECTION 3.16.  Contracts . (a) The exhibits to the Form 10 and Schedule 3.16 (a) together contain a correct and complete list of all Contracts (except ordinary Contracts entered in the ordinary course of business for delivery of advisory, administrative and similar services to Clients) in effect as of the date of this Agreement (i) to which the Company or any of its Affiliates is a party, and (ii) that is material to the Virtus Business (each, including ordinary Contracts entered in the ordinary course of business for delivery of advisory, administrative and

 

19


similar services to Clients, a “ Material Contract ”). The Company has made available or delivered to the Investor complete and correct copies of all written Material Contracts (except ordinary Contracts entered in the ordinary course of business for delivery of advisory, administrative and similar services to Clients), including the Separation Agreement and each Ancillary Agreement (as such term is defined in the Separation Agreement)) and accurate and complete descriptions of all material terms of all oral Material Contracts.

(b) Each Material Contract is valid, binding and in full force and effect, and is enforceable against the Company or any of its Affiliates that is a party thereto, as the case may be, and, to the knowledge of the Company, each other party thereto, in accordance with its terms. Each of the Company or its Affiliates, as the case may be, has duly performed all of its material obligations under each such Material Contract to the extent that such obligations have accrued. There are no existing defaults (or circumstances, occurrences, events or acts that, with the giving of notice or lapse of time or both would become defaults) of the Company or any of its Affiliates or, to the knowledge of the Company, any other party thereto under any Material Contract, except in each case for any defaults that, individually or in the aggregate, have not had and would not reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect. To the knowledge of the Company, there are no circumstances, occurrences, events or acts that, with the giving of notice or lapse of time or both, would permit any party thereto, to alter or amend any of the material terms or conditions of any Material Contract or would permit or would result in any increased liability or penalty, except for such circumstances, occurrences, events or acts that, individually or in the aggregate, have not had or resulted in and would not reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect.

(c) Except as set forth on Form 10 or on Schedule 3.16(c), there is no Material Contract, material arrangement, material liability or material obligation (whether or not evidenced by a writing) concerning the Virtus Business between the Company or the Subsidiaries, on the one hand, and PIMCO or any of its Affiliates (other than the Company and the Subsidiaries), on the other hand.

SECTION 3.17.  Regulatory Documents . (a) Except for instances of failure to make filings or payments that have not had and would not, individually or in the aggregate, reasonably be expected to have a Material Adverse Effect, since January 1, 2006 each of the Company, the Subsidiaries and the Company’s and the Subsidiaries’ Affiliates (only with respect to the Virtus Business) has timely filed all Regulatory Documents required to be filed by it (including, in the case of the Company, the Draft Form 10, as it may be amended or supplemented), and has paid all fees and assessments due and payable in connection with such filings.

(b) As of their respective dates, the Regulatory Documents complied, and any Regulatory Documents to be filed prior to the Step 2 Closing will comply, in all material respects with the requirements of Applicable Law (including the Securities Laws), and none of such Regulatory Documents, as of their respective dates, contained or will contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omitted to state a fact required to be stated therein or necessary (in light of the applicable circumstances) in order to make the statements therein not misleading.

 

20


SECTION 3.18.  Virtus Funds . (a)  Fund Compliance with Laws and Investment Policies . (i)The Draft Form 10 sets forth a correct and complete list of all Virtus Funds.

(ii) Since Virtus has been an administrator or an advisor to it, each Virtus Fund has been continuously (A) registered as an investment company under the Investment Company Act, (B) in compliance in all material respects with (1) the Securities Laws and the rules and regulations promulgated thereunder, (2) the investment policies and investment restrictions set forth in its registration statements under the Investment Company Act as from time to time in effect, (3) such Virtus Fund’s Policies and Procedures, and (4) the laws of each jurisdiction in which shares of such Virtus Fund have been offered for sale or sold, except, in each instance, where any such non-compliance would not have a Material Adverse Effect, and (C) duly registered or licensed and in good standing under the laws of each jurisdiction in which qualification is necessary. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, each Virtus Fund has maintained records required by the Investment Company Act, including records necessary to substantiate the performance of the Virtus Fund set forth in such Virtus Fund’s registration statement as from time to time in effect, and such records are true and correct in all material respects.

(iii) Except as set forth on Schedule 3.18(a)(iii), neither the Company nor any of the Subsidiaries or any “affiliated person” (as defined in the Investment Company Act) of any of them or any Virtus Fund receives or is entitled to receive any compensation directly or indirectly (A) from any Person in connection with the purchase or sale of securities or other property to, from or on behalf of any Virtus Fund, other than bona fide ordinary compensation as principal underwriter for such Virtus Fund or as broker in connection with the purchase or sale of securities in compliance with Section 17(e) of the Investment Company Act or (B) from any Virtus Fund or its security holders for other than bona fide investment advisory, administrative or other services. Accurate and complete disclosure of all such compensation arrangements has been made in the registration statement of each Virtus Fund filed with the Commission.

(iv) Schedule 3.18(a)(iv) lists all examinations, investigations or proceedings of or with respect to any Virtus Fund or any service provider to the Virtus Funds (whether or not an Affiliate of the Company) since January 1, 2006 of or by any Governmental Authority to the extent such examination, investigation or proceeding is known to the Company, PNX or PIMCO and relates to the Company, the Subsidiaries or the Virtus Funds. The Company has provided to the Investor copies of all written material correspondence, including any subpoenas, regarding such examinations, investigations and proceedings, except for those which are not in its or its Affiliates possession and are with respect to such service providers that are not Affiliates of the Company. There are no restrictions imposed by or arising out of any Governmental Authority, consent judgments or Commission or judicial orders on or against or with regard to any Virtus Fund currently in effect, except for exemptive orders issued pursuant to Section 6(c) of the Investment Company Act listed on Schedule 3.18(a)(iv).

(b) Fund Agreements and Fund Reports . (i) Since Virtus has been an administrator or an advisor to it, each Virtus Fund has timely filed with the Commission and any other applicable Governmental Authority all of the investment advisory agreements and distribution or underwriting contracts, plans adopted pursuant to Rule 12b-1 under the Investment Company Act and all arrangements for the payment of “service fees” (as such term is

 

21


defined in Rule 2830 of the FINRA Conduct Rules), and all transfer agency, custody, administrative services and other similar agreements to which it is a party, and any amendments thereto, if any, in each case, that have been in effect at any time since January 1, 2005 (collectively, the “ Fund Agreements ”), and has timely paid all fees and other compensation required to be paid in connection therewith. True, correct and complete copies of the Fund Agreements: (A) have been made available to the Investor prior to the date hereof and (B) are in full force and effect. Since the inception of each Virtus Fund, there has been in full force and effect at all times an investment advisory agreement and a distribution or underwriting agreement for such Virtus Fund, and each such Fund Agreement was duly approved in accordance with the applicable provisions of the Investment Company Act.

(ii) Except where the failure to do so would not have a Material Adverse Effect, since Virtus has been an administrator or an advisor to it, each Virtus Fund has timely filed all prospectuses, annual information forms, registration statements, proxy statements, financial statements, notices on Form 24f-2, other forms, reports, sales literature and advertising materials and any other documents (other than the Fund Agreements) required to be filed with any Governmental Authority, and any amendments thereto (the “ Fund Reports ”), and has timely paid all fees and interest required to be paid in connection therewith. The Fund Reports (x) have been prepared in all material respects in accordance with the requirements of Applicable Law, and (y) did not at the time they were filed and, with respect to any prospectus, proxy statement, sales literature or advertising material, did not during the period of its authorized use, contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact required to be stated therein or necessary in order to make the statements therein, in the light of the circumstances under which they were or are made, not misleading.

(c) Fund Financial Statements . Each Fund Financial Statement is consistent with the books and records of such Virtus Fund and, for the periods for which Virtus has been an administrator or an advisor to it, has been prepared in accordance with GAAP applied on a consistent basis throughout the periods presented in such Fund Financial Statement, subject, in the case of interim unaudited Fund Financial Statements, only to normal year-end audit adjustments on a basis comparable with past periods. Each statement of net assets or assets and liabilities and schedule of investments included in the Fund Financial Statements presents fairly in all material respects the financial position of the applicable Virtus Fund as at the dates thereof, and each statement of operations and changes in net assets included in the Fund Financial Statements presents fairly for the periods for which Virtus has been an administrator or an advisor to it the results of operations and cash flows of such Virtus Fund for the respective period or periods indicated.

(d) Fund Taxes . (i) For the periods for which Virtus has been an administrator or an advisor to it, each Virtus Fund has satisfied the relevant requirements of the Code for all taxable years, or parts thereof, of such Virtus Fund ending on or prior to the earlier of the Step 1 Closing to be treated as a regulated investment company as defined in Sections 851-855 of the Code. Neither the Company nor any of the Subsidiaries or any Virtus Fund or any other agent of any Virtus Fund has received any written notice or other written communication asserting that any Virtus Fund is not in compliance with any of the requirements necessary to be treated as a regulated investment company. With respect to each Virtus Fund, to the knowledge of the Company, no claims have been or are being asserted by any Governmental

 

22


Authority with respect to any material amount of Taxes and there are no threatened claims for any material amount of Taxes. None of the Virtus Funds has ever entered into a closing agreement pursuant to Section 7121 of the Code (or any similar provision of state, local or foreign law). There has not been any audit by any Governmental Authority concerning any material Tax liability of any Virtus Fund, and, to the knowledge of the Company, no such audit is in progress and no Virtus Fund has been notified in writing by any Governmental Authority that any such audit is contemplated or pending. No extension of time with respect to any date on which a material Tax Return was or is to be filed by any Virtus Fund is in force, and no waiver or agreement by any Virtus Fund is in force for the extension of time for the assessment or payment of any material amount of Taxes.

(ii) For the periods for which Virtus has been an administrator or an advisor to it, neither the Company nor any of the Subsidiaries has taken (or failed to take) any action that would (A) prevent any of the Virtus Funds from qualifying as a “regulated investment company,” within the meaning of Section 851 of the Code, or (B) otherwise be inconsistent in any material respect with any of the Virtus Funds’ prospectuses and other offering, advertising and marketing materials.

(iii) Each Virtus Fund has complied, in all material respects, with all information reporting and withholding provisions imposed by the Code and any applicable similar provisions of state, local and foreign law.

SECTION 3.19.  Assets Under Management; Clients . (a) Each Client to which Virtus or any Subsidiary provides investment management, advisory or sub-advisory services that is (i) an employee benefit plan, as defined in Section 3(3) of ERISA that is subject to Title I of ERISA, (ii) a Person acting on behalf of such a plan or (iii) any entity whose assets include the assets of such a plan, within the meaning of ERISA and applicable regulations (hereinafter referred to as an “ERISA Client”) has, since January 1, 2005, been managed by Virtus or any of its Affiliates such that the exercise of such management or provision of any services is in compliance in all material respects with the applicable requirements of ERISA. Each of Virtus and its Affiliates managing such Person, to the extent it is regulated under the Investment Advisers Act, satisfies the requirements of Prohibited Transaction Class Exemption 84-14 for a “qualified professional asset manager” (as such term is used in Prohibited Transaction Class Exemption 84-14).

(b) Each of the Company and any Subsidiary that provides investment advisory services has at all times rendered investment advisory services to Clients with whom such entity is or was a party to an investment advisory agreement or similar arrangement in substantial compliance with the terms of such investment advisory agreements, written instructions from such Clients, the organizational documents of such Clients, if applicable, any prospectuses or other offering materials, board of director or trustee directives and Applicable Law.

 

23


ARTICLE IV

REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES OF THE INVESTOR

The Investor hereby represents and warrants to the Company and PIMCO on the date hereof as follows:

SECTION 4.01.  Organization; Authorization; Enforceability . The Investor is duly organized, validly existing and in good standing under the laws of the jurisdiction of its organization and has all requisite power and authority to own its properties and assets and to carry on its business as it is now being conducted. The Investor has the power and authority to execute, deliver and perform its obligations under this Agreement and has taken all necessary action to authorize the execution, delivery and performance by it of this Agreement and to consummate the Transactions. No other proceedings on the part of the Investor are necessary for such authorization, execution, delivery and consummation. The Investor has duly executed and delivered this Agreement and, assuming the due authorization, execution and delivery by the other parties hereto constitutes a legal, valid and binding obligation of it, enforceable against it in accordance with its terms.

SECTION 4.02.  Private Placement . (a) The Investor understands that (i) the offering and sale of the Preferred Stock and the Conversion Shares is intended to be exempt from registration under the Securities Act pursuant to Section 4(2) thereof, and (ii) there is no existing public or other market for the Preferred Stock.

(b) The Investor (i) is a “qualified institutional buyer”, as such term is defined in Rule 144A under the Securities Act or (ii) is an institutional “accredited investor”, as such term is defined in Rule 501(a) of Regulation D under the Securities Act.

(c) The Investor is acquiring the Preferred Stock to be acquired hereunder (and will acquire the Conversion Shares) for its own account (or for accounts over which it exercises investment authority), for investment and not with a view to the resale or distribution thereof in violation of any Applicable Laws.

(d) The Investor understands that the Preferred Stock and the Conversion Shares will be issued in transactions exempt from the registration or qualification requirements of the Securities Act and applicable state securities laws, and that such securities must be held indefinitely unless a subsequent disposition thereof is registered or qualified under the Securities Act and such laws or is exempt from such registration or qualification.

(e) The Investor (A) has been furnished with or has had full access to all the information that it considers necessary or appropriate to make an informed investment decision with respect to the Preferred Stock and the Conversion Shares and that it has requested from the Company, (B) has had an opportunity to discuss with management of the Company the intended business and financial affairs of the Company and to obtain information (to the extent the Company possessed such information or could acquire it without unreasonable effort or expense) necessary to verify any information furnished to it or to which had access and (C) can bear the economic risk of (x) an investment in the Preferred Stock and the Conversion Shares indefinitely

 

24


and (y) a total loss in respect of such investment, has such knowledge and experience in business and financial matters so as to enable it to understand and evaluate the risks of and form an investment decision with respect to its investment in the Preferred Stock and the Conversion Shares and to protect its own interest in connection with such investment.

SECTION 4.03.  No Violation; Consents . (a) The execution, delivery and performance by the Investor of this Agreement and the consummation by it of the Transactions do not and will not violate, conflict with, result in a breach of or contravene in any material respect any Applicable Law. The execution, delivery and performance by the Investor of this Agreement and the consummation of the Transactions will not (i)(A) violate, conflict with, result in a breach of or constitute (with or without due notice or lapse of time or both) a default (or give rise to any right of termination, cancellation or acceleration) under any Contract to which it is party or by which it is bound or to which any of its assets is subject or (B) result in the creation or imposition of any Lien upon any of the properties or assets of it, except for any such violations, conflicts, breaches, defaults or Liens that would not, individually or in the aggregate, reasonably be expected to have a material adverse effect on the ability of it to timely perform its obligations under this Agreement and (ii) conflict with or violate any provision of the certificate of incorporation or bylaws or other governing documents of it.

(b) Except for applicable filings, if any, with the Commission pursuant to the Exchange Act, no notice to, exemption or review by consent, authorization approval or order of, or filing or registration with, any Governmental Authority or other Person is required to be obtained or made by the Investor for the execution, delivery and performance of this Agreement or the consummation of any of the Transactions, except where the failure to obtain such consents, authorizations or orders, or make such filings or registrations, would not, individually or in the aggregate, reasonably be expected to have a material adverse effect on the ability of it to timely perform its obligations under this Agreement.

SECTION 4.04.  No Litigation . There are not any (a) outstanding judgments, orders, decrees or written notices of any alleged violations of Applicable Law against or affecting the Investor or any of the Subsidiaries, (b) proceedings pending or, to the knowledge of it, threatened against or affecting the Investor or any of the Subsidiaries or (c) investigations by any Governmental Authority that are, to the knowledge of it, pending or threatened against or affecting it or any of the Subsidiaries that, in any case, individually or in the aggregate, would reasonably be expected to have a material adverse effect on the ability of it to timely perform its obligations under this Agreement.

SECTION 4.05.  Financing . The Investor will have on each of the Step 1 Closing Date and Step 2 Closing Date available funds to consummate the purchase of the Preferred Stock to be purchased by it on such dates on the terms and conditions contemplated by this Agreement.

SECTION 4.06.  Ownership of Preferred Stock . The Investor does not own, directly or indirectly (other than in a fiduciary capacity), or have any option or right to acquire, any securities of PNX, the Company or any Subsidiaries other than the Preferred Stock being purchased by it hereunder.

 

25


SECTION 4.07.  Brokers and Finders . Except for BMO Capital Markets, Corp., the Investor nor any of its officers or directors has employed any broker or finder or incurred any liability for any financial advisory fees, brokerage fees, commissions or finder’s fees, and no broker or finder has acted directly or indirectly for the Investor, in connection with this Agreement or the Transactions, in each case, whose fees the Company would be required to pay.

SECTION 4.08.  Tax Liability . The Investor has reviewed with its own Tax advisors the federal, state, local, and foreign Tax consequences of this investment and the Transactions if and to the extent it deems such review to be advisable. It has relied solely on such advisors and not on any statements or representations of the Company or of any agents of the Company. It understands that, except as otherwise specifically contemplated by this Agreement, it (and not the Company or PIMCO) shall be responsible for its own Tax liability that may arise as a result of this investment or the other Transactions contemplated by this Agreement.

SECTION 4.09.  Compliance with Laws . Neither Harris Investment Management, Inc. (“ HIM ”) nor any “affiliated person” (as defined in the Investment Company Act) of HIM is (taking into account any applicable exemption) ineligible pursuant to Section 9(a) or 9(b) of the Investment Company Act to serve as an investment adviser (or in any other capacity contemplated in the Investment Company Act) to any registered investment company, and there is no proceeding pending and served or, to the knowledge of the Investor, pending and not served, or threatened by any Governmental Authority, which would result in the ineligibility of HIM or any “affiliated persons” of HIM to serve in any such capacities. Neither HIM nor any “affiliated persons” (as defined in the Investment Advisers Act) of HIM is ineligible pursuant to Section 203 of the Investment Advisers Act to serve as a registered investment adviser or “associated person” (as defined in the Investment Advisers Act) of a registered investment adviser, and there is no proceeding pending and served or, to the knowledge of the Investor, pending and not served, or threatened by any Governmental Authority, which would result in the ineligibility of HIM or any “affiliated person” to serve in any such capacities.

ARTICLE V

REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES OF PNX AND PIMCO

Each of PNX and PIMCO hereby represents and warrants to the Investor on the date hereof as follows:

SECTION 5.01.  Organization; Authorization; Enforceability . It is duly organized, validly existing and in good standing under the laws of the jurisdiction of its organization and has all requisite corporate power and authority to own its properties and assets and to carry on its business as it is now being conducted and as proposed to be conducted immediately following the Distribution. It has the power and authority to execute, deliver and perform its obligations under this Agreement and has taken all necessary action to authorize the execution, delivery and performance by it of this Agreement and to consummate the Transactions. No other proceedings on the part of it or its stockholders is necessary for such authorization, execution, delivery and consummation. It has duly executed and delivered this Agreement and, assuming the due authorization, execution and delivery by the other parties hereto, constitutes a legal, valid and binding obligation of it, enforceable against it in accordance with its terms.

 

26


SECTION 5.02.  No Violation; Consents . (a) The execution, delivery and performance by it of this Agreement and the consummation by it of the Transactions do not and will not violate, conflict with, result in a breach of or contravene in any material respect any Applicable Law. The execution, delivery and performance by it of this Agreement and the consummation of the Transactions (i) will not (A) violate, conflict with, result in a breach of or constitute (with or without due notice or lapse of time or both) a default (or give rise to any right of termination, cancellation or acceleration) under any Contract to which it is party or by which it is bound or to which any of its assets is subject, or (B) result in the creation or imposition of any Lien upon any of the properties or assets of it, except for any such violations, conflicts, breaches, defaults or Liens that would not, individually or in the aggregate, reasonably be expected to have a material adverse effect on the ability of it to timely perform its obligations under this Agreement; and (ii) will not conflict with or violate any provision of the certificate of incorporation or bylaws or other governing documents of it.

(b) Except for applicable filings, if any, with the Commission pursuant to the Exchange Act, including without limitation the Form 10, no notice to, exemption or review by, consent, authorization, approval or order of, or filing or registration with, any Governmental Authority or other Person is required to be obtained or made by it for the execution, delivery and performance of this Agreement or the consummation of any of the Transactions, except where the failure to obtain such consents, authorizations or orders, or make such filings or registrations, would not, individually or in the aggregate, reasonably be expected to have a material adverse effect on the ability of it to timely perform its obligations under this Agreement.

SECTION 5.03.  No Litigation . There are not any (a) outstanding judgments, orders, decrees or written notices of any alleged violation of Applicable Law against or affecting it or any of its subsidiaries, (b) proceedings pending or, to the knowledge of it, threatened against or affecting it or any of its subsidiaries or (c) investigations by any Governmental Authority that are, to the knowledge of it, pending or threatened against or affecting it or any of its subsidiaries that, in any case, individually or in the aggregate, would reasonably be expected to have a material adverse effect on the ability of it to timely perform its obligations under this Agreement.

ARTICLE VI

COVENANTS OF THE COMPANY, PNX AND PIMCO

SECTION 6.01.  Access to Information . (a) From the date hereof, until the date when the Preferred Stock purchased pursuant to this Agreement and Beneficially Owned by the Investor represent less than 10% of the outstanding Common Stock (counting as shares owned by the Investor all Conversion Shares and shares of Preferred Stock and Conversion Shares thereof acquired through any exercise of the Additional Financing Right) (the “ Qualifying Ownership Interest ”), the Company will permit the Investor to visit and inspect, at the Investor’s expense, the properties of the Company and the Subsidiaries, to examine the corporate books and to discuss the affairs, finances and accounts of the Company and the Subsidiaries with the principal officers of the Company, all upon reasonable notice and at such reasonable times and as

 

27


often as the Investor may reasonably request. Any investigation pursuant to this Section 6.01 shall be conducted during normal business hours and in such manner as not to interfere unreasonably with the conduct of the business of the Company, and nothing herein shall require the Company or any Subsidiary to disclose any information to the extent (i) prohibited by Applicable Law, (ii) that the Company reasonably believes such information to be competitively sensitive information (except to the extent the Investor provides assurances reasonably acceptable to the Company that such information shall not be used by the Investor or its Affiliates to compete with the Company and Subsidiaries) or (iii) that such disclosure would reasonably be expected to cause a violation of any agreement to which the Company or any Subsidiary is a party or would cause a risk of a loss of privilege to the Company or any Subsidiary (provided that the Company shall use its reasonable best efforts to make appropriate substitute disclosure arrangements under circumstances where the restrictions in this clause (iii) apply).

(b) The Company will provide to the Investor, upon request, all financial information regarding the Company that the Investor may reasonably require, in connection with its equity investment in the Company, to prepare its financial statements and otherwise comply with its financial reporting obligations under Applicable Law and to make all other reports and filings in respect of such investment that may be required by any Governmental Authority subject, if necessary, to customary confidentiality arrangements.

SECTION 6.02.  Compliance with Conditions; Reasonable Best Efforts . Each of the Company, PNX and PIMCO shall use its reasonable best efforts to cause all conditions precedent to the obligations of the Company, PIMCO and the Investor to be satisfied. Upon the terms and subject to the conditions of this Agreement, the Company, PNX and PIMCO will use reasonable best efforts to take, or cause to be taken, all action, and to do, or cause to be done, all things necessary, proper or advisable consistent with Applicable Law to consummate and make effective in the most expeditious manner practicable the Transactions in accordance with the terms of this Agreement. Notwithstanding the foregoing, nothing contained in this Agreement confers upon any of PNX, PIMCO or the Company any obligation to effect the Distribution.

SECTION 6.03.  Consents and Approvals . The Company, PNX and PIMCO (a) shall use their reasonable best efforts to obtain all necessary consents, waivers, authorizations and approvals of all Governmental Authorities and of all other Persons required in connection with the execution, delivery and performance of this Agreement or the consummation of the Transactions and (b) shall diligently assist and cooperate with the Investor in preparing and filing all documents required to be submitted by the Investor to any Governmental Authority in connection with the Transactions (which assistance and cooperation shall include, without limitation, timely furnishing to the Investor all information concerning the Company and the Subsidiaries that counsel to the Investor reasonably determines is required to be included in such documents or would be helpful in obtaining any such required consent, waiver, authorization or approval). The Company, PNX and PIMCO will advise the Investor promptly upon receiving any communication from any third party or Governmental Authority whose consent or approval is required for the consummation of the Transactions that there is a reasonable likelihood that any requisite third party or regulatory approval will not be obtained or that the receipt of any such approval will be materially delayed.

 

28


SECTION 6.04.  Filing of Certificate of Designations . Prior to the Step 1 Closing Date, the Company shall file the Certificate of Designations with the Secretary of State of the State of Delaware pursuant to Section 151(g) of the DGCL and such Certificate of Designations shall continue to be in full force and effect as of the Step 1 Closing Date and the Step 2 Closing Date.

SECTION 6.05.  Reservation of Shares . The Company shall (a) cause to be authorized and reserve and keep available at all times during which any shares of Preferred Stock remain outstanding, free from preemptive rights, out of its treasury stock or authorized but unissued shares of Capital Stock, or both, solely for the purpose of effecting the conversion of the Preferred Stock pursuant to the terms of the Certificate of Designations sufficient shares of Common Stock (including any related rights issuable in respect thereof pursuant to the Rights Agreement) to provide for the issuance of the maximum number of shares issuable upon conversion of outstanding shares of Preferred Stock owned at any time by the Investors and (b) issue and cause the transfer agent to deliver such shares of Common Stock (including any related rights issuable in respect thereof pursuant to the Rights Agreement) as required upon conversion of the shares of Preferred Stock and take all actions necessary to ensure that all such shares will, when issued and paid for pursuant to the conversion of the Preferred Stock, be duly and validly issued, fully paid and nonassessable.

SECTION 6.06.  Listing of Shares . The Company shall cause the Conversion Shares to be listed or otherwise eligible for trading on the New York Stock Exchange or any other national securities exchange on which the Common Stock may then be listed or eligible for trading.

SECTION 6.07.  Governance Matters . (a) The Company will promptly cause one person nominated by the Investor (the “ Investor Designate ”) and one person elected by the holders of Preferred Stock in accordance with the Certificate of Designations (together, the “ Board Representatives ”) to be elected or appointed to the Board of Directors, subject to satisfaction of all legal and governance requirements regarding service as a director of the Company, such appointments to be effective as of the date of the Distribution. After such appointments, so long as the Investor Beneficially Owns at least 10% of the outstanding shares of Common Stock (including for this purpose Conversion Shares and shares of Preferred Stock and Conversion Shares thereof acquired through any exercise of the Additional Financing Right), the Company will be required to recommend to its stockholders the election of the Investor Designate at the Company’s annual meeting, subject to satisfaction of all legal and governance requirements regarding service as a director of the Company, to the Board of Directors. If the Investor no longer Beneficially Owns the minimum percentage of Common Stock specified in the prior sentence, the Investor will have no further rights under this Section 6.07 with respect to an Investor Designate, and, at the written request of the Board of Directors, shall use all reasonable best efforts to cause its Investor Designate to resign from the Board of Directors as promptly as possible thereafter.

(b) The Investor Designate (including any successor nominee) duly selected in accordance with Section 6.07(a) shall, subject to Applicable Law, be one of the Company’s nominees to serve on the Board of Directors. The Company shall use all reasonable best efforts to have the Investor Designate elected as a director of the Company and the Company shall solicit proxies for such person to the same extent as it does for any of its other nominees to the Board of Directors.

 

29


(c) Subject to Section 6.07(a), the Investor shall have the power to designate an Investor Designate’s replacement upon the death, resignation, retirement, disqualification or removal from office of such director. The Board of Directors will promptly take all action reasonably required to fill the vacancy resulting therefrom with such person (including such person, subject to Applicable Law, being one of the Company’s nominee to serve on the Board of Directors, using all reasonable best efforts to have such person elected as director of the Company and the Company soliciting proxies for such person to the same extent as it does for any of its other nominees to the Board of Directors).

(d) The Board Representatives shall be entitled to the same compensation and same indemnification in connection with his or her role as a director as the other members of the Board of Directors, and each Board Representative shall be entitled to reimbursement for documented, reasonable out-of-pocket expenses incurred in attending meetings of the Board of Directors or any committees thereof, to the same extent as the other members of the Board of Directors. The Company shall notify the Board Representatives of all regular and special meetings of the Board of Directors and shall notify the Board Representatives of all regular and special meetings of any committee of the Board of Directors of which a Board Representative is a member. The Company shall provide the Board Representatives with copies of all notices, minutes, consents and other materials provided to all other members of the Board of Directors concurrently as such materials are provided to the other members.

SECTION 6.08.  Registration Rights . The Company shall give the Investor and the Investor shall have registration rights as set forth on Annex A to this Agreement.

SECTION 6.09.  Additional Financing Right . (a) So long as the Investor owns a Qualifying Ownership Interest and subject to the prior receipt of the Fund Board Approval and Fund Shareholder Approval, if at any time prior to the twenty-four (24) month anniversary of the Step 2 Closing Date, the Company proposes to issue to any Person any Common Stock or a Common Stock-Equivalent Security of the Company (such issuance, a “ Qualifying Issuance ”) other than (i) pursuant to an employee or non-management director stock option plan, stock bonus plan, stock purchase plan or other management equity program or plan, (ii) pursuant to any merger, share exchange or acquisition pursuant to which Common Stock or any Common Stock-Equivalent Security are exchanged for, or issued upon cancellation or conversion of, equity securities of another entity not Affiliated with the Investor, or (iii) pursuant to any stock split, stock dividend or recapitalization by the Company (so long as all stockholders of the same class or series of securities of the Company are treated equally with all other holders of such class or series of securities with respect to such class or series), the Investor shall be afforded the right to provide additional financing to the Company in lieu of the Qualifying Issuance through a purchase of additional shares of Series B Preferred Stock or a new series of Preferred Stock identical to the Series B Preferred Stock except with respect to conversion price (as provided below) (such additional shares of Preferred Stock, “ New Preferred Stock ”). The Investor will have the right (the “ Additional Financing Right ”) to purchase New Preferred Stock up to a principal amount of New Preferred Stock equal to $25 million. The conversion price for the New Preferred Stock will be the lower of (i) the then applicable conversion price of the Series B

 

30


Preferred Stock and (ii) the current per share volume-weighted average price of the Common Stock over the ten (10) trading days immediately prior to the consummation of the purchase pursuant to the Additional Financing Right. The Investor must exercise the Additional Financing Right within twenty (20) Business Days after receipt of any notice of intention to initiate a Qualifying Issuance from the Company.

(b) In the event that the Investor exercises its Additional Financing Right and Beneficially Owns in excess of 33% of the outstanding Common Stock (including for this purpose any Conversion Shares) after giving effect to such Additional Financing Right, it shall be granted the right to appoint one (1) additional member to the Board of Directors so long as such additional right would not give rise to a Regulatory Issue. Such additional member of the Board of Directors shall be afforded the same rights as the Investor Designate in accordance with Section 6.07 (such additional member to be included in the term “Investor Designate”).

(c) If the consummation of the Additional Financing Right would result in an “assignment” of the investment advisory contracts of clients of the Company within the meaning of the Investment Company Act and the Investment Advisers Act, then the Company and the Investor shall structure the Qualified Issuance and the securities to be issued by the Company (including, without limitation, by altering the voting rights granted to the Investor) to ensure that such an assignment will not occur.

SECTION 6.10.  Investor Put Right; Company Call Option .

(a) Investor Put Right . Subject to Section 6.10(c), at any time on or after the three (3) year anniversary of the Step 1 Closing, the Investor shall have the right (the “ Put Right ”), to require the Company to repurchase, and the Company shall repurchase, all of the Series A Preferred Stock purchased by the Investor in the Step 1 Sale (or such number of the Series B Preferred Stock which were issued and delivered to the Investor on the Step 2 Closing Date in exchange for all the Series A Preferred Stock purchased by the Investor in the Step 1 Sale) on not less than five (5) days’ notice from the Investor to the Company, which notice shall include the intended date of settlement (the “ Put Closing Date ”), for a purchase price (the “ Put Price ”) equal to the liquidation preference of such shares of Series A Preferred Stock (including all accumulated and unpaid dividends and accrued interest thereon to the Put Closing Date). The Put Price shall be payable by the Company in immediately available funds to a bank account or bank accounts designated by the Investor or, at the election of the Company, may be paid in the form of two senior promissory notes each having an aggregate principal amount equal to one half (  1 / 2 ) of the Put Price of the Company, paying interest at LIBOR plus 300 basis points per annum, the first maturing on the one (1) year anniversary of the Put Closing Date and the second maturing on the two (2) year anniversary of the Put Closing Date.

(b) Company Call Option . Subject to Section 6.10(c), the Company shall have the option (the “ Call Option ”) at any time after the consummation of the Step 1 Sale and prior to any exercise of the Put Right by the Investor, to repurchase from the Investor, and the Investor shall sell to the Company, all of the shares of Series A Preferred Stock (or such number of the Series B Preferred Stock which were issued and delivered to the Investor on the Step 2 Closing Date in exchange for all the Series A Preferred Stock purchased by the Investor in the Step 1 Sale) then held by the Investor, on not less than five (5) days notice from the Company to

 

31


the Investor, which notice shall include the intended date of settlement (the “ Call Closing Date ”), for a purchase price (the “ Call Price ”) equal to the liquidation preference of such shares of Series A Preferred Stock (including all accumulated and unpaid dividends and accrued interest thereon to the Put Closing Date). The Call Price shall be payable by the Company in immediately available funds to a bank account or bank accounts designated by the Investor on the Call Closing Date.

(c) Termination of Put Right and Call Option . Notwithstanding anything to contrary contained herein, the Put Right and the Call Option shall expire and be null, void and of no further force or effect, if at the time that the Step 2 Sale is consummated or at anytime thereafter the average Closing Price for the Common Stock during any five (5) consecutive trading day period exceeds the conversion price per share of the Preferred Stock, as adjusted from time to time. The Put Right and the Call Option shall also expire and be null, void and of no further force or effect, in the event that the Investor converts any or all of the Series A Preferred Stock received by it in the Step 1 Sale into Common Stock (or such number of the Series B Preferred Stock which were issued and delivered to the Investor on the Step 2 Closing Date in exchange for all the Series A Preferred Stock purchased by the Investor in the Step 1 Sale), but in the event that the Investor converts some but not all of Series A Preferred Stock or such Series B Preferred Stock which were issued and delivered to the Investor on the Step 2 Closing Date in exchange for all the Series A Preferred Stock, as the case may be, into Common Stock, then the Put Right and the Call Option shall expire and be null, void and of no further force or effect only with respect to such converted shares and the provisions of this Section 6.10 will apply to the remaining shares of Series A Preferred Stock, or Series B Preferred Stock which were issued and delivered to the Investor on the Step 2 Closing Date in exchange for all the Series A Preferred Stock, as the case may be, mutatis mutandis .

(d) Guaranty . From and after the date of this Agreement, if all or any part of the Company’s obligations under this Section 6.10 shall not be punctually paid when due, PNX shall, immediately upon demand by the Investor, pay the amount due to the Investor under this Section 6.10. This guaranty shall be a continuing guaranty and shall remain in full force and effect until, and PNX’s liability under this guaranty shall terminate upon, payment in full of all such amounts by the Company. PNX acknowledges that its obligations under this Section 6.10(d) shall not be released or discharged in whole or in part by the insolvency, bankruptcy, liquidation, termination, dissolution, merger, consolidation or other business combination of the Company.

SECTION 6.11.  Interim Period Actions . (a) The Company, PNX and PIMCO covenant and agree that after the date of this Agreement until the Step 2 Closing Date (or the Step 1 Closing Date, if this Agreement has been terminated with respect to the Step 2 Closing), unless the Investor shall otherwise approve in writing, and except as may be required by Applicable Laws, the Company and Virtus shall, and PNX and PIMCO shall cause the Company and Virtus to, conduct the Virtus Business in the ordinary course consistent with past practice. The Company, PNX and PIMCO further agree that during such period, unless the Investor shall otherwise approve in writing: (i) the Company will not adopt or propose any material change in its certificate of incorporation or by-laws, each in the draft form provided to the Investor prior to the date hereof, (ii) none of the Company, PNX or PIMCO will adopt or propose any material change in, or terminate, or waive any material rights of the Company or for the benefit of the

 

32


Virtus Business under the Separation Agreement, the “Employee Matters Agreement”, the “Tax Separation Agreement” or the “Transition Services Agreement” (as such terms are defined in the Separation Agreement), including any schedules, annexes or exhibits thereto, or the change of control agreement of Mr. George Aylward, each in the draft form provided to the Investor prior to the date hereof, or enter into, approve or adopt any other Contract between the Company or one or more of the Subsidiaries, on the one hand, and PNX, PIMCO or any of their Affiliates (other than the Company and the Subsidiaries), on the other hand, or any amendment to such a Contract, (iii) none of the Company or the Subsidiaries will enter into, amend or terminate any Contract (other than Contracts referred to in clause (ii) above) to which it is a party if such new Contract, amendment or termination would be material to the Company or the Investor and would adversely affect the Company or the Investor, and (iv) none of the Company, PNX or PIMCO will take any action or omit to take any action that is reasonably likely to result in any of the conditions to the Transactions contemplated in this Agreement not being satisfied, or agree, authorize or commit to do any of the foregoing.

(b) The Company, PNX and PIMCO covenant and agree that the terms of the Certificate of Designations will be substantially consistent with those set forth in the term sheet attached hereto as Exhibit A, with such modifications thereto as the parties hereto may agree.

(c) The Company, PNX and PIMCO covenant and agree that after the date of this Agreement until the Distribution, the Company will not enter into any employment agreement with any of its employees or officers (including Mr. George Aylward). Upon the Distribution, the Company may enter into such Contracts, provided that any such Contract is approved by the Board of Directors and the Compensation Committee of the Company.

SECTION 6.12.  Equity Awards . The Company will not, and PNX and PIMCO shall cause the Company not to grant shares of Common Stock (or securities convertible into or exchangeable therefore) pursuant to any employee benefit plan or other equity-based awards to employees or directors, other than pursuant to the Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. Omnibus Incentive and Equity Plan (the “ Plan ”), for the period of operation of the Plan in accordance with its terms. The Plan shall not be materially different than the form provided to the Investor prior to the date hereof and will have terms substantially consistent with those set forth in Exhibit B. The Plan may become effective and the awards made thereunder be granted only following the Distribution and will be subject to the approval of the Board of Directors and the Compensation Committee of the Company.

SECTION 6.13.  Regulatory Action . (a) Neither the Company nor any of the Subsidiaries shall, and PNX and PIMCO shall cause the Company and the Subsidiaries not to, enter into any settlement or consent in a regulatory enforcement matter, or make any application to U.S. banking or other regulatory authorities, that in either case would be reasonably likely (i) to cause the Investor or any of its Affiliates to suffer any regulatory disqualification from continuing to hold the investment in the Company, or (ii) to cause a suspension of any registration or license material to the business of the Bank of Montreal and its subsidiaries, taken together (the “ BMO Group ”), as it is conducted today, or any other adverse regulatory consequence material to the BMO Group; provided , that, in the case of any such proposed settlement or consent in a regulatory enforcement matter, if any expected disqualification or adverse regulatory consequence to the Investor could be avoided by the disposition by the

 

33


Investor of less than 10% of the shares of Preferred Stock originally purchased on the Step 2 Closing Date, the Investor shall use its commercially reasonable efforts to, and the Company will assist the Investor (including by waiving any restrictions under Section 7.03, if required) in its efforts to, make such disposition a commercially reasonable manner.

(b) The Investor and the Company will cooperate to ensure compliance with various legal regulatory frameworks involving aggregation of positions among Affiliates, and the Company will adopt position limits where necessary or advisable. The Investor and the Company agree and acknowledge that U.S. and other regulatory authorities may impose restrictions or conditions on Investor’s investment in the Preferred Stock or the Common Stock which may limit or restrict the actions of either of them or their respective subsidiaries and Affiliates after the Step 1 Closing Date or the Step 2 Closing Date.

SECTION 6.14.  Tax Separation . Each of PNX and the Company agrees to comply with its respective obligations under the Tax Separation Agreement.

SECTION 6.15.  Rights Agreement . The Rights Agreement will be substantially in the form provided to the Investor prior to the date hereof, with such additional provisions with respect to the Investor’s exclusion as an “Acquiring Person” which shall be mutually agreed by the Investor and the Company.

ARTICLE VII

COVENANTS OF THE INVESTOR

SECTION 7.01.  Compliance with Conditions; Reasonable Best Efforts . The Investor will use reasonable best efforts to cause all conditions precedent to its obligations to be satisfied. Upon the terms and subject to the conditions of this Agreement, the Investor will use reasonable best efforts to take, or cause to be taken, all action, and to do, or cause to be done, all things necessary, proper or advisable consistent with applicable law to consummate and make effective in the most expeditious manner practicable the Transactions in accordance with the terms of this Agreement.

SECTION 7.02.  Consents and Approvals . The Investor (a) shall use its reasonable best efforts to obtain all necessary consents, waivers, authorizations and approvals of all Governmental Authorities and of all other Persons required in connection with the execution, delivery and performance of this Agreement or the consummation of the Transactions and (b) shall diligently assist and cooperate with the Company in preparing and filing all documents required to be submitted by the Company to any Governmental Authority in connection with the Transactions (which assistance and cooperation shall include, without limitation, timely furnishing to the Company all information concerning the Investor that counsel to the Company reasonably determines is required to be included in such documents or would be helpful in obtaining any such required consent, waiver, authorization or approval).

SECTION 7.03.  Restrictions on Transfer .

(a) Restrictions on Transfer . Until the thirty month anniversary of the Step 2 Closing Date, the Investor will not transfer, sell, assign or otherwise dispose of (“ Transfer ”) any

 

34


Preferred Stock or Conversion Shares acquired pursuant to this Agreement; provided that, except for Transfers pursuant to Rule 144 under the Securities Act or a registered offering, any Transfer permitted under this Section 7.03(a) must not (i) cause a Regulatory Issue, or (ii) be made to a Competitor or any controlled Affiliate of any Competitor.

(b) Permitted Transfers . Notwithstanding Section 7.03(a), the Investor shall be permitted to Transfer any portion or all of its Preferred Stock or Conversion Shares at any time under the following circumstances:

(1) Transfers to any Affiliate under common control with the Investor’s ultimate parent entity but in only if the transferee agrees in writing for the benefit of the Company (with a copy thereof to be furnished to the Company) to be bound by the terms of this Agreement (any such transferee shall be included in the term “Investor”);

(2) Transfers pursuant to a merger, tender offer or exchange offer or other business combination, acquisition of assets or similar transaction or change of control involving the Company or any Subsidiaries;

(3) Transfers commenced after the commencement of bankruptcy or insolvency proceedings;

(4) Transfers made in connection with a pledge to a financial institution to secure a bona fide debt financing and any foreclosure of such pledge and subsequent sale of the securities; or

(5) Transfers made with the prior written consent of the Company.

(c) The Investor shall give written notice to the Company, at least ten (10) days prior to entering into any agreement pursuant to which it will Transfer any Preferred Stock it owns (other than a Transfer pursuant to Rule 144 under the Securities Act or a registered offering or a Transfer permitted under Section 7.03(a)). For the avoidance of doubt, within ten (10) days after giving the notice to the Company, the Investor will be entitled to enter into any transaction with any person with regards to the Transfer of Preferred Stock.

SECTION 7.04.  Standstill . The Investor agrees that until the three (3) year anniversary of the Step 2 Closing Date, without the prior written approval of the Company, neither the Investor nor any of its controlled Affiliates will, directly or indirectly:

(a) in any way acquire, offer or propose to acquire or agree to acquire, Beneficial Ownership of any Common Stock or other securities issued by the Company, or any securities convertible into or exchangeable for Common Stock or any other equity securities of the Company if such acquisition would result in the Investor and its Affiliates having Beneficial Ownership of more than 23.0% of the outstanding shares of Common Stock of the Company (counting as shares owned by the Investor any Conversion Shares), other than solely as a result of the exercise of the Additional Financing Right or any other rights, entitlements or obligations set forth in this Agreement, the certificate of incorporation of the Company or the Certificate of

 

35


Designations; provided, however , that the Investor or its controlled Affiliates will, directly or indirectly, be entitled to acquire, offer or propose to acquire or agree to acquire in any trading market on which securities issued by the Company or any of the Subsidiaries are listed or quoted, Beneficial Ownership of any Common Stock or other securities issued by the Company, or any securities convertible into or exchangeable for Common Stock or any other equity securities of the Company (i) at any time, so long as such acquisition would not result in the Investor’s having Beneficial Ownership of Common Stock of the Company representing more than 24.9% of the outstanding shares of Common Stock (calculated on a fully diluted basis) at the time of acquisition or (ii) at any time, so long as any resulting increase in the Beneficial Ownership of the Investor and its Affiliates (as a percentage of the outstanding fully-diluted Common Stock) is less than or equal to a prior reduction in such Beneficial Ownership resulting from the issuance by the Company of shares of Common Stock (or securities convertible into or exchangeable therefore) pursuant to any employee benefit plan or other equity-based awards to employees or directors; provided, further , that the Investor and its Affiliates shall not be entitled to exercise its rights under clause (ii) of the preceding proviso at any time after the Company shall have made a bona fide proposal that entitled the Investor to exercise its Additional Financing Right and the Investor shall have declined to do so.

(b) enter into or agree, offer, propose or seek (whether publicly or otherwise) to enter into, or otherwise be involved in or part of, any acquisition transaction, merger or other business combination relating to all or part of the Company or any of the Subsidiaries or any acquisition transaction for all or part of the assets of the Company or any Subsidiary or any of their respective businesses;

(c) make, or in any way participate in, any “solicitation” of “proxies” (as such terms are defined under Regulation 14A under the Exchange Act, disregarding clause (iv) of Rule 14a-1(1)(2) and including any otherwise exempt solicitation pursuant to Rule 14a-2(b)) to vote, or seek to advise or influence any person or entity with respect to the voting of, any voting securities of the Company or any Subsidiary;

(d) call or seek to call a meeting of the stockholders of the Company or any of the Subsidiaries or initiate any stockholder proposal for action by stockholders of the Company or any of the Subsidiaries, form, join or in any way participate in a “group” (within the meaning of Section 13(d)(3) of the Exchange Act and the rules and regulations thereunder) with respect to any Voting Securities, or seek, propose or otherwise act alone or in concert with others, to influence or control the management, Board of Directors or policies of the Company or any Subsidiaries; or

(e) bring any action or otherwise act to contest the validity of this Section 7.04 or seek a release of the restrictions contained herein, or make a request to amend or waive any provision of this Section 7.04;

provided that nothing in this Section 7.04 shall prevent the Investor or any of its Affiliates from voting any Voting Securities then Beneficially Owned by the Investor or its Affiliates in any manner except that the Investor agrees to vote in favor of the slate of directors recommended by the Board of Directors at each meeting of the Company’s

 

36


stockholders for the election of such directors; provided, further, that nothing in clause (b), (c) or (d) of this Section 7.04 shall apply to the Investor’s Board Representatives solely in their capacity as directors of the Company.

(f) For purposes of this Agreement, a person shall be deemed to “ Beneficially Own ” any securities of which such person is considered to be a “ Beneficial Owner ” under Rule 13d-3 under the Exchange Act, provided that no Person shall be deemed to Beneficially Own any securities it holds (or over which it has investment discretion) in a fiduciary capacity for Clients. For purposes of this Agreement, “ Voting Securities ” shall mean at any time shares of any class of capital stock of the Company that are then entitled to vote generally in the election of directors.

(g) Notwithstanding the foregoing provisions of this Section 7.04, the restrictions set forth above in this Section 7.04 shall be suspended: (a) if it is publicly disclosed that the Company is seeking any purchaser for a controlling interest in its business or enters into negotiations for the sale of such controlling interest, which negotiations are publicly disclosed; (b) if it is publicly disclosed that (1) another Person or group which is unaffiliated with the Investor has offered or proposed to acquire, directly or indirectly, by purchase, tender offer, merger, consolidation or otherwise, a controlling interest in the Company, or assets representing, at least fifty percent (50%) of the market capitalization of the Company, and the Company has approved or recommended that the stockholders of the Company accept such offer, or (2) the Company has entered into an agreement in principle or definitive agreement providing for a transaction described in the proceeding clause (1); (c) if a party unaffiliated with the Investor shall have acquired control of the board of directors of the Company through the solicitation of proxies or otherwise; (d) with respect to any acquisition by the Investor or any of its Affiliates of any assets or securities of the Company, as debtor, in a transaction subject to the approval of the United States Bankruptcy Court pursuant to proceedings under the United States Bankruptcy Code; (e) with respect to the sale or exchange by the Investor of securities in a tender or exchange offer initiated by a Person other than the Investor or its Affiliates; or (f) with respect to any action taken by the Investor or its Affiliates required by this Agreement or necessary to consummate the Transactions.

SECTION 7.05.  Confidentiality; Information . (a) Each party hereto (the Company, PNX and PIMCO being considered one party for purposes of this Section 7.05) shall keep all information received by it from the other party or its Representatives confidential and shall not, without the other party’s prior written consent, disclose such information in any manner whatsoever, in whole or in part. The Investor shall cause its Board Representatives to comply with the foregoing requirement.

(b) Section 7.05(a) shall not apply to any such information as (i) is or becomes generally available to the public other than as a result of any disclosure or other action or inaction by a party hereto (the “ Disclosing Party ”) or any of its Representatives in breach of its obligations under this Section 7.05 or (ii) is or becomes known or available to the Disclosing Party on a non-confidential basis from a source (other than the other party or its Representatives) that, to the best of its knowledge, is not under a legal obligation not to disclose such information to such party or (iii) was independently developed by the Disclosing Party or its Representatives

 

37


without reference to any information provided by the other party or its Representatives (except pursuant to clauses (i), (ii) or (iv)) or (iv) was known to the Disclosing Party prior to such disclosure by the other party or its Representatives.

(c) In the event that the Disclosing Party or its Representatives become legally compelled (by oral questions, interrogatories, requests for information or documents, subpoenas, civil investigative demands or otherwise), to disclose any information received from the other party or its Representatives, the Disclosing Party shall provide the other party with prompt written notice so that such other party may seek a protective order or other appropriate remedy, or if the other party so directs, the Disclosing Party shall, and shall cause its Representatives to, exercise its reasonable best efforts to obtain a protective order or other appropriate remedy at the other party’s reasonable expense. Failing the entry of a protective order or other appropriate remedy or receipt of a waiver hereunder, the Disclosing Party shall furnish only that portion of the information which it is advised by its counsel is legally required to be furnished and shall exercise its reasonable best efforts to obtain reliable assurance that confidential treatment shall be accorded such information.

(d) The Investor shall cause its Board Representatives to provide such information to the Company as may reasonably be required in connection with the Form 10 (if designated prior to the Effective Date) or any other filings with the Commission or any other Governmental Authority in connection with the Distribution or the Transactions.

SECTION 7.06.  Tax Treatment . The parties acknowledge that PIMCO intends to treat the Contribution as not qualifying as a transfer to a controlled corporation under Section 351(a) or (b) of the Code and the Investor agrees not to take any position for U.S. federal income tax purposes that is inconsistent with that treatment.

ARTICLE VIII

CONDITIONS PRECEDENT TO THE STEP 1 CLOSING AND STEP 2 CLOSING

SECTION 8.01.  Conditions to the Company’s Obligations in Respect of the Step 1 Closing Date . The obligations of the Company and PIMCO to issue and sell the Preferred Stock hereunder shall be subject to the satisfaction or waiver, on the Step 1 Closing Date, of the following conditions:

(a) no provision of any Applicable Law, injunction, order or decree of any Governmental Authority shall be in effect which has the effect of making the Transactions or the ownership by the Investor of the Preferred Stock or the Conversion Shares illegal or shall otherwise prohibit the consummation of the Transactions;

(b) the representations and warranties of the Investor contained in this Agreement shall have been (A) in the case of representations and warranties that are qualified as to materiality or Material Adverse Effect, true and correct and (B) in all other cases, true and correct in all material respects, in each case as of the Step 1 Closing Date with the same force and effect as though made on and as of the Step 1 Closing Date;

 

38


(c) the Investor shall have performed in all material respects all obligations and agreements, and complied in all material respects with all covenants contained in this Agreement to be performed and complied with by the Investor on the Step 1 Closing Date; and

(d) the Investor shall have delivered to the Company a certificate executed by it or on its behalf by a duly authorized officer, dated the Step 1 Closing Date, to the effect that each of the conditions specified in paragraph (a) through (c) of this Section 8.01 has been satisfied.

SECTION 8.02.  Conditions to the Investor’s Obligations in Respect of the Step 1 Closing Date . The obligations of the Investor to purchase the Preferred Stock hereunder shall be subject to the satisfaction or waiver, on the Step 1 Closing Date, of the following conditions:

(a) no provision of any Applicable Law, injunction, order or decree of any Governmental Authority shall be in effect which has the effect of making the Transactions or the ownership by the Investor of the Preferred Stock or the Conversion Shares illegal or shall otherwise prohibit the consummation of the Transactions;

(b) the representations and warranties of the Company, PNX and PIMCO contained in this Agreement shall have been (A) in the case of representations and warranties that are qualified as to materiality or Material Adverse Effect, true and correct and (B) in all other cases, true and correct in all material respects, in each case as of the Step 1 Closing Date with the same force and effect as though made on and as of the Step 1 Closing Date;

(c) each of the Company, PNX and PIMCO shall have performed in all material respects all of their obligations, agreements and covenants contained in this Agreement to be performed and complied with at or prior to the Step 1 Closing Date;

(d) the Contribution shall have occurred;

(e) the Certificate of Designations, in the form that is agreed by the parties in accordance with Section 6.11(b), shall have been filed with the Delaware Secretary of State; and

(f) each of the Company, PNX and PIMCO shall have delivered to the Investor a certificate executed by it or on its behalf by a duly authorized officer, dated the Step 1 Closing Date, to the effect that each of the conditions specified in paragraphs (a) through (e) of this Section 8.02 has been satisfied.

SECTION 8.03.  Conditions to Each Party’s Obligations in Respect of the Step 2 Closing Date . The respective obligations of the Company and the Investor hereunder required to be performed on the Step 2 Closing shall be subject to the satisfaction or waiver of the following conditions in addition to the conditions set forth in Section 8.04 and Section 8.05, respectively:

(a) The Form 10 shall have been declared effective by the Commission;

 

39


(b) PNX shall have declared a dividend distributing all the shares of Common Stock owned by PNX to holders of PNX common stock and not revoked such dividend;

(c) all conditions to the Distribution, as set forth in the Separation Agreement, shall have been satisfied; and

(d) no provision of any Applicable Law, injunction, order or decree of any Governmental Authority shall be in effect which has the effect of making the Transactions or the ownership by the Investor of the Preferred Stock or the Conversion Shares illegal or shall otherwise prohibit the consummation of the Transactions.

SECTION 8.04.  Conditions to the Company’s Obligations in Respect of the Step 2 Closing Date . The obligations of the Company and PIMCO to issue and sell the Preferred Stock hereunder shall be subject to the satisfaction or waiver, on the Step 2 Closing Date, of the following conditions:

(a) the Investor shall have performed in all material respects all obligations and agreements, and complied in all material respects with all covenants contained in this Agreement to be performed and complied with by the Investor on the Step 2 Closing Date; and

(b) the Investor shall have delivered to the Company a certificate executed by it or on its behalf by a duly authorized officer, dated the Step 2 Closing Date, to the effect that each of the conditions specified in paragraph (a) of this Section 8.04 and paragraph (d) of Section 8.03 has been satisfied.

SECTION 8.05.  Conditions to the Investor’s Obligations in Respect of the Step 2 Closing Date . The obligations of the Investor to purchase the Preferred Stock hereunder shall be subject to the satisfaction or waiver, on the Step 2 Closing Date, of the following conditions:

(a) since the date of this Agreement, there shall not have occurred any change, event, circumstances or development that has had, or would be reasonably likely to have, a Material Adverse Effect;

(b) each of the Company, PNX and PIMCO shall have performed in all material respects all of their obligations, agreements and covenants contained in this Agreement to be performed and complied with at or prior to the Step 2 Closing Date;

(c) the working capital of the Company (calculated as the excess of current assets over current liabilities) shall be in excess of $28 million;

(d) any intercompany debt which the Company owes to PNX or any of its Affiliates immediately after the Distribution, together with any such intercompany debt that shall have been paid off by the Company or Virtus immediately prior to or in connection with the Distribution, will not exceed $33 million; and

(e) each of the Company, PNX and PIMCO shall have delivered to the Investor a certificate executed by it or on its behalf by a duly authorized officer, dated the Step 2 Closing Date, to the effect that each of the conditions specified in paragraphs (a) through (d) of this Section 8.05 and paragraphs (a) through (d) of Section 8.03 has been satisfied.

 

40


ARTICLE IX

MISCELLANEOUS

SECTION 9.01.  Indemnification . (a) The Company, PNX and PIMCO agree jointly and severally to indemnify and hold harmless the Investor and its Affiliates and each of their respective officers, directors, partners, members and employees, and each person who controls the Investor within the meaning of the Exchange Act and the regulations thereunder, to the fullest extent lawful, from and against any and all actions, suits, claims, proceedings, costs, losses, liabilities, damages, expenses (including reasonable attorneys’ fees, disbursements and taxes), amounts paid in settlement and other costs (collectively, “ Losses ”) arising out of or resulting from (1) any inaccuracy in or breach of, the representations or warranties of the Company, PNX or PIMCO in this Agreement, where such representations or warranties are read without giving effect to any qualifications or limitations set forth in such representation and warranties as to “materiality”, “Material Adverse Effect”, “knowledge” and words of similar import, (2) the breach of any agreements or covenants made by the Company, PNX or PIMCO in this Agreement, (3) any Loss for which the Company is entitled to indemnification under Section 6.02 of the Separation Agreement and Article II of the Tax Separation Agreement (for this purpose, treating the Investor and its Affiliates as though they were indemnified persons thereunder) without duplication for any Loss the Company is made whole, (4) the Official Committee of Asbestos Claimants of G-I Holdings, Inc. f/k/a GAF Corporation v. Building Materials Corporation of America, et al and any related action, suit or proceeding, or (5) the inquiry regarding Phoenix Growth and Income Fund.

(b) The Investor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless each of the Company and its Affiliates and each of their respective officers and directors, and each person who controls the Company within the meaning of the Exchange Act and the regulations thereunder, to the fullest extent lawful, from and against any and all Losses arising out of or resulting from (1) any inaccuracy in or breach of the Investor’s representations or warranties in this Agreement or (2) the Investor’s breach of agreements or covenants made by the Investor in this Agreement.

(c) A party entitled to indemnification hereunder (each, an “ Indemnified Party ”) shall give written notice to the party indemnifying it (the “ Indemnifying Party ”) of any claim with respect to which it seeks indemnification promptly after the discovery by such Indemnified Party of any matters giving rise to a claim for indemnification; provided that the failure of any Indemnified Party to give notice as provided herein shall not relieve the Indemnifying Party of its obligations under this Section 9.01 unless and to the extent that the Indemnifying Party shall have been actually prejudiced by the failure of such Indemnified Party to so notify such party. Such notice shall describe in reasonable detail such claim. In case any such action, suit, claim or proceeding is brought against an Indemnified Party, the Indemnified Party shall be entitled to hire, at its own expense, separate counsel and participate in the defense thereof; provided, however, that the Indemnifying Party shall be entitled to assume and conduct the defense thereof, unless the counsel to the Indemnified Party advises such Indemnifying Party in writing that such claim involves a conflict of interest (other than one of a monetary nature)

 

41


that would reasonably be expected to make it inappropriate for the same counsel to represent both the Indemnifying Party and the Indemnified Party, in which case the Indemnified Party shall be entitled to retain its own counsel at the cost and expense of the Indemnifying Party (except that the Indemnifying Party shall only be liable for the legal fees and expenses of one law firm for all Indemnified Parties, taken together with respect to any single action or group of related actions). If the Indemnifying Party assumes the defense of any claim, all Indemnified Parties shall thereafter deliver to the Indemnifying Party copies of all notices and documents (including court papers) received by the Indemnified Party relating to the claim, and each Indemnified Party shall cooperate in the defense or prosecution of such claim. Such cooperation shall include the retention and (upon the Indemnifying Party’s request) the provision to the Indemnifying Party of records and information that are reasonably relevant to such claim, and making employees available on a mutually convenient basis to provide additional information and explanation of any material provided hereunder. The Indemnifying Party shall not be liable for any settlement of any action, suit, claim or proceeding effected without its written consent; provided, however, that the Indemnifying Party shall not unreasonably withhold or delay its consent. The Indemnifying Party further agrees that it will not, without the Indemnified Party’s prior written consent (which shall not be unreasonably withheld or delayed), settle or compromise any claim or consent to entry of any judgment in respect thereof in any pending or threatened action, suit, claim or proceeding in respect of which indemnification has been sought hereunder unless such settlement or compromise includes an unconditional release of such Indemnified Party from all liability arising out of such action, suit, claim or proceeding.

(d) The Company, PNX and PIMCO shall not be required to indemnify the Indemnified Parties pursuant to Section 9.01(a)(1), disregarding all qualifications or limitations set forth in such representation and warranties as to “materiality”, “Material Adverse Effect” and words of similar import, (1) with respect to any claim for indemnification per individual breach or series of related items if the aggregate amount of Losses with respect to such claim are less than $10,000 (any claim involving Losses less than such amount being referred to as a “ De Minimis Claim ”) and (2) unless and until the aggregate amount of all Losses incurred with respect to all claims (other than De Minimis Claims) pursuant to Section 9.01(a)(1) exceed $250,000 (the “ Threshold Amount ”), in which event the Company, PNX and PIMCO shall be responsible for only the amount of such Losses in excess of the Threshold Amount. The Investor shall not be required to indemnify the Indemnified Parties pursuant to Section 9.1(b), disregarding all qualifications or limitations set forth in such representation and warranties as to “materiality”, “Material Adverse Effect” and words of similar import, (1) with respect to any De Minimis Claim and (2) unless and until the aggregate amount of all Losses incurred with respect to all claims (other than De Minimis Claims) pursuant to Section 9.1(b) exceed the Threshold Amount, in which event the Investor shall be responsible for only the amount of such Losses in excess of the Threshold Amount. Notwithstanding the foregoing provisions of this Section 9.01, the cumulative indemnification obligations of (i) (x) the Company, PNX and PIMCO to the Investor and all of the Indemnified Parties affiliated with (or whose claims are permitted by virtue of their relationship with) the Investor or (y) the Investor to the Company and the Indemnified Parties affiliated with (or whose claims are permitted by virtue of their relationship with) the Company, in each case for inaccuracies in or breaches of representations and warranties, shall not exceed $35 million; and (ii) PNX and PIMCO to the Investor and all of the Indemnified Parties affiliated with (or whose claims are permitted by virtue of their relationship with) the Investor or (y) the Investor to PNX, PIMCO and the Indemnified Parties affiliated with (or whose claims are permitted by virtue of their relationship with) the Company, in each case for inaccuracies in or breaches of representations and warranties, shall not exceed $22.5 million.

 

42


(e) Any claim for indemnification pursuant to Section 9.01(a)(1) for breach of any representation or warranty can only be brought on or prior to the expiration of the survival period applicable to such representation or warranty as set forth in Section 9.02; provided that if notice of a claim for indemnification pursuant to Section 9.01(a)(1) for breach of any representation or warranty is brought prior to the expiration of the survival period applicable to such representation or warranty as set forth in Section 9.02, then the obligation to indemnify in respect of such breach shall survive as to such claim until such claim has been finally resolved.

(f) The indemnity provided for in this Section 9.01 shall be the sole and exclusive monetary remedy of Indemnified Parties for any inaccuracy of any representation or warranty or any other breach of any covenant or agreement contained in this Agreement; provided that nothing herein shall limit in any way any such party’s remedies in respect of fraud by any other party in connection with the Transactions. No party to this Agreement (or any of its Affiliates) shall, in any event, be liable or otherwise responsible to any other party (or any of its Affiliates) for any consequential or punitive damages of such other party (or any of its Affiliates) arising out of or relating to this Agreement or the performance or breach hereof.

(g) Any indemnification payments pursuant to this Section 9.01 shall be treated as an adjustment to the purchase price for the Preferred Stock for U.S. federal income and applicable state and local Tax purposes, unless a different treatment is required by Applicable Law.

SECTION 9.02.  Survival . Each of the representations and warranties set forth in this Agreement shall survive the Step 2 Closing Date (or the Step 1 Closing Date, if this Agreement has been terminated with respect to the Step 2 Closing):

(a) indefinitely, in the case of any breach of, or inaccuracy in, the representations and warranties set forth in Section 3.01 (Organization and Standing), Section 3.02 (Capital Stock), Section 3.03 (Authorization; Enforceability), Section 4.01 (Organization; Authorization; Enforceability), or Section 5.01 (Organization; Authorization; Enforceability); and

(b) for a period of eighteen (18) months from the Step 2 Closing Date (or the Step 1 Closing Date, if this Agreement has been terminated with respect to the Step 2 Closing), in the case of any breach of, or inaccuracy in, any other representation and warranty or until final resolution of any claim or action arising from the breach of any such representation and warranty, if notice of such breach was provided prior to the periods set forth above in this Section 9.02, and thereafter shall expire and have no further force and effect, including in respect of Section 9.01.

SECTION 9.03.  Legends . (a) So long as applicable, each certificate representing any portion of the Preferred Stock and Conversion Shares shall be stamped or otherwise imprinted with a legend in the following form (in addition to any legend required under applicable state securities laws):

“THE SHARES REPRESENTED BY THIS CERTIFICATE HAVE NOT BEEN REGISTERED UNDER THE SECURITIES ACT OF 1933, AS AMENDED (THE “ SECURITIES ACT ”) OR THE SECURITIES LAWS OF ANY STATE OF THE UNITED STATES. SUCH SHARES MAY NOT BE OFFERED, SOLD, TRANSFERRED, PLEDGED, HYPOTHECATED OR OTHERWISE DISPOSED OF IN THE ABSENCE OF SUCH REGISTRATION PURSUANT TO AN EXEMPTION FROM SUCH REGISTRATION REQUIREMENTS AND DELIVERY TO THE ISSUER OF AN OPINION OF COUNSEL REASONABLY SATISFACTORY TO IT TO THE EFFECT THAT SUCH TRANSFER IS EXEMPT FROM REGISTRATION UNDER THOSE LAWS.”

 

43


(b) In addition, so long as applicable, each certificate representing any portion of the Preferred Stock and Conversion Shares shall be stamped or otherwise imprinted with a legend in the following form:

“THE SECURITIES EVIDENCED BY THIS CERTIFICATE ARE SUBJECT TO CERTAIN RESTRICTIONS ON TRANSFER AS SET FORTH IN AN INVESTMENT AND CONTRIBUTION AGREEMENT, DATED AS OF OCTOBER 30, 2008, AS IT MAY BE AMENDED FROM TIME TO TIME, A COPY OF WHICH IS ON FILE AT THE PRINCIPAL EXECUTIVE OFFICES OF THE ISSUER. NO REGISTRATION OF TRANSFER OF SUCH SECURITIES WILL BE MADE ON THE BOOKS OF THE ISSUER UNLESS AND UNTIL SUCH RESTRICTIONS SHALL HAVE BEEN COMPLIED WITH. ANY TRANSFER NOT IN COMPLIANCE WITH SUCH AGREEMENT SHALL BE VOID.”

The legend referred to in this paragraph (b) shall be removed at such time as such security is transferred to a Person other than the Investor or any of its permitted transferees.

SECTION 9.04.  Notices . All notices, demands, requests, consents, approvals or other communications required or permitted to be given hereunder or which are given with respect to this Agreement shall be in writing and shall be personally served, delivered by reputable air courier service with charges prepaid, or transmitted by hand delivery, telegram, telex or facsimile, addressed as set forth below, or to such other address as such party shall have specified most recently by written notice. Notice shall be deemed given on the date of service or transmission if personally served or transmitted by facsimile. Notice otherwise sent as provided herein shall be deemed given on the next business day following delivery of such notice to a reputable air courier service.

To the Company:

Virtus Holdings, Inc.

c/o Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.

56 Prospect Street

Hartford, Connecticut 06102

Attention: General Counsel

 

44


with copies to:

Simpson Thacher & Bartlett LLP

425 Lexington Avenue

New York, New York 10017

Attn: Gary I. Horowitz

Telephone: (212) 455-2000

Fax:            (212) 455-2502

and

Day Pitney LLP

200 Campus Drive

Florham Park, New Jersey 07932

Attention: Warren J. Casey

Fax:            (973) 966-1015

To PIMCO:

Phoenix Investment Management Company

c/o The Phoenix Companies, Inc.

One American Row

Hartford, Connecticut 06102

Attention: General Counsel

with a copy to:

Simpson Thacher & Bartlett LLP

425 Lexington Avenue

New York, New York 10017

Attn: Gary I. Horowitz

Telephone: (212) 455-2000

Fax:            (212) 455-2502

To the Investor:

Harris Bankcorp, Inc.

111 W. Monroe Street

Chicago, Illinois 60603

Attn: Barbara Muir

Telephone: (416) 867-6423

Fax:            (312) 765-8106

with a copy to:

Sullivan & Cromwell LLP

125 Broad Street

New York, New York 10004

 

45


Attn: John J. O’Brien

Telephone: (212) 558-4000

Fax:            (212) 558-4437

SECTION 9.05.  Termination . (a) This Agreement may be terminated (i) at any time prior to the Step 1 Closing Date, or following the Step 1 Closing, the Step 2 Closing Date (but only with respect to the Step 2 Closing), by mutual written agreement of the Company and the Investor, (ii) if the Step 2 Closing shall not have occurred on or prior to January 31, 2009, by either the Company or the Investor, at any time after January 31, 2009, but only with respect to the provisions of this Agreement governing the Step 2 Sale; provided that the right to terminate this Agreement under this Section 9.05(a)(ii) shall not be available to any party whose failure to fulfill any obligation under this Agreement was the cause of or resulted in the failure of the Step 2 Closing to occur on or before such date or (iii) if any Governmental Authority shall have issued a nonappealable final order, decree or ruling or taken any other action having the effect of permanently restraining, enjoining or otherwise prohibiting the Contribution, the Distribution or the other Transactions, by either the Company or the Investor, provided that the right to terminate this Agreement pursuant to this Section 9.05(a)(iii) shall not be available to any party whose failure to fulfill any obligation under this Agreement was the cause of, or resulted in, such final order, decree or ruling.

In the event that in accordance with the foregoing this Agreement is terminated only with respect to the Step 2 Closing, the parties hereto shall continue to be bound by all the provisions of this Agreement, except for Section 2.02(b), Section 6.07, Section 6.09, Section 7.04, Section 8.03, Section 8.04 and Section 8.05. For the avoidance of doubt, in the event of termination of this Agreement with respect to the Step 2 Closing, the Investor and the Company shall retain their respective Put Right and Call Option with respect to the Series A Preferred Stock purchased by the Investor in the Step 1 Sale.

(b) In the event of termination of this Agreement, written notice thereof shall be given to the other parties specifying the provision hereof pursuant to which such termination is made, and this Agreement (except for the provisions of Section 7.05 and this Article IX which shall survive such termination) shall become null and void.

SECTION 9.06.  GOVERNING LAW . THIS AGREEMENT SHALL BE GOVERNED BY, INTERPRETED UNDER, AND CONSTRUED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF NEW YORK, REGARDLESS OF THE LAWS THAT MIGHT OTHERWISE GOVERN UNDER APPLICABLE PRINCIPLES OF CONFLICTS OF LAW THEREOF.

SECTION 9.07.  WAIVER OF JURY TRIAL . EACH PARTY HEREBY WAIVES TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, ANY RIGHT IT MAY HAVE TO A TRIAL BY JURY IN RESPECT TO ANY LITIGATION DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY ARISING OUT OF, UNDER OR IN CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT OR ANY TRANSACTION CONTEMPLATED HEREBY. EACH PARTY (A) CERTIFIES THAT NO REPRESENTATIVE OF ANY OTHER PARTY HAS REPRESENTED, EXPRESSLY OR OTHERWISE, THAT SUCH OTHER PARTY WOULD NOT, IN THE EVENT OF LITIGATION, SEEK TO ENFORCE THE FOREGOING WAIVER

 

46


AND (B) ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT AND THE OTHER PARTIES HERETO HAVE BEEN INDUCED TO ENTER INTO THIS AGREEMENT BY, AMONG OTHER THINGS, THE MUTUAL WAIVERS AND CERTIFICATIONS IN THIS SECTION 9.07.

SECTION 9.08.  Entire Agreement . (a) This Agreement (including all agreements entered into pursuant hereto and thereto and all certificates and instruments delivered pursuant hereto and thereto) constitutes the entire agreement of the parties with respect to the subject matter hereof and supersede all prior and contemporaneous agreements, representations, understandings, negotiations and discussions between the parties, whether oral or written, with respect to the subject matter hereof.

SECTION 9.09.  Modifications and Amendments . No amendment, modification or termination of this Agreement shall be binding upon any other party unless executed in writing by the parties hereto intending to be bound thereby.

SECTION 9.10.  Waivers and Extensions . Any party to this Agreement may waive any condition, right, breach or default that such party has the right to waive, provided that such waiver will not be effective against the waiving party unless it is in writing, is signed by such party, and specifically refers to this Agreement. Waivers may be made in advance or after the right waived has arisen or the breach or default waived has occurred. Any waiver may be conditional. No waiver of any breach of any agreement or provision herein contained shall be deemed a waiver of any preceding or succeeding breach thereof nor of any other agreement or provision herein contained. No waiver or extension of time for performance of any obligations or acts shall be deemed a waiver or extension of the time for performance of any other obligations or acts.

SECTION 9.11.  Titles and Headings; Rules of Construction . Titles and headings of sections of this Agreement are for convenience only and shall not affect the construction of any provision of this Agreement. Unless the context otherwise requires:

(a) a term has the meaning assigned to it;

(b) “or” is not exclusive;

(c) “including” means including without limitation; and

(d) words in the singular include the plural and words in the plural include the singular.

SECTION 9.12.  Exhibits and Schedules . Each of the exhibits and schedules referred to herein and attached hereto is an integral part of this Agreement and is incorporated herein by reference.

SECTION 9.13.  Press Releases and Public Announcements . All public announcements or public disclosures relating to the Transactions (other than the Form 10) shall be made only if mutually agreed upon by the Company and the Investor, except to the extent such disclosure is, in the opinion of counsel, required by law or by stock exchange regulation.

 

47


SECTION 9.14.  Assignment; No Third-Party Beneficiaries . Except as otherwise set forth in Section 7.03(c), this Agreement and the rights, duties and obligations hereunder may not be assigned or delegated by the Company without the prior written consent of the Investor, and may not be assigned or delegated by the Investor without the Company’s prior written consent. Except as set forth above, any assignment or delegation of rights, duties or obligations hereunder made in violation of this Section 9.14 shall be void and of no effect. This Agreement and the provisions hereof shall be binding upon and shall inure to the benefit of each of the parties and their respective successors and permitted assigns. This Agreement is not intended to confer any rights or benefits on any Persons other than as expressly set forth in this Section 9.14.

SECTION 9.15.  Specific Performance . The parties agree that irreparable damage would occur in the event that any of the provisions of this Agreement were not performed in accordance with their specific terms. It is accordingly agreed that the parties shall be entitled to seek specific performance of the terms hereof, this being in addition to any other remedies to which they are entitled at law or equity.

SECTION 9.16.  Severability . This Agreement shall be deemed severable, and the invalidity or unenforceability of any term or provision hereof shall not affect the validity or enforceability of this Agreement or of any other term or provision hereof. Furthermore, in lieu of any such invalid or unenforceable term or provision, the parties hereto intend that there shall be added as a part of this Agreement a provision as similar in terms to such invalid or unenforceable provision as may be possible and be valid and enforceable.

SECTION 9.17.  Counterparts . This Agreement may be executed in counterparts, each of which shall be deemed an original, but all of which taken together shall constitute one and the same instrument.

[remainder of page intentionally left blank]

 

48


IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed this Agreement as of the date first above written.

 

PHOENIX INVESTMENT MANAGEMENT COMPANY
By  

/s/ James D. Wehr

Name:   James D. Wehr
Title:   President
VIRTUS HOLDINGS, INC.
By  

/s/ George R. Aylward, Jr.

Name:   George R. Aylward, Jr.
Title:   President

[Signature Page to Investment and Contribution Agreement]


HARRIS BANKCORP, INC.
By  

/s/ Charles R. Tonge

Name:   Charles R. Tonge
Title:   Vice Chairman

[Signature Page to Investment and Contribution Agreement]


THE PHOENIX COMPANIES, INC.
By  

/s/ Peter Hofmann

Name:   Peter Hofmann
Title:   Senior Executive Vice President

[Signature Page to Investment and Contribution Agreement]

EXHIBIT 21.1

Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. Subsidiary List

 

Name

   Jurisdiction

DPCM Holdings, Inc.

   Illinois

Duff & Phelps Investment Management Company

   Illinois

Engemann Asset Management

   California

Euclid Advisors, LLC

   New York

Kayne Anderson Rudnick Investment Management, LLC

   California

Pasadena Capital Corporation

   California

Virtus Alternative Investment Advisers, Inc.

   Connecticut

Phoenix Equity Planning Corporation

   Connecticut

Virtus Investment Advisers, Inc.

   Massachusetts

Phoenix LJH/Alternative Investments, LLC

   Delaware

Zweig Advisers LLC

   Delaware

Rutherford Financial Corporation

   Pennsylvania

Rutherford, Brown & Catherwood, LLC

   Delaware

SCM Advisors, LLC

   California

Virtus Partners, Inc.

   Delaware

Walnut Asset Management, LLC

   Delaware
Table of Contents

EXHIBIT 99.1

The Phoenix Companies, Inc.

One American Row

Hartford, Connecticut 06102

LOGO

                    , 2008

Dear Stockholder of The Phoenix Companies, Inc.:

We are pleased to inform you that on                     , 2008, the board of directors of The Phoenix Companies, Inc. (“PNX”) approved the spin-off of Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. (the “Company”), a wholly owned subsidiary of PNX, into an independent publicly traded asset management firm. When the spin-off is completed, PNX will be primarily a life and annuity business, and our assets and business will consist largely of those currently reported in our financial statements as our Life and Annuity segment, as well as the assets and business of our wholly owned subsidiary, Goodwin Capital Advisers, Inc.

The spin-off will occur on                     , 2008 through a pro rata distribution of Company common stock to PNX’s stockholders. This means each PNX stockholder will receive                      shares of Company common stock for every one share of PNX common stock held at 5 p.m., New York City time, on                     , 2008, the record date of the spin-off. The distribution will be made in book-entry form. We intend that the Company common stock you receive in the spin-off will be treated as a taxable distribution for U.S. federal income tax purposes. You should consult your own tax advisor regarding the particular consequences of the spin-off to you.

Following the spin-off, you will own shares in both PNX and the Company. PNX common stock will continue to trade on the New York Stock Exchange under the symbol “PNX.” We intend to apply to have the Company common stock authorized for listing on                      under the symbol “                    .” Stockholder approval of the spin-off is not required, and you do not need to take any action to receive your Company common stock.

The spin-off will create two separate companies. We believe it will enhance value for PNX stockholders by allowing PNX and the Company to each focus on maximizing their own, distinct opportunities.

The enclosed information statement is being mailed to all PNX stockholders. It describes the spin-off in detail and contains important information about the Company, including its financial statements.

I look forward to your continued support as a stockholder and remain committed to working on your behalf to build long-term value.

Sincerely,

Dona D. Young

Chairman, President and

Chief Executive Officer

LOGO


Table of Contents

LOGO

                    , 2008

Dear Stockholder of Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.:

It is my pleasure to welcome you as a future stockholder of our new company, Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. (the “Company”). Our strategy as an independent publicly traded company is to maximize value to our stockholders by building on our current strengths and capitalizing on the opportunities we see in the market where we believe we can be competitive and achieve growth.

We will continue to maintain, extend and improve our product offerings by leveraging the investment capabilities of our affiliated managers and subadvisers, as well as attracting new investment management talent and developing new products to meet the evolving needs of our distribution partners and clients. We also believe we can grow by expanding our current relationships with select distributors that have the capacity to sell a larger volume and broader array of our products. Other key elements of our strategy include attracting and retaining talented personnel in both investment management and distribution in order to better serve our key distribution partners and their clients, and enhancing our shared service model to build greater efficiency and economies of scale into our business.

I invite you to learn more about the Company by reviewing the enclosed information statement. We look forward to our future as an independent publicly traded company and to your support as a holder of our common stock.

Sincerely,

George R. Aylward Jr.

President and Chief Executive Officer

LOGO


Table of Contents

SUBJECT TO COMPLETION, DATED NOVEMBER 14, 2008

PRELIMINARY INFORMATION STATEMENT

 

 

VIRTUS INVESTMENT PARTNERS, INC.

Common Stock

(par value $.01 per share)

This information statement is being furnished in connection with the distribution to holders of common stock, par value $.01 per share, of The Phoenix Companies, Inc. (“PNX”) of all of the outstanding shares of common stock, par value $.01 per share, of Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. (the “Company”).

We are currently a wholly owned subsidiary of PNX. Following the spin-off, we will be an independent publicly traded company, and our assets and business will consist largely of those currently reported in PNX’s financial statements as PNX’s Asset Management segment and operating as the Company, but excluding the assets and business of PNX’s wholly owned subsidiary, Goodwin Capital Advisers, Inc. (“Goodwin”).

Shares of our common stock will be distributed to holders of PNX common stock of record as of the close of business on                     , 2008 (the “record date”). These stockholders will receive              share of our common stock for every one share of PNX common stock held on the record date. The distribution of the shares of our common stock will be made in book-entry form. The spin-off will be effective at 11:59 p.m., New York City time on                     , 2008. PNX intends the spin-off to be a taxable transaction for U.S. federal income tax purposes.

No stockholder approval of the spin-off is required or sought. We are not asking you for a proxy and you are requested not to send us a proxy. PNX stockholders will not be required to pay for the shares of our common stock to be received by them in the spin-off or to surrender or exchange shares of PNX common stock in order to receive our common stock or to take any other action in connection with the spin-off.

There is no current trading market for our common stock. However, we expect that a limited market, commonly known as a “when-issued” trading market, for our common stock will develop on or shortly before the record date for the spin-off, and we expect that “regular way” trading of our common stock will begin the first trading day after the spin-off. We intend to apply to have our common stock authorized for listing on                      under the symbol “                    .”

In reviewing this information statement, you should carefully consider the matters described under “ Risk Factors ” for a discussion of certain factors that should be considered by recipients of our common stock.

 

 

Neither the Securities and Exchange Commission nor any state securities commission has approved or disapproved of these securities or determined if this information statement is truthful or complete. Any representation to the contrary is a criminal offense.

This information statement does not constitute an offer to sell or the solicitation of an offer to buy any securities.

 

 

The date of this information statement is                     , 2008.


Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

     Page

Questions and Answers About the Company and the Spin-Off

   1

Summary

   5

Risk Factors

   15

Special Note About Forward-Looking Statements

   25

The Spin-Off

   26

Dividend Policy

   31

Capitalization

   32

Selected Consolidated Financial Data

   33

Unaudited Pro Forma Consolidated Financial Data

   35

Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations

   44

Business

   70

Management

   85

Corporate Governance

   90

Compensation of Executive Officers

   92

Compensation of Directors

   118

Security Ownership by Certain Beneficial Owners and Management

   120

Our Relationship With PNX After the Spin-Off

   123

Description of Our Capital Stock

   129

Equity Investment

   138

Indemnification and Limitation of Liability of Directors and Officers

   143

Description of Indebtedness

   144

Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

   144

Where You Can Find More Information

   145

Index to Consolidated Financial Statements

   F-1

This information statement is being furnished solely to provide information to PNX stockholders who will receive shares of our common stock in the distribution. It is not and is not to be construed as an inducement or encouragement to buy or sell any of our securities or any securities of PNX. This information statement describes our business, our relationship with PNX and how the spin-off affects PNX and its stockholders, and provides other information to assist you in evaluating the benefits and risks of holding or disposing of our common stock that you will receive in the distribution. You should be aware of certain risks relating to the spin-off, our business and ownership of our common stock, which are described under the heading “Risk Factors.”

You should not assume that the information contained in this information statement is accurate as of any date other than the date set forth on the cover. Changes to the information contained in this information statement may occur after that date, and we undertake no obligation to update the information, except in the normal course of our public disclosure obligations and practices.


Table of Contents

QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS ABOUT THE COMPANY AND THE SPIN-OFF

 

Q: Why am I receiving this document?

 

A: PNX is delivering this document to you because you were a holder of PNX common stock on the record date for the distribution of shares of our common stock. Accordingly, you are entitled to receive              share of our common stock for every share of PNX common stock that you held on the record date. No action is required for you to participate in the distribution.

 

Q: What is the spin-off?

 

A: The spin-off is the overall transaction of separating the Company from PNX, which will be accomplished through a series of transactions which will result in our stockholders owning the Asset Management business operated by PNX and currently reported in its financial statements as its Asset Management segment, but excluding the assets and business of Goodwin. The final step of the transactions will be the pro rata distribution of our common stock by PNX to holders of PNX common stock (the “distribution”).

 

Q: What is the Company?

 

A: We are an existing wholly owned subsidiary of PNX. Following the spin-off, we will be an independent publicly traded company, providing investment management products and services to individuals and institutions.

 

Q: Why is PNX separating the Company and distributing its stock?

 

A: PNX and the Company are fundamentally different types of businesses, and the separation of the two businesses will help highlight unique characteristics and values of these businesses for investors and better position each company to access the capital markets. The separation of the Asset Management business from PNX will result in two separate companies that can each focus on maximizing opportunities for its distinct business. We believe this separation will present the opportunity for enhanced performance of each of the two companies.

PNX’s board of directors has determined that separating the Asset Management business from PNX is in the best interests of PNX and its stockholders. The following potential benefits were considered by PNX’s board of directors in making the determination to effect the spin-off:

 

   

allowing each company to separately pursue the business strategies that best suit its long-term interests;

 

   

creating separate companies that have different financial characteristics, which may appeal to different investor bases and allow for clarity on valuation of the respective businesses;

 

   

creating opportunities to more efficiently develop and finance ongoing operations and future acquisitions;

 

   

allowing each company to establish an expense structure appropriate for its business and size; and

 

   

creating effective management incentives tied to each company’s performance.

For a further explanation of the reasons for the spin-off and more information about our business, see “The Spin-Off—Reasons for the Spin-Off” and “Business.”

 

Q: Why is the separation of the two companies structured as a spin-off?

 

A: PNX’s board of directors believes that a distribution of shares of our common stock is a cost-effective way to separate the companies.

 

Q: What is the record date for the distribution?

 

A: The record date is             , 2008, and ownership will be determined as of 5:00 p.m., New York City Time, on that date.

 

1


Table of Contents
Q: When will the distribution occur?

 

A: Shares of our common stock will be distributed on or about             , 2008 (the “distribution date”).

 

Q: Can PNX decide to cancel the distribution of Company common stock even if all the conditions have been met?

 

A: Yes. The distribution is conditioned upon satisfaction or waiver of certain conditions. See “The Spin-Off—Spin-Off Conditions and Termination.” PNX has the right to terminate the stock distribution, even if all of these conditions are met, if at any time PNX’s board of directors determines, in its sole discretion, that PNX and the Company are better served being a combined company, thereby making the distribution not in the best interest of PNX and its stockholders.

 

Q: What will happen to the listing of PNX common stock?

 

A: Nothing. PNX common stock will continue to be traded on the New York Stock Exchange under the symbol “PNX.”

 

Q: Will the spin-off affect the market price of my shares of PNX common stock?

 

A: Yes. As a result of the spin-off, we expect the trading price of your shares of PNX common stock immediately following the distribution date to be lower than immediately prior to the distribution date because the trading price will no longer reflect the value of the Company business. In addition, until the market has fully analyzed the operations of PNX without this business, the price of your shares of PNX common stock may fluctuate significantly. Furthermore, the combined trading prices of PNX common stock and our common stock after the distribution date may be less than the trading price of PNX common stock prior to the distribution date.

 

Q: What will PNX stockholders receive in the spin-off?

 

A: In the spin-off, PNX stockholders will receive      share of our common stock for every one share of PNX common stock they own as of the record date of the spin-off. Immediately after the spin-off, PNX stockholders will still own their shares of PNX common stock and the same stockholders will still own all of PNX’s current businesses, but they will own them as two separate investments rather than as a single investment.

After the spin-off, the certificates and book-entry interests representing the “old” PNX common stock will represent such stockholders’ interests in the PNX businesses following the spin-off, excluding the Company but including Goodwin, and the certificates and book-entry interests representing our common stock that such stockholders receive in the spin-off will represent their interest in our Asset Management business only.

 

Q: What does a PNX stockholder need to do now?

 

A: PNX stockholders do not need to take any action, although we urge you to read this entire document carefully. The approval of the PNX stockholders is not required or sought to effect the spin-off and PNX stockholders have no appraisal rights in connection with the spin-off. PNX is not seeking a proxy from any stockholders and you are requested not to send us a proxy.

PNX stockholders will not be required to pay anything for the shares of our common stock distributed in the spin-off or to surrender any shares of PNX common stock. PNX stockholders should not send in their PNX share certificates. PNX stockholders will automatically receive their shares of our common stock when the spin-off is effected.

 

Q: Are there risks to owning Company common stock?

 

A: Yes. Our business is subject to both general and specific risks relating to our operations. In addition, our spin-off from PNX presents risks relating to our becoming an independent publicly traded company as well as risks relating to the nature of the spin-off transaction itself.

 

2


Table of Contents
Q: What are the U.S. federal income tax consequences of the spin-off to PNX stockholders?

 

A: It is intended that the spin-off will be a taxable transaction for U.S. federal income tax purposes. Accordingly, a taxable U.S. stockholder receiving shares of our common stock in the spin-off will be treated as if such stockholder had received a taxable distribution in an amount equal to the fair market value of our common stock received. Such distribution will be treated as a dividend to the extent of PNX’s current and accumulated earnings and profits, which subject to certain limitations may be taxable to individuals at a reduced rate of 15%. To the extent in excess of our earnings and profits, the receipt of our common stock will generally result in a reduction of a stockholder’s basis in PNX common stock and capital gain to the extent of any excess. Capital gains may be taxable at a reduced rate of 15% for individuals that have held their shares of PNX common stock for more than one year. In addition, a stockholder’s tax basis in our common stock will be equal to its fair market value at the time of the spin-off and the holding period in our common stock will begin the day after the spin-off. Depending on the circumstances, a non-U.S. stockholder may be subject to a withholding tax at a rate of 30% on the fair market value of the common stock received by such stockholder, unless such stockholder is entitled to an exemption from or reduction in withholding under the benefit of an applicable income tax treaty or the amount treated as a taxable dividend is effectively connected with such non-U.S. stockholder’s conduct of a trade or business in the United States, and the stockholder provides to us appropriate certification.

See “The Spin-off—Material U.S. Federal Income Tax Consequences of the Spin-off.”

You should consult your own tax advisor as to the particular consequences of the spin-off to you.

 

Q: What if I want to sell my PNX common stock or my Company common stock?

 

A: You should consult with your own financial advisors, such as your stockbroker, bank or tax advisor. PNX does not make any recommendations on the purchase, retention or sale of shares of PNX common stock or our common stock to be distributed.

If you do decide to sell any shares, you should make sure your stockbroker, bank or other nominee understands whether you want to sell your PNX common stock or your Company common stock after it is distributed, or both.

 

Q: Where will I be able to trade shares of my Company common stock?

 

A: There is not currently a public market for our common stock. We intend to apply to have our common stock authorized for listing on                     , or                     , under the symbol “                    .” We anticipate that trading in shares of our common stock will begin on a “when-issued” basis on or shortly before the record date and before the distribution date, and “regular way” trading will begin on the first trading day following the distribution date. If trading does begin on a “when-issued” basis, you may purchase or sell our common stock after that time, but your transaction will not settle until after the distribution date. On the first trading day following the distribution date, when-issued trading in respect of our common stock will end and regular way trading will begin. We cannot predict the trading prices for our common stock before or after the distribution date.

 

Q: Where can PNX stockholders get more information?

 

A: Before the distribution, if you have any questions relating to the distribution, you should contact:

The Phoenix Companies, Inc.

Investor Relations

One American Row

Hartford, CT 06102

Telephone: (860) 403-7100

 

3


Table of Contents

After the distribution, if you have any questions relating to our common stock, you should contact:

Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.

Investor Relations

56 Prospect Street

Hartford, CT 06102

Telephone: (860) 403-7100

 

Q: Who will be the distribution agent, transfer agent and registrar for Company common stock?

 

A: The distribution agent for our common stock will be Mellon Investor Services, LLC.

After the distribution, the transfer agent and registrar for our common stock will be Mellon Investor Services, LLC.

 

4


Table of Contents

SUMMARY

This summary highlights information contained elsewhere in this information statement and may not contain all of the information that may be important to you. For a complete understanding of the Asset Management business and the spin-off, you should read this summary together with the more detailed information and the Company financial statements appearing elsewhere in this information statement. You should read this entire information statement carefully, including the “Risk Factors” and “Special Note About Forward-Looking Statements” sections.

References in this information statement to (1) the “Company,” “Phoenix Investment Partners, Ltd.,” “Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.,” “we,” “us” or “our” refer to Virtus Investment Partners, Inc., a Delaware corporation, and its direct and indirect subsidiaries, and (2) “PNX” refer collectively to The Phoenix Companies, Inc., a Delaware corporation, and its direct and indirect subsidiaries, in each case, unless the context otherwise requires. The transaction in which the Company will be separated from PNX and become an independent publicly traded company is referred to in this information statement as the “spin-off.”

Our Company

We are a provider of investment management products and services to individuals and institutions. We operate a multi-manager asset management business, comprising a number of individual affiliated managers, each having its own distinct investment style, autonomous investment process and brand. We believe our customers value this approach, especially institutional customers who appreciate individual managers with distinctive cultures and styles.

Investors have an array of needs driven by factors such as market conditions, risk tolerance and investment goals. A key element of our business is to offer a variety of investment styles and multiple disciplines to meet those needs. To that end, for our mutual funds, we supplement the investment capabilities of our affiliated managers with those of select unaffiliated sub-advisors. We do that by partnering with these managers whose strategies are not typically available to retail mutual fund customers.

We provide our products in a number of forms and through multiple distribution channels. Our retail products include open-end mutual funds, closed-end funds and separately managed accounts. Our fund family of over 50 open-end funds is distributed primarily through intermediaries. Our five closed-end funds trade on the New York Stock Exchange. Retail separately managed accounts are comprised of intermediary programs, sponsored and distributed by unaffiliated brokerage firms, and private client services, originated and maintained by our affiliated managers. We also manage institutional accounts for corporations, multi-employer retirement funds and foundations, endowments, special purpose funds and other types of institutions. Our earnings are primarily driven by asset-based investment management fees charged on these various products. These fees are based on a percentage of assets under management and are calculated using either daily or weekly average assets or assets at the end of the quarter.

Our Strengths

We believe the following business strengths position us to capitalize on the opportunities presented by the market for asset management products and services:

 

   

We offer our clients investment capabilities across a broad range of products. Our roster of affiliated managers and unaffiliated sub-advisors is comprised of investment management teams with expertise across a spectrum of investment capabilities. We have capabilities in traditional categories such as core, value and international equity, fixed income and money market, as well as specialized categories such as REITs and utilities. As of September 30, 2008, 61%, 69% and 63% of our third-party assets under management were in the top third of relative peer groups on a one, three and five year basis, respectively. See “Business—Our Performance” for additional information.

 

 

5


Table of Contents
   

We offer products in multiple styles and multiple disciplines. Unlike many competitors of a similar size, our product set is highly diversified by manager, style and discipline. Our products are managed by a number of different managers, both affiliated and unaffiliated. We have multiple offerings by asset category (equity, fixed income, money market and alternative), in all market-caps (large, mid and small), in different styles (growth, blend and value) and with various investment approaches (fundamental, quantitative, thematic). By offering a broad array of products, we believe we can appeal to a greater number of investors and be less exposed to changes in market cycles and investor preferences. This provides the opportunity to participate in growth opportunities across different market cycles.

 

   

We distribute through multiple channels, with particular strength in retail distribution. We operate in both the institutional and retail markets. In retail markets, we have a broad presence in the national, regional and independent broker-dealer firms that are the major distributors of mutual funds and separately managed accounts to retail customers. In many of these firms, we have a number of products that are on the firms’ preferred “recommended” lists and on fee-based advisory programs. In 2007, our gross sales of retail mutual funds were $3.4 billion.

 

   

We provide an attractive environment for investment teams. Our affiliated managers maintain their own identity and participate in the earnings they generate through compensation arrangements. They are supported by shared distribution and administrative services, allowing them to focus their time and attention on managing client assets. We believe we provide an attractive environment for investment management professionals, which allows us to retain talent and attract new high-performing managers, teams and firms.

 

   

We have a strong and active product management and development capability. We have developed an active product management capability to allow for the continuous improvement of our product line. In our retail business, from 2005 through 2007 we completed 57 fund actions, comprised of launching or adopting new funds, changing sub-advisors and merging or liquidating funds. In addition, we have developed a number of new products that leverage our existing capabilities, through product line extensions such as our alternative fund of funds, Diversifier, and a new international REIT offering, or by identifying and acquiring new capabilities, such as our partnership with Vontobel Asset Management, the sub-advisor to our $1.1 billion Foreign Opportunities Fund.

Our Strategy

We believe we can enhance stockholder value by building upon our strengths and effectively executing the following strategies:

 

   

Maintain, extend and improve our offerings of high quality investment management capabilities. Our goal is to provide the highest quality products possible to our clients. In product categories where we do not have the capability from our affiliated managers, we partner with unaffiliated sub-advisors, selecting managers whose strategies are not typically available to retail mutual fund customers. We manage our product offerings in the same fashion that our distribution partners balance and manage their clientele’s portfolios, seeking to maximize returns while minimizing risks via a diversified, balanced suite of offerings with a long-term horizon.

 

   

Leverage our internal capabilities to develop new products. We intend to leverage our affiliated portfolio management capabilities by offering those capabilities in other product forms and extending them into new strategies. For example, our domestic REIT strategy was first developed for a closed-end fund, and was then introduced as an open-end fund, made available as an institutional account and within a variable annuity product. We then extended that domestic strategy into an international REIT offering in October 2007. We intend to seek to take similar steps with other

 

 

6


Table of Contents
 

investment capabilities. We also intend to continue to develop and introduce new offerings to meet the evolving needs of investors and to identify strong performing additional products that can be added to our line-up.

 

   

Build upon our current distribution access to generate higher levels of sales. We intend to selectively expand our distribution resources, including sales and relationship personnel. In the retail business, our wholesaling force is smaller than those of many of our competitors. We believe we can build upon the growth we have seen in the retail market by expanding these resources. In addition, through our intermediaries, we currently do business with a large number of producers that employ only one or two of our products. Our strategy is to focus on these producers in order to become one of their preferred mutual fund families. We believe this can be accomplished through appropriate incentives, focused activities and targeted marketing efforts. We also intend to expand into specific growth areas where we have a smaller presence, such as the registered investment advisors (“RIA”) channel. This channel is one of the fastest growing components of the advisory industry.

 

   

Develop and attract additional high-caliber investment professionals. We believe we can attract high-caliber investment management professionals based on the relative attractiveness of our business model, which allows each affiliated manager to maintain its identity and participate in the earnings it generates. We intend to employ a variety of approaches to grow in this manner, including the expansion of existing teams and direct hiring of new teams. Similarly, we believe the structure of our business is attractive to sub-advisors looking for distribution and other support.

 

   

Enhance our shared administrative and distribution services and achieve greater economies of scale. We intend to continue to enhance our shared services to allow for even greater efficiencies and economies of scale. The spin-off provides several opportunities to enhance the scope of the shared services we provide to our affiliated managers. Specifically, we will now have control over the costs related to all forms of shared services and the ability to deploy expenditures to best serve a stand-alone asset management business. We believe the spin-off will provide additional savings related to costs shared with PNX, primarily facilities and administrative support.

We believe that we have an opportunity to expand our profit margins by increasing assets under management and associated revenues while applying disciplined expense management. Generally speaking, we believe that in the asset management business an increase in assets under management to certain levels does not result in additional material fixed costs.

Following the spin-off, we will be an independent publicly traded company, and our assets and business will consist largely of those currently reported in PNX’s financial statements as PNX’s Asset Management segment and operating as the Company, but excluding the assets and business of Goodwin.

We describe in this information statement PNX’s Asset Management business that will be owned by us following the spin-off as if it were our sole business for all historical periods described. However, we are currently a wholly owned subsidiary of PNX that also owns other assets and is engaged, indirectly, in other businesses which will not be part of the Company following the spin-off. References in this document to our historical assets, liabilities, products, business, operations or activities generally refer to the historical assets, liabilities, products, business, operations or activities of PNX’s Asset Management business as it was conducted as part of PNX and its subsidiaries, including the Company and its subsidiaries, before the spin-off. Our historical financial results as part of PNX contained in this information statement may not be indicative of our financial results in the future as an independent company or reflect what our financial results would have been had we been an independent company during the periods presented.

 

 

7


Table of Contents

Summary Consolidated Financial Data

The following tables set forth our summary consolidated financial data. The summary results of operations data for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2007 are derived from our audited consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this information statement, which have been prepared in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles in the United States (“GAAP”). The results of operations data for the nine months ended September 30, 2007 and September 30, 2008 are derived from our unaudited consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this information statement. The unaudited consolidated financial statements have been prepared on the same basis as our audited consolidated financial statements and in our opinion include all adjustments, consisting only of normal recurring adjustments that we consider necessary for a fair statement of our results of operations and financial position for these periods and as of such dates.

The following tables also present our summary unaudited pro forma consolidated financial information, which has been derived from our unaudited pro forma consolidated financial information included elsewhere in this information statement.

 

     Nine Months Ended September 30,    Years Ended December 31,  
       2008     Pro Forma
2008
    2007    2007     Pro Forma
2007
   2006     2005  
($ in millions)       

Results of Operations

                

Total revenues

   $ 143.4     $ 125.7     $ 170.0    $ 226.2     $ 203.3    $ 218.6     $ 237.4  

Total operating expenses

     589.6       574.5       166.1      220.9       198.6      262.5       256.5  

Operating income (loss)

     (446.2 )     (448.8 )     3.9      5.3       4.7      (43.9 )     (19.1 )

Net income (loss)

     (349.9 )     (351.5 )     10.2      (14.2 )     2.3      (47.6 )     (33.1 )

Adjusted net income(1)

    
13.6
 
     
13.5
     16.5          18.6       17.3  

Cash Flow Data

                

Net cash provided by (used in) operating activities

   $ (2.8 )     $ 4.8    $ 13.0        $ 15.9     $ (11.5 )

Capital expenditures

     (2.4 )       —        (0.5 )        (1.6 )     (0.8 )

EBITDA(2)

     7.8            38.1          26.2       22.1  
     As of September 30    As of December 31,  
     2008     Pro Forma
2008
    2007    2007          2006     2005  

Balance Sheet Data

                

Cash and cash equivalents

   $ 22.6     $ 44.5     $ 32.8    $ 36.8        $ 33.9     $ 23.8  

Current assets (including cash and cash equivalents)

     60.9       81.7       83.0      83.1          82.2       66.3  

Total assets

     365.0       274.3       760.7      752.2          781.1       825.0  

Current liabilities (excluding current maturities of notes payable)

     55.4       37.6       56.9      74.3          71.0       54.0  

Notes payable to related parties (including current maturities)

     33.0       20.0       370.0      42.0          436.3       508.1  

Other liabilities

     1.7       12.5       29.6      11.0          20.3       35.9  

Convertible preferred equity

     —         45.0       —        —            —         —    

Stockholder’s equity

     274.9       159.2       304.2      624.9          253.5       227.0  

Assets Under Management

                
($ in billions)                                         

Total assets(3)

   $ 41.2       $ 59.4    $ 55.5        $ 58.1     $ 50.9  

Third-party assets(3)

     28.7         46.5      42.5          45.0       37.4  

Pro forma assets(3)

     27.0         44.4      40.4          43.6       35.7  

 

Notes to Summary Consolidated Financial Data

 

(1)

The supplemental performance measure “adjusted net income” is provided in addition to net income, but is not a substitute for net income determined in accordance with GAAP and may not be comparable to other

 

 

8


Table of Contents
 

non-GAAP performance measures, including measures of cash earnings or cash income, of other companies. Furthermore, adjusted net income is not a liquidity measure and should not be used in place of cash flow measures determined in accordance with GAAP. We consider adjusted net income an important measure of our financial performance, as we believe it best represents operating performance of the primary asset management business. We consider this non-GAAP financial measure when evaluating the performance of the Company and believe the presentation of these amounts provides the reader with information to better analyze the Company’s operations for the periods presented. See our definition of adjusted net income, as well as our reconciliation of net income to adjusted net income in “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations—Supplemental Performance Measures.”

 

(2) The supplemental measure “EBITDA”, a non-GAAP liquidity measure, defined as earnings before interest expense, income taxes, depreciation and amortization, is provided in addition to, but not as a substitute for, cash flow from operations. EBITDA, as calculated by us, may not be consistent with computations of EBITDA by other companies. As a measure of liquidity we believe that EBITDA is a useful indicator of our ability to service debt, make new investments and meet working capital requirements. We further believe that many investors use this information when analyzing the financial position of companies in the asset management industry.

 

(3) “Total assets” reflect all related party and unrelated party assets managed by the Company, including PNX’s general account. Historical financial results included in this information statement are presented using total assets as the basis of the Company’s operations. “Third-party assets” are total assets excluding PNX’s general account. Historical financial results of the Asset Management segment of PNX are presented using third-party assets as the basis of the segment’s operations. “Pro forma assets” exclude Goodwin’s portion of PNX’s general account as well as third-party institutional assets managed by Goodwin. Pro forma financial results included in this information statement, as well as the Company’s future results, are presented using pro forma assets as the basis of the Company’s operations.

Our unaudited pro forma consolidated financial statements have been prepared to reflect adjustments to our historical financial information to give effect to the distribution of our common stock to the stockholders of PNX and the following transactions, as if these transactions had been completed at earlier dates:

 

   

Transfer of the Goodwin business to PNX. Goodwin is a registered investment advisor with revenues of $22.9 million and $17.6 million, and operating expenses of $17.6 million and $13.2 million, for 2007 and the first nine months of 2008, respectively.

 

   

Operating costs related to human resources, facilities, corporate communications, compliance, corporate and staff, legal, internal audit and tax service were previously charged to the Company by PNX. Costs for these functions are now directly incurred by the Company. In addition, costs have been adjusted to include board of directors’ expenses, transfer agent fees and stock exchange listing fees. This resulted in net cost adjustments of ($4.7) million and ($1.9) million for 2007 and the first nine months of 2008, respectively.

 

   

A one-time pre-payment of approximately $13.0 million on its $33.0 million intercompany note agreement with Phoenix Life Insurance Company. The Company expects there will be approximately $20.0 million of outstanding indebtedness on this note after the distribution is completed. The interest rate is expected to be re-set on this note agreement at LIBOR plus 400 basis points. A 100 basis point increase or decrease in the interest rate would result in additional or reduced annual interest expense of $0.2 million.

 

   

Sale of $45.0 million of convertible preferred stock to Harris Bankcorp, Inc. (“Harris Bankcorp”). On October 30, 2008, the Company signed a definitive agreement with Harris Bankcorp, a U.S. subsidiary of Bank of Montreal, to take a 23% equity position in the Company in connection with the spin-off.

 

 

9


Table of Contents

 

   

Establishment of a $94.0 million valuation allowance against deferred tax assets, which were generated primarily by federal net operating losses, due to the uncertainty of future income that is necessary to realize these assets. Elimination of $4.9 million of intercompany taxes payable to PNX under the tax sharing agreement with PNX.

The unaudited pro forma consolidated financial data presented for the year ended December 31, 2007 and for the nine months ended September 30, 2008 is derived from our audited consolidated financial statements for the year ended December 31, 2007 and our unaudited consolidated financial statements for the nine months ended September 30, 2008. The unaudited pro forma consolidated results of operations data for the year ended December 31, 2007 and the nine months ended September 30, 2008 assumes the items listed above occurred as of January 1, 2007. For a more complete explanation see “Unaudited Pro Forma Consolidated Financial Data.”

Our consolidated financial information may not be indicative of our future performance and does not necessarily reflect what our financial condition and results of operations would have been had we operated as a separate, stand-alone entity during the periods presented, including many changes that will occur in the operations and capitalization of the Company as a result of our separation from PNX.

 

 

10


Table of Contents

Summary of the Spin-Off

The following is a summary of the terms of the spin-off. See “The Spin-Off” for a more detailed description of the matters described below.

 

Distributing company

The Phoenix Companies, Inc.

 

Distributed company

Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.

 

Distribution ratio

Each holder of PNX common stock will receive a dividend of          share of our common stock for every one share of PNX common stock held on the record date.

 

Securities to be distributed

Shares of our common stock and accompanying share purchase rights, which will constitute all of the outstanding shares of our common stock immediately after the spin-off.

 

Record date

The record date is the close of business on             , 2008. In order to be entitled to receive shares of our common stock in the spin-off, holders of shares of PNX common stock must be stockholders as of the close of business on the record date.

 

Distribution date

The distribution date will be on or about             , 2008.

 

Relationship between the Company and PNX after the spin-off

After the spin-off, neither PNX nor the Company will have any ownership interest in the other, and each of PNX and the Company will be an independent publicly traded company. In connection with the spin-off, we are entering into a number of transitional agreements with PNX that will govern our future relationship with PNX. Under these transitional agreements, we expect PNX will provide us with the following transition services, among others: information technology support, human resources, facilities, legal and other limited services consistent with past practices. We will also enter into other agreements with PNX providing for the allocation of tax benefits, employee matters and liabilities arising from periods prior to the spin-off. We may enter into other agreements with PNX prior to or concurrently with the distribution that would relate to other aspects of our relationship with PNX following the spin-off. See “Our Relationship With PNX After the Spin-Off.”

 

Management of the Company

Following the spin-off, we will have an initial board of directors (the “Board”) consisting of nine directors. Our certificate of incorporation and our bylaws will provide that our Board is divided into three classes. The term of the first class of directors expires at our 2009 annual meeting of stockholders, the term of the second class of directors expires at our 2010 annual meeting of stockholders and the term of the third class of directors expires at our 2011 annual meeting of stockholders. At each of our annual meetings of stockholders, the successors of the class of directors whose term expires at that meeting of stockholders will be elected for a three year term, one class being elected each year by our stockholders. See “Management—Board of Directors.”

 

 

11


Table of Contents

Description of indebtedness

We currently intend to obtain new third-party financing, the proceeds of which will be used to pay down certain existing related party payables, the outstanding balance on our notes payable to Phoenix Life Insurance Company, to provide for our working capital requirements, to support letters of credit and for other general corporate requirements, including the financing of acquisitions. See “Description of Indebtedness” and Notes 9 and 15 to our consolidated financial statements in this information statement.

 

Dividend policy

We do not plan on initially paying any cash dividends. However, the owners of our common stock may receive dividends when declared by our Board from funds legally available for the payment of dividends. All decisions regarding the declaration and payment of dividends will be evaluated from time to time in light of our financial condition, earnings, growth prospects, other uses of cash, funding requirements, applicable law and other factors our Board deems relevant. See “Dividend Policy.”

 

Payment of intercompany indebtedness

The Company intends to make a one-time pre-payment of approximately $13.0 million on its $33.0 million intercompany note agreement with Phoenix Life Insurance Company in connection with this spin-off transaction. The Company expects there will be approximately $20.0 million of outstanding indebtedness on this note after the distribution is completed. The Company intends to obtain third-party financing to retire this obligation at the time of the distribution date.

 

Anti-takeover provisions

In connection with the spin-off, we intend to adopt a stockholders’ rights agreement, which will expire on or before June 19, 2011, which could have the effect of discouraging, delaying or preventing a change of control of the Company not approved by our Board. See “Description of Our Capital Stock—Anti-Takeover Provisions—Rights Agreement.”

Provisions of the Delaware General Corporation Law (the “DGCL”) may have the effect of discouraging, delaying or preventing a change of control of the Company not approved by our Board. Such provisions may also have the effect of discouraging third parties from making proposals involving an acquisition or change of control of the Company, although such proposals, if made, might be considered desirable by a majority of the stockholders of the Company. Such provisions could further have the effect of making it more difficult for third parties to cause the replacement of our Board.

 

Risk factors

You should carefully consider the matters discussed under the section entitled “Risk Factors.”

Corporate Information and Structure

We are a Delaware corporation and an existing wholly owned subsidiary of PNX. Our principal executive offices are located at 56 Prospect Street, Hartford, CT 06102, and our telephone number is (860) 403-7100. We will be relocating our principal executive office to 100 Pearl St. 9 th Floor, Hartford, CT 06103.

 

 

12


Table of Contents

Pursuant to the spin-off, we will be separated from PNX and become an independent publicly traded company. The spin-off and our resulting separation from PNX involve the following steps:

 

   

Before the distribution date:

 

   

The PNX board of directors will determine the record date for the dividend of our common stock to PNX stockholders, declare that dividend and determine the distribution ratio.

 

   

Our common stock is expected to begin trading on a “when-issued” basis on or shortly before the record date for the spin-off.

 

   

PNX, as our sole stockholder, will:

 

  i. elect our Board;

 

  ii. approve our adoption of certain benefit plans; and

 

  iii. approve various actions related to the spin-off as described in this information statement.

 

   

Our Board will approve:

 

  i. the adoption of certain benefit plans;

 

  ii. our corporate governance documents and policies; and

 

  iii. various actions related to the spin-off as described in this information statement.

 

   

The Securities and Exchange Commission (the “SEC”) will declare effective under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the “Exchange Act”), our Form 10, of which this information statement is a part.

 

   

PNX will mail this information statement to its stockholders.

 

   

On or before the distribution date:

 

   

We will have entered into numerous agreements with PNX, including a:

 

  i. Separation and Distribution Agreement;

 

  ii. Transition Services Agreement;

 

  iii. Tax Separation Agreement; and

 

  iv. Employee Matters Agreement.

 

   

On the distribution date:

 

   

Phoenix Investment Management Company (“PIM”), our direct parent and a wholly owned subsidiary of PNX, will transfer all of our common stock to PNX.

 

   

We will transfer all of the stock and assets of Goodwin to PNX.

 

   

PNX will distribute 100% of the shares of our common stock (other than shares withheld to satisfy certain withholding obligations) pro rata to all of its stockholders of record as of the record date.

 

   

Following the distribution date:

 

   

We expect that our common stock will begin trading on              on a “regular way” basis under the symbol “            ” on the first trading day following the distribution date. We will operate as an independent publicly traded company.

For a further explanation of the spin-off, see “The Spin-Off.”

 

 

13


Table of Contents

The Company is not a registered investment advisor. However, it has seven subsidiaries that are active registered investment advisors.

The following diagram depicts our corporate structure after giving effect to the distribution and the other concurrent transactions described in this information statement:

LOGO

Recent Developments

On October 30, 2008, we and our parent companies, PNX and Phoenix Investment Management Company, entered into an Investment and Contribution Agreement with Harris Bankcorp, Inc., a U.S. subsidiary of Bank of Montreal, pursuant to which Harris Bankcorp, Inc. would acquire $45.0 million in convertible preferred stock of the Company, representing a 23% equity position in us and our direct and wholly owned subsidiary. The agreement calls for a two-step closing process, the first step of which was completed effective October 31, 2008. The second step of the transaction, which is subject to certain regulatory and other customary conditions, is expected to be completed in connection with the spin-off.

For additional information on the agreement with Harris Bankcorp, Inc., see “Equity Investment.”

 

 

14


Table of Contents

RISK FACTORS

You should carefully consider the risks described below, together with all of the other information included in this information statement, in evaluating the Company and our common stock. If any of the risks described below actually occurs, our business, financial results, financial condition and stock price could be materially adversely affected.

Recent Risk Factors Related to the Current Market Environment

Recent market and economic developments may materially and adversely affect our business, revenues, earnings, sales, assets under management, financial condition and results of operations.

Recent markets have experienced unprecedented credit and liquidity issues as well as volatility and declines in the equity markets. Lending practices in past years, particularly in the “sub-prime” market, coupled with dramatic declines in home prices, rising mortgage defaults and increasing home foreclosures, have resulted in significant write-downs of asset values by financial institutions, including government-sponsored entities and major commercial and investment banks. These write-downs, initially of mortgage-backed securities but spreading to most sectors of the credit markets, and to credit default swaps and other derivative securities, have caused many financial institutions to seek additional capital, to merge with larger and stronger institutions, to be subsidized by the U.S. Government and, in some cases, to fail. Reflecting concern about the stability of the financial markets generally and the strength of counterparties, credit markets have worsened considerably, with many lenders and institutional investors reducing, and in some cases, ceasing to provide funding to borrowers, including other financial institutions. Additionally, concerns over increasing unemployment, inflation and energy costs as well as geopolitical issues have contributed to diminished expectations for the economy and the financial markets going forward. These factors, combined with declining business and consumer confidence and increased unemployment, have precipitated an economic slowdown and fears of a prolonged recession. As a result, the financial markets and the U.S. economy are experiencing a period of extreme volatility.

It is difficult to predict how long the current economic and market conditions will continue, how the coordinated actions of the U.S. Government and other international economic leaders will affect the current environment, and whether the financial markets will continue to deteriorate and which aspects of our products and/or business will be adversely affected. However, the resulting lack of available credit, lack of confidence in the financial sector, increased volatility in the financial markets and reduced business activity may materially and adversely affect us. Recent market and economic developments have affected, or have the potential to affect, us negatively by:

 

   

reducing the value of the assets we manage, which has resulted in, and may continue to result in, lower fee revenues;

 

   

increasing consumer concerns about the returns and attractiveness of our investment products, which may cause existing clients to withdraw assets and diminish our ability to attract assets from new and existing clients, which would result in lower sales and fee revenues;

 

   

affecting the access to, and reliability of, service levels provided by our intermediary distribution channels and service providers, which could materially affect our sales, redemptions and business operations;

 

   

exacerbating the conditions which caused us to recognize an impairment of the goodwill and intangible assets on our balance sheet and may lead to future impairments;

 

   

increasing competition from stronger rivals in a more consolidated financial services industry, driven by regulatory action or other opportunistic transactions;

 

15


Table of Contents
   

causing regulators to change the laws and regulations that affect us, which may result in greater compliance costs and restrictions on our ability to do business;

 

   

encouraging litigation, arbitration and regulatory action in response to the increased frequency and magnitude of investment losses, which may result in unfavorable judgments, awards and settlements, regulatory fines and an increase in our related legal expenses;

 

   

reducing our ability to obtain financing to support the development of our business on favorable terms, or eliminating our ability to obtain financing at all;

 

   

increasing the difficulty of performing administrative functions such as determining the fair value of assets we manage and changing our investment positions in assets we manage, which may affect our service levels and the ability to retain existing clients or attract new clients;

 

   

damaging our reputation indirectly by association with the industries most seriously affected by market and economic developments, or directly due to a decline in investment performance or service levels, which may affect our ability to retain existing clients or attract new clients;

 

   

damaging our reputation due to the inability of investors to redeem auction rate preferred securities due to the failure, since February 2008, of such remarketing auctions caused by illiquidity in the auction rate preferred market, which previously provided investment liquidity to certain of our closed-end funds; and

 

   

damaging our reputation or creating pressure to contribute capital to certain of our money market funds should these funds become at risk of falling below a $1.00 net asset value, referred to as “breaking the buck,” due to illiquidity in the money markets or credit-related impairments of their holdings.

Any of these negative effects may materially and adversely affect our business, revenues, earnings, sales, assets under management, financial condition and results of operations.

Risk Factors Relating to the Spin-Off

Our historical and pro forma consolidated financial information is not necessarily representative of the results we would have achieved as a stand-alone company and may not be a reliable indicator of our future results.

Our historical consolidated financial information included in this information statement does not reflect the financial condition, results of operations or cash flows we would have achieved as a stand-alone company during the periods presented or those we will achieve in the future. This is primarily a result of the following factors:

 

   

our historical financial information reflects the assets and business of Goodwin that will not be part of the Company following the distribution;

 

   

our historical financial results reflect allocations of corporate expenses from PNX, which may be different than the comparable expenses we would have actually incurred or will incur in the future as a stand-alone company;

 

   

our cost of debt and our capitalization will be different from that reflected in our historical consolidated financial statements; and

 

   

significant changes may occur in our cost structure, management, financing and business operations as a result of our separation from PNX, including the costs for us to establish our new operating infrastructure.

We have made adjustments based upon available information and assumptions that we believe are reasonable to reflect these factors, among others, in our pro forma financial information. However, our assumptions may prove not to be accurate, and accordingly, our pro forma financial information should not be assumed to be indicative of what our financial condition or results of operations actually would have been as a stand-alone company nor to be a reliable indicator of what our financial condition or results of operations actually may be in the future.

 

16


Table of Contents

The agreements we are entering into with PNX may involve, or may appear to involve, conflicts of interest.

Because the spin-off involves the separation of PNX’s existing businesses into two independent companies, we are entering into certain agreements with PNX to provide a framework for our initial relationship with PNX following the spin-off. We have negotiated these agreements with PNX while we are still a wholly owned subsidiary of PNX. Accordingly, the persons who are expected to become our officers are currently employees or officers of PNX or its subsidiaries and, as such, have an obligation to serve the interests of PNX and its subsidiaries. As a result, they could be viewed as having a conflict of interest.

As we build our information technology infrastructure and transition our data to our own systems, we could experience temporary business interruptions and incur substantial additional costs.

After the spin-off, we will install and implement information technology infrastructure to support our business functions. We anticipate this will involve significant costs. We may incur temporary interruptions in business operations if we cannot transition effectively from PNX’s existing technology infrastructure, as well as the people and processes that support them. We may not be successful in implementing our new technology infrastructure and transitioning our data, and we may incur substantially higher costs for implementation than currently anticipated. Our failure to avoid operational interruptions as we implement the new infrastructure and transition our data, or our failure to implement the new infrastructure and transition our data successfully, could disrupt our business and have a material adverse effect on our profitability.

Our separation from PNX could increase our U.S. federal income tax costs.

Due to the separation we will not be able to file a consolidated U.S. federal income tax return with PNX. As a result, the Company and PNX will no longer be able to offset one another’s net operating and capital gains with net operating and capital losses to the extent available. Additionally, any other benefits relating to taxes arising from being part of the larger PNX company may be lost. As a result, the aggregate amount of U.S. federal income taxes applicable to our business may increase after the distribution.

Risk Factors Relating to Our Business

Poor performance of the securities markets could adversely affect our revenues, earnings, sales and assets under management.

The securities markets can be volatile and experience both periods of strong growth and of substantial declines. There are several ways in which market declines and volatility have affected, or have the potential to affect, us negatively, including:

 

   

limiting our fee revenues by reducing the value of the assets we manage;

 

   

decreasing sales of our investment products;

 

   

causing existing clients to withdraw assets from our managed investment products, which would result in lower fee revenues; and

 

   

diminishing our ability to attract assets from existing and new clients.

Any of these negative effects may result in lower revenues and earnings.

For example, during the first nine months of 2008, the market value of our assets under management declined $4.3 billion due to declines in the securities markets. Accordingly, our management fees, which are calculated based on a percentage of the market value of assets under management, declined at an annualized rate of $19.1 million. Future periods of poor securities market performance, which will affect our investment management fees, may have an adverse effect on our revenues, earnings, sales, assets under management and the carrying value of our goodwill or intangible assets.

 

17


Table of Contents

For the first nine months of 2008, we had a loss of $349.9 million as compared to a loss of $10.2 million for the same period in 2007. The primary contributors to the 2008 loss were pre-tax non-cash impairment charges of $432.2 million related to goodwill and intangible assets. Our 2007 loss was primarily driven by interest expense on $325.0 million of intercompany debt, which was extinguished on December 31, 2007.

Poor relative investment performance of some of our asset management strategies may result in outflows of assets under management, lower revenues and lower earnings.

Net flows related to our asset management strategies can be affected by investment performance. Further, our asset management strategies are rated or ranked by independent third parties and individual distribution partners, and many industry periodicals and services provide assessments of the relative performance of our strategies. These assessments often affect the decisions of customers regarding which strategies to invest in. If the relative performance or assessments of our strategies decline materially, the assets under management related to these strategies may decrease as customers select strategies with better performance. Any loss of assets under management would decrease the fees that we earn from such strategies. This could result in lower assets under management, lower revenues and lower earnings.

Our business operations, investment returns and profitability could be adversely impacted by inadequate performance of third-party relationships.

We are dependent on certain third-party relationships to maintain essential business operations. These services include, but are not limited to, information technology infrastructure, application systems support, mutual fund and investment accounting services, transfer agent and cash management services, custodial services, records storage management, backup tape management, security pricing services, payroll, legal and employee benefit programs. In addition, we maintain contractual relationships with certain investment advisory and investment management firms to leverage their expertise. These firms manage select investments or portions of portfolios under sub-advisory agreements.

We periodically negotiate provisions and renewals of these relationships and there can be no assurance that such terms will remain acceptable to such third parties or us. An interruption in our continuing relationship with certain of these third parties or any material delay or inability to deliver essential services could materially affect our business operations and potentially adversely affect our profitability.

Clients can withdraw assets from our management for a variety of reasons, which could lead to a decrease in our revenues and earnings.

Generally, our clients can terminate their relationships with us or our distribution partners at will or on relatively short notice. They can also reduce the aggregate amount of managed assets or shift their funds to other types of accounts for any number of reasons, including investment performance, changes in investment preferences, changes in reputation in the marketplace, changes in client management or ownership, loss of key investment management personnel and financial market performance. In declining markets, the pace of mutual fund redemptions and withdrawals of assets from other accounts could accelerate. Poor performance relative to other asset management firms may result in decreased purchases of fund shares, increased redemptions of fund shares, and the loss of institutional or individual accounts. A reduction in the assets we manage, and the associated decrease in revenues and earnings, could have a material adverse effect on our business.

Our separation from PNX could adversely affect our business and profitability due to the loss of PNX’s brand, reputation and capital base.

As a wholly owned subsidiary of PNX, we have marketed certain of our products and services using the “Phoenix” brand name and logo. Our separation from PNX and change in name may adversely affect our ability

 

18


Table of Contents

to attract and retain customers and their investments, which could result in outflows or reduced sales from our mutual funds and other investment products. We cannot predict the effect that our separation from PNX will have on our business or customers, sub-advisors, distribution partners and employees.

We might be unable to attract or retain personnel who are key to our business.

The success of our business is dependent to a large extent on our ability to attract and retain key employees. Competition in the job market for professionals such as portfolio managers, securities analysts and sales personnel is generally intense. In general, our employees are not subject to employment contracts or non-compete agreements. Any inability to retain our key employees, or attract and retain additional qualified employees, could have a negative impact on us.

The independent trustees of our mutual funds and closed-end funds, intermediary program sponsors, managed account clients and institutional asset management clients could terminate their contracts with us. This would reduce our revenues and earnings.

Each of the mutual funds and closed-end funds for which we act as investment advisor or sub-advisor is registered under the Investment Company Act of 1940 (the “Investment Company Act”) and is governed by a board of trustees or board of directors. Each fund’s contract is renewed annually by the fund board. Either the board members or, in limited circumstances, the stockholders may terminate an advisory contract with us and move the assets to another investment advisor. The board members also may deem it to be in the best interests of a fund’s stockholders to make other decisions adverse to us, such as reducing the compensation paid to us or imposing restrictions on our management of the fund.

Our asset management agreements with intermediary program sponsors, private clients and institutional clients are generally terminable by these sponsors and clients upon short notice without penalty. As a result, there would be little impediment to these sponsors or clients terminating our agreements if they became dissatisfied with our performance.

The termination of any of the above agreements relating to a material portion of assets under management would adversely affect our investment management fee revenues and earnings and could require us to take a charge to earnings as a result of the impairment of the goodwill or intangible assets associated with our asset managers.

Goodwill or intangible assets could become impaired requiring a charge to earnings in the event of significant market declines, net outflows of assets or losses of investment management contracts.

The amount of goodwill and intangible assets on our balance sheet is supported by the assets under, management and the related revenues of the business. In the nine months ended September 30, 2008, we have recognized goodwill and intangible asset impairments totaling $432.2 million. These impairment charges were triggered by the significant declines in the equity markets and the decline in valuations of financial companies experienced in 2008, particularly in the third quarter. It might be necessary to recognize additional impairment of these assets should these events worsen or recur or if we experience a drop in assets under management for other reasons such as material outflows, the termination of a material investment management contract or material outflows if clients withdraw their assets following the departure of a key employee.

We face strong competition in our businesses from mutual fund companies, banks and asset management firms. This competition could impair our ability to retain existing customers, attract new customers and maintain our profitability.

We face strong competition in our businesses. We believe that our ability to compete is based on a number of factors, including investment performance, service, distribution capabilities and relative scale. We are also highly dependent on our distribution relationships. Our actual and potential competitors include a large number of mutual fund companies, banks and asset management firms, many of which have advantages over us. Recent industry consolidation has resulted in larger competitors with financial resources, marketing and distribution

 

19


Table of Contents

capabilities and brand identities that are stronger than ours. Larger firms also may be able to offer, due to economies of scale, lower cost products. If we do not compete effectively in this environment, our profitability and financial condition would be materially adversely affected.

Our operations may depend on the availability of additional financing and, after the spin-off, we may not be able to obtain financing.

To support the development of our business, we may require additional financing for liquidity, capital requirements or growth initiatives. After the spin-off, PNX will not provide additional financing to us. Accordingly, we will depend on our ability to generate cash flow from operations and to borrow funds and issue securities in the capital markets to maintain and expand our business. We may need to incur debt on terms and at interest rates that may not be as favorable as those historically available to PNX. Any inability by us to obtain financing in the future could have a negative effect on our results of operations and financial condition.

Potential changes in federal and state regulation may increase our business costs, which could adversely affect our business, consolidated operating results, financial condition or liquidity.

We are subject to regulation by the SEC, the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority (“FINRA”) and other federal and state agencies and self-regulatory organizations. Each advisor (including unaffiliated sub-advisors) is registered with the SEC under the Investment Advisers Act of 1940 (the “Investment Advisers Act”). Each closed-end fund and open-end fund is registered with the SEC under the Investment Company Act. Our broker-dealer is registered with the SEC under the Securities Exchange Act and is a member of FINRA. All of our funds currently available for sale are qualified in all 50 states, Washington, DC, Puerto Rico, and the U.S. Virgin Islands. Most aspects of our investment management business, including the business of the sub-advisors, are subject to various federal and state laws and regulations.

These laws and regulations are primarily intended to benefit the investment product shareholder and generally grant supervisory agencies and bodies broad administrative powers, including the power to limit or restrict us and any sub-advisor from carrying on its investment management business in the event that it fails to comply with such laws and regulations. In such an event, the possible sanctions which may be imposed include the suspension of individual employees, limitations on our engaging in the investment management business for specified periods of time, the revocation of the advisors’ registrations as investment advisors or other censures and fines.

These laws and regulations are complex and subject to change. Moreover, because they are administered and enforced by a number of different governmental authorities, each of which exercises a degree of interpretive latitude, we are subject to the risk that compliance with any particular regulator’s or enforcement authority’s interpretation of a legal issue may not result in compliance with another regulator’s or enforcement authority’s interpretation of the same issue, particularly when compliance is judged in hindsight. In addition, there is risk that any particular regulator’s or enforcement authority’s interpretation of a legal issue may change over time to our detriment, or that changes in the overall legal environment may, even absent any particular regulator’s or enforcement authority’s interpretation of a legal issue changing, cause us to change our views regarding the actions we need to take from a legal risk management perspective, thus necessitating changes to our practices that may, in some cases, limit our ability to grow and improve the profitability of our business.

Compliance with these laws and regulations is also time consuming and personnel-intensive, and changes in these laws and regulations may increase materially our direct and indirect compliance costs and other expenses of doing business, thus having an adverse effect on our business, consolidated operating results, financial condition and liquidity.

 

20


Table of Contents

Legal and regulatory actions are inherent in our businesses and could result in financial losses or harm to our businesses.

We are regularly involved in litigation and arbitration, both as a defendant and as a plaintiff. In addition, various regulatory bodies regularly make inquiries of us and, from time to time, conduct examinations or investigations concerning our compliance with, among other things, securities laws and laws governing the activities of broker-dealers. There has been a significant increase in federal and state regulatory activity relating to financial services companies, with regulatory inquiries focusing on late-trading, market timing and valuation issues. Financial services companies have also been the subject of broad industry inquiries by state regulators and attorneys general which do not appear to be company-specific. We have had inquiries relating to market timing and distribution practices in the past, and we continue to cooperate with the applicable regulatory authorities in these matters. While no regulatory authority has ever taken action against us with regard to these inquiries, we may be subject to further related or unrelated inquiries or actions in the future.

It is not feasible to predict or determine the ultimate outcome of all legal or regulatory proceedings or to provide reasonable ranges of potential losses. We believe that the outcomes of our litigation and regulatory matters are not likely, either individually or in the aggregate, to have a material adverse effect on our consolidated financial condition. However, given the large or indeterminate amounts sought in certain of these matters and the inherent unpredictability of litigation and regulatory matters, it is possible that an adverse outcome in certain matters could, from time to time, have a material adverse effect on our results of operations or cash flows in particular quarterly or annual periods.

Misconduct by our employees, sub-advisors and distribution partners is difficult to detect and deter and could harm our business, results of operations or financial condition.

Misconduct by our employees, sub-advisors and distribution partners could result in violations of law by us, regulatory sanctions and/or serious reputational or financial harm. Misconduct can occur in each of our businesses and could include:

 

   

binding us to transactions that exceed authorized limits;

 

   

hiding unauthorized or unsuccessful activities resulting in unknown and unmanaged risks or losses;

 

   

improperly using or disclosing confidential information;

 

   

recommending transactions that are not suitable;

 

   

engaging in fraudulent or otherwise improper activity;

 

   

engaging in unauthorized or excessive trading to the detriment of customers; or

 

   

otherwise not complying with laws or our control procedures.

We cannot always deter misconduct by our employees, sub-advisors and distribution partners, and the precautions we take to prevent and detect this activity may not be effective in all cases. Prevention and detection among our sub-advisors and distribution partners, who are not employees of the Company, present additional challenges. Misconduct by our employees, sub-advisors and distribution partners may have a material adverse effect on our business, results of operations or financial condition.

Changes in accounting standards issued by the Financial Accounting Standards Board or other standard-setting bodies may adversely affect our financial statements.

Our financial statements are subject to the application of GAAP, which is periodically revised and/or expanded. Accordingly, from time to time we are required to adopt new or revised accounting standards or guidance issued by recognized authoritative bodies, including the Financial Accounting Standards Board. It is possible that future accounting standards we are required to adopt could change the current accounting treatment that we apply to our consolidated financial statements and that such changes could significantly affect our reported financial condition and results of operations.

 

21


Table of Contents

We may be unsuccessful in our future acquisition endeavors, if any, which may have an adverse effect on our business.

One aspect of our future growth rate depends in part on our selective acquisition of additional businesses. We may be unable to identify suitable targets for acquisition or make acquisitions at favorable prices. If we identify a suitable acquisition candidate, our ability to successfully implement the acquisition would depend on a variety of factors, including our ability to obtain financing and, for larger transactions, requisite government approvals.

Acquisitions involve risks, including those associated with integrating the operations, financial reporting, technologies and personnel of acquired companies; managing geographically dispersed operations; the diversion of management’s attention from other business concerns; the inherent risks in entering markets or lines of business in which we have either limited or no direct experience; unknown risks; and the potential loss of key employees, customers and strategic partners of acquired companies. We may not successfully integrate any businesses or technologies we may acquire in the future and may not achieve pre-acquisition anticipated revenue and cost benefits. Acquisitions may be expensive, time consuming and may strain our resources. Acquisitions may not be accretive to our earnings and may negatively impact our results of operations as a result of, among other things, the incurrence of debt, one-time write-offs of goodwill and amortization expenses of other intangible assets. In addition, future acquisitions that we may pursue could result in dilutive issuances of equity securities.

Risk Factors Relating to Our Common Stock

Because of our size, there may be little institutional interest or trading volume in, or research analyst coverage of, our common stock.

Public companies with relatively small market capitalizations have difficulty generating institutional interest or trading volume, which illiquidity can translate into price discounts as compared to industry peers or to the shares’ inherent value. In addition, the smaller size of our market capitalization after the separation and distribution, compared to the market capitalization of PNX prior to the separation and distribution, may result in the loss of research analyst coverage of us. The absence of research analyst coverage makes it difficult for a company to establish and hold a market following. Accordingly, our size could lead to our shares trading at prices that are significantly lower than our estimate of their inherent value.

Sales of a substantial number of shares of our common stock following the spin-off may adversely affect the market price of our common stock and the issuance of additional shares will dilute all other stockholdings.

Sales or distributions of a substantial number of shares of our common stock in the public market or otherwise following the spin-off, or the perception that such sales could occur, could adversely affect the market price of our common stock. After the spin-off, all of the shares of our common stock will be eligible for immediate resale in the public market. Investment criteria of certain investment funds and other holders of our common stock may result in the immediate sale of our common stock after the spin-off to the extent such stock no longer meets these criteria. Substantial selling of our common stock, whether as a result of the spin-off or otherwise, could adversely affect the market price of our common stock.

Our rights plan and applicable laws may discourage takeovers and business combinations that our stockholders might consider in their best interests.

We will be subject to the provisions of Delaware law described below regarding business combinations with interested stockholders.

Section 203 of the DGCL applies to a broad range of business combinations between a Delaware corporation and an interested stockholder. The Delaware law definition of “business combination” includes

 

22


Table of Contents

mergers, sales of assets, issuances of voting stock and certain other transactions. An “interested stockholder” is defined as any person who owns, directly or indirectly, 15% or more of the outstanding voting stock of a corporation.

Section 203 prohibits a corporation from engaging in a business combination with an interested stockholder for a period of three years following the date on which the stockholder became an interested stockholder, unless:

 

   

the board of directors approved the business combination before the stockholder became an interested stockholder, or the board of directors approved the transaction that resulted in the stockholder becoming an interested stockholder;

 

   

upon completion of the transaction which resulted in the stockholder becoming an interested stockholder, such stockholder owned at least 85% of the voting stock outstanding when the transaction began other than shares held by directors who are also officers and other than shares held by certain employee stock plans; or

 

   

the board of directors approved the business combination after the stockholder became an interested stockholder and the business combination was approved at a meeting by at least two-thirds of the outstanding voting stock not owned by such stockholder.

In addition, we intend to adopt a stockholders’ rights agreement. Under the agreement, if any person or group acquires, or begins a tender or exchange offer that could result in such person acquiring, 15% or more of our common stock, without approval by our Board under specified circumstances, our other stockholders will have the right to purchase shares of our common stock, or shares of the acquiring company, at a substantial discount to the public market price. See “Description of Our Capital Stock—Anti-Takeover Provisions—Rights Agreement.”

We cannot predict the price range or volatility of our common stock after the spin-off.

From time to time, the market price and volume of shares traded of companies in the asset management industry experience periods of significant volatility. Company-specific issues and general developments in the asset management industry or the economy may cause this volatility. The market price of our common stock may fluctuate in response to a number of events and factors, including:

 

   

general economic, market and political conditions;

 

   

quarterly variations in results of operations or results of operations that could be below the expectations of the public market analysts and investors;

 

   

changes in financial estimates and recommendations by securities analysts;

 

   

operating and market price performance of other companies that investors may deem comparable;

 

   

press releases or publicity relating to us or our competitors or relating to trends in our markets; and

 

   

purchases or sales of common stock or other securities by insiders.

In addition, broad market and industry fluctuations, as well as investor perception and the depth and liquidity of the market for our common stock, may adversely affect the trading price of our common stock, regardless of actual operating performance.

There can be no assurance as to the price at which our common stock will trade after the distribution date. Until an orderly market develops in our common stock, the price at which our common stock trades may fluctuate significantly and may be lower or higher than the price that would be expected for a more seasoned outstanding issue.

 

23


Table of Contents

There may not be an active trading market for shares of our common stock.

Prior to the spin-off, there has been no public trading market for shares of our common stock. We intend to apply to have our common stock authorized for listing on                  under the symbol “                .” We cannot predict the extent to which investor interest in the Company will lead to the development of an active trading market in our common stock or how liquid such a market might become. It is possible that, after the spin-off, an active trading market will not develop or continue and there can be no assurance as to the price at which our common stock will trade. The initial price of shares of our common stock may not be indicative of prices that will prevail in any future trading market.

In addition, because of the significant changes that will take place as a result of the spin-off, the trading market for each of our common stock and PNX common stock after the spin-off may be significantly different from that for PNX common stock prior to the spin-off. The market may view the Company and PNX as “new” companies after the spin-off and it is possible that neither of us will be the subject of significant research analyst coverage. The absence of significant research analyst coverage of the Company can adversely affect the market value and liquidity of our common stock.

We may not pay dividends on our common stock.

We do not plan on initially paying any cash dividends. However, the owners of our common stock may receive dividends when declared by our Board from funds legally available for the payment of dividends. All decisions regarding the declaration and payment of dividends will be evaluated from time to time in light of our financial condition, earnings, growth prospects, other uses of cash, funding requirements, applicable law and other factors our Board deems relevant. See “Dividend Policy.”

Risk Factors Relating to the Equity Investment

The agreements the Company has entered into in connection with the equity investment contain restrictions and limitations on our ability to obtain additional equity financing.

Following the spin-off, the approval of the holders of our Series B Convertible Preferred Stock will be required to effect certain significant issuances of equity securities of the Company or any of its controlled subsidiaries. Such required approval may restrict our ability to carry out our business objectives, take advantage of opportunities such as acquisitions that could supplement or grow our business and could have a material adverse effect on our ability to service our debt and operate our business.

The voting power of the holders of our convertible preferred stock may discourage third party acquisitions of the Company at a premium.

Holders of our Series B Convertible Preferred Stock will have the right to approve any merger, consolidation, acquisition, business combination, sale of all or substantially all of the assets of the Company or its subsidiaries, or any similar transaction or pledge of assets, in certain circumstances. This may have the effect of discouraging offers to acquire control of the Company and may preclude holders of Company common stock from receiving any premium above market price for their shares that may otherwise be offered in connection with any attempt to acquire control of the Company.

For more information, see “Description of our Capital Stock—Series B Voting Convertible Preferred Stock” and “Equity Investment.”

 

24


Table of Contents

SPECIAL NOTE ABOUT FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS

This information statement and other materials filed or to be filed by the Company and PNX, as well as information in oral statements or other written statements made or to be made by the Company and PNX, contain statements, including in this document under the captions “Summary,” “Risk Factors,” “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and “Business,” that are, or may be considered to be, forward-looking statements. All statements that are not historical facts, including statements about our beliefs or expectations, are forward-looking statements. You can identify these forward-looking statements by the use of forward-looking words such as “outlook,” “believes,” “expects,” “potential,” “continues,” “may,” “will,” “should,” “seeks,” “approximately,” “predicts,” “intends,” “plans,” “estimates,” “anticipates,” “foresees” or the negative version of those words or other comparable words and phrases. Any forward-looking statements contained in this information statement are based upon our historical performance and on current plans, estimates and expectations. The inclusion of this forward-looking information should not be regarded as a representation by us or any other person that the future plans, estimates or expectations contemplated by us will be achieved.

We believe that the factors that could cause our actual results to differ materially include but are not limited to the factors we describe in this information statement, including under “Risk Factors,” “The Spin-Off” and “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations.” The following list represents some, but not necessarily all, of the factors that could cause actual results to differ from historical results or those anticipated or predicted by these forward-looking statements:

 

   

expected benefits from the spin-off may not be fully realized;

 

   

our revenues and operating costs may be different than expected following the spin-off;

 

   

volatility in the securities markets;

 

   

competition in our industry;

 

   

difficulty in implementing our business strategy; and

 

   

our ability to attract and retain qualified personnel.

These factors should not be construed as exhaustive and should be read in conjunction with the other cautionary statements that are included in this information statement. If one or more of these or other risks or uncertainties materialize, or if our underlying assumptions prove to be incorrect, actual results may vary materially from what we projected. Consequently, actual events and results may vary significantly from those included in or contemplated or implied by our forward-looking statements. The forward-looking statements included in this information statement are made only as of the date of this information statement, and we undertake no obligation to publicly update or review any forward-looking statement made by us or on our behalf, whether as a result of new information, future developments, subsequent events or circumstances or otherwise.

 

25


Table of Contents

THE SPIN-OFF

General

PNX currently has two operating businesses: its Asset Management business and its Life and Annuity business. Historically, these two distinct business segments have been operated by PNX in different locations, utilizing separate management teams and pursuing different business strategies. The results of these segments, consistent with past practice, are regularly reviewed by PNX’s chief operating decision makers and the executive team to assess the performance of each segment and to determine resource allocations among the segments. As part of its periodic reviews of the businesses, the PNX board of directors and its management assessed the possibility of separating the Asset Management business and the Life and Annuity business, including through the spin-off of one of these business segments.

On February 7, 2008, PNX announced that its board of directors had decided to pursue the spin-off of the Asset Management business from PNX in order to enhance stockholder value.

We expect that the PNX board of directors will formally approve the spin-off and declare a dividend payable to each holder of record at the close of business on the record date of      share of our common stock for every one share of PNX common stock held by such holder at the close of business on the record date.

The separation of the Asset Management business from the Life and Annuity business, and the distribution of our common stock to holders of PNX common stock, will be accomplished through several steps, which PNX has determined based on a variety of contractual, structural, legal, tax and other reasons. As the final step in the spin-off, PNX will distribute 100% of our common stock to its stockholders (other than shares withheld to satisfy certain withholding obligations) such that a holder of each outstanding share of PNX common stock will be entitled to receive      share of our common stock.

Reasons for the Spin-Off

PNX’s board of directors believes that the spin-off will better position both the Company’s Asset Management business and PNX’s Life and Annuity business to achieve their strategic and financial objectives. The Company’s Asset Management business and PNX’s Life and Annuity business are fundamentally different types of businesses, and the separation of the two businesses will help highlight the unique qualities and values of these businesses for investors, better position each company to access the capital markets and allow each company to separately pursue distinct business strategies.

The board of directors of PNX considered the following potential benefits in making its determination to effect the spin-off:

 

   

allowing each company to separately pursue the business strategies that best suit its long-term interests;

 

   

creating separate companies that have different financial characteristics, which may appeal to different investor bases and allow for clarity on valuation of the respective businesses;

 

   

creating opportunities to more efficiently develop and finance ongoing operations and future acquisitions and investments;

 

   

allowing each company to establish an expense structure appropriate for its business and size; and

 

   

creating effective management incentives tied to each company’s performance.

Neither we nor PNX can assure you that, following the spin-off, any of these benefits will be realized to the extent anticipated or at all.

 

26


Table of Contents

PNX’s board of directors also considered a number of other factors in evaluating the spin-off, including:

 

   

the one-time and on-going time expenditures and financial costs of the spin-off to both PNX and the Company;

 

   

the possibility that PNX and the Company may not achieve the expense reductions anticipated in connection with the spin-off;

 

   

the possibility that the spin-off may affect the financial strength or senior debt ratings of PNX or its subsidiaries;

 

   

the potential tax consequences to PNX, PNX stockholders and the Company; and

 

   

the risk that the combined trading prices of our common stock and PNX common stock after the distribution may be lower than the trading price of PNX’s common stock before the distribution.

PNX’s board of directors concluded, however, that the potential benefits of the spin-off outweigh these factors and that spinning off the Asset Management business to PNX stockholders is appropriate and advisable for PNX and its stockholders.

Manner of Effecting the Spin-Off

The general terms and conditions relating to the spin-off will be set forth in a separation and distribution agreement between the Company and PNX. The spin-off will be effective at 11:59 p.m., New York City time on the distribution date, which is             , 2008. Prior to the distribution date, Phoenix Investment Management Company (“PIM”), our direct parent and a wholly owned subsidiary of PNX, will transfer all of our common stock to PNX, and we will transfer all of the stock and assets of Goodwin to PNX. As a result of the spin-off, each PNX stockholder will receive          share of our common stock for every one share of PNX common stock that such stockholder owns. In order to be entitled to receive shares of our common stock in the spin-off, PNX stockholders must be stockholders at the close of business of the New York Stock Exchange on the record date, which is             , 2008. The distribution of the shares of our common stock will be made in book-entry form. Each share of our common stock that is distributed will be validly issued, fully paid and nonassessable and free of preemptive rights. See “Description of Our Capital Stock.”

PNX stockholders will not be required to pay for shares of our common stock received in the spin-off or to surrender or exchange shares of PNX common stock in order to receive our common stock or to take any other action in connection with the spin-off. No vote of PNX stockholders is required or sought in connection with the spin-off and PNX stockholders have no appraisal rights in connection with the spin-off.

In addition, at the time of the spin-off, certain outstanding options to purchase PNX common stock and certain outstanding service vested restricted stock units held by our employees on the distribution date will be converted into options to purchase Company common stock and restricted stock units, respectively. The formula used in the conversion will be based on the applicable plans and accounting rules with the intention of keeping the holders in the same financial position immediately following the conversion as existed immediately before the conversion. See “Our Relationship With PNX After the Spin-Off—Employee Matters Agreement—Treatment of PNX Equity Awards Held by Company Employees.”

IN ORDER TO BE ENTITLED TO RECEIVE SHARES OF OUR COMMON STOCK IN THE SPIN-OFF, YOU MUST BE A HOLDER OF PNX COMMON STOCK AT THE CLOSE OF BUSINESS ON THE RECORD DATE.

 

27


Table of Contents

Results of the Spin-Off

After the spin-off, we will be an independent publicly traded company. Immediately following the spin-off, we expect to have approximately          beneficial holders of shares of our common stock, based on the number of beneficial stockholders of PNX common stock on             , 2008, and approximately              shares of our common stock outstanding. The actual number of shares to be distributed will be determined on the record date and will reflect any exercise of PNX options between the date the board of directors of PNX declares the dividend for the spin-off and the record date for the spin-off.

The Company and PNX will be parties to a number of agreements that govern the spin-off and the future relationship between our companies. For a more detailed description of these agreements, see “Our Relationship With PNX After the Spin-Off.”

Material U.S. Federal Income Tax Consequences of the Spin-Off

The following is a summary of certain U.S. federal income tax consequences to holders of PNX common stock. This summary does not discuss all tax considerations that may be relevant to stockholders in light of their particular circumstances, nor does it address the consequences to stockholders subject to special treatment under the U.S. federal income tax laws, such as tax-exempt entities, non-resident alien individuals, foreign entities, foreign trusts and estates and beneficiaries thereof, stockholders who acquire shares as compensation for services, insurance companies and dealers in securities. In addition, this summary does not address any state, local or foreign tax consequences.

All stockholders should consult their own tax advisors concerning the specific tax consequences of the distribution of our common stock to holders of PNX common stock in light of their particular circumstances. This summary is not intended to be, nor should it be construed to be, legal or tax advice to any particular investor.

Each taxable U.S. stockholder of PNX receiving shares of our common stock in the spin-off will be treated as if such stockholder had received a taxable distribution in an amount equal to the fair market value of our common stock received. Such distribution will be treated as a dividend to the extent of PNX’s current and accumulated earnings and profits, which subject to certain limitations may be taxable to individuals at a reduced rate of 15%. To the extent in excess of our earnings and profits, the receipt of our common stock will generally result in a reduction of a stockholder’s basis in PNX common stock and capital gain to the extent of any excess. Capital gains may be taxable at a reduced rate of 15% for individuals that have held their shares of PNX common stock for more than one year. A stockholder’s tax basis in our common stock will be equal to its fair market value at the time of the spin-off and the holding period in our common stock will begin the day after the spin-off.

In addition, non-U.S. stockholders may be subject to a withholding tax at a rate of 30% on the fair market value of the common stock received by them to the extent of their share of PNX’s earnings and profits, unless such non-U.S. stockholders provide to us or our distribution agent, as the case may be, a properly executed (i) Internal Revenue Service (“IRS”) Form W-8BEN (or other applicable form) claiming an exemption from or reduction in withholding under the benefit of an applicable income tax treaty or (ii) IRS Form W-8ECI (or other applicable form) stating that the amount treated as a taxable dividend is not subject to withholding tax because it is effectively connected with such non-U.S. stockholder’s conduct of a trade or business in the United States. Effectively connected dividends (and, if an income tax treaty applies, dividends attributable to a permanent establishment), although not subject to withholding tax, are subject to U.S. federal income tax at the same graduated rates applicable to U.S. persons, net of certain deductions and credits. In addition, dividends received by corporate non-U.S. stockholders that are effectively connected with a United States trade or business of the corporate non-U.S. stockholder (and, if an income tax treaty applies, are attributable to a corporate non-U.S. stockholder’s permanent establishment in the United States) may also be subject to a branch profits tax at a rate of 30% (or such lower rate as may be specified in an applicable income tax treaty).

 

28


Table of Contents

In addition, backup withholding may apply with respect to the amount of the distribution of our shares of common stock paid to a U.S. stockholder if such U.S. stockholder fails to provide a taxpayer identification number or certificate of other exempt status or fails to report in full dividend and interest income. In general, no backup withholding will be required with respect to the amount of the distribution of our shares of common stock paid to a non-U.S. stockholder if such non-U.S. stockholder establishes an exemption, for example, by properly certifying its non-U.S. status on an IRS Form W-8BEN (or other applicable form). Any amounts withheld under the backup withholding rules will be allowed as a refund or credit against a stockholder’s U.S. federal income tax liability provided the required information is furnished to the IRS. In general, information regarding the amount of the distribution of our shares of common stock paid to a stockholder will be reported to the IRS unless an exception applies.

If any withholding (including backup withholding) is required, shares of our common stock may be held back and sold on the market to the extent necessary to remit cash to the IRS and to pay brokerage and other costs.

Listing and Trading of Our Common Stock

There is currently no public market for our common stock. We intend to apply to have our common stock authorized for listing on                  under the symbol “                .” We anticipate that trading of our common stock will commence on a when-issued basis on or shortly before the record date. When-issued trading refers to a sale or purchase made conditionally because the security has been authorized but not yet issued. On the first trading day following the distribution date, when-issued trading with respect to our common stock will end and regular way trading will begin. Regular way trading refers to trading after a security has been issued and typically involves a transaction that settles on the third full business day following the date of the transaction.

We cannot predict what the trading prices for our common stock will be before or after the distribution date. In addition, we cannot predict any change that may occur in the trading price of PNX common stock as a result of the spin-off. In addition, until our common stock is fully distributed and an orderly market develops in our common stock, the price at which it trades may fluctuate significantly and may be lower or higher than the price that would be expected for a fully distributed issue. See “Risk Factors––Risks Relating to Our Common Stock.”

The shares of our common stock distributed to PNX stockholders will be freely transferable except for shares received by persons who may be deemed to be “affiliates” of the Company under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended (the “Securities Act”). Persons that may be considered affiliates of the Company after the spin-off generally include individuals or entities that control, are controlled by or are under common control with the Company.

Spin-Off Conditions and Termination

We expect that the spin-off will be effective on the distribution date,             , 2008, provided that, among other things:

 

   

the SEC has declared effective our Form 10, of which this information statement is a part, under the Exchange Act, and no stop order relating to our Form 10 is in effect;

 

   

the Company and PNX have received all material licenses, permits, estoppels, consents, approvals, authorizations, qualifications and orders of governmental authorities and third parties as are necessary for consummation of the spin-off; and

 

   

no action, proceeding or investigation shall have been instituted or threatened before any court or administrative body to restrain, enjoin or otherwise prevent the consummation of the spin-off, and no restraining order or injunction issued by any court of competent jurisdiction shall be in effect restraining the consummation of the spin-off.

 

29


Table of Contents

The fulfillment of the foregoing conditions will not create any obligation on PNX’s part to effect the spin-off, and the board of directors of PNX has reserved the right to amend, modify or abandon the spin-off and the related transactions at any time prior to the distribution date. The board of directors of PNX may also waive any of these conditions.

In addition, PNX has the right not to complete the spin-off and related transactions if, at any time, the PNX board of directors determines, in its sole discretion, that the distribution is not in the best interests of PNX and its stockholders.

Reason for Furnishing this Information Statement

This information statement is being furnished solely to provide information to PNX stockholders who will receive shares of our common stock in the spin-off. It is not and is not to be construed as an inducement or encouragement to buy or sell any securities. We believe that the information contained in this information statement is accurate as of the date set forth on the cover. Changes may occur after that date and neither we nor PNX undertakes any obligation to update the information except in the normal course of our respective public disclosure obligations.

 

30


Table of Contents

DIVIDEND POLICY

We do not plan on initially paying any cash dividends. However, the owners of our common stock may receive dividends when declared by our Board from funds legally available for the payment of dividends. All decisions regarding the declaration and payment of dividends will be evaluated from time to time in light of our financial condition, earnings, growth prospects, other uses of cash, funding requirements, applicable law and other factors our Board deems relevant.

 

31


Table of Contents

CAPITALIZATION

The following table sets forth the consolidated capitalization of the Company (i) on an actual basis as of September 30, 2008 and 2007 and (ii) on pro forma basis as of September 30, 2008 as adjusted to give effect to:

 

   

Transfer of the Goodwin business to PNX. Goodwin is a registered investment advisor with revenues of $22.9 million and $17.6 million, and operating expenses of $17.6 million and $13.2 million, for 2007 and the first nine months of 2008, respectively.

 

   

A one-time pre-payment of approximately $13.0 million on its $33.0 million intercompany note agreement with Phoenix Life Insurance Company. The Company expects there will be approximately $20.0 million of outstanding indebtedness on this note after the distribution is completed. The interest rate is expected to be re-set on this note agreement at LIBOR plus 400 basis points. A 100 basis point increase or decrease in the interest rate would result in additional or reduced annual interest expense of $0.2 million. The Company intends to obtain third-party financing to retire this obligation at the time of the distribution date.

 

   

Establishment of a $94.0 million valuation allowance against deferred tax assets, which were primarily generated by federal net operating losses, due to the uncertainty of future income that is necessary to realize these assets. Elimination of $4.9 million of intercompany taxes payable to PNX under the tax sharing agreement with PNX.

 

   

On October 31, 2008, we and our parent companies, PNX and Phoenix Investment Management Company, entered into a definitive agreement with Harris Bankcorp, Inc, a U.S. subsidiary of Bank of Montreal, pursuant to which it would acquire $45.0 million in convertible preferred stock of the Company representing a 23% equity position expected to be completed in connection with the spin-off.

You should read this table in conjunction with “Selected Consolidated Financial Data,” “Unaudited Pro Forma Consolidated Financial Data,” “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and the consolidated financial statements and related notes that are included elsewhere in this information statement.

 

     As of September 30, 2008     As of September 30, 2007  
     Actual     Pro Forma     Actual  
($ in millions)       

Debt

      

Current portion of notes payable to related parties

   $ 12.0     $ 10.0     $ 12.0  

Notes payable to related parties

     21.0       10.0       358.0  
                        

Total debt

     33.0       20.0       370.0  
                        

Convertible preferred equity

     —         45.0       —    

Stockholder’s Equity

      

Common stock, par value $.01 per share (             shares of common stock authorized,              shares issued and outstanding, actual and as adjusted)

     —         —         —    

Additional paid-in capital

     962.5       920.5       637.5  

Accumulated deficit

     (687.4 )     (761.1 )     (333.3 )

Accumulated other comprehensive loss

     (0.2 )     (0.2 )     —    
                        

Total stockholder’s equity

     274.9       159.2       304.2  
                        

Total Capitalization (Debt, convertible preferred equity and stockholder’s equity)

   $ 307.9     $ 224.2     $ 674.2  
                        

 

The number of shares of common stock shown to be outstanding excludes:

 

   

             shares issuable upon exercise of employee stock options to be granted by us concurrently with the spin-off at an option price equal to $             outstanding at a weighted average exercise price of $             per share as of             , 2008; and

 

   

             additional shares available for future issuance under our stock option and incentive plans as of             , 200    .

See “Management” and “Compensation of Executive Officers” for more information about options and restricted stock units that may be granted.

 

32


Table of Contents

SELECTED CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL DATA

The historical financial data has been derived from PNX’s consolidated financial statements using the historical results of operations and bases of the assets and liabilities of PNX’s businesses and give effect to allocations of expenses from PNX. The historical consolidated results of operations data set forth below does not reflect changes that will occur in the operations and funding of the Company as a result of our separation from PNX. The historical consolidated balance sheet data set forth below reflects the assets and liabilities that were or are expected to be transferred to us as a result of our separation from PNX.

The selected consolidated financial data should be read in conjunction with, and are qualified by reference to “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and the historical audited and interim unaudited financial statements and the accompanying notes thereto, which for certain periods are included elsewhere in this information statement. The results of operations and the balance sheet data for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2007 are derived from the audited consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this information statement and should be read in conjunction with those consolidated financial statements and the accompanying notes. The results of operations and the balance sheet data set forth below for the nine months ended September 30, 2008 and 2007 are derived from the unaudited consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this information statement. In management’s opinion, these unaudited consolidated financial statements have been prepared on substantially the same basis as the audited financial statements and include all adjustments, consisting only of normal recurring adjustments, necessary for a fair statement of the financial data for the periods presented. The results of operations for the interim period are not necessarily indicative of the operating results for the entire year or any future period.

 

     Nine Months
Ended September 30,
    Years Ended December 31,  
       2008(1)     2007(1)     2007(2)     2006(2)     2005(2)     2004(1)     2003(3)  
($ in millions)       

Results of Operations

              

Revenues

   $ 143.4     $ 170.0     $ 226.2     $ 218.6     $ 237.4     $ 273.7     $ 258.5  

Expenses

     589.6       166.1       220.9       262.5       256.5       262.8       265.9  

Operating income (loss)

     (446.2 )     3.9       5.3       (43.9 )     (19.1 )     10.9       (7.4 )

Net loss

     (349.9 )     (10.2 )     (14.2 )     (47.6 )     (33.1 )     (18.7 )     (23.8 )

Adjusted net income(4)

     13.6       13.5       16.5       18.6       17.3       10.9       15.4  
     As of September 30,     As of December 31,  
     2008(1)     2007(1)     2007(2)     2006(2)     2005(1)     2004(3)     2003(3)  

Balance Sheet Data

              

Cash and cash equivalents

   $ 22.6     $ 32.8     $ 36.8     $ 33.9     $ 23.8     $ 50.0     $ 38.7  

Intangible assets, net

     86.1       215.6       208.2       237.7       295.9       308.4       335.1  

Goodwill

     122.7       454.4       454.4       454.4       454.4       416.9       408.1  

Total assets

     365.0       760.7       752.2       781.1       825.0       834.0       843.5  

Accrued compensation and benefits

     25.1       28.0       34.1       35.3       30.1       31.9       39.6  

Notes payable to related parties

     33.0       370.0       42.0       436.3       508.1       460.0       446.0  

Total liabilities

     90.1       456.5       127.2       527.6       598.0       607.7       612.5  

Total stockholder’s equity

     274.9       304.2       624.9       253.5       227.0       226.3       231.0  

EBITDA(5)

    
7.8
 
    29.3       38.1       26.2       22.1       37.0       20.7  

Assets Under Management

              
($ in billions)                                           

Total assets(6)

   $ 41.2     $ 59.4     $ 55.5     $ 58.1     $ 50.9     $ 56.2     $ 59.2  

Third-party assets(6)

     28.7       46.5       42.5       45.0       37.4       42.9       46.3  

Pro forma assets(6)

     27.0       44.4       40.4       43.6       35.7       39.9       41.1  

 

Notes to Selected Consolidated Financial Data

 

(1) Derived from unaudited consolidated financial statements.

 

33


Table of Contents
(2) Derived from audited consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this information statement.

 

(3) Derived from audited consolidated financial statements not included elsewhere in this information statement.

 

(4) The supplemental performance measure “adjusted net income” is provided in addition to net income, but is not a substitute for net income determined in accordance with GAAP and may not be comparable to other non-GAAP performance measures, including measures of cash earnings or cash income, of other companies. Furthermore, adjusted net income is not a liquidity measure and should not be used in place of cash flow measures determined in accordance with GAAP. We consider adjusted net income an important measure of our financial performance, as we believe it best represents comparable operating performance of the primary asset management business. We consider this non-GAAP financial measure when evaluating the performance of the Company and believe the presentation of these amounts provides the reader with information necessary to better analyze the Company’s operations for the periods presented. See our definition of adjusted net income, as well as our reconciliation of net income to adjusted net income in “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations—Supplemental Performance Measures.”

 

(5) The supplemental measure “EBITDA”, a non-GAAP liquidity measure, defined as earnings before interest expense, income taxes, depreciation and amortization, is provided in addition to, but not as a substitute for, cash flow from operations. EBITDA, as calculated by us, may not be consistent with computations of EBITDA by other companies. As a measure of liquidity we believe that EBITDA is a useful indicator of our ability to service debt, make new investments and meet working capital requirements. We further believe that many investors use this information when analyzing the financial position of companies in the asset management industry.

 

(6) “Total assets” reflect all related party and unrelated party assets managed by the Company, including PNX’s general account. Historical financial results included in this information statement are presented using total assets as the basis of the Company’s operations. “Third-party assets” are total assets excluding PNX’s general account. Historical financial results of the Asset Management segment of PNX are presented using third-party assets as the basis of the segment’s operations. “Pro forma assets” exclude PNX’s general account as well as third-party institutional assets managed by Goodwin. Pro forma financial results included in this information statement, as well as the Company’s future results, are presented using pro forma assets as the basis of the Company’s operations.

 

34


Table of Contents

UNAUDITED PRO FORMA CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL DATA

The unaudited pro forma consolidated financial information presented below has been derived from our audited consolidated financial statements for the year ended December 31, 2007 and our unaudited consolidated interim financial statements for the nine months ended September 30, 2008. This unaudited pro forma consolidated financial information should be read in conjunction with “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations” and our consolidated financial statements and notes related to those consolidated financial statements included elsewhere in this information statement.

The unaudited pro forma consolidated statements of operations for the year ended December 31, 2007 and for the nine months ended September 30, 2008 have been prepared as if the distribution had occurred as of January 1, 2007. The unaudited pro forma consolidated balance sheet as of September 30, 2008 has been prepared as if the distribution occurred as of September 30, 2008. The pro forma adjustments are based on the best information available and assumptions that our management believes are reasonable. The unaudited pro forma consolidated financial information is for illustrative and informational purposes only and is not intended to represent or be indicative of what our results of operations or financial position would have been had the transactions contemplated by the separation and distribution and related transactions occurred on the dates indicated. The unaudited pro forma consolidated financial information also should not be considered representative of our future results of operations or financial position.

Our unaudited pro forma consolidated financial statements have been prepared to reflect adjustments to our historical financial information to give effect to the distribution of our common stock to the stockholders of PNX and the following transactions, as if these transactions had been completed at earlier dates:

 

   

Transfer of the Goodwin business to PNX. Goodwin is a registered investment advisor with revenues of $22.9 million and $17.6 million, and operating expenses of $17.6 million and $13.2 million, for 2007 and the first six months of 2008, respectively.

 

   

Operating costs related to human resources, facilities, corporate communications, compliance, corporate and staff, legal, internal audit and tax service were previously charged to the Company by PNX. Costs for these functions are now directly incurred by the Company. In addition, costs have been adjusted to include board of directors’ expenses, transfer agent fees and stock exchange listing fees. This resulted in net cost adjustments of ($4.7) million and ($1.9) million for 2007 and the first nine months of 2008, respectively.

 

   

A one-time pre-payment of approximately $13.0 million on its $33.0 million intercompany note agreement with Phoenix Life Insurance Company. The Company expects there will be approximately $20.0 million of outstanding indebtedness on this note after the distribution is completed. The interest rate is expected to be re-set on this note agreement at LIBOR plus 400 basis points. A 100 basis point increase or decrease in the interest rate would result in additional or reduced annual interest expense of $0.2 million.

 

   

On October 31, 2008, we and our parent companies, PNX and Phoenix Investment Management Company, entered into a definitive agreement with Harris Bankcorp, Inc, a U.S. subsidiary of Bank of Montreal, pursuant to which it would acquire $45.0 million in convertible preferred stock of the Company representing a 23% equity position expected to be completed in connection with the spin-off.

 

   

Establishment of a $94.0 million valuation allowance against deferred tax assets, which were primarily generated by federal net operating losses, due to the uncertainty of future income that is necessary to realize these assets. Elimination of $4.9 million of intercompany taxes payable to PNX under the tax sharing agreement with PNX.

The pro forma income statement adjustments do not give effect to:

 

   

Non-recurring separation costs primarily comprised of services to effect the transaction and establish two independent companies, primarily infrastructure-related.

See the notes to the unaudited pro forma consolidated financial information for a more detailed discussion of these events.

 

35


Table of Contents

The unaudited pro forma consolidated financial information has been prepared on a consolidated basis from the Company’s consolidated financial statements using the historical results of operations and bases of the assets and liabilities of Company businesses and give effect to allocations of expenses from PNX. The unaudited pro forma consolidated financial information is not indicative of our future performance or what our results of operations and financial position would have been if we had operated as an independent company during the periods presented or if the transactions reflected therein had actually occurred as of January 1, 2007 or September 30, 2008, as the case may be. The unaudited pro forma consolidated statement of operations may not reflect the complete impact of one-time and ongoing incremental costs required to operate as an independent publicly traded company. These pro formas do not reflect the costs of a new equity incentive plan that the Company expects to adopt after the distribution.

 

36


Table of Contents

Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.

Unaudited Pro Forma Consolidated Statements of Operations

For the Year Ended December 31, 2007

 

          Pro Forma Adjustments        
    Historical     Transferred
Business(1)
    Cost
Adjustments(2)
    Financing(3)     Pro-
Forma
 
$ in thousands, except per share data                              

Revenues

         

Investment management fees

  $ 158,998     $ (22,853 )       $ 136,145  

Distributor and service fees

    36,467             36,467  

Administration and underwriter fees

    23,354             23,354  

Other income and fees

    7,398             7,398  
                                       

Total revenues

    226,217       (22,853 )     —         —         203,364  
                                       

Operating Expenses

         

Employment expenses

    94,849       (10,246 )     (2,847 )       81,756  

Distribution and administrative expenses

    50,089             50,089  

Other operating expenses

    44,438       (4,645 )     (1,843 )       37,950  

Intangible asset impairment

    301             301  

Depreciation and other amortization

    1,095       (23 )         1,072  

Amortization of intangible assets

    30,097       (2,640 )         27,457  
                                       

Total operating expenses

    220,869       (17,554 )     (4,690 )     —         198,625  
                                       

Operating Gain

    5,348       (5,299 )     4,690       —         4,739  
                                       

Other Income (Expense)

         

Unrealized depreciation on trading securities

    (2,569 )           (2,569 )

Other income

    2,227             2,227  
                                       

Total other expense

    (342 )     —         —         —         (342 )
                                       

Interest (Expense) Income

         

Interest expense

    (26,739 )         25,397       (1,342 )

Interest income

    1,633             1,633  
                                       

Total interest expense (net)

    (25,106 )     —         —         25,397       291  
                                       

Income (Loss) Before Income Taxes

    (20,100 )     (5,299 )     4,690       25,397       4,688  

Income tax expense (benefit)

    (5,950 )     (2,173 )(4)     1,641 (4)     8,889 (4)     2,407  
                                       

Net Income (Loss)

  $ (14,150 )   $ (3,126 )   $ 3,049     $ 16,508     $ 2,281  
                                       

Weighted average shares outstanding

         
                                       

Earnings per share

         
                                       

 

See Notes to Unaudited Pro Forma Consolidated Statements of Operations

 

37


Table of Contents

Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.

Unaudited Pro Forma Consolidated Statements of Operations

For the Nine Months ended September 30, 2008

 

     Historical    Pro Forma Adjustments     Pro Forma
      Transferred
Business(1)
    Cost
Adjustments(2)
    Financing(3)    
($ in thousands, except per share data)     

Revenues

           

Investment management fees

   $ 102,211    $ (17,640)         $ 84,571

Distribution and service fees

     24,345            24,345

Administration and underwriter fees

     15,072            15,072

Other income and fees

     1,759            1,759
                                     

Total revenues

     143,387      (17,640)       —         —         125,747
                                     

Operating Expenses

           

Employment expenses

     65,802      (8,081)       (1,219)         56,502

Distribution and administration expenses

     33,586            33,586

Other operating expenses

     35,087      (3,160)       (708)         31,219

Goodwill asset impairment

     331,706            331,706

Intangible asset impairment

     100,492            100,492

Depreciation and other amortization

     549      (17)           532

Amortization of intangible assets

     22,413      (1,980)           20,433
                                     

Total operating expenses

     589,635      (13,238)       (1,927)       —         574,470
                                     

Operating Gain (Loss)

     (446,248)      (4,402)       1,927       —         (448,723)
                                     

Other Income (Expense)

           

Unrealized depreciation on trading securities

     (2,350)            (2,350)

Other income

     580            580
                                     

Total other income (expense), net

     (1,770)      —         —         —         (1,770)
                                     

Interest (Expense) Income

           

Interest expense

     (2,037)          1,031       (1,006)

Interest income

     675            675
                                     

Total interest income (expense), net

     (1,362)      —         —         1,031       (331)
                                     

Income (Loss) Before Income Taxes

     (449,380)      (4,402)       1,927       1,031       (450,824)

Income tax expense (benefit)

     (99,503)      (894) (4)     675 (4)     361 (4)     (99,361)
                                     

Net Income (Loss)

   $ (349,877)    $ (3,508)     $ 1,252     $ 670     $ (351,463)
                                     

Weighted average shares outstanding

           
                                     

Earnings per share

           
                                     

 

Notes to Unaudited Pro Forma Consolidated Statements of Operations

 

(1) Reflects the dividend of Goodwin to PNX. Thus, revenues of $22.9 million and $17.6 million, and expenses of $17.6 million and $13.2 million for 2007 and the first nine months of 2008, respectively, have been excluded from the pro forma consolidated statements of operations.

 

(2)

Reflects the cost adjustments to provide services related to human resources, facilities, corporate communications, compliance, corporate and staff, legal, internal audit and tax. These services were previously expense sharing costs charged to the Company by PNX. Costs for these functions will be directly

 

38


Table of Contents
 

incurred by the Company. In addition, costs have been adjusted to include board of directors’ expenses, transfer agent fees and stock exchange listing fees. The pro forma adjustments exclude the general overhead costs allocated to the Company by PNX that will no longer be incurred. Details of the cost adjustments are as follows:

 

     For the Year Ended December 31, 2007  
     Expense
Sharing Charge
   New Cost     Savings  
($ in millions)                  

Employment expenses:

       

Human resources—pension costs

   $ 1.4    $ —   (a)   $ 1.4  
                       
       

Other operating expenses:

       

Rent and occupancy

     2.1      0.8 (b)     1.3  

Human resources—administration

     2.5      0.8 (c)     1.7  

Corporate and staff

     1.3      0.2 (d)     1.1  

Corporate communications

     1.8      0.6 (e)     1.2  

Public company expenses

     —        1.9 (f)     (1.9 )
                       
     7.6      4.3       3.3  
                       

Total Cost Adjustments

   $ 9.0    $ 4.3     $ 4.7  
                       

 

     For the Nine Months Ended September 30, 2008  
     Expense
Sharing Charge
   New Cost     Savings  
($ in millions)                  

Employment expenses:

       

Human resources—pension costs

   $ 1.0    $ —   (a)   $ 1.0  
                       

Other operating expenses:

       

Rent and occupancy

     1.7      0.6 (b)     1.1  

Human resources—administration

     1.0      0.6 (c)     0.4  

Corporate and staff

     0.5      0.2 (d)     0.3  

Corporate communications

     0.9      0.4 (e)     0.5  

Public company expenses

     —        1.4 (f)     (1.4 )
                       
     4.1      3.2       0.9  
                       

Total Cost Adjustments

   $ 5.1    $ 3.2     $ 1.9  
                       
 
  (a) —For Human resources—pension costs, the Company eliminated expense sharing charges related to a defined benefit pension plan because it will not have such a plan.

 

  (b) —For Rent and occupancy expenses, the expense sharing charge reflects the cost for the corporate headquarters currently occupied in part by the Company. The pro forma expense, or new cost, reflects the square footage requirements of the Company at market rates. This rate is supported by a new, eight-year lease agreement already executed by the Company.

 

  (c) —For Human resources—administration, the expense sharing charge includes charges for human resource professionals as well as costs for employee programs and systems. The pro forma expense, or new cost, reflects executed contracts for payroll processing, 401(k) administration, stock plan administration, benefits administration as well as employment expenses for the personnel required to support the ongoing business function.

 

39


Table of Contents
  (d) —The Corporate and staff expense sharing charges include overhead expenses for PNX’s executive and public company costs. The pro forma expense, or new cost, presentation eliminates these expense sharing charges and separately identifies the Company’s public company expenses.

 

  (e) —For Corporate communications, the expense sharing charges include charges for communication personnel as well as costs associated with internal and external communication programs. The pro forma expense, or new cost, reflects the employment of an individual and the terms of an executed agreement with an external public relations company experienced in supporting public companies of similar size and scale to the Company.

 

  (f) —For Public company expenses, the pro forma expenses, or new cost, reflect the Company’s board of directors fees, exchange listing fees, transfer agent expenses and other incidental costs associated with being an independent public company.

 

(3) Reflects the following:

 

   

The PNX board of directors deemed it to be in the best interests of PNX and the Company to forgive the remaining intra-company indebtedness associated with these notes in the amount of $325.0 million, and all interest accrued thereon, and to terminate the outstanding credit instruments extended by PNX in favor of the Company effective December 31, 2007.

 

   

Reduction of interest expense as the Company intends to make a one-time pre-payment of approximately $13.0 million on its $33.0 million intercompany note agreement with Phoenix Life Insurance Company in connection with this spin-off transaction. The Company expects there will be approximately $20.0 million of outstanding indebtedness on this note after the distribution is completed. The current portion, defined as amounts payable within the next twelve months, is $10.0 million with the remaining $10.0 million payable through December 31, 2010. The Company intends to obtain third-party financing to retire this obligation at the time of the distribution date.

 

   

Reflects an agreement entered into on October 30, 2008 with Harris Bankcorp, Inc., a U.S. subsidiary of the Bank of Montreal, pursuant to which Harris will acquire $45.0 million of convertible preferred stock of the Company representing a 23% equity position of the Company on a fully-diluted basis. The agreement calls for a two-step closing process, the first step of which was completed on October 31, 2008 and the second step of which is expected to be completed in connection with the distribution.

 

(4) Reflects the tax attributes of the above pro forma adjustments at an incremental U.S. federal income tax rate of 35% and at varying state tax rates.

 

40


Table of Contents

Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.

Unaudited Pro Forma Consolidated Balance Sheet

As of September 30, 2008

 

          Pro Forma Adjustments        
    Historical     Transferred
Business(1)
    Intercompany
Financing(2)
    Preferred
Equity

Financing(3)
    Other(4)     Pro Forma  

Assets

           

Cash and cash equivalents

  $ 22,610     $ (100 )   $ (13,019 )   $ 35,000     $ —       $ 44,491  

Trading securities, at market value

    10,463       —         —         —         —         10,463  

Available-for-sale securities, at market value

    1,517       —         —         —         —         1,517  

Accounts receivables

    5,903       (590 )     —         —         —         5,313  

Related party receivables

    17,914       (85 )     —         —         —         17,829  

Prepaid expenses and other assets

    2,453       (410 )     —         —         —         2,043  
                                               

Total current assets

    60,860       (1,185 )     (13,019 )     35,000       —         81,656  
                                               

Deferred commissions

    2,212       —         —         —         —         2,212  

Furniture, equipment and leasehold Improvements, net

    4,054       (11 )     —         —         —         4,043  

Intangible assets, net

    86,119       (13,022 )     —         —         —         73,097  

Goodwill

    122,663       (11,900 )     —         —         —         110,763  

Deferred taxes, net

    86,643       (3,452 )     —         —         (83,191 )     —    

Long-term investments and other assets

    2,501       —         —         —         —         2,501  
                                               

Total assets

  $ 365,052     $ (29,570 )   $ (13,019 )   $ 35,000     $ (83,191 )   $ 274,272  
                                               

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity

           

Current liabilities

           

Accrued compensation and benefits

  $ 25,121     $ (2,872 )   $ —       $ —       $ 770     $ 23,019  

Accounts payable

    2,545       —         —         —         1,800       4,345  

Payables to related parties

    9,442       —         —         —         (9,442 )     —    

Securities sold short, at fair value

    698       —         —         —         —         698  

Income taxes payable

    8,148       (3,291 )     —         —         (4,857 )     —    

Other accrued liabilities

    3,648       —         —         —         —         3,648  

Broker dealer payable

    5,837       —         —         —         —         5,837  

Current portion of notes payable to related parties

    12,000       —         (2,000 )     —         —         10,000  
                                               

Total current liabilities

    67,439       (6,163 )     (2,000 )     —         (11,729 )     47,547  

Deferred taxes, net

    —         —         —         —         10,809       10,809  

Notes payable to referred parties

    21,019       —         (11,019 )     —         —         10,000  

Lease obligations and other long-term liabilities

    1,667       —         —         —         —         1,667  
                                               

Total liabilities

    90,125       (6,163 )     (13,019 )     —         (920 )     70,023  
                                               

Convertible preferred equity

    —         —         —         45,000       —         45,000  

Stockholders’ Equity

           

Common stock

    —         —         —         —         —         —    

Additional paid-in-capital

    962,546       (42,392 )     —         (10,000 )     10,329       920,483  

Accumulated deficit

    (687,450 )     18,985       —         —         (92,600 )     (761,065 )

Accumulated other comprehensive income (loss)

    (169 )     —         —         —         —         (169 )
                                               

Total stockholders’ equity

    274,927       (23,407 )     —         10,000       (82,271 )     159,249  
                                               

Total liabilities and stockholder’s equity

  $ 365,052     $ (29,570 )   $ (13,019 )   $ 35,000     $ (83,191 )   $ 274,272  
                                               

 

Notes to Unaudited Pro Forma Consolidated Balance Sheet

 

(1) Reflects the transfer of the Goodwin business to PNX.

 

41


Table of Contents
(2) Reflects a one-time pre-payment of approximately $13.0 million on its $33.0 million intercompany note agreement with Phoenix Life Insurance Company. The Company expects there will be approximately $20.0 million of outstanding indebtedness on this note after the distribution is completed. The current portion; defined as amounts payable within the next twelve months; is $10.0 million with the remaining $10.0 million payable through December 31, 2010. The Company intends to obtain third-party financing to retire this obligation at the time of the distribution date.

 

(3) On October 31, 2008, we and our parent companies, PNX and Phoenix Investment Management Company, entered into a definitive agreement with Harris Bankcorp, Inc, a U.S. subsidiary of Bank of Montreal, pursuant to which it would acquire $45.0 million in convertible preferred stock of the Company representing a 23% equity position expected to be completed in connection with the spin-off.

 

(4) Reflects settlement of intercompany payables in connection with the spin-off as well as a valuation allowance of $94.0 million against deferred tax assets. Intercompany payables are settled by either cash or, in some instances, forgiven. Intercompany payables settled in cash consist of services provided under intercompany shared services agreement. The establishment of the valuation allowance against deferred tax assets, which were generated primarily by federal net operating losses, was due to the uncertainty of future income that is necessary to realize these assets. This adjustment was made when considering the Company on a separate return basis, as the Company was previously included in a tax sharing agreement with PNX.

Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.

Pro Forma Adjusted Net Income Reconciliation Schedule

 

     Year Ended December 31, 2007  
           Pro Forma Adjustments       
       Historical     Transferred
Business
    Cost
Adjustments
   Financing    Pro Forma  
($ in millions)       

Net income (loss)

   $ (14.2 )   $ (3.1 )   $ 3.1    $ 16.5    $ 2.3  

Add back:

            

Intangible asset amortization

     30.1       (2.6 )     —        —        27.5  

Intangible asset impairment

     0.3       —         —        —        0.3  

Intangible asset related deferred taxes

     0.3       0.9       —        —        1.2  
                                      

Adjusted net income(1)

   $ 16.5     $ (4.8 )   $ 3.1    $ 16.5    $ 31.3  
                                      
     Nine Months Ended September 30, 2008  
           Pro Forma Adjustments       
     Historical     Transferred
Business
    Cost
Adjustments
   Financing    Pro Forma  
($ in millions)       

Net income (loss)

   $ (349.9 )   $ (3.5 )   $ 1.3    $ 0.6    $ (351.5 )

Add back:

            

Intangible asset amortization

     22.4       (2.0 )     —        —        20.4  

Intangible asset impairment

     100.5       —         —        —        100.5  

Goodwill impairment

   $ 331.7       —         —        —      $ 331.7  

Intangible asset related deferred taxes

     (91.1 )     0.8       —        —        (90.3 )
                                      

Adjusted net income(1)

   $ 13.6     $ (4.7 )   $ 1.3    $ 0.6    $ 10.8  
                                      

 

Notes to Pro Forma Adjusted Net Income Reconciliation Schedule

 

(1)

As supplemental information, we provide a non-GAAP performance measure that we refer to as adjusted net income. This measure is provided in addition to, but not as a substitute for, net income determined in accordance with GAAP. Adjusted net income is defined as net income (loss) plus amortization and impairments of intangible assets and deferred taxes related to those intangible assets. We consider adjusted net income an important measure of our financial performance as we believe it most accurately represents

 

42


Table of Contents
 

operating performance of the Company adjusted for non-cash expenses related to acquisitions. We consider this non-GAAP financial measure to be useful to investors because it is an important metric in measuring economic performance of asset management companies, as an indicator of value and because it facilitates comparison of our operating results with the results of other asset management firms that have not engaged in significant acquisitions. Adjusted net income is also used by the Company as one of the inputs for calculating performance-based incentives. We have also excluded restructuring and severance charges from the calculation of adjusted net income to provide a better indication of the Company’s ongoing operations. Because of their transformational and special nature, we believe that excluding the restructuring and severance charges best represents the Company’s ongoing operating performance and provides the basis for the measure that was used in calculating performance-based management incentives. Please review our definition of adjusted net income, as well as our reconciliation of adjusted net income to net income, included in “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations—Supplemental Performance Measure.”

 

43


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT’S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF

FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS

The following discussion of our financial condition and results of operations should be read in conjunction with our consolidated financial statements and related notes which appear elsewhere in this information statement.

This discussion contains forward-looking statements that involve risks and uncertainties. See “Special Note About Forward-Looking Statements” for more information. Actual results could differ materially from those anticipated in these forward-looking statements as a result of various factors, including those discussed below and elsewhere in this information statement, particularly under the heading “Risk Factors.”

On October 30, 2008, we and our parent companies, PNX and Phoenix Investment Management Company, entered into an Investment and Contribution Agreement (the “Agreement”) with Harris Bankcorp, Inc. (“Harris Bankcorp”), a U.S. subsidiary of Bank of Montreal, pursuant to which Harris Bankcorp would acquire $45.0 million in convertible preferred stock of the Company, representing a 23% equity position in us and our direct and wholly owned subsidiary. The agreement calls for a two-step closing process, the first step of which was completed effective October 31, 2008. The second step of the transaction, which is subject to certain regulatory and other customary conditions, is expected to be completed in connection with the spin-off. In certain cases, Harris Bankcorp can put the securities to us. See Note 4 to our September 30, 2008 unaudited consolidated financial statements for additional information concerning Harris Bankcorp’s put option.

Overview

We are currently a wholly owned subsidiary of PNX. PNX has determined to spin off the Company by distributing all of our common stock to the stockholders of PNX as a dividend. We will enter into a separation and distribution agreement with PNX (the “Separation Agreement”) containing the key provisions relating to our separation from PNX. The Separation Agreement identifies the assets to be transferred, liabilities to be assumed and contracts to be assigned to us. Our capital structure will be changed significantly at the date of our separation from PNX. See the related discussion in “Capitalization.”

Our Business

We are a provider of investment management products and services to individuals and institutions. We operate a multi-manager asset management business, comprising a number of individual affiliated managers, each having its own distinct investment style, autonomous investment process and brand. We believe our customers value this approach, especially institutional customers who appreciate individual managers with distinctive cultures and styles.

Investors have an array of needs driven by factors such as market conditions, risk tolerance and investment goals. A key element of our business is to offer a variety of investment styles and multiple disciplines to meet those needs. To that end, for our mutual funds, we supplement the investment capabilities of our affiliated managers with those of select unaffiliated sub-advisors. We do that by partnering with these managers whose strategies are not typically available to retail mutual fund customers.

We provide our products in a number of forms and through multiple distribution channels. Our retail products include open-end mutual funds, closed-end funds and separately managed accounts. Our fund family of over 50 open-end funds is distributed primarily through intermediaries. Our five closed-end funds trade on the New York Stock Exchange. Retail separately managed accounts are comprised of intermediary programs sponsored and distributed by unaffiliated brokerage firms, and private client services, originated and maintained by our affiliated managers. We also manage institutional accounts for corporations, multi-employer retirement funds and foundations, endowments, special purpose funds and other types of institutions. Our earnings are primarily driven by asset-based investment management fees charged on these various products. These fees are based on a percentage of assets under management and are calculated using either daily or weekly average assets or assets at the end of the quarter.

 

44


Table of Contents

Our Profitability Drivers

Our profitability is primarily driven by the following factors:

 

   

Investment management fees earned on assets under management. Depending on the product, these fees can be based on average daily market values, beginning-of-quarter market values, or outstanding principal values of the assets being managed. Assets under management are principally driven by the following factors:

 

  ¡  

sales less redemptions (net flows); and

 

  ¡  

absolute and relative performance.

 

   

Operating expenses, including:

 

  ¡  

base compensation;

 

  ¡  

variable incentive compensation;

 

  ¡  

distribution expenses; and

 

  ¡  

administrative expenses.

 

   

Amortization of intangibles, principally related to acquired investment contracts.

Summary Analysis of Results of Operations

Nine months ended September 30, 2008 compared to nine months ended September 30, 2007. Our results declined to a net loss of $349.9 million in the first nine months of 2008 compared with a net loss of $10.2 million in the first nine months of 2007. This was primarily driven by $432.2 million non-cash goodwill and intangible asset impairment charges. Revenues decreased by $26.6 million primarily due to a decrease in average assets under management as a result of market declines in the second half of 2007 and the first nine months of 2008 combined with net outflows of assets since the first six months of 2007. Operating expenses, excluding the impairment charges, decreased $8.6 million due to lower employment and distribution expenses, partially offset by increases in certain other expenses.

Year ended December 31, 2007 compared to year ended December 31, 2006. Our results improved to a net loss of $14.2 million in 2007 from a net loss of $47.6 million in 2006. This was primarily driven by a $32.5 million non-cash impairment charge on intangible assets recorded in 2006 as compared to a $0.3 million impairment charge in 2007. Restructuring and severance charges in 2006 of $13.6 million did not recur in 2007. Revenues increased $7.6 million mainly from higher mutual fund management and administrative fees. Total assets under management at December 31, 2007 were $55.5 billion including $13.0 billion of PNX general account assets, down slightly from the prior year end primarily due to net redemptions in our separately managed accounts and institutional products. Net outflows were $0.6 billion in 2007, a significant improvement over net outflows of $4.0 billion in 2006.

Year ended December 31, 2006 compared to year ended December 31, 2005. Our results declined to a net loss of $47.6 million in 2006 compared with a net loss of $33.1 million in 2005. This was primarily driven by a higher intangible asset non-cash impairment charge of $32.5 million in 2006 as compared to an $11.1 million intangible asset impairment in 2005. In addition, investment management fees were $27.5 million lower in 2006, due to a shift in assets to those generating lower management fees. Partially offsetting these reduced fees were lower employment expenses.

Significant Product Introductions and Developments

The following events are important components in developing our multi-manager, multiple distribution channel business model over the past several years:

 

45


Table of Contents

Adoption of Mid-Cap Value Fund and Foreign Opportunities Fund

In October 2004, we adopted the Mid-Cap Value Fund with $17 million in assets under management. The fund grew to $1 billion in 2007, before it was partially closed to new investors, and had $546 million in assets under management at September 30, 2008. In June 2005, we adopted the Foreign Opportunities Fund and grew the assets under management from $86 million at the time of adoption to approximately $1.1 billion at September 30, 2008.

Completion of Purchase of Remaining Interest in Two Affiliates

In May 2005, we completed the acquisition of the minority interest in SCM Advisors, LLC, formerly Seneca Capital Management (“SCM”), thereby increasing our ownership to 100%. SCM manages a full spectrum of fixed income investment products, primarily institutional.

In September 2005, we completed the acquisition of the minority interest in Kayne Anderson Rudnick Investment Management, LLC (“KAR”). KAR’s expertise is primarily in separately managed accounts and private client arenas, as well as in mutual funds and institutional accounts.

See Note 3 to our consolidated financial statements in this information statement for more information.

Introduction of Alternative Investment Fund-of-Funds

In November 2005, we introduced the Diversifier fund, an addition to our asset allocation fund-of-funds options. The Diversifier fund offers investors the opportunity to hold interests in a number our alternative investment options, such as REITs, global utilities and market neutral strategies, as well as several specialized exchange-traded funds (“ETFs”).

Strategic Alliance with Harris Investment Management, Inc.

In May 2006, we acquired the rights to advise, distribute and administer the Insight Funds (the “Insight Funds”) from Harris Investment Management, Inc. (“Harris”). This adoption added 18 funds to our existing mutual fund product line, including a diverse mix of equity, international, fixed income and money market funds, with an additional $10.2 billion in assets under management, including $7.0 billion of money market funds. See Note 3 to our consolidated financial statements in this information statement for more information.

Assets Under Management

Our total assets under management as of September 30, 2008 were $41.2 billion, which includes the $14.2 billion of fixed income assets managed by Goodwin that will not be managed by us after the distribution date. The revenues earned from the $14.2 billion managed by Goodwin have been removed from our results in the pro forma information included in “Unaudited Pro Forma Consolidated Financial Data.”

 

46


Table of Contents

Assets Under Management by Product

The following table presents our assets under management by product for the periods indicated:

 

     As of September 30,    As of December 31,
         2008            2007            2007            2006            2005    
($ in billions)                         

Retail assets

              

Mutual fund assets

              

Money market funds

   $ 4.4    $ 7.5    $ 6.2    $ 5.7    $ 0.1

Long-term open-end funds

     8.9      11.7      11.0      11.3      7.8

Closed-end funds

     4.4      5.1      5.1      4.9      4.2
                                  

Total mutual fund assets

     17.7      24.3      22.3      21.9      12.1
                                  

Separately managed accounts

              

Intermediary sponsored programs

     2.0      3.0      2.7      3.8      6.1

Private client accounts

     1.8      3.0      2.7      3.0      3.3
                                  

Total managed account assets

     3.8      6.0      5.4      6.8      9.4
                                  

Total retail assets

     21.5      30.3      27.7      28.7      21.5

Institutional assets(1)

     5.9      11.3      11.2      12.3      13.4

Structured finance products(2)

     1.3      4.9      3.6      4.0      2.5
                                  

Third-party assets

     28.7      46.5      42.5      45.0      37.4

PNX General Account

     12.5      12.9      13.0      13.1      13.5
                                  

Total

   $ 41.2    $ 59.4    $ 55.5    $ 58.1    $ 50.9
                                  

 

(1) Includes Goodwin third-party assets of $1.5, $1.8, $1.8, $1.1 and $1.2 as of September 30, 2008, September 30, 2007, December 31, 2007, December 31, 2006 and December 31, 2005, respectively.

 

(2) Includes Goodwin third-party assets of $0.2, $0.3, $0.3, $0.3 and $0.5 as of September 30, 2008, September 30, 2007, December 31, 2007, December 31, 2006 and December 31, 2005, respectively.

 

47


Table of Contents

Asset Flows by Product

The following table summarizes our asset flows by product for the periods indicated:

 

     Nine Months
Ended September 30,
    Years Ended December 31,  
         2008             2007             2007             2006             2005      
($ in billions)                               

Retail Products

          

Mutual Funds

          

Beginning balance

   $ 22.3     $ 21.9     $ 21.9     $ 12.1     $ 12.3  

Sales

     2.0       3.0       3.6       2.6       2.0  

Redemptions

     (2.4 )     (2.8 )     (3.9 )     (2.8 )     (2.4 )
                                        

Net flows

     (0.4 )     0.2       (0.3 )     (0.2 )     (0.4 )

Market appreciation (depreciation)

     (2.3 )     0.5       0.3       1.5       0.1  

Money market funds net change in assets under management

     (1.8 )     1.8       0.5       (1.4 )     —    

Acquisitions (dispositions) / Other

     (0.1 )     (0.1 )     (0.1 )     9.9       0.1  
                                        

Change in assets under management

     (4.6 )     2.4       0.4       9.8       (0.2 )
                                        

Ending balance

   $ 17.7     $ 24.3     $ 22.3     $ 21.9     $ 12.1  
                                        

Separately Managed Accounts

          

Beginning balance

   $ 5.4     $ 6.8     $ 6.8     $ 9.4     $ 13.5  

Sales

     0.7       1.0       1.2       1.1       1.8  

Redemptions

     (1.7 )     (2.1 )     (2.6 )     (4.3 )     (5.7 )
                                        

Net flows

     (1.0 )     (1.1 )     (1.4 )     (3.2 )     (3.9 )

Market appreciation (depreciation)

     (0.6 )     0.3       0.1       0.6       (0.1 )

Acquisitions (dispositions) / Other

     —         —         (0.1 )     —         (0.1 )
                                        

Change in assets under management

     (1.6 )     (0.8 )     (1.4 )     (2.6 )     (4.1 )
                                        

Ending balance

   $ 3.8     $ 6.0     $ 5.4     $ 6.8     $ 9.4  
                                        

Institutional Products

          

Beginning balance

   $ 11.2     $ 12.3     $ 12.3     $ 13.4     $ 14.2  

Sales

     0.5       0.9       1.2       1.6       5.5  

Redemptions

     (5.5 )     (1.5 )     (2.0 )     (3.5 )     (6.6 )
                                        

Net flows

     (5.0 )     (0.6 )     (0.8 )     (1.9 )     (1.1 )

Market appreciation (depreciation)

     (0.3 )     0.5       0.6       1.1       0.4  

Acquisitions (dispositions) / Other

     —         (0.9 )     (0.9 )     (0.3 )     (0.1 )
                                        

Change in assets under management

     (5.3 )     (1.0 )     (1.1 )     (1.1 )     (0.8 )
                                        

Ending balance(1)

   $ 5.9     $ 11.3     $ 11.2     $ 12.3     $ 13.4  
                                        

Structured Finance Products

          

Beginning balance

   $ 3.6     $ 4.0     $ 4.0     $ 2.5     $ 2.9  

Sales

     —         2.3       2.3       2.4       1.0  

Redemptions

     (1.2 )     (0.4 )     (0.4 )     (1.1 )     (1.2 )
                                        

Net flows

     (1.2 )     1.9       1.9       1.3       (0.2 )

Market appreciation (depreciation)

     (1.1 )     (1.0 )     (2.3 )     0.2       (0.2 )
                                        

Change in assets under management

     (2.3 )     0.9       (0.4 )     1.5       (0.4 )
                                        

Ending balance(2)

   $ 1.3     $ 4.9     $ 3.6     $ 4.0     $ 2.5  
                                        

General Account

          

Ending balance

   $ 12.5     $ 12.9     $ 13.0     $ 13.1     $ 13.5  
                                        

Total

          

Beginning balance

   $ 55.5     $ 58.1     $ 58.1     $ 50.9     $ 56.2  

Sales

     3.2       7.2       8.3       7.7       10.3  

Redemptions

    
(10.8
)
    (6.8 )     (8.9 )     (11.7 )     (15.9 )
                                        

Net flows

     (7.6 )     0.4       (0.6 )     (4.0 )     (5.6 )

Market appreciation (depreciation)

     (4.3 )     0.3       (1.3 )     3.4       0.2  

Money market net change

     (1.8 )     1.8       0.5       (1.4 )     —    

Acquisitions (dispositions) / Other

     (0.6 )     (1.2 )     (1.2 )     9.2       0.1  
                                        

Change in assets under management

     (14.3 )     1.3       (2.6 )     7.2       (5.3 )
                                        

Ending balance

   $ 41.2     $ 59.4     $ 55.5     $ 58.1     $ 50.9  
                                        

 

(1) Includes Goodwin third-party assets of $1.5, $1.8, $1.8, $1.1 and $1.2 as of September 30, 2008, September 30, 2007, December 31, 2007, December 31, 2006 and December 31, 2005, respectively.

 

(2) Includes Goodwin third-party assets of $0.2, $0.3, $0.3, $0.3 and $0.5 as of September 30, 2008, September 30, 2007, December 31, 2007, December 31, 2006 and December 31, 2005, respectively.

 

48


Table of Contents

Assets Under Management by Investment Category

The following table summarizes our assets under management by investment category:

 

     As of September 30,    As of December 31,
         2008            2007            2007            2006            2005    
($ in billions)     

Investment Categories

              

Equity assets

   $ 12.6    $ 18.1    $ 16.7    $ 19.2    $ 18.9

Fixed income assets(1)

     11.7      20.9      19.6      20.1      18.3

Money market assets

     4.4      7.5      6.2      5.7      0.2
                                  

Third-Party Assets

     28.7      46.5      42.5      45.0      37.4

PNX General Account

     12.5      12.9      13.0      13.1      13.5
                                  

Total

   $ 41.2    $ 59.4    $ 55.5    $ 58.1    $ 50.9
                                  

 

(1) Includes Goodwin third-party assets of $1.7, $2.1, $2.1, $1.4 and $1.7 as of September 30, 2008, September 30, 2007, December 31, 2007, December 31, 2006 and December 31, 2005, respectively.

Nine months ended September 30, 2008 compared to nine months ended September 30, 2007 . At September 30, 2008, we managed $41.2 billion in total assets, a decrease of $18.2 billion from September 30, 2007. This was primarily driven by net outflows totaling $8.6 billion over the prior four quarters, of which $5.2 billion was in institutional accounts, combined with market depreciation of $5.9 billion and a decrease in money market assets of $3.1 billion over that period. Of the $5.2 billion of institutional net redemptions, $3.7 billion related to a terminated relationship with one institutional client, a general account mandate for a non-affiliated insurance company. The fees earned on these assets were approximately five basis points. Of the $5.9 billion market depreciation, $2.4 billion related to structured finance products while $3.5 billion related to other products. This was the result of the significant downturn in the securities markets.

Both equity assets and fixed income assets were lower driven by market depreciation in the fourth quarter of 2007 and the first nine months of 2008, as well as structured finance market depreciation over the four quarters ending September 30, 2008. Also contributing to the decreases in equity assets were net outflows in separately managed accounts. Fixed income assets declined further due to net outflows in the first quarter of 2008 related to a terminated relationship with one institutional client.

Year ended December 31, 2007 compared to year ended December 31, 2006 . At December 31, 2007, we managed $55.5 billion in total assets, a decrease of $2.6 billion from December 31, 2006. This decrease was driven by unfavorable net flows in our institutional and separately managed account products as well as market depreciation in structured finance products. Net outflows in institutional and separately managed accounts were related to underperformance in certain strategies. Market depreciation in structured finance products was driven by the significant deterioration of the fixed income market in the second half of 2007. Partially offsetting these decreases in assets under management was $1.0 billion of market appreciation, excluding structured finance products and positive net flows in structured finance products due to the three new products issued during the year. Each of these issuances occurred in the first two quarters of 2007, before significant declines in value of these securities took hold. Despite a decrease in our long-term open-end mutual fund assets at period end, we had sales of $3.6 billion in 2007 driven in large part by the successful fund adoptions of the Foreign Opportunities Fund and Mid Cap Value Fund. Also contributing to sales was focused wholesaling efforts. However, these increases were offset by higher redemptions in funds affected by sector preferences, such as real estate.

Assets under management by investment category changed slightly as equity assets became less attractive for investors given the market volatility that was seen in the second half of 2007 combined with the underperformance of certain equity strategies within our separately managed account platform, resulting in net outflows of $1.4 billion.

 

49


Table of Contents

Year ended December 31, 2006 compared to year ended December 31, 2005 . At December 31, 2006, we managed $58.1 billion in total assets, an increase of $7.2 billion from December 31, 2005. This increase was driven by the adoption of the Insight Funds in May 2006, which added $10.2 billion to our assets under management, consisting of $7.0 billion in money market funds and $3.2 billion in long-term equity and fixed income funds. Also contributing to the increase in total assets was market appreciation of $3.4 billion in 2006. We also had positive net flows in structured finance products as a result of three issuances in 2006. Partially offsetting these increases were net outflows in our separately managed accounts and institutional products. The net outflows were driven by underperforming large cap equity strategies that have since largely been redeemed. Net outflows in money market funds were driven by institutional investors who use these funds for cash management purposes.

Assets under management by investment category changed significantly in 2006 due to the adoption of the Insight Funds which included $7.0 billion, $2.3 billion and $0.9 billion of money market, equity and fixed income assets, respectively, at the time of acquisition. Fixed income assets also increased due to the three structured finance product issuances during the period.

Average Fee Earning Assets Under Management and Average Basis Points

The average fee earning assets under management and average fees earned expressed in basis points presented in the table below are intended to provide information in the analysis of our asset based revenue and distribution expenses. Money market and long-term mutual fund fees are calculated based on either average daily net assets or average weekly net assets. Separately managed accounts and institutional fees are generally calculated based on beginning of period, average or end of period asset values. Structured finance product fees are calculated based on a combination of the underlying cash flows and the principal value of the product.

 

     As of September 30,    As of December 31,
       Average Fees
Earned in 2008
Expressed in BPS
   2008    2007      2007        2006        2005  
($ in billions)                              

Products

                 

Money market mutual funds

   10.7    $ 5.9    $ 6.0    $ 6.2    $ 4.3    $ 0.1

Long-term mutual funds

   61.1      15.2      16.7      17.0      14.2      15.0

Separately managed accounts

   46.3      4.8      6.5      6.4      8.1      10.4

Institutional(1)

   25.8      7.9      11.9      11.7      12.7      14.1

Structured finance products(2)

   19.7      2.8      5.5      5.4      2.7      1.7
                                     

Third-Party Assets

   40.3      36.6      46.6      46.7      42.0      41.3

PNX General Account

   9.6      12.8      13.1      13.1      13.3      13.4
                                     

Total

   32.3    $ 49.4    $ 59.7    $ 59.8    $ 55.3    $ 54.7
                                     

 

(1) Includes Goodwin third-party assets of $1.5, $1.8, $1.8, $1.1 and $1.2 as of September 30, 2008, September 30, 2007, December 31, 2007, December 31, 2006 and December 31, 2005, respectively.

 

(2) Includes Goodwin third-party assets of $0.2, $0.3, $0.3, $0.3 and $0.5 as of September 30, 2008, September 30, 2007, December 31, 2007, December 31, 2006 and December 31, 2005, respectively.

 

50


Table of Contents

First Nine Months Results of Operations

Summary Financial Data

 

     Nine Months Ended September 30,     Increase (Decrease)  
         2008             2007             2008 vs. 2007      
($ in millions)       

Results of Operations

      

Investment management fees

   $ 102.2     $ 119.5     $ (17.3 )

Other revenue

     41.2       50.5       (9.3 )
                        

Total revenues

     143.4       170.0       (26.6 )
                        

Operating expenses

     135.0       143.5       (8.5 )

Goodwill and intangible asset impairment

     432.2       —         432.2  

Intangible asset amortization

     22.4       22.6       (0.2 )
                        

Total expenses

     589.6       166.1       423.5  
                        

Operating (loss) income

     (446.2 )     3.9       (450.1 )

Other income (expense)

     (1.8 )     0.6       (2.4 )

Interest expense, net

     (1.4 )     (18.9 )     (17.5 )
                        

Income (loss) before income taxes

     (449.4 )     (14.4 )     (435.0 )

Income tax benefit

     (99.5 )     (4.2 )     95.3  
                        

Net income (loss)

   $ (349.9 )   $ (10.2 )   $ (339.7 )
                        

Revenues

The decrease in revenues was primarily a result of a decrease in average assets under management due in large part to the volatility in the securities markets in the second half of 2007 and the first nine months of 2008 and net outflows of assets occurring after the third quarter of 2007. Revenues by source were as follows:

 

     Nine Months Ended September 30,    Increase (Decrease)  
            2008                  2007           2008 vs. 2007  
($ in millions)       

Investment management fees

        

Mutual funds

   $ 56.8    $ 63.5    $ (6.7 )

Separately managed accounts

     16.7      22.7      (6.0 )

Institutional accounts

     15.3      18.7      (3.4 )

Structured finance products

     4.2      6.0      (1.8 )
                      

Third-party management fees

     93.0      110.9      (17.9 )

PNX general account

     9.2      8.6      0.6  
                      

Total investment management fees

     102.2      119.5      (17.3 )

Distribution and service fees

     24.3      27.1      (2.8 )

Administration and transfer agent fees

     15.1      17.5      (2.4 )

Other income and fees

     1.8      5.9      (4.1 )
                      

Total revenues

   $ 143.4    $ 170.0    $ (26.6 )
                      

Investment Management Fees

Investment management fees decreased primarily due to a decrease in average fee earning assets under management. Average fee earning assets under management decreased primarily as a result of all products experiencing net outflows during the four quarters ending September 30, 2008 combined with market depreciation.

 

51


Table of Contents

Distribution and Service Fees

Distribution and service fees decreased as these fees are asset based and, therefore, reflect the decrease in our average assets under management in the first nine months of 2008 as compared the same period in the prior year. The decrease in fees was partially offset by a corresponding decrease in trail commissions, which are a component of distribution expenses (“trail commissions”). Trail commissions represent asset-based payments to our distribution partners based on a percentage of our assets under management.

Administration and Transfer Agent Fees

Administration and transfer agent fees decreased as a result of a $1.1 million decrease in fund administration fees and a $1.0 million decrease in transfer agent fees in the first nine months of 2008 as compared to the same period in 2007. Fund administration fees decreased due to the decline in the average assets under management upon which these fees are based. Transfer agent fees decreased due to a decline in the number of accounts and a change in the contract with the service provider which also reduced our cost to provide these services. Additionally, underwriting fees decreased $0.3 million due to a decrease in sales of Class-A mutual fund shares on which underwriting fees were earned.

Other Income and Fees

Other income and fees decreased primarily due to a decline in fees earned for the distribution of non-affiliated products.

Operating Expenses

Operating expenses increased primarily due to non-cash goodwill and intangible asset impairment charges recorded in the third and, to a lesser degree, first quarters of 2008. Partially offsetting this was a decrease in employment expenses resulting from lower sales-based and other incentive compensation combined with lower trail commissions and other distribution costs. Operating expenses by category were as follows:

 

     Nine Months Ended September 30,    Increase (Decrease)  
            2008                  2007           2008 vs. 2007  
($ in millions)       

Operating expenses

     

Employment expenses

   $     65.8    $ 72.5    $ (6.7 )

Distribution and administrative expenses

     33.6      37.2      (3.6 )

Other operating expenses

     35.6      33.8      1.8  

Goodwill and intangible asset impairments

     432.2      —        432.2  

Intangible asset amortization

     22.4      22.6      (0.2 )
                      

Total operating expenses

   $ 589.6    $ 166.1    $ 423.5  
                      

Employment Expenses

Employment expenses decreased primarily due to a $7.4 million decrease in incentive compensation partially offset by a $1.2 million increase in base compensation payments. Sales-based incentive compensation decreased due to reduced mutual fund sales. Other incentive compensation decreased due to lower fee revenues in the first nine months of 2008. Base compensation increased primarily due to severance payments in 2008 partially offset by a reduction in the number of employees.

Distribution and Administrative Expenses

Distribution and administrative expenses decreased primarily due to $2.9 million in decreased asset-based expenses paid to our distribution partners, $0.4 million in reduced fees to our fund administrator, and a 0.3 million decrease in mutual fund commission amortization.

 

52


Table of Contents

Other Operating Expenses

Other operating expenses increased primarily as a result of a $1.7 million increase in rent resulting from vacating and/or moving office space at three of our affiliates. Additionally, increased legal, consultant and portfolio management operational costs were offset by reduced PNX chargebacks.

Goodwill and Intangible Asset Impairments

In the first quarter of 2008, a $10.5 million non-cash intangible asset impairment charge was recorded as a result of an interim impairment test of identified intangibles valued at $29.3 million. The test was triggered by our assessment that previous declines in assets and revenue supporting the intangible assets, coupled with a notice of termination from one large account, required such a test. In connection with this impairment, we also performed a test for impairment of goodwill. No such goodwill impairment was required.

In the third quarter of 2008, we recorded a $421.7 million pre-tax impairment charge related to goodwill and other intangible assets. We determined that a triggering event had occurred in the third quarter as a result of the changes in the market environment, specifically the equity market declines, a marked decrease in credit market liquidity and unprecedented government intervention in the financial markets. We performed an impairment analysis using the methodology applied in prior annual and interim testing and, given the current market conditions and the existence of impairment indicators we expanded the fair value estimations used in impairment testing to incorporate other data including third party valuation analyses obtained from our financial advisors, discounted cash flow models and market transactions. This analysis resulted in $331.7 million in goodwill and $90.0 million in intangible asset impairments. The primary drivers of the impairment were the reduction in assets under management, due to markets being at multi-year lows, and valuation multiples for asset managers also being at multi-year lows.

Intangible Asset Amortization

Amortization was down slightly due to certain intangible assets having become fully amortized during 2007.

Other Income and Expenses

Other Income (Expense), Net

Other income (expense), net decreased as the market value of our trading securities decreased in 2008 resulting in realized and unrealized losses totaling $2.4 million as compared to gains of $0.2 million in 2007. These losses were partially offset by an increase in the equity earnings of our unconsolidated holdings.

Interest Expense, Net

Interest expense, net decreased as a result of a reduction in the amount of debt outstanding during the first nine months of each year. Effective December 31, 2007, PNX forgave $325.0 million of debt by making a capital contribution to us. Also contributing, to a lesser degree, was the $12.0 million of debt repayments we made to PNX during the twelve month period ended September 30, 2008.

Income Taxes

Our income tax benefit increased from $4.2 million in the first nine months of 2007 to $99.5 million in the first nine months of 2008 primarily due to an increase in our pretax loss from $14.4 million in the first nine months of 2007 to $449.4 million in the first nine months of 2008. The significant goodwill and intangible asset impairments recorded in 2008 resulted in deferred tax benefits.

 

53


Table of Contents

Annual Results of Operations

Summary Financial Data

 

     Years Ended December 31,     Increase (Decrease)  
       2007     2006     2005     2007 vs. 2006     2006 vs. 2005  
($ in millions)       

Results of Operations

          

Investment management fees

   $ 159.0     $ 164.0     $ 191.5     $ (5.0 )   $ (27.5 )

Other revenue

     67.2       54.6       45.9       12.6       8.7  
                                        

Total revenues

     226.2       218.6       237.4       7.6       (18.8 )
                                        

Operating expenses

     190.5       198.0       212.1       (7.5 )     (14.1 )

Intangible asset impairment

     0.3       32.5       11.1       (32.2 )     21.4  

Intangible asset amortization

     30.1       32.0       33.3       (1.9 )     (1.3 )
                                        

Total expenses

     220.9       262.5       256.5       (41.6 )     6.0  
                                        

Operating income

     5.3       (43.9 )     (19.1 )     49.2       (24.8 )

Other income (expense)

     (0.3 )     1.5       (6.5 )     (1.8 )     8.0  

Interest expense, net

     (25.1 )     (32.0 )     (27.1 )     6.9       (4.9 )
                                        

Income (loss) before income taxes

     (20.1 )     (74.4 )     (52.7 )     54.3       (21.7 )

Income tax benefit

     (5.9 )     (26.8 )     (19.6 )     (20.9 )     7.2  
                                        

Net income (loss)

   $ (14.2 )   $ (47.6 )   $ (33.1 )   $ 33.4     $ (14.5 )
                                        

Revenues

The increase in revenues during 2007 as compared to 2006 was primarily a result of an increase in mutual fund investment management, distribution and service fees resulting from higher average mutual fund assets under management. The decrease in revenues in 2006 as compared to 2005 was primarily due to significant redemptions of separately managed accounts and the loss of several institutional clients. This decrease was partially offset by increased distribution and service fees due to higher mutual fund assets under management resulting, in part, from the acquisition of the Insight Funds in May 2006. Revenues by source were as follows:

 

     Years Ended December 31,    Increase (Decrease)  
       2007    2006    2005    2007 vs. 2006     2006 vs. 2005  
($ in millions)       

Investment management fees

             

Mutual funds

   $ 84.9    $ 76.3    $ 71.1    $ 8.6     $ 5.2  

Separately managed accounts

     29.5      35.7      52.4      (6.2 )     (16.7 )

Institutional accounts

     24.9      34.1      49.9      (9.2 )     (15.8 )

Structured finance products

     8.1      8.0      8.7      0.1       (0.7 )
                                     

Third-party management fees

     147.4      154.1      182.1      (6.7 )     (28.0 )

PNX general account

     11.6      9.9      9.4      1.7       0.5  
                                     

Total investment management fees

     159.0      164.0      191.5      (5.0 )     (27.5 )

Distribution and service fees

     36.5      29.8      25.6      6.7       4.2  

Administration and transfer agent fees

     23.3      19.8      16.2      3.5       3.6  

Other income and fees

     7.4      5.0      4.1      2.4       0.9  
                                     

Total revenues

   $ 226.2    $ 218.6    $ 237.4    $ 7.6     $ (18.8 )
                                     

 

54


Table of Contents

Investment Management Fees

Year ended December 31, 2007 compared to year ended December 31, 2006. Investment management fees decreased primarily due to a decline in fees earned on separately managed accounts and institutional accounts. These fees decreased due to net outflows of assets resulting from underperforming large cap growth strategies that have since been largely redeemed and also due to a one-time final accelerated $5.2 million fee in 2006 from an early termination of an institutional contract. This decrease was partially offset by an increase in mutual fund investment management fees, as we earned fees from the Insight Funds for the full year in 2007 as compared to only a post-adoption partial year in 2006. Additionally, fees earned from managing closed-end funds increased $2.6 million due to secondary or preferred offerings as well as market appreciation. Fees earned from managing PNX’s general account increased $1.7 million primarily due to a change in the fee structure.

Year ended December 31, 2006 compared to year ended December 31, 2005. Investment management fees decreased, despite an increase in average assets under management, as a majority of the increased assets were in lower fee products. In May 2006, with the adoption of the Insight Funds, money market assets, a lower fee product, increased by $7.0 billion. Along with an increase in other mutual fund assets under management, both open-end and closed-end, mutual funds management fees increased $5.2 million year-over-year. However, for assets under management in other asset classes, particularly in separately managed accounts and in institutional accounts, net flows were negative, more than offsetting market appreciation and resulting in a $27.5 million overall decrease in management fees.

Distribution and Service Fees

Year ended December 31, 2007 compared to year ended December 31, 2006. Distribution and service fees for open-end mutual funds are earned based upon average assets under management. Average mutual fund assets increased by 25% from 2006 to 2007 in large part due to the adoption of the Insight Funds in May 2006.

Year ended December 31, 2006 compared to year ended December 31, 2005. Distribution and service fees increased as a result of a 23% increase in average mutual fund assets under management. The increase was primarily due to the adoption of the Insight Funds in May 2006.

Administration and Transfer Agent Fees

Year ended December 31, 2007 compared to year ended December 31, 2006. Administration and transfer agent fees represent payments made to us for fund administration and transfer agent services provided. Fund administration fees increased by $2.8 million, while transfer agent fees increased by $0.5 million. Due to the increase in average assets under management resulting primarily from the adoption of the Insight Funds, transfer agent fees also increased, as they are earned based on the number of accounts. Underwriting fees increased $0.3 million due to an increase in sales on which these fees are earned.

Year ended December 31, 2006 compared to year ended December 31, 2005. Fund administration fees increased by $3.6 million as a result of the adoption of the Insight Funds. Transfer agent fees increased $0.7 million due to the increase in shareholder accounts related to the partial year impact of the Insight Funds adoption.

Other Income and Fees

Year ended December 31, 2007 compared to year ended December 31, 2006. Other income and fees increased primarily as a result of increased sales of non-affiliated products for which we earned distribution income. In addition, $1.0 million received in 2007 related to the issuance of a structured product.

 

55


Table of Contents

Year ended December 31, 2006 compared to year ended December 31, 2005. Other income and fees increased primarily due to the initial sales of non-affiliated products, partially offset by reduced brokerage commissions earned.

Operating Expenses

Operating expenses decreased in 2007 as compared to 2006, primarily as a result of a non-cash intangible asset impairment charge of $32.5 million recorded in 2006 as compared to a $0.3 million impairment in 2007. In addition, certain employment charges, including staff reductions, and lease related charges totaling $13.6 million associated with the restructuring of the business in 2006 did not recur in 2007. In 2006 as compared to 2005, operating expenses increased primarily as a result of a $32.5 million intangible asset impairment recognized in 2006 as compared to a $11.1 million charge in 2005. Both years had restructuring charges: $13.6 million in 2006 and $12.5 million in 2005. Employment expenses decreased $12.7 million in 2006 because of reduced staff levels resulting in part from the 2005 restructuring and also due to reduced variable compensation. Operating expenses by category were as follows:

 

     Years Ended December 31,    Increase (Decrease)  
       2007    2006    2005    2007 vs. 2006     2006 vs. 2005  
($ in millions)       

Operating expenses

             

Employment expenses

   $ 94.9    $ 97.7    $ 110.4    $ (2.8 )   $ (12.7 )

Distribution and administrative expenses

     50.1      41.3      35.8      8.8       5.5  

Other operating expenses

     45.5      45.4      53.4      0.1       (8.0 )

Restructuring and severance

     —        13.6      12.5      (13.6 )     1.1  

Intangible asset impairment

     0.3      32.5      11.1      (32.2 )     21.4  

Intangible asset amortization

     30.1      32.0      33.3      (1.9 )     (1.3 )
                                     

Total operating expenses

   $ 220.9    $ 262.5    $ 256.5    $ (41.6 )   $ 6.0  
                                     

Employment Expenses

Year ended December 31, 2007 compared to year ended December 31, 2006. Employment expenses decreased to $94.9 million from $97.7 million, primarily as a result of a decrease in staffing levels as part of the restructuring that occurred in 2006. Base salaries decreased by $8.8 million, partially offset by increased incentive compensation paid on higher mutual fund sales in 2007. In 2006, $2.6 million of incentive compensation was recorded relating to an accelerated fee from the early termination of an institutional contract which did not recur in 2007. Other employment expenses, including employee related charges such as benefits and payroll taxes, decreased by $1.0 million primarily as a result of the reduced compensation, partially offset by an increase in human resource administration costs.

Year ended December 31, 2006 compared to year ended December 31, 2005. Employment expenses decreased to $97.7 million from $110.4 million primarily due to a decrease in base salaries related to the reduction in the number of employees as part of the restructuring that occurred in both 2005 and 2006. Additionally, a decrease in performance-based compensation was primarily driven by lower investment management fees upon which this compensation was based.

Distribution and administrative expenses

Year ended December 31, 2007 compared to year ended December 31, 2006. Distribution and administrative expenses increased, due primarily to an increase in trail commissions related to an increase in mutual fund assets under management. Other distribution-related costs and costs associated with fund accounting of the mutual funds increased primarily due to the adoption of the Insight Funds, which increased both sales and assets under management.

 

56


Table of Contents

Year ended December 31, 2006 compared to year ended December 31, 2005. Distribution and administrative expenses increased, due primarily to an increase in trail payments and fund accounting costs related to the adoption of the Insight Funds.

Other Operating Expenses

Year ended December 31, 2007 compared to year ended December 31, 2006 . Other operating expenses consist primarily of computer services, professional fees, investment research fees, travel, training, entertainment, portfolio management operational costs and other office and corporate expenses including items such as rent, insurance, printing and general taxes. The services provided by PNX are detailed in the related party note, Note 15, to our consolidated financial statements in this information statement.

Other operating expenses were basically unchanged from 2006 to 2007 as management focused on controlling costs. Increases in investment research fees, portfolio management operational costs and printing were offset by decreases in outside services, insurance, consultants and professional fees.

Year ended December 31, 2006 compared to year ended December 31, 2005 . Operating expenses decreased primarily as a result of the 2006 restructuring. Rent, marketing costs, consulting fees, computer services, clearance costs, insurance and outside services were reduced, more than offsetting increases in communications costs and investment research fees.

Restructuring and Severance

In 2005, we initiated a significant restructuring program. Specifically, the Company: (i) streamlined its operating structure from being a collection of majority-owned and wholly-owned affiliated firms into a single business of affiliated managers with common distribution and support operations, (ii) eliminated redundant functions and management layers, (iii) took actions to restructure its product portfolio focusing on mutual fund products, and (iv) repositioned its distribution strategy with an increased focus on retail mutual fund distribution. The Company had not undertaken changes of a similar magnitude at any time prior to or since 2006 and does not expect to do so in the future. These actions resulted in costs totaling $26.1 million, of which $12.5 million were recognized in 2005 and $13.6 million in 2006.

The charges were primarily related to actions taken at several of our affiliated asset managers. Charges at SCM totaled $12.0 million, primarily comprised of $7.8 million of one-time severance payments and $3.5 million of vacated office space. Charges at EAM were comprised of $9.5 million in connection with terminating its large-cap strategy. The primary components of the charges at EAM included $5.0 million of severance payments and $2.6 million of vacated office space. We incurred $2.8 million of charges at KAR, including $1.6 million of severance payments. Another charge of $1.8 million was primarily related to reconfiguring investment strategies of the Duff and Phelps investment teams largely to focus that firm on its core strengths.

Intangible Asset Impairment

Year ended December 31, 2007 compared to year ended December 31, 2006. In 2007 and 2006, we recorded impairment charges of $0.3 million and $32.5 million, respectively. Each of the impairments was the result of the loss during those years of a significant portion of the revenues supporting identifiable intangible assets.

Year ended December 31, 2006 compared to year ended December 31, 2005. In 2006 and 2005 we recorded impairment charges of $32.5 million and $11.1 million, respectively. The impairments in each year were the result of the loss of a significant portion of the revenues supporting identifiable intangible assets.

 

57


Table of Contents

Intangible Asset Amortization

Year ended December 31, 2007 compared to year ended December 31, 2006. Intangible asset amortization is recognized on our definite-lived intangible assets on a straight-line basis over the estimated remaining lives of those assets. Amortization decreased primarily as a result of the impairment recorded in 2006.

Year ended December 31, 2006 compared to year ended December 31, 2005. Amortization decreased primarily as a result of the impairment recorded in 2005.

Other Income and Expenses

Other Income (Expense), Net

Year ended December 31, 2007 compared to year ended December 31, 2006. Other income (expense), net decreased. We hold investments in certain affiliated mutual funds and institutional accounts that are classified as trading securities. Changes in the market value of these investments are included in other income (expense). The difference between the cost and the market value of these holdings decreased by $2.6 million as compared to a $0.7 million increase in the prior year, or a net $3.3 million increase in the unrealized loss year over year. Partially offsetting this increase in the unrealized loss was an increase of $1.2 million in realized gains on securities in 2007 as compared to 2006.

Year ended December 31, 2006 compared to year ended December 31, 2005. Other income (expense), net increased. In 2005, the Company acquired the remaining minority interests in certain of its asset management subsidiaries. The minority interest recorded in 2005 until the time of these final acquisitions was $6.7 million. Changes in the market value of its trading securities gained $0.7 million in 2006 as compared to a loss of $1.2 million in 2005, a net $1.9 million increase in 2006 over 2005. Changes in other income and expense items resulted in a $0.7 million decrease.

Interest Expense, Net

Year ended December 31, 2007 compared to year ended December 31, 2006. Interest expense, net is mainly comprised of interest expense on the intercompany debt owed by us to PNX, but also includes interest and dividend income earned. Interest expense in 2007 was lower by $3.4 million as compared to 2006 due to lower interest rates of variable rate notes as well as lower renegotiated fixed interest rates. The $57.2 million remaining portion of a promissory note agreement with a subsidiary’s minority members to finance the remainder of that subsidiary’s acquisition was paid in early 2007 thereby reducing interest expense by $2.8 million in 2007. The $25.0 million outstanding on an unsecured revolving credit facility with outside lenders was repaid in 2006 further reducing interest expense by $0.5 million in 2007. Interest and dividend income increased to $1.6 million in 2007 from $1.5 million in 2006.

Year ended December 31, 2006 compared to year ended December 31, 2005. The increase was primarily the result of an increase in the interest rate on one of the debt agreements with PNX, which increased interest expense by $3.0 million, and the promissory note with a subsidiary’s minority members that was entered into in mid-year 2005, increasing interest expense by $2.0 million in 2006. Interest and dividend income decreased to $1.5 million in 2006 from $1.6 million in 2005.

Income Taxes Expense

Year ended December 31, 2007 compared to year ended December 31, 2006. Our income tax benefit decreased from $26.8 million in 2006 to $6.0 million in 2007 primarily due to a decrease in our pretax loss from $74.4 million in 2006 to $20.1 million in 2007. The rate of our income tax benefit decreased from 36% to 30% primarily due to a shift in income between certain affiliates which significantly impacted state taxes as the shift was to affiliates in higher tax jurisdictions. As of December 31, 2007, we had deferred tax assets of $38.8 million

 

58


Table of Contents

and $0.4 million related to net operating and capital losses, respectively, for federal income tax purposes and $9.8 million for state net operating losses. The related federal net operating loss carryovers of $110.9 million are scheduled to expire between the years 2023 and 2027. The related federal capital loss carryovers of $1.0 million are scheduled to expire in 2010 and 2012. The state net operating losses of $118.7 million are scheduled to expire as follows: $0.2 million in 2007; $59.6 million in 2008 through 2017 and $58.9 million in 2018 through 2026. We have established a $9.8 million valuation allowance at December 31, 2007, relative to the state deferred tax assets.

Year ended December 31, 2006 compared to year ended December 31, 2005. Our income tax benefit increased from $19.6 million in 2005 to $26.8 million in 2006 primarily due to an increase in our pretax loss from $52.7 million in 2005 to $74.4 million in 2006. Our effective tax rate was relatively unchanged between the two years. As of December 31, 2006, we had deferred tax assets of $31.5 million and $0.3 million related to net operating and capital losses, respectively, for federal income tax purposes and $9.8 million for state net operating losses. We have established a $9.8 million valuation allowance at December 31, 2007, relative to the state deferred tax assets.

Effects of Inflation

For the first nine months of 2008 and the years 2007, 2006 and 2005, inflation did not have a material effect on our consolidated results of operations.

Supplemental Performance Measure

As supplemental information, we provide a non-GAAP performance measure that we refer to as adjusted net income. This measure is provided in addition to, but not as a substitute for, net income determined in accordance with GAAP. Adjusted net income is defined as net income (loss) plus amortization and impairments of intangible assets and deferred taxes related to those intangible assets. We consider adjusted net income an important measure of our financial performance as we believe it most accurately represents operating performance of the Company adjusted for non-cash expenses related to acquisitions. We consider this non-GAAP financial measure to be useful to investors because it is an important metric in measuring economic performance of asset management companies, as an indicator of value and because it facilitates comparison of our operating results with the results of other asset management firms that have not engaged in significant acquisitions. Adjusted net income is also used by the Company as one of the inputs for calculating performance-based incentives. We have also excluded restructuring and severance charges from the calculation of adjusted net income to provide a better indication of the Company’s ongoing operations. Because of their transformational and special nature, we believe that excluding the restructuring and severance charges best represents the Company’s ongoing operating performance and provides the basis for the measure that was used in calculating performance-based management incentives.

In calculating adjusted net income we added back amortization and impairments attributable to acquisition related intangible assets, such as management contracts, to adjusted net income to reflect the fact that these non-cash expenses make it difficult to compare our operating results with the results of other asset management firms that have not engaged in significant acquisitions. Because goodwill and indefinite-lived assets are not amortized under GAAP, and since they generate deferred tax expenses that typically do not reverse, we added back these non-cash expenses, and their related tax attributes, to net income to measure operating performance. We added back impairments on intangible assets and goodwill to reflect that these non-cash items makes it difficult to compare our operating results with the results of other asset management firms that have not engaged in significant acquisitions.

Adjusted net income is one of the key measures we analyze in managing our business. Additionally, we believe that adjusted net income is a measure that is useful to investors because it identifies the earnings of the ongoing operations of our business. Adjusted net income is not a substitute for net income or measures that are

 

59


Table of Contents

derived assuming GAAP and may differ from similarly titled measures of other companies. We encourage investors to review and consider GAAP net income, as well as adjusted net income, in evaluating the results of our operations.

The following tables provide reconciliations of net income (loss) to adjusted net income:

 

    

Nine Months Ended

September 30,

    Increase/(Decrease)  
     2008     2007     2008 vs 2007  

($ in millions)

      

Net Income (Loss)

   $ (349.9 )   $ (10.2 )   $ (339.7 )

Add back:

      

Amortization of intangible assets

     22.4       22.6       (0.2 )

Goodwill and intangible asset impairment

     432.2       —         432.2  

Goodwill and intangible asset related deferred taxes

     (91.1 )     1.1       (92.2 )
                        

Adjusted Net Income

   $ 13.6     $ 13.5     $ 0.1  
                        

See “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations—First Nine Months Results of Operations—Operating Expenses—Goodwill and Intangible Asset Impairments” for a discussion of the goodwill and intangible asset impairments.

 

     Year Ended December 31,       Increase/(Decrease)  
     2007     2006     2005     2007 vs
2006
    2006 vs
2005
 

($ in millions)

          

Net Income (Loss)

   $ (14.2 )   $ (47.6 )   $ (33.1 )   $ 33.4     $ (14.5 )

Add back:

          

Amortization of intangible assets

     30.1       32.0       33.3       (1.9 )     (1.3 )

Intangible asset impairment

     0.3       32.5       11.1       (32.2 )     21.4  

Intangible asset related deferred taxes

     0.3       (11.9 )     (6.5 )     12.2       (5.4 )

Restructuring and severance

     —         13.6       12.5       (13.6 )     1.1  
                                        

Adjusted Net Income

   $ 16.5     $ 18.6     $ 17.3     $ (2.1 )   $ 1.3  
                                        

See “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations—Annual Results of Operations—Operating Expenses—Restructuring and Severance” for a discussion on the nature of the restructuring and severance charges and “Management’s Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations—First Nine Months Results of Operations—Operating Expenses—Goodwill and Intangible Asset Impairments” for a discussion of the intangible asset impairments.

 

60


Table of Contents

Liquidity and Capital Resources

The following table summarizes certain key financial data relating to our liquidity and capital resources:

 

     Nine Months Ended
September 30, 2008
    Year Ended December 31,  
       2007     2006     2005  
($ in millions)       

Balance Sheet Data

        

Cash and cash equivalents

   $ 22.6     $ 36.8     $ 33.9     $ 23.8  

Marketable securities

     12.0       14.4       14.5       12.2  

Current portion of notes payable

     12.0       12.0       69.2       9.8  

Long-term notes payable and other debt

     21.0       30.0       367.0       498.3  

Cash Flow Data

        

Provided by (used in)

        

Operating activities

   $ (2.8 )   $ 13.0     $ 15.9     $ (11.5 )

Investing activities

     (2.5 )     (1.7 )     (8.0 )     (13.8 )

Financing activities

     (9.0 )     (8.3 )     2.2       (0.9 )

EBITDA (1)

   $ 7.8     $ 38.1     $ 26.2     $ 22.1  

 

(1) EBITDA is a non-GAAP liquidity measure defined as net income before interest expense, income taxes, depreciation and amortization. For a reconciliation of EBITDA to cash flow from operations, see page 63.

We believe that our available cash, marketable securities and cash to be generated from operations will be sufficient to fund current operations and capital requirements in the short-term, which we consider the next twelve months. Short-term uses of cash also include interest payments on notes payable that are also expected to be financed from cash generated from operations. Our day-to-day activities do not require large amounts of excess cash. Our largest payments are compensation-related. Incentive compensation, generally a function of earnings, is accrued throughout the calendar year and paid in the first quarter of the next calendar year.

Working capital is defined as current assets less current liabilities. Our working capital was a negative $6.6 million at September 30, 2008, primarily due to adverse conditions in the equity markets and $3.0 million in quarterly debt repayments to PNX along with the related interest due thereon. The adverse market conditions caused a decline in our assets under management, resulting in lower revenues and available cash. On October 30, 2008, we and our parent companies, PNX and Phoenix Investment Management Company entered into an agreement with Harris Bankcorp, Inc., a U.S. subsidiary of the Bank of Montreal, pursuant to which Harris will acquire $45.0 million of convertible preferred stock of the Company representing a 23% equity position of the Company on a fully-diluted basis. In accordance with the terms of the agreement the acquisition will be completed upon consummating the spin-off transaction. The Company expects $35.0 million of proceeds from this transaction. Of those proceeds the Company will be using approximately $13.0 million to make a one-time pre-payment on its intercompany debt obligation to Phoenix Life Insurance Company. The Company expects its net working capital position to be approximately $33.0 million after this transaction which will satisfy the Company’s short-term working capital requirements.

At various times during the past few years, we have had negative working capital. Historically, the majority of the operating cash flows generated by the Company were used to service debt to PNX. During 2007, we had total debt in excess of $400.0 million and had total debt service obligations in excess of $40.0 million a year, including principal and interest payments. On December 31, 2007, $325.0 million of debt obligations to PNX was extinguished through loan forgiveness.

Long-term capital requirements primarily include repayment of notes payable and lease obligations. Long-term notes payable include various agreements the Company entered into with PNX during 2001 and 2002 that had original maturity dates at various times in 2007 that were subsequently extended to 2010. Interest was payable in arrears at annual rates ranging from 5.32% to 7.56% for the years 2006 and 2007. During 2006 and 2007, each of these notes was converted to equity in the form of capital contributions from PNX. The PNX board of directors deemed it to be in the best interests of PNX and the Company to forgive the remaining intra-company indebtedness associated with these notes in the amount of $325.0 million, and all interest accrued.

 

61


Table of Contents

Other possible long-term capital requirements could include strategic acquisitions, seed money for new products and infrastructure improvements. In addition to our intention to obtain third-party bank financing to support our future capital requirements, potential sources of long-term capital include additional common or preferred equity raises, revolving credit facilities or secured financing arrangements. There can be no assurances that any of these financing arrangements will be available to the Company in the future.

In 2005, 2006 and the first quarter of 2008, we recorded impairment charges related to terminated investment management contracts which resulted in lost revenues. In 2005 and 2006, we experienced significant redemptions in our separately managed accounts. These redemptions, totaling $1.3 billion in the two years, resulted in lost annual revenues of approximately $8.2 million from these accounts. Partially offsetting the decrease in revenues were decreased variable costs and fixed costs from the resultant staff reductions and restructuring. The impairment charge recorded in 2008 was triggered by the loss of a significant institutional client resulting in $1.8 million of lost annual revenue, partially offset by a related $0.9 million decrease in variable incentive compensation. In the third quarter of 2008, we recorded goodwill and intangible asset impairment charges which were triggered, in large part, by the downturn in the markets. As a result of this downturn, our assets under management have decreased by $4.3 billion in the first nine months of 2008 due solely to market depreciation. This has resulted in lost annual revenues of approximately $19.0 million.

Our one outstanding note in favor of Phoenix Life Insurance Company, a wholly-owned subsidiary of PNX, contains financial and operating covenants including, among other provisions, requirements that we maintain a maximum debt-to-EBITDA ratio of 2.75 and minimum stockholder’s equity of $115 million. As of September 30, 2008, we had $33 million outstanding under this loan and were in compliance with all applicable financial and operating covenants. We intend to make a one-time pre-payment of approximately $13.0 million on this note in connection with the distribution. We expect approximately $20.0 million of outstanding indebtedness on this note after the spin-off is completed. The current portion, defined as amounts payable within the next twelve months, is $10.0 million with the remaining $10.0 million payable through December 31, 2010. We expect to obtain third-party financing to retire this obligation at the time of the spin-off. We currently have no other outstanding debt. See Note 9 to our consolidated financial statements in this information statement for additional information on this indebtedness.

Balance Sheet

Cash and cash equivalents consist of cash in banks and highly liquid affiliated money market mutual fund investments. Cash and cash equivalents typically increase in the second, third and fourth quarters of the year as we accrue for, but do not pay, variable compensation for our affiliated managers. Historically, annual incentives are paid in the first quarter of the year, which is the primary reason for the $14.2 million decrease in cash during the first nine months of 2008. Marketable securities consist primarily of our affiliated mutual fund shares and other proprietary strategies. We provide capital for funds and strategies in their early stages of development to facilitate creating performance track records. Current portion of notes payable represents notes due within twelve months of the date of the financial statements. Our notes payable decreased by $9.0 million during the first nine months of 2008 as we made our quarterly note repayments to PNX. Current portion of notes payable decreased in 2007 due to the payment to a subsidiary’s minority members to finance the remainder of the acquisition of that subsidiary. Long-term notes payable and other debt represents notes due twelve months or more after the date of the financial statements. The decrease in long-term notes payable and other debt in 2007 was primarily the result of $325 million that was forgiven by PNX through a capital contribution. The remaining $12 million decrease was due to the reclassification of a separate intercompany note payable to current portion of notes payable. The decrease in long-term notes payable and other debt in 2006 was the result of $49 million that was converted to equity in the form of capital contributions from PNX, combined with the reclassification of notes payable from long-term to current.

 

62


Table of Contents

Cash Flows

For the nine months ended September 30, 2008, net cash used in operating activities was $2.8 million, primarily due to annual incentives paid by our affiliated managers. Net cash provided by operating activities for the year ended December 31, 2007 decreased $2.9 million compared to the prior year period. Net cash provided by operating activities for the year ended December 31, 2006 increased $27.4 million due to minority interest payments made in 2005.

Net cash used in investing activities consists primarily of capital expenditures related to our business operations, purchases of investment contracts or subsidiaries, and purchases of available-for-sale securities. Cash used in investing activities of $2.5 million in the first nine months of 2008 was primarily for purchasing capital items. Net cash used in investing activities for the year ended December 31, 2007 decreased $6.4 million compared to the prior year primarily due to the 2006 acquisition of the Insight funds. Net cash used in investing activities for the year ended December 31, 2006, decreased $5.7 million compared to the year ended December 31, 2005 primarily due to the 2005 purchase of a subsidiary partially offset by the 2006 acquisition of the Insight funds.

Net cash from financing activities consists primarily of capital contributions and borrowings from PNX as well as repayments of debt to PNX. For the nine months ended September 30, 2008, net cash used in financing activities consisted of three $3.0 million quarterly note repayments to PNX. Net cash used in financing activities was $8.3 million in 2007 due to repayments of debt to the parent of $69.2 million partially offset by capital contributions of $60.9 million. Net cash provided by financing activities was $2.2 million in 2006 due to borrowings from related parties and capital contributions totaling $49.0 million partially offset by repayments of debt to the parent of $46.8 million. Net cash used in financing activities was $0.9 million in 2005 due to distributions to minority interests and repayments of debt totaling $18.9 million partially offset by borrowings from related parties of $18.0 million.

Supplemental Liquidity Measure

As supplemental information, we provide information regarding EBITDA, defined as earnings before interest expense, income taxes, depreciation and amortization, a non-GAAP liquidity measure. This measure is provided in addition to, but not as a substitute for, cash flow from operations. EBITDA, as calculated by us, may not be consistent with computations of EBITDA by other companies. As a measure of liquidity we believe that EBITDA is a useful indicator of our ability to service debt, make new investments and meet working capital requirements. We further believe that many investors use this information when analyzing the financial position of companies in the asset management industry. The following table provides a reconciliation of cash flow from operations to EBITDA:

 

     Nine months Ended
September 30, 2008
    Year Ended  
         2007     2006     2005  

Cash flow from operations

   $ (2.8 )   $ 13.0     $ 15.9     $ (11.5 )

Interest expense

     2.0       26.7       33.4       28.7  

Current tax provision

     (99.5 )     (6.0 )     (26.8 )     (19.6 )

Changes in assets and liabilities and other adjustments

     108.1       4.4       3.7       24.5  
                                

EBITDA(1)

   $ 7.8     $ 38.1     $ 26.2     $ 22.1  
                                

 

(1)  See page 61 for the definition of EBITDA.

We view our ratio of debt to EBITDA (our leverage ratio) as an important gauge of our ability to service debt, make new investments and meet working capital requirements. The leverage covenant of our senior note with Phoenix Life Insurance Company (“Phoenix Life”), a wholly owned subsidiary of PNX, requires that we maintain a maximum debt-to-EBITDA ratio of 2.75, where EBITDA is for the preceding twelve month period.

 

63


Table of Contents

As of September 30, 2008, our leverage ratio was 1.64:1. For each of the years ended December 31, 2005, 2006 and 2007 we were in compliance with the maximum debt-to-EBITDA ratio covenants of our senior note.

Contractual Obligations

The following table summarizes our contractual obligations as of December 31, 2007:

 

     Payments Due
     Total    Less Than
1 Year
   1-3 Years    3-5 Years    More Than
5 Years
($ in millions)     

Operating lease obligations(1)

   $ 13.8    $ 4.6    $ 4.9    $ 1.4    $ 2.9

Senior note including interest(2)

     47.1      14.5      32.6      —        —  
                                  

Total

   $ 60.9    $ 19.1    $ 37.5    $ 1.4    $ 2.9
                                  

 

(1) Amounts shown are net of income from subleases.

 

(2) We currently have a senior note agreement with Phoenix Life Insurance Company. The principal balance at December 31, 2007 is $42.0 million. The agreement matures at the end of 2010. We are required to make quarterly payments of $3.0 million through September 2010 and must make a final $9.0 million payment in December 2010. The note bears interest at an annual rate of 6.55%.

Except for the three $3.0 million quarterly note repayments made in 2008, there have been no material changes in our contractual obligations at September 30, 2008.

The table does not include liabilities for uncertain tax positions ($0.5 million at December 31, 2007) as we cannot predict when such liabilities will be paid.

We believe that we can meet these contractual obligations through existing cash, future cash flows from operations and, if necessary, borrowings under a future credit facility.

Financing Arrangements

For a discussion of our financing arrangements, see “Description of Indebtedness.”

Impact of New Accounting Standards

For a discussion of accounting standards, see Note 2 to our consolidated financial statements in this information statement for more information.

Critical Accounting Estimates

Our financial statements and the accompanying notes are prepared in accordance with GAAP, which requires the use of estimates. Actual results will vary from these estimates. Management believes the following critical accounting policies are important to understanding our results of operations and financial position.

Goodwill

As of September 30, 2008, the carrying amount of goodwill was $122.7 million. Goodwill represents the excess of purchase price of acquisitions and mergers over the fair value of identified net assets and liabilities. For goodwill, impairment tests at the reporting unit level are performed annually, or more frequently, should circumstances change which would reduce the fair value of the reporting unit below its carrying amount. In 2005, in conjunction with the conversion of the business to a wholly owned structure, goodwill was consolidated into a

 

64


Table of Contents

single reporting unit for purposes of goodwill impairment testing. For purposes of the impairment test of goodwill, the fair value of the reporting unit is based on a multiple of revenue plus the fair value of the unit’s tangible fixed assets. We employ a market approach in our valuation methodology. For each test of goodwill we determine the run rate revenues for our products and apply a revenue multiple to determine a fair value for each reporting unit. Key inputs of the valuation method are the revenue multiplier assumption, management fee rates used to determine run rate revenues and the level of assets under management. We assess our revenue multiple by comparing it to the revenue trading multiples of publicly traded peer asset management companies and applying a control premium, which control premium would not be reflected in such revenue trading multiples. Management fee rates are taken from the most recent actual rates available for our investment products.

Projected cash flows require the use of assumptions and estimates. Changes in these assumptions could result in a change in the need for recording an impairment. As such, the results of the annual impairment tests, which are affected by adverse changes in facts and circumstances affecting cash flows and fair values, could result in a material charge to our results of operations.

We determined that a triggering event had occurred in the third quarter of 2008 as a result of the changes in the market environment, specifically the equity market declines, a marked decrease in credit market liquidity and unprecedented government intervention in the financial markets. We performed an impairment analysis using the methodology applied in prior annual and interim testing and, while the Company believed the existing approach as discussed above was appropriate, given the current market conditions and the existence of impairment indicators, we expanded the fair value estimations used in impairment testing to incorporate other data including third party valuation analyses obtained from our financial advisors, discounted cash flow models and market transactions. In connection with this third quarter test for goodwill the Company obtained and weighted several estimates of the fair value including:

 

   

recent discounted cash flow modeling valuations completed by the Company’s outside financial advisors;

 

   

market transactions, including an estimated valuation of the Company as indicated by its recently announced sale of a 23% minority interest in the Company; and

 

   

a third party independent valuation of the business. The valuation included a discounted cash flow analysis and an analysis of the valuation multiples for selected public companies and for target companies involved in selected merger and acquisition transactions.

The primary drivers of the impairment were a reduction in assets under management, as a result of the markets being at multi-year lows, and valuation multiples for asset managers also being at multi-year lows. Our impairment test in the third quarter resulted in an impairment charge of $331.7 million.

Indefinite-Lived Intangible Assets

As of September 30, 2008 the carrying values of indefinite-lived intangible assets were $36.1 million. Indefinite-lived intangible assets are comprised of investment advisory contracts with affiliated closed-end registered investment companies. Indefinite-lived intangible asset impairment tests are performed annually, or more frequently should circumstances change which would reduce the fair value below its carrying value.

In conducting impairment tests, the Company uses a revenue multiple model to each of the intangible assets to derive its estimated fair value. The rationale for using the revenue multiplier on these intangible assets is that, due to their nature, closed-end mutual funds, unlike open-end mutual funds, do not routinely issue and redeem their shares and, as such, their revenues will continue indefinitely (affected only by market performance or by a decision by the fund boards to terminate the advisory contract). It is for this reason that the Company values its closed-end funds similarly to how it values the Company. Specifically, the key inputs included in valuation

 

65


Table of Contents

analysis are (i) a revenue multiplier; (ii) management fee rates; and (iii) assets under management. Each of these items can be directly ascribed at the intangible asset level; we therefore view this methodology as an appropriate assessment of value.

In the third quarter 2008, the Company recorded a $37.2 million impairment related to its indefinite-lived intangible assets. We determined that a triggering event had occurred in the third quarter as a result of the changes in the market environment, specifically the equity market declines, a marked decrease in credit market liquidity, and unprecedented government intervention in the financial markets. We performed an impairment analysis using the methodology applied in prior annual and interim testing and, while the Company believed the existing approach as discussed above was appropriate, given the current market conditions and the existence of impairment indicators we expanded the fair value estimations used in impairment testing to incorporate discounted cash flow models. The most sensitive assumption used in this approach is the discount rate applied of which the Company used a 17% rate which reflects the current market environment.

In connection with this third quarter impairment test for indefinite-lived intangible assets the Company used both methods described above as inputs into its valuation assessment.

Any material changes to the key variables that impact the valuation, including (i) the revenue multiplier, (ii) management fee rates, (iii) assets under management and (iv) discount rate, could result in the Company recording an impairment on its remaining indefinite-lived intangible assets.

As of December 31, 2007 the carrying values of the indefinite-lived intangible assets were $73.3 million. When the 2007 impairment test was performed, the fair value was $139.0 million and the excess of fair value over carrying value was $65.7 million. A change of 0.5 in the revenue multiple (10%) would result in a decrease in this fair value of approximately $13.9 million. Due to the excess fair value over book value noted, such a change in the revenue multiple would have had no effect on the Company’s results of operations.

Definite-Lived Intangible Assets

As of September 30, 2008 the carrying values of definite-lived intangible assets were $50.1 million. Definite-lived intangible assets are comprised of acquired investment advisory contracts. The Company monitors the useful lives of definite-lived intangible assets and revises the useful lives, if necessary, based on the circumstances. Significant judgment is required to estimate the period that these assets will contribute to our cash flows and the pattern over which these assets will be consumed. A change in the remaining useful life of any of these assets could have a significant impact on our amortization expense. All amortization expense has been, and continues to be, calculated on a straight-line basis.

For definite-lived intangible assets, impairment testing is performed whenever events or changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying amount may not be recoverable. If the Company determines the carrying value of the definite-lived intangible assets is less than the sum of the undiscounted cash flows expected to result from the asset it will quantify the impairment using a discounted cash flow model.

The key assumptions in the discounted cash flow model include:

 

   

estimated remaining useful life of the intangible asset;

 

   

discount rate;

 

   

investment management fee rate on assets under management; and

 

   

market expense ratio factor.

Management estimates remaining useful lives using its historical experience and long-term operating trends. This results in a range of 2-16 years, depending on the product. For investment management fee rate we use

 

66


Table of Contents

contractually stated rates for mutual funds and average basis points earned for the other products. The discount rate reflects the current estimated cost of capital of the Company; and market expense ratio factor applied reflects an acquiror’s expected margin from the asset.

The Company has taken a definite-lived intangible asset impairment charge of $52.8 million in the third quarter of 2008. The impairment test was performed as the result of Management’s assessment that the carrying amount of the definite lived intangible assets may not be recoverable as a result of changes in the market environment, primarily driven by equity market declines through the third quarter. Other contributors to the assessment were a marked decrease in credit market liquidity and unprecedented government intervention in the financial markets.

Any material changes to the key variables that impact the valuation, including (i) useful life, (ii) discount rate, (iii) market expense ratio factor, (iv) assets under management and (v) investment management fees, could result in the Company recording an impairment on its remaining definite-lived intangible assets.

We recorded impairment charges of $10.5 million, $32.5 million and $10.6 million in the first quarter of 2008, and in 2006 and 2005, respectively.

After the Company recorded the definite-lived intangible asset impairments noted above, the carrying value on $17.3 million of definite-lived intangible assets is equal to their fair value. Three definite-lived intangible assets with a carrying value of $32.8 million were estimated to have a fair value of $73.4 million as of September 30, 2008.

Associated with these impairments and in accordance with FAS 142, we performed interim tests of goodwill. In each instance, we utilized the revenue multiple consistent with the method used for our annual test of goodwill. For the first quarter 2008 test, we estimated that the fair value exceeded carrying value by $90.3 million. The revenue multiple method is appropriate because it provides comparability with asset management firms with different expense structures. Based on this test, the reporting unit was not impaired. The goodwill of the reporting unit was $454.4 million as of March 31, 2008. Similar tests of goodwill performed in 2007, 2006 and 2005 did not result in impairment charges.

Revenue Recognition, Investment Management Fees

We earn revenue by providing investment management services pursuant to the terms of the underlying advisory contract and such revenue is based on a contractual investment advisory fee applied to the assets in each portfolio. Any fees collected in advance are deferred and recognized over the period earned.

 

67


Table of Contents

Fees related to structured finance products include collateralized loan and collateralized debt obligations (“CLOs” and “CDOs,” respectively) and consist of both senior management fees and subordinate management fees. Senior management fees on the CLOs and CDOs are calculated with the contractual fee rate applied against the current par value of the total collateral being managed. Subordinate management fees, also calculated with the contractual fee rate applied against the current par value of the total collateral being managed, are recognized only after certain portfolio criteria are met, such as interest coverage and asset over-collateralization levels.

Distribution and service fees are earned based upon a percentage of assets under management and are paid pursuant to the terms of the respective distribution and service fee contracts, which require a monthly payment from affiliated mutual funds.

Administration and transfer agent fees consist of administrative fees, shareholder service agent fees, fund administration fees, dealer concessions and transfer agent fees. Dealer concessions and transfer agent fees earned net of related expenses from the distribution and sale of affiliated mutual fund shares and other securities are recorded on a trade date basis.

Accounting for Income Taxes

The Company and its subsidiaries are included in the consolidated federal income tax return filed by PNX and each is party to a tax sharing agreement by and among PNX and its subsidiaries. In accordance with this agreement, federal income taxes are allocated as if each subsidiary’s tax liability had been calculated on a separate company basis, except that benefits for any net operating losses will be provided to the extent such loss is utilized in the consolidated federal tax return. As such, the consolidated tax provision is an aggregation of the allocation of taxes to the separate Company subsidiaries. Deferred tax assets and/or liabilities are determined by multiplying the differences between the financial reporting and tax reporting basis for assets and liabilities by the enacted tax rates expected to be in effect when such differences are recovered or settled. The effect on deferred taxes of a change in tax rates is recognized in income in the period that includes the enactment date. Valuation allowances on deferred tax assets are estimated based on assessments of the realizability of such amounts.

The ultimate tax outcome of many transactions is uncertain. Significant judgment is required in evaluating tax positions and in computing the tax provision including valuation allowances, the timing of reversals of net operating losses and other items, many of whose outcomes cannot be known at the date of the financial statements. Uncertain tax positions taken by the Company are accounted for under FIN 48, which may require certain benefits taken on a tax return to not be recognized in the financial statements when there is the potential for certain tax positions to be successfully challenged by the taxing authorities.

Deferred taxes mainly relate to net operating losses and intangible assets. A valuation allowance has been established relative to state deferred tax assets due to the inability to combine certain sub-groups for state income tax reporting purposes. Changes in this allowance could have a material effect on our financial position and results of operations.

Loss Contingencies

The likelihood that a loss contingency exists is evaluated using the criteria of SFAS No. 5, “ Accounting for Contingencies, ” and is recorded if the likelihood of a loss is considered both probable and reasonably estimable at the date of the financial statements.

Capital and Reserve Requirements

We currently have one subsidiary that is a broker-dealer registered with the Securities and Exchange Commission and is therefore subject to certain rules regarding minimum net capital, as defined by those rules. The subsidiary is required to maintain a ratio of “aggregate indebtedness” to “net capital,” as defined, which may

 

68


Table of Contents

not exceed 15 to 1 and must also maintain a minimum amount of net capital. Failure to meet these requirements could result in adverse consequences to us including additional reporting requirements, tighter ratios and business interruption. At September 30, 2008 and December 31, 2007, the ratio of aggregate indebtedness to net capital of the broker-dealer was well below the maximum allowed and the minimum net capital was well in excess of that required.

Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures About Market Risk

Market Risk

Our exposure to market risk is directly related to our role as investment advisor for various accounts we manage and the funds for which we act as advisor. Most of our revenue for the three years ended December 31, 2007 and the nine months ended September 30, 2008 was derived from investment management fees, which are typically based on the market value of assets under management. Accordingly, a decline in the prices of securities would cause our revenue and income to decline due to a decrease in the value of the assets we manage. In addition, such a decline could cause our clients to withdraw their funds in favor of investments offering higher returns or lower risk, which would cause our revenue and income to decline further.

We are also subject to market risk due to a decline in the prices of our investments, consisting primarily of marketable securities. At September 30, 2008, the fair value of the net position of these assets was $11.3 million. Assuming a 10% increase or decrease, the fair value would increase or decrease by $1.13 million at September 30, 2008.

Interest Rate Risk

On February 26, 2001, we entered into a $69.0 million subordinated note agreement with Phoenix Life due March 1, 2006, in exchange for debentures held by Phoenix Life. In December 2005 this agreement was renegotiated to provide for quarterly payments of $3.0 million. The renegotiated note matures in December 2010 and bears interest at an annual rate of 6.55%. The related note agreement contains financial and/or operating covenants including, among other provisions, requirements that the Company not exceed a specified debt to earnings ratio and maintain a minimum specified stockholder’s equity. At September 30, 2008 and at December 31, 2007, we were in compliance with all covenants under the note agreement. The outstanding balance on the note at September 30, 2008 and at December 31, 2007 was $33.0 million and $42.0 million, respectively. As the interest rate payable on this note is fixed, it would be unaffected in the event that interest rates were to increase.

 

69


Table of Contents

BUSINESS

Overview

We are a provider of investment management products and services to individuals and institutions. We operate a multi-manager asset management business, comprising a number of individual affiliated managers, each having its own distinct investment style, autonomous investment process and brand. We believe our customers value this approach, especially institutional customers who appreciate individual managers with distinctive cultures and styles.

Investors have an array of needs driven by factors such as market conditions, risk tolerance and investment goals. A key element of our business is to offer a variety of investment styles and multiple disciplines to meet those needs. To that end, for our mutual funds, we supplement the investment capabilities of our affiliated managers with those of select unaffiliated sub-advisors. We do that by partnering with these managers whose strategies are not typically available to retail mutual fund customers.

We provide our products in a number of forms and through multiple distribution channels. Our retail products include open-end mutual funds, closed-end funds and separately managed accounts. Our fund family of over 50 open-end funds is distributed primarily through intermediaries. Our five closed-end funds trade on the New York Stock Exchange. Retail separately managed accounts are comprised of intermediary programs sponsored and distributed by unaffiliated brokerage firms, and private client services, originated and maintained by our affiliated managers. We also manage institutional accounts for corporations, multi-employer retirement funds and foundations, endowments, special purpose funds and other types of institutions. Our earnings are primarily driven by asset-based investment management fees charged on these various products. These fees are based on a percentage of assets under management and are calculated using either daily or weekly average assets or assets at the end of the quarter.

Assets under management are an important driver of our financial performance. The majority of our revenues consist of fees based on the value of the assets we manage. Our pro forma assets under management, excluding PNX’s general account and Goodwin-managed third-party assets, as of September 30, 2008 totaled $27.0 billion. The mix of assets under management is diversified across products, both retail and institutional accounts, and by asset class. As of September 30, 2008, 50% of our pro forma assets by product were in open-end funds, 16% were in closed-end funds, 14% were in separately managed accounts and 20% were in institutional assets. As of September 30, 2008, 44% of our assets by investment category were in equity assets, 41% were in fixed income assets and 15% were in money market assets. We believe that this diversification provides us with the opportunity to address a wide range of investor needs and to offer products and services suited for various market environments.

Our Strengths

We believe the following business strengths position us to capitalize on the opportunities presented by the market for asset management products and services:

 

   

We offer our clients investment capabilities across a broad range of products. Our roster of affiliated managers and unaffiliated sub-advisors is comprised of investment management teams with expertise across a spectrum of investment capabilities. We have capabilities in traditional categories such as core, value and international equity, fixed income and money market, as well as specialized categories such as REITs and utilities. As of September 30, 2008, 61%, 69% and 63% of our third-party assets under management were in the top third of relative peer groups on a one, three and five year basis, respectively. See “Business—Our Performance” for additional information.

 

   

We offer products in multiple styles and multiple disciplines . Unlike many competitors of a similar size, our product set is highly diversified by manager, style and discipline. Our products are managed by a number of different managers, both affiliated and unaffiliated. We have multiple offerings by asset category (equity, fixed income, money market and alternative), in all market-caps (large, mid and small), in different styles (growth, blend and value) and with various investment approaches (fundamental, quantitative, thematic). By offering a broad array of products, we believe we can appeal

 

70


Table of Contents
 

to a greater number of investors and be less exposed to changes in market cycles and investor preferences. This provides the opportunity to participate in growth opportunities across different market cycles.

 

   

We distribute through multiple channels, with particular strength in retail distribution . We operate in both the institutional and retail markets. In retail markets, we have a broad presence in the national, regional and independent broker-dealer firms that are the major distributors of mutual funds and separately managed accounts to retail customers. In many of these firms, we have a number of products that are on the firms’ preferred “recommended” lists and on fee-based advisory programs. In 2007, our gross sales of retail mutual funds were $3.4 billion.

 

   

We provide an attractive environment for investment teams. Our affiliated managers maintain their own identity and participate in the earnings they generate through compensation arrangements. They are supported by shared distribution and administrative services, allowing them to focus their time and attention on managing client assets. We believe we provide an attractive environment for investment management professionals, which allows us to retain talent and attract new high-performing managers, teams and firms.

 

   

We have a strong and active product management and development capability. We have developed an active product management capability to allow for the continuous improvement of our product line. In our retail business, from 2005 through 2007 we completed 57 fund actions, comprised of launching or adopting new funds, changing sub-advisors and merging or liquidating funds. In addition, we have developed a number of new products that leverage our existing capabilities, through product line extensions such as our alternative fund of funds, Diversifier, and a new international REIT offering, or by identifying and acquiring new capabilities, such as our partnership with Vontobel Asset Management, the sub-advisor to our $1.1 billion Foreign Opportunities Fund.

Our Strategy

We believe we can enhance stockholder value by building upon our strengths and effectively executing the following strategies:

 

   

Maintain, extend and improve our offerings of high quality investment management capabilities . Our goal is to provide the highest quality products possible to our clients. In product categories where we do not have the capability from our affiliated managers, we partner with unaffiliated sub-advisors, selecting managers whose strategies are not typically available to retail mutual fund customers. We manage our product offerings in the same fashion that our distribution partners balance and manage their clientele’s portfolios, seeking to maximize returns while minimizing risks via a diversified, balanced suite of offerings with a long-term horizon.

 

   

Leverage our internal capabilities to develop new products . We intend to leverage our affiliated portfolio management capabilities by offering those capabilities in other product forms and extending them into new strategies. For example, our domestic REIT strategy was first developed for a closed-end fund, and was then introduced as an open-end fund, made available as an institutional account and within a variable annuity product. We then extended that domestic strategy into an international REIT offering in October 2007. We intend to seek to take similar steps with other investment capabilities. We also intend to continue to develop and introduce new offerings to meet the evolving needs of investors and to identify strong performing additional products that can be added to our line-up.

 

   

Build upon our current distribution access to generate higher levels of sales. We intend to selectively expand our distribution resources, including sales and relationship personnel. In the retail business, our wholesaling force is smaller than those of many of our competitors. We believe we can build upon the growth we have seen in the retail market by expanding these resources. In addition, through our intermediaries, we currently do business with a large number of producers that employ only one or two of our products. Our strategy is to focus on these producers in order to become one of

 

71


Table of Contents
 

their preferred mutual fund families. We believe this can be accomplished through appropriate incentives, focused activities and targeted marketing efforts. We also intend to expand into specific growth areas where we have a smaller presence, such as the RIA channel. This channel is one of the fastest growing components of the advisory industry.

 

   

Develop and attract additional high-caliber investment professionals . We believe we can attract high-caliber investment management professionals based on the relative attractiveness of our business model, which allows each affiliated manager to maintain its identity and participate in the earnings it generates. We intend to employ a variety of approaches to grow in this manner, including the expansion of existing teams and direct hiring of new teams. Similarly, we believe the structure of our business is attractive to sub-advisors looking for distribution and other support.

 

   

Enhance our shared administrative and distribution services and achieve greater economies of scale. We intend to continue to enhance our shared services to allow for even greater efficiencies and economies of scale. The spin-off provides several opportunities to enhance the scope of the shared services we provide to our affiliated managers. Specifically, we will now have control over the costs related to all forms of shared services and the ability to deploy expenditures to best serve a stand-alone asset management business. We believe the spin-off will provide additional savings related to costs shared with PNX, primarily facilities and administrative support.

Our Repositioning of the Business

During the period from 2002 through 2007, we undertook a number of critical actions to reposition our business for long-term growth and improved profitability. Through these actions, we focused on our operating structure, product mix, distribution strategy and operating expense base:

 

   

We streamlined our operating structure from being a collection of majority-owned and wholly owned affiliated firms into a single business of affiliated managers with common distribution and support operations.

 

   

We took actions to restructure our product portfolio with a focus on improved investment performance, focusing on mutual fund products as the initial stage of product repositioning.

 

   

We repositioned our distribution strategy to provide greater balance by distribution partner and with an increased focus on retail mutual fund distribution.

 

   

We took actions to significantly reduce our operating expenses.

Streamlined Operating Structure

We converted our operating structure from a collection of majority-owned and wholly owned affiliated firms into a single business that is comprised of individual affiliated managers, each with its own brand and identity, but supported by shared distribution and support services. To better align the interests between the affiliated managers and the overall company, this strategy required the buy-in of outstanding minority interests and facilitated the establishment of our shared services.

Restructured Product Portfolio

We introduced a new product strategy designed to address issues of product underperformance and a lack of breadth in our product line. Historically, a significant portion of our assets under management were concentrated in large-cap growth equity mandates offered in separately managed accounts and institutional accounts. As the equity markets fell dramatically from 2001 to 2003, we experienced material asset outflows. From 2002 to 2007, we experienced a net decrease in assets of $14.8 billion associated with these particular strategies.

In order to improve the overall quality of our fund products, we executed a strategy to rebuild our mutual fund product line-up. From 2005 to 2007, we completed 22 mutual fund mergers or liquidations. Simultaneously,

 

72


Table of Contents

we adopted or launched 35 new funds to fill gaps in product offerings, add diversification to our product set or replace underperforming strategies. The actions are summarized below:

 

Action

   2005    2006    2007    Total

New Funds

   11    2    1    14

Fund Adoptions

   2    19    0    21

Mergers

   1    6    5    12

Liquidations

   1    7    2    10
                   

Total

   15    34    8    57

The successful execution of our strategy is demonstrated in the recent performance of our products. The following table illustrates how our assets under management in funds achieving a rating of 3, 4 or 5 stars from Morningstar, Inc. have increased.

 

     As of December 31,     As of September 30,  

% of Assets Under Management

   2005     2006     2007     2008  

3 – 5-star funds

   39 %   53 %   75 %   82 %

1 & 2-star funds

   61 %   47 %   25 %   18 %

 

Note: Includes only assets for funds with at least one class rated by Morningstar, Inc. (“Morningstar”) and includes assets for the largest class for each fund. These assets do not include assets under management for money market funds. Morningstar is a provider of investment research in the United States and in major international markets. The Morningstar rating for funds is Morningstar’s measure of a fund’s risk-adjusted return, relative to other funds in the category. Funds are rated from one to five stars, with the best performers receiving five stars and the worst performers receiving a single star. We neither endorse nor adopt the methodology used, or the rating determinations made, by Morningstar.

Repositioned Distribution Strategy

To support our product restructuring, we repositioned our retail distribution strategy from its historical focus on separately managed accounts to an approach which emphasizes mutual funds. We refocused our wholesalers, which is our primary sales force, on selling a balance of mutual funds and separately managed accounts, and added dedicated managed account specialists. We also employed a multi-year effort to expand the number of producers, including third-party financial planners and advisors, doing business with our wholesalers. From January 2005 through November 2006, we added over 10,000 new producers with an average gross sale of approximately $225,000. These changes, in combination with the product strategy changes, have had a significant positive impact on our open-end mutual fund sales as illustrated in the chart below:

OPEN-END MUTUAL FUND SALES

LOGO

 

Note: Chart excludes money market fund sales.

(1) Compound Annual Growth Rate

 

73


Table of Contents

A second critical step in our distribution initiative was to implement changes in our strategy to gather institutional assets. In late 2006, we made personnel changes and adopted the strategy of coordinated distribution utilizing shared distribution resources in conjunction with specialists from each affiliated manager.

Reduced Operating Expenses

During the period 2003 to 2006, we took significant actions to appropriately size our cost structure and implement shared services. Our total headcount decreased from 700 to approximately 400. Movement to shared services helped reduce employment expenses by approximately $15.5 million, or 14%, from 2005 to 2007.

Generally speaking, we believe that in the asset management business an increase in assets under management to certain levels does not necessarily result in additional material fixed costs. Accordingly, we believe that we have an opportunity to expand our profit margins by increasing assets under management and associated revenues while continuing to apply disciplined expense management.

Impact of Repositioning on Cash Operating Income

While investment management fees declined from 2003 to 2007 by 25.6%, we have significantly grown cash operating income over this repositioning period. Retail investment advisory, administrative and transfer agent fees grew from $83.3 million in 2003 to $110.0 million in 2007. During this period, our cash operating income increased from $13.8 million in 2003 to $35.7 million in 2007.

Our Investment Products

Our assets under management are comprised of mutual fund assets (open- and closed-end), separately managed accounts (intermediary sponsored and private client) and institutional accounts (traditional institutional mandates and structured products).

Third-Party Assets Under Management By Product as of September 30, 2008

($ in billions)

 

Retail Products

  

Institutional Products

Mutual fund assets:

     Separately managed accounts:      Institutional accounts   $ 5.9

Open-end funds

  $ 13.3    Intermediary sponsored   $ 2.0    Structured products     1.3

Closed-end funds

    4.4    Private client accounts     1.8     

Total mutual fund assets

  $ 17.7   

Total managed account assets

  $ 3.8    Total institutional assets   $ 7.2
               

Total Third-Party Assets Under Management

  $ 28.7

Open-End Mutual Funds

As of September 30, 2008, we managed over 50 open-end funds, across a variety of equity and fixed income styles, including money market, asset allocation fund-of-funds and alternative investments, with total assets of $13.3 billion. As of September 30, 2008, approximately 43% of our mutual fund assets were managed by our affiliated teams.

Our equity fund offerings encompass a number of market caps and investment styles, including large-, mid- and small-cap funds offered in value, core and growth styles, and including dividend income, international, global and emerging market and sector-specific funds. Our equity funds represented $5.1 billion of the assets under management at September 30, 2008. Our fixed income fund offerings cover a broad range of fixed income

 

74


Table of Contents

asset classes, including core, multi-sector, tax-exempt and high yield. These fixed income funds represented $3.8 billion of our assets under management at June 30, 2008.

We offer a variety of money market funds, including individual funds focused on corporate, tax-exempt and government securities. Our money market funds comprised $4.4 billion in assets under management at September 30, 2008. Our fund family also includes a number of asset allocation fund-of-funds, including a set of target risk funds and one that invests primarily in alternative investments.

Our family of open-end mutual funds is comprised of the following:

Open-End Funds as of September 30, 2008

Fund Type/Name

   Assets    Advisory
Fee(1)
    Annualized
Return(2)
 
     ($ in millions)          3 YR     5 YR  
Alternative          

Virtus Alternatives Diversifier Fund(4)

   $ 131.6    0.10     n/a     n/a  

Virtus Global Infrastructure Fund

     77.6    0.65%-0.55 %(3)   5.40 %   n/a  

Virtus International Real Estate Securities Fund

     54.8    1.00-0.90 (3)   n/a     n/a  

Virtus Market Neutral Fund

     139.7    1.50     -5.10     -2.25 %

Virtus Real Estate Securities Fund

     1,082.2    0.75-0.65 (3)   6.94     14.61  
Balanced          

Virtus Balanced Fund

     754.2    0.55-0.45 (3)   1.53     3.86  

Virtus Income & Growth Fund

     221.4    0.70-0.60 (3)   0.98     3.68  

Virtus Allocation Balanced Fund

     65.5    0.50     0.64     5.73  
Equity          

Virtus All-Cap Growth Fund

     68.2    0.90-0.70 (3)   -4.21     1.60  

Virtus Capital Growth Fund

     315.3    0.70-0.60 (3)   -4.54     -0.48  

Virtus Growth & Income Fund

     204.9    0.75-0.65 (3)   0.70     5.47  

Virtus Growth Opportunities Fund

     34.0    0.75-0.65 (3)   -1.86     3.38  

Virtus Core Equity Fund

     108.8    0.70     0.14     6.45  

Virtus Index Fund

     36.7    0.20     0.53     5.22  

Virtus Disciplined Small-Cap Growth Fund

     20.8    0.75     -4.60     3.88  

Virtus Disciplined Small-Cap Opportunity Fund

     105.4    0.75     -5.46     4.00  

Virtus Disciplined Small-Cap Value Fund

     88.5    0.70     -2.10     8.90  

Virtus Value Equity Fund

     225.2    0.70     1.65     9.15  

Virtus Mid-Cap Growth Fund

     93.9    0.80-0.70 (3)   -6.63     -0.28  

Virtus Mid-Cap Value Fund

     546.5    0.75     2.79     10.78  

Virtus Quality Small-Cap Fund

     76.0    0.90-0.80 (3)   n/a     n/a  

Virtus Small-Cap Growth Fund

     86.4    1.00-0.80 (3)   -5.36     1.26  

Virtus Small-Cap Sustainable Growth Fund

     17.3    0.90-0.80 (3)   n/a     n/a  

Virtus Small-Cap Value Fund

     97.0    0.90-0.80 (3)   -5.69     4.41  

Virtus Small-Mid Cap Fund

     51.1    0.85     -0.50     4.41  

Virtus Strategic Growth Fund

     118.0    0.70-0.60 (3)   -3.90     -0.35  

Virtus Value Opportunities Fund

     71.5    0.75-0.65 (3)   -1.75     n/a  
Fixed Income          

Virtus Bond Fund

     174.5    0.50     2.65     2.98  

Virtus CA Tax-Exempt Bond Fund

     62.1    0.45-0.35 (3)   1.28     2.08  

Virtus Core Bond Fund

     58.0    0.45-0.35 (3)   2.20     2.15  

 

75


Table of Contents

Fund Type/Name

   Assets    Advisory
Fee(1)
     Annualized
Return(2)
     ($ in millions)           3 YR    5 YR

Virtus High Yield Fund

     95.8    0.65-0.55 (3)    -0.27    2.56

Virtus High Yield Income Fund

     48.1    0.45      -0.16    2.96

Virtus Intermediate Government Bond Fund

     29.8    0.45      5.12    3.96

Virtus Intermediate Tax-Exempt Bond Fund

     142.2    0.45      1.08    1.77

Virtus Short/Intermediate Bond Fund

     158.9    0.55      2.21    2.15

Virtus Tax-Exempt Bond Fund

     115.2    0.45      0.97    1.91

Virtus Institutional Bond Fund

     78.1    0.45-0.40 (3)    1.89    2.85

Virtus Multi-Sector Fixed Income Fund

     117.2    0.55-0.45 (3)    0.37    3.01

Virtus Multi-Sector Short Term Bond Fund

     1,691.2    0.55-0.45 (3)    1.10    2.21

Virtus Senior Floating Rate Fund

     14.9    0.60-0.50 (3)    n/a    n/a
Fund of Funds(4)            

Virtus Wealth Accumulator Fund

     n/a    0.10      -0.35    n/a

Virtus Wealth Builder Fund

     n/a    0.10      0.36    4.17

Virtus Wealth Guardian Fund

     n/a    0.10      0.49    3.61
International/Global            

Virtus Foreign Opportunities Fund

     1,113.0    0.85      4.93    13.14

Virtus Emerging Markets Opportunities Fund

     104.2    1.00      9.33    17.20

Virtus Worldwide Strategies Fund

     76.6    0.85-0.75 (3)    -0.84    6.09
Money Market Funds            

Virtus Insight Government Money Market Fund

     576.3    0.14-0.10 (3)    4.29    3.27

Virtus Insight Money Market Fund

     2,460.8    0.14-0.10 (3)    4.53    3.45

Virtus Insight Tax-Exempt Money Market Fund

     1,267.5    0.14-0.10 (3)    3.11    2.41

Virtus Money Market Fund

     85.5    0.40-0.30 (3)    3.80    2.76
               

Total Open-End Funds

   $ 13,362.4         
               

 

(1) Percentage of average daily net assets of each fund.

 

(2) Annualized return reflects performance of the largest share class as measured by net assets.

 

(3) These funds have breakpoints at which advisory fees decrease as assets in the funds increase.

 

(4) These funds invest in other Phoenix open-end mutual funds. The related assets are reflected in the balances of the respective funds.

Fund past performance is not necessarily an indication of how the Fund will perform in the future.

Closed-End Mutual Funds

We manage the assets of five closed-end funds as of September 30, 2008, each of which is traded on the New York Stock Exchange. Closed-end funds do not continually offer to sell and redeem their shares, rather, daily liquidity is provided by the ability to trade the shares of these funds at prices that may be above or below the shares’ net asset value. This distinguishing feature provides for a more stable source of investment management fees. Our closed-end products encompass utility and tactical asset allocation strategies provided by two of our affiliated managers. Our closed-end fund assets under management totaled $4.4 billion as of September 30, 2008.

 

76


Table of Contents

Our family of closed-end mutual funds is comprised of the following:

Closed-End Funds as of September 30, 2008

 

Fund Type/Name

   Assets    Advisory
Fee(1)
    Annualized
Return
 
     ($ in millions)          3 YR     5 YR  

Balanced

         

Zweig Total Return

   $ 496.2    0.70 %   3.80 %   4.49 %

DNP Select Income Fund Inc.

     2,805.0    0.60-0.50 (2)(3)   3.21     10.00  

Equity

         

Zweig Fund

     402.7    0.85     3.09     6.03  

Fixed

         

DTF Tax-Free Income Inc.

     188.7    0.50     -0.33     1.34  

Duff & Phelps Utility and Corporate Bond Trust Inc.

     476.2    0.50     1.61     2.28  
             

Total Closed-End Funds

   $ 4,368.8       
             

 

(1) Percentage of average net assets of each fund.

 

(2) Percentage of average weekly net assets. This fund has breakpoints at which advisory fees decrease as assets in the fund increase.

 

(3) Percentage of average weekly managed assets.

Fund past performance is not necessarily an indication of how the Fund will perform in the future.

Separately Managed Accounts

Intermediary sponsored programs are individual portfolios comprised primarily of investments that offer investors the opportunity for a greater degree of customization than packaged products. These programs enable the sponsor’s client to select managed account offerings for which the client pays an asset-based fee paid to the broker-dealer who, in turn, pays a management fee to us. We also offer private client services to high-net-worth individuals through several of our affiliated managers. Private clients of our affiliated investment firms are able to access a variety of investment strategies while benefiting from customized investment advisory services. Intermediary sponsored programs and private client account assets totaled $3.8 billion at September 30, 2008.

Institutional Accounts

We offer a variety of equity, fixed income and real estate investment trust strategies to institutional clients, including corporations, multi-employer retirement funds and foundations, as well as endowments and special purpose funds. Our institutional assets under management totaled $5.0 billion as of September 30, 2008. We also provide investment management services to certain funds available to purchasers of variable life and variable annuity products. As of September 30, 2008, we managed $0.9 billion of these assets. Additionally, we managed structured finance products with total assets of $1.3 billion at September 30, 2008.

As of September 30, 2008 we managed $1.3 billion of structured finance products. These products relate to investment management services we provide through a number of collateralized debt obligations (“CDOs”) and collateralized loan obligations (“CLOs”). We earn investment management fees for managing the collateral of the CDOs and CLOs. In 2007 we suspended new activities in these products. Due to the continued market turbulence and instability in the current credit and capital market environment we are no longer actively in this business other than to manage the remaining products until they mature or are redeemed.

 

77


Table of Contents

Significant Product Introductions

In October 2004, we adopted the Mid-Cap Value Fund with $17 million in assets. The fund grew to $1 billion in 2007 before it was partially closed to new investors and had $546 million at September 30, 2008. In June 2005, we adopted the Foreign Opportunities Fund and grew this fund from $86 million at the time of adoption to $1.1 billion at September 30, 2008.

In November 2005, we introduced our “alternative” investment fund-of-funds, the Diversifier, as an addition to our asset allocation fund-of-funds options. The Diversifier offers investors the opportunity to hold interests in a number of our alternative “non-correlated” investment options, such as REITs, global utilities and market neutral strategies, as well as several specialized ETFs. We have grown this fund to $405 million at September 30, 2008, despite not yet having a three-year track record.

In May 2006, we acquired the Harris Insight Funds, adding 18 funds to our existing mutual fund product line, including a diverse mix of equity, international, fixed income and money market funds. As of September 30, 2008, the Harris relationship represented $5.4 billion in assets under management, including $4.3 billion of money market funds.

Our Asset Managers

Our asset management services are provided by our affiliated managers as well as by unaffiliated external sub-advisors through sub-advisory agreements. These managers, which are registered investment advisors under the Investment Advisers Act, manage our mutual funds and closed-end funds, and provide investment management services for institutional and individual managed accounts. We provide our managers with consolidated distribution and administrative support, thereby allowing each affiliate to focus on asset management. We monitor the quality of the managers’ products by assessing their performance, style consistency and the discipline with which they apply their investment process.

Our affiliated firms manage investments in both retail and institutional products. In our retail mutual funds, we complement our affiliates’ skills with those of unaffiliated boutique sub-advisors who offer strategies which we believe would also appeal to investors. Our affiliated firms participate in the earnings they generate through compensation arrangements which include incentive bonus pools based on their affiliate’s profits and, in some cases, on the specific performance of each fund or account they manage. Our affiliated firms and sub-advisors, and their respective styles, products and assets under management, are as follows:

 

78


Table of Contents
   

Affiliated Managers

   

Duff & Phelps
Investment
Management

 

SCM Advisors

  

Kayne Anderson
Rudnick
Investment
Management

  

Oakhurst

Asset

Managers

 

Zweig

Advisors

 

Engemann

Asset Management

Affiliated Manager

Assets Under

Management at

September 30, 2008

($ in billions)

  $6.7   $3.3    $4.1    $1.2   $1.0   $0.2

 

Location

  Chicago, IL   San Francisco, CA    Los Angeles, CA    Scotts Valley, CA   New York, NY   Pasadena, CA

 

Investment Style

             

Equities

 

•   Fundamental

•   REITs

•   Utilities

 

•   Fundamental

•   Large, Mid, Small, Micro and All Cap Growth

  

•   Fundamental

•   Quality at a Reasonable Price

•   Small Cap Core, Growth & Value

•   Mid Cap Core

  

•   Quantitative

•   Large Cap Value

•   Large Cap Core

 

•   Fundamental

•   Small Cap Value

•   Tactical Asset Allocation

 

•   Fundamental

•   Small Cap Growth

 

Fixed

Income

 

•   Tax Advantaged

 

•   Core, Core Plus

•   High Quality High Yield

  

•   CA Muni

    

•   Tactical Asset Allocation

 

 

Products

             

Open-End

Funds

  ü   ü    ü    ü   ü   ü

 

Closed-End

Funds

  ü           ü  

 

Separately

Managed

Accounts

—Intermediary

    ü    ü        ü

 

Separately

Managed

Accounts—

Private

Client

    ü    ü        ü

 

Institutional

  ü   ü    ü    ü     ü

 

 

79


Table of Contents
   

Mutual Fund Sub-Advisory Relationships

   

Harris Investment
Management

 

Goodwin Capital
Advisers

 

Vontobel Asset
Management

 

SASCO Capital

 

Other

Company Assets Under

Management at

September 30, 2008

($ in billions)

  $5.8   $2.6*   $1.2   $0.5   $0.4

 

Location / Date of

Affiliation

  Chicago, IL / 2006   Hartford, CT / N.A.   New York, NY / 2005   Fairfield, CT / 2004   Various

 

Investment Style

         

Equities

 

•   Quantitative

•   Core, Growth & Value

•   Large, Mid & Small Cap

   

•   Fundamental

•   International

 

•   Fundamental

•   Contrarian Mid Cap Value

 

•   Quantitative & Fundamental

•   Large-Mid Cap Growth

•   Market Neutral

•   International

 

Fixed Income

 

•   Money Market

•   Muni

•   Government

•   Investment Grade

 

•   Multi-Sector Approach

•   Core & Core Plus

•   Short, Intermediate and Long-Duration

•   Money Market

•   CA Muni

     

 

* Represents pro forma assets under management, which exclude the general account and certain other mandates which will not be part of the Company following the spin-off.

 

80


Table of Contents

Our Performance

As a result of our repositioning, our performance profile has significantly improved in the past four years.

PERCENTAGE OF THIRD-PARTY ASSETS UNDER MANAGEMENT

IN TOP ONE-THIRD OF PEER GROUP

LOGO

 

Note: This chart includes assets under management for all lines of business for which peer group rankings are available from Lipper, Inc. for our retail products and from PSN/Informa Solutions, Inc. for our institutional products. Lipper, Inc. is an organization that ranks the performance of mutual funds. Funds are ranked within a universe of funds similar in portfolio characteristics and capitalization. PSN/Informa Investment Solutions, Inc. is a supplier of investment manager database reporting and research tools, including performance measurement and universe comparison. We neither endorse nor adopt the methodology used, or the rating determinations made, by Lipper, Inc. and PSN/Informa Investment Solutions, Inc.

Our Investment Advisory, Administration and Transfer Agent Fees

We provide investment management services to funds and accounts pursuant to investment management agreements. With respect to mutual funds and closed-end funds, we receive fees based on each fund’s average daily or weekly net assets. With respect to separately managed and institutional accounts, we generally receive fees, on a quarterly basis, based on the value of the assets managed on a particular date, such as the end of a quarter.

Pursuant to sub-advisory agreements, our unaffiliated firms provide sub-advisory services to our mutual funds and are responsible for the day-to-day investment activities of the majority of those funds.

 

     Net Investment Advisory,
Administration and Transfer Agent Fees
Years Ended December 31,
             2007                2006                2005      
($ in millions)     

Investment advisory fees

        

Open-end funds

   $ 58.7    $ 52.7    $ 47.8

Closed-end funds

     26.2      23.5      23.3

Separately managed accounts

     29.5      35.7      52.4

Institutional products

     22.5      30.9      44.4
                    

Total investment advisory fees

     136.9      142.8      167.9

Administration fees – funds

     15.0      12.2      9.3

Transfer agent fees – funds

     6.3      5.5      4.8
                    

Total

   $ 158.2    $ 160.5    $ 182.0
                    

Our advisory fee schedules for mutual funds currently provide for maximum annual fees ranging from 0.10% to 1.50% of average assets under management, depending on the type of fund. Maximum fees in the case

 

81


Table of Contents

of the closed-end funds currently range from 0.50% to 0.85% of total net assets. For separately managed accounts, fees are negotiated and are based primarily on asset size, portfolio complexity and individual needs. For separately managed accounts, fees can range from 0.35% to 1.00% for equity and 0.25% to 0.50% for fixed income strategies.

We pay each of our sub-advisors a portfolio advisory fee for their services. The sub-advisory fees are based on the percentage of the aggregate amount of average daily net assets in the funds they sub-advise. Most fee schedules provide for rate declines as asset levels increase to certain thresholds.

We also receive fees from the open-end funds and certain of the closed-end funds for acting as administrator for such funds. Under these arrangements, PEPCO provides administrative services, such as recordkeeping and preparing and filing documents required to comply with federal and state securities laws. Additionally, we receive fees from the open-end funds for serving as transfer and dividend disbursing agent, which means that PEPCO is responsible for handling orders for shares of our mutual funds.

Our Retail Mutual Fund Investment Management Agreements

Each of our mutual funds has entered into an investment management agreement with a Company advisory subsidiary (each, an “Adviser”). Although specific terms of agreements vary, the basic terms are similar. Pursuant to the agreements, the Adviser provides overall management services to each fund, subject to supervision by the fund’s board of directors. The investment management agreements are approved initially by fund shareholders and must be approved annually by each fund’s board of directors, including a majority of the directors who are not “interested persons” of the Adviser. Agreements may be terminated by either party upon 60 days’ written notice, and may terminate automatically in certain situations, for example, a “change in control” of the Adviser.

Each fund bears all expenses associated with its operations, including the costs associated with the issuance and redemption of securities, where applicable. The funds do not bear compensation expenses of directors or officers of the fund who are employed by the Company or its subsidiaries. In some cases, to the extent certain enumerated expenses exceed a specified percentage of a fund’s or a portfolio’s average net assets for a given year, the Adviser may absorb such excess through a reduction in the management fee and, if necessary, pay such expenses so that the year-to-date net expense will not exceed the specified percentage.

Our Distribution

Our principal retail marketing strategy is to distribute funds and separately managed accounts through financial intermediaries to individuals. We have a broad reach in this marketplace, with distribution partners that include national and regional broker-dealers, independent broker-dealers and independent financial advisory firms. We support these distribution partners with a team of regional sales professionals (“wholesalers”), a national account relationship group and separate teams for the retirement market and the registered investment advisory market. Our sales and marketing professionals serve as a resource to financial advisors seeking to help clients address wealth management issues and support the marketing of our products and services tailored to this marketplace. Over 18,000 financial advisors placed mutual fund trades with us in 2007.

We also commit significant resources to serving high-net-worth clients who access investment advice outside of traditional retail broker-dealer channels. Specialized teams at our affiliates develop relationships in this market and deal directly with these clients.

Our institutional distribution strategy combines both a coordinated and partner-centric model. Our product specialists, who are part of the portfolio management teams at our affiliated managers, team with sales generalists and consultant relationship personnel, representing all of our investment strategies. Through

 

82


Table of Contents

relationships with consultants, they target key market segments, including foundations and endowments, corporate, public and Taft-Hartley pension plans.

Our Broker-Dealer Services

Phoenix Equity Planning Corporation, or PEPCO, a broker-dealer registered under the Exchange Act, serves as principal underwriter and national wholesale distributor of open-end mutual funds and managed accounts. PEPCO also provides a wide range of investment management support services, including fund administration and transfer agent services. Mutual fund shares are distributed by PEPCO under sales agreements with unaffiliated national and regional broker-dealers and financial institutions. PEPCO also markets advisory services of affiliated asset managers to sponsors of managed account programs.

Our Administrative Services

PEPCO also acts as administrative agent of each trust, which means that PEPCO is responsible for managing the business affairs of our mutual funds subject to the oversight of the funds’ trustees. Administrative services include recordkeeping, preparing and filing documents required to comply with Federal and state securities laws, legal administration and compliance services, supervising the activities of various of the funds’ other service providers and providing assistance in connection with the funds’ shareholder meetings, as well as providing office space and facilities, equipment and personnel that may be necessary for managing and administering the business affairs of the funds.

Our Transfer Agent Services

PEPCO also acts as transfer and dividend disbursing agent of each trust, which means that PEPCO is responsible for handling orders for shares of our mutual funds. Transfer agent services include receiving and processing orders for purchases, exchanges and redemptions of fund shares; conveying payments; maintaining shareholder accounts; preparing shareholder meeting lists; mailing, receiving and tabulating proxies; mailing shareholder reports and prospectuses; withholding taxes on shareholder accounts; preparing and filing required forms for dividends and distributions; preparing and mailing confirmation forms, statements of account and activity statements; and providing shareholder account information.

Our Competition

We face significant competition from a wide variety of financial institutions, including other asset management companies, as well as from proprietary products offered by our distribution sources such as banks, broker-dealers and financial planning firms. Competition in our businesses is based on several factors including investment performance, access to distribution channels, service to advisors and their clients and fees charged. Our competitors, which include larger companies, often offer similar products, use similar distribution sources, offer less expensive products, have greater access to key distribution channels and have greater resources than us.

Our Regulatory Matters

We are subject to regulation by the SEC, FINRA and other federal and state agencies and self-regulatory organizations. Each advisor, including unaffiliated sub-advisors, is registered with the SEC under the Investment Advisers Act. Each closed-end fund, open-end fund and defined portfolio is registered with the SEC under the Investment Company Act. Each broker-dealer is registered with the SEC under the Securities Exchange Act and is a member of FINRA.

The financial services industry is one of the most highly regulated in the United States, and failure to comply with related laws and regulations can result in the revocation of registrations, the imposition of censures or fines, and the suspension or expulsion of a firm and/or its employees from the business.

 

83


Table of Contents

All of our funds currently available for sale are qualified in all 50 states, Washington, DC, Puerto Rico, and the U.S. Virgin Islands. Most aspects of our investment management business, including the business of the sub-advisors, are subject to various federal and state laws and regulations. These laws and regulations are primarily intended to benefit the investment product shareholder and generally grant supervisory agencies and bodies broad administrative powers, including the power to limit or restrict us and any sub-advisor from carrying on its investment management business in the event that it fails to comply with such laws and regulations. In such an event, the possible sanctions, which may be imposed, include the suspension of individual employees, limitations on our engaging in the investment management business for specified periods of time, the revocation of the advisors’ registrations as investment advisors or other censures and fines.

Our officers, directors, and employees may, from time to time, own securities that are also held by one or more of our funds. Our internal policies with respect to personal investments are established pursuant to the provisions of the Investment Company Act and/or the Investment Advisers Act. Employees, officers, and directors who, in the function of their responsibilities, meet the requirements of the Investment Company Act or Investment Advisers Act, or of FINRA regulations, must disclose personal securities holdings and trading activity. Those employees, officers and directors with investment discretion and access to investment decisions are subject to additional restrictions with respect to the pre-clearance of the purchase or sale of securities over which they have investment discretion or beneficial interest. Other restrictions are imposed upon access persons with respect to personal transactions in securities held, recently sold or contemplated for purchase by the Company’s open-end and closed-end funds. All access persons are required to report holdings and transactions, on an annual and quarterly basis pursuant to the provisions of the Investment Company Act and Investment Advisers Act. In addition, certain transactions are restricted so as to seek to avoid the possibility of improper use of information relating to the management of client accounts.

Our Employees

As of September 30, 2008, we had approximately 345 full time equivalent employees. None of our employees is a union member. We consider our relations with our employees to be good.

Our Properties and Facilities

Our principal offices are currently located at 56 Prospect Street, Hartford, Connecticut 06102. We will lease office space from PNX at our current location for our principal offices for a transitionary period. We will be relocating our principal offices to 100 Pearl St. 9 th Floor, Hartford, Connecticut 06103. In addition, our wholly owned asset management firms lease office space in Illinois, California and New York, which will remain unchanged following the spin-off.

Our Legal Proceedings

We are regularly involved in litigation and arbitration, both as a defendant and as a plaintiff. In addition, various regulatory bodies regularly make inquiries of us and, from time to time, conduct examinations or investigations concerning our compliance with, among other things, securities laws, laws governing the activities of broker-dealers and other laws and regulations affecting our products. It is not feasible to predict or determine the ultimate outcome of all legal or regulatory proceedings or to provide reasonable ranges of potential losses. We believe that the outcomes of our litigation and regulatory matters are not likely, either individually or in the aggregate, to have a material adverse effect on our consolidated financial condition. However, given the large or indeterminate amounts sought in certain of these matters and the inherent unpredictability of litigation and regulatory matters, it is possible that an adverse outcome in certain matters could, from time to time, have a material adverse effect on our results of operations or cash flows in particular quarterly or annual periods. See “Risk Factors,” Note 10 to our audited consolidated financial statements (December 31, 2007, 2006 and 2005) and Note 4 to our unaudited consolidated financial statements (September 30, 2008 and 2007) in this information statement for additional information.

 

84


Table of Contents

MANAGEMENT

Directors and Executive Officers

The following table sets forth information regarding individuals who are expected to serve as our directors and executive officers following the spin-off, including their anticipated positions with the Company following the spin-off.

We have identified those individuals who, in addition to Mr. Aylward, we expect to be members of our Board. We selected our director nominees with the assistance of an external director search firm and in consultation with PNX while we are a wholly owned subsidiary of PNX. The nominees will be presented to our sole stockholder, PNX, for election effective as of the distribution date. Our new directors will be elected for terms of up to 3 years, as described in more detail under “—Board of Directors” below.

 

Name

   Age   

Positions

Mark C. Treanor

   61    Director and Non-Executive Chairman

James R. Baio

   54    Director

Susan F. Cabrera

   38    Director

Diane M. Coffey

   66    Director

Timothy A. Holt

   55    Director

Edward M. Swan, Jr.

   67    Director

George R. Aylward, Jr.

   44    President, Chief Executive Officer and Director

Michael A. Angerthal

   41    Chief Financial Officer

Nancy G. Curtiss

   55    Head of Operations

J. Steven Neamtz

   49    Head of Retail Distribution

Francis G. Waltman

   46    Head of Product Development

Directors

Information about each person who will serve as a director of the Company effective as of the distribution date is set forth below.

Mr. Treanor served as Senior Executive Vice President, General Counsel and Secretary of Wachovia Corporation from 2001 to August 2008 with responsibilities for legal, regulatory, corporate governance and government relations activities for all domestic and international businesses, including Evergreen Investments, Wachovia’s asset management division which provides mutual funds, institutional portfolios, alternative investments and separately managed accounts to institutional and individual investors, and was a member of Wachovia’s Operating Committee which was responsible for overall management of the Corporation. Previously, from 1999 until 2001, he held similar responsibilities as Executive Vice President, General Counsel and Secretary of First Union Corporation, Wachovia’s predecessor which he joined in 1998 after serving as President and Senior Partner of the law firm Treanor, Pope & Hughes, which he founded.

Mr. Baio was Chief Financial Officer and Executive Vice President of Capmark Financial Group, Inc., a private equity portfolio company engaged in global real estate finance, from 2006 until his retirement in 2007. Prior to that, from 1989 to 2006, he held various positions at Franklin Resources, Inc., a global investment management organization known as Franklin Templeton Investments. He served as Chief Financial Officer, Treasurer and Executive Vice President, Chief Administrative Officer, Senior Vice President and Treasurer, Templeton Mutual Funds and Mutual Series Mutual Funds and Senior Vice President and Risk Manager. Prior to that, he was Senior Manager, Audit and Tax at Ernst & Young from 1977 to 1989.

Ms. Cabrera is currently a consultant and executive educator. She began at Capital Z Financial Services as a Principal in 1998, and was promoted to Partner in 2001. It was at Capital Z where she founded the successor fund to Insurance Partners valued at $1.85 billion. Prior to that, she was Vice President at Insurance Partners Advisors, LP, a private equity firm, from 1994 to 2003 and held various positions at Morgan Stanley and Company from 1992 to 1994. Ms. Cabrera has served as a member of the board of directors of Hanover Investors and its affiliated funds since 2006.

 

85


Table of Contents

Ms. Coffey has been a Managing Director and partner of Peter J. Solomon Company, Ltd., an independent investment banking firm, since 2000. From 1996 to 2000, she served as the firm’s Chief Administrative Officer. From 1990 to 1996, she held various positions with The Dreyfus Corporation. She was Vice President, Corporate Communications, Director of Corporate Communications, Portfolio Manager for the Dreyfus Third Century Fund, Government and Community Affairs and Internal Communications, Portfolio Manager, and assistant to the Chairman.

Mr. Holt held various positions with Aetna, Inc. from 1977 until his retirement in 2008. He was Senior Vice President and Chief Investment Officer from 1997 to 2008, Chief Enterprise Risk Officer from 2005 to 2007, Senior Vice President and Chief Financial Officer of Aetna Retirement Services from 1996 to 1997, Vice President of Portfolio Management Group from 1992 to 1995, Vice President of Aetna Portfolio Management from 1991 to 1992, Vice President - Finance and Treasurer from 1989 to 1991, Vice President of Public Bonds from 1987 to 1989, Property/Casualty Portfolio Manager from 1983 to 1987, Investment Officer from 1981 to 1982 and Investment Officer/Analyst from 1977 to 1981.

Mr. Swan served as President of FIS Group, an asset management firm, from 2002 until his retirement in 2007. Prior to that he taught at Florida A&M’s Graduate School of Business and Industry from 2000 to 2002. He also served as Managing Director of MFS Asset Management from 1997 to 2000, Vice President of UBS Asset Management from 1996 to 1997 and Managing Director of Mitchell Hutchins Asset Management from 1988 to 1996. In addition, he was Senior Vice President of W. R. Lazard & Co. from 1985 to 1988, Senior Vice President of Franklin Management Co. 1984 to 1985, and Analyst at Prudential Insurance Co. 1975 to 1984.

Harris Bankcorp will have the right to designate two additional members of the Board at the time of the spin-off.

Mr. Aylward’s information is presented under “–Executive Officers” below because he will be an employee director.

Executive Officers

Information about each person who will serve as an executive officer of the Company immediately following the spin-off is set forth below. After the spin-off, none of these individuals will continue to be employees of PNX.

Mr. Aylward is President and will be Chief Executive Officer. Mr. Aylward has been Senior Executive Vice President and President, Asset Management, of PNX since February 2007. He has also served as President of the Company since November 6, 2006. Previously, Mr. Aylward served as Senior Vice President, Asset Management of PNX since November 6, 2006. Mr. Aylward also served as Senior Vice President and Chief Operating Officer, Asset Management, of PNX from 2004 through 2006, and as Chief of Staff to Dona D. Young, Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer of PNX, from 2002 through 2004. Mr. Aylward joined Phoenix in 1996 and served in several senior financial positions in its Asset Management business prior to 2002.

Mr. Angerthal is our Chief Financial Officer. Mr. Angerthal also serves as our principal accounting officer. Mr. Angerthal joined the Company on October 6, 2008. Prior to joining the Company, Mr. Angerthal had been the Chief Financial Officer of CBRE Realty Finance from 2005 to 2008. Prior to that, he held several positions with GE Corporation from 1996 to 2005. From 2002 to 2005, he served as Manager, Financial Planning & Analysis of GE Real Estate; from 1999 to 2002, he served as Staff Analyst, Investor Relations of GE Capital Corp.; and from 1996 to 1999, he served as Director, Finance of NBC. Prior to GE, he was a manager of business assurance in the audit practice of Coopers & Lybrand in New York.

 

86


Table of Contents

Ms. Curtiss is our Senior Vice President, Operations. She is responsible for operations, mutual fund transfer agency and shareholder servicing, performance and analytics, and institutional product operations in several locations. She also works with key individuals at affiliated managers to provide support, with a particular focus on enterprise-wide operations. She has been associated with Virtus Investment Partners and its predecessor, Phoenix Investment Partners, in various capacities since 1987. She previously served as Treasurer and Chief Financial Officer for Phoenix Investment Partners’ mutual funds and their boards, and managed PNX’s mutual fund accounting and administration. She has 28 years experience in the asset management and financial services business, including financial planning, asset/liability management, performance measurement, internal controls and product development, including 11 years specifically in the mutual funds arena.

Mr. Neamtz is Senior Vice President, Retail Distribution, a title and position he has held at PNX since he joined there in December 2007 to direct the retail distribution efforts for PNX’s family of mutual funds and its separately managed account offerings. Prior to joining PNX, Mr. Neamtz had been Managing Partner of Ridgeline Capital, LLC from 2006 to 2007 with responsibility for business management. Prior to that, he held several positions with AIG SunAmerica, Inc. From 1996 to 2006, he served as Chief Executive Officer and Director of AIG SunAmerica Capital Services, Inc., a subsidiary of AIG SunAmerica that distributes annuities, mutual funds and asset management products, and as Executive Vice President and Director of AIG SunAmerica Asset Management, Inc.

Mr. Waltman is Senior Vice President, Product Development, a title and position he has held at the Company since July 28, 2008. Prior to that, he held several positions at the Company, including Senior Vice President, Product Development and Management from February 2006 to December 2007, Vice President, Product Development and Management from January 2005 to February 2006 Chief Administrative Officer from August 2003 to December 2004 and Second Vice President from October 2002 to August 2003. Mr. Waltman first joined the Company in August 1990. Mr. Waltman currently serves as Senior Vice President for numerous trusts and mutual funds sponsored by the Company.

Board of Directors

Our bylaws will provide that our Board will have a minimum of three members and that the number of members of our Board will be fixed by a majority vote of our Board. Our certificate of incorporation and our bylaws will provide that our Board is divided into three classes. The term of the first class of directors expires at our 2009 annual meeting of stockholders, the term of the second class of directors expires at our 2010 annual meeting of stockholders and the term of the third class of directors expires at our 2011 annual meeting of stockholders. At each of our annual meetings of stockholders, the successors of the class of directors whose term expires at that meeting of stockholders will be elected for a three year term, one class being elected each year by our stockholders. Our directors may be removed only for cause by a majority vote of stockholders. Any vacancies in our Board caused by removal of a director may be filled at a meeting of stockholders. Any vacancies in our Board caused by death, resignation, removal of a director (that is not filled at a stockholder meeting) or otherwise, or by an increase in the number of directors by a majority of our Board, will be filled by a majority of the directors then in office. A significant majority of our Board will consist of independent, non-management directors who meet the criteria for independence required by the             . Except for Mr. Aylward, we do not expect that any of our Board members will have been or will be an employee of the Company.

Director Independence

A majority of the directors of our Board must meet the criteria for independence established by our Board in accordance with                  rules. Under these rules, a director will not qualify as independent unless our Board affirmatively determines that the director has no material relationship with the Company. Our Governance Committee (described in more detail under “—Governance Committee” below) will recommend, and our Board will adopt, a set of categorical standards (the “Categorical Independence Standards”) to assist our Board in making independence determinations. These Categorical Independence Standards may be found on our web site at www.Virtus.com, in the Investor Relations section, under the heading “Corporate Governance.”

 

87


Table of Contents

Committees of Our Board

Our Board will establish the following four standing committees to assist it with its responsibilities: Audit, Compensation, Governance and Finance. All members of the Audit, Compensation and Governance Committees will meet the criteria for independence as established by                 , the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 and related SEC rules and regulations. Each of the Committees is described in greater detail below. The Board will establish written charters for each of the Committees, which will be available on our web site at www.Virtus.com, in the Investor Relations section, under the heading “Corporate Governance.” Following the spin-off, any changes to the charters will be reflected on our web site.

Audit Committee

We expect to designate members of the Audit Committee of our Board (the “Audit Committee”) on or prior to the spin-off. Our Audit Committee will report to our Board and to be responsible for overseeing and monitoring our financial accounting and reporting process, the system of internal control over financial reporting established by management and our audit process. The Board will adopt a written charter for the Audit Committee which will conform to requirements under applicable law, SEC regulations and                      listing standards. The charter will set out the responsibilities, authority and specific duties of the Audit Committee. It will also specify the structure and membership requirements of the committee, as well as the relationship of the Audit Committee to our independent registered public accounting firm, internal auditor and management. Specifically, the charter will require that the Audit Committee be comprised of at least three directors, all of whom must be independent under                      rules, the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 and related SEC rules and regulations. In addition, each member of the Audit Committee will be financially literate within the meaning of                      listing standards, and at least one member will be an “audit committee financial expert,” as determined by our Board in accordance with SEC rules.

The Audit Committee will oversee our financial reporting process on behalf of our Board. Our management has the primary responsibility for the preparation, presentation and integrity of our financial statements and for our reporting process, including its systems of internal control over financial reporting. PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP (“PwC”) is our independent registered public accounting firm, responsible for auditing our annual financial statements and performing quarterly reviews. In fulfilling its responsibilities, the Audit Committee relies, without independent verification, on the information provided by our management and by PwC.

In fulfilling its oversight responsibilities, the Audit Committee will review and meet and discuss with our management and with PwC, our audited financial statements (the “audited statements”). The Audit Committee will also discuss with PwC the matters required to be discussed by the Statement on Auditing Standards No. 114, The Auditor’s Communication With Those Charged With Governance , as adopted by the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (the “PCAOB”) in Rule 3200T.

Additionally, the Audit Committee will meet throughout the year with PwC, our chief financial officer and our internal auditor to discuss the results of their examinations and evaluations of our internal control over financial reporting and of the overall quality, not just the acceptability, of our financial reporting process. The meetings with PwC may occur both with and without members of management present. The meetings with the chief financial officer and the internal auditor may occur both with and without other members of management present.

The Audit Committee will receive from PwC the written disclosure and the letter required by Independence Standards Board Standard No. 1 (Independence Standards Board Standard No. 1, Independence Discussions with Audit Committees), as adopted by the PCAOB in Rule 3600T and discussed with PwC, its independence from the Company. PwC will confirm in such letter that, in its professional judgment, it is independent of the Company within the meaning of the federal securities laws. The Audit Committee will consider whether provision of the non-audit services rendered by PwC during our most recent fiscal year is compatible with maintaining the independence of such auditors.

 

88


Table of Contents

Compensation Committee

We expect to designate members of the Compensation Committee of our Board (the “Compensation Committee”) on or prior to the spin-off. Our Compensation Committee will consist of independent members of our Board, and will meet at scheduled times during the year. Its purpose will be to assist our Board in fulfilling its responsibility to maximize long-term return to stockholders by ensuring that directors and employees are compensated according to our compensation philosophies, objectives and policies. The Compensation Committee’s responsibilities will be explicitly set forth within the terms of its charter, and will be reviewed by our Board at least once a year. The charter will set out the responsibilities, authority and specific duties of the Compensation Committee. It will also specify the structure and membership requirements for the Compensation Committee.

Governance Committee

We expect to designate members of the Governance Committee of our Board (the “Governance Committee”) on or prior to the spin-off. Our Governance Committee will be responsible for proposing qualified candidates to our Board. In considering candidates for nomination to our Board, the Governance Committee will seek individuals with strong intellectual ability, breadth of experience, demonstrated professional achievement, diverse backgrounds and the highest integrity. Prospective directors should also be able and willing to devote significant attention to our needs through regular attendance at meetings, preparation for meetings and availability for regular consultation between meetings.

The Governance Committee may also consider particular areas of expertise with respect to a given vacancy either because of needs arising from the retirement of a director or those arising out of changes in our business focus, our industry or the regulatory environment.

The Governance Committee will look to its members and to other directors for recommendations for new directors. It may also retain a search firm and will consider individuals recommended by stockholders. Stockholders should submit their recommendation as outlined under “—Stockholder and Interested Party Communications.” If a vacancy on our Board exists or is anticipated, the Governance Committee will evaluate all proposed nominees in light of the standards above, as well as others deemed relevant. Following its evaluation of all proposed nominees and consultation with our chief executive officer, the Governance Committee will recommend to our Board the individual(s) it considers most qualified to be nominated to run for election to our Board. The Board will make the final determination as to the individual(s) who will be nominated to run for election.

Finance Committee

We expect to designate members of the Finance Committee of our Board (the “Finance Committee”) on or prior to the spin-off. Our Finance Committee will meet at scheduled times during the year. Its purpose will be to assist our Board in fulfilling its responsibilities with respect to the oversight of our financial policies and the general supervision of our affiliated managers, subsidiaries and material assets. The Finance Committee will also exercise general supervision over our relationships with our unaffiliated sub-advisors. The Finance Committee’s responsibilities will be explicitly set forth within the terms of its charter, and will be reviewed by our Board at least once a year. The charter will set out the responsibilities, authority and specific duties of the Finance Committee. It will also specify the structure and membership requirements for the Finance Committee.

Board Committee Independence

Only directors who are not current or former employees of the Company or its affiliates (“Non-employee Directors”) may be members of the Audit Committee, the Compensation Committee or the Governance Committee. Our Board will limit membership of the Audit Committee, Compensation Committee and Governance Committee to independent, non-management directors. Members of these three committees must also meet certain other independence standards, including those of                     . The Audit, Compensation and Governance Committees have authority to retain advisors to help fulfill their responsibilities.

 

89


Table of Contents

CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

Following the spin-off, we will initially observe corporate governance practices and principal governance documents substantially the same as those currently adopted by PNX. Our principal governance documents will be as follows:

 

   

Corporate Governance Guidelines.

 

   

Board committee charters:

 

  ¡  

Audit Committee charter,

 

  ¡  

Compensation Committee charter, and

 

  ¡  

Governance Committee charter.

 

   

Code of Conduct.

Our Board will be responsible for providing effective governance over our affairs. Our corporate governance practices will be designed to align the interests of our Board and management with those of our stockholders and to promote honesty and integrity. More information about our corporate governance will be found on our web site at www.Virtus.com, in the Investor Relations section, under the heading “Corporate Governance.”

Our Board plans to adopt Corporate Governance Principles, which will outline our corporate governance policies and procedures. These principles, which will embody many of our long-standing practices and incorporate our current corporate governance best practices, will be available on our web site identified above. Copies may also be obtained by contacting our Corporate Secretary at one of the addresses listed under “—Stockholder and Interested Party Communications.”

Executive Sessions of Our Board

As will be provided in the Corporate Governance Principles, our non-management directors will meet in executive session at each regular Board meeting.

Board Attendance and Annual Meeting Policy

As will be provided in the Corporate Governance Principles, our directors will be expected to attend our Annual Meetings of Stockholders, Board meetings and meetings of the committees on which they serve. Each of our directors will be expected to attend at least 75% of the meetings of our Board and committees on which he or she serves.

Code of Conduct

We will adopt a written Code of Conduct which applies to all of our directors, officers and employees, including our principal executive officer, principal financial officer and principal accounting officer. We are committed to the highest standards of ethical and professional conduct and the Code of Conduct will provide guidance on how to uphold these standards. The Code of Conduct is available on our web site at www.Virtus.com, in the Investor Relations section, under the heading “Corporate Governance.” We intend to post any amendments to, or waivers of, the Code of Conduct applicable to our principal executive officer, principal financial officer or principal accounting officer on our web site. You may request a printed copy of the Code of Conduct by writing to the Corporate Secretary at either of the addresses listed under “—Stockholder and Interested Party Communications.”

Policy Regarding Transactions with Related Persons

Our Board will adopt a written Policy Regarding Transactions with Related Persons (the “Related Person Policy”). Pursuant to the Related Person Policy, any Related Person (as defined by Item 404(a) of Regulation S–K)

 

90


Table of Contents

must promptly report to the Company’s General Counsel any direct or indirect material interest in any transaction that is reportable by the Company in its Proxy Statement pursuant to Item 404(a) of Regulation S–K (each, a “Related Person Transaction”). Pursuant to the Related Person Policy, no Related Person Transaction may be consummated or shall continue without the approval or ratification of the Audit Committee and any director interested in a Related Person Transaction shall recuse himself or herself from any such vote.

Transactions with Related Persons

PNX

After the distribution, we will be an independent publicly traded company. For a discussion of transactions and arrangements between PNX and the Company, see “Our Relationship With PNX After the Spin-Off.” We do not believe that there will be any related person transactions between PNX and the Company following the distribution date to which PNX would be deemed a “related person” (as defined in Item 404 of Regulation S-K) of the Company.

Harris Bankcorp, Inc.

Following the spin-off, it is expected that Harris Bankcorp will hold 45,000 shares of our Series B Preferred Stock which will be initially convertible into approximately 23% of our fully diluted common stock.

In 2006, the Company acquired the rights to advise, distribute and administer the Insight Funds from Harris, an affiliate of Harris Bankcorp. In connection with the acquisition, the Company is required to make certain additional annual payments to Harris based upon the net profits earned on those funds. The Company made such payments in 2007 and has accrued additional obligations during 2008. Harris continues to manage the majority of the Insight Funds as sub-advisor. Our agreements with Harris require that the Company make additional payments to Harris should the Company terminate this sub-advisory relationship without cause. Additionally, the Company has appointed Harris as sub-advisor to certain non-Harris funds and has incurred certain contingent obligations in connection therewith.

Pursuant to Item 404 of Regulation S-K, Harris may be deemed a “related person” of the Company by virtue of Harris Bankcorp’s ownership (on an as-converted basis) of more than 5% of our common stock. Accordingly, our current sub-advisory arrangements and other contractual obligations with Harris may be deemed related person transactions.

For more information regarding our relationship with Harris, see Note 3 to our Consolidated Financial Statements, “Merger, Acquisitions, Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets—Insight Funds” and “Equity Investment.”

Stockholder and Interested Party Communications

A copy of our bylaws may be obtained from our Corporate Secretary by e-mail to              or by mail to:

Corporate Secretary

Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.

56 Prospect Street

Hartford, CT 06102

Stockholders and other interested parties who wish to communicate with any director(s), committee(s), the presiding director at meetings of our non-management directors, our non-management directors as a group or our entire Board, should send such communication to the relevant director, committee, or group of directors in care of the Corporate Secretary at the mailing address above or to the e-mail address listed above, indicating the director, committee, or group of directors with which they wish to communicate. If stockholders or other interested parties making such communications want their identity to be kept confidential, they should so indicate in their letter or e-mail. The Corporate Secretary will promptly forward all communications to the designated director(s).

 

91


Table of Contents

COMPENSATION OF EXECUTIVE OFFICERS

The following compensation discussion contains statements regarding future individual and Company performance targets and goals. These targets and goals are disclosed in the limited context of our discussion regarding the compensation of our executive officers in this information statement and should not be interpreted, or relied upon, as statements of our expectations or estimates of results or other guidance. We specifically caution our stockholders not to apply these statements to other contexts.

Compensation Discussion and Analysis

Overview

The prior compensation actions and decisions made in respect of executives of the Company generally have been made within the context of the framework of the PNX compensation program. Accordingly, the practices and objectives that applied to our executives in 2007 are likely to be modified to reflect both differences in competitive practices for asset management companies, our existence as an independent publicly traded company and the differences in the nature of our business from that of PNX.

Under applicable disclosure rules, we have set forth below a discussion of the compensation practices and decisions made with respect to the 2007 compensation of our chief executive officer (our “CEO”) and certain other of our named executive officers who are listed in the “Summary Compensation Table for 2007 Fiscal Year.” Such information will be of value primarily as a historical reference, as the practices that we will apply in the future will likely evolve to reflect the factors outlined above. While many decisions on these matters have not been made, and may be left to the judgment of the independent members of our Board or our Compensation Committee, the following decisions have been made regarding the transition from the PNX compensation system to our compensation system, which will apply to our executives following the distribution date:

 

   

Any outstanding options in respect of PNX common stock held by our executives will be converted on the distribution date to options to purchase shares of our common stock in a manner intended to preserve the relative value of each such option in accordance with the applicable tax law requirements, and that generally preserves the remaining terms of such options;

 

   

Long-term PNX performance-based awards in the form of restricted stock units will remain outstanding and remain subject to the same performance criteria as are applicable to PNX executives. Our executives will earn whatever award they would have earned had the spin-off not occurred, but pro-rated for service through the distribution date. We anticipate that the independent members of our Board will make new and appropriate long-term incentive awards to our executives related to the performance of our business in respect of service from and after the distribution date; and

 

   

Long-term PNX service-vested awards in the form of restricted stock units outstanding at the distribution date will be converted into Company restricted stock units in a manner intended to preserve the relative value of such awards. The other terms and conditions of the converted awards (such as the vesting and exercise schedules, the impact of termination of employment on such awards, and the right in respect of restricted stock units to receive the benefit of any dividend equivalents) will be substantially the same as those applicable to the corresponding PNX grants.

We will not maintain any qualified or non-qualified defined benefit plans. Such plans are generally not maintained by asset management companies. The liabilities associated with benefits accrued by our executives under existing PNX sponsored plans for service through the earlier of the spin-off date and December 31, 2008 will be the ongoing responsibility of PNX.

We have identified Mr. George R. Aylward, Jr., Mr. Michael A. Angerthal, Ms. Nancy G. Curtiss, Mr. J. Steven Neamtz and Mr. Francis G. Waltman as our named executive officers (“NEOs”). The historical executive compensation of Mr. Aylward, Ms. Curtiss, Mr. Neamtz and Mr. Waltman is reflected in the tabular

 

92


Table of Contents

disclosure and associated narrative discussion that follows this Compensation Discussion and Analysis. The material components of the executive compensation package for Mr. Angerthal, who was hired by the Company effective October 6, 2008, will not be reflected throughout this section, but a discussion of the material components of his compensation is set forth in “—Summary Compensation Table for 2007 Fiscal Year—Material Components of Compensation for the NEO Not Listed in the Summary Compensation Table.”

Objectives of the PNX Compensation Program

The PNX executive compensation program is designed to:

 

   

attract, retain and motivate executive talent in support of its overall business strategy;

 

   

tie annual and long-term incentives to the achievement of performance objectives, including the enhancement of stockholder value; and

 

   

create a total compensation opportunity comparable to that provided at companies it competes with for executive talent.

Elements of Compensation

Historically, the PNX executive compensation program has consisted of base pay, annual incentives and long-term incentives (collectively referred to as “Direct Compensation”), broad-based benefit plans available to all employees, stock awards to recognize special circumstances, share ownership and retention guidelines, a supplemental retirement plan, deferred compensation, perquisites, executive severance and change-in-control arrangements. We will not offer a supplemental retirement plan and a broad-based defined benefit pension plan after we become a public company, because these elements of compensation are not reflective of market practice for an asset management company.

 

93


Table of Contents

A description and the objective of each of PNX’s compensation elements that are applicable to our NEOs and other asset management executives for 2007 and part of 2008 are summarized in the table that follows.

 

Compensation Element  

Description

 

Objective

Base Salary  

Fixed rate of pay that has historically compensated employees for fulfilling their basic job responsibilities

 

For executives, increases have historically been provided only in the case of shortfalls relative to industry practice, to recognize a significant increase in responsibilities, or to maintain internal equity among peer executives. For other employees, increases are determined primarily based on merit.

  Attract and retain high-caliber leadership
Annual Incentives  

Incentive compensation that has historically promoted and rewarded the achievement of annual performance objectives

 

Historically, substantially all employees have participated in an incentive plan. For executives, the incentive pool in 2007 was determined by the improvement in PNX’s return on equity and line of business earnings growth.

 

Link compensation to annual performance results

 

Attract, motivate and retain high-caliber leadership

 

Align the interests of executives and stockholders

Long-Term Incentives  

Incentive compensation that has historically promoted and rewarded the achievement of long-term performance objectives

 

The core program has historically provided grants of performance-based restricted stock units, stock options and, in limited or special circumstances, service-vested restricted stock units.

 

Link compensation to long-term performance results

 

Attract, motivate and retain high-caliber leadership

 

Align the interests of executives and stockholders

Service-Vested Stock
Options and Restricted
Stock Units
  Service-vested stock option and restricted stock unit grants were used historically in special circumstances, such as to recognize promotions or attract new hires, reward significant individual contributions or extraordinary efforts that may not be reflected in other incentive plan awards, provide retention incentives, or shift compensation mix.  

Link compensation to performance results (in the case of stock options)

 

Attract, motivate and retain high-caliber leadership

 

Align the interests of executives and stockholders

Share Ownership and
Retention Guidelines
  Guidelines have historically provided a target ownership level to be attained and required the retention of a portion of all stock awards, including long-term incentive restricted stock units   Align the interests of executives and stockholders
Non-Qualified Deferred
Compensation
 

Opportunity for certain executives to defer receipt of compensation to assist executives in tax and retirement planning

 

Salary deferral has historically included additional matching contributions which were otherwise above Internal Revenue Code limits on PNX’s broad-based 401(k) plan.

  Attract and retain high-caliber leadership
Perquisites   Perquisites provided to NEOs include a nominal reimbursement for preventive medical care expenses, a financial planning allowance, relocation benefits, and reimbursements for spousal travel expenses when required for business functions.   Attract and retain high-caliber leadership
Executive Severance and
Change-in-Control
Agreements
 

Certain executives have historically been eligible to receive executive severance and change-in-control protections in certain circumstances.

 

These benefits provide income protection in the event of involuntary loss of employment not due to cause in exchange for the executive’s agreement not to bring claims against PNX.

  Attract and retain high-caliber leadership

 

94


Table of Contents

Determining Direct Compensation Levels

Historically, the PNX compensation committee has determined Direct Compensation for its executives, including its asset management executives, by:

 

   

evaluating the strategic value of each position;

 

   

aligning compensation with strategic value;

 

   

identifying the market value of each position; and

 

   

determining the appropriate mix of Direct Compensation elements for each position.

These steps are described in the four subsections that follow.

Evaluating Strategic Value

Historically, PNX has evaluated each senior executive with respect to his or her capacity to influence its business strategy and financial results. This analysis was conducted so that the compensation opportunity for each role, expressed as a target percentile of market as described in “—Compensation Discussion and Analysis—Determining Direct Compensation Levels—Aligning Compensation with Strategic Value” in the subsection that follows, was based on strategic value, which was PNX’s analysis of criticality to the execution of its business objectives. The first step in this strategic value analysis was an assessment of the degree to which each position enabled it to meet its financial targets and strategic objectives. The second step was an evaluation of each senior executive’s leadership abilities, business acumen, general management experience, degree of employment retention risk, and the impact of these factors on an individual’s ability to enable it to meet its financial targets and strategic objectives. This analysis was presented to the PNX compensation committee for its approval.

Aligning Compensation with Strategic Value

Based on the strategic value assessments, Direct Compensation for asset management executives has historically been targeted at the 50 th percentile of the size-adjusted market levels described in “—Compensation Discussion and Analysis—Determining Direct Compensation Levels—Identifying Market Value” below. PNX targeted pay at this level because it:

 

   

believed the complexity of, and difficulty of achieving, its business objectives were comparable to that of its peer group, even though PNX is smaller;

 

   

needed to attract and retain high-caliber talent to accomplish its business objectives, and the market for talent that can achieve such objectives is competitive; and

 

   

believed that the performance goals in its executive compensation program were set at aggressive levels representing significant improvement from prior year results when achieved.

Identifying Market Value

For market comparisons for asset management executives, PNX considered appropriate groups of asset management companies. In doing so, it relied on two surveys conducted by McLagan, an independent, third-party organization.

PNX used the results of all surveyed companies who have a similar position to the position benchmarked. For determining the market value of the head of asset management and the head of operations, PNX used McLagan’s 2006 Management and Administration Survey. For the head of product development, PNX used McLagan’s 2006 Sales and Marketing—Investment Products Survey. The companies represented in each of these surveys are comprised of banks, insurance companies and investment management and advisory firms. However, McLagan does not disclose the identities of the companies included in each benchmarked comparative group, and the companies used by McLagan to create comparative groups are generally not the same from job position to job position.

 

95


Table of Contents

PNX used the numbers reported in the applicable McLagan survey to assess the compensation of our head of asset management, head of operations and head of product development against the market, as determined by the respective McLagan comparative group survey results. For the head of asset management, PNX used the 25th percentile figures as a proxy for the 50th percentile of peer companies closer to its size, since, for this position, the survey data suggested strong correlation between amount of compensation paid and size of the organization. For the head of operations and the head of product management, 50th percentile figures were used as the benchmark since, for these positions, there was no certain correlation between amount of compensation paid and size of the organization. In its analysis, PNX reviewed each of the following compensation elements to the extent provided in the surveys: base salary, cash bonus, total cash compensation, long-term and deferred awards, and total direct compensation.

In each case, PNX used the total direct compensation element as its primary market benchmark, representing the external comparison of total compensation opportunity. The other compensation elements (salary, cash bonus, and long-term awards) were used in conjunction with our executive compensation philosophy for setting the mix of pay among salary, annual incentives and long-term incentives. PNX generally considered an executive’s target total direct compensation to be “at target” if it is within 10% of the target market percentile for that position. For 2007, the target total direct compensation for our head of asset management was below the target percentile (25th percentile as reported in McLagan’s 2006 Management and Administration Survey) because Mr. Aylward was relatively new to the role and the target total direct compensation for our head of operations and our head of product development were at target (50th percentile as reported in McLagan’s 2006 Management and Administration Survey and McLagan’s 2006 Sales and Marketing—Investment Products Survey, respectively).

PNX believed that the McLagan surveys provided the most appropriate market data for comparing its compensation practices for its asset management positions since the companies participating in the surveys were all in the asset management industry and had positions of similar scope and responsibility.

Determining Mix of Direct Compensation Elements

Base Salary and Incentive Pay Mix . One of the central beliefs on which PNX’s compensation philosophy was based historically was that a greater percentage of compensation should be at risk for the executives who bear higher levels of responsibility for its performance. As such, PNX believed the majority of senior executive compensation should come from incentive pay. PNX generally targeted base salary between 25% and 35% of total Direct Compensation, and incentive pay between 65% and 75% of total Direct Compensation.

2007 Guideline Compensation Mix

 

Position

  

NEO

   Base Salary     Incentive Pay  

President and CEO

   George R. Aylward, Jr.    25 %   75 %

Head of Operations

   Nancy G. Curtiss    35 %   65 %

Head of Retail Distribution

   J. Steven Neamtz    25 %   75 %

Head of Product Development

   Francis G. Waltman    30 %   70 %

Annual and Long-Term Incentive Mix . The target mix between annual and long-term incentives was designed to support PNX’s annual and long-term strategic plans. For our CEO, this mix was balanced to motivate both the achievement of annual goals and long-term strategic planning, consistent with PNX’s practice for its line of business leaders.

 

96


Table of Contents

Target annual and long-term incentive opportunities for 2007 are shown in the table below.

 

     2007 Incentive Targets as
a Percentage of Base Salary
 

Position

   Annual Incentive     Long-Term Incentive  

President and CEO

   135 %   135 %

Head of Operations

   54 %   25 %

Head of Retail Distribution

   N/A (1)   50 %

Head of Product Development

   65 %(2)   60 %(2)

 

(1) Mr. Neamtz was hired on December 11, 2007 and not eligible for the 2007 annual incentive.
(2) Mr. Waltman resigned on December 14, 2007 and forfeited eligibility for these 2007 incentives.

Incentive Compensation

Annual Incentives

Under PNX’s annual incentive plan for 2007, executives were eligible for incentive awards based upon the achievement of pre-determined PNX financial goals approved by the compensation committee, departmental performance objectives approved by PNX’s chief executive officer, and individual performance objectives.

The financial goals approved by the PNX compensation committee determined the size of the annual incentive pool based on actual results versus the goals. These financial goals (threshold, target, and maximum) were established based on the strategic and financial plans adopted by the PNX board of directors. The PNX compensation committee determined these goals based on an assessment of the degree of difficulty and the minimum acceptable performance results. Threshold financial goals were generally set to require performance above prior year results so that payouts are limited if performance does not improve over time. Target financial goals were set at an aggressive but achievable level. Maximum financial goals were set to reward performance that was significantly better than target performance.

In 2007, the financial measure for determining the funding of the pool under the annual incentive plan was a combination of PNX ROE and line of business earnings growth, as measured by Asset Management EBITDA. For executives, PNX continued to attach a significant portion of their incentive opportunity to PNX ROE to focus the PNX management team on enterprise-wide goals. Following the spin-off, we will tie incentive opportunities to key performance indicators of the asset management business. In 2007, however, Mr. Aylward and Ms. Curtiss had 50% and 35%, respectively, of their incentive opportunity tied to PNX’s ROE results, as reflected in the table below:

2007 Annual Incentive Pool Funding

 

Position

   PNX
ROE(1)
    Asset
Management
EBITDA(2)
 

President and CEO

   50 %   50 %

Head of Operations

   35 %   65 %

Head of Retail Distribution

   N/A     N/A  

Head of Product Development

   N/A     N/A  

 

(1) ROE is (a) PNX after tax operating income divided by (b) the average of each month’s equity, where each month’s equity is the average of the equity at the beginning and ending of each month, exclusive of accumulated other comprehensive income, the accounting of effects of Financial Accounting Standards Board Interpretation No. 46 (“FIN 46”), and equity attributed to discontinued operations. This measure may differ from the non-GAAP measure of the same name used to assess PNX’s performance and furnished to its investors on a periodic basis.

 

97


Table of Contents
(2) Asset Management EBITDA was pre-tax operating income before depreciation, amortization of goodwill and intangibles, and, at the discretion of the compensation committee, excluded certain restructuring charges (“Asset Management EBITDA”).

The 2007 financial goals for the annual incentive plan and the corresponding performance results are reflected in the following table:

2007 Annual Incentive Financial Goals and Results

 

       Threshold     Target     Maximum     Actual
Financial
Results
    Actual Pool
Funding(1)(2)
 
($ in millions)       

PNX ROE

     4.9 %     5.3 %     5.5 %     5.6 %   200 %

Asset Management EBITDA

   $ 40.5 (4)   $ 51.9     $ 54.9     $ 40.5     50 %

Incentive Pool Funding(2)

     50 %     100 %     250 %(3)    

 

(1) Based on the pool funding results and the weight attached to each financial goal as reflected in the previous table, the final pool result for our CEO was 125% and for our Head of Operations was 103%.

 

(2) Incentive pool funding was determined as a percentage of the aggregate target annual incentive awards. For results between threshold and target and target and maximum, this percentage is pro-rated.

 

(3) For 2007, PNX’s maximum award for its named executive officers, including Mr. Aylward, was increased from 200% to 250%.

 

(4) The PNX compensation committee used its discretion to adjust the threshold by $1.4 million (from $41.9 million to $40.5 million) to reflect unplanned investments in growth to position the Company for strategic options such as the announced spin-off.

After the incentive pool funding level was determined, individual incentive awards were determined 50% based on department results and 50% based on individual performance results.

The weights given to department and individual results reflected the PNX compensation committee’s intent to balance departmental teamwork with individual accountability. In total, executives could earn between 50% and 200% of their target annual incentive award for performance between threshold and maximum. For performance above threshold but below maximum, incentive payments are adjusted ratably. For 2007 and 2008, the maximum award for PNX’s named executive officers, including Mr. Aylward, was increased from 200% of target to 250% to further motivate the continued engagement and focus required of executives to execute significant corporate initiatives, including the spin-off of asset management. Any payments resulting from this increase for 2007 were paid in restricted stock units (“RSUs”), which vest ratably over two years to provide additional retention incentive to recipients.

2007 Annual Incentive Awards . Mr. Aylward and Ms. Curtiss participated in the 2007 bonus payout as reflected in the table below. Mr. Neamtz was not eligible due to his date of hire. Mr. Waltman forfeited eligibility upon his resignation on December 14, 2007.

Mr. Aylward’s 2007 annual incentive award was paid at 122% of his target, excluding the RSU enhancement described above. Ms. Curtiss’s 2007 annual incentive award was paid at 118% of her target. In determining these awards, equal weight was given to departmental performance and individual performance:

 

   

Fifty Percent Based on Department Results: Mr. Aylward’s department goals were established at the beginning of 2007 based on PNX’s overall strategic plan, including specific metrics that were used to measure department performance. All of the department initiatives were linked to the strategic objectives that framed PNX’s strategic plan and to the corresponding financial objectives, which were centered on creating value for PNX shareholders. The four primary department goals that

 

98


Table of Contents
 

Mr. Aylward’s performance was measured against were margin, net and gross flows, percent of assets under management above benchmark (one and three years), and customer service quality. Based on 2007 departmental performance results as summarized in the table below and the pool funding results summarized on page 88, this component of Mr. Aylward’s annual incentive resulted in a payment of $211,613. Ms. Curtiss’s department goals were established at the beginning of 2007 based on PNX’s overall strategic plan, including specific metrics that were used to measure the performance of asset management operations. The three primary department goals that Ms. Curtiss’s performance was measured against were quality of operations, quality of customer service, and fund accounting accuracy. Based on these performance results, as summarized in the table below, and the pool funding results, this component of Ms. Curtiss’s annual incentive resulted in a payment of $47,500.

 

                    Incentive Weight     Department Pool Results  

Department

 

2007 Measure/

Initiative

  2007
Target
    2007
Performance
Results
    Head of
Asset
Manage-
ment
    Head of Asset
Management
Operations
    Head of Asset
Management
    Head of Asset
Management
Operations
 

Asset Management

- All departments

  Margin     22.70 %     16.70 %   11.7 %   11.7 %     0.0 %     0.0 %
  Net Flows ($millions)*   $ 1,300     -$ 2,451     5.8 %   5.8 %     0.0 %     0.0 %
  Gross Flows ($millions)*   $ 6,600     $ 6,046     5.8 %   5.8 %     5.3 %     5.3 %
  AUM per Proprietary Portfolio Manager ($millions)   $ 960     $ 863     11.7 %   11.7 %     9.3 %     9.3 %

Investment

Manufacturing

  % of AUM above Benchmark     65 %     59 %   5.4 %   0.0 %     3.8 %     0.0 %
  Sales from new products ($millions)   $ 1,876     $ 1,880     5.4 %   0.0 %     5.4 %     0.0 %
  # of Funds With Improved Scale < $200 m     35       34     5.4 %   0.0 %     8.0 %     0.0 %

Investment

Operations

  NQR - Operations 1     98.40       98.00     5.4 %   21.6 %     3.2 %     13.0 %
  NQR - Communications 2     2.89       2.73     5.4 %   21.6 %     2.9 %     11.5 %
  NAV Accuracy     99.70       99.88     5.4 %   21.6 %     9.4 %     37.4 %

Retail Distribution

  Gross Retail sales ($millions)   $ 4,000     $ 3,989     16.3 %   0.0 %     16.2 %     0.0 %

Institutional Distribution

  Gross Institutional sales ($millions)   $ 1,061     $ 598     16.3 %   0.0 %     9.2 %     0.0 %

Total Department Results

50% of 2007 Incentive Target

 

 

    73 %     76 %
  $ 222,750     $ 62,500  

2007 Incentive Attributable to Department Results

Adjustment for PNX ROE Results 3

 

 

  $ 162,608     $ 47,500  
  $ 49,005     $ —    

Total Incentive Attributable to Department Performance

 

  $ 211,613     $ 47,500  

 

             

*       Excludes Structured Products

         

   

1         Target = results above the Industry Average of our 5 Star peers over the year based on the National Quality Review, an independent firm that benchmarks the quality of operations of financial industry firms

           

2         Target = placement in the first quartile of customer service quality of total client pool as measured by the National Quality Review

           

3         Represents the additional amount owed to Mr. Aylward in connection with the additional incentive pool funding attributable to the greater weight placed on PNX ROE results for PNX named executive officers as described under 2007 Annual Incentive Pool Funding and 2007 Annual Incentive Financial Goals and Results

             

 

99


Table of Contents
   

Fifty Percent Based on Individual Performance: Mr. Aylward’s individual goals were set by PNX’s chief executive officer at the beginning of 2007 in support of Company and department strategic plans. For 2007, these goals were a combination of his 2007 departmental goals for the asset management business, as described above, and Mr. Aylward’s personal effectiveness behaviors, which measured specified behaviors that PNX believed were integral to building and sustaining PNX’s performance culture, such as leadership, vision, teamwork, innovation, and focus on results. PNX’s chief executive officer was responsible for assessing these performance results. Based on his 2007 performance, this component of Mr. Aylward’s annual incentive resulted in a payment of $332,300. Ms. Curtiss’s individual goals were set by Mr. Aylward at the beginning of 2007 in support of Company and department strategic plans. These goals were a combination of her 2007 departmental goals for the asset management business, as described above, other goals set by Mr. Aylward and Ms. Curtiss’s personal effectiveness, which measured specified behaviors that PNX believed were integral to building and sustaining PNX’s performance culture, such as leadership, vision, teamwork, innovation, and focus on results. Mr. Aylward was responsible for assessing these performance results. Based on her 2007 performance, this component of Ms. Curtiss’s annual incentive resulted in a payment of $100,000.

Based on the above components, Mr. Aylward’s total 2007 annual incentive bonus was $543,913 excluding the RSU enhancement and Ms. Curtiss’s total 2007 annual incentive bonus was $147,500. Mr. Aylward’s RSU enhancement component is described in “—Grants of Plan-Based Awards in Fiscal Year 2007—Estimated Future Payouts Under Equity Incentive Plan Awards.”

2007 NEO Annual Incentive Awards

 

     Regular 2007 Cash Annual
Incentive Award
   Enhancement to be
Paid in RSUs(1)
   Total Value of 2007
Annual Incentive

George R. Aylward, Jr.

   $ 543,913    $ 49,207    $ 593,120

Nancy G. Curtiss

   $ 147,500      —      $ 147,500

J. Steven Neamtz(2)

     —        —        —  

Francis G. Waltman(3)

     —        —        —  

 

(1) The number of RSUs was determined based on the closing price of PNX common stock on March 5, 2008, which was $11.05.
(2) Mr. Neamtz was hired on December 11, 2007 and not eligible for this 2007 incentive.
(3) Mr. Waltman resigned effective December 14, 2007 and forfeited eligibility for this 2007 incentive.

Long-Term Incentives

In 2007, long-term incentives were provided to PNX’s executives, including its asset management executives, to promote and reward the achievement of long-term goals, requiring performance goals to be met or exceeded for any incentives to be earned, and basing the ultimate value of the awards on PNX’s stock performance. Executives received grants of RSUs subject to the achievement of specified performance objectives over a three-year cycle. Each RSU awarded is convertible into one share of PNX common stock.

The number of performance shares held by our executives as of the distribution date will be adjusted to reflect the value of the Company dividend in the same manner as applies to performance shares held by other PNX officers and executives. As noted above, we expect that the performance share awards with respect to our executives will continue in effect in accordance with their terms without regard to the spin-off but that the actual number of shares or corresponding dollar amount distributable to our executives, if any, will be pro-rated based on their service during the performance period and through and including the distribution date. We anticipate that the independent members of our Board will make new and appropriate long-term incentive awards to our executives related to the performance of our business in respect of service from and after the distribution date.

 

100


Table of Contents

Stock Options and Service-Vested Restricted Stock Units

For 2007, stock options and service-vested RSUs were not part of PNX’s Direct Compensation strategy. Stock options were not a viable choice due to share limitations in PNX’s stock option plan entering into 2007, and PNX utilized performance-based RSUs for the long-term incentive component of Direct Compensation. However, PNX did use stock option and service-vested RSUs for special circumstances. Mr. Aylward received a stock option grant to purchase 30,000 shares of PNX common stock in connection with his promotion to senior executive vice president on February 8, 2007. On September 5, 2007, Mr. Aylward was awarded a service-vested RSU award equal to one and one-half times his salary for a three-year retention period. Mr. Waltman also received a stock option grant on February 8, 2007 to purchase 10,000 shares of PNX common stock in recognition of his performance in 2006. These options were forfeited when Mr. Waltman resigned on December 14, 2007.

In 2008, PNX changed the structure of its annual long-term incentive awards. Beginning in 2008, share limitations in PNX’s stock option plan no longer prevented the broader use of stock option grants. Therefore, PNX’s compensation committee decided to reintroduce stock options as a core part of the long-term incentive program, recognizing the focus stock options could provide on creating stockholder value. Fifty percent of the 2008 long-term incentive value for executives was provided through stock option grants. The compensation committee decided to provide the remaining 50% of target long-term incentive opportunity in the form of service-vested RSUs. The asset management executives are eligible to receive and have received 2008 PNX grants.

As previously noted, for our executives, PNX stock options and service-vested RSUs outstanding at the distribution date will be converted into stock options and RSUs in respect of our common stock in a manner intended to preserve the relative value of such awards at the distribution date. The other terms and conditions of the converted awards, such as the vesting and exercise schedules, the impact of termination of employment on such awards, and the right in respect of RSUs to receive the benefit of any dividend equivalents, will be substantially the same as those applicable to the corresponding PNX grants.

Equity Grant Procedures

Equity grants to PNX’s executives, including its asset management executives, have historically been made pursuant to its equity grant policy. Under this policy:

 

   

all stock option and RSU awards made as part of a recurring annual compensation program, such as annual long-term incentive awards to NEOs, are to be approved and granted at a meeting, whether in person or telephonically, of PNX’s compensation committee that occurs within 20 days after PNX’s earnings release for the prior fiscal year.

 

   

all other stock options and RSUs are granted by PNX’s chief executive officer, compensation committee or board, as applicable, on four scheduled grant dates each year, to occur following the filing of each quarter’s periodic report with the Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”). The first such grant date occurs 65 calendar days following year-end, which is five days following the due date of PNX’s Form 10-K. Subsequent grant dates occur 45 calendar days following the end of the first, second and third fiscal quarters, each of which is five days following the due date of PNX’s Form 10-Q for each fiscal quarter. If this date falls on a day that no shares of PNX common stock are traded on the New York Stock Exchange, then the grant date is the next date that trading occurs. Awards are approved by PNX’s chief executive officer, compensation committee or board, as applicable, at the last meeting preceding the applicable grant date, to be effective on the grant date.

 

   

PNX’s compensation committee may, in its discretion, approve and grant equity awards at other times, if it determines that such action is in the best interests of stockholders.

 

   

material inside information is not considered in determining award amounts or grant dates, and the policy reinforces this practice by intentionally selecting grant dates when decision makers are the least likely to be in possession of material inside information.

 

101


Table of Contents

Share Ownership and Retention Guidelines

We intend to adopt share ownership guidelines in respect of our executives and directors, including our NEOs, but given the fact that the trading value of our stock has not been established, and the on-going equity grant practices have not been established, we have not yet determined what the appropriate guidelines should be for our NEOs and directors.

Supplemental Retirement Benefits

While PNX maintained a qualified and non-qualified defined benefit plan for its executives, including certain executives in the asset management business, including our CEO, we do not intend to offer any defined benefit plan. The liabilities accrued in respect of our executives under the PNX plans will be the ongoing responsibility of PNX.

Non-Qualified Deferred Compensation

PNX maintains certain nonqualified deferred compensation plans. We will not replicate all of these plans. Currently, we only intend to adopt a plan similar in design to PNX’s plan for the deferral of salary that will allow our NEOs an opportunity to defer tax payments and receive matching contributions on their cash contributions in excess of the Code limits on compensation placed on an IRS-qualified 401(k) plan. The match will be based upon our 401(k) plan formula.

Perquisites

Perquisites have historically been an immaterial part of PNX’s executive compensation program. We expect that perquisites will be an immaterial component of our executive compensation program.

Severance and Change-in-Control Agreements

Severance

PNX has established a program under which severance benefits are made available to PNX senior executives, whose employment is terminated without cause, including certain asset management executives. These benefits are tiered based on years of service, and calculated based upon the executive’s base salary and the average of the last two annual incentive awards paid to the executive as of the termination date.

We will adopt an executive severance plan, which will provide severance, continued subsidized health care coverage and outplacement benefits. See “—Termination Payments and Change-in-Control Agreement—Executive Severance Allowance Plan”.

Change-in-Control Agreements

Mr. Aylward is currently a party to a change-in-control agreement with PNX, related to a change in control of PNX. That agreement will not be triggered by the spin-off and will terminate pursuant to its terms on the distribution date.

We are in the process of executing a new change in control agreement with our CEO, to be effective on the distribution date, that contains terms that are substantially similar to his current agreement with PNX but related to a change in control of the Company. See “—Termination Payments and Change-in-Control Agreements—Change-in-Control Agreements.” It is expected that our independent directors will review the appropriateness of change-in-control agreements for our other executives, and determine whether, and the extent to which, to offer the protections afforded by such agreements to any other of our NEOs.

 

102


Table of Contents

Pay Decisions

PNX has historically had a practice of using independent compensation consultants for executive compensation matters, such as chief executive officer compensation, executive compensation philosophy and plan design, compensation targets, director compensation, equity grants, key executive new hire packages and change-in-control design.

Historically, PNX’s chief executive officer was responsible for making compensation recommendations to PNX’s compensation committee regarding other PNX named executive officers. PNX’s chief executive officer has also historically been responsible for evaluating all departmental results in conjunction with the annual incentive program based on pre-defined performance goals established at the beginning of each year, and evaluating individual performance results for direct reports, including other PNX named executive officers. The PNX chief executive officer has historically shared her evaluation of each named executive officer with the PNX compensation committee, along with corresponding compensation recommendations for Direct Compensation, taking into account factors such as performance relative to job responsibilities, key achievements, contributions to the leadership team, overall leadership, retention risk, strategic value and market value. The PNX compensation committee has historically been responsible for reviewing these recommendations and making final decisions with regard to compensation.

We anticipate that we will develop our process for determining compensation following the distribution date, in collaboration with our independent directors, and in particular those appointed to serve on our Compensation Committee. As the input, direction and agreement of these representatives of stockholders will be of paramount importance in establishing any such decision-making process, including the appointment and utilization of any outside consultants, we can not speculate as to any element of that process.

Tax and Accounting Considerations

Code section 162(m) generally disallows a tax deduction to publicly held companies for compensation over $1 million paid to a company’s chief executive officer or any of the three other most highly compensated executive officers unless the compensation is performance-based. Qualifying performance-based compensation will not be subject to the deduction limit if certain requirements are met. Where appropriate, we intend to structure compensation for our NEOs so that it qualifies for deductibility under Code section 162(m). However, the deductibility of compensation is but one of the several critical factors in the design and implementation of any compensation arrangement and our Board reserves the right to pay non-deductible compensation if and to the extent it determines that such actions are in the best interests of stockholders.

Other tax considerations will factor into the design of our compensation programs. Code section 409A provides that amounts deferred under non-qualified deferred compensation plans are included in an employee’s income when vested unless certain requirements are met. If these requirements are not met, employees are also subject to an additional income tax and interest penalties. It is our intent that our non-qualified deferred compensation plans be operated and administered to meet, and will be amended to meet, these requirements.

Congress and the Internal Revenue Service consider from time to time legislation, regulations and other regulatory rulings that could modify or eliminate these tax benefits. Such actions would prompt an evaluation of the impact on our executive compensation programs.

Accounting considerations will also be taken into account in designing the compensation programs made available to NEOs. Principal among these is Financial Accounting Standards Board Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 123 (revised 2004), Share-Based Payment (“FAS 123R”), which addresses the accounting treatment of certain equity-based compensation.

 

103


Table of Contents

Summary Compensation Table for 2007 Fiscal Year

The following table sets forth information concerning the 2007 compensation of certain of our NEOs as of December 31, 2007. Additional information may be found in the narrative and supporting tables that accompany this table.

 

Name and
Principal
Position
(a)

  Year
(b)
  Salary(1)
(c)
  Bonus
(d)
  Stock
Awards(2)

(e)
    Option
Awards(3)

(f)
  Non-Equity
Incentive
Plan
Compen-
sation(4)

(g)
  Change in
Pension Value
and Non-
Qualified
Deferred
Compen-
sation
Earnings

(h)
  All Other
Compen-
sation(5)
(i)
  Total
(j)

George R. Aylward, Jr.

  2007   $ 330,000   $ —     $ 216,449     $ 103,000   $ 543,913   $ —     $ 17,400   $ 1,210,762

President & CEO(6)

                 

Nancy B. Curtiss

  2007     229,167     262     16,804       —       147,500    
—  
    9,000     402,732

Head of Operations

  2006     219,583     5,000     —         —      
80,000
   
—  
    8,783     313,367

J. Steven Neamtz

  2007     16,042     —       —         —       —       —       722     16,764

Head of Retail Distribution(7)

                 

Francis G. Waltman

  2007     196,042     —       —         3,107     —       —       37,850     236,909

Head of Product Development(8)

  2006     200,000     —       (4,375 )     33,183     90,000     —       8,000     326,808

 

(1) Figures are shown for the year earned and have not been reduced for deferrals. For 2007, Mr. Aylward elected to defer $5,250 until following termination of employment. For more information on compensation deferrals, see the Non-Qualified Deferred Compensation in Fiscal Year 2007 table.

 

(2) Represents the expense reflected in PNX’s financial statements in 2006 and 2007 for all stock awards granted to NEOs (excluding stock options which are reflected in column (f)) as calculated pursuant to FAS 123R, with the only modification being that the forfeiture assumption for not meeting vesting service requirements is omitted from the calculation pursuant to SEC rules. These expenses include awards granted in 2006 and 2007 and awards granted in prior years that are subject to multiple-year service or performance conditions. A summary of the various awards incorporated in this expense are:

 

FAS 123R Accounting Expense for NEO RSU Awards(a)

 

Name

  Year   2004-2006
LTIP Cycle
  2005-2007
LTIP Cycle
    2006-2008
LTIP Cycle
  2007-2009
LTIP Cycle
  Other
Performance-
Contingent
RSU Awards
  Service-
Vested
RSU
Awards
  2007 Annual
Incentive
Enhancement
  Grand
Total
 

George R. Aylward, Jr.

  2007   $ —     $ —       $ 31,249   $ 130,198   $ —     $ 55,001   $ —     $ 216,449  

Nancy G. Curtiss

  2007     —       —         —       16,804     —       —       —       16,804  
  2006     —       —         —       —       —       —       —       —    

J. Steven Neamtz

  2007     —       —         —       —       —       —       —       —    

Francis G. Waltman

  2007     —       —         —       —       —       —       —       —    
  2006     12,126     (16,501 )     —       —       —       —       —       (4,375 )

 

  (a) Negative amounts in this table reflect reversal of expenses that were charged in prior years, based on revised expectations regarding projected incentive results.

 

104


Table of Contents
(3) Represents the expense reflected in PNX’s financial statements in 2006 and 2007 for all stock option awards granted to NEOs as calculated pursuant to FAS 123R, with the only modification being that the forfeiture assumption for not meeting vesting service requirements is omitted from the calculation pursuant to SEC rules. These expenses include awards granted in 2006 and 2007, and awards granted in prior years that are subject to multiple-year service conditions. The assumptions used for determining this value are stated in note 19 of PNX’s financial statements included in its 2007 Annual Report on Form 10-K. The various awards incorporated in this expense are:

 

FAS 123R Accounting Expense for NEO Stock Option Awards

Name

  Year   2004 Stock Option
Awards
  2005 Stock Option
Awards
  2006 Stock Option
Awards
  2007 Stock Option
Awards
  Grand Total

George R. Aylward, Jr.

  2007   $ —     $ —     $ 45,250   $ 57,750   $ 103,000

Nancy G. Curtiss

  2007     —       —       —       —       —  
  2006     —       —       —       —       —  

J. Steven Neamtz

  2007     —       —       —       —       —  

Francis G. Waltman

  2007     —       —       3,017     —       3,017
  2006     —       —       33,183     —       33,183

 

(4) Represents the cash-based incentive earned under The Phoenix Companies, Inc. Annual Incentive Plan for Executive Officers with respect to Mr. Aylward, and under The Phoenix Companies, Inc. performance Incentive plan with respect to Ms. Curtiss and Mr. Waltman for the applicable performance year, paid in the following March.

 

(5) All Other Compensation Sub-Table

 

Name

   Year      Company
Contributions
to 401(k)

Plan and Excess
Investment
Plan
     Vacation Payout      Total

George R. Aylward

   2007      $ 17,400      $ —        $ 17,400

Nancy G. Curtiss

   2007        9,000        —          9,000
   2006        8,783        —          8,783

J. Steven Neamtz

   2007        722        —          722

Francis G Waltman

   2007        11,111        26,739        37,850
   2006        8,000        —          8,000

 

(6) Mr. Aylward was appointed as Senior Executive Vice President, Asset Management on February 8, 2007.

 

(7) Mr. Neamtz was hired by PNX on December 11, 2007. The figures reflect the applicable amounts from his date of hire through December 31, 2007.

 

(8) Mr. Waltman resigned effective December 14, 2007 and was rehired by the Company on July 28, 2008. His 2007 figures represent the applicable amounts from January 1, 2007 though December 14, 2007.

2007 Base Salary Adjustments

Mr. Waltman and Ms. Curtiss were the only NEOs who received a base salary increase in 2007. Mr. Waltman’s base salary was increased from $200,000 to $205,000, effective February 1, 2007. Ms. Curtiss’s base salary was increased from $220,000 to $230,000, effective February 1, 2007.

Material Components of Compensation for the NEO Not Listed in the Summary Compensation Table

We have identified Mr. Aylward, Mr. Angerthal, Ms. Curtiss, Mr. Neamtz and Mr. Waltman as our NEOs. Our NEO who is not reflected in the tables and accompanying narrative is Michael A. Angerthal, our Chief Financial Officer, who also serves as our principal accounting officer.

Mr. Angerthal has been hired as the Company’s Chief Financial Officer, effective October 6, 2008. Mr. Angerthal’s compensation package consists of an annual base salary of $350,000; an annual incentive target of $350,000 (set at 100% of annual base salary) subject to a minimum of $350,000 for 2008, and a maximum of $700,000; and commencing for the 2009 cycle, a long-term incentive target of $150,000 (set at approximately 43% of annual base salary). Mr. Angerthal will also receive a sign-on bonus of $200,000 payable in installments

 

105


Table of Contents

(some may occur after the distribution date), subject to certain conditions, to compensate him for equity and cash incentives foregone with his previous employer. If involuntarily terminated other than for cause prior to the distribution date, Mr. Angerthal will receive, subject to certain conditions similar to the PNX Executive Severance Allowance Plan, a base severance payment equal to twelve months of pay (generally, salary and average of last two annual incentive awards); be eligible to receive a pro-rated annual incentive plan payment based on actual results for the year of termination; and receive subsidized health care coverage for one year and outplacement coverage. On and after the distribution date, Mr. Angerthal will participate in the Company Executive Severance Allowance Plan.

Executive Compensation Update Post-2007

Mr. Aylward

Mr. Aylward’s compensation package consists of an annual base salary of $350,000, an annual incentive target of $490,000 (set at 140% of annual base salary) and a long-term incentive target of $490,000 (set at 140% of annual base salary). Mr. Aylward received 21,491 PNX restricted stock units in connection with the 2008 long-term incentive award program that will vest on February 13, 2011; on February 13, 2008, a stock option award for 53,728 shares of PNX common stock (at $11.40) under the 2008 long-term incentive program; and on March 5, 2008, an award for 4,453 PNX restricted stock units in connection with the enhancement from the 2007 annual incentive. Mr. Aylward is also eligible for severance benefits provided under the PNX Executive Severance Allowance Plan prior to the distribution date and the Company Executive Severance Allowance Plan on and after the distribution date.

Based on a review of market comparables of asset management companies and compensation practices, taking into consideration the size of the firm, the experience of the chief executive officer and the pay mix of asset management firms, the target compensation of Mr. Aylward, the Company’s Chief Executive Officer, will be increased, effective as of the distribution date, by $470,000. This increase is composed of a $75,000 increase to his base annual salary to $425,000, a $360,000 increase to his annual incentive target to $850,000 and a $35,000 increase to his long-term incentive target to $525,000.

Ms. Curtiss

Ms. Curtiss’s compensation package consists of an annual base salary of $240,000, an annual incentive target of $132,000 (set at 55% of annual base salary) and a long-term incentive target of $96,000 (set at 40% of annual base salary). Ms. Curtiss received 4,211 PNX restricted stock units in connection with the 2008 long-term incentive award program that will vest on February 13, 2011; on February 13, 2008, a stock option award for 10,526 shares of PNX common stock (at $11.40) under the 2008 long-term incentive program; and on March 5, 2008, a stock option award for 20,000 shares of PNX common stock (at $11.05) in connection with her promotion to Senior Vice President. Ms. Curtiss is also eligible for severance benefits provided under the PNX Executive Severance Allowance Plan prior to the distribution date and the Company Executive Severance Allowance Plan on and after the distribution date.

Mr. Neamtz

Mr. Neamtz was hired by PNX to be the Company’s Head of Retail Distribution effective December 11, 2007. Mr. Neamtz’s compensation package consists of an annual base salary of $275,000, an annual incentive target of $600,000 (set at approximately 220% of annual base salary) subject to a minimum and certain restrictions for 2008 and 2009) and a long-term incentive target of $137,500 (set at 50% of annual base salary). Mr. Neamtz received 6,031 PNX restricted stock units in connection with the 2008 long-term incentive award program that will vest on February 13, 2011; on February 13, 2008, a stock option award for 15,077 shares of PNX common stock (at $11.40) under the 2008 long-term incentive program; and on February 13, 2008, a

 

106


Table of Contents

performance-contingent restricted stock unit award for 8,017 target shares in connection with his participation in the 2007-2009 long-term incentive cycle. On March 5, 2008, Mr. Neamtz received 9,050 PNX restricted stock units in connection with his employment offer that will vest on the third anniversary of the award date, subject to employment with the Company and the terms of the award agreement. Mr. Neamtz is also eligible for severance benefits provided under the PNX Executive Severance Allowance Plan prior to the distribution date and the Company Executive Severance Allowance Plan on and after the distribution date.

Mr. Waltman

Mr. Waltman was rehired by PNX to be the Company’s Head of Product Development effective July 28, 2008. Mr. Waltman’s compensation package consists of an annual base salary of $250,000, an annual incentive target of $175,000 (set at 70% of annual base salary) subject to a minimum of $95,000 for 2008, and a long-term incentive target of $150,000 (set at 60% of annual base salary). Mr. Waltman is also receiving a sign-on bonus of $105,000 payable in installments (one may occur after the distribution date), subject to certain conditions, to compensate him for equity and cash incentives foregone with his previous employer. On August 14, 2008, Mr. Waltman received 6,539 PNX restricted stock units in connection with his employment offer that will vest on the third anniversary of the award date, subject to employment with the Company and the terms of the award agreement. Mr. Waltman is also eligible for severance benefits provided under the PNX Executive Severance Allowance Plan prior to the distribution date and the Company Executive Severance Allowance Plan on and after the distribution date.

Salary and Incentives as a Percentage of Total Compensation

In 2007, the proportion of salary and incentives reflected in columns (c) through (g) of the “Summary Compensation Table for 2007 Fiscal Year” to total compensation as reflected in column (j) of that table was from 84% to 99%.

Grants of Plan-Based Awards in Fiscal Year 2007

The following table supplements the information provided in the “Summary Compensation Table for 2007 Fiscal Year” concerning 2007 awards granted to NEOs, including the range of compensation opportunities under PNX’s 2007 annual incentive plan and the 2007-2009 long-term incentive cycle if specified pre-determined performance goals are met. Additional information concerning these awards may be found in the narrative that accompanies the table below. Except for awards for the 2007-2009 long-term incentive cycle, we intend to convert the equity awards reflected in the table to Company equity or stock options, as applicable, on the distribution date.

 

        Estimated Future Payouts Under
Non-Equity Incentive Plan Awards(1)
  Number of
Estimated Future Payouts

Under Equity Incentive
Plan Awards(3)
  All Other
Stock
Awards:
Number
of

Shares of
Stock or
Units
(i)
    All Other
Option
Awards:
Number
of
Securities
Underlying
Options
(j)
    Exercise
or

Base Price
of Option
Awards
per share

(k)
  Grant Date
Fair Value
of Stock
and
Option

Awards(4)
(l)
 

Name (a)

  Grant
Date
(b)
  Threshold
(c)
  Target
(d)
  Maximum
(2)

(e)
  Threshold
(f)
  Target
(g)
  Maximum
(h)
       

George R. Aylward, Jr.

    $ 222,750   $ 445,500   $ 1,113,750              
  02/08/2007                 30,000 (5)   $ 14.53   $ 189,000 (6)
  03/05/2007         14,152   28,304   56,608           390,595  
  09/05/2007               35,896 (7)         495,006 (8)

Nancy G. Curtiss

 

03/05/2007

    62,500     125,000     250,000   1,827   3,653   7,306           50,411  

J. Steven Neamtz

                     

Francis G. Waltman

      
02/08/2007

03/05/2007

    66,625     133,250     333,125   3,907   7,814   15,628     10,000 (9)     14.53    

 

63,000

107,833

(6)

 

 

(1)

Represents the incentive opportunity under The Phoenix Companies, Inc. Annual Incentive Plan for Executive Officers with respect to Mr. Aylward and under The Phoenix Companies, Inc. Performance Incentive Plan with respect to Ms. Curtiss and Mr. Waltman for the

 

107


Table of Contents
 

2007 performance period, as described in “2007 Awards.” Mr. Neamtz was not eligible for any 2007 incentive awards due to his date of hire. Mr. Waltman forfeited eligibility due to his resignation on December 14, 2007. Awards under this plan were funded when PNX met established thresholds for return on equity and EBIDTA with respect to Asset Management, as defined in the footnotes to the “2007 Annual Incentive Pool Funding” table. Awards between threshold and target were paid in cash. Awards above target were paid in a mix of cash and RSUs. The actual 2007 cash incentive payments pursuant to this award are reflected in column (g) of the “Summary Compensation Table for 2007 Fiscal Year.” The RSU portion of this incentive is described in note 2 below.

 

(2) With respect to Mr. Aylward and Mr. Waltman, represents the maximum award equal to 250% of target, including a portion that would be paid in service-vested RSUs in connection with the 2007 annual incentive enhancement as described in “—Grants of Plan-Based Awards in Fiscal Year 2007—Estimated Future Payouts Under Equity Incentive Plan Awards.” The actual number of RSUs was determined based on the closing price of PNX common stock on March 5, 2008. For Ms. Curtiss, represents the maximum award equal to 200% of target.

 

(3) Represents performance-contingent RSUs awarded pursuant to the 2007-2009 LTIP cycle. These incentives are determined based on PNX’s 2009 ROE. The actual payments pursuant to this award, if any, will be made in 2010 based on achievement of performance criteria measured at completion of the three-year performance cycle. Mr. Waltman’s award for this cycle was forfeited upon his resignation on December 14, 2007.

 

(4) Except as footnoted otherwise, these figures represent the grant date fair value of the 2007-2009 LTIP cycle awards, measured as of the grant date based on FAS 123R. The value reported is based on the closing market price of PNX common stock on the grant date of $13.80 and the expected outcome of awards, as measured on the grant date, equal to 100% of target results. The actual value of these awards, if any, will depend on the ROE performance results for this LTIP cycle, the participant’s employment status at the end of the performance cycle, and the market value of PNX common stock on the date final awards are determined.

 

(5) Represents the grant of stock options in connection with Mr. Aylward’s promotion as described in “—Compensation Discussion and Analysis— Stock Options and Service-Vested Restricted Stock Units.” These options vest in one-third increments on February 8 of 2008, 2009 and 2010 (or earlier, in certain circumstances, if employment is terminated in connection with a change-in-control). The term of the option is 10 years from date of grant.

 

(6) The grant date fair value of this stock option is presented pursuant to SEC rules and calculated under the Black-Scholes Model for pricing options. The material assumptions used for this calculation were: (i) an exercise price equal to the closing price of PNX common stock on the date of grant ($14.53); (ii) a volatility factor of 30.391%; (iii) a risk-free rate of return of 4.734%; (iv) a dividend yield of 1.10%; (v) a three-year vesting schedule; and (vi) a 10-year option term. This grant date fair value is not intended to forecast possible appreciation, if any, of PNX common stock. The ultimate value of the options will depend on the future market price of our or PNX, as applicable, common stock, which cannot be forecast with reasonable accuracy. The actual value, if any, an optionee will realize upon exercise of an option will depend on the excess of the market value of our or PNX, as applicable, common stock, on the date the option is exercised, over the exercise price.

 

(7) Represents a one-time retention incentive, as described in “—Compensation Discussion and Analysis—Stock Options and Service-Vested Restricted Stock Units.” These RSUs, which vest on the third anniversary of the award date (or earlier, in certain circumstances, either pro rata or fully, if employment is terminated due to death, disability, approved retirement, involuntary termination that qualifies for severance or in connection with a change-in-control), are credited with dividend equivalents and interest thereon. The RSUs are scheduled to convert into our or PNX, as applicable, common stock on the third anniversary of the award date.

 

(8) Represents the grant date fair value of the award described in note 7 above, measured as of the grant date based on FAS 123R. The value reported is based on the closing market price of PNX common stock on the grant date ($13.79). The actual value of this award, if any, will depend on the participant’s employment status and the market value of our or PNX, as applicable, common stock on the vesting date.

 

(9) Represents the grant of stock options in recognition of Mr. Waltman’s performance. These options were forfeited on December 14, 2007 upon Mr. Waltman’s resignation.

Estimated Future Payouts Under Non-Equity Incentive Plan Awards

Actual incentive awards were determined based on the factors described in “—Compensation Discussion and Analysis—Incentive Compensation—Annual Incentives.” These awards, reflected in column (g) of the “Summary Compensation Table for 2007 Fiscal Year”, were paid on March 15, 2008.

Estimated Future Payouts Under Equity Incentive Plan Awards

The primary equity incentives for the PNX NEOs were provided through the LTIP, which PNX stockholders approved in 2003. The LTIP is described in “—Compensation Discussion and Analysis—Incentive Compensation—Long-Term Incentives.” In 2007, PNX’s compensation committee approved the performance objective of a 2009 ROE target of 9% for the 2007-2009 performance cycle. If this target is achieved, the RSUs for this incentive award reflected in column (g) of the preceding table will be paid. The RSUs for this incentive

 

108


Table of Contents

award reflected in column (f) (threshold) will be paid for 2009 ROE of 8%, and the RSUs for this incentive award in column (h) (maximum) will be paid for 2009 ROE of 10%. The RSUs for the 2007-2009 cycle, if any, are scheduled to convert into shares of our or PNX, as applicable, common stock or such cash equivalent in 2010.

In 2007, a special enhancement to the annual incentive plan was provided to Mr. Aylward and Mr. Waltman. The normal annual incentive plan provides employee incentive opportunities between 0% and 200% of target incentive levels based on the achievement of pre-determined performance goals, including financial, department and individual goals. For 2007, the maximum payout level of 200% of target incentive levels was increased to 250%. Achievements in excess of target goals would yield awards above target performance results that would be determined by interpolating between target payment (100% of target incentive levels) and 250%, instead of the normal interpolation between target and 200%. Any payments resulting from the enhancement would be paid in service-vested RSUs that would vest incrementally over the two-year period following determination of final awards results. Mr. Waltman’s incentive opportunity under this program was forfeited upon his resignation on December 14, 2007. Based on actual 2007 performance results, Mr. Aylward participated in the 2007 incentive payout, including the special enhancement. See the 2007 NEO Annual Incentive Awards table under “—Compensation Discussion and Analysis—Incentive Compensation—Annual Incentives.”

Stock Option Plan

In 2007, with respect to awards for NEOs, PNX granted ISOs first, and then non-qualified options if ISO limits precluded the full award from being made in ISOs. All option awards are granted at the grant date fair market value of PNX common stock on the date the award is approved, or, if later, effective. Generally, all awards are subject to a three-year graded vesting schedule, and recipients have a maximum of 10 years to exercise the option. Upon termination of employment, stock options generally must be exercised within 30 days following termination of employment. In cases of termination due to death, disability or retirement, options must be exercised within five years from the date of termination of employment. For termination of employment in connection with a qualifying business disposal or divestiture, the compensation committee may allow options that must be exercised within three years from the date of termination of employment or divestiture. In the case of terminations due to cause, all outstanding options expire immediately.

Outstanding Equity Awards at 2007 Fiscal Year-End

The following table sets forth information concerning stock options and non-vested RSU awards with respect to PNX common stock held by the NEOs as of December 31, 2007.

 

    Option Awards   Stock Awards

Name (a)

  Number of
Securities
Underlying
Unexercised
Options

Exercisable
(b)
  Number of
Securities
Underlying
Unexercised
Options

Unexercisable
(c)
    Equity
Incentive
Plan
Awards:
Number of
Securities
Underlying
Unexercised
Unearned
Options

(d)
  Option
Exercise
Price

(e)
  Option
Expiration
Date

(f)
  Number
of
Shares
or Units
of Stock
That
Have
Not
Vested

(g)
    Market
Value of
Shares
or Units
of Stock
That
Have
Not
Vested
(1)

(h)
  Equity
Incentive
Plan
Awards:
Number of
Unearned
Shares,
Units
or Other
Rights That
Have Not
Vested(2)

(i)
    Equity
Incentive
Plan
Awards:
Market or
Payout Value
of Unearned
Shares, Units
or Other
Rights That
Have Not
Vested(1)

(j)

George R. Aylward, Jr.

  8,333
20,000
6,500
  30,000

16,667

(6)

(8)

    $
 
 
 
14.53
14.49
10.83
16.20
  02/08/17
02/02/16
11/04/14
06/25/12
  35,896 (7)   $ 426,086   28,304

13,326

6,270

(3)

(4)

(5)

  $
 
 
335,968
158,180
74,425

Nancy G. Curtiss

  6,000         16.20   06/25/12       3,653 (3)     43,361

J. Steven Neamtz

                 

Francis G. Waltman

  6,666

10,000

       

 

14.49

16.20

  01/16/08

01/16/08

       

 

109


Table of Contents

 

(1) Based on the December 31, 2007, the last trading day in 2007, closing price of PNX common stock of $11.87.

 

(2) These figures, which are rounded to the nearest whole number, represent the number of RSUs which may be earned at target performance. Actual payouts are scheduled to occur in the quarter following the end of the relevant performance period and will be based on actual performance relative to the performance target established for each award. Each RSU is convertible into one share of PNX common stock.

 

(3) Represents the grant of performance-contingent RSUs in connection with the 2007-2009 LTIP cycle, assuming awards are made at target. The LTIP is described in “—Compensation Discussion and Analysis—Incentive Compensation—Long-Term Incentives.” The final number of RSUs payable, if any, will be determined in 2010 based on actual 2009 ROE, as defined in note 1 to the “2007 Annual Incentive Pool Funding” table under “—Compensation Discussion and Analysis—Incentive Compensation—Annual Incentives.”

 

(4) Represents the grant of performance-contingent RSUs in connection with the 2006-2008 LTIP cycle, assuming awards are made at target. The LTIP is described in “—Compensation Discussion and Analysis—Incentive Compensation—Long-Term Incentives.” The final number of RSUs payable, if any, will be determined in 2009 based on actual three-year average return on equity for the 2006-2008 period relative to the performance target established for this period. For this purpose, return on equity means (a) operating income divided by (b) average adjusted stockholders’ equity. Operating income represents income from continuing operations, before realized investment gains or losses and certain other items not related to our operating performance. The average adjusted stockholders’ equity represents the 12-month average of the average monthly adjusted stockholders’ equity, where monthly adjusted stockholders’ equity is defined as the average of the total equity at the beginning and end of each month adjusted for accumulated other comprehensive income, accumulated realized losses in retained earnings related to collateralized obligation trusts consolidated under FIN 46R and equity attributed to discontinued operations.

 

(5) Represents the grant of performance-contingent RSUs in connection with the 2005-2007 LTIP cycle, assuming awards are made at target. The LTIP is described in “—Compensation Discussion and Analysis—Incentive Compensation—Long-Term Incentives.” The final number of RSUs awarded, as reflected in the table below, was determined in 2008 to be 0% of target based on actual three-year average of Cash ROE for the 2005-2007 period relative to the performance target established for this period. For this purpose, Cash ROE means (a) operating income from continuing operations, excluding realized investment gains or losses, venture capital, amortization of intangibles and non-recurring items; divided by (b) average adjusted stockholders’ equity. The average adjusted stockholders’ equity represents the 12-month average of the average monthly adjusted stockholders’ equity, where monthly adjusted stockholders’ equity is defined as the average of the total equity at the beginning and end of each month adjusted for accumulated other comprehensive income, accumulated realized losses in retained earnings related to collateralized obligation trusts consolidated under FIN 46(R) and equity attributed to discontinued operations.

Results of the 2005-2007 LTIP Cycle

 

Name

   Threshold
Number of

RSUs
   Target
Number of

RSUs
   Maximum
Number of
RSUs
   Actual
Number of
RSUs
   12/31/2007
Market Value
of Actual
RSUs
Awarded

George R. Aylward, Jr.

   3,135    6,270    12,540    —      $ —  

Nancy G. Curtiss

              

J. Steven Neamtz

              

Francis G. Waltman

   3,583    7,166    14,332    —        —  

 

(6) Represents the grant of stock options in connection with Mr. Aylward’s promotion to Senior Executive Vice President and President of Asset Management. One-third of these options vested on February 8, 2008. Of the remaining options, one-half will vest in on February 8, 2009 and one-half will vest on February 8, 2010.

 

(7) Represents a one-time retention incentive. These RSUs, which vest on September 5, 2010 (or earlier, in certain circumstances, either pro rata or fully, if employment is terminated due to death, disability, approved retirement, involuntary termination that qualifies for severance or in connection with a change-in-control), are credited with dividend equivalents and interest thereon. The RSUs are scheduled to convert into PNX common stock on September 5, 2010.

 

(8) Represents the grant of stock options in connection with Mr. Aylward’s performance in 2005. Fifty percent of these options vested on February 2, 2008 and the remaining 50% will vest on February 2, 2009 (or earlier, in certain circumstances, if employment is terminated in connection with a change-in-control).

 

110


Table of Contents

Option Exercises and Stock Vested in Fiscal Year 2007

The following table sets forth information concerning the vesting of RSUs that occurred during 2007. None of the NEOs exercised any stock options in 2007.

 

     Option Awards    Stock Awards

Name (a)

   Number of
Shares
Acquired
on Exercise
(b)
   Value
Realized
on Exercise
(c)
   Number of
Shares
Acquired
on Vesting(1)(3)
(d)
   Value
Realized
on Vesting(2)
(e)

George R. Aylward, Jr.

         2,451    $ 33,824

Nancy G. Curtiss

           

J. Steven Neamtz

           

Francis G. Waltman

         3,064      42,283

 

(1) These figures, which are rounded to the nearest whole number, represent the number of RSUs which vested in 2007 prior to any reduction for tax withholding. Each RSU is convertible into one share of PNX common stock.

 

(2) Represents the market value of the RSUs based on the closing price of PNX common stock on the vesting date.

 

(3) Represents the final number of RSUs that were awarded in connection with PNX’s 2004-2006 LTIP cycle. These RSUs converted to shares of PNX common stock, without consideration, on March 5, 2007.

Non-Qualified Deferred Compensation in Fiscal Year 2007

The following table sets forth information concerning NEO participation in deferred compensation plans, excluding The Phoenix Companies, Inc. Savings and Investment Plan (the “401(k) Plan”). The table includes 2007 compensation deferrals, PNX contributions, earnings, withdrawal activity, total balances as of December 31, 2007 and the portion of the aggregate balances as of December 31, 2007 that were reported in Summary Compensation Tables for prior years.

 

Name (a)

  Deferral Type   Executive
Contributions
in Last FY(1)

(b)
  Registrant
Contributions
in Last FY(2)

(c)
  Aggregate
Earnings
in Last
FY(3)

(d)
    Aggregate
Withdrawals/
Distributions

(e)
  Aggregate
Balance
at Last
FYE(4)

(f)
  Portion of
Aggregate
Balance
at Last
FYE
Reported
in Prior
SCT

(g)

George R. Aylward, Jr.

  Excess Investment Plan   $ 5,250   $ 6,300   $ (133 )   $ —     $ 13,838   $    —  

Nancy G. Curtiss

  Excess Investment Plan     —       —       27,442       —       411,185     —  

J. Steven Neamtz

  Excess Investment Plan     —       —       —         —       —       —  

Francis G. Waltman

  Excess Investment Plan     —       —       372       5,118     —       —  

 

(1) These figures represent voluntary deferrals of 2007 salary into The Phoenix Companies, Inc. Non-Qualified Deferred Compensation and Excess Investment Plan (the “Excess Investment Plan”), as described in the following narrative. The corresponding salary figures in the “Summary Compensation Table for 2007 Fiscal Year” include these deferral amounts.

 

(2) These figures represent the 2007 non-qualified PNX matching contribution made in the Excess Investment Plan.

 

(3) Represents the change in account value between December 31, 2006 and December 31, 2007, less any executive or PNX contributions, plus any account distributions.

 

(4) Based on the market value of assumed investment options as of December 31, 2007.

The Phoenix Companies, Inc. Non-Qualified Deferred Compensation and Excess Investment Plan

Certain of PNX employees, including its named executive officers, could have elected to defer up to 60% of their base pay and up to 100% of their annual incentive awards under the Excess Investment Plan. Base pay deferrals commence when year-to-date base pay exceeds the Code limitation on qualified plan compensation which was $225,000 in 2007.

 

111


Table of Contents

With respect to base pay deferrals only, PNX made a corresponding match credit using the same formula as provided in its 401(k) Plan. For the first half of 2007, this match formula was the same for all participants, equal to 100% on the first 3% deferred, plus 50% on the next 2% deferred, for a maximum Company match of 4% of base pay between the Excess Investment Plan and the 401(k) Plan.

Effective July 1, 2007, all of the NEOs received the PNX match based on the following schedule:

 

Years of Service on January 1

  

PNX Match Formula

   Maximum PNX
Match Rate as a
Percentage of
Base Pay
 

Less than 5 years

   100% on first 3% of pay saved; 50% on next 3%    4.5 %

5 to 9 years

   100% on first 6% of pay saved    6.0 %

10 to 14 years

   100% on first 3% of pay saved; 150% on next 3%    7.5 %

15 years or more

   150% on first 6% of pay saved    9.0 %

Based on this schedule, the maximum PNX match rate for 2007, as a percentage of base pay for our NEOs, was:

 

     Maximum 2007 PNX Match Rate for NEOs  

Name

   Prior to July 1, 2007     After June 30, 2007  

George R. Aylward, Jr.

   4 %   7.5 %

Nancy G. Curtiss

   4 %   9.0 %

J. Steven Neamtz

   4 %   4.5 %

Francis G. Waltman

   4 %   9.0 %

The Excess Investment Plan provided participants with a choice of mutual fund offerings similar to those funds made available to employees under the 401(k) Plan. There are no above-market or guaranteed returns in the Excess Investment Plan. Participants could have modified their investment elections at any time under the Excess Investment Plan. Deferrals were credited to the funds selected by the participants and based on the market price for such funds on the date such compensation would otherwise have been paid.

Account balances under the plan, reflecting cumulative appreciation/depreciation and interest credits (depending on the investment fund(s) chosen by the participant) are paid to participants, based on their election made prior to deferral, in lump sum or annual installments following the termination of services with the Company. In-service withdrawals may only be taken to remedy severe financial hardship caused by an unforeseeable emergency as permitted under Code section 409A, and any other applicable laws. Loans are not permitted under this plan. All balances under this plan are unfunded general obligations of the Company, which the Company, at its discretion, may hedge in full or in part by making contributions to a trust subject to the claims of its creditors in certain circumstances. Currently, the Company hedges 100% of this obligation by making investments in the same funds and in the same amounts as participants have elected.

Termination Payments and Change-in-Control Agreements

PNX has entered into certain agreements and maintains certain plans that will require it to provide compensation to certain of our NEOs in the event of a termination of employment, including termination of employment in connection with a change-in-control. The amounts payable to each NEO are estimated in the tables provided in this section. No incremental benefits are provided under these programs in the event of a voluntary termination by the NEO without good reason or by PNX for cause.

Upon termination of employment, all NEOs would receive their vested benefits under any IRS-qualified plan; benefits and conversion rights under the Consolidated Omnibus Budget and Reconciliation Act (“COBRA”), if applicable; and the non-qualified plans’ benefits pursuant to the terms of the plans.

 

112


Table of Contents

Change-in-Control Agreements

Effective January 1, 2006, PNX entered into an agreement with Mr. Aylward which, in certain circumstances, would have provided separation benefits upon the termination of employment in connection with a change-in-control. This agreement superseded a similar agreement that expired on January 1, 2006. The protections provided under the agreement can only be triggered by termination of employment either (i) by PNX for reasons other than death, disability (as defined in the agreements), Cause or retirement, or (ii) by the executive for good reason, provided such termination occurs following, or is effectively connected with, the occurrence of a change-in-control. This agreement had an initial term of two years with provisions for automatic renewals for successive one-year periods, unless either party provides to the other party written notice at least 60 days prior to the end of the initial term or any renewal term that PNX or NEO does not want the term so extended.

This agreement for Mr. Aylward provides for Change-in-Control severance benefits including: (i) vesting of pension plan benefits and an enhanced pension benefit in an amount equal to two years of additional service and age credit and/or pension equity formula credits, as applicable, under such plans payable at the same time, and in the same form as regular pension benefits; (ii) in lieu of any severance benefits payable under any other plan, policy or program, a cash amount equal to two times the sum of base salary plus the greater of the average of annual incentive compensation earned in the last three fiscal years prior to the Change-in-Control and the annual incentive target for the year in which employment terminates; (iii) two years of continued medical, dental and long-term disability coverage; (iv) vesting of benefits under equity compensation plans; (v) an amount equal to a pro-rata portion of the annual incentive award earned for the year in which termination occurs (or target incentive, if greater) and a pro-rata portion of long-term awards for each then open cycle at target; (vi) an amount equal to two years of additional contributions that would have made to PNX’s 401(k) Plan and/or the Excess Investment Plan; and (vii) outplacement services. Mr. Aylward would be subject to a confidentiality covenant after his termination of employment, which will require him to maintain the confidentiality of any confidential or proprietary information and a non-solicitation covenant for two years after the Employment Period (as defined in the agreement) during which he could solicit employees of the Company.

This agreement terminates automatically upon Mr. Aylward’s death, termination due to disability (as defined in the agreements), termination for Cause or voluntary retirement. If his employment is terminated during the Employment Period (as defined in the agreements) by reason of his death or disability (as defined in the agreement), the agreement will terminate and PNX would pay (i) his base salary through the date of termination; (ii) any vested amounts or benefits under applicable employee benefit plans, agreements and programs, as well as any accrued vacation pay not yet paid; and (iii) any other benefits payable in such situation under the plans, agreements, policies or programs of PNX.

In addition, as a result of Mr. Aylward’s February 8, 2007 appointment as Senior Executive Vice President and President, Asset Management, he received a higher multiple (2.5 instead of 2.0) and gross-up provisions.

Mr. Aylward has a change in control agreement with PNX effective January 1, 2008 that contains certain revisions from the previous agreement as a result of a comprehensive market assessment of such agreements in 2007 directed by the PNX board of directors. The following changes are reflected in Mr. Aylward’s 2008 agreement: (i) a two-year term with automatic renewals for successive one-year periods unless either party provides prior written notice; (ii) in connection with the change to PNX’s pension plan formula as of July 1, 2007, the pension enhancement under the PNX SERP is applied only to the new pension equity portion of the SERP benefit; and (iii) with respect to the determination of the severance amount, the portion of the formula based on annual incentive compensation will be based solely on the target amount for the year of termination of employment instead of the greater of such target amount and the average of actual annual incentives paid for the prior three years. Mr. Aylward’s agreement was also revised to comply with Code section 409A, based on guidance available at that time. Mr. Aylward’s agreement will not be triggered by the spin-off and will terminate pursuant to its terms effective upon the distribution date.

 

113


Table of Contents

We are in the process of executing a new change in control agreement with our CEO, to be effective on the distribution date, that contains substantially similar terms, with a few changes to reflect differences in industry practice, such as no pension and SERP provisions because the Company will not have those plans.

It is expected that our independent directors will review the appropriateness of change-in-control agreements for our other executives, and determine whether, and the extent to which, to offer the protections afforded by such agreements to any other of our NEOs.

Executive Severance Allowance Plan

In 2007, if certain of our NEOs were involuntarily terminated, subject to certain exceptions, he or she would have been eligible to receive (i) a payment equal to the executive’s annual base salary, paid in the form of a lump sum payment or in installments, in each case commencing as soon as practicable following separation from service; (ii) a pro-rata portion of the annual incentive awards he or she earned for the fiscal year in which he or she separated from service; (iii) outplacement services; and (iv) continued active participant rates in the medical and dental plans for 12 months of the COBRA continuation period, if the executive elects coverage under COBRA.

Benefits are paid from our general assets and are conditioned on a number of factors, including covenants within the terms of the Executive Severance Allowance Plan and the signing of an agreement containing certain covenants (see (i), (ii) and (iv) in the next sentence) and a release of claims against PNX. The Executive Severance Allowance Plan conditions receipt of benefits on (i) refraining from interfering with ongoing operations and making disparaging remarks concerning PNX, its representatives, agents and employees; (ii) refraining from solicitation of employees, agents, representatives and/or clients of PNX; (iii) returning all PNX property; and (iv) complying with maintaining the confidentiality of confidential and proprietary information. Failure to comply with any of these covenants/conditions will cause immediate cessation of all payments under the plan and the executive must immediately reimburse PNX for all payments previously made.

All payments due under the plan are to be paid no later than March 15 of the calendar year following separation from service, except for any payments that are required to be paid at a later date pursuant to Code section 409A.

Effective January 1, 2008, the benefits became tiered based on years of service, and calculated based upon the executive’s base salary and the average of the last two annual incentive awards paid to the executive as of the termination date.

Our Executive Severance Allowance Plan, which will be effective on the distribution date, is modeled based on PNX’s design, but with a non-service based severance formula that will provide a more consistent level of severance protection for NEOs regardless of service history. For the first two years of the Plan, the severance formula will provide 12 months (18 months in the case of our CEO) of base salary plus target annual incentive bonus for the year of termination. Subsequently, the severance formula will provide 12 months (18 months in the case of our CEO) of base salary plus the average of the last two annual incentives (if any). Additionally, as in the PNX plan, NEOs would receive (i) a pro-rated payment under our applicable annual incentive plan, if any, for the year of termination based upon actual results; (ii) continued subsidized medical and dental coverage for one year; and (iii) executive outplacement coverage for six months.

 

114


Table of Contents

Illustrations of Compensation and Benefits Upon Termination of Employment for Various Reasons

The following table summarizes the value of the compensation and benefits that certain of our NEOs would have received if their employment had been involuntarily terminated (other than for cause) as of December 31, 2007.

 

Payment for Involuntary Terminations
    George R. Aylward, Jr.   Nancy G. Curtiss   J. Steven Neamtz   Francis G. Waltman

Severance

       

Base Salary Component

  $ 330,000   $ 194,615   $ 275,000   $ 205,000

Other Compensation

       

2007 Annual Incentive(1)

    543,913            

Unvested Service-Based RSUs(2)

    45,485            

Subtotal Severance and Other Compensation

    919,398     194,615     275,000     205,000

Benefits

       

Health & Welfare(3)

    3,597     3,597     10,110     10,110

Outplacement

    10,000     5,195     10,000     10,000

Total Severance, Other Compensation, and Benefits

  $ 932,996   $ 203,407   $ 295,110   $ 225,110

 

(1) Reflects the actual 2007 annual incentive earned (excluding the annual incentive enhancement component that was awarded in RSUs in 2008 as described in “—Grants of Plan-Based Awards in Fiscal Year 2007—Estimated Future Payouts Under Non-Equity Incentive Plan Awards”).

 

(2) RSU amounts are valued based on the December 31, 2007 closing price of PNX common stock of $11.87 per share.

 

(3) Reflects estimated Company cost of continuing to subsidize certain health and welfare benefits for the NEOs for 12 months, based on coverage elections in effect for 2007.

The following table summarizes the value of the compensation and benefits that Mr. Aylward would have received if his employment had been terminated involuntarily (other than for Cause) or if Mr. Aylward had terminated employment for good reason in connection with a change-in-control of PNX as of December 31, 2007.

 

Change-in-Control Payments  
     George R. Aylward, Jr.  

Severance

  

Base Salary Component

   $ 660,000  

Annual Incentive Component

     891,000  

Other Compensation

  

2007 Annual Incentive(1)

     543,913  

2005-2007 LTIP Cycle(2)

     74,425  

2006-2008 LTIP Cycle(2)

     105,453  

2007-2009 LTIP Cycle(2)

     111,989  

Unvested Service-Based RSUs(2)

     426,086  

Unvested Stock Options(2)

      

Incremental Non-Qualified Company Match(3)

     49,500  

280G Cut-back(4)

     (1,332,439 )

Subtotal Severance & Other Compensation

     1,529,927  

Benefits and Perquisites

  

Health & Welfare(5)

     8,572  

Outplacement

     20,000  

Total Severance, Other Compensation, Benefits and Perquisites

   $ 1,558,499  

 

(1) Reflects the higher of target 2007 annual incentive and actual 2007 annual incentive, excluding the annual incentive enhancement component that was awarded in RSUs in 2008 as described in “—Grants of Plan-Based Awards in Fiscal Year 2007—Estimated Future Payouts Under Non-Equity Incentive Plan Awards”.

 

115


Table of Contents
(2) All LTIP and RSU amounts are valued based on the December 31, 2007 closing price of PNX common stock of $11.87 per share. Stock options reflect the spread value between the exercise price and $11.87 for any options vesting upon a change-in-control.

 

(3) Reflects the applicable PNX matching formula from the 401(k) Plan and the Excess Investment Plan multiplied by the base salary component of severance.

 

(4) If change-in-control payments are greater than three times the average W-2 reported compensation for the preceding five years, then an excise tax is imposed on the portion of the payment that exceeds one times the average W-2 reported compensation for the preceding five years (the “base amount”). The change-in-control agreement for Mr. Aylward as of December 31, 2007 limited payments in connection with a change-in-control to 2.99 times the base amount. As such, Mr. Aylward’s figures reflect the reduction in benefits required to meet this limit.

 

(5) Reflects estimated PNX cost of continuing to subsidize certain health and welfare benefits for 24 months.

New Plan

In connection with the spin-off, and effective on the distribution date, we will adopt the Virtus Investment Partners, Inc. Omnibus Incentive and Equity Plan (the “Omnibus Plan”).

Omnibus Incentive and Equity Plan

The purpose of the Omnibus Plan is to allow us to incent and reward employees, non-employee directors and consultants by means of cash or shares of our common stock. The following is a summary of the expected terms of the Omnibus Plan.

Common Stock Available for Awards. The maximum number of shares of our common stock available for issuance under the Omnibus Plan will be              shares. In the discretion of our Compensation Committee,              of these shares may be granted in the form of incentive stock options. If any shares covered by an award are cancelled, forfeited, terminated, expire unexercised or are settled through issuance of consideration other than shares of our common stock (including, without limitation, cash), these shares will again become available for award under the Omnibus Plan.

Eligibility. Awards may be made under the Omnibus Plan to any employee of the Company or its subsidiaries, any of our non-employee directors or consultants. Because participation and the types of awards under the Omnibus Plan are subject to the discretion of our Compensation Committee, the number of participants in the plan and the benefits or amounts that will be received by any participant or groups of participants are not currently determinable.

Administration. Effective as of the distribution date, our Compensation Committee will administer the Omnibus Plan. Subject to the terms of the Omnibus Plan, the administrator of the plan may select participants to receive awards, determine the types of awards and the terms and conditions of awards, interpret provisions of the plan and make all factual and legal determinations regarding the plan and any award agreements.

Types of Awards. The Omnibus Plan will provide for grants of stock options (which may consist of incentive stock options or nonqualified stock options), stock appreciation rights, stock awards (which may consist of restricted stock and restricted stock units), performance awards (both cash and equity) and any other types of equity awards. The terms of the awards will be embodied in an award agreement and awards may be granted singly, in combination or in tandem. All or part of an award may be subject to such terms and conditions established by our Compensation Committee, including, but not limited to, continuous service with the Company and its subsidiaries, achievement of specific business objectives and attainment of performance goals. No award may be re-priced.

 

   

Stock Options and Stock Appreciation Rights. The Omnibus Plan permits the granting of stock options to purchase shares of our common stock and stock appreciation rights. The exercise price of each stock option and stock appreciation right may not be less than the fair market value of our common stock on the date of grant. The term of each stock option or stock appreciation right will be set by our

 

116


Table of Contents
 

Compensation Committee and may not exceed ten years from the date of grant. Our Compensation Committee will determine the date each stock option or stock appreciation right may be exercised and the period of time, if any, after retirement, death, disability or other termination of employment during which stock options or stock appreciation rights may be exercised. In general, a grantee may pay the exercise price of an option in cash or shares of common stock.

 

   

Stock Awards. The Omnibus Plan permits the granting of stock awards. Stock awards that are not performance awards will generally be restricted for a minimum period of three years from the date of grant based on a graded vesting schedule; provided, however, that our Compensation Committee may provide for cliff vesting, immediate vesting or earlier vesting following an employee’s termination of employment for death, disability or retirement or upon a change of control or other specified events.

 

   

Performance Awards. The Omnibus Plan permits the granting of performance awards in the form of cash and/or equity. Performance awards will be subject to the satisfaction of specified performance criteria; provided, however, that our Compensation Committee may provide for earlier vesting following an employee’s termination of employment for death, disability or retirement or upon a change in control or other specified events. Our Compensation Committee will determine the terms, conditions and limitations applicable to the performance awards and set the performance goals in its discretion. The performance goals will determine the value and amount of performance awards that will be paid to participants and the portion of an award that may be exercised to the extent such performance goals are met. Performance awards may be designed by our Compensation Committee to qualify as performance-based compensation under Section 162(m) of the Internal Revenue Code (“Section 162(m)”), such as for awards for our executive officers. For purposes of Section 162(m), performance goals will be designated by our Compensation Committee and will be based upon one or more of the following performance goal measures:

 

   

gross or net cash flow, free cash flow, cash flow return on investment (discounted or otherwise), cash operating income, net cash provided by operations, or cash flow in excess of cost of capital;

 

   

sales;

 

   

revenues;

 

   

earnings per share, stock price or stockholder return (on a gross or net basis), or any rating by a nationally recognized statistical rating organization;

 

   

net income;

 

   

return on assets (gross or net), return on investment, return on capital or return on equity (or any combination);

 

   

economic value created;

 

   

operating income, earnings before or after taxes, interest, depreciation, amortization or extraordinary or special items (or any combination), which may be determined on a per share basis (basic or diluted);

 

   

debt to capital ratio, or risk based capital ratio;

 

   

operating margin, gross margin or other financial margin;

 

   

assets under management, gross or net flows of assets under management, market capitalization, or net assets;

 

   

segment income; and

 

   

dividend payout.

Any performance criteria selected by our Compensation Committee may be used to measure our performance as a whole or the performance of any of our segments, and may be measured for the Company alone or relative to a peer group or index.

 

117


Table of Contents

Awards to Non-Employee Directors. Our Compensation Committee may grant non-employee directors one or more awards, including unrestricted common stock, and establish the terms of the award in the applicable award agreement. No award will confer upon any director any right to serve as a director for any period of time or to continue at any rate of compensation.

Award Payments. Awards may be paid in cash, common stock or a combination of cash and common stock. In addition, in the discretion of our Compensation Committee, rights to dividends or dividend equivalents may be extended to any shares of common stock or units denominated in shares of our common stock. Under the plan, during any one-year period, participants may not be granted options or stock appreciation rights exercisable for more than              shares of common stock or stock awards exercisable for more than              shares of common stock.

Adjustments. If there are any changes in the number of shares of our common stock resulting from stock splits, stock dividends, reorganizations, recapitalizations, the number of any merger or consolidation of the Company, or any other event that affects our capitalization occurs, the terms of any outstanding awards and the number of shares of our common stock issuable under the Omnibus Plan will be adjusted to prevent enlargement or dilution of the benefits or potential benefits intended to be made available under the Omnibus Plan.

Section 162(m) of the Internal Revenue Code. Section 162(m) limits us to an annual deduction for federal income tax purposes of $1,000,000 for compensation paid to covered employees. Performance-based compensation is excluded from this limitation. The Omnibus Plan is designed to permit our Compensation Committee to grant awards that qualify as performance-based for purposes of satisfying the conditions of Section 162(m).

Assignability. Generally, no award under the Omnibus Plan is assignable or otherwise transferable, unless otherwise determined by our Compensation Committee.

Amendment, Modification and Termination. Our Board or our Compensation Committee may amend, modify, suspend or terminate the Omnibus Plan, to the extent that no such action will materially adversely affect the rights of a participant holding an outstanding award under the Omnibus Plan without such participant’s consent, and no such action will be taken without shareholder approval, to the extent shareholder approval is legally required.

COMPENSATION OF DIRECTORS

Director Compensation

Our compensation philosophy for non-employee members of our Board of Directors is to:

 

   

establish a basic compensation program that provides competitive levels of pay to attract and retain high quality board of director talent;

 

   

use a balanced combination of cash and equity; and

 

   

align board members’ compensation and shareholder interests by requiring share ownership for all directors.

Non-employee Director compensation will consist of (i) a retainer of $110,000 per year, (ii) an additional retainer of $50,000 per year for our non-executive board chairman, and (iii) an additional retainer of $10,000 for each committee chairman for each committee chaired. Such director compensation will be paid 50% in cash and 50% in Company common stock. The cash portion will be paid quarterly in advance and the equity portion will be paid in outright grants of common stock, granted annually at the annual stockholders meeting with a pro-rated initial grant upon registration of shares for the Company’s Omnibus Plan. The directors will not be able to defer receipt of their cash and equity compensation. We will not provide directors who are also our employees any additional compensation for serving as a director.

 

118


Table of Contents

To evidence or reinforce the alignment of directors’ interests with shareholders interests, our share ownership ownership guidelines require the retention of a fixed number of shares in an amount equal to $300,000 divided by the average closing prices of our common stock over the first thirty days that our shares trade on the                         , rounded to the nearest 500 share increment.

Director Compensation Peer Group Assessment

PNX management conducted a review and assessment of the current market practices for asset management companies’ director compensation. Several factors entered into the selection of the companies and the assessment of results:

 

   

similar to PNX’s situation, many of the companies included in the review were significantly larger than the Company, and pay level, even for directors, generally correlates with company size;

 

   

PNX looked at compensation at the 25th percentile for setting the total pay level, which is comparable to the pay levels of other small companies in the peer group; and

 

   

as a secondary reference, PNX also considered compensation relative to PNX’s board of directors .

PNX analyzed the following components of board compensation, including:

 

   

total compensation for all directors compared to peer companies; and

 

   

cash and equity compared to peer companies.

The following peer companies were used for purposes of PNX’s assessment of market practice:

Director Compensation Peer Companies

 

Public Asset Management Companies – Less Than

$1 Billion Market Capitalization

 

Public Asset Management Companies – Greater Than

$1 Billion Market Capitalization

Calamos Asset Management, Inc.

  Affiliated Managers Corp.

Diamond Hill

  Alliance Capital Management

Epoch Holding Corp.

  BNY Mellon Asset Management

Gamco Investors, Inc.

  Cohen & Steers, Inc.

Pzena Investments

  Eaton Vance
  Federated Investors
  Franklin Resources
  Janus Capital Group
  Nuveen Investments
  T. Rowe Price Group

 

119


Table of Contents

SECURITY OWNERSHIP BY

CERTAIN BENEFICIAL OWNERS AND MANAGEMENT

Beneficial Ownership

Common Stock

All of the outstanding shares of our common stock are, and will be, prior to the distribution, held beneficially and of record by PNX. The following table sets forth information concerning shares of our common stock projected to be beneficially owned immediately after the distribution date by each person or entity known by us to be the beneficial owner of 5% or more of the outstanding shares of PNX’s common stock

The projected share amounts in the table below are based on the number of shares of PNX common stock owned by each person or entity as of the date indicated, as adjusted to reflect the distribution ratio of              share of our common stock for every one share of PNX common stock. To our knowledge, except as otherwise indicated in the footnotes below, each person or entity has sole voting and investment power with respect to the shares of common stock set forth opposite such person’s or entity’s name. Beneficial ownership is determined in accordance with the rules of the SEC and generally includes voting or investment power with respect to the securities. Shares of common stock and stock options that are vested or are scheduled to vest within 60 days are deemed to be outstanding and to be beneficially owned by the persons holding the options for the purpose of computing the percentage ownership of the person.

 

Name

  Amount and
Nature of
Beneficial
Ownership of
PNX Common
Stock
    Percent of Class
of PNX Common
Stock
    Amount and
Nature of
Beneficial
Ownership of
Company
Common Stock

Toscafund Asset Management LLP

90 Long Acre

7 th Floor

London, WC2E 9RA

  10,583,818 (1)   9.30 %(1)  

Third Point LLC

390 Park Avenue

New York, NY 10022

  10,000,000 (2)   8.70 %(2)  

Morgan Stanley

1585 Broadway

New York, NY 10036

  6,478,460 (3)   5.70 %(3)  

Dimensional Fund Advisors LP

1299 Ocean Avenue

Santa Monica, CA 90401

  6,002,951 (4)   5.25 %(4)  

State Farm Mutual Automobile Insurance Company

One State Farm Plaza

Bloomington, IL 61710

  5,934,451 (5)   5.19 %(5)  

 

(1) Based on a Schedule 13G/A filed with the SEC on November 6, 2008 by Toscafund Asset Management LLP (“Tosca Management”). The filing discloses that as of October 21, 2008, Tosca Management had sole dispositive and voting power with respect to 10,583,818 shares of PNX common stock and specifies that all of these shares are owned by it as manager of TOSCA, a Cayman Island Exempt Company.

 

(2) Based on a Schedule 13D/A filed with the SEC on July 18, 2008 by Third Point LLC (“Third Point”). The filing discloses that as of July 16, 2008, Third Point had shared dispositive and voting power with respect to 10,000,000 shares of PNX common stock and specifies that Third Point beneficially owns the shares by virtue of the authority granted to it by the funds and managed accounts that it manages. The 10 million shares represent 8.70% of the shares of PNX common stock outstanding as of April 30, 2008.

 

(3) Based on Schedule 13G filed with the SEC on April 10, 2008 by Morgan Stanley (“Morgan Stanley”). The filing discloses that as of April 3, 2008, Morgan Stanley had sole dispositive and voting power with respect to 6,478,460 shares of PNX common stock and specifies that all of these shares are owned by certain operating units of Morgan Stanley.

 

(4)

Based on a Schedule 13G/A filed with the SEC on February 6, 2008 by Dimensional Fund Advisors LP (“Dimensional”). The filing discloses that as of December 31, 2007, Dimensional had sole dispositive and voting power with respect to 6,002,951 shares of PNX

 

120


Table of Contents
 

common stock and specifies that all of these shares are owned by investment companies to which Dimensional serves as investment advisor and certain other commingled group trusts and accounts to which Dimensional serves as investment manager. The filing also specifies that Dimensional disclaims beneficial ownership of the securities reported. The 6,002,951 shares represent 5.25% of the shares of PNX common stock outstanding as of December 31, 2007.

 

(5) Based on a Schedule 13G/A filed with the SEC on January 30, 2008 by State Farm Mutual Automobile Insurance Company (“State Farm”). This amount includes 5,881,918 shares of PNX common stock owned by State Farm as of December 31, 2007 and 52,533 shares of PNX common stock owned by three affiliated investment companies for which a State Farm subsidiary is the investment advisor as of December 31, 2007. The 5,934,451 shares represent 5.19% of the shares of PNX common stock outstanding as of December 31, 2007.

Convertible Preferred Stock

All of the outstanding shares of our Series A Preferred Stock are currently held beneficially and of record by Harris Bankcorp. In connection with the spin-off, we expect that all of the outstanding shares of our Series A Preferred Stock will be exchanged by Harris Bankcorp to PIM for an equal number of shares of our Series B Preferred Stock, and that PIM will sell an additional 35,217 shares of our Series B Preferred Stock to Harris Bankcorp. As a result of such exchange, all of the outstanding shares of our Series B Preferred Stock will be held beneficially and of record by Harris Bankcorp. The following table sets forth information concerning shares of our Series B Preferred Stock that we expect to be beneficially owned immediately after the distribution date by each person or entity known by us to be the beneficial owner of 5% or more of the outstanding shares of our Series B Preferred Stock. To our knowledge, each person or entity has sole voting and investment power with respect to the shares of Series B Preferred Stock set forth opposite such person’s or entity’s name. Beneficial ownership is determined in accordance with the rules of the SEC and generally includes voting or investment power with respect to the securities. In addition, under SEC rules, a person is deemed to be the beneficial owner of securities which may be acquired by such person upon the exercise of options and warrants or the conversion of convertible securities within 60 days from the date on which beneficial ownership is to be determined.

 

Name

   Amount and
Nature of
Beneficial
Ownership of
our Series B
Preferred Stock
Immediately
Prior to the
Distribution
   Percent of
Class of
Series B
Preferred Stock
    Total Percentage of
Voting Power
Immediately Prior
to the Distribution
 

Harris Bankcorp, Inc.

111 W. Monroe Street,

Chicago, IL 60603

   45,000    100 %   23 %

Management Ownership

Common Stock

The following table sets forth the expected beneficial ownership of our common stock calculated as of September 30, 2008, based upon the distribution of              share of our common stock for every share of PNX common stock by:

 

   

each executive officer;

 

   

each of our directors; and

 

   

all of our executive officers and directors as a group.

To the extent our directors and executive officers own shares of PNX common stock at the time of the distribution, they will participate in the distribution on the same terms as other holders of shares of PNX common stock.

 

121


Table of Contents

Following the distribution, we will have an aggregate of approximately              million shares of common stock outstanding, based on approximately              million shares of PNX common stock outstanding on             , 2008. Following the distribution, we will have approximately      holders of our common stock, based upon such number of PNX stockholders as of             , 2008. The percentage ownership of each beneficial owner of PNX common stock will be the same in the Company after the distribution.

The number of shares beneficially owned by each director or officer is determined according to the rules of the SEC and the information is not necessarily indicative of beneficial ownership for any other purpose. The mailing address for each of the directors and executive officers listed below is c/o Corporate Secretary, Virtus Investment Partners, Inc, 56 Prospect Street, Hartford, CT 06102.

 

Name of

Beneficial Owner

   Shares
Beneficially
Owned(1)(2)
    Options
Exercisable
Within 60
Days(1)(3)
   Restricted
Stock Units(1)(4)
   Total(1)(5)    Percent of
Common
Stock(6)

James R. Baio

   0 (7)   0    0    0    *

Susan F. Cabrera

   0 (7)   0    0    0    *

Diane M. Coffey

   0 (7)   0    0    0    *

Timothy A. Holt

   0 (7)   0    0    0    *

Edward M. Swan, Jr.

   0 (7)   0    0    0    *

Mark C. Treanor

   0 (7)   0    0    0    *

Michael A. Angerthal

   0 (8)   0    0    0    *

George R. Aylward, Jr.

   11,284     53,166    61,840    126,290    *

Nancy G. Curtiss

   1,509     6,000    4,211    11,720    *

J. Steven Neamtz

   0     0    15,081    15,081    *

Francis G. Waltman

   3,766     0    6,539    10,305    *

All directors, director nominees and executive officers as a group (11 persons)

   16,559 (9)   59,166    87,671    163,396    *

 

* Less than 1%

 

(1) All holdings are stated as of September 30, 2008, and are rounded to the nearest whole number.

 

(2) In the case of the executive officers, the figures include share equivalents held in The Phoenix Companies, Inc. Savings and Investment Plan (the “401(k) Plan”). For Mr. Aylward, Ms. Curtiss, and Mr. Waltman, their numbers include 2,611, 1,509, and 3,766, respectively, share equivalents in the PNX 401(K) plan.

 

(3) Reflects the number of shares that could be acquired under options exercisable within 60 days of September 30, 2008.

 

(4) Reflects those RSUs outstanding whose conversion into shares is not contingent upon any performance-based criteria. Officers do not have the power to vote the shares underlying the RSUs. All are not vested.

 

(5) Represents the sum of the total shares beneficially owned, the shares underlying options exercisable within 60 days and the shares into which the RSUs will be converted if the applicable conditions for vesting and issuance are met.

 

(6) Reflects, as a percent of PNX outstanding common stock, the total of the first two columns.

 

(7) The directors will receive a pro-rated initial grant of our common stock equal to 50% of their respective applicable retainers upon the registration of shares of our common stock for the Company’s Omnibus Plan, as set forth in “—Compensation of Directors—Director Compensation.”

 

(8) Mr. Angerthal was hired by the Company on October 6, 2008.

 

(9) Includes 7,887 share equivalents held in the 401(k) Plan.

Convertible Preferred Stock

We expect that none of our executive officers or directors will hold shares of our preferred stock before or after the distribution.

 

122


Table of Contents

OUR RELATIONSHIP WITH PNX AFTER THE SPIN-OFF

We are presently wholly owned by Phoenix Investment Management Company (“PIM”), a wholly owned subsidiary of PNX, and the results of operations of entities that are or will be its subsidiaries have been included in PNX’s consolidated financial results. As a part of PNX, in the ordinary course of business, we have received from PNX various services mainly related to information technology support, human resources, facilities, corporate communications, compliance, corporate and staff, legal, internal audit and tax. Our historical financial statements included in this information statement include allocations by PNX of a portion of its direct costs and overhead related to these services. These cost allocations have been determined on a basis that the Company and PNX consider to be reasonable reflections of the use of these services. PNX allocated to us $20.4 million in 2005, $22.2 million in 2006 and $19.2 million in 2007 of expenses. Through September 30, 2008, PNX allocated to us $12.7 million of expenses. By the end of 2008, we expect to have assumed responsibility for substantially all of these services and their related expenses.

In connection with the spin-off, PNX is distributing its entire equity interest in the Company to PNX stockholders in a transaction that is intended to be a taxable transaction to PNX and its stockholders. The spin-off will be subject to a number of conditions, some of which are described more fully under “The Spin-Off.” After the spin-off, PNX will not have any ownership interest in the Company, and we will be an independent publicly traded company. In addition, after the spin-off, we will not have any ownership interest in PNX, and PNX will be an independent publicly traded company. PNX may, in its sole discretion, change the terms of the spin-off or decide not to complete the spin-off before the distribution date.

In connection with the spin-off, the Company and PNX will enter into the Separation Agreement and several other ancillary agreements to complete the separation of our business from PNX and to distribute our common stock to PNX stockholders. These agreements will govern the relationship between the Company and PNX after the distribution and will also provide for the allocation of employee benefits, taxes and other liabilities and obligations attributable to periods prior to the distribution. The agreements will have been prepared before the distribution and will reflect agreement between affiliated parties established without arms-length negotiation. We believe, however, that the terms of these agreements will equitably reflect the benefits and costs of our ongoing relationships with PNX. Along with the Separation Agreement, the other ancillary agreements include a:

 

   

Transition Services Agreement;

 

   

Tax Separation Agreement; and

 

   

Employee Matters Agreement.

These agreements governing our future relationships with PNX are summarized below. We may enter into other agreements with PNX prior to or concurrently with the distribution that would relate to other aspects of our relationship with PNX following the spin-off. Following the distribution, we may enter into other commercial agreements with PNX from time to time, the terms of which will be determined at those relevant times.

Copies of the forms of the agreements described below will be filed as exhibits to our Form 10, of which this information statement is a part. The summaries of the material agreements are qualified in their entireties by reference to the full text of the agreements. We encourage you to read the full text of these material agreements.

Separation Agreement

The Separation Agreement will set forth the agreement between the Company and PNX with respect to the principal corporate transactions required to effect our separation from PNX; the transfer of certain assets and liabilities required to effect such separation; the distribution of shares of our common stock to PNX stockholders; and other agreements governing the relationship between the Company and PNX following the separation. PNX

 

123


Table of Contents

will consummate the spin-off only if specified conditions are met. For additional information regarding conditions to the distribution, see “Summary—Corporate Information and Structure.”

Even if these conditions are satisfied, other events or circumstances could occur that could impact the timing or terms of the spin-off or PNX’s ability or plans to consummate the spin-off. As a result of these factors, the spin-off may not occur and, if it does occur, it may not occur on the terms or in the manner described, or in the timeframe contemplated.

The Contribution; Allocation of Assets and Liabilities; No Representations and Warranties

In connection with the distribution, PNX has contributed or will contribute to us certain assets to be included in our business, as described in this information statement. It will effect this contribution by transferring, or causing its subsidiaries to transfer, certain assets related to the conduct of our business. In addition, PIM will transfer all of our common stock to PNX, and we will transfer all of the stock and assets of Goodwin to PNX. After the spin-off, PNX will have no interest in our assets and business and, subject to certain exceptions described below, generally will have no obligation with respect to our liabilities after the distribution. Similarly, after the spin-off we will have no interest in the assets of PNX’s other businesses and generally will have no obligation with respect to the liabilities of PNX’s retained businesses after the distribution.

Except as expressly set forth in the Separation Agreement or in any ancillary agreement, neither we nor PNX will make any representation or warranty as to the assets, businesses or liabilities transferred or assumed as part of the contribution. Furthermore, unless expressly provided to the contrary in any ancillary agreement, all assets will be transferred on an “as is, where is” basis, and the respective transferees will agree to bear the economic and legal risks that any conveyance is insufficient to vest in the transferee good and marketable title free and clear of any security interest and that any necessary consents or approvals are not obtained or that requirements of laws or judgments are not complied with.

The Distribution

Following the satisfaction or waiver of all conditions to the distribution as set forth in the Separation Agreement, PNX will deliver to the distribution agent a certificate or certificates representing all of the outstanding shares of our common stock. PNX will instruct the distribution agent to distribute those shares on the distribution date or as soon thereafter as practicable, so that each PNX stockholder will receive      share of our common stock for every one share of PNX common stock they own as of the record date of the spin-off. The distribution of the shares of our common stock will be made in book-entry form.

Releases and Indemnification

The Separation Agreement generally will provide for a full and complete mutual release and discharge as of the date of the spin-off of all liabilities existing or arising from all acts and events occurring or failing to occur or alleged to have occurred or have failed to occur and all conditions existing or alleged to have existed on or before the distribution, between or among PNX or its affiliates, on the one hand, and us or our affiliates, on the other hand, except as expressly set forth in the Separation Agreement. The liabilities released or discharged will include liabilities arising under any contractual agreements or arrangements existing or alleged to exist between or among any such members on or before the distribution, other than the Separation Agreement, the ancillary agreements described below and the other agreements referred to in the Separation Agreement.

Subject to certain exceptions, we may agree to indemnify PNX and its affiliates, and each of their directors, officers and employees, from and against all liabilities relating to, arising out of or resulting from:

 

   

the business, operations, contracts, assets and liabilities of the Company and our affiliates, other than Goodwin, whether arising before or after the spin-off;

 

124


Table of Contents
   

liabilities or obligations associated with our business, as defined in the Separation Agreement, or otherwise assumed by us pursuant to the Separation Agreement, including liabilities associated with litigation related to our business;

 

   

any breach by us of the Separation Agreement or any of the ancillary agreements entered into in connection with the Separation Agreement; or

 

   

any untrue statement or alleged untrue statement of any material fact contained in this information statement or any amendment or supplement thereto or the omission or alleged omission to state therein a material fact required to be stated, except for information for which PNX may agree to indemnify us as described below.

Subject to certain exceptions, PNX may agree to indemnify us and our affiliates, and each of our directors, officers and employees, from and against all liabilities relating to, arising out of or resulting from:

 

   

the business, operations, contracts, assets and liabilities of PNX and its affiliates, other than our business but including Goodwin, whether arising before or after the spin-off;

 

   

liabilities or obligations of PNX or its affiliates, including Goodwin, other than those of an entity forming part of our business or otherwise assumed by us pursuant to the Separation Agreement, including liabilities associated with litigation that is not related to our business;

 

   

any breach by PNX of the Separation Agreement or any of the ancillary agreements entered into in connection with the Separation Agreement; or

 

   

any untrue statement or alleged untrue statement of any material fact regarding PNX included in “Summary—Our Company,” “Summary—Summary of The Spin-Off” or “The Spin-Off—Reasons for the Spin-Off” above and any information regarding whether the distribution is taxable contained in this information statement.

Expenses

The Separation Agreement will provide that PNX will pay all costs and expenses incurred in connection with the spin-off and the transactions contemplated by the Separation Agreement, and all costs and expenses incurred in connection with the preparation, execution, delivery and implementation of the Separation Agreement and the ancillary agreements. PNX will also pay other expenses of the transaction, including the legal, filing, accounting, printing and other expenses incurred in connection with the preparation, printing, and filing of our Form 10, of which this information statement is a part, and this information statement.

Litigation Matters

The Separation Agreement will provide that we will diligently conduct, at our sole cost and expense, the defense of any actions related to the Company business, that we will notify PNX of any material developments related to such litigation, and that we will agree not to file cross claims against PNX in relation to such actions. PNX will make corresponding agreements with respect to actions that are not related to the Company business. The Company and PNX have agreed to share the cost and expense of certain actions that we cannot currently identify as being related to the Company or PNX businesses, until they can be so classified. Furthermore, the Separation Agreement will require the Company and PNX to cooperate to, among other matters, maintain attorney-client privilege and work product immunity in connection with litigation against us or PNX, as further set forth in the common interest agreement described below.

Amendments and Waivers; Further Assurances

The Separation Agreement will provide that no provisions of it or any ancillary agreement will be deemed waived, amended, supplemented or modified by any party unless the waiver, amendment, supplement or modification is in writing and signed by the authorized representative of the party against whom that waiver, amendment, supplement or modification is sought to be enforced.

 

125


Table of Contents

The Company and PNX will agree to use our respective reasonable efforts to:

 

   

execute and deliver any additional instruments and documents and take any other actions the other party may reasonably request to effectuate the purposes of the Separation Agreement and the ancillary agreements and their terms; and

 

   

take all actions and do all things reasonably necessary under applicable laws and agreements or otherwise to consummate and make effective the transactions contemplated by the Separation Agreement and the ancillary agreements.

Dispute Resolution

The Separation Agreement will contain provisions that govern, except as otherwise provided in any ancillary agreements, the resolution of disputes, controversies or claims that may arise between the Company and PNX. These provisions contemplate that efforts will be made to resolve disputes, controversies or claims by escalation of the matter to senior management, independent Board committees or other Company or PNX representatives. If those efforts are not successful, the parties may by mutual agreement submit the dispute, controversy or claim to arbitration, subject to the provisions of the Separation Agreement.

Transition Services Agreement

In connection with the spin-off, the Company and PNX will enter into a transition services agreement (the “Transition Services Agreement”) pursuant to which we expect PNX will provide us, among other things, certain administrative and other services on an interim basis following the distribution date, such as information technology support, human resources, facilities, legal and other limited services consistent with past practices. For each of these areas, a transition service schedule will summarize the services to be provided and the responsibilities of the Company and PNX. The cost to both parties for these services will be at fair market value rates. The Transition Services Agreement will have such terms and provisions to be mutually agreed upon by PNX and the Company prior to the spin-off.

Tax Separation Agreement

In connection with the spin-off, the Company and PNX will enter into a tax separation agreement (the “Tax Separation Agreement”), which will set forth the responsibilities of the Company and PNX with respect to, among other things, liabilities for federal, state, local and foreign taxes for periods before and including the spin-off, the preparation and filing of tax returns for such periods and disputes with taxing authorities regarding taxes for such periods. PNX will be generally responsible for federal, state, local and foreign income taxes of the Company for periods before and including the spin-off. We will be generally responsible for all other taxes relating to our business. The Company and PNX will each generally be responsible for managing those disputes that relate to the taxes for which each of us is responsible and, under certain circumstances, may jointly control any dispute relating to taxes for which both of us are responsible.

Employee Matters Agreement

General

In connection with the spin-off, the Company and PNX will enter into an employee matters agreement (the “Employee Matters Agreement”), which will provide for the transition of our employees from PNX’s employee plans and programs to employee plans and programs at the Company. The agreement also will allocate responsibility for certain employee benefit matters and liabilities after the distribution date. In general, and except as described below, the Company and PNX will be responsible for all obligations and liabilities relating to our respective current and former (after the distribution date) employees and their dependents and beneficiaries.

 

126


Table of Contents

Employee Benefit Plans, Programs and Policies

Under the Employee Matters Agreement, we will provide specified health and welfare and retirement benefits for our employees and retirees (employees who retire on or after October 31, 2008) after October 31, 2008, which will generally be similar to the benefits offered by PNX, but revised to reflect benefits offered generally by other asset management companies. As of November 1, 2008 or the distribution date, as applicable, our employees will cease active participation in PNX employee benefit plans and programs and begin active participation in our plans and programs; we will cease to be a participating employer in the employee benefit plans and programs maintained by PNX. We will generally recognize, among other things, our employees’ past service with PNX for purposes of our employee benefit plans, programs and policies to the extent such crediting does not result in a duplication of benefits. Nothing in that agreement will restrict our or PNX’s ability to amend or terminate any of our or PNX’s employee benefit plans.

We established our own 401(k) plan, effective as of November 1, 2008, with similar terms to the PNX 401(k) plan, except that (i) the Company match contribution is not enhanced, (ii) a discretionary Company match contribution provision is included, and (iii) more investment options are available. Our plan covers all currently active Company employees who, as of October 31, 2008, were participants in PNX’s 401(k) plan. The PNX 401(k) plan will transfer to our 401(k) plan the account balances and related assets, including outstanding loan balances and QDROs, of each of these participants within a reasonable period of time after November 1, 2008. We also established our own non-qualified excess plan, effective as of November 1, 2008, with similar terms to the PNX non-qualified excess plan, except that (i) the Company match contribution is not enhanced, (ii) a discretionary Company match contribution provision is included, and (iii) more investment options are available. Our excess plan covers all currently active Company employees who, as of October 31, 2008, are participants in PNX’s non-qualified excess plan. The appropriate assetized amount will be transferred within a reasonable period of time after November 1, 2008.

Consistent with asset management industry practices, we will not establish a defined benefit pension plan. For purposes of PNX’s defined benefit pension plan, employees of the Company and its affiliates who are participants as of October 31, 2008 will have their benefits under such plan frozen as of December 31, 2008 or the distribution date, if earlier. Those employees of the Company who are participants in the plan as of that date and have non-vested accrued benefits will vest in their accrued benefits on that date. Also, we will not establish a non-qualified defined benefit pension plan. For purposes of PNX’s non-qualified defined benefit pension plans, the benefits attributable to the employees of the Company and its affiliates who are participants as of October 31, 2008 will be frozen as of December 31, 2008 or the distribution date, if earlier, but distributions will not be permitted until the Company employees terminate from the Company and its affiliates.

Effective as of November 1, 2008, we established health and welfare plans, including a flexible benefit plan, for our employees comparable to those maintained by PNX as of that date, but retiree coverages are not provided. Included in the menu of benefits is a broad-based severance plan and an executive severance plan (the executive severance plan will not become effective until the distribution date); for the broad-based plan, we recognize PNX service for purposes of calculating the severance amount. We have credited each of our employees with the amount of accrued but unused vacation time and other time-off benefits that each of our employees had with PNX as of November 1, 2008, and each Company employee’s service with PNX will be recognized for those policies/benefits.

Effective as of the distribution date, we will establish annual and long-term incentive plans/programs for our employees with eligibility and other terms substantially comparable to those maintained by PNX. Some of the incentives will be provided through a newly established omnibus incentive and equity plan, which consolidates several coverages that were provided by separate plans for PNX.

 

127


Table of Contents

Treatment of PNX Equity Awards Held by Company Employees

Certain PNX employees who become Company employees will hold previously-awarded options to purchase shares of PNX common stock. On the distribution date, each such outstanding award will be converted to options to purchase shares of Company common stock. These Company stock options will be adjusted on the distribution date in a manner intended to preserve the relative economic value of the options based on a formula determined by PNX’s compensation committee in accordance with the terms of the applicable plan. These Company stock options will continue to vest contingent upon the employee’s continued employment by the Company and the employee will continue to have up to ten years from the original PNX grant date to exercise vested options, subject to the terms of the applicable plan and option agreement as in effect immediately prior to the distribution date.

Additionally, certain PNX employees who become Company employees will hold outstanding awards of service-vested restricted stock units payable in shares of PNX common stock. On the distribution date, each such outstanding award will remain outstanding and will be converted to Company awards payable in Company common stock. These Company restricted stock units will be adjusted in a manner intended to preserve the relative economic value of the restricted stock units based on a formula determined by PNX’s compensation committee in accordance with the terms of the applicable plan. These Company restricted stock units will continue to vest based on such employee’s continued employment with the Company, subject to the terms of the applicable plan and award agreement as in effect immediately prior to the distribution date.

Finally, certain PNX employees who become Company employees will hold outstanding performance restricted stock unit awards payable in shares of PNX common stock. On the distribution date, each such outstanding award that is contingent on a PNX performance metric will be pro-rated as of the distribution date and such adjusted award will remain outstanding and will, subject to achievement of the applicable performance criteria, be payable in cash. Outstanding awards that are contingent on a Company performance metric will continue to remain outstanding and will, subject to achievement of the applicable performance criteria, be payable in shares of Company common stock. Each restricted stock unit award will be adjusted in a manner intended to preserve the economic value of the restricted stock units based on a formula determined by PNX’s compensation committee in accordance with the applicable plan, and each restricted stock unit award will continue to vest based on such employee’s continued employment by the Company and the satisfaction of applicable performance criteria, subject to the terms and conditions of the applicable plan and award agreement as in effect immediately prior to the distribution date.

 

128


Table of Contents

DESCRIPTION OF OUR CAPITAL STOCK

General

Immediately following the spin-off, we expect that our authorized capital stock will consist of 1 billion shares of common stock, par value $0.01 per share, and 250 million shares of preferred stock, par value $0.01 per share. The authorized preferred shares will include 9,783 shares of Series A Non-Voting Convertible Preferred Stock and 45,000 shares of Series B Voting Convertible Preferred Stock that is expected to be sold to the investor immediately prior to the distribution. Based on the approximately              shares of PNX common stock that we expect to be outstanding on the record date, and a distribution ratio of              share of Company common stock for every one share of PNX common stock, we will have approximately              shares of common stock outstanding immediately following the spin-off. The actual number of shares to be distributed will be determined on the record date.

Common Stock

Authorized Shares

We are authorized to issue up to              shares of common stock.

Dividends

We do not plan on initially paying any cash dividends. However, the owners of our common stock may receive dividends when declared by our Board from funds legally available for the payment of dividends. All decisions regarding the declaration and payment of dividends will be evaluated from time to time in light of our financial condition, earnings, growth prospects, other uses of cash, funding requirements, applicable law and other factors our Board deems relevant. See “Dividend Policy.”

Voting Rights

Each share of common stock will be entitled to one vote in the election of directors and all other matters submitted to stockholder vote. Except as otherwise required by law or provided in any resolution adopted by our Board with respect to any series of preferred stock, the holders of our common stock will possess all voting power. There will be no cumulative voting rights. In general, all matters submitted to a meeting of stockholders, other than as described below, shall be decided by vote of a majority of the shares of the Company’s common stock present in person or represented by proxy at the meeting and entitled to vote on the matter. Directors are elected by a plurality of the shares of the Company’s common stock present in person or represented by proxy at the meeting and entitled to vote on the election of directors.

It is expected that the approval of at least 75% of the shares of the Company’s outstanding common stock entitled to vote will be necessary to approve certain actions, such as amending the provisions of the Company’s bylaws or certificate of incorporation relating to the plurality voting standard for the election of directors, the number and manner of election and removal of directors, the classified nature of our Board, the manner of filling vacancies thereon or prohibiting any action by the stockholders by written consent, or electing a director to fill a vacancy if the stockholders’ power to do so is expressly conferred by the DGCL. Other amendments to the Company’s bylaws and certificate of incorporation, and certain extraordinary transactions (such as a merger or consolidation involving the Company or a sale of all or substantially all of the assets of the Company), must be approved by a majority of the Company’s outstanding common stock entitled to vote.

Liquidation Rights

If we liquidate, dissolve or wind-up our business, whether voluntarily or not, our common stockholders will share equally in the distribution of all assets remaining after payment to creditors and any Company preferred stockholders.

 

129


Table of Contents

Preemptive Rights

Our common stock will have no preemptive or similar rights.

Preferred Stock

Our certificate of incorporation authorizes our Board, without the approval of our stockholders, to fix the designation, powers, preferences and rights of one or more series of preferred stock, which may be greater than those of our common stock. We believe that the ability of our Board to issue one or more series of preferred stock will provide us with flexibility in structuring possible future financings and acquisitions and in meeting other corporate needs that might arise. The issuance of shares of our preferred stock, or the issuance of rights to purchase shares of preferred stock, could be used to discourage an unsolicited acquisition proposal. See “Anti-Takeover Provisions” below.

Series A Non-Voting Convertible Preferred Stock

Our Board has authorized the issuance of 9,783 shares of Series A Non-Voting Convertible Preferred Stock (the “Series A Preferred Stock”). On October 31, 2008, the Series A Preferred Stock was sold to Harris Bankcorp, Inc. (“Harris Bankcorp”). Following the spin-off, we expect that all of the outstanding shares of our Series A Preferred Stock will have been exchanged for an equal number of shares of Series B Voting Convertible Preferred Stock (the “Series B Preferred Stock”). The terms of our Series A Preferred Stock are set forth in a certificate of designations and are described below.

The Series A Preferred Stock will have similar rights, preferences, privileges, powers and terms as the Series B Preferred Stock, except that the Series A Preferred Stock will not have voting rights other than:

 

   

the right to vote as a separate class to approve any increase or decrease to the number of shares of Series A Preferred Stock outstanding; and

 

   

the right to vote as a single class on certain matters, as described below under “Description of Our Capital Stock—Preferred Stock—Series B Voting Convertible Preferred Stock—Voting Rights.”

For additional information on the exchange of Series A Preferred Stock for Series B Preferred Stock, see “Equity Investment.”

Series B Voting Convertible Preferred Stock

Following the spin-off, we expect that 45,000 shares of our Series B Preferred Stock (together with the Series A Preferred Stock, the “Convertible Preferred Stock”) will have been sold to Harris Bankcorp. The terms of our Series B Preferred Stock are set forth in a certificate of designations and are described below.

Stated Value

Our Convertible Preferred Stock will have a stated value of $1,000.00 per share (the “stated value”).

Rank

With respect to payments of dividends and rights upon liquidation, winding up or dissolution, the Convertible Preferred Stock will rank (i) senior to our common stock and to any class or series of stock of the Company that we may issue in the future unless the terms of such stock expressly provides otherwise, (ii) junior to our existing and future indebtedness and liabilities.

 

130


Table of Contents

Dividends

When and if declared by our Board, the holders of our Convertible Preferred Stock are entitled to receive dividends per share equal to 8.0% per annum of the stated value then in effect, before any dividends are declared, set aside or paid upon any equity securities of the Company that rank junior to the Convertible Preferred Stock with respect to payment of dividends or rights upon liquidation, dissolution or winding up of the Corporation (the “junior stock”). Subject to certain limitations, such dividends may be paid in shares of our Convertible Preferred Stock or in cash at the sole discretion of the Company. In addition, the holders of our Convertible Preferred Stock are entitled to share in any dividends paid on shares of our common stock pro rata with the holders of our common stock, as if the Convertible Preferred Stock had been converted into shares of common stock immediately prior to the record date for determining the stockholders eligible to receive such dividends.

Dividends payable on our Convertible Preferred Stock will be cumulative and will continue to accumulate daily, whether or not declared and whether or not there are net profits or surplus legally available for the payment of dividends in the applicable fiscal year. Subject to certain exceptions, if the Company fails to pay any dividend required to be paid to the holders of the Convertible Preferred Stock, no dividends may be declared, set apart for, or paid on any junior stock, and no redemption, purchase, or acquisition of our common stock may be made by the Company, until all required dividends on our Convertible Preferred Stock have been paid in full.

Liquidation Preference

Upon a liquidation, winding up or dissolution (each, a “liquidation”) of the Company, after satisfaction of our creditors and before any distribution or payment is made to holders of any junior stock, each holder of Convertible Preferred Stock will be entitled to receive a per share amount equal to the greater of (i) the stated value then in effect, plus any accumulated but unpaid dividends thereon (whether or not declared) through the date of such liquidation, and (ii) the amount holders of our Convertible Preferred Stock would be entitled to receive immediately prior to such liquidation if their Convertible Preferred Stock were converted into shares of our common stock at the conversion rate (as described below) then in effect immediately prior to such liquidation, plus all declared accumulated but unpaid dividends on our common stock through the date of such liquidation (the greater of (i) and (ii), the “liquidation preference”).

Conversion

Holders of our Convertible Preferred Stock may convert any or all of their shares into shares of our common stock at any time at the conversion rate set out below. In the event that the holders of a majority in liquidation preference of the then outstanding Convertible Preferred Stock approve a mandatory conversion of the Convertible Preferred Stock, all of the shares of our Convertible Preferred Stock then outstanding will be converted automatically into shares of our common stock at the conversion rate set out below.

The initial conversion rate for each share of Convertible Preferred Stock is 5.11 shares of our common stock per each share of Convertible Preferred Stock. The conversion rate is subject to customary anti-dilution adjustments.

In the event that the closing price of our common stock exceeds 175% of the then applicable conversion price for at least twenty days out of the previous thirty days on which our common stock has traded, we may elect to cause each share of our Convertible Preferred Stock to be converted into shares of our common stock at the conversion rate then in effect. However, holders of our Convertible Preferred Stock may elect to retain their shares of Convertible Preferred Stock and forfeit their right to thereafter participate in any dividends paid on our common stock.

Redemption

At any time after the sixth year anniversary of the issuance of the Series A Preferred Stock, we will have the option, on not less than 30 days’ notice to all holders, to redeem all (but not less than all) of the then outstanding

 

131


Table of Contents

shares of Convertible Preferred Stock for cash consideration equal to the liquidation preference thereof plus all accumulated and unpaid dividends and all accrued interest thereon at a rate of LIBOR plus 3% per annum. At the election of the holders of a majority in liquidation preference of the Convertible Preferred Stock then outstanding, the Convertible Preferred Stock may be converted into shares of common stock immediately prior to any such redemption by us at the conversion rate then in effect.

At any time after the seventh year anniversary of the issuance of the Series A Preferred Stock, the holders of our Convertible Preferred Stock will have the option to require us to redeem any or all of the then outstanding shares of their Convertible Preferred Stock for cash consideration equal the liquidation preference thereof plus any accumulated and unpaid dividends and all accrued interest thereon a rate of LIBOR plus 3% per annum.

Voting Rights

Subject to the limitation described below, the holders of shares of Series B Preferred Stock:

 

   

will be entitled to vote with the holders of our common stock on all matters submitted for a vote of holders of common stock other than the election of directors; and

 

   

will be entitled to a number of votes equal to the number of shares of common stock into which each such share of Series B Preferred Stock is then convertible at the time of the related record date.

To the extent the aggregate voting power of the Series B Preferred Stock exceeds 24.9% of the total voting power of our common stock outstanding at the time (calculated on a fully-diluted basis), the number of Series B Preferred Shares that represents such excess voting power will become non-voting, except as required under applicable law, and will not be considered “outstanding” for purposes of any vote or consent. However, if at any time (i) the holders of our Series B Preferred Stock hold securities representing more than 33-1/3% of our common stock outstanding at the time (calculated on a fully-diluted basis) or (ii) a third party acquires beneficial ownership of 25% or more of either our common stock outstanding at the time (calculated on a fully-diluted basis) or the total voting power of our capital stock, the limitation on the voting power of our Series B Preferred Stock described above will no longer operate and our Series B Preferred Stock will become fully voting.

For as long as 66-2/3% of the Convertible Preferred Stock is outstanding, the holders of our Series A Preferred Stock or Series B Preferred Stock, as applicable, will generally be entitled to vote as a single class with respect to:

 

   

the amendment, alteration or repeal of any of the rights, preferences, privileges or powers of, or the restrictions provided for the benefit of, the holders of equity securities of the Company that is adverse to the holders of the Convertible Preferred Stock;

 

   

the amendment, alteration or repeal of any provision of our bylaws or amended and restated certificate of incorporation in a manner that is adverse to the holders of the Convertible Preferred Stock; or

 

   

the creation, authorization or issuance of securities having any preference or priority in relation to, or ranking pari passu with, the Convertible Preferred Stock, as to dividends, voting or liquidation.

In addition, so long as at least 66-2/3% of the aggregate shares of Series B Preferred Stock sold immediately prior to the spin-off remain outstanding, the following actions by the Company will require approval of the holders of 66-2/3% of the issued and outstanding Series B Preferred Stock:

 

   

any merger, consolidation, acquisition, business combination, sale of all or substantially all of the assets of the Company or its subsidiaries, or any similar transaction or pledge of assets (other than any bona fide financing arrangement entered in the ordinary course of business and which is on prevailing market terms and conditions) in which securities or assets representing more than 50% of the Company’s consolidated net revenue in the fiscal year most recently ended would be acquired or pledged, directly or indirectly, by or to a person or group that does not control the Company

 

132


Table of Contents
 

immediately prior to the execution of any agreement in respect of such transaction, if such transaction is completed during the three years following the issuance of the Series B Preferred Stock;

 

   

any issuance of equity securities of the Company or any of its controlled subsidiaries (including options to acquire such equity securities) except where such issuance is (i) pursuant to any employee incentive plan, (ii) pursuant to any merger, consolidation, acquisition or business combination (subject to the approval of holders of our Series B Preferred Stock as described above) or (iii) at a price per share not less than the market price of such equity security and in which no person or group acquires 25% or more of the outstanding, fully diluted equity of the Company;

 

   

commencement of any voluntary proceeding in respect of the Company or any of its controlled subsidiaries seeking liquidation, reorganization, dissolution or bankruptcy;

 

   

any redemption, repurchase or other acquisition of outstanding common stock of the Company by the Company or any of its controlled subsidiaries, other than where such transaction is in connection with incentive arrangements;

 

   

any change in the number of members on our Board; and

 

   

except as otherwise agreed by Harris Bankcorp, any usage of the Harris Bankcorp name, the name of any affiliate of Harris Bankcorp or any related brand name.

Listing

We intend to apply to have our common stock authorized for listing on                  under the symbol “                .”

Transfer Agent and Registrar

After the distribution, the transfer agent and registrar for our common stock will be Mellon Investor Services, LLC.

Anti-Takeover Provisions

Certificate of Incorporation; Bylaws

Our certificate of incorporation and bylaws contain provisions that could make more difficult the acquisition of the Company by means of a tender offer, a proxy contest or otherwise. These provisions are summarized below.

Classes of Preferred Stock. Under our certificate of incorporation, our Board has the full authority permitted by Delaware law to determine the voting rights, if any, and designations, preferences, limitations and special rights of any class or any series of any class of the preferred stock, which may be greater than those of our common stock. The effects of the issuance of a new series or class of preferred stock might include, among other things, restricting dividends on our common stock, diluting the voting power of our common stock, impairing the liquidation rights of our common stock, or delaying or preventing a change in control of the Company.

Removal of Directors; Filling Vacancies. Our certificate of incorporation and bylaws provide that directors may be removed only for cause and only upon the affirmative vote of holders of at least a majority of the voting power of all the outstanding shares of stock entitled to vote generally in the election of directors, voting together as a single class. Additionally, subject to the rights of the holders of preferred stock, only our Board will be authorized to fix the number of directors and to fill any vacancies on our Board. These provisions could make it more difficult for a potential acquirer to gain control of our Board.

Stockholder Action. Our certificate of incorporation and bylaws provide that stockholder action can be taken only at an annual or special meeting of stockholders and may not be taken by written consent in lieu of a

 

133


Table of Contents

meeting. Our certificate of incorporation and bylaws provide that special meetings of stockholders can be called only by our chief executive officer or pursuant to a resolution adopted by our Board. Stockholders are not permitted to call a special meeting or to require that the Board call a special meeting of stockholders.

Advance Notice Procedures. Our bylaws establish an advance notice procedure for stockholders to make nominations of candidates for election as directors, or bring other business before an annual or special meeting of our stockholders. This notice procedure provides that only persons who are nominated by, or at the direction of our Board, the Chairman of the Board, or by a stockholder who has given timely written notice to the secretary of the Company prior to the meeting at which directors are to be elected, will be eligible for election as directors. This procedure also requires that, in order to raise matters at an annual or special meeting, those matters be raised before the meeting pursuant to the notice of meeting we deliver or by, or at the direction of, our chairman or by a stockholder who is entitled to vote at the meeting and who has given timely written notice to the secretary of the Company of his intention to raise those matters at the annual meeting. If our chairman determines that a person was not nominated, or other business was not brought before the meeting, in accordance with the notice procedure, that person will not be eligible for election as a director, or that business will not be conducted at the meeting.

Classified Board of Directors. Our certificate of incorporation provides for our Board to be divided into three classes of directors, as nearly equal in number as possible, serving staggered terms. Approximately one-third of our Board will be elected each year. Under Section 141 of the DGCL, directors serving on a classified Board can only be removed for cause. We expect that Class I directors will have an initial term expiring in 2009, Class II directors will have an initial term expiring in 2010 and Class III directors will have an initial term expiring in 2011. After the distribution, we expect our Board will consist of nine directors. After the initial term of each class, our directors will serve three-year terms. At each annual meeting of stockholders, a class of directors will be elected for a three-year term to succeed the directors of the same class whose terms are then expiring.

The provision for a classified board could prevent a party that acquires control of a majority of the outstanding voting stock from obtaining control of our Board until the second annual stockholders meeting following the date the acquiror obtains the controlling stock interest. The classified board provision could have the effect of discouraging a potential acquiror from making a tender offer for our shares or otherwise attempting to obtain control of us and could increase the likelihood that our incumbent directors will retain their positions. We believe that a classified board will help to assure the continuity and stability of our Board and our business strategies and policies as determined by our Board, because a majority of the directors at any given time will have prior experience on our Board. The classified board provision should also help to ensure that our Board, if confronted with an unsolicited proposal from a third party that has acquired a block of our voting stock, will have sufficient time to review the proposal and appropriate alternatives and to seek the best available result for all stockholders.

Amendments. Our certificate of incorporation provides that the affirmative vote of the holders of at least 75% of the voting power of the outstanding shares entitled to vote, voting together as a single class, is required to amend the provisions of our certificate of incorporation relating to the prohibition of stockholder action without a meeting, the number, election and term of our directors, the classified board and the removal of directors. Our certificate of incorporation further provides that our bylaws may be amended by our Board or by the affirmative vote of the holders of at least 75% of the outstanding shares entitled to vote, voting together as a single class.

Rights Agreement

Our Board expects to adopt a rights agreement on or before the consummation of the spin-off. Under the rights agreement, we expect to issue one preferred share purchase right for each outstanding share of common stock. A description of the terms of the rights is set forth in a rights agreement between the Company and the designated rights agent. The following description is intended as a summary of the expected rights agreement, which will be filed in its entirety as an exhibit to our Form 10, of which this information statement is a part.

 

134


Table of Contents

Purchase Price. Once the rights become exercisable, each right will entitle the registered holder to purchase from us one one-thousandth of a share of our Series C Junior Participating Preferred Stock, or preferred shares, par value $0.01 per share, at a price of $             per one one-thousandth of a preferred share, subject to adjustment.

Flip-In. In the event that any person or group of affiliated or associated persons (other than Harris Bankcorp or its controlled affiliates) acquires beneficial ownership of 15% or more of our outstanding common stock, each holder of a right, other than rights beneficially owned by the acquiring person (which will thereafter be void), will thereafter have the right to receive upon exercise that number of shares of our common stock having a market value of two times the exercise price of the right.

Flip-Over. If we are acquired in a merger or other business combination transaction or 50% or more of our combined assets or earning power are sold after a person or group (other than Harris Bankcorp or its controlled affiliates) acquires beneficial ownership of 15% or more of our outstanding common stock, each holder of a right (other than rights beneficially owned by the acquiring person, which will be void) will thereafter have the right to receive that number of shares of common stock of the acquiring company which at the time of such transaction will have a market value of two times the exercise price of the right.

Distribution Date. The distribution date is the earlier of: (1) 10 days following a public announcement that a person or group of affiliated or associated persons have acquired beneficial ownership of 15% or more of our outstanding common stock; or (2) 10 business days (or such later date as may be determined by action of our Board prior to such time as any person or group of affiliated persons acquires beneficial ownership of 15% or more of our outstanding common stock) following the commencement of, or announcement of an intention to make, a tender offer or exchange offer the consummation of which would result in the beneficial ownership by a person or group of 15% or more of our outstanding common stock.

Transfer and Detachment. Until the distribution date, the rights will be evidenced by book entry in our direct registration system. Until the distribution date (or earlier redemption or expiration of the rights), the rights will be transferred with and only with the common stock, and transfer of those shares will also constitute transfer of the rights.

Exercisability. The rights are not exercisable until the distribution date. The rights will expire at the earliest of (1) June 19, 2011, unless that date is extended, (2) the time at which we redeem the rights, as described below, or (3) the time at which we exchange the rights, as described below.

Adjustments. The purchase price payable, and the number of preferred shares or other securities or property issuable, upon exercise of the rights are subject to adjustment from time to time to prevent dilution in the event of stock dividends, stock splits, reclassifications, or certain distributions with respect to preferred shares. The number of outstanding rights and the number of one one-thousandths of a preferred share issuable upon exercise of each right are also subject to adjustment if, prior to the distribution date, there is a stock split of our common stock or a stock dividend on our common stock payable in common stock or subdivisions, consolidations or combinations of our common stock. With certain exceptions, no adjustment in the purchase price will be required until cumulative adjustments require an adjustment of at least 1% in the purchase price.

Preferred Shares. Preferred shares purchasable upon exercise of the rights will not be redeemable. Each preferred share will be entitled to a minimum preferential quarterly dividend payment of the greater of $1.00 per share and an amount equal to 1000 times the dividend declared per share of common stock. In the event of liquidation, the holders of the preferred shares will be entitled to a minimum preferential liquidation payment of $1,000 per share but will be entitled to an aggregate payment of 1,000 times the payment made per share of common stock. Each preferred share will have 1,000 votes, voting together with the common stock. Finally, in the event of any merger, consolidation or other transaction in which shares of our common stock are exchanged, each preferred share will be entitled to receive 1,000 times the amount received per share of common stock. These rights are protected by customary anti-dilution provisions.

 

135


Table of Contents

The value of the one one-thousandth interest in a preferred share purchasable upon exercise of each right should, because of the nature of the preferred shares’ dividend, liquidation and voting rights, approximate the value of one share of our common stock.

Exchange. At any time after any person or group (other than Harris Bankcorp or its controlled affiliates) acquires beneficial ownership of 15% or more of our outstanding common stock, and prior to the acquisition by such person or group of beneficial ownership of 50% or more of our outstanding common stock, our Board may exchange the rights (other than rights owned by the acquiring person, which will have become void), in whole or in part, at an exchange ratio of one share of our common stock, or one one-thousandth of a preferred share (subject to adjustment).

Redemption. At any time prior to any person or group (other than Harris Bankcorp or its controlled affiliates) acquiring beneficial ownership of 15% or more of our outstanding common stock, our Board may redeem the rights in whole, but not in part, at a price of $0.01 per right. The redemption of the rights may be made effective at such time on such basis with such conditions as our Board in its sole discretion may establish. Immediately upon any redemption of the rights, the right to exercise the rights will terminate and the only right of the holders of rights will be to receive the redemption price.

Amendments. The terms of the rights may be amended by our Board without the consent of the holders of the rights, except that the Board may not reduce or cancel the redemption price and from and after such time as any person or group of affiliated or associated persons (other than Harris Bankcorp or its controlled affiliates) acquires beneficial ownership of 15% or more of our outstanding common stock, no such amendment may adversely affect the interests of the holders of the rights.

Rights of Holders. Until a right is exercised or exchanged, the holder thereof, as such, will have no rights as a stockholder of the Company, including, without limitation, the right to vote or to receive dividends.

Anti-Takeover Effects. The rights have certain anti-takeover effects. If the rights become exercisable, the rights will cause substantial dilution to a person or group that attempts to acquire us on terms not approved by our Board, except pursuant to any offer conditioned on a substantial number of rights being acquired. The rights should not interfere with any merger or other business combination approved by our Board since the rights may be redeemed by us at a nominal price prior to the time that a person or group has acquired beneficial ownership of 15% or more of our common stock. Thus, the rights are intended to encourage persons who may seek to acquire control of us to initiate such an acquisition through negotiations with our Board. However, the effect of the rights may be to discourage a third party from making a partial tender offer or otherwise attempting to obtain a substantial equity position in our equity securities or seeking to obtain control of us. To the extent any potential acquirors are deterred by the rights, the rights may have the effect of preserving incumbent management in office.

Delaware Law

We are also subject to the provisions of Delaware law described below regarding business combinations with interested stockholders.

Section 203 of the DGCL applies to a broad range of business combinations between a Delaware corporation and an interested stockholder. The Delaware law definition of “business combination” includes mergers, sales of assets, issuances of voting stock and certain other transactions. An “interested stockholder” is defined as any person who owns, directly or indirectly, 15% or more of the outstanding voting stock of a corporation.

 

136


Table of Contents

Section 203 of the DGCL prohibits a corporation from engaging in a business combination with an interested stockholder for a period of three years following the date on which the stockholder became an interested stockholder, unless:

 

   

the board of directors approved the business combination before the stockholder became an interested stockholder, or the board of directors approved the transaction that resulted in the stockholder becoming an interested stockholder;

 

   

upon completion of the transaction which resulted in the stockholder becoming an interested stockholder, such stockholder owned at least 85% of the voting stock outstanding when the transaction began other than shares held by directors who are also officers and other than shares held by certain employee stock plans; or

 

   

the board of directors approved the business combination after the stockholder became an interested stockholder and the business combination was approved at a meeting by at least two-thirds of the outstanding voting stock not owned by such stockholder.

These limitations on business combinations with interested stockholders do not apply to a corporation that does not have a class of stock listed on a national securities exchange, authorized for quotation on an interdealer quotation system of a registered national securities association or held of record by more than 2,000 stockholders.

Our Board has expressly approved the equity investment by Harris Bankcorp, Inc. prior to it becoming an interested shareholder of the Company under Section 203 of the DGCL.

 

137


Table of Contents

EQUITY INVESTMENT

The following is a summary of the material terms and provisions of the investment agreement (defined below). All references to the investment agreement are to the investment agreement, as amended or supplemented from time to time. The following summary is qualified in its entirety by reference to the complete text of the investment agreement. The full text of the investment agreement is included in this Form 10, of which this information statement is a part, and is incorporated herein by reference. We encourage you to read the entire investment agreement.

Equity Investment

Pursuant to an Investment and Contribution Agreement, dated as of October 30, 2008, by and among the Company, PIM, Harris Bankcorp and PNX (the “investment agreement”), our Board authorized the sale of 9,783 shares of our Series A Preferred Stock to Harris Bankcorp (the “investor”). On October 31, 2008, PIM contributed all of the issued and outstanding shares of common stock, par value $0.01, of Phoenix Investment Partners, Ltd., which was renamed Virtus Partners, Inc. to the Company (the “contribution”) in exchange for all of the common stock and Convertible Preferred Stock of the Company and (ii) after the contribution, PIM sold to the investor all of the Series A Preferred Stock owned by it for a nominal amount. In connection with the spin-off, we expect that all of the outstanding shares of our Series A Preferred Stock will be exchanged by the investor to PIM for an equal number of shares of our Series B Preferred Stock, and that PIM will sell an additional 35,217 shares of our Series B Preferred Stock to the investor for an aggregate purchase price of $35 million. Following the conversion and sale described above, we expect that the investor will hold an aggregate total of 45,000 shares of our Series B Preferred Stock immediately prior to the spin-off. Based on the formula set forth under “Description of our Capital Stock—Preferred Stock—Series B Voting Participating Convertible Preferred Stock—Conversion,” the Series B Preferred Stock is expected to be initially convertible into approximately 23% of our fully diluted common stock. As a result of the equity investment by the investor in the Company, the spin-off will be treated as a taxable transaction.

For additional information on the terms of the Series B Preferred Stock, see “Description of Our Capital Stock—Preferred Stock—Series B Convertible Preferred Stock.”

Board Seat

The investor shall have the right to nominate one (1) director to our board of directors. Additionally, so long as at least 66-2/3% of the Series B Preferred Stock initially sold to the investor is outstanding, the holders of a majority of the then outstanding shares of Series B Preferred Stock will have the right to elect one (1) director. Upon conversion of the Series B Preferred Stock into shares of common stock, the holders of such converted stock will have contractual rights to require the Company to include on our recommended slate of directors a proportionate number (relative to the holders’ as-converted ownership of common stock) of investor designees, subject to our Board’s fiduciary duties.

Additional Financing Right

For so long as the investor or any of its affiliates holds at least 10% of our outstanding common stock (including shares issuable on the conversion of our Series B Preferred Stock) and subject to receipt of the approval by the board of directors and shareholders of our funds, if at any time prior to the 24 month anniversary of the sale of the Series B Preferred Stock we determine to raise equity financing for the purpose of financing our business (other than shares issued pursuant to any employee benefit plan, in connection with the acquisition of another company or pursuant to any stock split, stock dividend or recapitalization by the Company), we must offer the investor the initial opportunity to provide such financing up to a principal amount of $25 million of newly issued preferred stock. Such newly issued preferred stock shall have the same terms as the Series B Preferred Stock, except with respect to the conversion price. The conversion price for such new preferred stock will be the lower of (i) the then applicable conversion price of the Series B Preferred Stock and (ii) the current

 

138


Table of Contents

per share volume-weighted average price of our common stock over the ten trading days immediately prior to the consummation of this additional financing right.

In the event that the investor exercises this additional financing right and beneficially owns in excess of 33% of our outstanding common stock (including shares issuable on the conversion of our Series B Preferred Stock) after giving effect to such additional financing right, the investor will have the right to appoint one (1) additional member to our Board, subject to regulatory considerations.

If the consummation of such additional financing by the investor would result in an “assignment” of the investment advisory contracts of our clients (within the meaning of the Investment Company Act and the Advisers Act), then the Company and the investor will structure the new securities to be issued (including, without limitation, by altering voting rights granted to the investor) to ensure that such an assignment will not occur.

Investor Put Right; Company Call Option

Investor Put Right

At any time on or after the third anniversary of the issuance of the Series A Preferred Stock to the investor, the investor will have the right (the “put right”) to require the Company to repurchase all of the Series A Preferred Stock purchased by the investor (or such number of the Series B Preferred Stock which were issued and delivered to the investor in exchange for all the Series A Preferred Stock) for a purchase price (the “put price”) equal to the liquidation preference of such shares of Series A Preferred Stock (including all accumulated and unpaid dividends and accrued interest thereon to the intended date of settlement of the put right). The put price may be payable by the Company in immediately available funds or, at the election of the Company, may be paid in the form of two senior promissory notes each having an aggregate principal amount equal to one half (1/2) of the put price of the Company, paying interest at LIBOR plus 3% per annum, the first maturing on the one (1) year anniversary of the put closing date and the second maturing on the two (2) year anniversary of the put closing date.

Company Call Option

The Company will have the option (the “call option”) at any time after the issuance of the Series A Preferred Stock to the investor and prior to any exercise of the put right by the investor, to repurchase from the investor all of the shares of Series A Preferred Stock (or such number of the Series B Preferred Stock which were issued and delivered to the investor in exchange for all the Series A Preferred Stock) then held by the investor, for a purchase price (the “call price”) equal to the liquidation preference of such shares of Series A Preferred Stock (including all accumulated and unpaid dividends and accrued interest thereon to the put closing date).

Termination of Put Right and Call Option

The put right and the call option will expire if at the time of the sale of the Series B Preferred Stock to the investor is consummated or at anytime afterwards, the average closing price on the                      for the common stock of the Company during any five (5) consecutive trading day period exceeds the conversion price per share of the Convertible Preferred Stock. The put right and the call option will also expire if the investor converts any or all of the Series A Preferred Stock received by it into common stock of the Company (or such number of the Series B Preferred Stock which were issued and delivered to the investor in exchange for all the Series A Preferred Stock), but in the event that the investor converts some but not all of Series A Preferred Stock or such Series B Preferred Stock, as the case may be, then the put right and the call option will expire only with respect to such converted shares and the termination provisions will apply to the remaining shares of Series A Preferred Stock or Series B Preferred Stock, as the case may be.

 

139


Table of Contents

Restrictions on Transfer

Subject to the exceptions described below, the investor has agreed that it will not transfer or dispose of any of its Convertible Preferred Stock (or any common stock into which such Convertible Preferred Stock may be converted) until the 30 month anniversary of the sale of our Series B Preferred Stock to the investor. Following the expiration of this period, except for sales pursuant to Rule 144 under the Securities Act or a registered offering, any such sale or disposition of the Convertible Preferred Stock (or any common stock into which such Convertible Preferred Stock may be converted) will be subject to regulatory constraints and may not be made to certain asset management companies that compete with the Company.

Notwithstanding the restriction on transfer described above, the investor may at all times transfer or dispose of any or all of its Convertible Preferred Stock (or any common stock into which such Convertible Preferred Stock may be converted) if any such transfer is:

 

   

to an affiliate entity under common control with the investor’s ultimate parent entity, if the transferee agrees to be bound by the investor’s obligations under the investment agreement;

 

   

pursuant to a merger, tender offer or exchange offer or other business combination, acquisition of assets or similar transaction or change of control involving the Company or any of our subsidiaries;

 

   

commenced after the commencement of bankruptcy or insolvency proceedings of the Company;

 

   

made in connection with a pledge to, and any foreclosure of such pledge and the subsequent sale of the securities to, a financial institution to secure debt financing; or

 

   

made with the prior written consent of the Company.

Standstill

Subject to the exceptions described below, the investor has agreed that, until the three year anniversary of the sale of our Series B Preferred Stock to the investor, the investor and its affiliates will not acquire or seek to acquire beneficial ownership of our common stock, or any other equity securities of the Company, without the prior approval of the Company if such acquisition would result in the investor and its affiliates having beneficial ownership of more than 23.0% of the outstanding shares of our common stock (calculated on an as-converted basis). This general restriction will not apply, however, to any acquisition that is made:

 

   

pursuant to the investor’s additional financing right, as described above;

 

   

pursuant to any other rights or entitlements afforded the investor by the investment agreement, our certificate of incorporation or the terms of our Convertible Preferred Stock;

 

   

in the open market and would not result in the investor having beneficial ownership of more than 24.9% of the outstanding shares of our common stock (calculated on a fully diluted basis) at the time of the acquisition; or

 

   

in the open market and only to maintain the investor’s percentage of beneficial ownership in the Company following the issuance of our common stock pursuant to any of our employee benefit plans or other equity based compensation plans, but only if the investor has not previously declined to exercise its additional financing right.

The investor has agreed to support the slate of directors recommended by our Board at each meeting of the Company’s stockholders for the election of directors and has further agreed that, for the period described above, it will not:

 

   

enter into or agree, offer, propose or seek or otherwise be involved in any acquisition transaction, merger or other business combination relating to all or part of the Company or its subsidiaries, assets or business;

 

   

make, or in any way participate in, any “solicitation” of “proxies” (as such terms are defined under Regulation 14A under the Exchange Act, disregarding clause (iv) of Rule 14a-1(1)(2) and including

 

140


Table of Contents
 

any otherwise exempt solicitation pursuant to Rule 14a-2(b)) to vote, or seek to advise or influence any person or entity with respect to the voting of, any voting securities of the Company or any of its subsidiaries;

 

   

call or seek to call a meeting of the stockholders of the Company or any of its subsidiaries or initiate any stockholder proposal for action by stockholders of the Company or any of its subsidiaries, form, join or in any way participate in a “group” (within the meaning of Section 13(d)(3) of the Exchange Act and the rules and regulations thereunder) with respect to any voting securities of the Company, or seek, propose or otherwise act alone or in concert with others, to influence or control the Company’s management, our Board or policies of the Company or any of its subsidiaries; or

 

   

bring any action that would contest the validity, or seek any amendment or waiver of, any of the standstill restrictions;

provided, however, that none of these restrictions will otherwise prevent the investor or any of its affiliates from voting its securities in any manner other than with respect to voting in favor of the slate of directors recommended by our Board as referenced above, and none of these restrictions will apply to the investor’s board representatives solely in their capacity as directors of the Company.

The foregoing standstill restrictions will cease to operate (i) if it is publicly disclosed that the Company is pursuing a sale of a controlling interest in its business, (ii) if it is publicly disclosed that another person or group has offered to acquire an interest in the Company, or assets representing, at least 50% of the Company’s market capitalization and the Company has approved or recommended that its stockholders approve such transaction, or the Company has entered into an agreement providing for such transaction, (iii) if a party unaffiliated with the investor acquires control of our Board, (iv) with respect to any acquisition by the investor of any assets or securities of the Company pursuant to bankruptcy proceedings, (v) with respect to any sale or exchange by the investor of securities in a tender or exchange offer initiated by a person other than the investor or its affiliates or (vi) with respect to any actions taken by the investor or its affiliates required by the investment agreement or necessary to consummate the transactions contemplated therein.

Interim Operations

The Company and PNX have agreed that from the date of the investment agreement until the sale of the Series B Preferred Stock the Company shall operate in the ordinary course consistent with past practice.

Indemnification

The Company, PNX and PIM have agreed jointly and severally to indemnify the investor, its affiliates and each of their respective directors, officers, members, partners and employees, and each person who controls the investor, for aggregate losses in excess of $250,000 (such indemnification to extend only for the amount in excess of $250,000, and excluding de minimis losses of less than $10,000 per loss) arising out of or resulting from:

 

   

any inaccuracy in or breach of the representations, warranties, agreements or covenants made by the Company, PNX or PIM in the investment agreement;

 

   

certain losses for which the Company is entitled to indemnification pursuant to certain ancillary agreements between the Company and PNX without duplication for any loss that the Company is made whole; and

 

   

certain litigation matters.

Our obligation to indemnify the parties listed above for losses arising from breaches of representations and warranties is limited to a maximum of $35 million.

 

141


Table of Contents

The investor has agreed to indemnify the Company, its affiliates and each of their respective directors and officers, and each person who controls the Company for losses arising out of or resulting from any inaccuracy in or breach of the representations, warranties, agreements or covenants made by the investor in the investment agreement. The investor’s obligation to indemnify such parties for losses arising from breaches of representations and warranties is limited to a maximum of $35 million.

The Company’s representations and warranties generally survive for a period of eighteen (18) months from the sale of our Series B Preferred Stock to the investor except for certain fundamental representations and warranties relating to the Company’s organization, capital structure and the authorization and enforceability of the investment agreement, which survive indefinitely.

Other Matters

We have agreed to file a shelf registration statement for the registration of any shares of common stock issuable upon conversion of the Series B Preferred Stock after the transfer restriction period described above.

Conditions of the Investment

The consummation of the investment will be contingent upon the satisfaction of certain conditions, including the following:

 

   

all conditions to the distribution, as set forth in the Separation Agreement, shall have been satisfied;

 

   

our working capital shall be in excess of $28 million;

 

   

any intercompany debt owed by the Company to PNX or any of its Affiliates immediately after the distribution, together with any such intercompany debt that shall have been paid off by the Company immediately prior to or in connection with the distribution, will not exceed $33 million; and

 

   

since the date of the investment agreement, there have been no material adverse changes in our business or operations.

Termination Rights

The investment agreement between the Company and the investor generally may be terminated as follows:

 

   

if the transactions contemplated in the investment agreement are not completed on or prior to January 31, 2009 by either the Company or the investor, but only with respect to the sale of the additional 35,217 shares of our Series B Preferred Stock;

 

   

if any governmental authority shall have issued a nonappealable final order, decree or ruling or taken any other action having the effect of permanently restraining, enjoining or otherwise prohibiting the transactions contemplated in the investment agreement; or

 

   

by mutual written agreement of the Company and the investor.

 

142


Table of Contents

INDEMNIFICATION AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITY OF DIRECTORS AND OFFICERS

Reference is made to Section 102(b)(7) of the DGCL which enables a corporation in its original certificates of incorporation or an amendment thereto to eliminate or limit the personal liability of a director for violations of the director’s fiduciary duty, except (i) for any breach of the director’s duty of loyalty to the corporation or its stockholders, (ii) for acts or omissions not in good faith or which involve intentional misconduct or a knowing violation of law, (iii) for liability of directors for unlawful payment of dividends or unlawful stock purchase or redemptions pursuant to Section 174 of the DGCL, or (iv) for any transaction from which a director derived an improper personal benefit.

Reference also is made to Section 145 of the DGCL, which provides that a corporation may indemnify any persons, including officers and directors, who are, or are threatened to be made, parties to any threatened, pending or completed legal action, suit or proceeding, whether civil, criminal, administrative or investigative (other than an action by or in the right of such corporation), by reason of the fact that such person was an officer, director, employee or agent of such corporation or is or was serving at the request of such corporation as a director, officer, employee or agent of another corporation or enterprise. The indemnity may include expenses, including attorney’s fees, judgments, fines and amounts paid in settlement actually and reasonably incurred by such person in connection with such action, suit or proceeding, provided such officer, director, employee or agent acted in good faith and in a manner he reasonably believed to be in or not opposed to the corporation’s best interest and, for criminal proceedings, had no reasonable cause to believe that his conduct was unlawful. A Delaware corporation may indemnify officers and directors in an action by or in the right of the corporation under the same conditions, except that no indemnification is permitted without judicial approval if the officer or director is adjudged to be liable to the corporation. Where an officer or director is successful on the merits or otherwise in the defense of any action referred to above, the corporation must indemnify him against the expenses that such officer or director actually and reasonably incurred.

Our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated bylaws will provide for the mandatory indemnification of our directors and officers and the discretionary indemnification of our employees and other agents, to the maximum extent permitted by the DGCL. As permitted by sections 102 and 145 of the DGCL, our amended and restated certificate of incorporation and amended and restated bylaws will eliminate director personal liability for monetary damages to the Company and our stockholders arising from a breach of director fiduciary duty, other than for a breach of director duty of loyalty or for acts or omissions not in good faith or which involve intentional misconduct or a knowing violation of law, and except as otherwise provided under the DGCL.

 

143


Table of Contents

DESCRIPTION OF INDEBTEDNESS

We may enter into one or more credit facilities, including a revolving credit facility, in order to provide for our working capital requirements, to support letters of credit and for other general corporate requirements, including the financing of acquisitions.

For example, we currently intend to issue $20 million of notes payable to PNX, the proceeds of which will be used to pay down the existing $33.0 million related party note. The Company currently intends to obtain third-party financing at the time of the distribution to repay such notes payable. See Note 9 and Note 15 to our consolidated financial statements in this information statement for additional information regarding our notes payable and related party payables to PNX.

We also currently intend to obtain a revolving credit facility. In general, the terms of any new credit facilities we obtain may contain certain customary events of default which generally give the banks the right to accelerate payments of outstanding debt, including without limitation:

 

   

failure to maintain required covenant ratios;

 

   

failure to make a payment of principal, interest or fees within a grace period; and

 

   

default, beyond any applicable grace period, on any of our aggregate indebtedness exceeding a certain amount.

The credit facilities may also contain certain customary financial covenants limiting our indebtedness (maximum leverage ratios) and requiring minimum EBITDA coverage of interest expense (minimum interest coverage ratios), as well as limitations on additional debt, dividends and asset sales.

INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

The consolidated financial statements of the Company as of December 31, 2007 and 2006 and for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2007 included in this information statement have been audited by PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP, an independent registered public accounting firm, as stated in their report appearing herein.

 

144


Table of Contents

WHERE YOU CAN FIND MORE INFORMATION

The Company has filed with the SEC a Form 10 with respect to the shares of our common stock to be received by PNX stockholders in the spin-off. This information statement does not contain all of the information set forth in the Form 10 and the exhibits to the Form 10. For further information with respect to us and the shares of our common stock, reference is hereby made to the Form 10, including its exhibits. Statements made in this information statement relating to the contents of any contract, agreement or other documents are not necessarily complete and you should refer to the exhibits attached to the Form 10 for copies of the actual contract, agreement or other document, with each such statement being qualified in all respects by reference to the document to which it refers. You may review a copy of the Form 10, including its exhibits, at the SEC’s public reference room, located at 100 F Street, NE, Washington, DC 20549. You may obtain copies of all or any part of these materials from the SEC upon the payment of certain fees prescribed by the SEC. You may obtain further information on the operation of the public reference room by calling the SEC at 1-800-SEC-0330. In addition, copies of the Form 10 and related documents may be obtained through the SEC Internet address at http://www.sec.gov.

As a result of the spin-off, we will become subject to the information and reporting requirements of the Exchange Act and, in accordance with the Exchange Act, will file reports, proxy statements and other information with the SEC. After the spin-off, these reports, proxy statements and other information may be inspected and copied at the public reference facilities of the SEC listed above. You also will be able to obtain copies of this material from the public reference facilities of the SEC as described above, or inspect them without charge at the SEC’s web site.

In addition, we intend to furnish holders of our common stock with annual reports containing consolidated financial statements audited by an independent accounting firm.

 

145


Table of Contents

INDEX TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENT S

 

       Page

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

   F-2

Audited Consolidated Financial Statements

  

Consolidated Balance Sheets as of December 31, 2007 and 2006

   F-3

Consolidated Statements of Operations for the Years Ended December 31, 2007, 2006 and 2005

   F-4

Consolidated Statements of Changes in Stockholder’s Equity for the Years Ended December  31, 2007, 2006 and 2005

   F-5

Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows for the Years Ended December 31, 2007, 2006 and 2005

   F-6

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

   F-7

Unaudited Consolidated Financial Statements

  

Consolidated Balance Sheets as of September 30, 2008 and December 31, 2007 (Unaudited)

   F-30

Consolidated Statements of Operations for the Nine Months Ended September 30, 2008 and 2007 (Unaudited)

   F-31

Consolidated Statements of Changes in Stockholder’s Equity for the Nine Months Ended September 30, 2008 and 2007 (Unaudited)

   F-32

Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows for the Nine Months Ended September 30, 2008 and 2007 (Unaudited)

   F-33

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements (Unaudited)

   F-34

 

F-1


Table of Contents

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

To the Board of Directors and Stockholder of

Phoenix Investment Partners, Ltd.:

In our opinion, the accompanying consolidated balance sheets and the related consolidated statements of operations, changes in stockholder’s equity and cash flows present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Phoenix Investment Partners, Ltd. and its subsidiaries at December 31, 2007 and December 31, 2006, and the results of their operations and their cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2007 in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America. These financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audits. We conducted our audits of these statements in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, and evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

/s/ PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP

June 20, 2008

Hartford, CT

 

F-2


Table of Contents

Phoenix Investment Partners, Ltd.

Consolidated Balance Sheets

 

     December 31,  
             2007                     2006          
($ in thousands, except share data)             

Assets

  

Current Assets

    

Cash and cash equivalents

   $ 36,815     $ 33,862  

Trading securities, at market value

     12,743       12,910  

Available-for-sale securities, at market value

     1,621       1,588  

Accounts receivable

     7,420       6,521  

Receivables from related parties

     22,276       25,357  

Prepaid expenses and other assets

     2,252       2,001  
                

Total current assets

     83,127       82,239  

Deferred commissions

     2,581       1,835  

Furniture, equipment, and leasehold improvements, net

     2,232       3,336  

Intangible assets, net

     208,176       237,746  

Goodwill

     454,369       454,369  

Long-term investments and other assets

     1,678       1,527  
                

Total assets

   $ 752,163     $ 781,052  
                

Liabilities and Stockholder’s Equity

    

Current Liabilities

    

Accrued compensation and benefits

   $ 34,115     $ 35,258  

Accounts payable

     3,667       5,067  

Payables to related parties

     11,295       12,185  

Securities sold short, at fair value

     854       —    

Income taxes payable

     12,028       9  

Other accrued liabilities

     5,471       9,352  

Broker-dealer payable

     6,908       9,090  

Current portion of notes payable to related parties

     12,000       69,243  
                

Total current liabilities

     86,338       140,204  

Deferred taxes, net

     9,114       16,381  

Notes payable to related parties

     30,019       367,019  

Lease obligations and other long-term liabilities

     1,765       3,967  
                

Total liabilities

     127,236       527,571  
                

Contingent Liabilities (Note 10)

    

Stockholder’s Equity

    

Common stock, $.01 par value, 100,000,000 shares authorized, and 10,000 shares issued and outstanding

     —         —    

Additional paid-in capital

     962,546       576,646  

Accumulated deficit

     (337,573 )     (323,168 )

Accumulated other comprehensive income (loss)

     (46 )     3  
                

Total stockholder’s equity

     624,927       253,481  
                

Total liabilities and stockholder’s equity

   $ 752,163     $ 781,052  
                

See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

 

F-3


Table of Contents

Phoenix Investment Partners, Ltd.

Consolidated Statements of Operations

 

     Year Ended December 31,  
     2007     2006     2005  
($ in thousands, except per share data)                   

Revenues

      

Investment management fees

   $ 158,998     $ 163,951     $ 191,500  

Distribution and service fees

     36,467       29,805       25,624  

Administration and transfer agent fees

     23,354       19,802       16,189  

Other income and fees

     7,398       5,078       4,125  
                        

Total revenues

     226,217       218,636       237,438  
                        

Operating Expenses

      

Employment expenses

     94,849       97,730       110,384  

Distribution and administration expenses

     50,089       41,315       35,829  

Other operating expenses

     44,438       44,309       51,724  

Restructuring and severance

     —         13,634       12,494  

Intangible asset impairment

     301       32,471       11,099  

Depreciation and other amortization

     1,095       1,057       1,686  

Amortization of intangible assets

     30,097       32,007       33,260  
                        

Total operating expenses

     220,869       262,523       256,476  
                        

Operating Income (Loss)

     5,348       (43,887 )     (19,038 )
                        

Income to Minority Interest

     —         —         (6,682 )

Other Income (Expense)

      

Unrealized (depreciation) appreciation on trading securities

     (2,569 )     745       (1,216 )

Other income

     2,227       714       1,341  
                        

Total other income (expense), net

     (342 )     1,459       125  
                        

Interest (Expense) Income

      

Interest expense

     (26,739 )     (33,433 )     (28,723 )

Interest income

     1,633       1,467       1,606  
                        

Total interest expense, net

     (25,106 )     (31,966 )     (27,117 )
                        

Loss Before Income Taxes

     (20,100 )     (74,394 )     (52,712 )

Income tax expense (benefit)

     (5,950 )     (26,841 )     (19,599 )
                        

Net Loss

   $ (14,150 )   $ (47,553 )   $ (33,113 )
                        

Weighted average shares outstanding

     10,000       10,000       10,000  
                        

Earnings per share

   $ (1,415 )   $ (4,755 )   $ (3,311 )
                        

See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

 

F-4


Table of Contents

Phoenix Investment Partners, Ltd.

Consolidated Statements of Changes in Stockholder’s Equity

 

     For the Years Ended December 31, 2007, 2006 and 2005  
     Common Stock
and Additional
Paid-In Capital
   Accumulated
Deficit
    Accumulated
Other
Comprehensive
Income (Loss)
    Total  
($ in thousands)                        

Balances at December 31, 2004

   $ 468,646    $ (242,502 )   $ 107     $ 226,251  
                               

Net loss

     —        (33,113 )     —         (33,113 )

Other comprehensive income:

         

Net unrealized depreciation on securities available-for-sale

     —        —         (119 )     (119 )
               

Total comprehensive loss

            (33,232 )

Contribution from parent

     34,000      —         —         34,000  
                               

Balances at December 31, 2005

     502,646      (275,615 )     (12 )     227,019  
                               

Net loss

     —        (47,553 )     —         (47,553 )
         

Other comprehensive income:

         

Net unrealized appreciation on securities available-for-sale

     —        —         15       15  
               

Total comprehensive loss

            (47,538 )

Contribution from parent

     74,000      —         —         74,000  
                               

Balances at December 31, 2006

     576,646      (323,168 )     3       253,481  
                               

Implementation of FIN 48

     —        (255 )     —         (255 )

Net loss

     —        (14,150 )     —         (14,150 )

Other comprehensive income:

         

Net unrealized depreciation on securities available-for-sale

     —        —         (49 )     (49 )
               

Total comprehensive loss

            (14,454 )

Contribution from parent

     385,900      —         —         385,900  
                               

Balances at December 31, 2007

   $ 962,546    $ (337,573 )   $ (46 )   $ 624,927  
                               

See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

 

F-5


Table of Contents

Phoenix Investment Partners, Ltd.

Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows

 

     Year Ended December 31,  
     2007     2006     2005  
($ in thousands)                   

Cash Flows from Operating Activities:

      

Net loss

   $ (14,150 )   $ (47,553 )   $ (33,113 )

Adjustments to reconcile net loss to net cash provided by (used in) operating activities:

      

Amortization of intangible assets

     30,097       32,007       33,260  

Intangible assets impairments

     301       32,471       11,099  

Amortization of deferred commissions

     1,052       1,070       992  

Depreciation and other amortization

     1,095       2,726       1,690  

Income to minority interest

     —         —         6,682  

(Gain) loss on sale of marketable securities

     (1,774 )     (543 )     (774 )

Proceeds from sale of trading investments

     11,593       2,394       1,805  

Purchase of trading investments

     (11,370 )     (3,237 )     (1,791 )

Unrealized depreciation (appreciation) on trading securities

     2,569       (745 )     1,216  

Equity in earnings of unconsolidated affiliates, net of dividends

     (191 )     26       10  

Payments of deferred commissions

     (1,798 )     (620 )     (878 )

Deferred taxes

     (7,242 )     (17,747 )     (18,442 )

Changes in operating assets and liabilities:

      

Accounts receivable

     (899 )     3,486       4,665  

Receivables from related parties

     3,081       (7,201 )     1,396  

Prepaid expenses and other assets

     (251 )     143       134  

Accounts payable and accrued liabilities

     (5,327 )     12,579       (10,613 )

Payables to related parties

     (890 )     919       1,004  

Income taxes payable

     12,019       (827 )     (1,308 )

Implementation of FIN 48

     (255 )     —         —    

Deferred revenue

     (1 )     (1,094 )     (1,953 )

Other liabilities

     (4,673 )     7,658       (6,589 )
                        

Net cash provided by (used in) operating activities

     12,986       15,912       (11,508 )
                        

Cash Flows from Investing Activities:

      

Purchase of subsidiaries, net of cash acquired

     —         (50 )     (12,826 )

Purchase of mutual fund management contract

     (1,123 )     (6,321 )     —    

Purchase of available-for-sale investments

     (107 )     (104 )     (106 )

Capital expenditures

     (460 )     (1,552 )     (797 )

Purchase of long-term investments, net

     —         (19 )     (37 )
                        

Net cash used in investing activities

     (1,690 )     (8,046 )     (13,766 )
                        

Cash Flows from Financing Activities:

      

Borrowings from related parties

     —         24,000       18,000  

Capital contributions

     60,900       25,000       —    

Repayment of debt

     (69,243 )     (46,807 )     (3,000 )

Distribution to minority interest

     —         —         (15,913 )
                        

Net cash (used in) provided by financing activities

     (8,343 )     2,193       (913 )
                        

Net increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

     2,953       10,059       (26,187 )

Cash and cash equivalents, beginning of year

     33,862       23,803       49,990  
                        

Cash and Cash Equivalents, End of Year

   $ 36,815     $ 33,862     $ 23,803  
                        

Supplemental Cash Flow Information:

      

Interest paid

   $ 30,802     $ 30,558     $ 28,159  

Income taxes paid, net

   $ (10,531 )   $ (8,226 )   $ 117  

Non-Cash Financing Activities:

      

Contribution from parent

   $ 325,000     $ 49,000     $ 34,000  

Repayment of debt to related party

   $ (325,000 )   $ (49,000 )   $ (34,000 )

See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

 

F-6


Table of Contents

Phoenix Investment Partners, Ltd.

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

December 31, 2007, 2006 and 2005

 

1. Organization and Business

Phoenix Investment Partners, Ltd. (the “Company”), was formed on November 1, 1995 through a reverse merger with Duff & Phelps Corporation. From 1995 to 2001, the Company was a majority-owned indirect subsidiary of The Phoenix Companies, Inc. (“PNX”).

On January 11, 2001, pursuant to a Merger Agreement between the Company and PM Holdings, Inc. (“PM Holdings”), PM Holdings acquired the outstanding shares of the Company not already owned by PM Holdings, and the Company became a wholly owned subsidiary of PM Holdings. The acquisition of the Company by PM Holdings was effected by merging the Company with a subsidiary of PM Holdings, with the Company as the surviving entity. The Company became an indirect wholly owned subsidiary of PNX concurrent with PM Holdings transferring its interest in the Company to Phoenix Investment Management Company (“PIM”), a wholly owned subsidiary of PNX, in 2001.

The Company and its wholly owned subsidiaries provide a variety of investment management and related services to a broad base of individual and institutional clients throughout the U.S. The Company’s businesses include investment advisory and broker-dealer operations. Retail investment management services (including administrative services) are provided to individuals through products consisting of open-end mutual funds, closed-end funds, and separately managed accounts. Separately managed accounts are offered to high-net-worth individuals and include intermediary programs, sponsored and distributed by non-affiliated broker-dealers, and individual direct managed account investment services that are sold and administered by the Company. Institutional investment management services are provided primarily to corporate entities, multi-employer retirement funds and foundations, as well as endowment, insurance, and other special purpose funds. In addition, investment management services are provided on structured finance products, including collateralized debt obligations backed by portfolios of assets. The principal operating subsidiaries of the Company included in these consolidated financial statements are as follows:

 

   

Phoenix Equity Planning Corporation (“PEPCO”), a registered broker-dealer and registered transfer agent, serves principally as distributor, underwriter and financial agent for products registered with the Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”).

 

   

Phoenix Investment Counsel, Inc. (“PIC”), a wholly owned subsidiary of PEPCO, is a registered investment advisor providing investment management services primarily under agreements with affiliated registered investment companies.

 

   

Duff & Phelps Investment Management Co. (“Duff & Phelps”) is a registered investment advisor providing investment management services to a variety of institutions and individuals, including affiliated registered investment companies; corporate, public and multi-employer retirement funds; endowment, insurance and other special purpose funds, and high yield bond portfolios.

 

   

Engemann Asset Management (“EAM”) is a registered investment advisor providing investment management services primarily to individual investors and affiliated registered investment companies.

 

   

SCM Advisers LLC (“SCM”) is a registered investment advisor providing investment management services primarily to institutional accounts, individual investors, structured finance products and affiliated registered investment companies. SCM became a wholly owned subsidiary of the Company effective May 2, 2005. See Note 3.

 

   

Zweig Advisers LLC (“PZA”) and its wholly owned subsidiary, Euclid Advisors LLC (“Euclid”), are registered investment advisors providing investment management services primarily under agreements with affiliated registered investment companies. PZA and Euclid are collectively referred to as “Zweig” in the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

F-7


Table of Contents
   

Walnut Asset Management, LLC (“WAM”) is a registered investment advisor providing investment management services primarily to high-net-worth individuals. As part of the acquisition of WAM, the Company also acquired Rutherford, Brown & Catherwood, LLC (“RBC”), a WAM related broker-dealer. WAM and RBC are collectively referred to as “Walnut” in the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

   

Kayne Anderson Rudnick Investment Management, LLC (“KAR”) is a registered investment advisor providing investment management services primarily to high-net-worth individuals and affiliated registered investment companies. KAR became a wholly owned subsidiary of the Company effective September 30, 2005. See Note 3.

 

   

Goodwin Capital Advisors Ltd. (“Goodwin”) is a registered investment advisor providing investment management services primarily to institutional accounts, structured finance products, affiliated registered investment companies and Phoenix Life Insurance Company’s (“Phoenix Life”) general account.

 

2. Summary of Significant Accounting Policies

The significant accounting policies, which have been consistently applied, are as follows:

Principles of Consolidation and Basis of Presentation

The Company’s consolidated financial statements have been prepared in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America (“GAAP”). The consolidated financial statements include the accounts of the Company and its subsidiaries. Material intercompany accounts and transactions have been eliminated.

The preparation of financial statements in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America requires the use of estimates. Accordingly, certain amounts in the consolidated financial statements contain estimates made by management. Actual results could differ from these estimates. Significant estimates, specifically those used to determine the carrying value of goodwill and intangible assets, are discussed in these notes to the consolidated financial statements.

Recent Accounting Pronouncements

The Company adopted the provisions of the Financial Accounting Standards Board, or FASB, Interpretation No. 48 , Accounting for Uncertainty in Income Taxes , or FIN 48, on January 1, 2007. The Company recognized a $0.3 million cumulative effect adjustment as a result of the implementation of FIN 48. Including the cumulative effect adjustment, the Company had approximately $0.5 million of total gross unrecognized tax benefits as of January 1, 2007.

In September 2006, the SEC staff issued Staff Accounting Bulletin No. 108, Considering the Effects of Prior Year Misstatements when Quantifying Misstatements in Current Year Financial Statements , or SAB 108. SAB 108 provides guidance for how errors should be evaluated to assess materiality from a quantitative perspective. SAB 108 permits companies to initially apply its provisions by either restating prior financial statements or recording the cumulative effect of initially applying the approach as adjustments to the carrying values of assets and liabilities as of January 1, 2006 with an offsetting adjustment to retained earnings. The Company adopted SAB 108 on December 31, 2006 with no effect to the financial statements.

Effective January 1, 2006, the Company adopted Statement of Financial Accounting Standards (“SFAS”) 123 (revised 2004), Share-Based Payment (“SFAS 123(R)”), which requires that compensation cost related to share-based payment transactions be recognized in financial statements at the fair value of the instruments issued. In addition, the accounting for certain grants of equity awards to individuals who are retirement eligible on the date of grant has been clarified. SFAS 123(R) states that an employee’s share based award becomes vested at the date that the employee’s right to receive or retain equity shares is no

 

F-8


Table of Contents

longer contingent on the satisfaction of a market, performance or service condition. Accordingly, awards granted to retirement eligible employees are not contingent on satisfying a service condition and, therefore, are recognized at fair value on the date of the grant. Additionally, the period over which cost is recognized for awards granted to those who become retirement eligible before the vesting date, will be from the grant date to the retirement eligible date rather than to the vesting date.

While prior to the issuance of SFAS 123(R) recognition of such costs at fair value was optional, PNX elected to do so for all share-based compensation that was awarded after December 31, 2002 and charged the Company its portion of those costs. Accordingly, the adoption of SFAS 123(R) did not have a material effect on the consolidated financial statements. Upon the adoption of fair value accounting for stock-based compensation in 2003, the prospective method of transition provided by the new standard was used, which resulted in expense recognition for stock options awarded after December 31, 2002.

Valuation and related assumption information used for the options granted include these key variables: weighted-average expected volatility, weighted-average risk-free interest rate and weighted-average common share dividend yield. See Note 17 to these financial statements for additional information related to share-based compensation.

Accounting standards not yet adopted

In December 2007, the FASB issued SFAS No. 141(R), Accounting for Business Combinations, or SFAS 141(R). SFAS 141(R) requires the acquiring entity in a business combination to recognize all the assets acquired and liabilities assumed in the transaction, establishes the acquisition-date fair value as the measurement objective for all assets acquired and liabilities assumed and requires the acquirer to disclose all information needed to evaluate and understand the nature and financial effect of the combination and is effective for fiscal years beginning after December 15, 2008. The Company will adopt this standard effective January 1, 2009 and do not expect it to have a material impact on our financial position and results of operations.

In December 2007, the FASB issued SFAS 160, Noncontrolling Interests in Consolidated Financial Statements, or SFAS 160. SFAS 160 requires all entities to report noncontrolling interests in subsidiaries in the same way—as equity in the consolidated financial statements and requires that associated transactions be treated as equity transactions—and is effective for fiscal years beginning after December 15, 2008. The Company will adopt this standard effective January 1, 2009 and do not expect it to have a material impact on our financial position and results of operations.

In June 2007, the AICPA issued Statement of Position 07-1, Clarification of the Scope of the Audit and Accounting Guide “Investment Companies” and Accounting by Parent Companies and Equity Method Investors for Investments in Investment Companies, or SOP 07-1. SOP 07-1 broadens the definition of an investment company for application of this guidance. It provides that an entity that meets the definition of an investment company use fair value as a basis of accounting and reporting and that a parent retains the specialized fair value accounting of the entity if certain criteria are met. On October 17, 2007, the FASB deferred the effective date of SOP 07-1 indefinitely.

On February 15, 2007, the FASB issued SFAS No. 159, The Fair Value Option for Financial Assets and Financial Liabilities , or SFAS 159, which gives entities the option to measure eligible financial assets, financial liabilities and firm commitments at fair value (i.e., the fair value option), on an instrument-by-instrument basis, that are otherwise not permitted to be accounted for at fair value under other accounting standards. The election to use the fair value option is available when an entity first recognizes a financial asset or financial liability or upon entering into a firm commitment. Subsequent changes in fair value must be recorded in earnings. Additionally, SFAS 159 allows for a one-time election for existing positions upon adoption, with the transition adjustment recorded to beginning retained earnings. The Company adopted SFAS 159 as of January 1, 2008 with no impact on our financial position or results of operations.

 

F-9


Table of Contents

In September 2006, the FASB issued SFAS No. 157, Fair Value Measurements , or SFAS 157. SFAS 157 defines fair value, establishes a framework for measuring fair value and expands disclosures about fair value measurements. SFAS 157 provides guidance on how to measure fair value when required under existing accounting standards. The statement establishes a fair value hierarchy that prioritizes the inputs to valuation techniques used to measure fair value into three broad levels (“Levels 1, 2 and 3”). Level 1 inputs are observable inputs that reflect quoted prices for identical assets or liabilities in active markets that have the ability to access at the measurement date. Level 2 inputs are observable inputs, other than quoted prices included in Level 1, for the asset or liability. Level 3 inputs are unobservable inputs reflecting our estimates of the assumptions that market participants would use in pricing the asset or liability (including assumptions about risk). Quantitative and qualitative disclosures will focus on the inputs used to measure fair value for both recurring and non-recurring fair value measurements and the effects of the measurements in the financial statements. FASB Staff Position FAS 157-2 delayed application of SFAS 157 for non-financial assets and non-financial liabilities until fiscal years beginning after November 15, 2008. The Company adopted SFAS 157 as of January 1, 2008 for those assets and liabilities that were not deferred with no material impact on its financial position or results of operations.

Cash and Cash Equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents consist of cash in banks and highly liquid affiliated money market mutual fund investments.

Marketable Securities

Marketable securities consist of mutual fund investments and other publicly traded securities which are carried at market value in accordance with SFAS No. 115 , “Accounting for Certain Investments in Debt and Equity Securities.” Mutual fund investments held by the Company’s broker-dealer subsidiary are classified as assets held for trading purposes. The Company provides the initial capital to funds or separately managed account strategies for the purpose of creating track records. Any unrealized appreciation or depreciation on these assets is included in “Other income” in the Consolidated Statements of Operations (“Statements of Operations”). Other mutual fund investments or publicly traded securities held by the Company are considered to be available-for-sale, with any unrealized appreciation or depreciation, net of income taxes, reported as a component of accumulated other comprehensive income in stockholder’s equity. Marketable securities are marked to market based on the respective publicly quoted net asset values of the funds or market prices of the equity securities or bonds.

Deferred Commissions

Deferred commissions are commissions paid to broker-dealers on sales of Class B and Class C mutual fund shares (“Class B and C shares”). These commissions are recovered by the receipt of monthly asset-based distributor fees received from the mutual funds or contingent deferred sales charges received upon redemption of the Class B and Class C shares within five and one years of purchase, respectively.

The deferred costs resulting from the sale of Class B shares subsequent to December 31, 2002 are amortized on a straight-line basis over a three or five-year period, depending on the fund, or until the underlying Class B shares are redeemed. Deferred costs resulting from the sale of Class C shares are amortized on a straight-line basis over a one-year period. Amortization expense, including adjustments for redemptions, was $3.1 million, $3.0 million and $3.7 million in 2007, 2006 and 2005 respectively, and is included in Other operating expenses in the Statements of Income. PEPCO periodically assesses the deferred commission asset for impairment and records additional amortization expense as appropriate.

Furniture, Equipment and Leasehold Improvements

Furniture, equipment and leasehold improvements are recorded at cost. Depreciation is computed using the straight-line method over the estimated useful lives of 3 to 10 years for furniture and office equipment, and 3 to 5 years for computer equipment and software. Leasehold improvements are amortized over the lives of

 

F-10


Table of Contents

the related leases. Major renewals or betterments are capitalized and recurring repairs and maintenance are charged to operations.

Intangible Assets and Goodwill

Definite-lived intangible assets are amortized on a straight-line basis over the estimated remaining lives of such assets and are reevaluated on an ongoing basis in accordance with SFAS No. 144, “Accounting for the Impairment or Disposal of Long-lived Assets,” by comparing estimates of future undiscounted cash flows to the carrying value of assets. Assets are considered impaired if the carrying value exceeds the expected future undiscounted cash flows and an impairment is recorded.

Goodwill represents the excess of the purchase price of acquisitions and mergers over the identified net assets and liabilities. In accordance with SFAS No. 142, “Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets,” goodwill is not being amortized. A single reporting unit has been identified for the purpose of assessing potential future impairments of goodwill. An impairment analysis of goodwill is performed annually or more frequently, if warranted by events or changes in circumstances affecting the Company’s business.

Indefinite-lived intangible assets are comprised of investment advisory contracts with affiliated closed-end registered investment companies. These assets are also tested for impairment annually and when events or changes in circumstances indicate the asset might be impaired.

Revenue Recognition

Investment management fees, distribution and service fees, and administration and transfer agent fees are recorded as income during the period in which services are performed. Investment management fees, which are accrued monthly, are earned based upon a percentage of assets under management, and are paid pursuant to the terms of the respective investment management contracts, which generally require monthly or quarterly payment.

Investment management fees earned on open-end mutual funds range from 0.10% to 1.50% of average assets under management, depending on the type of fund. Investment management fees earned on closed-end funds range from 0.50% to 0.85% of average assets under management. Investment management fees earned on separately managed accounts and institutional accounts are negotiated and are based primarily on asset size, portfolio complexity and individual needs and range from 0.15% to 1.00%. Investment management fees earned on structured finance products range from 0.08% to 0.45% of the principal outstanding.

Investment management fees related to Phoenix Life’s general account are earned on a cost-recovery basis. In addition, in August 2002 the Company agreed to waive investment management fees, for 2002 and future years, related to Phoenix Life’s Employee Retirement Plan until those fees totaled $2.5 million. As of December 31, 2007 a cumulative total of $3.4 million of investment management fees has been earned, of which $2.5 million had been waived pursuant to this agreement and the Company has recognized $0.9 million of fees in 2007.

Management fees contingent upon achieving certain levels of performance are recorded when earned. Certain fees related to collateralized loan and collateralized debt obligations (“CLOs” and “CDOs,” respectively) are subordinate and contingent upon the portfolio meeting certain financial criteria. As of December 31, 2007, 2006 and 2005, three CDOs did not meet all the criteria and, accordingly, no fees were recognized. At such time as the criteria are met, all or a portion of the subordinated fees may be recovered.

Distribution and service fees are earned based upon a percentage of assets under management, and are paid pursuant to the terms of the respective distribution and service fee contracts, which require a monthly payment.

Administration and transfer agent fees consist of administrative fees, shareholder service agent fees, fund administration fees, dealer concessions and transfer agent fees. Dealer concessions and transfer agent fees earned net of related expenses from distribution and sale of affiliated mutual fund shares and other securities are recorded on a trade date basis.

 

F-11


Table of Contents

Other income and fees consist primarily of brokerage commissions and fees earned for distribution of nonaffiliated products. Commissions earned (and related expenses) are recorded on a trade date basis and are computed based upon contractual agreements.

Income Taxes

The Company and its subsidiaries are included in the consolidated federal income tax return filed by PNX and each is party to a tax sharing agreement by and among PNX and its subsidiaries. In accordance with this agreement, federal income taxes are allocated as if each subsidiary’s tax liability had been calculated on a separate company basis, except that benefits for any net operating losses will be provided to the extent such loss is utilized in the consolidated federal tax return. As such, the Company’s consolidated tax provision is an aggregation of the allocation of taxes to the separate Company subsidiaries. Deferred tax assets and/or liabilities are determined by multiplying the differences between the financial reporting and tax reporting basis for assets and liabilities by the enacted tax rates expected to be in effect when such differences are recovered or settled. The effect on deferred taxes of a change in tax rates is recognized in income in the period that includes the enactment date. Valuation allowances on deferred tax assets are estimated based on assessments of the realizability of such amounts.

The ultimate tax outcome of many transactions is uncertain. Significant judgment is required in evaluating tax positions and in computing the tax provision including valuation allowances, the timing of reversals of net operating losses, and other items, many of whose outcomes can not be known at the date of the financial statements. Uncertain tax positions taken by the company are accounted for under FIN 48, which may require certain benefits taken on a tax return to not be recognized in the financial statements when there is the potential for certain tax positions to be successfully challenged by the taxing authorities.

Deferred taxes mainly relate to net operating losses and intangible assets. A valuation allowance has been established relative to state deferred tax assets due to the inability to combine certain sub-groups for state income tax reporting purposes. Changes in this allowance could have a material effect on our financial position and results of operations.

Earnings Per Share

Earnings per share (“EPS”) is calculated in accordance with SFAS No. 128, “Earnings Per Share.” Basic EPS is computed by dividing income available to common stockholders by the weighted average number of common shares for the period.

Fair Value of Financial Instruments

Cash and cash equivalents, accounts receivable, accounts payable, accrued liabilities, and long-term debt are reflected in the financial statements at carrying value which equals or approximates fair value. Marketable securities are reflected in the financial statements at fair value based upon publicly quoted market prices.

Concentrations of Credit Risk

Financial instruments that potentially subject the Company to concentrations of credit risk consist principally of cash and cash equivalents. The Company maintains cash and cash equivalents in bank deposits with financial institutions. Cash deposits at these financial institutions may exceed Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation insurance limits.

Market Risk

The Company’s primary exposure to market risk is directly related to its role as investment advisor for various accounts it manages and the funds for which it acts as advisor. Most of the Company’s revenues are derived from investment management fees, which are based on the market value of the assets under management. A decline in the values of securities under management would cause revenues and income to decline.

 

F-12


Table of Contents

The Company is also subject to market risk due to a decline in the values of its investments in marketable securities for its own account. A change in the market value of these investments would result in a corresponding change to either net income or other comprehensive income.

Employee Benefits

Certain current and former employees of the Company and its subsidiaries are members of a group medical and group life plan, are covered under a qualified defined benefit pension plan, and are eligible to participate in a defined contribution 401(k) retirement plan, each of which is sponsored by PNX and administered by a third-party administrator. The qualified pension and 401(k) retirement plans comply with the requirements established by the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 (“ERISA”). Employees may contribute a percentage of their eligible compensation into the 401(k) retirement plan, as defined, subject to certain limitations imposed by the Internal Revenue Code (the “Code”). The Company matches employee contributions, subject to certain limitations. Additionally, an excess benefits plan provides for those portions of pension obligations that are in excess of amounts permitted by the Code. The Company is charged by Phoenix Life for its costs under these plans and for the Company’s matching portion of the 401(k) retirement plan. These costs were $8.9 million, $10.0 million and $6.2 million for 2007, 2006 and 2005, respectively.

In addition, certain employees of the Company have been granted options to purchase common stock of PNX. The Company records compensation expense related to the PNX options that were issued to employees since 2002 over a three-year vesting period based on the fair value of the options as of the grant date.

Business Segment

SFAS No. 131, “Disclosures about Segments of an Enterprise and Related Information,” establishes disclosure requirements relating to operating segments in annual and interim financial statements. Management has determined that the Company operates in one business segment, namely as an asset manager providing investment management and distribution services for retail and institutional products. Although the Company does make some disclosure regarding assets under management and other asset flows by product, the Company’s determination that it operates in one business segment is based on the fact that management reviews financial performance at an aggregate level. All of the products and services provided relate to asset management and are subject to a similar regulatory framework. Groups within the Company are generally not aligned with specific product lines. Investment professionals may manage both retail and institutional products.

 

3. Merger, Acquisitions, Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets

The carrying amount of goodwill at December 31, 2007 and 2006 was $454,369.

Intangible assets at December 31, were as follows:

 

          2007     2006  
($ in thousands)                  

Definite-lived intangible assets:

       

Investment contracts

      $ 305,492     $ 304,679  

Accumulated amortization

        (170,607 )     (140,224 )
                   

Definite-lived intangible assets, net

        134,885       164,455  
                   

Indefinite-lived intangible assets

        73,291       73,291  
                   

Total intangible assets, net

      $ 208,176     $ 237,746  
                   

 

F-13


Table of Contents

Activity in Intangible Assets

      
     Year Ended December 31,  
     2007     2006     2005  
($ in thousands)                   

Intangible assets

      

Purchases

   $ 828     $ 6,372     $ 31,776  

Amortization

     (30,097 )     (32,007 )     (33,260 )

Impairment

     (301 )     (32,471 )     (11,099 )
                        

Change in intangible assets

     (29,570 )     58,106       (12,583 )

Balance, beginning of period

     237,746       295,852       308,435  
                        

Balance, end of period

   $ 208,176     $ 237,746     $ 295,852  
                        

Intangible asset amortization for the next five years is estimated as follows: 2008—$29.2 million, 2009—$27.7 million, 2010—$25.9 million, 2011—$17.1 million, 2012—$9.9 million and thereafter—$25.1 million. At December 31, 2007, the weighted average estimated remaining amortization period for investment contracts is 6 years.

In the fourth quarter of 2007, the Company performed an interim test on certain of its definite-lived intangible assets in accordance with SFAS No. 144, “Standard Accounting for the Impairment or Disposal of Long Lived Assets” as a result of significant outflows in assets under management experienced at one of its operating subsidiaries due to the loss of a significant number of accounts. A pre-tax impairment charge of $0.3 million was recorded.

In the first quarter of 2006, the Company recorded a $32.5 million pre-tax impairment on $33.4 million of definite-lived intangible assets related to certain investment management contracts. This impairment resulted from the termination of the associated management contracts and related lost revenues.

In 2005, the Company performed interim tests on certain of its definite-lived intangible assets as a result of significant outflows in assets under management experienced as a result of the departure of a significant number of accounts. Pre-tax impairment charges of $11.1 million were recorded.

For each of the impairment losses noted above, a goodwill impairment test was also performed in accordance with SFAS No. 142 and did not result in impairment charges.

Acquisition of Kayne Anderson Rudnick Investment Management, LLC (“KAR”)

On September 30, 2005, the Company completed the acquisition of the minority interest of KAR. On that date, the Company acquired the remaining 34.8% non-controlling interest in KAR for $77.2 million, including $0.5 million of transaction costs. A cash payment of $9.7 million was made in October 2005 and promissory notes totaling $67.0 million were issued to the minority members to finance the remainder of the acquisition. These notes were paid in full as of January 2, 2007. See Note 9. These payments were recorded as additional purchase price of which $31.9 million was allocated to identified intangible assets and the remaining $45.4 was, in accordance with SFAS No. 142, classified as goodwill and is not being amortized.

Acquisition of SCM Advisors, LLC (formerly named Seneca Capital Management, LLC)

On May 2, 2005, the Company completed the acquisition of the minority interest of SCM and SCM became a wholly owned subsidiary of the Company. This transaction cost $1.2 million and was allocated entirely to goodwill.

Insight Funds

On May 18, 2006, the Company acquired the rights to advise, distribute and administer the Insight Funds from Harris Investment Management, Inc. (“Harris”) for $4.1 million plus $1.3 million of transaction costs.

 

F-14


Table of Contents

Under the terms of the agreement, during its first four years, the Company is required to make additional annual payments to Harris related to the purchase of contracts of certain money market funds based upon the net profits earned on those funds (as defined in the Transaction Agreement). The Company made an annual payment of $1.1 million in 2007 related to the first year of this agreement and has accrued $0.6 million for the second year payment. The initial purchase price and these additional money market payments have been allocated to identified intangible assets and are being amortized over periods ranging from one to five years. Harris continues to manage the majority of the Insight Funds as sub-advisor.

Provisions of the agreement require that the Company make additional payments to Harris should the Company terminate Harris for reasons other than cause. At this time, the Company does not intend to terminate the agreement and, therefore, has not established any such related accruals.

Additionally, the Company entered into a strategic partnership agreement with Harris, whereby Harris would be available to the Company as a sub-advisor for non-Harris funds. Harris was subsequently appointed a sub-advisor to certain funds. The agreement states with regard to these sub-advised funds, if the sub-advisory fees Harris earns in the first five years of the agreement do not reach a specified amount, the Company must pay Harris an amount as predetermined by the agreement. The Company would be required to pay a maximum amount of $20.0 million under the agreement. If the Company were to terminate the contracts without cause, the termination costs would be based on $35.0 million, adjusted by a factor for the percentage of original assets that remain. The agreement was executed on March 28, 2006 and to date the Company has paid Harris approximately $12.0 million of the obligation. As the calculations are based on facts that can only be determined at the end of five years, and as there are significant variables that can impact such calculations, any obligation is not estimable at this time. The Company has done a hypothetical calculation and determined that no payment would be required. The Company will continue to review the contingent obligation.

 

4. Marketable Securities

The Company’s marketable securities consist of both trading and available-for-sale securities. The composition of the Company’s marketable securities at December 31, was as follows:

 

     Cost    Unrealized
Gain (Loss)
    Market
($ in thousands)                

2007

       

Trading:

       

Equity securities (managed account)

   $ 861    $ —       $ 861

Other affiliated mutual funds

     12,875      (993 )     11,882
                     

Total trading securities

     13,736      (993 )     12,743
                     

Available-for-sale:

       

Affiliated closed-end funds

     1,621      —         1,621
                     

Total marketable securities

   $ 15,357    $ (993 )   $ 14,364
                     

 

F-15


Table of Contents

There were no changes to the unrealized portion of available-for-sale investments. The Company holds securities sold short that represent the short portion of a 130/30 equity strategy that the Company seeded in 2007. The 130/30 equity strategy involves selling short positions for approximately 30% of the portfolio value and purchasing long positions with the remaining portfolio value including the proceeds received from the short sales.

 

     Cost    Unrealized
Gain (Loss)
   Market
($ in thousands)               

2006

        

Trading:

        

Equity securities (managed account)

   $ 6,713    $ 1,449    $ 8,162

Municipal bonds

     1,021      —        1,021

Other affiliated mutual funds

     3,600      127      3,727
                    

Total trading securities

     11,334      1,576      12,910
                    

Available-for-sale:

        

Affiliated closed-end funds

     1,513      75      1,588
                    

Total marketable securities

   $ 12,847    $ 1,651    $ 14,498
                    

 

5. Furniture, Equipment, and Leasehold Improvements

Furniture, equipment, and leasehold improvements at December 31, were comprised of the following:

 

     2007     2006  
($ in thousands)             

Computer equipment and software

   $ 4,262     $ 4,363  

Leasehold improvements

     7,627       8,495  

Furniture and office equipment

     11,918       10,958  
                
     23,807       23,816  

Accumulated depreciation and amortization

     (21,575 )     (20,480 )
                

Furniture, equipment, and leasehold improvements, net

   $ 2,232     $ 3,336  
                

 

6. Long-Term Investments and Other Assets

Long-term investments are accounted for using the equity method, when appropriate. The Company’s share of the earnings of unconsolidated investments is included in Other income in the Statements of Operations.

Inverness/Phoenix and Related Partnerships

At December 31, 2007 and 2006, the Company had a 23% interest in Inverness/Phoenix Capital LLC (“IPC”). IPC is a joint venture with Inverness Management LLC, an unrelated third-party. IPC acts as a general partner to several partnerships that invest in private equity transactions (primarily management led buy-outs), expansion financing and recapitalizations involving management participation. At December 31, 2007 and 2006, the Company’s combined investment in IPC and one of its related partnerships was $1.5 million and $1.3 million, respectively.

 

7. Collateralized Debt or Bond Obligations and Hedge Funds

The Company adopted Financial Interpretation No. (“FIN”) 46-R, “Consolidation of Variable Interest Entities, an Interpretation of ARB No. 51,” for special purpose entities in which it holds a variable interest through PIC and SCM, on December 31, 2003. FIN 46-R interprets the existing standards on consolidation

 

F-16


Table of Contents

of certain entities in which equity investors do not have the characteristics of a controlling financial interest or do not have sufficient equity at risk for the entity to finance its activities without additional subordinated financial support from other parties (variable interest entities or “VIEs”). Variable interest entities are required to be consolidated by their primary beneficiaries if they do not effectively disperse risks among all parties involved. The primary beneficiary of a VIE is the party that absorbs a majority of the entity’s expected losses, receives a majority of its expected residual returns, or both, as a result of holding either explicit or implicit variable interests.

At December 31, 2007, PIC or SCM served as the investment advisors to ten collateralized debt or loan obligation (“CDO/CLOs”) trusts. The CDO/CLOs, which are investment trusts, have aggregate assets of $3.6 billion, $4.0 billion and $2.5 billion at December 31, 2007, 2006 and 2005, respectively, that are primarily invested in a variety of fixed income securities acquired from third parties. The CDO/CLOs, in turn, issued tranched collateralized debt and residual equity securities to third parties as well as to Phoenix Life’s general account. The CDO/CLOs reside in bankruptcy remote, special purpose entities in which the Company provides neither recourse nor guarantees. The Company has determined that it is not the primary beneficiary of these VIEs as defined by FIN 46-R. Accordingly, the Company’s financial exposure to these CDO/CLOs stems only from the investment management fees it earns, which totaled $9.1 million, $8.0 million and $8.8 million in 2007, 2006 and 2005, respectively.

For a portion of 2006 and years prior, SCM was the managing member of, and acted as the investment manager to, a hedge fund limited liability company and was the investment manager of a separate offshore hedge fund limited partnership. The purpose of these partnerships was to invest in long and short fixed income positions by U.S. and tax-exempt investors. As investment manager to these funds, SCM earned management fees totaling $0.2 million and $0.8 million in 2006 and 2005, respectively. These hedge funds are not considered to be VIEs, pursuant to FIN 46-R. Taking into consideration the limited partner/investor rights with respect to SCM’s appointment as the investment advisor of each fund, the Company has determined that consolidation is not required and accounts for these investments under the equity method of accounting.

 

8. Income Taxes

The components of the provision for income taxes for the years ended December 31, were as follows:

 

     2007     2006     2005  
($ in thousands)       

Current

      

Federal

   $ (499 )   $ (9,831 )   $ (1,370 )

State

     1,790       737       214  
                        

Total current tax expense (benefit)

     1,291       (9,094 )     (1,156 )
                        

Deferred

      

Federal

     (7,244 )     (16,349 )     (17,503 )

State

     3       (1,398 )     (940 )
                        

Total deferred tax benefit

     (7,241 )     (17,747 )     (18,443 )
                        

Total expense (benefit) for income taxes

   $ (5,950 )   $ (26,841 )   $ (19,599 )
                        

 

F-17


Table of Contents

Deferred taxes resulted from temporary differences between the amounts reported in the consolidated financial statements and the tax basis of assets and liabilities. The tax effects of temporary differences at December 31, were as follows:

 

     2007     2006  
($ in thousands)       

Deferred tax assets:

    

Intangible assets

   $ 13,641     $ 14,799  

Net operating losses

     49,831       41,572  

Other

     3,716       4,104  
                

Gross deferred tax assets

     67,188       60,475  

Valuation allowance

     (10,642 )     (9,761 )
                

Gross deferred tax assets after valuation allowance

     56,546       50,714  
                

Deferred tax liabilities:

    

Intangible assets

     65,446       66,273  

Other investments

     214       822  
                

Gross deferred tax liabilities

     65,660       67,095  
                

Deferred tax liability, net

   $ (9,114 )   $ (16,381 )
                

The Company is included in the consolidated federal income tax return filed by PNX and is a party to a tax sharing agreement by and among PNX and its subsidiaries. In accordance with this agreement, federal income taxes are allocated as if they had been calculated on a separate company basis, except that benefits for any net operating losses will be provided to the extent such loss is utilized in the consolidated federal tax return. As such, the consolidated tax provision is an aggregation of the allocation of taxes to the separate Company subsidiaries. Deferred tax assets and/or liabilities are determined by multiplying the differences between the financial reporting and tax reporting basis for assets and liabilities by the enacted tax rates expected to be in effect when such differences are recovered or settled. The effect on deferred taxes of a change in tax rates is recognized in income in the period that includes the enactment date. Valuation allowances on deferred tax assets are estimated based on assessments of the realizability of such amounts.

The ultimate tax outcome of many transactions is uncertain. Significant judgment is required in evaluating tax positions and in computing the tax provision including valuation allowances, the timing of reversals of net operating losses, and other items, many of whose outcomes can not be known at the date of the financial statements. Uncertain tax positions taken by the company are accounted for under FIN 48, which may require certain benefits taken on a tax return to not be recognized in the financial statements when there is the potential for certain tax positions to be successfully challenged by the taxing authorities.

Deferred taxes mainly relate to net operating losses and intangible assets. A valuation allowance has been established relative to state deferred tax assets due to the inability to combine certain sub-groups for state income tax reporting purposes. Changes in this allowance could have a material effect on our financial position and results of operations.

As of December 31, 2007, the Company had deferred tax assets of $38.8 million and $0.4 million related to net operating losses and capital losses, respectively, for federal income tax purposes and $10.6 million for state net operating losses. The related federal net operating losses of $110.9 million are scheduled to expire between the years 2023 and 2027. The federal capital losses of $1.0 million are scheduled to expire in 2010 and 2012. The state net operating losses of $127.2 million are scheduled to expire as follows: $77.8 million in 2008 through 2017 and $49.4 million in 2018 through 2026. Due to the inability of PNX to combine the life insurance and non-life insurance subgroups for state income tax purposes, the Company established a $10.6 million and $9.8 million valuation allowance at the end of 2007 and 2006, respectively, relative to the state deferred tax assets.

 

F-18


Table of Contents

The following presents a reconciliation of the provision (benefit) for income taxes computed at the federal statutory rate to the provision (benefit) for income taxes recognized in the Statements of Operations for the periods indicated:

 

     Years Ended December 31,  
     2007     2006     2005  
($ in thousands)       

Tax at statutory rate

   $ (7,035 )    (35 )%   $ (26,038 )    (35 )%   $ (18,449 )    (35 )%

State taxes, net of federal benefit

     1,141      5       (369 )    —         (428 )    (1 )

Goodwill amortization and impairments

     17      —         80      —         58      —    

Adjustments to tax accruals

     13      —         78      —         (760 )    (1 )

Audit settlement

     —        —         —        —         482      1  

Other, net

     (86 )    —         (592 )    (1 )     (502 )    (1 )
                                             

Income tax expense (benefit)

   $ (5,950 )    (30 )%   $ (26,841 )    (36 )%   $ (19,599 )    (37 )%
                                             

The Company adopted the provisions of FASB, Interpretation No. 48, Accounting for Uncertainty in Income Taxes, or FIN 48, on January 1, 2007. As a result of the implementation of FIN 48, the Company recognized a cumulative effect adjustment of approximately $0.3 million increase in liabilities for uncertain tax benefits, which was accounted for as an increase to the January 1, 2007 balance of accumulated deficit. Including the cumulative effect adjustment, the Company had approximately $0.5 million of total gross unrecognized tax benefits as of January 1, 2007 and December 31, 2007.

The entire amount of unrecognized tax benefits at December 31, 2007 would, if recognized, impact the annual effective tax rate upon recognition.

Based upon the timing and status of our current examinations by taxing authorities, the Company does not believe that it is reasonably possible that any changes to the balance of unrecognized tax benefits occurring within the next 12 months will result in a significant change to the results of operations, financial condition or liquidity. In addition, the Company does not anticipate that there will be additional payments made or refunds received within the next 12 months with respect to the years under audit. The Company does not anticipate any increases to the unrecognized tax benefits that would have a significant impact on the financial position of the Company.

Together with PNX, the Company and its subsidiaries file consolidated, combined, unitary or separate income tax returns in the U.S. federal, various state and foreign jurisdictions. The Company is no longer subject to income tax examinations by federal authorities for tax years prior to 2004. PNX’s consolidated U.S. federal income tax returns for 2004 and 2005 are currently being examined. The Company does not believe that the examination will result in a material change in its financial position. State examinations are being conducted by Connecticut for the years 1996 through 2005 and New York for the years 2003 through 2005. It is not believed that these examinations will result in a material change to the Company’s financial position, and there have been no penalties paid related to this examination.

 

9. Long-Term Debt

Credit Facilities and Other Note Agreements :

On September 30, 2005, in connection with the final acquisition of KAR, the Company entered into promissory note agreements with the KAR minority members totaling $67.0 million to finance the remainder of the acquisition, of which $9.8 million plus interest was paid on January 3, 2006 and the remaining $57.2 million plus interest was paid on January 2, 2007. The interest rate on the notes was 4.75%. See Note 3.

On June 6, 2006, an existing $150.0 million unsecured senior revolving credit facility, dated as of November 22, 2004 was amended and restated. The financing commitments under the Amended Facility will terminate on June 6, 2009. Potential borrowers on the credit line are PNX, the Company and Phoenix Life. PNX unconditionally guaranteed any loans under this facility to the Company and Phoenix Life. Base

 

F-19


Table of Contents

rate loans bear interest at the greater of Wachovia Bank, National Association’s prime commercial rate or the federal funds rate plus 0.50%. Eurodollar rate loans bear interest at London Interbank Offered Rate (“LIBOR”) plus an applicable percentage based on PNX’s Standard & Poor’s and Moody’s ratings. The $25.0 million that had been outstanding at December 31, 2005 was repaid in its entirety on May 5, 2006 and there has been no further borrowing against this facility since that time. The Company was removed as a borrower of the facility effective April 2, 2008.

Interest expense related to the promissory note agreements and the credit facility including any facility, usage, commitment, and guarantee fees, was $0.1 million, $3.4 million and $2.0 million in 2007, 2006 and 2005, respectively.

Notes Payable to Related Parties :

The Company entered into various debt agreements with PNX in 2001 and 2002 that had original maturity dates at various times in 2007 that were subsequently extended to 2010. Interest was payable in arrears at annual rates ranging from 5.32% to 7.56% for the years 2006 and 2007. During 2006 and 2007, each of these notes was converted to equity in the form of capital contributions from PNX. The PNX board of directors deemed it to be in the best interests of PNX and the Company to forgive the remaining intra-company indebtedness associated with these notes in the amount of $325.0 million, and all interest accrued thereon. Debt outstanding at each of the last three year ends related to these debt agreements was as follows:

 

     Original
Note
Date
   Notes Outstanding at
December 31,
      2007    2006    2005
($ in millions)                    

Subordinated Agreement with PNX

   12/27/01    $ 0    $ 150    $ 150

Subordinated Agreement with PNX

   1/29/02      0      100      100

Senior Agreement with PNX

   12/23/02      0      75      100

Additionally, on February 26, 2001, the Company entered into a separate $69.0 million subordinated note agreement with Phoenix Life due March 1, 2006 in exchange for debentures held by Phoenix Life. In December 2005 this agreement was renegotiated to provide for quarterly payments of $3 million. The renegotiated note matures in December 2010 and bears interest at an annual rate of 6.55%. The note agreement contains financial and operating covenants including, among other provisions, requirements that the Company maintain a maximum debt to earnings ratio and minimum stockholder’s equity. At December 31, 2007 and 2006, the Company was in compliance with all covenants. The outstanding balance on this note at December 31, 2007 and 2006 was $42.0 million and $54.0 million, respectively. The fair value of this note at December 31, 2007 and 2006 was $41.2 million and $52.7 million, respectively.

Interest expense related to notes payable to related parties was $26.6 million, $30.0 million and $26.7 million in 2007, 2006 and 2005, respectively.

 

10. Contingent Liabilities

Litigation and Arbitration Matters

The Company is regularly involved in litigation and arbitration, both as a defendant and as a plaintiff. The litigation and arbitration naming us as a defendant ordinarily involves our activities as an employer, investor, investment advisor, broker-dealer or taxpayer. It is not feasible to predict or determine the ultimate outcome of all legal or arbitration proceedings or to provide reasonable ranges of potential losses. The

 

F-20


Table of Contents

Company believes that the outcomes of our litigation and arbitration matters are not likely, either individually or in the aggregate, to have a material adverse effect on our consolidated financial condition. However, given the large or indeterminate amounts sought in certain of these matters and the inherent unpredictability of litigation and arbitration, it is possible that an adverse outcome in certain matters could, from time to time, have a material adverse effect on our results of operations or cash flows in particular quarterly or annual periods.

Regulatory Matters

State regulatory bodies, the SEC, the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority (“FINRA”) and other regulatory bodies regularly make inquiries of the Company and, from time to time, conduct examinations or investigations concerning our compliance with, among other things, insurance laws, securities laws, and laws governing the activities of broker-dealers. The Company endeavors to respond to such inquiries in an appropriate way and to take corrective action if warranted.

In addition, federal and state regulatory authorities from time to time make inquiries and conduct examinations regarding our compliance with securities and other laws and regulations affecting our products. The Company endeavors to respond to such inquiries in an appropriate way and to take corrective action if warranted. There has been a significant increase in federal and state regulatory activity relating to financial services companies, with a number of recent regulatory inquiries focusing on late-trading, market timing and valuation issues.

In 2005, the Boston District Office of the SEC completed a compliance examination of certain of our affiliates that are registered under the Investment Company Act of 1940 or the Investment Advisers Act of 1940. Following the examination, the staff of the Boston District Office issued a deficiency letter primarily focused on perceived weaknesses in procedures for monitoring trading to prevent market timing activity. The staff requested the Company to conduct an analysis as to whether stockholders, policyholders and contract holders who invested in the funds that may have been affected by undetected market timing activity had suffered harm and to advise the staff whether the Company believes reimbursement is necessary or appropriate under the circumstances. A third party was retained to assist the Company in preparing the analysis. Based on this analysis, the Company advised the SEC that it does not believe that reimbursement is appropriate.

Over the past several years, a number of companies have announced settlements of other types of enforcement actions with various regulatory agencies, primarily the SEC and the New York Attorney General’s Office. It is possible that one or more regulatory agencies may pursue this type of action against the Company in the future. Financial services companies have also been the subject of broad industry inquiries by federal and state regulators and attorneys general which do not appear to be company-specific.

These types of regulatory actions may be difficult to assess or quantify, may seek recovery of indeterminate amounts, including punitive and treble damages, and the nature and magnitude of their outcomes may remain unknown for substantial periods of time. While it is not feasible to predict or determine the ultimate outcome of all pending inquiries, investigations, legal proceedings and other regulatory actions, or to provide reasonable ranges of potential losses, the Company believes that their outcomes are not likely, either individually or in the aggregate, to have a material adverse effect on our consolidated financial condition. However, given the large or indeterminate amounts sought in certain of these actions and the inherent unpredictability of regulatory matters, it is possible that an adverse outcome in certain matters could, from time to time, have a material adverse effect on the Company’s results of operation or cash flows in particular quarterly or annual periods.

Other Matters

The Company indirectly guarantees the activities of its broker-dealer subsidiaries. In addition, in the ordinary course of business the Company may enter into contracts with third parties pursuant to which the third parties provide services on the Company’s behalf or the Company provides services on behalf of the third parties. In certain circumstances, the Company may agree to indemnify the third-party service provider. The terms of indemnification may vary from contract to contract and the amount of indemnification liability, if any, cannot be determined. The Company made no payments to third parties in

 

F-21


Table of Contents

2007 and 2006, and has recorded no liabilities with regard to commitments as of December 31, 2007. The Company believes that any risk of loss for direct or indirect guarantees is remote and would not have a material impact on the Company’s operating results or financial position.

 

11. Capital and Reserve Requirement Information

As broker-dealers registered with the SEC, PEPCO and RBC are subject to certain rules regarding minimum net capital. PEPCO and RBC operate pursuant to Rule 15c3-1, paragraph (a) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 and, accordingly, are each required to maintain a ratio of “aggregate indebtedness” to “net capital” (as those items are defined) which may not exceed 15 to 1.

Aggregate indebtedness, net capital, and resultant ratios for PEPCO are as follows:

 

     December 31
     2007    2006
($ in thousands)     

Aggregate indebtedness

   $ 13,705    $ 14,282

Net capital

     7,448      5,464

Ratio of aggregate indebtedness to net capital

     1.8 to 1      2.6 to 1

PEPCO’s minimum required net capital at December 31, 2007 and 2006 based on its aggregate indebtedness on those dates, is $.9 million and $1.0 million, respectively.

Aggregate indebtedness, net capital, and resultant ratios for RBC are as follows:

 

     December 31,
     2007    2006
($ in thousands)     

Aggregate indebtedness

   $ 90    $ 89

Net capital

     1,083      964

Ratio of aggregate indebtedness to net capital

     .1 to 1      .1 to 1

RBC’s minimum required net capital at December 31, 2007 and 2006 is $100 thousand.

The operations of PEPCO and RBC do not include the physical handling of securities or the maintenance of open customer accounts. Accordingly, PEPCO and RBC are exempt from the reserve provisions of Rule 15c3-3 under the exemption allowed by paragraphs (k)(2)(i) and (k)(2)(ii), respectively, of such rule.

 

12. Other Operating Expenses

Other operating expenses for the years ended December 31, were comprised of the following:

 

     2007    2006    2005
($ in thousands)               

Investment research

   $ 7,078    $ 5,044    $ 4,157

Computer services

     5,956      6,417      7,175

Rent and other occupancy

     5,888      5,789      7,707

Professional fees

     4,792      5,041      5,642

Outside services

     2,685      3,966      4,702

Travel, training and entertainment

     2,679      2,690      2,932

Communications and branding

     1,815      1,339      552

National and regional meetings

     1,750      1,494      1,313

Insurance

     1,619      2,315      2,759

PNX staff chargeback

     1,531      1,022      1,243

Consulting and administration fee

     1,264      1,220      1,902

Marketing materials

     1,076      1,316      2,578

Telephone and postage

     1,074      1,205      1,606

General taxes

     860      749      859

Equipment rental and maintenance

     617      666      807

Brokerage clearing and execution costs

     348      592      1,157

Other expenses

     3,406      3,444      4,633
                    

Total

   $ 44,438    $ 44,309    $ 51,724
                    

 

F-22


Table of Contents

Certain of these operating expenses are provided by Phoenix Life. See Note 15.

 

13. Restructuring and Severance

In 2005, the Company undertook a restructuring of the business as a result of certain underperforming investment strategies which represented a significant portion of the Company’s assets under management. These costs are primarily related to employee staff reductions including severance. Additionally, as a result of these reductions, in 2006, excess office space was vacated and made ready to sublet. Lease losses associated with various abandoned office space have been recognized representing the Company’s best estimate of the present value of the amount owed under the leases reduced by sub-lease income. No such costs were incurred in 2007. The costs incurred each year and unpaid balances at December 31 were as follows:

 

     2007     2006     2005  
($ in thousands)                   

Beginning unpaid balance

   $ 6,939     $ 414     $ —    

Costs incurred and expensed:

      

Employee staff reductions

     —         4,876       11,863  

Lease abandonment and other

     —         8,758       631  
                        

Total costs incurred and expensed

     —         13,634       12,494  

Costs paid

     (3,238 )     (7,109 )     (12,080 )
                        

Ending unpaid balance

   $ 3,701     $ 6,939     $ 414  
                        

 

14. Other Comprehensive Income

The components of other comprehensive income, and related tax effects, were as follows:

 

     Before
Tax
    Tax
Expense
(Benefit)
    Net-of-
Tax
 
($ in thousands)                   

Year Ended December 31, 2007

      

Unrealized losses on securities available-for-sale:

      

Unrealized holding losses arising during period

   $ (75 )   $ 26     $ (49 )
                        

Other comprehensive income (loss)

   $ (75 )   $ 26     $ (49 )
                        

Year Ended December 31, 2006

      

Unrealized gains on securities available-for-sale:

      

Unrealized holding gains arising during period

   $ 24     $ (9 )   $ 15  
                        

Other comprehensive income (loss)

   $ 24     $ (9 )   $ 15  
                        

Year Ended December 31, 2005

      

Unrealized losses on securities available-for-sale:

      

Unrealized holding losses arising during period

   $ (183 )     64     $ (119 )
                        

Other comprehensive income (loss)

   $ (183 )     64       (119 )
                        

There were no sales of available-for-sale securities during the years ended December 31, 2007, 2006 and 2005.

 

F-23


Table of Contents
15. Other Related Party Transactions

As discussed in further detail throughout these notes, the Company has certain agreements with related parties whereby the Company and/or the related party provides services on behalf of the other party. Any intercompany balances outstanding associated with these transactions are reviewed monthly and are settled to the extent cash is available.

Revenues

The Company provides investment advisory services to affiliated mutual funds. The Company also manages assets and provides other investment advisory services to PNX, and Phoenix Life and its subsidiaries (e.g., general account and variable separate account products). The revenues earned from managing related party assets for the years ended December 31, were as follows:

 

     2007    2006     2005
($ in thousands)                

Management fees:

       

Affiliated mutual and closed-end funds

   $ 84,887    $ 76,246     $ 71,085

CDO/CBO

     3,206      6,464       8,696

Phoenix Life General Account

     11,589      9,840       9,424

Phoenix Life variable product separate accounts, net of reimbursement

     2,332      3,046       4,430

Other

     853      (5 )     885
                     

Total management fees

   $ 102,867    $ 95,591     $ 94,520
                     

Distribution and service fees:

   $ 36,467    $ 29,805     $ 25,624
                     

Administration fees:

       

Fund administration

   $ 14,322    $ 11,500     $ 8,139

Shareholder service agent

     6,466      5,754       5,054

Other

     495      591       526
                     

Total administration fees

   $ 21,283    $ 17,845     $ 13,719
                     

Other income and fees

     645      683       1,203
                     

Total

   $ 161,262    $ 143,924     $ 135,066
                     

Pursuant to the terms of its distribution plans with affiliated mutual funds, the Company received a combined $36.5 million, $29.8 million and $25.6 million in 2007, 2006 and 2005, respectively, from affiliated mutual funds for providing distribution and other services. Of these amounts, $30.8 million, $24.4 million and $20.0 million in 2007, 2006 and 2005, respectively, was paid in the form of trailing commissions for services rendered to unaffiliated broker-dealers. Trailing commissions are included in other operating expenses on the Statements of Income. The remaining distributor fees of $5.7 million, $5.4 million and $5.6 million in 2007, 2006 and 2005, respectively, were retained as reimbursement for distribution services provided by the Company.

The Company serves as the administrator to the affiliated mutual funds. For its services, which include financial agent services, the Company received administration fees of $14.3 million, $11.5 million and $8.1 million in 2007, 2006 and 2005, respectively. Of these amounts, $8.7 million, $7.9 million and $6.5 million in 2007, 2006 and 2005, respectively, were paid out to an unaffiliated third party for fund accounting services provided.

The Company also serves as transfer agent for certain affiliated mutual funds. For these services, the Company earned fees totaling $10.4 million, $7.6 million and $5.1 million in 2007, 2006 and 2005, respectively, and paid out sub-transfer agent fees of $4.0 million, $1.8 million and $0 in those years, respectively. These fees are presented net in “Administration fees.”

 

F-24


Table of Contents

The Company received management fees averaging approximately .09%, .07% and .07% of the net asset value of the Phoenix Life General Account assets under management in 2007, 2006 and 2005, respectively. The Company’s transaction with affiliates comprised approximately 71%, 66% and 57% of total revenues, for the years ended 2007, 2006 and 2005, respectively. For each of these years, approximately 6% of total revenues are related to Phoenix Life.

Receivables from Related Parties

Receivables from affiliates as of December 31, were as follows:

 

     2007    2006
($ in thousands)          

Investment management fees

   $ 13,574    $ 15,707

Distribution and service fees

     3,102      2,842

Administration fees

     3,047      4,176

Other receivables

     2,553      2,632
             
   $ 22,276    $ 25,357
             

Operating Expenses

Phoenix Life provides certain administrative services at the request of the Company. Additionally, certain of the Company’s active and retired employees participate in the Phoenix Life multi-employer retirement and benefit plans (see Note 2). The expenses recorded by the Company for significant services provided by Phoenix Life for the years ended December 31, were as follows:

 

     2007    2006    2005
($ in thousands)               

Computer services

   $ 4,095    $ 4,023    $ 4,010

Professional fees

     3,569      4,457      6,155

Communications

     1,815      1,339      552

Administrative fees

     1,678      1,475      1,722

Corporate and staff

     1,245      736      957

Rent

     2,711      2,531      2,546

Employee related charges:

        

Healthcare and life insurance benefits

     3,042      3,759      1,610

Pension and savings plans

     2,691      3,387      2,435

Human resources administration

     2,915      2,576      1,696

Equipment rental and maintenance, and other

     60      78      24
                    

Total

   $ 23,821    $ 24,361    $ 21,707
                    

The Company pays these charges based on contractual agreements. Computer services are based upon actual or specified usage. Other charges are based on hourly rates, square footage or head count. The Company reimburses Phoenix Life for employee related charges based on actual costs paid by Phoenix Life. Management believes that the methods used by Phoenix Life Insurance Company to allocate these expenses to the Company are reasonable.

Payables to Related Parties

Payables to related parties, principally Phoenix Life, for operating expenses as of December 31, 2007 and 2006 were $11.3 million and $12.2 million, respectively.

 

F-25


Table of Contents
16. Lease Contingencies

The Company incurred rental expenses on operating leases of $4.2 million, $10.7 million and $5.9 million in 2007, 2006 and 2005, respectively, and received income from subleases of $1.1 million, $0.9 million and $0.8 million in 2007, 2006 and 2005, respectively. The Company is committed to the following future net minimum rental payments under non-cancelable operating leases:

 

     Lease
Payments
   Income
From
Subleases
   Net
Lease
Payments
($ in thousands)               

2008

   $ 7,432    $ 2,764    $ 4,668

2009

     3,067      226      2,841

2010

     2,265      227      2,038

2011

     938      69      869

2012

     491      —        491

2013 and thereafter

     2,880      —        2,880
                    
   $ 17,073    $ 3,286    $ 13,787
                    

 

17. Share-Based Compensation

Stock Option Plan

Certain employees of the Company have been granted options to purchase common stock of PNX under an approved PNX stock option plan. These options, which were granted at various times beginning in June 2002, vest over a three-year period and terminate ten years from the date of grant. PNX options are granted with an exercise price equal to the market value of the shares at the date of grant. The Company recorded compensation expense, relating to charges from PNX for allowing the Company employees to participate in the plan, of $0.5 million, $0.4 million and $0.3 million in 2007, 2006 and 2005 respectively, related to these options. A total of 570,906 option shares which have been granted to the Company’s active and retired employees were outstanding as of December 31, 2007, of which 372,269 are vested.

Restricted Stock Awards

Certain employees of the Company have been granted restricted stock units (“RSUs”) of PNX stock under an approved PNX restricted stock unit plan. Each RSU, once vested, entitles the holder to one share of PNX common stock when the restriction expires. The RSUs may be either time-vested or performance-contingent. The Company recorded compensation expense, related to charges from PNX for allowing the Company employees to participate in the RSU plan, of $2.6 million, $0.8 million and $1.0 million in 2007, 2006 and 2005, respectively. At December 31, 2007, 649,799 RSUs were outstanding and which had either not vested or for which stipulated performance had not as yet been achieved.

 

F-26


Table of Contents

Share-Based Payments

On January 1, 2006 the Company adopted SFAS 123(R) using the modified prospective method.

Certain Company employees have been granted stock options and restricted stock under PNX plans further described below. The compensation cost that has been charged against income for these plans is summarized in the following table:

Share-based Compensation Plans:

 

     Year Ended December 31
      2007      2006      2005 
($ in millions)               

Compensation cost charged to income

   $ 1.2    $ 1.2    $ 1.2
                    

Income tax benefit

   $ 0.4    $ 0.4    $ 0.4
                    

The Company did not capitalize any cost of stock-based compensation during the three years ended December 31, 2007.

Stock options

Each option, once vested, entitles the holder to purchase one share of PNX common stock. The options vest over a three-year period. Once vested, options become exercisable. For stock options awarded, the Company recognizes expense over the vesting period equal to their fair value at issuance. The Company calculates the fair value of options using the Black-Scholes option valuation model.

Key Assumptions Used in Valuing Each PNX-related Option:

 

     Years Ended December 31,
     2007    2006    2005

Expected term

   9.9 years    10.0 years    10.0 years

Weighted-average expected volatility

   28.6%    24.3%    35.8%

Weighted-average interest rate

   4.6%      4.6%      4.1%

Weighted-average common share dividend yield

   1.1%      1.1%      1.4%

PNX Stock Option Activity related to Company Employees at

Weighted-Average Exercise Price:

 

     Year Ended December 31, 2007
       Common  
shares
      Price  

Outstanding, beginning of year

   904,619     $ 14.36

Granted

   139,000       14.06

Exercised

   (99,212 )     9.22

Forfeited

   (51,501 )     14.38

Canceled/expired

   (243,500 )     16.19
        

Outstanding, end of year

   649,406       14.39
        

The aggregate intrinsic value of options outstanding at December 31, 2007 was $0.2 million.

As of December 31, 2007, 430,769 options were vested and exercisable, with an aggregate intrinsic value of $.02 million. These options had a weighted-average exercise price of $14.63 and a weighted-average remaining contractual term of 4.7 years.

 

F-27


Table of Contents

Weighted-Average

Fair Value:

 

     Year Ended December 31,
     2007    2006    2005
     Common
Shares
   Grant Date
Fair Value
   Common
Shares
   Grant Date
Fair Value
   Common
Shares
   Grant Date
Fair Value
PNX Options granted to Company employees    139,000    $ 5.77    155,500    $ 5.67    69,719    $ 5.35

Option Values:

 

     Year Ended December 31,
      2007      2006      2005 
($ in millions)               

Intrinsic value of options exercised

   $ 0.5    $ 0.1    $ 0.0

Cash received from option exercises for the years ended December 31, 2007, 2006 and 2005 was $0.9 million, $0.2 million and $0, respectively.

As of December 31, 2007, there was $0.7 million of total unrecognized compensation cost related to non-vested stock options granted to Company employees. That cost is expected to be recognized over a weighted-average period of 1.8 years.

Restricted stock units and restricted stock

The Company participates in PNX RSU plans under which RSUs are granted to employees. Each RSU, once vested, entitles the holder to one share of PNX common stock when the restriction expires. The Company recognizes compensation expense over the vesting period of the RSUs, which is generally three years for each award.

PNX RSU Activity Related to Company Employees at

Weighted-Average Grant Price

 

     Year Ended
December 31, 2007
     RSUs     Fair Value

Outstanding, beginning of year

   268,270     $ 11.13

Awarded

   324,175       14.09

Converted to common shares/applied to taxes

   (184,397 )     9.71

Canceled

   (11,606 )     14.60
        

Outstanding, end of year

   396,442       14.10
        

Generally, the shares underlying these awards will be issued upon vesting unless the participant elects to defer receipt. Deferred awards will be issued on each employee’s respective termination or retirement.

 

F-28


Table of Contents

Weighted-Average

Fair Value:

 

     Year Ended December 31,
     2007    2006    2005
     RSUs    Grant Date
Fair Value
   RSUs    Grant Date
Fair Value
   RSUs    Grant Date
Fair Value
PNX RSUs awarded to
Company employees
   324,175    $ 14.09    110,989    $ 14.60    70,493    $ 12.91

RSU Values:

     Year Ended December 31,
      2007      2006      2005 
($ in millions)               

Intrinsic value of RSUs converted

   $ 3.6    $ 2.3    $ 0.0

Total grant date fair value of RSUs vested

   $ 1.0    $ 1.0    $ 0.7

As of December 31, 2007, there was $3.4 million of total unrecognized compensation cost related to non-vested RSUs granted to Company employees. That cost is expected to be recognized over a weighted-average period of 2.1 years.

In addition to the RSU activity above, 0.3 million RSUs are subject to future issuance based on the achievement of performance criteria established under certain of the incentive plans. The performance contingencies for these RSUs will be resolved no later than December 31, 2009.

 

18. Subsequent Events

Spin-Off of Asset Management Business

On February 7, 2008, PNX announced its intention to spin-off the Company by way of a dividend of the Company’s stock to the PNX stockholders. The spin-off is intended to be tax-free to the PNX stockholders and the spin-off and related transactions are expected to be completed in the third quarter of 2008.

Identified Intangible Assets

In February 2008, the Company performed an interim impairment test of one of its intangible contracts valued at $29.3 million. The test was triggered by management’s assessment that previous declines in assets and revenue supporting the intangible coupled with a notice of termination from one large account in February 2008 required such a test. As a result of the test, the Company recorded a pre-tax impairment of $10.5 million.

 

F-29


Table of Contents

PHOENIX INVESTMENT PARTNERS, LTD.

Consolidated Balance Sheets

(Unaudited)

 

     September 30,
2008
    December 31,
2007
 
($ in thousands, except share data)             

Assets

    

Current Assets

    

Cash and cash equivalents

   $ 22,610     $ 36,815  

Trading securities, at fair value

     10,463       12,743  

Available-for-sale securities, at fair value

     1,517       1,621  

Accounts receivable

     5,903       7,420  

Receivables from related parties

     17,914       22,276  

Prepaid expenses and other assets

     2,453       2,252  
                

Total current assets

     60,860       83,127  

Deferred commissions

     2,212       2,581  

Furniture, equipment and leasehold improvements, net

     4,054       2,232  

Intangible assets, net

     86,119       208,176  

Goodwill

     122,663       454,369  

Deferred taxes, net

     86,643        

Long-term investments and other assets

     2,501       1,678  
                

Total assets

   $ 365,052     $ 752,163  
                

Liabilities and Stockholder’s Equity

    

Current Liabilities

    

Accrued compensation and benefits

   $ 25,121     $ 34,115  

Accounts payable

     2,545       3,667  

Payables to related parties

     9,442       11,295  

Securities sold short, at fair value

     698       854  

Income taxes payable

     8,148       12,028  

Other accrued liabilities

     3,648       5,471  

Broker-dealer payable

     5,837       6,908  

Current portion of notes payable to related parties

     12,000       12,000  
                

Total current liabilities

     67,439       86,338  

Deferred taxes, net

           9,114  

Notes payable to related parties

     21,019       30,019  

Lease obligations and other long-term liabilities

     1,667       1,765  
                

Total liabilities

     90,125       127,236  
                

Stockholder’s Equity

    

Common stock, $.01 par value, 100,000,000 shares authorized, and 10,000 shares issued and outstanding

            

Additional paid-in capital

     962,546       962,546  

Accumulated deficit

     (687,450 )     (337,573 )

Accumulated other comprehensive income (loss)

     (169 )     (46 )
                

Total stockholder’s equity

     274,927       624,927  
                

Total liabilities and stockholder’s equity

   $ 365,052     $ 752,163  
                

See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

 

F-30


Table of Contents

PHOENIX INVESTMENT PARTNERS, LTD.

Consolidated Statements of Operations

(Unaudited)

 

     Nine Months Ended September 30,  
           2008                 2007        
($ in thousands, except per share data)       

Revenues

    

Investment management fees

   $ 102,211     $ 119,478  

Distribution and service fees

     24,345       27,122  

Administration and transfer agent fees

     15,072       17,544  

Other income and fees

     1,759       5,883  
                

Total revenues

     143,387       170,027  
                

Operating Expenses

    

Employment expenses

     65,802       72,523  

Distribution and administration expenses

     33,586       37,188  

Other operating expenses

     35,087       32,821  

Goodwill impairment

     331,706       —    

Intangible asset impairment

     100,492       —    

Depreciation and other amortization

     549       941  

Amortization of intangible assets

     22,413       22,608  
                

Total operating expenses

     589,635       166,081  
                

Operating Income (Loss)

     (446,248 )     3,946  
                

Other Income (Expense)

    

Unrealized (depreciation) appreciation on trading securities

     (2,350 )     (1,573 )

Other income

     580       2,165  
                

Total other income (expense), net

     (1,770 )     592  
                

Interest (Expense) Income

    

Interest expense

     (2,037 )     (20,117 )

Interest income

     675       1,166  
                

Total interest expense, net

     (1,362 )     (18,951 )
                

Loss Before Income Taxes

     (449,380 )     (14,413 )

Income tax expense (benefit)

     (99,503 )     (4,246 )
                

Net Loss

   $ (349,877 )   $ (10,167 )
                

Weighted average shares outstanding

     10,000       10,000  
                

Earnings per share

   $ (34,988 )   $ (1,017 )
                

See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

 

F-31


Table of Contents

PHOENIX INVESTMENT PARTNERS, LTD.

Consolidated Statements of Changes in Stockholder’s Equity

For the Nine Months Ended September 30, 2008 and 2007

(Unaudited)

 

     Common
Stock and
Additional
Paid-In
Capital
   Accumulated
Deficit
    Accumulated
Other
Comprehensive
Income (Loss)
    Total  
($ in thousands)                        

Balances at December 31, 2006

   $ 576,646    $ (323,168 )   $ 3     $ 253,481  

Net loss

     —        (10,167 )     —         (10,167 )

Other comprehensive income:

         

Net unrealized depreciation on securities available-for-sale

     —        —         (25 )     (25 )
               

Total comprehensive loss

            (10,192 )

Contribution from parent

     60,900      —         —         60,900  
                               

Balances at September 30, 2007

   $ 637,546    $ (333,335 )   $ (22 )   $ 304,189  
                               

Balances at December 31, 2007

   $ 962,546    $ (337,573 )   $ (46 )   $ 624,927  

Net loss

     —        (349,877 )     —         (349,877 )

Other comprehensive income:

         

Net unrealized depreciation on securities available-for-sale

     —        —         (123 )     (123 )
               

Total comprehensive loss

            (350,000 )
                               

Balances at September 30, 2008

   $ 962,546    $ (687,450 )   $ (169 )   $ 274,927  
                               

 

See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

 

F-32


Table of Contents

PHOENIX INVESTMENT PARTNERS, LTD.

Consolidated Statements of Cash Flows

(Unaudited)

 

     Nine Months Ended
September 30,
 
         2008             2007      
($ in thousands)             

Cash Flows from Operating Activities:

    

Net loss

   $ (349,877 )   $ (10,167 )

Adjustments to reconcile net loss to net cash provided by (used in) operating activities:

    

Amortization of intangible assets

     22,413       22,608  

Goodwill impairments

     331,706       —    

Intangible assets impairments

     100,492       —    

Amortization of deferred commissions

     1,052       849  

Depreciation and other amortization

     549       941  

Proceeds from sale of trading investments

     974       10,633  

Purchase of trading investments

     (845 )     (6,069 )

Gain on sale of marketable securities

     —         (1,804 )

Unrealized depreciation (appreciation) on trading securities

     2,350       1,573  

Equity in earnings of unconsolidated affiliates, net of dividends

     (582 )     (192 )

Payments of deferred commissions

     (683 )     (2,046 )

Deferred taxes

     (95,691 )     10,648  

Changes in operating assets and liabilities:

    

Accounts receivable

     1,518       (2,918 )

Receivables from related parties

     4,362       3,248  

Prepaid expenses and other assets

     (301 )     (682 )

Accounts payable and accrued liabilities

     (12,113 )     (11,450 )

Payables to related parties

     (1,852 )     (776 )

Income taxes payable

     (3,880 )     (5,994 )

Deferred revenue

     21       15  

Other liabilities

     (2,363 )     (3,597 )
                

Net cash (used in) provided by operating activities

     (2,750 )     4,820  
                

Cash Flows from Investing Activities:

    

Purchase of mutual fund management contract

     —         (525 )

Purchase of available-for-sale investments

     (85 )     (80 )

Capital expenditures

     (2,370 )     18  
                

Net cash used in investing activities

     (2,455 )     (587 )
                

Cash Flows from Financing Activities:

    

Capital contributions

     —         60,900  

Repayment of debt

     (9,000 )     (66,243 )
                

Net cash used in financing activities

     (9,000 )     (5,343 )
                

Net increase (decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

     (14,205 )     (1,110 )

Cash and cash equivalents, beginning of period

     36,815       33,862  
                

Cash and Cash Equivalents, End of P eriod

   $ 22,610     $ 32,752  
                

Supplemental Cash Flow Information:

    

Interest paid

   $ 6,825     $ 24,019  

Income taxes paid (refunded), net

   $ 29     $ (8,941 )

See Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

 

F-33


Table of Contents

PHOENIX INVESTMENT PARTNERS, LTD.

Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements

September 30, 2008 and 2007

(Unaudited)

 

1. Organization and Business

Phoenix Investment Partners, Ltd. (“PXP” or the “Company”) is an indirect wholly owned subsidiary of The Phoenix Companies, Inc. (“PNX”). On February 7, 2008, PNX announced its intention to spin-off PXP by way of a dividend of PXP’s stock to PNX’s shareholders. The spin-off is expected to be completed in the fourth quarter of 2008. In connection with the spin-off, PXP changed its name to Virtus Investment Partners, Inc.

The Company and its wholly owned subsidiaries provide a variety of investment management and related services to a broad base of institutional, corporate, and individual clients throughout the U.S. The Company’s businesses include investment advisory and broker-dealer operations. Retail investment management services including administrative services are provided to individuals through products consisting of open-end mutual funds, closed-end funds, and separately managed accounts. Separately managed accounts are offered to high-net-worth individuals and include intermediary programs, sponsored and distributed by non-affiliated broker-dealers, and individual direct managed account investment services that are sold and administered by the Company. Institutional investment management services are provided primarily to corporate entities, multi-employer retirement funds and foundations, as well as endowment, insurance and other special purpose funds. In addition, investment management services are provided on structured finance products, including collateralized debt obligations backed by portfolios of assets.

Principles of Consolidation

The accompanying unaudited Consolidated Financial Statements should be read in conjunction with the audited financial statements of the Company as of and for the year ended December 31, 2007. The Consolidated Financial Statements include the accounts of the Company and its subsidiaries. Material intercompany accounts and transactions have been eliminated.

The interim financial data as of September 30, 2008 and for the nine months ended September 30, 2008 and September 30, 2007 is unaudited; however, in the opinion of the Company, the interim data includes all adjustments, consisting only of normal recurring adjustments, necessary for a fair statement of the results for the interim periods.

Fair Value Measurements

In September 2006, the Financial Accounting Standards Board, or FASB, issued Statement of Financial Accounting Standards (“SFAS”) No. 157, Fair Value Measurements , which defines “fair value,” establishes a framework for measuring fair value and expands disclosures about fair value measurements. FASB Staff Position FAS 157-2 delayed application of SFAS 157 for non-financial assets and non-financial liabilities, except for those that are recognized or disclosed at fair value in the financial statements on a recurring basis (at least annually) until years beginning after November 15, 2008. The Company adopted SFAS 157 as of January 1, 2008 for those assets and liabilities that were not deferred with no material impact on its financial position or results of operations. The Company deferred fair value measurements for its goodwill and intangible assets. Goodwill and intangible assets have carrying amounts of $122.7 million and $86.1 million, respectively, as of September 30, 2008.

Separation Costs

All expenses incurred by the Company in connection with the proposed spin-off from PNX are being recorded by PNX.

 

F-34


Table of Contents
2. Goodwill and Intangible Assets

Goodwill and intangible assets at September 30, 2008 and December 31, 2007 were as follows:

 

     September 30, 2008     December 31, 2007  
($ in thousands)             

Definite-lived intangible assets:

    

Investment contracts

   $ 300,259     $ 305,492  

Accumulated amortization

     (250,194 )     (170,607 )
                

Definite-lived intangible assets, net

     50,065       134,885  
                

Indefinite-lived intangible assets

     36,054       73,291  
                

Total intangible assets, net

   $ 86,119     $ 208,176  
                

Goodwill

   $ 122,663     $ 454,369  
                

Activity in Intangible Assets and Goodwill

 

     Nine Months Ended September 30,  
         2008             2007      
($ in thousands)             

Intangible assets

    

Purchases

   $ 84.8     $ 454  

Amortization

     (22,413 )     (22,608 )

Impairment

     (100,492 )     —    
                

Change in intangible assets

     (122,057 )     (22,154 )

Balance, beginning of period

     208,176       237,746  
                

Balance, end of period

   $ 86,119     $ 215,592  
                

Goodwill

    

Impairment

   $ (331,706 )   $ —    
                

Change in goodwill

     (331,706 )     —    

Balance, beginning of period

     454,369       454,369  
                

Balance, end of period

   $ 122,663     $ 454,369  
                

During the third quarter of 2008, the Company recorded impairments of $421.7 million on intangible assets and goodwill. The Company determined that a triggering event requiring an impairment assessment had occurred as a result of significant declines in the equity markets, and the decline in valuations of financial companies experienced in 2008, particularly in the third quarter. The Company performed the impairment analysis using the methodology applied in prior annual and interim testing. The Company used a discounted cash flow model to calculate the fair value of definite- and indefinite-lived intangible assets. To test for impairment of goodwill, the Company obtained and weighted several estimates of the fair value of the reporting unit, including valuations from third parties, as well as using a sum of a multiple of revenue plus the fair value of the unit’s tangible net assets. The primary drivers of the impairment were a reduction in assets under management, due to markets being at multi-year lows, and valuation multiples for asset managers also being multi-year lows. During the first quarter of 2008, the Company recorded a $10.5 million pre-tax impairment on identified intangible assets related to institutional investment management contracts. This impairment resulted from the termination of certain contracts and related factors. As a result of impairment charges and other losses, the Company has net deferred tax assets as of September 30, 2008 of $86.6 million. The Company expects that the deferred tax assets will have a full valuation allowance recorded against them post spin-off from PNX.

 

F-35


Table of Contents
3. Related Parties

The Company has certain agreements with related parties whereby the Company and/or the related party provides services on behalf of the other party. Any intercompany balances outstanding associated with these transactions are reviewed monthly and are settled to the extent cash is available. During the nine months ended September 30, 2008 and 2007, the Company earned approximately $109.6 million and $120.3 million, respectively, in revenues from managing related party assets.

Receivables from affiliates, including investment management fees, fund administration fees and other receivables at September 30, 2008 and December 31, 2007 were $18 million and $22 million, respectively.

PNX provides certain administrative services at the request of the Company and certain of the Company’s active and retired employees participate in PNX multi-employer retirement and benefit plans. Expenses recorded by the Company for significant services provided by PNX for the nine months ended September 30, 2008 and 2007 were approximately $16.2 million and $18.3 million, respectively.

Payables to related parties, principally PNX, for operating expenses as of September 30, 2008 and December 31, 2007 were $9 million and $11 million, respectively.

 

4. Contingent Liabilities

On May 20, 2008, SCM Advisors, LLC (“SCM”), a wholly-owned subsidiary of the Company, was named a respondent in an arbitration commenced with the American Arbitration Association by former institutional clients, Forethought Investment Management, Inc., Forethought Life Insurance Company, Forethought Life Assurance Company and Forethought Financial Group, Inc., for alleged losses sustained while SCM was providing investment advisory services. The investment losses are primarily related to investments in collateralized debt obligations and are alleged to exceed $38 million. The Company believes that the claims lack merit and SCM intends to defend this matter vigorously.

In September 2008, a security held in the Phoenix Insight Money Market Fund (the “Fund”), for which the Company is the advisor and Harris Investment Management is the sub-advisor, had decreased in value and had the potential to cause the Fund’s net asset value per share to dip below 99.5 cents. In connection with actions taken to maintain the Fund’s net asset value, the Company agreed to partially address the ultimate loss, if any, on the security by restructuring existing money market agreements with Harris Bankcorp, Inc. (“Harris Bankcorp”), a U.S. subsidiary of Bank of Montreal, or by an alternative means subject to a maximum of $15 million. The contingency was extinguished in October, 2008 concurrent with the agreement with Harris Bankcorp for it to take a 23% equity position in the Company in connection with the planned spin-off.

The 23% equity position taken by Harris Bankcorp is to be in the form of Series A Preferred Stock and Series B Preferred Stock. In accordance with the agreement, at any time after the three year anniversary of the issuance of the preferred stock, Harris Bankcorp will have the right to require the Company to repurchase the Series A Preferred Stock for a purchase price ( the “put price”) equal to the liquidation preference of such shares of preferred stock. The put price may be payable by the Company in immediately available funds or, at the election of the Company, may be paid in the form of two senior promissory notes each having an aggregate principal amount equal to one-half of the put price of the Company, paying interest at LIBOR plus three percent per annum, the first maturing on the one year anniversary of the put closing date and the second maturing on the two year anniversary of the put closing date. According to the agreement, the put right will expire if at the time that the 23% equity position sale is consummated or at anytime thereafter the average closing price for the common stock of the Company during any five consecutive trading day period exceeds the conversion price per share of the preferred stock, as adjusted from time to time.

 

F-36


Table of Contents
5. Subsequent Event

On October 30, 2008, the Company and its parent companies, PNX and Phoenix Investment Management Company, entered into an Investment and Contribution Agreement (the “Agreement”) with Harris Bankcorp pursuant to which Harris Bankcorp would acquire $45.0 million in convertible preferred stock of the Company, representing a 23% equity position in the Company and its direct and wholly owned subsidiary for an aggregate purchase price of $35 million. The agreement calls for a two-step closing process, the first step of which was completed effective October 31, 2008. The second step of the transaction, which is subject to certain regulatory and other customary conditions, is expected to be completed in connection with the spin-off.

 

F-37